ERPNext Foundation",
+ "brand_html": "
erpnext.accounts.general_ledger
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Class StockAccountInvalidTransaction
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.general_ledger.check_if_in_list + (gle, gl_map) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.general_ledger.delete_gl_entries + (gl_entries=None, voucher_type=None, voucher_no=None, adv_adj=False, update_outstanding=Yes) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.general_ledger.make_entry + (args, adv_adj, update_outstanding, from_repost=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.general_ledger.make_gl_entries + (gl_map, cancel=False, adv_adj=False, merge_entries=True, update_outstanding=Yes, from_repost=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.general_ledger.make_round_off_gle + (gl_map, debit_credit_diff) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.general_ledger.merge_similar_entries + (gl_map) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.general_ledger.process_gl_map + (gl_map, merge_entries=True) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.general_ledger.round_off_debit_credit + (gl_map) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.general_ledger.save_entries + (gl_map, adv_adj, update_outstanding, from_repost=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.general_ledger.validate_account_for_perpetual_inventory + (gl_map) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/erpnext.accounts.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/erpnext.accounts.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..176d5490 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/erpnext.accounts.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +
erpnext.accounts
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/erpnext.accounts.party.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/erpnext.accounts.party.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e02d2284
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/erpnext.accounts.party.html
@@ -0,0 +1,382 @@
+
+erpnext.accounts.party
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Class DuplicatePartyAccountError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party._get_party_details + (party=None, account=None, party_type=Customer, company=None, posting_date=None, price_list=None, currency=None, doctype=None, ignore_permissions=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.get_credit_days + (party_type, party, company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.get_dashboard_info + (party_type, party) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.get_default_price_list + (party) +
+Return default price list for party (Document object)
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.party.get_due_date
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.get_due_date + (posting_date, party_type, party, company) +
+Set Due Date = Posting Date + Credit Days
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.party.get_party_account
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.get_party_account + (party_type, party, company) +
+Returns the account for the given party.
+ Will first search in party (Customer / Supplier) record, if not found,
+ will search in group (Customer Group / Supplier Type),
+ finally will return default.
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.get_party_account_currency + (party_type, party, company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.party.get_party_details
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.get_party_details + (party=None, account=None, party_type=Customer, company=None, posting_date=None, price_list=None, currency=None, doctype=None, ignore_permissions=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.get_party_gle_account + (party_type, party, company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.get_party_gle_currency + (party_type, party, company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.get_timeline_data + (doctype, name) +
+returns timeline data for the past one year
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.set_account_and_due_date + (party, account, party_type, company, posting_date, doctype) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.set_address_details + (out, party, party_type, doctype=None, company=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.set_contact_details + (out, party, party_type) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.set_other_values + (out, party, party_type) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.set_price_list + (out, party, party_type, given_price_list) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.party.set_taxes
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.set_taxes + (party, party_type, posting_date, company, customer_group=None, supplier_type=None, billing_address=None, shipping_address=None, use_for_shopping_cart=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.validate_due_date + (posting_date, due_date, party_type, party, company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.validate_party_accounts + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.validate_party_frozen_disabled + (party_type, party_name) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.party.validate_party_gle_currency + (party_type, party, company, party_account_currency=None) +
+Validate party account currency with existing GL Entry's currency
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/erpnext.accounts.utils.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/erpnext.accounts.utils.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2e278c46 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/erpnext.accounts.utils.html @@ -0,0 +1,454 @@ + +
erpnext.accounts.utils
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Class FiscalYearError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.utils.add_ac
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.add_ac + (args=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.utils.add_cc
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.add_cc + (args=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.check_if_advance_entry_modified + (args) +
+ check if there is already a voucher reference
+ check if amount is same
+ check if jv is submitted
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.create_payment_gateway_account + (gateway) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.fix_total_debit_credit + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.get_account_name + (account_type=None, root_type=None, is_group=None, account_currency=None, company=None) +
+return account based on matching conditions
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.utils.get_balance_on
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.get_balance_on + (account=None, date=None, party_type=None, party=None, company=None, in_account_currency=True) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.utils.get_children
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.get_children + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.utils.get_companies
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.get_companies + () +
+get a list of companies based on permission
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.utils.get_company_default
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.get_company_default + (company, fieldname) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.get_count_on + (account, fieldname, date) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.get_currency_precision + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.utils.get_fiscal_year
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.get_fiscal_year + (date=None, fiscal_year=None, label=Date, verbose=1, company=None, as_dict=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.get_fiscal_years + (transaction_date=None, fiscal_year=None, label=Date, verbose=1, company=None, as_dict=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.get_outstanding_invoices + (party_type, party, account, condition=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.get_stock_and_account_difference + (account_list=None, posting_date=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.get_stock_rbnb_difference + (posting_date, company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.reconcile_against_document + (args) +
+ Cancel JV, Update aginst document, split if required and resubmit jv
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.remove_ref_doc_link_from_jv + (ref_type, ref_no) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.remove_ref_doc_link_from_pe + (ref_type, ref_no) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.unlink_ref_doc_from_payment_entries + (ref_doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.update_reference_in_journal_entry + (d, jv_obj) +
+ Updates against document, if partial amount splits into rows
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.update_reference_in_payment_entry + (d, payment_entry) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.validate_allocated_amount + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.utils.validate_fiscal_year + (date, fiscal_year, company, label=Date, doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2167c3f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
accounts
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..33f157c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +erpnext.accounts.general_ledger +erpnext.accounts +erpnext.accounts.party +erpnext.accounts.utils \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/cheque_printing_format/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/cheque_printing_format/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/cheque_printing_format/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/cheque_printing_format/erpnext.accounts.print_format.cheque_printing_format.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/cheque_printing_format/erpnext.accounts.print_format.cheque_printing_format.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d4396843 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/cheque_printing_format/erpnext.accounts.print_format.cheque_printing_format.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.accounts.print_format.cheque_printing_format
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/cheque_printing_format/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/cheque_printing_format/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..340d4bf3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/cheque_printing_format/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+cheque_printing_format
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/cheque_printing_format/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/cheque_printing_format/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4298944b --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/cheque_printing_format/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.accounts.print_format.cheque_printing_format \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/credit_note/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/credit_note/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/credit_note/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/credit_note/erpnext.accounts.print_format.credit_note.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/credit_note/erpnext.accounts.print_format.credit_note.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4b115c4d --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/credit_note/erpnext.accounts.print_format.credit_note.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.accounts.print_format.credit_note
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/credit_note/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/credit_note/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f95c377c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/credit_note/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+credit_note
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/credit_note/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/credit_note/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f98781e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/credit_note/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.accounts.print_format.credit_note \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/erpnext.accounts.print_format.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/erpnext.accounts.print_format.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2d558110 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/erpnext.accounts.print_format.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.accounts.print_format
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c38a02fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+print_format
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..959c9535 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.accounts.print_format \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/payment_receipt_voucher/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/payment_receipt_voucher/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/payment_receipt_voucher/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/payment_receipt_voucher/erpnext.accounts.print_format.payment_receipt_voucher.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/payment_receipt_voucher/erpnext.accounts.print_format.payment_receipt_voucher.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..28f6215c --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/payment_receipt_voucher/erpnext.accounts.print_format.payment_receipt_voucher.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.accounts.print_format.payment_receipt_voucher
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/payment_receipt_voucher/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/payment_receipt_voucher/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a67aff01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/payment_receipt_voucher/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+payment_receipt_voucher
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/payment_receipt_voucher/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/payment_receipt_voucher/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e90d4d9c --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/payment_receipt_voucher/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.accounts.print_format.payment_receipt_voucher \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/point_of_sale/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/point_of_sale/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/point_of_sale/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/point_of_sale/erpnext.accounts.print_format.point_of_sale.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/point_of_sale/erpnext.accounts.print_format.point_of_sale.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ba495327 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/point_of_sale/erpnext.accounts.print_format.point_of_sale.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.accounts.print_format.point_of_sale
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/point_of_sale/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/point_of_sale/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3b2a6025
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/point_of_sale/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+point_of_sale
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/point_of_sale/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/point_of_sale/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..30778137 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/point_of_sale/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.accounts.print_format.point_of_sale \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/pos_invoice/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/pos_invoice/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/pos_invoice/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/pos_invoice/erpnext.accounts.print_format.pos_invoice.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/pos_invoice/erpnext.accounts.print_format.pos_invoice.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..900ac887 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/pos_invoice/erpnext.accounts.print_format.pos_invoice.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.accounts.print_format.pos_invoice
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/pos_invoice/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/pos_invoice/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4c6e8098
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/pos_invoice/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+pos_invoice
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/pos_invoice/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/pos_invoice/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..533ff200 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/accounts/print_format/pos_invoice/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.accounts.print_format.pos_invoice \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/erpnext.buying.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/erpnext.buying.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..66223a9c --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/erpnext.buying.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.buying
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/erpnext.buying.utils.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/erpnext.buying.utils.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..74fba5cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/erpnext.buying.utils.html
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+
+erpnext.buying.utils
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.buying.utils.check_for_closed_status + (doctype, docname) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.buying.utils.get_linked_material_requests
+
+ + + erpnext.buying.utils.get_linked_material_requests + (items) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.buying.utils.update_last_purchase_rate + (doc, is_submit) +
+updates lastpurchaserate in item table for each item
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.buying.utils.validate_for_items + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..78c39ccb --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
buying
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4a5dc1ac --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +erpnext.buying +erpnext.buying.utils \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/drop_shipping_format/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/drop_shipping_format/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/drop_shipping_format/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/drop_shipping_format/erpnext.buying.print_format.drop_shipping_format.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/drop_shipping_format/erpnext.buying.print_format.drop_shipping_format.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8cc2c521 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/drop_shipping_format/erpnext.buying.print_format.drop_shipping_format.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.buying.print_format.drop_shipping_format
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/drop_shipping_format/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/drop_shipping_format/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8ccb282e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/drop_shipping_format/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+drop_shipping_format
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/drop_shipping_format/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/drop_shipping_format/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..590a2c96 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/drop_shipping_format/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.buying.print_format.drop_shipping_format \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/erpnext.buying.print_format.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/erpnext.buying.print_format.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5e6eca83 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/erpnext.buying.print_format.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.buying.print_format
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c38a02fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+print_format
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..161fb0c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/buying/print_format/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.buying.print_format \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/commands/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/commands/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/commands/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/commands/erpnext.commands.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/commands/erpnext.commands.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fb7497b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/commands/erpnext.commands.html @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + +erpnext.commands
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.commands.call_command + (cmd, context) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/commands/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/commands/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2a631928 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/commands/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
commands
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/commands/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/commands/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cbe26872 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/commands/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.commands \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.accounts.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.accounts.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..cb70fa73 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.accounts.html @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + +erpnext.config.accounts
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.config.accounts.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.buying.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.buying.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5155a9d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.buying.html @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + +
erpnext.config.buying
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.config.buying.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.crm.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.crm.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d9f9406c --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.crm.html @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + +
erpnext.config.crm
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.config.crm.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.desktop.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.desktop.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d8c5daca --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.desktop.html @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + +
erpnext.config.desktop
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.config.desktop.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.docs.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.docs.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9c832953 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.docs.html @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + +
erpnext.config.docs
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.config.docs.get_context + (context) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.hr.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.hr.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..478037c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.hr.html @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + +
erpnext.config.hr
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.config.hr.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..27f30eda --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +
erpnext.config
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.learn.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.learn.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..91173186
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.learn.html
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+
+erpnext.config.learn
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.config.learn.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.maintenance.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.maintenance.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..acb2819c --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.maintenance.html @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + +
erpnext.config.maintenance
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.config.maintenance.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.manufacturing.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.manufacturing.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..103f6ad4 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.manufacturing.html @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + +
erpnext.config.manufacturing
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.config.manufacturing.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.projects.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.projects.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..14268230 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.projects.html @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + +
erpnext.config.projects
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.config.projects.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.schools.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.schools.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..94b1c84b --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.schools.html @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + +
erpnext.config.schools
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.config.schools.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.selling.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.selling.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3486e913 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.selling.html @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + +
erpnext.config.selling
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.config.selling.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.setup.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.setup.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..46be7916 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.setup.html @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + +
erpnext.config.setup
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.config.setup.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.stock.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.stock.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ff1191a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.stock.html @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + +
erpnext.config.stock
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.config.stock.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.support.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.support.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5b017143 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.support.html @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + +
erpnext.config.support
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.config.support.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.website.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.website.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..97d27065 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/erpnext.config.website.html @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + +
erpnext.config.website
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.config.website.get_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1c8e1359 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
config
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0f6a6c62 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/config/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +erpnext.config.accounts +erpnext.config.buying +erpnext.config.crm +erpnext.config.desktop +erpnext.config.docs +erpnext.config.hr +erpnext.config +erpnext.config.learn +erpnext.config.maintenance +erpnext.config.manufacturing +erpnext.config.projects +erpnext.config.schools +erpnext.config.selling +erpnext.config.setup +erpnext.config.stock +erpnext.config.support +erpnext.config.website \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8df70a82 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.html @@ -0,0 +1,667 @@ + +erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Class AccountsController
+ +Inherits from erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.TransactionBase + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + append_taxes_from_master + (self, tax_master_doctype=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + before_print + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_taxes_and_totals + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + clear_unallocated_advances + (self, childtype, parentfield) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + delink_advance_entries + (self, linked_doc_name) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_advance_entries + (self, include_unallocated=True) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_company_default + (self, fieldname) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_gl_dict + (self, args, account_currency=None) +
+this method populates the common properties of a gl entry record
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_party + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_stock_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + group_similar_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update_after_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_advances + (self) +
+Returns list of advances against Account, Party, Reference
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_missing_item_details + (self, for_validate=False) +
+set missing item values
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_missing_values + (self, for_validate=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_other_charges + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_price_list_currency + (self, buying_or_selling) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_taxes + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_total_advance_paid + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_against_document_in_jv + (self) +
+ Links invoice and advance voucher:
+ 1. cancel advance voucher
+ 2. split into multiple rows if partially adjusted, assign against voucher
+ 3. submit advance voucher
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_account_currency + (self, account, account_currency=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_advance_entries + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_currency + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_date_with_fiscal_year + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_due_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_enabled_taxes_and_charges + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_fixed_asset + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_multiple_billing + (self, ref_dt, item_ref_dn, based_on, parentfield) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_paid_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_party + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.get_advance_journal_entries + (party_type, party, party_account, amount_field, order_doctype, order_list, include_unallocated=True) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.get_advance_payment_entries + (party_type, party, party_account, order_doctype, order_list=None, include_unallocated=True, against_all_orders=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.get_default_taxes_and_charges
+
+ + + erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.get_default_taxes_and_charges + (master_doctype) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.get_tax_rate
+
+ + + erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.get_tax_rate + (account_head) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.get_taxes_and_charges
+
+ + + erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.get_taxes_and_charges + (master_doctype, master_name) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.set_balance_in_account_currency + (gl_dict, account_currency=None, conversion_rate=None, company_currency=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.update_invoice_status + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.validate_conversion_rate + (currency, conversion_rate, conversion_rate_label, company) +
+common validation for currency and price list currency
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.validate_inclusive_tax + (tax, doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.validate_taxes_and_charges + (tax) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.buying_controller.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.buying_controller.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8e930257 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.buying_controller.html @@ -0,0 +1,347 @@ + +
erpnext.controllers.buying_controller
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Class BuyingController
+ +Inherits from erpnext.controllers.stock_controller.StockController + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + __setup__ + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + cleanup_raw_materials_supplied + (self, parent_items, raw_material_table) +
+Remove all those child items which are no longer present in main item table
++ + + + + +
+ + + create_raw_materials_supplied + (self, raw_material_table) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_items_from_bom + (self, item_code, bom) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_sl_entries_for_supplier_warehouse + (self, sl_entries) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_landed_cost_voucher_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_missing_values + (self, for_validate=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_qty_as_per_stock_uom + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_supplier_from_item_default + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_total_in_words + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_ordered_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_raw_materials_supplied + (self, item, raw_material_table) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_stock_ledger + (self, allow_negative_stock=False, via_landed_cost_voucher=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_valuation_rate + (self, parentfield) +
+ item_tax_amount is the total tax amount applied on that item
+ stored for valuation
+
+ TODO: rename item_tax_amount to valuation_tax_amount
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_accepted_rejected_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_for_subcontracting + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_negative_quantity + (self, item_row, field_list) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_purchase_return + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_rejected_warehouse + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_stock_or_nonstock_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f10a7489 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +
erpnext.controllers
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.item_variant.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.item_variant.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0995c25d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.item_variant.html
@@ -0,0 +1,238 @@
+
+erpnext.controllers.item_variant
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Class InvalidItemAttributeValueError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class ItemTemplateCannotHaveStock
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class ItemVariantExistsError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.item_variant.copy_attributes_to_variant + (item, variant) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.controllers.item_variant.create_variant
+
+ + + erpnext.controllers.item_variant.create_variant + (item, args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.item_variant.find_variant + (template, args, variant_item_code=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.item_variant.get_attribute_values + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.controllers.item_variant.get_variant
+
+ + + erpnext.controllers.item_variant.get_variant + (template, args=None, variant=None, manufacturer=None, manufacturer_part_no=None) +
+Validates Attributes and their Values, then looks for an exactly + matching Item Variant
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
item- Template Item
+args- A dictionary with "Attribute" as key and "Attribute Value" as value
+
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.item_variant.make_variant_based_on_manufacturer + (template, manufacturer, manufacturer_part_no) +
+Make and return a new variant based on manufacturer and + manufacturer part no
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.item_variant.make_variant_item_code + (template_item_code, template_item_name, variant) +
+Uses template's item code and abbreviations to make variant's item code
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.item_variant.validate_is_incremental + (numeric_attribute, attribute, value, item) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.item_variant.validate_item_attribute_value + (attributes_list, attribute, attribute_value, item) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.item_variant.validate_item_variant_attributes + (item, args=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.print_settings.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.print_settings.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d3dcd085 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.print_settings.html @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + +
erpnext.controllers.print_settings
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.controllers.print_settings.format_columns + (display_columns, compact_fields) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.print_settings.print_settings_for_item_table + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.queries.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.queries.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..79fba759 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.queries.html @@ -0,0 +1,266 @@ + +
erpnext.controllers.queries
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.controllers.queries.bom + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.customer_query + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.employee_query + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.get_account_list + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.get_batch_no + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.get_delivery_notes_to_be_billed + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters, as_dict) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.get_doctype_wise_filters + (filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.controllers.queries.get_expense_account
+
+ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.get_expense_account + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.controllers.queries.get_income_account
+
+ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.get_income_account + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.get_project_name + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.item_query + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters, as_dict=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.lead_query + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.supplier_query + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.tax_account_query + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.controllers.queries.warehouse_query
+
+ + + erpnext.controllers.queries.warehouse_query + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2a9f1321 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.html @@ -0,0 +1,214 @@ + +
erpnext.controllers.recurring_document
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.assign_task_to_owner + (doc, doctype, msg, users) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.convert_to_recurring + (doc, posting_date) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.create_recurring_documents + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.get_next_date + (dt, mcount, day=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.make_new_document + (reference_doc, date_field, posting_date) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.manage_recurring_documents + (doctype, next_date=None, commit=True) +
+ Create recurring documents on specific date by copying the original one
+ and notify the concerned people
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.notify_errors + (doc, doctype, party, owner) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.send_notification + (new_rv) +
+Notify concerned persons about recurring document generation
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.set_next_date + (doc, posting_date) +
+Set next date on which recurring document will be created
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.validate_notification_email_id + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.validate_recurring_document + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.recurring_document.validate_recurring_next_date + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.sales_and_purchase_return.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.sales_and_purchase_return.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4bdf4157 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.sales_and_purchase_return.html @@ -0,0 +1,147 @@ + +
erpnext.controllers.sales_and_purchase_return
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Class StockOverReturnError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.sales_and_purchase_return.get_already_returned_items + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.sales_and_purchase_return.get_ref_item_dict + (valid_items, ref_item_row) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.sales_and_purchase_return.make_return_doc + (doctype, source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.sales_and_purchase_return.validate_quantity + (doc, args, ref, valid_items, already_returned_items) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.sales_and_purchase_return.validate_return + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.sales_and_purchase_return.validate_return_against + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.sales_and_purchase_return.validate_returned_items + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.selling_controller.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.selling_controller.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1ed1090b --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.selling_controller.html @@ -0,0 +1,373 @@ + +
erpnext.controllers.selling_controller
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Class SellingController
+ +Inherits from erpnext.controllers.stock_controller.StockController + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + __setup__ + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + apply_shipping_rule + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_commission + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_contribution + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_close_sales_order + (self, ref_fieldname) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_already_delivered_qty + (self, current_docname, so, so_detail) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_item_list + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_so_qty_and_warehouse + (self, so_detail) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + has_product_bundle + (self, item_code) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + remove_shipping_charge + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_missing_lead_customer_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_missing_values + (self, for_validate=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_price_list_and_item_details + (self, for_validate=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_qty_as_per_stock_uom + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_total_in_words + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_reserved_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_stock_ledger + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_max_discount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_order_type + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_selling_price + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.selling_controller.check_active_sales_items + (obj) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.status_updater.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.status_updater.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4e48ee1e --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.status_updater.html @@ -0,0 +1,247 @@ + +
erpnext.controllers.status_updater
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Class StatusUpdater
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
Updates the status of the calling records
+ Delivery Note: Update Delivered Qty, Update Percent and Validate over delivery
+ Sales Invoice: Update Billed Amt, Update Percent and Validate over billing
+ Installation Note: Update Installed Qty, Update Percent Qty and Validate over installation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + _update_children + (self, args, update_modified) +
+Update quantities or amount in child table
++ + + + + +
+ + + _update_modified + (self, args, update_modified) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + _update_percent_field + (self, args, update_modified=True) +
+Update percent field in parent transaction
++ + + + + +
+ + + _update_percent_field_in_targets + (self, args, update_modified=True) +
+Update percent field in parent transaction
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_overflow_with_tolerance + (self, item, args) +
+ Checks if there is overflow condering a relaxation tolerance
++ + + + + +
+ + + limits_crossed_error + (self, args, item) +
+Raise exception for limits crossed
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_status + (self, update=False, status=None, update_modified=True) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_billing_status + (self, zero_amount_refdoc, ref_dt, ref_fieldname) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_billing_status_for_zero_amount_refdoc + (self, ref_dt) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_prevdoc_status + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_qty + (self, update_modified=True) +
+Updates qty or amount at row level
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
update_modified- If true, updatesmodifiedandmodified_byfor target parent doc
+
+ + + + + +
+ + + validate_qty + (self) +
+Validates qty at row level
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.status_updater.get_tolerance_for + (item_code, item_tolerance={}, global_tolerance=None) +
+ Returns the tolerance for the item, if not set, returns global tolerance
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.status_updater.validate_status + (status, options) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.stock_controller.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.stock_controller.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b5be9b8d --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.stock_controller.html @@ -0,0 +1,352 @@ + +
erpnext.controllers.stock_controller
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Class StockController
+ +Inherits from erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.AccountsController + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + check_expense_account + (self, item) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_gl_entries + (self, warehouse_account=None, default_expense_account=None, default_cost_center=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_incoming_rate_for_sales_return + (self, item_code, against_document) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_items_and_warehouses + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_serialized_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_sl_entries + (self, d, args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_stock_ledger_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_voucher_details + (self, default_expense_account, default_cost_center, sle_map) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_adjustment_entry + (self, expected_gle, voucher_obj) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_batches + (self, warehouse_field) +
+Create batches if required. Called before submit
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_gl_entries + (self, gl_entries=None, repost_future_gle=True, from_repost=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_gl_entries_on_cancel + (self, repost_future_gle=True) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_sl_entries + (self, sl_entries, is_amended=None, allow_negative_stock=False, via_landed_cost_voucher=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_billing_percentage + (self, update_modified=True) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_stock_ledger_entries + (self, sle) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_inspection + (self) +
+Checks if quality inspection is set for Items that require inspection. + On submit, throw an exception
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_warehouse + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.stock_controller.compare_existing_and_expected_gle + (existing_gle, expected_gle) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.stock_controller.get_future_stock_vouchers + (posting_date, posting_time, for_warehouses=None, for_items=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.stock_controller.get_voucherwise_gl_entries + (future_stock_vouchers, posting_date) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.stock_controller.update_gl_entries_after + (posting_date, posting_time, for_warehouses=None, for_items=None, warehouse_account=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.taxes_and_totals.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.taxes_and_totals.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f16067ed --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.taxes_and_totals.html @@ -0,0 +1,505 @@ + +
erpnext.controllers.taxes_and_totals
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Class calculate_taxes_and_totals
+ +Inherits from __builtin__.object + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + __init__ + (self, doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + _calculate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + _cleanup + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + _get_tax_rate + (self, tax, item_tax_map) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + _load_item_tax_rate + (self, item_tax_rate) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + _set_in_company_currency + (self, doc, fields) +
+set values in base currency
++ + + + + +
+ + + adjust_discount_amount_loss + (self, tax) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + apply_discount_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_change_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_item_values + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_margin + (self, item) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_net_total + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_outstanding_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_paid_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_taxes + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_total_advance + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_totals + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_write_off_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + determine_exclusive_rate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_current_tax_amount + (self, item, tax, item_tax_map) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_current_tax_fraction + (self, tax, item_tax_map) +
+ Get tax fraction for calculating tax exclusive amount
+ from tax inclusive amount
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_total_for_discount_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + initialize_taxes + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + manipulate_grand_total_for_inclusive_tax + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + round_off_totals + (self, tax) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_discount_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_item_wise_tax + (self, item, tax, tax_rate, current_tax_amount) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_item_wise_tax_breakup + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_conversion_rate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.taxes_and_totals.get_itemised_tax + (taxes) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.taxes_and_totals.get_itemised_tax_breakup_html + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.taxes_and_totals.get_itemised_taxable_amount + (items) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.trends.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.trends.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3ff9707f --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.trends.html @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + +
erpnext.controllers.trends
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.controllers.trends.based_wise_columns_query + (based_on, trans) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.trends.get_columns + (filters, trans) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.trends.get_data + (filters, conditions) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.trends.get_mon + (dt) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.controllers.trends.get_period_date_ranges
+
+ + + erpnext.controllers.trends.get_period_date_ranges + (period, fiscal_year=None, year_start_date=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.trends.get_period_month_ranges + (period, fiscal_year) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.trends.get_period_wise_columns + (bet_dates, period, pwc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.trends.get_period_wise_query + (bet_dates, trans_date, query_details) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.trends.group_wise_column + (group_by) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.trends.period_wise_columns_query + (filters, trans) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.trends.validate_filters + (filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.website_list_for_contact.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.website_list_for_contact.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d8e529bc --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/erpnext.controllers.website_list_for_contact.html @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + +
erpnext.controllers.website_list_for_contact
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.controllers.website_list_for_contact.get_customers_suppliers + (doctype, user) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.website_list_for_contact.get_list_context + (context=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.website_list_for_contact.get_party_details + (customers, suppliers) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.website_list_for_contact.get_transaction_list + (doctype, txt=None, filters=None, limit_start=0, limit_page_length=20, order_by=modified) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.website_list_for_contact.has_website_permission + (doc, ptype, user, verbose=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.website_list_for_contact.post_process + (doctype, data) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.controllers.website_list_for_contact.rfq_transaction_list + (parties_doctype, doctype, parties, limit_start, limit_page_length) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fe165d6d --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
controllers
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3965811e --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/controllers/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller +erpnext.controllers.buying_controller +erpnext.controllers +erpnext.controllers.item_variant +erpnext.controllers.print_settings +erpnext.controllers.queries +erpnext.controllers.recurring_document +erpnext.controllers.sales_and_purchase_return +erpnext.controllers.selling_controller +erpnext.controllers.status_updater +erpnext.controllers.stock_controller +erpnext.controllers.taxes_and_totals +erpnext.controllers.trends +erpnext.controllers.website_list_for_contact \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/crm/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/crm/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/crm/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/crm/erpnext.crm.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/crm/erpnext.crm.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0e28459c --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/crm/erpnext.crm.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.crm
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/crm/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/crm/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..dc717bd1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/crm/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+crm
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/crm/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/crm/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5c972861 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/crm/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.crm \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/erpnext.demo.demo.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/erpnext.demo.demo.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dc0df2f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/erpnext.demo.demo.html @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + +erpnext.demo.demo
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.demo.demo.make + (domain=Manufacturing, days=100) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.demo.simulate + (domain=Manufacturing, days=100) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/erpnext.demo.domains.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/erpnext.demo.domains.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..36d052be --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/erpnext.demo.domains.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +
erpnext.demo.domains
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/erpnext.demo.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/erpnext.demo.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b9e41dbf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/erpnext.demo.html
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+
+erpnext.demo
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3b78465a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+demo
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5523f380 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +erpnext.demo.demo +erpnext.demo.domains +erpnext.demo \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/setup/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/setup/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/setup/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/setup/erpnext.demo.setup.education.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/setup/erpnext.demo.setup.education.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..81e0fced --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/setup/erpnext.demo.setup.education.html @@ -0,0 +1,180 @@ + +erpnext.demo.setup.education
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.demo.setup.education.get_json_path + (doctype) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.education.make_assessment_groups + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.education.make_fees_category + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.education.make_fees_structure + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.education.make_masters + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.education.make_student_applicants + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.education.make_student_group + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.education.setup_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.education.setup_item + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.education.weighted_choice + (weights) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/setup/erpnext.demo.setup.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/setup/erpnext.demo.setup.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7c70578a --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/setup/erpnext.demo.setup.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +
erpnext.demo.setup
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/setup/erpnext.demo.setup.manufacture.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/setup/erpnext.demo.setup.manufacture.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..646ca4f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/setup/erpnext.demo.setup.manufacture.html
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+
+erpnext.demo.setup.manufacture
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.demo.setup.manufacture.setup_asset + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.manufacture.setup_data + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.manufacture.setup_item + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.manufacture.setup_item_price + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.manufacture.setup_product_bundle + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.manufacture.setup_workstation + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.manufacture.show_item_groups_in_website + () +
+set showinwebsite=1 for Item Groups
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/setup/erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/setup/erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..12d97964 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/setup/erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data.html @@ -0,0 +1,340 @@ + +
erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data.complete_setup + (domain=Manufacturing) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data.import_json + (doctype, submit=False, values=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data.setup + (domain) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data.setup_account + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data.setup_account_to_expense_type + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data.setup_budget + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data.setup_currency_exchange + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data.setup_customer + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data.setup_demo_page + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data.setup_employee + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data.setup_fiscal_year + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data.setup_holiday_list + () +
+Setup Holiday List for the current year
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data.setup_leave_allocation + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data.setup_mode_of_payment + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data.setup_pos_profile + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data.setup_salary_structure + (employees, salary_slip_based_on_timesheet=0) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data.setup_supplier + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data.setup_user + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data.setup_user_roles + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data.setup_warehouse + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/setup/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/setup/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e7ca9ed7 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/setup/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
setup
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/setup/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9b813abf --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/setup/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +erpnext.demo.setup.education +erpnext.demo.setup +erpnext.demo.setup.manufacture +erpnext.demo.setup.setup_data \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.accounts.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.accounts.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8d50e907 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.accounts.html @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + +erpnext.demo.user.accounts
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.demo.user.accounts.make_payment_entries + (ref_doctype, report) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.accounts.make_payment_entries_for_pos_invoice + (si) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.accounts.make_pos_invoice + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.accounts.work + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.fixed_asset.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.fixed_asset.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..75208c71 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.fixed_asset.html @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + +
erpnext.demo.user.fixed_asset
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.demo.user.fixed_asset.get_random_asset + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.fixed_asset.make_asset_purchase_entry + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.fixed_asset.sell_an_asset + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.fixed_asset.work + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.hr.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.hr.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..fb98b632 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.hr.html @@ -0,0 +1,164 @@ + +
erpnext.demo.user.hr
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.demo.user.hr.get_expenses + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.hr.get_timesheet_based_salary_slip_employee + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.hr.make_leave_application + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.hr.make_salary_slip_for_timesheet + (name) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.hr.make_sales_invoice_for_timesheet + (name) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.hr.make_timesheet_records + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.hr.mark_attendance + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.hr.update_sanctioned_amount + (expense_claim) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.hr.work + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6d7cc088 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +
erpnext.demo.user
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.manufacturing.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.manufacturing.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5ec6d542
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.manufacturing.html
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+
+erpnext.demo.user.manufacturing
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.demo.user.manufacturing.make_stock_entry_from_pro + (pro_id, purpose) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.manufacturing.work + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.projects.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.projects.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a82d2955 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.projects.html @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + +
erpnext.demo.user.projects
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.demo.user.projects.close_tasks + (current_date) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.projects.make_project + (current_date) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.projects.make_timesheet_for_projects + (current_date) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.projects.run_projects + (current_date) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.purchase.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.purchase.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b631826c --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.purchase.html @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + +
erpnext.demo.user.purchase
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.demo.user.purchase.add_suppliers + (rfq) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.purchase.make_material_request + (item_code, qty) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.purchase.make_subcontract + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.purchase.work + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.sales.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.sales.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3b50cfe5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.sales.html @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + +
erpnext.demo.user.sales
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.demo.user.sales.make_opportunity + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.sales.make_quotation + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.sales.make_sales_order + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.sales.work + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.schools.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.schools.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..770929fc --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.schools.html @@ -0,0 +1,164 @@ + +
erpnext.demo.user.schools
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.demo.user.schools.approve_random_student_applicant + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.schools.assign_student_group + (student, student_name, program, courses, batch) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.schools.enroll_random_student + (current_date) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.schools.make_assessment_plan + (date) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.schools.make_course_schedule + (start_date, end_date) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.schools.make_fees + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.schools.mark_student_attendance + (current_date) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.schools.weighted_choice + (weights) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.schools.work + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.stock.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.stock.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a027b79f --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/erpnext.demo.user.stock.html @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + +
erpnext.demo.user.stock
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.demo.user.stock.make_delivery_note + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.stock.make_purchase_receipt + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.stock.make_purchase_return_records + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.stock.make_sales_return_records + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.stock.make_stock_reconciliation + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.stock.submit_draft_stock_entries + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.demo.user.stock.work + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..976dbcf8 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
user
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..57d299d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/demo/user/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,10 @@ +erpnext.demo.user.accounts +erpnext.demo.user.fixed_asset +erpnext.demo.user.hr +erpnext.demo.user +erpnext.demo.user.manufacturing +erpnext.demo.user.projects +erpnext.demo.user.purchase +erpnext.demo.user.sales +erpnext.demo.user.schools +erpnext.demo.user.stock \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/erpnext.__init__.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/erpnext.__init__.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..89be5bf2 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/erpnext.__init__.html @@ -0,0 +1,157 @@ + +erpnext.__init__
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.allow_regional + (fn) +
+Decorator to make a function regionally overridable
+ +Example:
+@erpnext.allow_regional
+def myfunction():
+ pass
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.encode_company_abbr + (name, company) +
+Returns name encoded with company abbreviation
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.get_company_currency + (company) +
+Returns the default company currency
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.get_default_company + (user=None) +
+Get default company for user
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.get_default_currency + () +
+Returns the currency of the default company
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.get_region + (company=None) +
+Return the default country based on flag, company or global settings
+ +You can also set global company flag in `frappe.flags.company`
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.is_perpetual_inventory_enabled + (company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.set_perpetual_inventory + (enable=1, company=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/erpnext.exceptions.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/erpnext.exceptions.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..90c5c0c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/erpnext.exceptions.html @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + +
erpnext.exceptions
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Class InvalidAccountCurrency
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class InvalidCurrency
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class PartyDisabled
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class PartyFrozen
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/erpnext.hooks.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/erpnext.hooks.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9d7f13ec --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/erpnext.hooks.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +
erpnext.hooks
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/erpnext.hr.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/erpnext.hr.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1214c1a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/erpnext.hr.html
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+
+erpnext.hr
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/erpnext.hr.utils.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/erpnext.hr.utils.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f3f831cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/erpnext.hr.utils.html
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+
+erpnext.hr.utils
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.hr.utils.set_employee_name + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..807c52bc --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
hr
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c515b532 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +erpnext.hr +erpnext.hr.utils \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/erpnext.hr.print_format.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/erpnext.hr.print_format.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f8d547d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/erpnext.hr.print_format.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.hr.print_format
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c38a02fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+print_format
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1c63c43b --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.hr.print_format \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/offer_letter/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/offer_letter/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/offer_letter/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/offer_letter/erpnext.hr.print_format.offer_letter.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/offer_letter/erpnext.hr.print_format.offer_letter.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3eef93a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/offer_letter/erpnext.hr.print_format.offer_letter.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.hr.print_format.offer_letter
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/offer_letter/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/offer_letter/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..57f4f614
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/offer_letter/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+offer_letter
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/offer_letter/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/offer_letter/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..eb220825 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/offer_letter/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.hr.print_format.offer_letter \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_based_on_timesheet/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_based_on_timesheet/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_based_on_timesheet/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_based_on_timesheet/erpnext.hr.print_format.salary_slip_based_on_timesheet.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_based_on_timesheet/erpnext.hr.print_format.salary_slip_based_on_timesheet.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6ff4a91d --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_based_on_timesheet/erpnext.hr.print_format.salary_slip_based_on_timesheet.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.hr.print_format.salary_slip_based_on_timesheet
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_based_on_timesheet/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_based_on_timesheet/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d9f3dd97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_based_on_timesheet/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+salary_slip_based_on_timesheet
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_based_on_timesheet/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_based_on_timesheet/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..91a69127 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_based_on_timesheet/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.hr.print_format.salary_slip_based_on_timesheet \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_standard/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_standard/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_standard/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_standard/erpnext.hr.print_format.salary_slip_standard.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_standard/erpnext.hr.print_format.salary_slip_standard.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..27ed6889 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_standard/erpnext.hr.print_format.salary_slip_standard.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.hr.print_format.salary_slip_standard
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_standard/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_standard/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..348da408
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_standard/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+salary_slip_standard
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_standard/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_standard/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..59a7d454 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/print_format/salary_slip_standard/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.hr.print_format.salary_slip_standard \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/erpnext.hr.web_form.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/erpnext.hr.web_form.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2d01dcc5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/erpnext.hr.web_form.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.hr.web_form
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1af3b47d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+web_form
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5fc07426 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.hr.web_form \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/job_application/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/job_application/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/job_application/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/job_application/erpnext.hr.web_form.job_application.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/job_application/erpnext.hr.web_form.job_application.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f887bd06 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/job_application/erpnext.hr.web_form.job_application.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.hr.web_form.job_application
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/job_application/erpnext.hr.web_form.job_application.job_application.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/job_application/erpnext.hr.web_form.job_application.job_application.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0331ec47
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/job_application/erpnext.hr.web_form.job_application.job_application.html
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+
+erpnext.hr.web_form.job_application.job_application
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.hr.web_form.job_application.job_application.get_context + (context) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/job_application/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/job_application/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ed380669 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/job_application/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
job_application
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/job_application/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/job_application/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b301cae1 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hr/web_form/job_application/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +erpnext.hr.web_form.job_application +erpnext.hr.web_form.job_application.job_application \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hub_node/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hub_node/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hub_node/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hub_node/erpnext.hub_node.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hub_node/erpnext.hub_node.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..eb3e61d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hub_node/erpnext.hub_node.html @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + +erpnext.hub_node
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hub_node.get_items
+
+ + + erpnext.hub_node.get_items + (text, start, limit) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hub_node/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hub_node/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8703271f --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hub_node/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
hub_node
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hub_node/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hub_node/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..597a8072 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/hub_node/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.hub_node \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..886cb888 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + + + + +
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Contents
+ + + +{index} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..07bb08b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +erpnext.__init__ +erpnext.exceptions +erpnext.hooks \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/maintenance/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/maintenance/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/maintenance/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/maintenance/erpnext.maintenance.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/maintenance/erpnext.maintenance.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f6f2ea4f --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/maintenance/erpnext.maintenance.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.maintenance
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/maintenance/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/maintenance/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..02af0190
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/maintenance/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+maintenance
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/maintenance/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/maintenance/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5b207dd4 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/maintenance/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.maintenance \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/manufacturing/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/manufacturing/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/manufacturing/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/manufacturing/erpnext.manufacturing.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/manufacturing/erpnext.manufacturing.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ee07ae6d --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/manufacturing/erpnext.manufacturing.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.manufacturing
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/manufacturing/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/manufacturing/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..44733cbc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/manufacturing/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+manufacturing
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/manufacturing/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/manufacturing/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..de5c2bf9 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/manufacturing/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.manufacturing \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/portal/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/portal/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/portal/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/portal/erpnext.portal.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/portal/erpnext.portal.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1dd23b24 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/portal/erpnext.portal.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.portal
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/portal/erpnext.portal.utils.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/portal/erpnext.portal.utils.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bcb00d50
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/portal/erpnext.portal.utils.html
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+
+erpnext.portal.utils
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.portal.utils.set_default_role + (doc, method) +
+Set customer, supplier, student based on email
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/portal/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/portal/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..66d847c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/portal/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
portal
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/portal/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/portal/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..16af004b --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/portal/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +erpnext.portal +erpnext.portal.utils \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/erpnext.projects.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/erpnext.projects.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1d9a537a --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/erpnext.projects.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.projects
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/erpnext.projects.utils.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/erpnext.projects.utils.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1790dcf3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/erpnext.projects.utils.html
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+
+erpnext.projects.utils
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.projects.utils.query_task
+
+ + + erpnext.projects.utils.query_task + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6379e681 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
projects
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f6cc0ebb --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +erpnext.projects +erpnext.projects.utils \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/erpnext.projects.web_form.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/erpnext.projects.web_form.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..241c1699 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/erpnext.projects.web_form.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.projects.web_form
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1af3b47d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+web_form
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..80df28cd --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.projects.web_form \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/tasks/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/tasks/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/tasks/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/tasks/erpnext.projects.web_form.tasks.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/tasks/erpnext.projects.web_form.tasks.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..862c577c --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/tasks/erpnext.projects.web_form.tasks.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.projects.web_form.tasks
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/tasks/erpnext.projects.web_form.tasks.tasks.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/tasks/erpnext.projects.web_form.tasks.tasks.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cbf1c139
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/tasks/erpnext.projects.web_form.tasks.tasks.html
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+
+erpnext.projects.web_form.tasks.tasks
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.projects.web_form.tasks.tasks.get_context + (context) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/tasks/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/tasks/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e81c1164 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/tasks/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
tasks
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/tasks/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/tasks/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0c34f354 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/projects/web_form/tasks/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +erpnext.projects.web_form.tasks +erpnext.projects.web_form.tasks.tasks \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/erpnext.regional.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/erpnext.regional.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..08d737e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/erpnext.regional.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.regional
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..85633edc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+regional
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..93836fed --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.regional \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/india/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/india/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/india/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/india/erpnext.regional.india.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/india/erpnext.regional.india.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..71c951e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/india/erpnext.regional.india.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.regional.india
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/india/erpnext.regional.india.setup.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/india/erpnext.regional.india.setup.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2ed226c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/india/erpnext.regional.india.setup.html
@@ -0,0 +1,164 @@
+
+erpnext.regional.india.setup
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.regional.india.setup.add_custom_roles_for_reports + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.regional.india.setup.add_hsn_sac_codes + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.regional.india.setup.add_permissions + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.regional.india.setup.add_print_formats + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.regional.india.setup.create_hsn_codes + (data, code_field) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.regional.india.setup.make_custom_fields + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.regional.india.setup.make_fixtures + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.regional.india.setup.setup + (company=None, patch=True) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.regional.india.setup.update_address_template + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/india/erpnext.regional.india.utils.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/india/erpnext.regional.india.utils.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f4afac96 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/india/erpnext.regional.india.utils.html @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + +
erpnext.regional.india.utils
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.regional.india.utils.get_itemised_tax_breakup_data + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.regional.india.utils.get_itemised_tax_breakup_header + (item_doctype, tax_accounts) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.regional.india.utils.test_method + () +
+test function
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.regional.india.utils.validate_gstin_for_india + (doc, method) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/india/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/india/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5848ae7e --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/india/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
india
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/india/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/india/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3f1181a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/india/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +erpnext.regional.india +erpnext.regional.india.setup +erpnext.regional.india.utils \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/erpnext.regional.print_format.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/erpnext.regional.print_format.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6cfe6a29 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/erpnext.regional.print_format.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.regional.print_format
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/gst_tax_invoice/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/gst_tax_invoice/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/gst_tax_invoice/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/gst_tax_invoice/erpnext.regional.print_format.gst_tax_invoice.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/gst_tax_invoice/erpnext.regional.print_format.gst_tax_invoice.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e869c35c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/gst_tax_invoice/erpnext.regional.print_format.gst_tax_invoice.html
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+
+erpnext.regional.print_format.gst_tax_invoice
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/gst_tax_invoice/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/gst_tax_invoice/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..11a26cfa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/gst_tax_invoice/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+gst_tax_invoice
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/gst_tax_invoice/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/gst_tax_invoice/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..848efe2e --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/gst_tax_invoice/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.regional.print_format.gst_tax_invoice \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c38a02fd --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +print_format
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ba739dca --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/regional/print_format/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.regional.print_format \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/erpnext.schools.api.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/erpnext.schools.api.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..045deed2 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/erpnext.schools.api.html @@ -0,0 +1,463 @@ + +erpnext.schools.api
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.schools.api.check_attendance_records_exist
+
+ + + erpnext.schools.api.check_attendance_records_exist + (course_schedule=None, student_group=None, date=None) +
+Check if Attendance Records are made against the specified Course Schedule or Student Group for given date.
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
course_schedule- Course Schedule.
+student_group- Student Group.
+date- Date.
+
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.schools.api.collect_fees
+
+ + + erpnext.schools.api.collect_fees + (fees, amt) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.schools.api.enroll_student
+
+ + + erpnext.schools.api.enroll_student + (source_name) +
+Creates a Student Record and returns a Program Enrollment.
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
source_name- Student Applicant.
+
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.schools.api.get_assessment_criteria
+
+ + + erpnext.schools.api.get_assessment_criteria + (course) +
+Returns Assessmemt Criteria and their Weightage from Course Master.
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
Course- Course
+
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.schools.api.get_assessment_details
+
+ + + erpnext.schools.api.get_assessment_details + (assessment_plan) +
+Returns Assessment Criteria and Maximum Score from Assessment Plan Master.
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
Assessment Plan- Assessment Plan
+
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.schools.api.get_assessment_students
+
+ + + erpnext.schools.api.get_assessment_students + (assessment_plan, student_group) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.schools.api.get_course + (program) +
+Return list of courses for a particular program
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
program- Program
+
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.schools.api.get_course_schedule_events
+
+ + + erpnext.schools.api.get_course_schedule_events + (start, end, filters=None) +
+Returns events for Course Schedule Calendar view rendering.
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
start- Start date-time.
+end- End date-time.
+filters- Filters (JSON).
+
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.schools.api.get_fee_components
+
+ + + erpnext.schools.api.get_fee_components + (fee_structure) +
+Returns Fee Components.
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
fee_structure- Fee Structure.
+
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.schools.api.get_fee_schedule
+
+ + + erpnext.schools.api.get_fee_schedule + (program, student_category=None) +
+Returns Fee Schedule.
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
program- Program.
+student_category- Student Category
+
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.schools.api.get_fee_structure
+
+ + + erpnext.schools.api.get_fee_structure + (program, academic_term=None) +
+Returns Fee Structure.
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
program- Program.
+academic_term- Academic Term.
+
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.schools.api.get_grade
+
+ + + erpnext.schools.api.get_grade + (grading_scale, percentage) +
+Returns Grade based on the Grading Scale and Score.
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
Grading Scale- Grading Scale
+Percentage- Score Percentage Percentage
+
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.schools.api.get_result
+
+ + + erpnext.schools.api.get_result + (student, assessment_plan) +
+Returns Submitted Result of given student for specified Assessment Plan
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
Student- Student
+Assessment Plan- Assessment Plan
+
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.schools.api.get_student_group_students
+
+ + + erpnext.schools.api.get_student_group_students + (student_group, include_inactive=0) +
+Returns List of student, student_name in Student Group.
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
student_group- Student Group.
+
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.schools.api.get_student_guardians
+
+ + + erpnext.schools.api.get_student_guardians + (student) +
+Returns List of Guardians of a Student.
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
student- Student.
+
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.schools.api.make_attendance_records + (student, student_name, status, course_schedule=None, student_group=None, date=None) +
+Creates/Update Attendance Record.
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
student- Student.
+student_name- Student Name.
+course_schedule- Course Schedule.
+status- Status (Present/Absent)
+
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.schools.api.mark_assessment_result
+
+ + + erpnext.schools.api.mark_assessment_result + (student, assessment_plan, scores) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.schools.api.mark_attendance
+
+ + + erpnext.schools.api.mark_attendance + (students_present, students_absent, course_schedule=None, student_group=None, date=None) +
+Creates Multiple Attendance Records.
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
students_present- Students Present JSON.
+students_absent- Students Absent JSON.
+course_schedule- Course Schedule.
+student_group- Student Group.
+date- Date.
+
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.schools.api.update_email_group
+
+ + + erpnext.schools.api.update_email_group + (doctype, name) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/erpnext.schools.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/erpnext.schools.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5af3104a --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/erpnext.schools.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +
erpnext.schools
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/erpnext.schools.utils.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/erpnext.schools.utils.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d409904e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/erpnext.schools.utils.html
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+
+erpnext.schools.utils
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Class OverlapError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.schools.utils.get_overlap_for + (doc, doctype, fieldname, value=None) +
+Returns overlaping document for specified field.
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
fieldname- Checks Overlap for this field
+
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.schools.utils.validate_duplicate_student + (students) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.schools.utils.validate_overlap_for + (doc, doctype, fieldname, value=None) +
+Checks overlap for specified field.
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
fieldname- Checks Overlap for this field
+
+ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7725abb6 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
schools
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c8a0b196 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +erpnext.schools.api +erpnext.schools +erpnext.schools.utils \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/discussion/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/discussion/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/discussion/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/discussion/erpnext.schools.web_form.discussion.discussion.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/discussion/erpnext.schools.web_form.discussion.discussion.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1bd610be --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/discussion/erpnext.schools.web_form.discussion.discussion.html @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + +erpnext.schools.web_form.discussion.discussion
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.schools.web_form.discussion.discussion.get_context + (context=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.schools.web_form.discussion.discussion.has_website_permission + (doc, ptype, user, verbose=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/discussion/erpnext.schools.web_form.discussion.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/discussion/erpnext.schools.web_form.discussion.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e6f43a40 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/discussion/erpnext.schools.web_form.discussion.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +
erpnext.schools.web_form.discussion
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/discussion/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/discussion/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..03466aa0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/discussion/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+discussion
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/discussion/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/discussion/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1f2a38bc --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/discussion/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +erpnext.schools.web_form.discussion.discussion +erpnext.schools.web_form.discussion \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/erpnext.schools.web_form.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/erpnext.schools.web_form.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a783b30d --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/erpnext.schools.web_form.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.schools.web_form
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1af3b47d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+web_form
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..bb67e8d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.schools.web_form \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/student_applicant/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/student_applicant/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/student_applicant/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/student_applicant/erpnext.schools.web_form.student_applicant.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/student_applicant/erpnext.schools.web_form.student_applicant.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4a9edd22 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/student_applicant/erpnext.schools.web_form.student_applicant.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.schools.web_form.student_applicant
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/student_applicant/erpnext.schools.web_form.student_applicant.student_applicant.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/student_applicant/erpnext.schools.web_form.student_applicant.student_applicant.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..49c49153
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/student_applicant/erpnext.schools.web_form.student_applicant.student_applicant.html
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+
+erpnext.schools.web_form.student_applicant.student_applicant
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.schools.web_form.student_applicant.student_applicant.get_context + (context) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/student_applicant/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/student_applicant/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f3dc0077 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/student_applicant/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
student_applicant
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/student_applicant/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/student_applicant/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..184649a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/schools/web_form/student_applicant/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +erpnext.schools.web_form.student_applicant +erpnext.schools.web_form.student_applicant.student_applicant \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/selling/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/selling/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/selling/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/selling/erpnext.selling.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/selling/erpnext.selling.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3d82c142 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/selling/erpnext.selling.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.selling
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/selling/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/selling/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b2a1e02f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/selling/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+selling
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/selling/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/selling/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e570c860 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/selling/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.selling \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/erpnext.setup.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/erpnext.setup.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..79552923 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/erpnext.setup.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.setup
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/erpnext.setup.install.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/erpnext.setup.install.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..509ef771
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/erpnext.setup.install.html
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+
+erpnext.setup.install
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.setup.install.after_install + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.install.check_setup_wizard_not_completed + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.install.create_compact_item_print_custom_field + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.install.set_single_defaults + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/erpnext.setup.utils.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/erpnext.setup.utils.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7ee7db16 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/erpnext.setup.utils.html @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + +
erpnext.setup.utils
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.setup.utils.before_tests + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.utils.get_ancestors_of + (doctype, name) +
+Get ancestor elements of a DocType with a tree structure
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.setup.utils.get_exchange_rate
+
+ + + erpnext.setup.utils.get_exchange_rate + (from_currency, to_currency, transaction_date=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.utils.get_root_of + (doctype) +
+Get root element of a DocType with a tree structure
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e7ca9ed7 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
setup
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..63162d85 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +erpnext.setup +erpnext.setup.install +erpnext.setup.utils \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.default_website.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.default_website.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f4566bb6 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.default_website.html @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + +erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.default_website
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.default_website.test + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
Class website_maker
+ +Inherits from __builtin__.object + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + __init__ + (self, args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_blog + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_web_page + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_website_settings + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.domainify.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.domainify.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..23c6d443 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.domainify.html @@ -0,0 +1,164 @@ + +
erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.domainify
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.domainify.get_domain + (domain) +
+Written as a function to prevent data mutation effects
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.domainify.reset + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.domainify.set_values + (data) +
+set values based on data.set_value
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.domainify.setup_desktop_icons + (data) +
+set desktop icons form data.desktop_icons
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.domainify.setup_domain + (domain) +
+Setup roles, desktop icons, properties, values, portal sidebar menu based on domain
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.domainify.setup_properties + (data) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.domainify.setup_roles + (data) +
+Add, remove roles from data.allow_roles or data.remove_roles
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.domainify.setup_sidebar_items + (data) +
+Enable / disable sidebar items
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.domainify.update_module_def_restrict_to_domain + () +
+set the restrict to domain for the module def
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d280d94e --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +
erpnext.setup.setup_wizard
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.industry_type.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.industry_type.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cb4c2a7c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.industry_type.html
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+
+erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.industry_type
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.industry_type.get_industry_types + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.install_fixtures.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.install_fixtures.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d5de73f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.install_fixtures.html @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + +
erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.install_fixtures
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.install_fixtures.install + (country=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.sample_data.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.sample_data.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8306bd28 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.sample_data.html @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ + +
erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.sample_data
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.sample_data.import_email_alert + () +
+Import email alert for task start
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.sample_data.make_issue + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.sample_data.make_material_request + (items) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.sample_data.make_opportunity + (items, customer) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.sample_data.make_projects + (domain) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.sample_data.make_quote + (items, customer) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.sample_data.make_sample_data + (args) +
+Create a few opportunities, quotes, material requests, issues, todos, projects + to help the user get started
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.sample_data.test_sample + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8bf34e53 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.html @@ -0,0 +1,532 @@ + +
erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.create_academic_term + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.create_academic_year + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.create_bank_account + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.create_contact + (contact, party_type, party) +
+Create contact based on given contact name
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.create_course + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.create_customers + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.create_email_digest + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.create_feed_and_todo + () +
+update Activity feed and create todo for creation of item, customer, vendor
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.create_fiscal_year_and_company + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.create_instructor + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.create_items + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.create_letter_head + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.create_logo + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.create_price_lists + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.create_program + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.create_room + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.create_sales_tax + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.create_suppliers + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.create_taxes + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.create_territories + () +
+create two default territories, one for home country and one named Rest of the World
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.create_users + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.enable_shopping_cart + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.get_country_wise_tax + (country) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.get_fy_details + (fy_start_date, fy_end_date) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.get_tax_account_group + (company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.login_as_first_user + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.make_item_price + (item, price_list_name, item_price) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.make_sales_and_purchase_tax_templates + (accounts, template_name=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.make_tax_account + (company, account_name, tax_rate) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.make_tax_account_and_template + (company, account_name, tax_rate, template_name=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.set_defaults + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard.setup_complete + (args=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.utils.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.utils.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a3e7ac11 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.utils.html @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + +
erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.utils
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.utils.complete + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ff8905c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
setup_wizard
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..24fd8769 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/setup/setup_wizard/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.default_website +erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.domainify +erpnext.setup.setup_wizard +erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.industry_type +erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.install_fixtures +erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.sample_data +erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.setup_wizard +erpnext.setup.setup_wizard.utils \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ae3c71a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.html @@ -0,0 +1,415 @@ + +erpnext.shopping_cart.cart
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Class WebsitePriceListMissingError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart._apply_shipping_rule + (party=None, quotation=None, cart_settings=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart._get_cart_quotation + (party=None) +
+Return the open Quotation of type "Shopping Cart" or make a new one
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart._set_price_list + (quotation, cart_settings) +
+Set price list based on customer or shopping cart default
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.apply_cart_settings + (party=None, quotation=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.apply_shipping_rule
+
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.apply_shipping_rule + (shipping_rule) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.decorate_quotation_doc + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.get_address_docs + (doctype=None, txt=None, filters=None, limit_start=0, limit_page_length=20, party=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.get_address_territory + (address_name) +
+Tries to match city, state and country of address to existing territory
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.get_applicable_shipping_rules + (party=None, quotation=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.get_cart_quotation
+
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.get_cart_quotation + (doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.get_debtors_account + (cart_settings) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.get_party + (user=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.get_shipping_rules + (quotation=None, cart_settings=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.get_shopping_cart_menu
+
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.get_shopping_cart_menu + (context=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.guess_territory + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.place_order
+
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.place_order + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.set_cart_count + (quotation=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.set_price_list_and_rate + (quotation, cart_settings) +
+set price list based on billing territory
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.set_taxes + (quotation, cart_settings) +
+set taxes based on billing territory
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.show_terms + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.update_cart
+
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.update_cart + (item_code, qty, with_items=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.update_cart_address
+
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.update_cart_address + (address_fieldname, address_name) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.cart.update_party + (fullname, company_name=None, mobile_no=None, phone=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/erpnext.shopping_cart.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/erpnext.shopping_cart.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a713b69a --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/erpnext.shopping_cart.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +
erpnext.shopping_cart
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/erpnext.shopping_cart.product.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/erpnext.shopping_cart.product.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8f3b4424
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/erpnext.shopping_cart.product.html
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+
+erpnext.shopping_cart.product
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.shopping_cart.product.get_price + (item_code, template_item_code, price_list, qty=1) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.shopping_cart.product.get_product_info
+
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.product.get_product_info + (item_code) +
+get product price / stock info
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.product.get_qty_in_stock + (item_code, template_item_code) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/erpnext.shopping_cart.test_shopping_cart.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/erpnext.shopping_cart.test_shopping_cart.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..86cf02b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/erpnext.shopping_cart.test_shopping_cart.html @@ -0,0 +1,261 @@ + +
erpnext.shopping_cart.test_shopping_cart
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Class TestShoppingCart
+ +Inherits from unittest.case.TestCase + +
Note:
+ Shopping Cart == Quotation
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + create_quotation + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + create_user_if_not_exists + (self, email, first_name=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + disable_shopping_cart + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + enable_shopping_cart + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + login_as_customer + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + login_as_new_user + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + remove_all_items_from_cart + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + remove_test_quotation + (self, quotation) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + setUp + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + tearDown + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + test_add_to_cart + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + test_get_cart_customer + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + test_get_cart_new_user + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + test_remove_from_cart + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + test_tax_rule + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + test_update_cart + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/erpnext.shopping_cart.utils.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/erpnext.shopping_cart.utils.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3cd168e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/erpnext.shopping_cart.utils.html @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + +
erpnext.shopping_cart.utils
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.shopping_cart.utils.check_customer_or_supplier + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.utils.clear_cart_count + (login_manager) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.utils.set_cart_count + (login_manager) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.utils.show_cart_count + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.utils.update_website_context + (context) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9f5d7ae0 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
shopping_cart
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c95a01d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/shopping_cart/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,5 @@ +erpnext.shopping_cart.cart +erpnext.shopping_cart +erpnext.shopping_cart.product +erpnext.shopping_cart.test_shopping_cart +erpnext.shopping_cart.utils \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/startup/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/startup/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/startup/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/startup/erpnext.startup.boot.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/startup/erpnext.startup.boot.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e40fcaee --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/startup/erpnext.startup.boot.html @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + +erpnext.startup.boot
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.startup.boot.boot_session + (bootinfo) +
+boot session - send website info if guest
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.startup.boot.load_country_and_currency + (bootinfo) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.startup.boot.update_page_info + (bootinfo) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/startup/erpnext.startup.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/startup/erpnext.startup.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..84d739eb --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/startup/erpnext.startup.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +
erpnext.startup
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/startup/erpnext.startup.notifications.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/startup/erpnext.startup.notifications.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b7ab87f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/startup/erpnext.startup.notifications.html
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+
+erpnext.startup.notifications
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.startup.notifications.get_notification_config + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/startup/erpnext.startup.report_data_map.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/startup/erpnext.startup.report_data_map.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6429070f --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/startup/erpnext.startup.report_data_map.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +
erpnext.startup.report_data_map
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/startup/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/startup/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e6a6c6d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/startup/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+startup
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/startup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/startup/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..40766bcb --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/startup/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +erpnext.startup.boot +erpnext.startup +erpnext.startup.notifications +erpnext.startup.report_data_map \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/dashboard/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/dashboard/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/dashboard/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/dashboard/erpnext.stock.dashboard.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/dashboard/erpnext.stock.dashboard.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7e3873d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/dashboard/erpnext.stock.dashboard.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.stock.dashboard
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/dashboard/erpnext.stock.dashboard.item_dashboard.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/dashboard/erpnext.stock.dashboard.item_dashboard.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..49ac268e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/dashboard/erpnext.stock.dashboard.item_dashboard.html
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+
+erpnext.stock.dashboard.item_dashboard
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.dashboard.item_dashboard.get_data
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.dashboard.item_dashboard.get_data + (item_code=None, warehouse=None, item_group=None, start=0, sort_by=actual_qty, sort_order=desc) +
+Return data to render the item dashboard
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/dashboard/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/dashboard/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8317203e --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/dashboard/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
dashboard
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/dashboard/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/dashboard/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3ebbf250 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/dashboard/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +erpnext.stock.dashboard +erpnext.stock.dashboard.item_dashboard \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..de02cdc5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.html @@ -0,0 +1,584 @@ + +erpnext.stock.get_item_details
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.apply_price_list
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.apply_price_list + (args, as_doc=False) +
+Apply pricelist on a document-like dict object and return as + {'parent': dict, 'children': list}
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
args- See below
+
+ +as_doc- Updates value in the passed dictargs = { + "doctype": "", + "name": "", + "items": [{"doctype": "", "name": "", "item_code": "", "brand": "", "item_group": ""}, ...], + "conversion_rate": 1.0, + "selling_price_list": None, + "price_list_currency": None, + "plc_conversion_rate": 1.0, + "doctype": "", + "name": "", + "supplier": None, + "transaction_date": None, + "conversion_rate": 1.0, + "buying_price_list": None, + "ignore_pricing_rule": 0/1 +} +
+
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.apply_price_list_on_item + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_basic_details + (args, item) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_batch_qty
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_batch_qty + (batch_no, warehouse, item_code) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_bin_details
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_bin_details + (item_code, warehouse) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_bin_details_and_serial_nos
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_bin_details_and_serial_nos + (item_code, warehouse, stock_qty=None, serial_no=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_conversion_factor
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_conversion_factor + (item_code, uom) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_default_bom
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_default_bom + (item_code=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_default_cost_center + (args, item) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_default_expense_account + (args, item) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_default_income_account + (args, item) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_gross_profit + (out) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_item_code
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_item_code + (barcode=None, serial_no=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_item_details
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_item_details + (args) +
+ args = {
+ "item_code": "",
+ "warehouse": None,
+ "customer": "",
+ "conversion_rate": 1.0,
+ "selling_price_list": None,
+ "price_list_currency": None,
+ "plc_conversion_rate": 1.0,
+ "doctype": "",
+ "name": "",
+ "supplier": None,
+ "transaction_date": None,
+ "conversion_rate": 1.0,
+ "buying_price_list": None,
+ "is_subcontracted": "Yes" / "No",
+ "ignore_pricing_rule": 0/1
+ "project": ""
+ }
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_party_item_code + (args, item_doc, out) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_pos_profile
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_pos_profile + (company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_pos_profile_item_details + (company, args, pos_profile=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_price_list_currency + (price_list) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_price_list_currency_and_exchange_rate + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_price_list_rate + (args, item_doc, out) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_price_list_rate_for + (price_list, item_code) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_projected_qty
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_projected_qty + (item_code, warehouse) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_serial_no
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_serial_no + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_serial_no_details
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_serial_no_details + (item_code, warehouse, stock_qty, serial_no) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_serial_nos_by_fifo + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.get_valuation_rate + (item_code, warehouse=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.insert_item_price + (args) +
+Insert Item Price if Price List and Price List Rate are specified and currency is the same
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.process_args + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.validate_conversion_rate + (args, meta) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.validate_item_details + (args, item) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_item_details.validate_price_list + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/erpnext.stock.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/erpnext.stock.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2c1466f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/erpnext.stock.html @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + +
erpnext.stock
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.stock.get_company_default_inventory_account + (company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_warehouse_account + (warehouse, company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.get_warehouse_account_map + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/erpnext.stock.reorder_item.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/erpnext.stock.reorder_item.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d23fb560 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/erpnext.stock.reorder_item.html @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + +
erpnext.stock.reorder_item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.stock.reorder_item._reorder_item + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.reorder_item.create_material_request + (material_requests) +
+Create indent on reaching reorder level
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.reorder_item.get_item_warehouse_projected_qty + (items_to_consider) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.reorder_item.notify_errors + (exceptions_list) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.reorder_item.reorder_item + () +
+Reorder item if stock reaches reorder level
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.reorder_item.send_email_notification + (mr_list) +
+Notify user about auto creation of indent
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/erpnext.stock.stock_balance.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/erpnext.stock.stock_balance.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e530c8a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/erpnext.stock.stock_balance.html @@ -0,0 +1,213 @@ + +
erpnext.stock.stock_balance
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.get_balance_qty_from_sle + (item_code, warehouse) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.get_indented_qty + (item_code, warehouse) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.get_ordered_qty + (item_code, warehouse) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.get_planned_qty + (item_code, warehouse) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.get_reserved_qty + (item_code, warehouse) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.repost + (only_actual=False, allow_negative_stock=False, allow_zero_rate=False, only_bin=False) +
+Repost everything!
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.repost_actual_qty + (item_code, warehouse, allow_zero_rate=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.repost_all_stock_vouchers + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.repost_stock + (item_code, warehouse, allow_zero_rate=False, only_actual=False, only_bin=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.reset_serial_no_status_and_warehouse + (serial_nos=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.set_stock_balance_as_per_serial_no + (item_code=None, posting_date=None, posting_time=None, fiscal_year=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.stock_balance.update_bin_qty + (item_code, warehouse, qty_dict=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/erpnext.stock.stock_ledger.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/erpnext.stock.stock_ledger.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..77fd80ff --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/erpnext.stock.stock_ledger.html @@ -0,0 +1,359 @@ + +
erpnext.stock.stock_ledger
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Class NegativeStockError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.stock_ledger.delete_cancelled_entry + (voucher_type, voucher_no) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.stock_ledger.get_previous_sle + (args, for_update=False) +
+ get the last sle on or before the current time-bucket,
+ to get actual qty before transaction, this function
+ is called from various transaction like stock entry, reco etc
+
+ args = {
+ "item_code": "ABC",
+ "warehouse": "XYZ",
+ "posting_date": "2012-12-12",
+ "posting_time": "12:00",
+ "sle": "name of reference Stock Ledger Entry"
+ }
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.stock_ledger.get_stock_ledger_entries + (previous_sle, operator=None, order=desc, limit=None, for_update=False, debug=False) +
+get stock ledger entries filtered by specific posting datetime conditions
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.stock_ledger.get_valuation_rate + (item_code, warehouse, voucher_type, voucher_no, allow_zero_rate=False, currency=None, company=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.stock_ledger.make_entry + (args, allow_negative_stock=False, via_landed_cost_voucher=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.stock_ledger.make_sl_entries + (sl_entries, is_amended=None, allow_negative_stock=False, via_landed_cost_voucher=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.stock_ledger.set_as_cancel + (voucher_type, voucher_no) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
Class update_entries_after
+ +Inherits from __builtin__.object + +
update valution rate and qty after transaction
+ from the current time-bucket onwards
+Parameters:
+ +-
+
+ +args- args as dictargs = { + "item_code": "ABC", + "warehouse": "XYZ", + "posting_date": "2012-12-12", + "posting_time": "12:00" + } +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + __init__ + (self, args, allow_zero_rate=False, allow_negative_stock=None, via_landed_cost_voucher=False, verbose=1) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + build + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_if_allow_zero_valuation_rate + (self, voucher_type, voucher_detail_no) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_fifo_values + (self, sle) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_moving_average_values + (self, sle) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_serialized_values + (self, sle) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_sle_after_datetime + (self) +
+get Stock Ledger Entries after a particular datetime, for reposting
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_sle_before_datetime + (self) +
+get previous stock ledger entry before current time-bucket
++ + + + + +
+ + + process_sle + (self, sle) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + raise_exceptions + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_bin + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_negative_stock + (self, sle) +
+ validate negative stock for entries current datetime onwards
+ will not consider cancelled entries
++ + +
+ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/erpnext.stock.utils.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/erpnext.stock.utils.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b06cd88b --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/erpnext.stock.utils.html @@ -0,0 +1,252 @@ + +
erpnext.stock.utils
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Class InvalidWarehouseCompany
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.utils.get_avg_purchase_rate + (serial_nos) +
+get average value of serial numbers
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.utils.get_bin + (item_code, warehouse) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.utils.get_fifo_rate + (previous_stock_queue, qty) +
+get FIFO (average) Rate from Queue
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.utils.get_incoming_rate
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.utils.get_incoming_rate + (args) +
+Get Incoming Rate based on valuation method
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.utils.get_latest_stock_balance + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.utils.get_latest_stock_qty
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.utils.get_latest_stock_qty + (item_code, warehouse=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.utils.get_stock_balance
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.utils.get_stock_balance + (item_code, warehouse, posting_date=None, posting_time=None, with_valuation_rate=False) +
+Returns stock balance quantity at given warehouse on given posting date or current date.
+ +If `with_valuation_rate` is True, will return tuple (qty, rate)
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.utils.get_stock_value_on + (warehouse=None, posting_date=None, item_code=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.utils.get_valid_serial_nos + (sr_nos, qty=0, item_code=) +
+split serial nos, validate and return list of valid serial nos
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.utils.get_valuation_method + (item_code) +
+get valuation method from item or default
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.utils.is_group_warehouse + (warehouse) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.utils.update_bin + (args, allow_negative_stock=False, via_landed_cost_voucher=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.utils.validate_warehouse_company + (warehouse, company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e8b5c277 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
stock
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..27cb1482 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/stock/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6 @@ +erpnext.stock.get_item_details +erpnext.stock +erpnext.stock.reorder_item +erpnext.stock.stock_balance +erpnext.stock.stock_ledger +erpnext.stock.utils \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/erpnext.support.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/erpnext.support.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..efbace66 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/erpnext.support.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.support
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ba7d5b13
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+support
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..42739d16 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.support \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/erpnext.support.web_form.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/erpnext.support.web_form.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c66188b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/erpnext.support.web_form.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.support.web_form
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1af3b47d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+web_form
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..100135b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.support.web_form \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/issues/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/issues/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/issues/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/issues/erpnext.support.web_form.issues.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/issues/erpnext.support.web_form.issues.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..69f93fc9 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/issues/erpnext.support.web_form.issues.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.support.web_form.issues
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/issues/erpnext.support.web_form.issues.issues.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/issues/erpnext.support.web_form.issues.issues.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8b81fced
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/issues/erpnext.support.web_form.issues.issues.html
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+
+erpnext.support.web_form.issues.issues
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.support.web_form.issues.issues.get_context + (context) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/issues/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/issues/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..876f9664 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/issues/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
issues
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/issues/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/issues/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b1ca94db --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/support/web_form/issues/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +erpnext.support.web_form.issues +erpnext.support.web_form.issues.issues \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/erpnext.utilities.activation.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/erpnext.utilities.activation.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dcda0698 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/erpnext.utilities.activation.html @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + +erpnext.utilities.activation
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.utilities.activation.get_help_messages + () +
+Returns help messages to be shown on Desktop
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.utilities.activation.get_level + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/erpnext.utilities.bot.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/erpnext.utilities.bot.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..921ed10e --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/erpnext.utilities.bot.html @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + +
erpnext.utilities.bot
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Class FindItemBot
+ +Inherits from frappe.utils.bot.BotParser + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/erpnext.utilities.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/erpnext.utilities.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a7679879 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/erpnext.utilities.html @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + +
erpnext.utilities
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.utilities.get_site_info + (site_info) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.utilities.update_doctypes + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c870a459 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.html @@ -0,0 +1,222 @@ + +
erpnext.utilities.transaction_base
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Class TransactionBase
+ +Inherits from erpnext.controllers.status_updater.StatusUpdater + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + _add_calendar_event + (self, opts) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + add_calendar_event + (self, opts, force=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + compare_values + (self, ref_doc, fields, doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + delete_events + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_link_filters + (self, for_doctype) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + load_notification_message + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_posting_time + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_rate_with_reference_doc + (self, ref_details) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_uom_is_integer + (self, uom_field, qty_fields) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_with_previous_doc + (self, ref) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + +
Class UOMMustBeIntegerError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.delete_events + (ref_type, ref_name) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.validate_uom_is_integer + (doc, uom_field, qty_fields, child_dt=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..44ef90b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
utilities
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..21a5a0c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +erpnext.utilities.activation +erpnext.utilities.bot +erpnext.utilities +erpnext.utilities.transaction_base \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/addresses/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/addresses/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/addresses/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/addresses/erpnext.utilities.web_form.addresses.addresses.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/addresses/erpnext.utilities.web_form.addresses.addresses.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c6ddef34 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/addresses/erpnext.utilities.web_form.addresses.addresses.html @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + +erpnext.utilities.web_form.addresses.addresses
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + erpnext.utilities.web_form.addresses.addresses.get_context + (context) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/addresses/erpnext.utilities.web_form.addresses.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/addresses/erpnext.utilities.web_form.addresses.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..60bc9298 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/addresses/erpnext.utilities.web_form.addresses.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +
erpnext.utilities.web_form.addresses
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/addresses/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/addresses/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9a0b660e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/addresses/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+addresses
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/addresses/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/addresses/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..43e53c9e --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/addresses/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +erpnext.utilities.web_form.addresses.addresses +erpnext.utilities.web_form.addresses \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/erpnext.utilities.web_form.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/erpnext.utilities.web_form.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1b488e22 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/erpnext.utilities.web_form.html @@ -0,0 +1,20 @@ + +erpnext.utilities.web_form
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/index.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1af3b47d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/index.html
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+web_form
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Package Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..424852e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/api/utilities/web_form/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +erpnext.utilities.web_form \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2cdd1037 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + +
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+| + App Name + | +
+ erpnext
+ |
+
| + Publisher + | +
+ Frappe Technologies Pvt. Ltd.
+ |
+
| + Version + | +
+ 8.5.4
+ |
+
Contents
+-
+
- + Models (DocTypes) + +
- + Server-side API + +
Account
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabAccount
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +properties |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +account_name |
+ + Data | ++ Account Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +is_group |
+ + Check | ++ Is Group + + | ++ |
| 5 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 6 | +root_type |
+ + Select | ++ Root Type + + | +
+ +Asset +Liability +Income +Expense +Equity+ |
+
| 7 | +report_type |
+ + Select | ++ Report Type + + | +
+ +Balance Sheet +Profit and Loss+ |
+
| 8 | +account_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 9 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +parent_account |
+ + Link | ++ Parent Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 11 | +account_type |
+ + Select | +
+ Account Type
+ + Setting Account Type helps in selecting this Account in transactions. + |
+
+ +Accumulated Depreciation +Bank +Cash +Chargeable +Cost of Goods Sold +Depreciation +Equity +Expense Account +Expenses Included In Valuation +Fixed Asset +Income Account +Payable +Receivable +Round Off +Stock +Stock Adjustment +Stock Received But Not Billed +Tax +Temporary+ |
+
| 12 | +tax_rate |
+ + Float | +
+ Rate
+ + Rate at which this tax is applied + |
+ + |
| 13 | +freeze_account |
+ + Select | +
+ Frozen
+ + If the account is frozen, entries are allowed to restricted users. + |
+
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 14 | +balance_must_be |
+ + Select | ++ Balance must be + + | +
+ +Debit +Credit+ |
+
| 15 | +lft |
+ + Int | ++ Lft + + | ++ |
| 16 | +rgt |
+ + Int | ++ Rgt + + | ++ |
| 17 | +old_parent |
+ + Data | ++ Old Parent + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.account.account
+ + + + + + + +Class Account
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + after_rename + (self, old, new, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + before_rename + (self, old, new, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_gle_exists + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_if_child_exists + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + convert_group_to_ledger + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + convert_ledger_to_group + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_root_and_report_type + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_nsm_model + (self) +
+update lft, rgt indices for nested set model
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_account_currency + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_balance_must_be_debit_or_credit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_frozen_accounts_modifier + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_group_or_ledger + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_mandatory + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_parent + (self) +
+Fetch Parent Details and validate parent account
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_root_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_trash + (self) +
+checks gl entries and if child exists
++ + +
+ + + + + +
Class BalanceMismatchError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class RootNotEditable
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.account.account.get_account_currency + (account) +
+Helper function to get account currency
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.account.account.get_parent_account + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Account + + + + + +
- + + +Asset Category Account + + + + + +
- + + +Bank Guarantee + + + + + +
- + + +Bank Reconciliation + + + + + +
- + + +Budget Account + + + + + +
- + + +Company + + + + + +
- + + +Delivery Note Item + + + + + +
- + + +Employee Loan + + + + + +
- + + +Expense Claim + + + + + +
- + + +Expense Claim Account + + + + + +
- + + +Expense Claim Detail + + + + + +
- + + +GL Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Item + + + + + +
- + + +Item Group + + + + + +
- + + +Item Tax + + + + + +
- + + +Journal Entry Account + + + + + +
- + + +Mode of Payment Account + + + + + +
- + + +Party Account + + + + + +
- + + +Payment Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Payment Entry Deduction + + + + + +
- + + +Payment Gateway Account + + + + + +
- + + +Payment Reconciliation + + + + + +
- + + +Period Closing Voucher + + + + + +
- + + +POS Profile + + + + + +
- + + +Process Payroll + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges + + + + + +
- + + +Salary Component Account + + + + + +
- + + +Salary Structure + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice Payment + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Taxes and Charges + + + + + +
- + + +Shipping Rule + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Entry Detail + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Reconciliation + + + + + +
- + + +Warehouse + + + + +
Accounts Settings
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+Settings for Accounts
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +auto_accounting_for_stock |
+ + Check | +
+ Make Accounting Entry For Every Stock Movement
+ + If enabled, the system will post accounting entries for inventory automatically. + |
+ + |
| 2 | +acc_frozen_upto |
+ + Date | +
+ Accounts Frozen Upto
+ + Accounting entry frozen up to this date, nobody can do / modify entry except role specified below. + |
+ + |
| 3 | +frozen_accounts_modifier |
+ + Link | +
+ Role Allowed to Set Frozen Accounts & Edit Frozen Entries
+ + Users with this role are allowed to set frozen accounts and create / modify accounting entries against frozen accounts + |
+ + + + + +Role + + + + | +
| 4 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +credit_controller |
+ + Link | +
+ Credit Controller
+ + Role that is allowed to submit transactions that exceed credit limits set. + |
+ + + + + +Role + + + + | +
| 6 | +check_supplier_invoice_uniqueness |
+ + Check | ++ Check Supplier Invoice Number Uniqueness + + | ++ |
| 7 | +make_payment_via_journal_entry |
+ + Check | ++ Make Payment via Journal Entry + + | ++ |
| 8 | +unlink_payment_on_cancellation_of_invoice |
+ + Check | ++ Unlink Payment on Cancellation of Invoice + + | ++ |
| 9 | +book_asset_depreciation_entry_automatically |
+ + Check | ++ Book Asset Depreciation Entry Automatically + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.accounts_settings.accounts_settings
+ + + + + + + +Class AccountsSettings
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/accounts/asset.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/accounts/asset.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..14f526a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/accounts/asset.html @@ -0,0 +1,837 @@ + + + + + + + +
Asset
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabAsset
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +asset_name |
+ + Data | ++ Asset Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 3 | +item_name |
+ + Read Only | ++ Item Name + + | +
+ item_code.item_name+ |
+
| 4 | +asset_category |
+ + Link | ++ Asset Category + + | ++ + + + +Asset Category + + + + | +
| 5 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Draft +Submitted +Partially Depreciated +Fully Depreciated +Sold +Scrapped+ |
+
| 6 | +image |
+ + Attach Image | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 7 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 9 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 10 | +is_existing_asset |
+ + Check | ++ Is Existing Asset + + | ++ |
| 11 | +purchase_date |
+ + Date | ++ Purchase Date + + | ++ |
| 12 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 13 | +purchase_invoice |
+ + Link | ++ Purchase Invoice + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Invoice + + + + | +
| 14 | +disposal_date |
+ + Date | ++ Disposal Date + + | ++ |
| 15 | +journal_entry_for_scrap |
+ + Link | ++ Journal Entry for Scrap + + | ++ + + + +Journal Entry + + + + | +
| 16 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 17 | +gross_purchase_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Gross Purchase Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 18 | +expected_value_after_useful_life |
+ + Currency | ++ Expected Value After Useful Life + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 19 | +opening_accumulated_depreciation |
+ + Currency | ++ Opening Accumulated Depreciation + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 20 | +value_after_depreciation |
+ + Currency | ++ Value After Depreciation + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 21 | +column_break_11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 22 | +depreciation_method |
+ + Select | ++ Depreciation Method + + | +
+ +Straight Line +Double Declining Balance +Manual+ |
+
| 23 | +total_number_of_depreciations |
+ + Int | ++ Total Number of Depreciations + + | ++ |
| 24 | +number_of_depreciations_booked |
+ + Int | ++ Number of Depreciations Booked + + | ++ |
| 25 | +frequency_of_depreciation |
+ + Int | ++ Frequency of Depreciation (Months) + + | ++ |
| 26 | +next_depreciation_date |
+ + Date | ++ Next Depreciation Date + + | ++ |
| 27 | +section_break_14 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Depreciation Schedule + + | ++ |
| 28 | +schedules |
+ + Table | ++ Depreciation Schedules + + | ++ + + + +Depreciation Schedule + + + + | +
| 29 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Asset + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.asset.asset
+ + + + + + + +Class Asset
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + delete_depreciation_entries + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_depreciation_amount + (self, depreciable_value) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_status + (self) +
+Returns status based on whether it is draft, submitted, scrapped or depreciated
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_depreciation_schedule + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_accumulated_depreciation + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_missing_values + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_status + (self, status=None) +
+Get and update status
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_asset_values + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_cancellation + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_expected_value_after_useful_life + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_item + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.asset.asset.get_item_details
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.asset.asset.get_item_details + (item_code) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.asset.asset.make_purchase_invoice
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.asset.asset.make_purchase_invoice + (asset, item_code, gross_purchase_amount, company, posting_date) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.asset.asset.make_sales_invoice
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.asset.asset.make_sales_invoice + (asset, item_code, company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.asset.asset.transfer_asset
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.asset.asset.transfer_asset + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Asset + + + + + +
- + + +Asset Movement + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice Item + + + + +
Asset Category
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabAsset Category
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +asset_category_name |
+ + Data | ++ Asset Category Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +depreciation_method |
+ + Select | ++ Depreciation Method + + | +
+ +Straight Line +Double Declining Balance+ |
+
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +total_number_of_depreciations |
+ + Int | ++ Total Number of Depreciations + + | ++ |
| 5 | +frequency_of_depreciation |
+ + Int | ++ Frequency of Depreciation (Months) + + | ++ |
| 6 | +section_break_2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Accounts + + | ++ |
| 7 | +accounts |
+ + Table | ++ Accounts + + | ++ + + + +Asset Category Account + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.asset_category.asset_category
+ + + + + + + +Class AssetCategory
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+ + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/accounts/asset_category_account.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/accounts/asset_category_account.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..68ea0457 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/accounts/asset_category_account.html @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ + + + + + + + +Asset Category Account
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabAsset Category Account
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +company_name |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 2 | +fixed_asset_account |
+ + Link | ++ Fixed Asset Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 3 | +accumulated_depreciation_account |
+ + Link | ++ Accumulated Depreciation Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 4 | +depreciation_expense_account |
+ + Link | ++ Depreciation Expense Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Asset Category + + + +
Asset Movement
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabAsset Movement
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +asset |
+ + Link | ++ Asset + + | ++ + + + +Asset + + + + | +
| 2 | +transaction_date |
+ + Datetime | ++ Transaction Date + + | ++ |
| 3 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 4 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +source_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Source Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 6 | +target_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Target Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 7 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Asset Movement + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.asset_movement.asset_movement
+ + + + + + + +Class AssetMovement
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_latest_warehouse_in_asset + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_asset + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_warehouses + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Asset Movement + + + + +
Bank Guarantee
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabBank Guarantee
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 2 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 3 | +account |
+ + Link | ++ Bank Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 4 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | ++ |
| 5 | +column_break_6 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +start_date |
+ + Date | ++ Start Date + + | ++ |
| 7 | +validity |
+ + Int | ++ Validity in Days + + | ++ |
| 8 | +end_date |
+ + Date | ++ End Date + + | ++ |
| 9 | +bank_guarantee_number |
+ + Data | ++ Bank Guarantee Number + + | ++ |
| 10 | +section_break_10 |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | ++ |
| 11 | +more_information |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Notes + + | ++ |
| 12 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Bank Guarantee + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.bank_guarantee.bank_guarantee
+ + + + + + + +Class BankGuarantee
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Bank Guarantee + + + + +
Bank Reconciliation
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +bank_account |
+ + Link | +
+ Bank Account
+ + Select account head of the bank where cheque was deposited. + |
+ + + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 2 | +account_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Account Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 3 | +from_date |
+ + Date | ++ From Date + + | ++ |
| 4 | +to_date |
+ + Date | ++ To Date + + | ++ |
| 5 | +include_reconciled_entries |
+ + Check | ++ Include Reconciled Entries + + | ++ |
| 6 | +get_payment_entries |
+ + Button | ++ Get Payment Entries + + | ++ |
| 7 | +payment_entries |
+ + Table | ++ Payment Entries + + | ++ + + + +Bank Reconciliation Detail + + + + | +
| 8 | +update_clearance_date |
+ + Button | ++ Update Clearance Date + + | ++ |
| 9 | +total_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Amount + + | +
+ account_currency+ |
+
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.bank_reconciliation.bank_reconciliation
+ + + + + + + +Class BankReconciliation
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + get_payment_entries + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_clearance_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/accounts/bank_reconciliation_detail.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/accounts/bank_reconciliation_detail.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..698b01ae --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/accounts/bank_reconciliation_detail.html @@ -0,0 +1,184 @@ + + + + + + + +
Bank Reconciliation Detail
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabBank Reconciliation Detail
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +payment_document |
+ + Link | ++ Payment Document + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 2 | +payment_entry |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Payment Entry + + | +
+ payment_document+ |
+
| 3 | +against_account |
+ + Data | ++ Against Account + + | ++ |
| 4 | +amount |
+ + Data | ++ Amount + + | ++ |
| 5 | +column_break_5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 7 | +cheque_number |
+ + Data | ++ Cheque Number + + | ++ |
| 8 | +cheque_date |
+ + Date | ++ Cheque Date + + | ++ |
| 9 | +clearance_date |
+ + Date | ++ Clearance Date + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Bank Reconciliation + + + +
Budget
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabBudget
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +budget_against |
+ + Select | ++ Budget Against + + | +
+ +Cost Center +Project+ |
+
| 2 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 3 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 4 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 5 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 6 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +action_if_annual_budget_exceeded |
+ + Select | ++ Action if Annual Budget Exceeded + + | +
+ +Stop +Warn +Ignore+ |
+
| 8 | +action_if_accumulated_monthly_budget_exceeded |
+ + Select | ++ Action if Accumulated Monthly Budget Exceeded + + | +
+ +Stop +Warn +Ignore+ |
+
| 9 | +monthly_distribution |
+ + Link | ++ Monthly Distribution + + | ++ + + + +Monthly Distribution + + + + | +
| 10 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Budget + + + + | +
| 11 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +accounts |
+ + Table | ++ Budget Accounts + + | ++ + + + +Budget Account + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.budget.budget
+ + + + + + + +Class Budget
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_null_value + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_accounts + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_duplicate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + +
Class BudgetError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class DuplicateBudgetError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.budget.budget.compare_expense_with_budget + (args, budget_amount, action_for, action, budget_against) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.budget.budget.get_accumulated_monthly_budget + (monthly_distribution, posting_date, fiscal_year, annual_budget) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.budget.budget.get_actual_expense + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.budget.budget.validate_budget_records + (args, budget_records) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.budget.budget.validate_expense_against_budget + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Budget + + + + +
Budget Account
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabBudget Account
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +account |
+ + Link | ++ Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 2 | +budget_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Budget Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Budget + + + +
C-Form
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabC-Form
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ C-FORM-+ |
+
| 3 | +c_form_no |
+ + Data | ++ C-Form No + + | ++ |
| 4 | +received_date |
+ + Date | ++ Received Date + + | ++ |
| 5 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 6 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 8 | +quarter |
+ + Select | ++ Quarter + + | +
+ +I +II +III +IV+ |
+
| 9 | +total_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 10 | +state |
+ + Data | ++ State + + | ++ |
| 11 | +section_break0 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +invoices |
+ + Table | ++ Invoices + + | ++ + + + +C-Form Invoice Detail + + + + | +
| 13 | +total_invoiced_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Invoiced Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 14 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +C-Form + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.c_form.c_form
+ + + + + + + +Class CForm
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + before_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_invoice_details + (self, invoice_no) +
+Pull details from invoices for referrence
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+Update C-Form No on invoices
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_cform_in_sales_invoices + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_total_invoiced_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+Validate invoice that c-form is applicable + and no other c-form is received for that
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +C-Form + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + + +
C-Form Invoice Detail
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabC-Form Invoice Detail
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +invoice_no |
+ + Link | ++ Invoice No + + | ++ + + + +Sales Invoice + + + + | +
| 2 | +invoice_date |
+ + Date | ++ Invoice Date + + | ++ |
| 3 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 4 | +net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 5 | +grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +C-Form + + + +
Cheque Print Template
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabCheque Print Template
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +settings |
+ + HTML | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +has_print_format |
+ + Check | ++ Has Print Format + + | ++ |
| 3 | +primary_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Primary Settings + + | ++ |
| 4 | +bank_name |
+ + Data | ++ Bank Name + + | ++ |
| 5 | +cheque_size |
+ + Select | ++ Cheque Size + + | +
+ +Regular +A4+ |
+
| 6 | +starting_position_from_top_edge |
+ + Float | ++ Starting position from top edge + + | ++ |
| 7 | +cheque_width |
+ + Float | ++ Cheque Width + + | ++ |
| 8 | +cheque_height |
+ + Float | ++ Cheque Height + + | ++ |
| 9 | +scanned_cheque |
+ + Attach | ++ Scanned Cheque + + | ++ |
| 10 | +column_break_5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +is_account_payable |
+ + Check | ++ Is Account Payable + + | ++ |
| 12 | +acc_pay_dist_from_top_edge |
+ + Float | ++ Distance from top edge + + | ++ |
| 13 | +acc_pay_dist_from_left_edge |
+ + Float | ++ Distance from left edge + + | ++ |
| 14 | +message_to_show |
+ + Data | ++ Message to show + + | ++ |
| 15 | +date_and_payer_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 16 | +date_settings |
+ + HTML | ++ Date Settings + + | ++ |
| 17 | +date_dist_from_top_edge |
+ + Float | ++ Distance from top edge + + | ++ |
| 18 | +date_dist_from_left_edge |
+ + Float | ++ Starting location from left edge + + | ++ |
| 19 | +payer_settings |
+ + Column Break | ++ Payer Settings + + | ++ |
| 20 | +payer_name_from_top_edge |
+ + Float | ++ Distance from top edge + + | ++ |
| 21 | +payer_name_from_left_edge |
+ + Float | ++ Starting location from left edge + + | ++ |
| 22 | +amount_in_words_and_figure_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +html_19 |
+ + HTML | ++ + + | ++ |
| 24 | +amt_in_words_from_top_edge |
+ + Float | ++ Distance from top edge + + | ++ |
| 25 | +amt_in_words_from_left_edge |
+ + Float | ++ Starting location from left edge + + | ++ |
| 26 | +amt_in_word_width |
+ + Float | ++ Width of amount in word + + | ++ |
| 27 | +amt_in_words_line_spacing |
+ + Float | ++ Line spacing for amount in words + + | ++ |
| 28 | +amount_in_figure |
+ + Column Break | ++ Amount In Figure + + | ++ |
| 29 | +amt_in_figures_from_top_edge |
+ + Float | ++ Distance from top edge + + | ++ |
| 30 | +amt_in_figures_from_left_edge |
+ + Float | ++ Starting location from left edge + + | ++ |
| 31 | +account_number_and_signatory_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 32 | +account_no_settings |
+ + HTML | ++ + + | ++ |
| 33 | +acc_no_dist_from_top_edge |
+ + Float | ++ Distance from top edge + + | ++ |
| 34 | +acc_no_dist_from_left_edge |
+ + Float | ++ Starting location from left edge + + | ++ |
| 35 | +signatory_position |
+ + Column Break | ++ Signatory Position + + | ++ |
| 36 | +signatory_from_top_edge |
+ + Float | ++ Distance from top edge + + | ++ |
| 37 | +signatory_from_left_edge |
+ + Float | ++ Starting location from left edge + + | ++ |
| 38 | +preview |
+ + Section Break | ++ Preview + + | ++ |
| 39 | +cheque_print_preview |
+ + HTML | ++ + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.cheque_print_template.cheque_print_template
+ + + + + + + +Class ChequePrintTemplate
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.cheque_print_template.cheque_print_template.create_or_update_cheque_print_format
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.cheque_print_template.cheque_print_template.create_or_update_cheque_print_format + (template_name) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/accounts/cost_center.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/accounts/cost_center.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..046904d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/accounts/cost_center.html @@ -0,0 +1,550 @@ + + + + + + + +
Cost Center
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabCost Center
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +sb0 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +cost_center_name |
+ + Data | ++ Cost Center Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +parent_cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Parent Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 4 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 5 | +cb0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +is_group |
+ + Check | ++ Is Group + + | ++ |
| 7 | +lft |
+ + Int | ++ lft + + | ++ |
| 8 | +rgt |
+ + Int | ++ rgt + + | ++ |
| 9 | +old_parent |
+ + Link | ++ old_parent + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.cost_center.cost_center
+ + + + + + + +Class CostCenter
+ +Inherits from frappe.utils.nestedset.NestedSet + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + after_rename + (self, olddn, newdn, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + before_rename + (self, olddn, newdn, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_gle_exists + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_if_child_exists + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + convert_group_to_ledger + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + convert_ledger_to_group + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_mandatory + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Budget + + + + + +
- + + +Company + + + + + +
- + + +Cost Center + + + + + +
- + + +Delivery Note Item + + + + + +
- + + +Expense Claim + + + + + +
- + + +GL Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Item + + + + + +
- + + +Item Group + + + + + +
- + + +Journal Entry Account + + + + + +
- + + +Payment Entry Deduction + + + + + +
- + + +POS Profile + + + + + +
- + + +Process Payroll + + + + + +
- + + +Project + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Taxes and Charges + + + + + +
- + + +Shipping Rule + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Entry Detail + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Reconciliation + + + + +
Depreciation Schedule
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabDepreciation Schedule
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +schedule_date |
+ + Date | ++ Schedule Date + + | ++ |
| 2 | +depreciation_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Depreciation Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +accumulated_depreciation_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Accumulated Depreciation Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 5 | +journal_entry |
+ + Link | ++ Journal Entry + + | ++ + + + +Journal Entry + + + + | +
| 6 | +make_depreciation_entry |
+ + Button | ++ Make Depreciation Entry + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Asset + + + +
Fiscal Year
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabFiscal Year
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +year |
+ + Data | +
+ Year Name
+ + For e.g. 2012, 2012-13 + |
+ + |
| 2 | +disabled |
+ + Check | ++ Disabled + + | ++ |
| 3 | +year_start_date |
+ + Date | ++ Year Start Date + + | ++ |
| 4 | +year_end_date |
+ + Date | ++ Year End Date + + | ++ |
| 5 | +companies |
+ + Table | ++ Companies + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year Company + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.fiscal_year.fiscal_year
+ + + + + + + +Class FiscalYear
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_as_default + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_dates + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_overlap + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.fiscal_year.fiscal_year.auto_create_fiscal_year
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.fiscal_year.fiscal_year.auto_create_fiscal_year + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.fiscal_year.fiscal_year.check_duplicate_fiscal_year
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.fiscal_year.fiscal_year.check_duplicate_fiscal_year + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Budget + + + + + +
- + + +GL Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Global Defaults + + + + + +
- + + +Monthly Distribution + + + + + +
- + + +Period Closing Voucher + + + + + +
- + + +Request for Quotation + + + + + +
- + + +Target Detail + + + + +
Fiscal Year Company
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabFiscal Year Company
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Fiscal Year + + + +
GL Entry
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabGL Entry
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 2 | +transaction_date |
+ + Date | ++ Transaction Date + + | ++ |
| 3 | +account |
+ + Link | ++ Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 4 | +party_type |
+ + Link | ++ Party Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 5 | +party |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Party + + | +
+ party_type+ |
+
| 6 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 7 | +debit |
+ + Currency | ++ Debit Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 8 | +credit |
+ + Currency | ++ Credit Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 9 | +account_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Account Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 10 | +debit_in_account_currency |
+ + Currency | ++ Debit Amount in Account Currency + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 11 | +credit_in_account_currency |
+ + Currency | ++ Credit Amount in Account Currency + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 12 | +against |
+ + Text | ++ Against + + | ++ |
| 13 | +against_voucher_type |
+ + Link | ++ Against Voucher Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 14 | +against_voucher |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Against Voucher + + | +
+ against_voucher_type+ |
+
| 15 | +voucher_type |
+ + Link | ++ Voucher Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 16 | +voucher_no |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Voucher No + + | +
+ voucher_type+ |
+
| 17 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 18 | +remarks |
+ + Text | ++ Remarks + + | ++ |
| 19 | +is_opening |
+ + Select | ++ Is Opening + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 20 | +is_advance |
+ + Select | ++ Is Advance + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 21 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 22 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.gl_entry.gl_entry
+ + + + + + + +Class GLEntry
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + check_mandatory + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_pl_account + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update_with_args + (self, adv_adj, update_outstanding=Yes, from_repost=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + pl_must_have_cost_center + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_account_details + (self, adv_adj) +
+Account must be ledger, active and not freezed
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_and_set_fiscal_year + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_cost_center + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_currency + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_party + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.gl_entry.gl_entry.check_freezing_date + (posting_date, adv_adj=False) +
+ Nobody can do GL Entries where posting date is before freezing date
+ except authorized person
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.gl_entry.gl_entry.update_against_account + (voucher_type, voucher_no) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.gl_entry.gl_entry.update_outstanding_amt + (account, party_type, party, against_voucher_type, against_voucher, on_cancel=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.gl_entry.gl_entry.validate_balance_type + (account, adv_adj=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.gl_entry.gl_entry.validate_frozen_account + (account, adv_adj=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/accounts/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/accounts/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0102ee9c --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/accounts/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
Module accounts
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+DocTypes for accounts
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/accounts/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/accounts/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/accounts/journal_entry.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/accounts/journal_entry.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..72f75c49 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/accounts/journal_entry.html @@ -0,0 +1,1456 @@ + + + + + + + +Journal Entry
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabJournal Entry
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +entry_type_and_date |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-flag+ |
+
| 2 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 3 | +voucher_type |
+ + Select | ++ Entry Type + + | +
+ Journal Entry +Bank Entry +Cash Entry +Credit Card Entry +Debit Note +Credit Note +Contra Entry +Excise Entry +Write Off Entry +Opening Entry +Depreciation Entry+ |
+
| 4 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ JV-+ |
+
| 5 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 7 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 8 | +2_add_edit_gl_entries |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-table+ |
+
| 9 | +accounts |
+ + Table | ++ Accounting Entries + + | ++ + + + +Journal Entry Account + + + + | +
| 10 | +section_break99 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +cheque_no |
+ + Data | ++ Reference Number + + | ++ |
| 12 | +cheque_date |
+ + Date | ++ Reference Date + + | ++ |
| 13 | +user_remark |
+ + Small Text | ++ User Remark + + | ++ |
| 14 | +column_break99 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +total_debit |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Debit + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 16 | +total_credit |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Credit + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 17 | +difference |
+ + Currency | ++ Difference (Dr - Cr) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 18 | +get_balance |
+ + Button | ++ Make Difference Entry + + | ++ |
| 19 | +multi_currency |
+ + Check | ++ Multi Currency + + | ++ |
| 20 | +total_amount_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Total Amount Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 21 | +total_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Amount + + | +
+ total_amount_currency+ |
+
| 22 | +total_amount_in_words |
+ + Data | ++ Total Amount in Words + + | ++ |
| 23 | +reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Reference + + | +
+ fa fa-pushpin+ |
+
| 24 | +clearance_date |
+ + Date | ++ Clearance Date + + | ++ |
| 25 | +remark |
+ + Small Text | ++ Remark + + | ++ |
| 26 | +column_break98 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 27 | +bill_no |
+ + Data | ++ Bill No + + | ++ |
| 28 | +bill_date |
+ + Date | ++ Bill Date + + | ++ |
| 29 | +due_date |
+ + Date | ++ Due Date + + | ++ |
| 30 | +write_off |
+ + Section Break | ++ Write Off + + | ++ |
| 31 | +write_off_based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Write Off Based On + + | +
+ Accounts Receivable +Accounts Payable+ |
+
| 32 | +get_outstanding_invoices |
+ + Button | ++ Get Outstanding Invoices + + | +
+ get_outstanding_invoices+ |
+
| 33 | +column_break_30 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 34 | +write_off_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Write Off Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 35 | +printing_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Printing Settings + + | ++ |
| 36 | +pay_to_recd_from |
+ + Data | ++ Pay To / Recd From + + | ++ |
| 37 | +column_break_35 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 38 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 39 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 40 | +addtional_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ fa fa-file-text+ |
+
| 41 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 42 | +is_opening |
+ + Select | ++ Is Opening + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 43 | +stock_entry |
+ + Link | ++ Stock Entry + + | ++ + + + +Stock Entry + + + + | +
| 44 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Journal Entry + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry
+ + + + + + + +Class JournalEntry
+ +Inherits from erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.AccountsController + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_credit_limit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + create_remarks + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_balance + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_outstanding_invoices + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_title + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_values + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_gl_entries + (self, cancel=0, adv_adj=0) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_account_and_party_balance + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_against_account + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_amounts_in_company_currency + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_exchange_rate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_print_format_fields + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_total_amount + (self, amt, currency) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_total_debit_credit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + unlink_advance_entry_reference + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + unlink_asset_reference + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_advance_paid + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_employee_loan + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_expense_claim + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_against_jv + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_cheque_info + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_credit_debit_note + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_empty_accounts_table + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_entries_for_advance + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_expense_claim + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_invoices + (self) +
+Validate totals and docstatus for invoices
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_multi_currency + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_orders + (self) +
+Validate totals, closed and docstatus for orders
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_party + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_reference_doc + (self) +
+Validates reference document
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_total_debit_and_credit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_account_balance_and_party_type
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_account_balance_and_party_type + (account, date, company, debit=None, credit=None, exchange_rate=None) +
+Returns dict of account balance and party type to be set in Journal Entry on selection of account.
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_against_jv + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_average_exchange_rate
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_average_exchange_rate + (account) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_default_bank_cash_account
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_default_bank_cash_account + (company, account_type=None, mode_of_payment=None, account=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_exchange_rate
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_exchange_rate + (posting_date, account=None, account_currency=None, company=None, reference_type=None, reference_name=None, debit=None, credit=None, exchange_rate=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_opening_accounts
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_opening_accounts + (company) +
+get all balance sheet accounts for opening entry
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_outstanding
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_outstanding + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_party_account_and_balance
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_party_account_and_balance + (company, party_type, party) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_payment_entry + (ref_doc, args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_payment_entry_against_invoice
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_payment_entry_against_invoice + (dt, dn, amount=None, debit_in_account_currency=None, journal_entry=False, bank_account=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_payment_entry_against_order
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.journal_entry.journal_entry.get_payment_entry_against_order + (dt, dn, amount=None, debit_in_account_currency=None, journal_entry=False, bank_account=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Asset + + + + + +
- + + +Depreciation Schedule + + + + + +
- + + +Journal Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Salary Slip + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Entry + + + + +
Journal Entry Account
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabJournal Entry Account
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +account |
+ + Link | ++ Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 2 | +account_type |
+ + Data | ++ Account Type + + | ++ |
| 3 | +balance |
+ + Currency | ++ Account Balance + + | +
+ account_currency+ |
+
| 4 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | +
+ Cost Center
+ + If Income or Expense + |
+ + + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 5 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +party_type |
+ + Link | ++ Party Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 7 | +party |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Party + + | +
+ party_type+ |
+
| 8 | +party_balance |
+ + Currency | ++ Party Balance + + | +
+ account_currency+ |
+
| 9 | +currency_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Currency + + | ++ |
| 10 | +account_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Account Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 11 | +column_break_10 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +exchange_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Exchange Rate + + | ++ |
| 13 | +sec_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Amount + + | ++ |
| 14 | +debit_in_account_currency |
+ + Currency | ++ Debit + + | +
+ account_currency+ |
+
| 15 | +debit |
+ + Currency | ++ Debit in Company Currency + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 16 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 17 | +credit_in_account_currency |
+ + Currency | ++ Credit + + | +
+ account_currency+ |
+
| 18 | +credit |
+ + Currency | ++ Credit in Company Currency + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 19 | +reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Reference + + | ++ |
| 20 | +reference_type |
+ + Select | ++ Reference Type + + | +
+ +Sales Invoice +Purchase Invoice +Journal Entry +Sales Order +Purchase Order +Expense Claim +Asset +Employee Loan+ |
+
| 21 | +reference_name |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Reference Name + + | +
+ reference_type+ |
+
| 22 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 23 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 24 | +is_advance |
+ + Select | ++ Is Advance + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 25 | +against_account |
+ + Text | ++ Against Account + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Journal Entry + + + +
Mode of Payment
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabMode of Payment
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +mode_of_payment |
+ + Data | ++ Mode of Payment + + | ++ |
| 2 | +type |
+ + Select | ++ Type + + | +
+ Cash +Bank +General+ |
+
| 3 | +accounts |
+ + Table | ++ Accounts + + | ++ + + + +Mode of Payment Account + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.mode_of_payment.mode_of_payment
+ + + + + + + +Class ModeofPayment
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_accounts + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_repeating_companies + (self) +
+Error when Same Company is entered multiple times in accounts
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Employee Loan + + + + + +
- + + +Expense Claim + + + + + +
- + + +Payment Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Salary Structure + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice Payment + + + + +
Mode of Payment Account
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabMode of Payment Account
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 2 | +default_account |
+ + Link | +
+ Default Account
+ + Default Bank / Cash account will be automatically updated in POS Invoice when this mode is selected. + |
+ + + + + +Account + + + + | +
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Mode of Payment + + + +
Monthly Distribution
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabMonthly Distribution
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +distribution_id |
+ + Data | +
+ Distribution Name
+ + Name of the Monthly Distribution + |
+ + |
| 2 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 3 | +percentages |
+ + Table | ++ Monthly Distribution Percentages + + | ++ + + + +Monthly Distribution Percentage + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.monthly_distribution.monthly_distribution
+ + + + + + + +Class MonthlyDistribution
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + get_months + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Budget + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Partner + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Person + + + + + +
- + + +Territory + + + + +
Monthly Distribution Percentage
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabMonthly Distribution Percentage
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +month |
+ + Data | ++ Month + + | ++ |
| 2 | +percentage_allocation |
+ + Float | ++ Percentage Allocation + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Monthly Distribution + + + +
Party Account
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabParty Account
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 2 | +account |
+ + Link | ++ Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Customer + + + +
- + + +Customer Group + + + +
- + + +Supplier + + + +
- + + +Supplier Type + + + +
Payment Entry
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPayment Entry
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +type_of_payment |
+ + Section Break | ++ Type of Payment + + | ++ |
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ PE-+ |
+
| 3 | +payment_type |
+ + Select | ++ Payment Type + + | +
+ Receive +Pay +Internal Transfer+ |
+
| 4 | +column_break_5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 6 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 7 | +mode_of_payment |
+ + Link | ++ Mode of Payment + + | ++ + + + +Mode of Payment + + + + | +
| 8 | +party_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Payment From / To + + | ++ |
| 9 | +party_type |
+ + Link | ++ Party Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 10 | +party |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Party + + | +
+ party_type+ |
+
| 11 | +column_break_11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +party_name |
+ + Data | ++ Party Name + + | ++ |
| 13 | +payment_accounts_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Accounts + + | ++ |
| 14 | +party_balance |
+ + Currency | ++ Party Balance + + | ++ |
| 15 | +paid_from |
+ + Link | ++ Account Paid From + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 16 | +paid_from_account_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Account Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 17 | +paid_from_account_balance |
+ + Currency | ++ Account Balance + + | +
+ paid_from_account_currency+ |
+
| 18 | +column_break_18 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +paid_to |
+ + Link | ++ Account Paid To + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 20 | +paid_to_account_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Account Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 21 | +paid_to_account_balance |
+ + Currency | ++ Account Balance + + | +
+ paid_to_account_currency+ |
+
| 22 | +payment_amounts_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Amount + + | ++ |
| 23 | +paid_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Paid Amount + + | +
+ paid_from_account_currency+ |
+
| 24 | +source_exchange_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Exchange Rate + + | ++ |
| 25 | +base_paid_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Paid Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 26 | +column_break_21 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 27 | +received_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Received Amount + + | +
+ paid_to_account_currency+ |
+
| 28 | +target_exchange_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Exchange Rate + + | ++ |
| 29 | +base_received_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Received Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 30 | +section_break_14 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Reference + + | ++ |
| 31 | +allocate_payment_amount |
+ + Check | ++ Allocate Payment Amount + + | ++ |
| 32 | +references |
+ + Table | ++ Payment References + + | ++ + + + +Payment Entry Reference + + + + | +
| 33 | +section_break_34 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Writeoff + + | ++ |
| 34 | +total_allocated_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Allocated Amount + + | ++ |
| 35 | +base_total_allocated_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Allocated Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 36 | +set_exchange_gain_loss |
+ + Button | ++ Set Exchange Gain / Loss + + | ++ |
| 37 | +column_break_36 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 38 | +unallocated_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Unallocated Amount + + | ++ |
| 39 | +difference_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Difference Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 40 | +write_off_difference_amount |
+ + Button | ++ Write Off Difference Amount + + | ++ |
| 41 | +deductions_or_loss_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Deductions or Loss + + | ++ |
| 42 | +deductions |
+ + Table | ++ Payment Deductions or Loss + + | ++ + + + +Payment Entry Deduction + + + + | +
| 43 | +transaction_references |
+ + Section Break | ++ Transaction ID + + | ++ |
| 44 | +reference_no |
+ + Data | ++ Cheque/Reference No + + | ++ |
| 45 | +column_break_23 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 46 | +reference_date |
+ + Date | ++ Cheque/Reference Date + + | ++ |
| 47 | +clearance_date |
+ + Date | ++ Clearance Date + + | ++ |
| 48 | +section_break_12 |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | ++ |
| 49 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 50 | +remarks |
+ + Small Text | ++ Remarks + + | ++ |
| 51 | +column_break_16 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 52 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 53 | +print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 54 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Payment Entry + + + + | +
| 55 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_entry.payment_entry
+ + + + + + + +Class InvalidPaymentEntry
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class PaymentEntry
+ +Inherits from erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.AccountsController + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + add_bank_gl_entries + (self, gl_entries) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + add_deductions_gl_entries + (self, gl_entries) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + add_party_gl_entries + (self, gl_entries) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + clear_unallocated_reference_document_rows + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + delink_advance_entry_references + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_gl_entries + (self, cancel=0, adv_adj=0) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_amounts + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_amounts_in_company_currency + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_difference_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_exchange_rate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_missing_ref_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_missing_values + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_remarks + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_title + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_total_allocated_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_unallocated_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + setup_party_account_field + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_advance_paid + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_account_type + (self, account, account_types) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_allocated_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_bank_accounts + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_duplicate_entry + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_journal_entry + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_mandatory + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_party_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_payment_against_negative_invoice + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_payment_type + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_reference_documents + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_transaction_reference + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_entry.payment_entry.get_account_details
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_entry.payment_entry.get_account_details + (account, date) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_entry.payment_entry.get_company_defaults
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_entry.payment_entry.get_company_defaults + (company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_entry.payment_entry.get_negative_outstanding_invoices + (party_type, party, party_account, total_field) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_entry.payment_entry.get_orders_to_be_billed + (posting_date, party_type, party, party_account_currency, company_currency) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_entry.payment_entry.get_outstanding_reference_documents
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_entry.payment_entry.get_outstanding_reference_documents + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_entry.payment_entry.get_party_details
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_entry.payment_entry.get_party_details + (company, party_type, party, date) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_entry.payment_entry.get_payment_entry
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_entry.payment_entry.get_payment_entry + (dt, dn, party_amount=None, bank_account=None, bank_amount=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_entry.payment_entry.get_reference_details
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_entry.payment_entry.get_reference_details + (reference_doctype, reference_name, party_account_currency) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Payment Entry + + + + +
Payment Entry Deduction
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPayment Entry Deduction
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +account |
+ + Link | ++ Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 2 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 3 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Payment Entry + + + +
Payment Entry Reference
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPayment Entry Reference
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +reference_doctype |
+ + Link | ++ Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 2 | +reference_name |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Name + + | +
+ reference_doctype+ |
+
| 3 | +due_date |
+ + Date | ++ Due Date + + | ++ |
| 4 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +total_amount |
+ + Float | ++ Total Amount + + | ++ |
| 6 | +outstanding_amount |
+ + Float | ++ Outstanding + + | ++ |
| 7 | +allocated_amount |
+ + Float | ++ Allocated + + | ++ |
| 8 | +exchange_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Exchange Rate + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Payment Entry + + + +
Payment Gateway Account
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPayment Gateway Account
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +payment_gateway |
+ + Link | ++ Payment Gateway + + | ++ + + + +Payment Gateway + + + + | +
| 2 | +is_default |
+ + Check | ++ Is Default + + | ++ |
| 3 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +payment_account |
+ + Link | ++ Payment Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 5 | +currency |
+ + Read Only | ++ Currency + + | +
+ payment_account.account_currency+ |
+
| 6 | +payment_request_message |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +message |
+ + Small Text | ++ Default Payment Request Message + + | ++ |
| 8 | +message_examples |
+ + HTML | ++ Message Examples + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_gateway_account.payment_gateway_account
+ + + + + + + +Class PaymentGatewayAccount
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_as_default_if_not_set + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_default_payment_gateway + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Payment Request + + + + + +
- + + +Shopping Cart Settings + + + + +
Payment Reconciliation
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 2 | +party_type |
+ + Link | ++ Party Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 3 | +party |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Party + + | +
+ party_type+ |
+
| 4 | +receivable_payable_account |
+ + Link | ++ Receivable / Payable Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 5 | +bank_cash_account |
+ + Link | ++ Bank / Cash Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 6 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +from_date |
+ + Date | ++ From Invoice Date + + | ++ |
| 8 | +to_date |
+ + Date | ++ To Invoice Date + + | ++ |
| 9 | +minimum_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Minimum Invoice Amount + + | ++ |
| 10 | +maximum_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Maximum Invoice Amount + + | ++ |
| 11 | +get_unreconciled_entries |
+ + Button | ++ Get Unreconciled Entries + + | ++ |
| 12 | +sec_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Unreconciled Payment Details + + | ++ |
| 13 | +payments |
+ + Table | ++ Payments + + | ++ + + + +Payment Reconciliation Payment + + + + | +
| 14 | +reconcile |
+ + Button | ++ Reconcile + + | ++ |
| 15 | +sec_break2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Invoice/Journal Entry Details + + | ++ |
| 16 | +invoices |
+ + Table | ++ Invoices + + | ++ + + + +Payment Reconciliation Invoice + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_reconciliation.payment_reconciliation
+ + + + + + + +Class PaymentReconciliation
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + add_invoice_entries + (self, non_reconciled_invoices) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + add_payment_entries + (self, entries) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_condition + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_mandatory_to_fetch + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_invoice_entries + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_jv_entries + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_nonreconciled_payment_entries + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_payment_entries + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_unreconciled_entries + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + reconcile + (self, args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_invoice + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/accounts/payment_reconciliation_invoice.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/accounts/payment_reconciliation_invoice.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8ed2b5e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/accounts/payment_reconciliation_invoice.html @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ + + + + + + + +
Payment Reconciliation Invoice
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPayment Reconciliation Invoice
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +invoice_type |
+ + Select | ++ Invoice Type + + | +
+ Sales Invoice +Purchase Invoice +Journal Entry+ |
+
| 2 | +invoice_number |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Invoice Number + + | +
+ invoice_type+ |
+
| 3 | +invoice_date |
+ + Date | ++ Invoice Date + + | ++ |
| 4 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | ++ |
| 6 | +outstanding_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Outstanding Amount + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Payment Reconciliation + + + +
Payment Reconciliation Payment
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPayment Reconciliation Payment
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +reference_type |
+ + Link | ++ Reference Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 2 | +reference_name |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Reference Name + + | +
+ reference_type+ |
+
| 3 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 4 | +is_advance |
+ + Data | ++ Is Advance + + | ++ |
| 5 | +reference_row |
+ + Data | ++ Reference Row + + | ++ |
| 6 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +invoice_number |
+ + Select | ++ Invoice Number + + | ++ |
| 8 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | ++ |
| 9 | +allocated_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Allocated amount + + | ++ |
| 10 | +sec_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +remark |
+ + Small Text | ++ Remark + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Payment Reconciliation + + + +
Payment Request
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPayment Request
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ PR+ |
+
| 2 | +recipient_and_message |
+ + Section Break | ++ Recipient Message And Payment Details + + | ++ |
| 3 | +print_format |
+ + Select | ++ Print Format + + | ++ |
| 4 | +email_to |
+ + Data | ++ To + + | ++ |
| 5 | +subject |
+ + Data | ++ Subject + + | ++ |
| 6 | +column_break_9 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +payment_gateway_account |
+ + Link | ++ Payment Gateway Account + + | ++ + + + +Payment Gateway Account + + + + | +
| 8 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Transaction Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 9 | +grand_total |
+ + Currency | +
+ Amount
+ + Amount in customer's currency + |
+
+ currency+ |
+
| 10 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +Initiated +Paid +Failed +Cancelled+ |
+
| 11 | +make_sales_invoice |
+ + Check | ++ Make Sales Invoice + + | ++ |
| 12 | +section_break_10 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +message |
+ + Text | ++ Message + + | ++ |
| 14 | +message_examples |
+ + HTML | ++ Message Examples + + | ++ |
| 15 | +mute_email |
+ + Check | ++ Mute Email + + | ++ |
| 16 | +payment_url |
+ + Small Text | ++ payment_url + + | ++ |
| 17 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Payment Gateway Details + + | ++ |
| 18 | +payment_gateway |
+ + Read Only | ++ Payment Gateway + + | +
+ payment_gateway_account.payment_gateway+ |
+
| 19 | +payment_account |
+ + Read Only | ++ Payment Account + + | +
+ payment_gateway_account.payment_account+ |
+
| 20 | +reference_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Reference Details + + | ++ |
| 21 | +reference_doctype |
+ + Link | ++ Reference Doctype + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 22 | +reference_name |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Reference Name + + | +
+ reference_doctype+ |
+
| 23 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Payment Request + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_request.payment_request
+ + + + + + + +Class PaymentRequest
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + check_if_payment_entry_exists + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + create_payment_entry + (self, submit=True) +
+create entry
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_message + (self) +
+return message with payment gateway link
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_payment_success_url + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_payment_url + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_communication_entry + (self) +
+Make communication entry
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_invoice + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_payment_authorized + (self, status=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + send_email + (self) +
+send email with payment link
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_as_cancelled + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_as_paid + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_failed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_payment_request_url + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_currency + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_payment_request + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_reference_document + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_request.payment_request.get_amount + (ref_doc, dt) +
+get amount based on doctype
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_request.payment_request.get_dummy_message + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_request.payment_request.get_gateway_details + (args) +
+return gateway and payment account of default payment gateway
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_request.payment_request.get_payment_gateway_account + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_request.payment_request.get_print_format_list
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_request.payment_request.get_print_format_list + (ref_doctype) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_request.payment_request.make_payment_entry
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_request.payment_request.make_payment_entry + (docname) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_request.payment_request.make_payment_request
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_request.payment_request.make_payment_request + () +
+Make payment request
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_request.payment_request.make_status_as_paid + (doc, method) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_request.payment_request.resend_payment_email
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.payment_request.payment_request.resend_payment_email + (docname) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Payment Request + + + + +
Period Closing Voucher
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPeriod Closing Voucher
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +transaction_date |
+ + Date | ++ Transaction Date + + | ++ |
| 3 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 4 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Closing Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 5 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Period Closing Voucher + + + + | +
| 6 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 7 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +closing_account_head |
+ + Link | +
+ Closing Account Head
+ + The account head under Liability or Equity, in which Profit/Loss will be booked + |
+ + + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 9 | +remarks |
+ + Small Text | ++ Remarks + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.period_closing_voucher.period_closing_voucher
+ + + + + + + +Class PeriodClosingVoucher
+ +Inherits from erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.AccountsController + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + get_pl_balances + (self) +
+Get balance for pl accounts
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_gl_entries + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_account_head + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_posting_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Period Closing Voucher + + + + +
POS Customer Group
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPOS Customer Group
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +POS Profile + + + +
POS Item Group
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPOS Item Group
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +POS Profile + + + +
POS Profile
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPOS Profile
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +user |
+ + Link | ++ Applicable for User + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ [Select]+ |
+
| 3 | +update_stock |
+ + Check | ++ Update Stock + + | ++ |
| 4 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 5 | +campaign |
+ + Link | ++ Campaign + + | ++ + + + +Campaign + + + + | +
| 6 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 8 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 9 | +country |
+ + Read Only | ++ Country + + | +
+ company.country+ |
+
| 10 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 11 | +ignore_pricing_rule |
+ + Check | ++ Ignore Pricing Rule + + | ++ |
| 12 | +allow_delete |
+ + Check | ++ Allow Delete + + | ++ |
| 13 | +allow_user_to_edit_rate |
+ + Check | ++ Allow user to edit Rate + + | ++ |
| 14 | +section_break_11 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +payments |
+ + Table | ++ Sales Invoice Payment + + | ++ + + + +Sales Invoice Payment + + + + | +
| 16 | +section_break_14 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 17 | +item_groups |
+ + Table | ++ Item Groups + + | ++ + + + +POS Item Group + + + + | +
| 18 | +column_break_16 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +customer_groups |
+ + Table | ++ Customer Groups + + | ++ + + + +POS Customer Group + + + + | +
| 20 | +section_break_16 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 21 | +print_format |
+ + Link | ++ Print Format + + | ++ + + + +Print Format + + + + | +
| 22 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 23 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 24 | +tc_name |
+ + Link | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 25 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 26 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 27 | +selling_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 28 | +apply_discount |
+ + Check | ++ Apply Discount + + | ++ |
| 29 | +apply_discount_on |
+ + Select | ++ Apply Discount On + + | +
+ Grand Total +Net Total+ |
+
| 30 | +section_break_19 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 31 | +write_off_account |
+ + Link | ++ Write Off Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 32 | +write_off_cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Write Off Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 33 | +account_for_change_amount |
+ + Link | ++ Account for Change Amount + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 34 | +taxes_and_charges |
+ + Link | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Sales Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 35 | +column_break_23 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 36 | +income_account |
+ + Link | ++ Income Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 37 | +expense_account |
+ + Link | ++ Expense Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 38 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.pos_profile.pos_profile
+ + + + + + + +Class POSProfile
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + before_save + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_for_duplicate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_defaults + (self, include_current_pos=True) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_all_link_fields + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_duplicate_groups + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.pos_profile.pos_profile.get_series
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.pos_profile.pos_profile.get_series + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + + +
Pricing Rule
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPricing Rule
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +applicability_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 3 | +apply_on |
+ + Select | ++ Apply On + + | +
+ +Item Code +Item Group +Brand+ |
+
| 4 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 5 | +brand |
+ + Link | ++ Brand + + | ++ + + + +Brand + + + + | +
| 6 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 7 | +column_break_7 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +priority |
+ + Select | +
+ Priority
+ + Higher the number, higher the priority + |
+
+ +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +10 +11 +12 +13 +14 +15 +16 +17 +18 +19 +20+ |
+
| 9 | +disable |
+ + Check | ++ Disable + + | ++ |
| 10 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +selling |
+ + Check | ++ Selling + + | ++ |
| 12 | +buying |
+ + Check | ++ Buying + + | ++ |
| 13 | +column_break_11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +applicable_for |
+ + Select | ++ Applicable For + + | +
+ +Customer +Customer Group +Territory +Sales Partner +Campaign +Supplier +Supplier Type+ |
+
| 15 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 16 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 17 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 18 | +sales_partner |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Partner + + | ++ + + + +Sales Partner + + + + | +
| 19 | +campaign |
+ + Link | ++ Campaign + + | ++ + + + +Campaign + + + + | +
| 20 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 21 | +supplier_type |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier Type + + | ++ + + + +Supplier Type + + + + | +
| 22 | +section_break_19 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +min_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Min Qty + + | ++ |
| 24 | +column_break_21 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +max_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Max Qty + + | ++ |
| 26 | +section_break_23 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 27 | +valid_from |
+ + Date | ++ Valid From + + | ++ |
| 28 | +valid_upto |
+ + Date | ++ Valid Upto + + | ++ |
| 29 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 30 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 31 | +margin |
+ + Section Break | ++ Margin + + | ++ |
| 32 | +margin_type |
+ + Select | ++ Margin Type + + | +
+ +Percentage +Amount+ |
+
| 33 | +column_break_33 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 34 | +margin_rate_or_amount |
+ + Float | ++ Margin Rate or Amount + + | ++ |
| 35 | +price_discount_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 36 | +price_or_discount |
+ + Select | ++ Price or Discount + + | +
+ +Price +Discount Percentage+ |
+
| 37 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 38 | +price |
+ + Float | ++ Price + + | ++ |
| 39 | +discount_percentage |
+ + Float | ++ Discount on Price List Rate (%) + + | ++ |
| 40 | +for_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ For Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 41 | +help_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 42 | +pricing_rule_help |
+ + HTML | ++ Pricing Rule Help + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.pricing_rule.pricing_rule
+ + + + + + + +Class MultiplePricingRuleConflict
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class PricingRule
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + cleanup_fields_value + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_applicable_for_selling_or_buying + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_mandatory + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_max_discount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_min_max_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_price_or_discount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.pricing_rule.pricing_rule.apply_internal_priority + (pricing_rules, field_set, args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.pricing_rule.pricing_rule.apply_pricing_rule
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.pricing_rule.pricing_rule.apply_pricing_rule + (args) +
+ args = {
+ "items": [{"doctype": "", "name": "", "item_code": "", "brand": "", "item_group": ""}, ...],
+ "customer": "something",
+ "customer_group": "something",
+ "territory": "something",
+ "supplier": "something",
+ "supplier_type": "something",
+ "currency": "something",
+ "conversion_rate": "something",
+ "price_list": "something",
+ "plc_conversion_rate": "something",
+ "company": "something",
+ "transaction_date": "something",
+ "campaign": "something",
+ "sales_partner": "something",
+ "ignore_pricing_rule": "something"
+ }
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.pricing_rule.pricing_rule.filter_pricing_rules + (args, pricing_rules) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.pricing_rule.pricing_rule.get_pricing_rule_for_item + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.pricing_rule.pricing_rule.get_pricing_rules + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.pricing_rule.pricing_rule.get_serial_no_for_item + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.pricing_rule.pricing_rule.if_all_rules_same + (pricing_rules, fields) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.pricing_rule.pricing_rule.remove_pricing_rule_for_item + (pricing_rule, item_details) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.pricing_rule.pricing_rule.remove_pricing_rules
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.pricing_rule.pricing_rule.remove_pricing_rules + (item_list) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.pricing_rule.pricing_rule.set_transaction_type + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Delivery Note Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Order Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt Item + + + + + +
- + + +Quotation Item + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Order Item + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier Quotation Item + + + + +
Purchase Invoice
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPurchase Invoice
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ PINV- +PINV-RET-+ |
+
| 3 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 4 | +supplier_name |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Name + + | ++ |
| 5 | +due_date |
+ + Date | ++ Due Date + + | ++ |
| 6 | +is_paid |
+ + Check | ++ Is Paid + + | ++ |
| 7 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 9 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 10 | +posting_time |
+ + Time | ++ Posting Time + + | ++ |
| 11 | +set_posting_time |
+ + Check | ++ Edit Posting Date and Time + + | ++ |
| 12 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Invoice + + + + | +
| 13 | +supplier_invoice_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Supplier Invoice Details + + | ++ |
| 14 | +bill_no |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Invoice No + + | ++ |
| 15 | +column_break_15 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 16 | +bill_date |
+ + Date | ++ Supplier Invoice Date + + | ++ |
| 17 | +returns |
+ + Section Break | ++ Returns + + | ++ |
| 18 | +is_return |
+ + Check | ++ Is Return + + | ++ |
| 19 | +return_against |
+ + Link | ++ Return Against Purchase Invoice + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Invoice + + + + | +
| 20 | +section_addresses |
+ + Section Break | ++ Address and Contact + + | ++ |
| 21 | +supplier_address |
+ + Link | ++ Select Supplier Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 22 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 23 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 24 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 25 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Small Text | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 26 | +contact_email |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact Email + + | ++ |
| 27 | +col_break_address |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +shipping_address |
+ + Link | ++ Select Shipping Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 29 | +shipping_address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Shipping Address + + | ++ |
| 30 | +currency_and_price_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Currency and Price List + + | +
+ fa fa-tag+ |
+
| 31 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 32 | +conversion_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Exchange Rate + + | ++ |
| 33 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 34 | +buying_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 35 | +price_list_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Price List Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 36 | +plc_conversion_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Price List Exchange Rate + + | ++ |
| 37 | +ignore_pricing_rule |
+ + Check | ++ Ignore Pricing Rule + + | ++ |
| 38 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 39 | +update_stock |
+ + Check | ++ Update Stock + + | ++ |
| 40 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Invoice Item + + + + | +
| 41 | +section_break_26 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 42 | +base_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 43 | +base_net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 44 | +column_break_28 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 45 | +total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 46 | +net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 47 | +taxes_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-money+ |
+
| 48 | +taxes_and_charges |
+ + Link | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 49 | +taxes |
+ + Table | ++ Purchase Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
| 50 | +sec_tax_breakup |
+ + Section Break | ++ Tax Breakup + + | ++ |
| 51 | +other_charges_calculation |
+ + Text | ++ Taxes and Charges Calculation + + | ++ |
| 52 | +totals |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-money+ |
+
| 53 | +base_taxes_and_charges_added |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Added (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 54 | +base_taxes_and_charges_deducted |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Deducted (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 55 | +base_total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 56 | +column_break_40 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 57 | +taxes_and_charges_added |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Added + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 58 | +taxes_and_charges_deducted |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Deducted + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 59 | +total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 60 | +section_break_44 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Additional Discount + + | ++ |
| 61 | +apply_discount_on |
+ + Select | ++ Apply Additional Discount On + + | +
+ +Grand Total +Net Total+ |
+
| 62 | +base_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 63 | +column_break_46 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 64 | +additional_discount_percentage |
+ + Float | ++ Additional Discount Percentage + + | ++ |
| 65 | +discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 66 | +section_break_49 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 67 | +base_grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 68 | +base_in_words |
+ + Data | ++ In Words (Company Currency) + + | ++ |
| 69 | +column_break8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 70 | +grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 71 | +in_words |
+ + Data | ++ In Words + + | ++ |
| 72 | +total_advance |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Advance + + | +
+ party_account_currency+ |
+
| 73 | +outstanding_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Outstanding Amount + + | +
+ party_account_currency+ |
+
| 74 | +payments_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Payments + + | ++ |
| 75 | +mode_of_payment |
+ + Link | ++ Mode of Payment + + | ++ + + + +Mode of Payment + + + + | +
| 76 | +cash_bank_account |
+ + Link | ++ Cash/Bank Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 77 | +col_br_payments |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 78 | +paid_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Paid Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 79 | +base_paid_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Paid Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 80 | +write_off |
+ + Section Break | ++ Write Off + + | ++ |
| 81 | +write_off_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Write Off Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 82 | +base_write_off_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Write Off Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 83 | +column_break_61 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 84 | +write_off_account |
+ + Link | ++ Write Off Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 85 | +write_off_cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Write Off Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 86 | +advances_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Advance Payments + + | +
+ fa fa-money+ |
+
| 87 | +get_advances |
+ + Button | ++ Get Advances Paid + + | ++ |
| 88 | +advances |
+ + Table | ++ Advances + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Invoice Advance + + + + | +
| 89 | +terms_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | +
+ fa fa-legal+ |
+
| 90 | +tc_name |
+ + Link | ++ Terms + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 91 | +terms |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Terms and Conditions1 + + | ++ |
| 92 | +raw_materials_supplied |
+ + Section Break | ++ Raw Materials Supplied + + | ++ |
| 93 | +is_subcontracted |
+ + Select | ++ Raw Materials Supplied + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 94 | +supplier_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 95 | +supplied_items |
+ + Table | ++ Supplied Items + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Receipt Item Supplied + + + + | +
| 96 | +printing_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Printing Settings + + | ++ |
| 97 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 98 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 99 | +language |
+ + Data | ++ Print Language + + | ++ |
| 100 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ fa fa-file-text+ |
+
| 101 | +credit_to |
+ + Link | ++ Credit To + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 102 | +party_account_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Party Account Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 103 | +is_opening |
+ + Select | ++ Is Opening + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 104 | +against_expense_account |
+ + Small Text | ++ Against Expense Account + + | ++ |
| 105 | +column_break_63 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 106 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +Return +Debit Note Issued +Submitted +Paid +Unpaid +Overdue +Cancelled+ |
+
| 107 | +remarks |
+ + Small Text | ++ Remarks + + | ++ |
| 108 | +rejected_warehouse |
+ + Link | +
+ Rejected Warehouse
+ + Warehouse where you are maintaining stock of rejected items + |
+ + + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 109 | +recurring_invoice |
+ + Section Break | ++ Recurring Invoice + + | +
+ fa fa-time+ |
+
| 110 | +is_recurring |
+ + Check | ++ Is Recurring + + | ++ |
| 111 | +recurring_type |
+ + Select | +
+ Recurring Type
+ + Select the period when the invoice will be generated automatically + |
+
+ Monthly +Quarterly +Half-yearly +Yearly+ |
+
| 112 | +from_date |
+ + Date | +
+ From Date
+ + Start date of current invoice's period + |
+ + |
| 113 | +to_date |
+ + Date | +
+ To Date
+ + End date of current invoice's period + |
+ + |
| 114 | +submit_on_creation |
+ + Check | ++ Submit on creation + + | ++ |
| 115 | +notify_by_email |
+ + Check | ++ Notify by email + + | ++ |
| 116 | +repeat_on_day_of_month |
+ + Int | +
+ Repeat on Day of Month
+ + The day of the month on which auto invoice will be generated e.g. 05, 28 etc + |
+ + |
| 117 | +end_date |
+ + Date | +
+ End Date
+ + The date on which recurring invoice will be stop + |
+ + |
| 118 | +column_break_82 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 119 | +next_date |
+ + Date | +
+ Next Date
+ + The date on which next invoice will be generated. It is generated on submit. + |
+ + |
| 120 | +recurring_id |
+ + Data | +
+ Recurring Id
+ + The unique id for tracking all recurring invoices. It is generated on submit. + |
+ + |
| 121 | +notification_email_address |
+ + Small Text | +
+ Notification Email Address
+ + Enter Email Address separated by commas, invoice will be mailed automatically on particular date + |
+ + |
| 122 | +recurring_print_format |
+ + Link | ++ Recurring Print Format + + | ++ + + + +Print Format + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.purchase_invoice.purchase_invoice
+ + + + + + + +Class PurchaseInvoice
+ +Inherits from erpnext.controllers.buying_controller.BuyingController + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_conversion_rate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_for_closed_status + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_prev_docstatus + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + create_remarks + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_gl_entries + (self, warehouse_account=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_gl_entries + (self, gl_entries=None, repost_future_gle=True, from_repost=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_item_gl_entries + (self, gl_entries) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_payment_gl_entries + (self, gl_entries) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_supplier_gl_entry + (self, gl_entries) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_tax_gl_entries + (self, gl_entries) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_write_off_gl_entry + (self, gl_entries) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_recurring + (self, reference_doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + po_required + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + pr_required + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_against_expense_account + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_expense_account + (self, for_validate=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_missing_values + (self, for_validate=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_billing_status_in_pr + (self, update_modified=True) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_fixed_asset + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_project + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_status_updater_args + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_cash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_credit_to_acc + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_fixed_asset_account + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_item_code + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_purchase_receipt_if_update_stock + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_supplier_invoice + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_warehouse + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_with_previous_doc + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_write_off_account + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.purchase_invoice.purchase_invoice.get_fixed_asset_account
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.purchase_invoice.purchase_invoice.get_fixed_asset_account + (asset, account=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.purchase_invoice.purchase_invoice.make_debit_note
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.purchase_invoice.purchase_invoice.make_debit_note + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Asset + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Invoice + + + + +
Purchase Invoice Advance
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPurchase Invoice Advance
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +reference_type |
+ + Link | ++ Reference Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 2 | +reference_name |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Reference Name + + | +
+ reference_type+ |
+
| 3 | +remarks |
+ + Text | ++ Remarks + + | ++ |
| 4 | +reference_row |
+ + Data | ++ Reference Row + + | ++ |
| 5 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +advance_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Advance Amount + + | +
+ party_account_currency+ |
+
| 7 | +allocated_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Allocated Amount + + | +
+ party_account_currency+ |
+
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Purchase Invoice + + + +
Purchase Invoice Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPurchase Invoice Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +description_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 5 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 6 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 7 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 8 | +quantity_and_rate |
+ + Section Break | ++ Quantity and Rate + + | ++ |
| 9 | +received_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Received Qty + + | ++ |
| 10 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty + + | ++ |
| 11 | +rejected_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Rejected Qty + + | ++ |
| 12 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 13 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 15 | +conversion_factor |
+ + Float | ++ Conversion Factor + + | ++ |
| 16 | +stock_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Stock Qty + + | ++ |
| 17 | +sec_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 19 | +discount_percentage |
+ + Percent | ++ Discount on Price List Rate (%) + + | ++ |
| 20 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 21 | +base_price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 22 | +sec_break2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 24 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 25 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 26 | +base_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 27 | +base_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 28 | +pricing_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Pricing Rule + + | ++ + + + +Pricing Rule + + + + | +
| 29 | +section_break_22 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 30 | +net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 31 | +net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 32 | +column_break_25 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 33 | +base_net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 34 | +base_net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 35 | +warehouse_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Warehouse + + | ++ |
| 36 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Accepted Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 37 | +rejected_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Rejected Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 38 | +quality_inspection |
+ + Link | ++ Quality Inspection + + | ++ + + + +Quality Inspection + + + + | +
| 39 | +batch_no |
+ + Link | ++ Batch No + + | ++ + + + +Batch + + + + | +
| 40 | +col_br_wh |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 41 | +serial_no |
+ + Text | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
| 42 | +rejected_serial_no |
+ + Text | ++ Rejected Serial No + + | ++ |
| 43 | +accounting |
+ + Section Break | ++ Accounting + + | ++ |
| 44 | +expense_account |
+ + Link | ++ Expense Head + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 45 | +col_break5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 46 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 47 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 48 | +reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Reference + + | ++ |
| 49 | +allow_zero_valuation_rate |
+ + Check | ++ Allow Zero Valuation Rate + + | ++ |
| 50 | +brand |
+ + Data | ++ Brand + + | ++ |
| 51 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 52 | +item_tax_rate |
+ + Code | +
+ Item Tax Rate
+ + Tax detail table fetched from item master as a string and stored in this field. +Used for Taxes and Charges + |
+ + |
| 53 | +item_tax_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Item Tax Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 54 | +purchase_order |
+ + Link | ++ Purchase Order + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Order + + + + | +
| 55 | +bom |
+ + Link | ++ BOM + + | ++ + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 56 | +col_break6 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 57 | +is_fixed_asset |
+ + Check | ++ Is Fixed Asset + + | ++ |
| 58 | +asset |
+ + Link | ++ Asset + + | ++ + + + +Asset + + + + | +
| 59 | +po_detail |
+ + Data | ++ Purchase Order Item + + | ++ |
| 60 | +purchase_receipt |
+ + Link | ++ Purchase Receipt + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Receipt + + + + | +
| 61 | +page_break |
+ + Check | ++ Page Break + + | ++ |
| 62 | +pr_detail |
+ + Data | ++ PR Detail + + | ++ |
| 63 | +valuation_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Valuation Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 64 | +rm_supp_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Raw Materials Supplied Cost + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 65 | +landed_cost_voucher_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Landed Cost Voucher Amount + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Purchase Invoice + + + +
Purchase Taxes and Charges
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPurchase Taxes and Charges
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +category |
+ + Select | ++ Consider Tax or Charge for + + | +
+ Valuation and Total +Valuation +Total+ |
+
| 2 | +add_deduct_tax |
+ + Select | ++ Add or Deduct + + | +
+ Add +Deduct+ |
+
| 3 | +charge_type |
+ + Select | ++ Type + + | +
+ +Actual +On Net Total +On Previous Row Amount +On Previous Row Total+ |
+
| 4 | +row_id |
+ + Data | ++ Reference Row # + + | ++ |
| 5 | +included_in_print_rate |
+ + Check | +
+ Is this Tax included in Basic Rate?
+ + If checked, the tax amount will be considered as already included in the Print Rate / Print Amount + |
+ + |
| 6 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +account_head |
+ + Link | ++ Account Head + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 8 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 9 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 10 | +section_break_10 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +rate |
+ + Float | ++ Rate + + | ++ |
| 12 | +section_break_9 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +tax_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 14 | +tax_amount_after_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Tax Amount After Discount Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 15 | +total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 16 | +column_break_14 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 17 | +base_tax_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 18 | +base_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 19 | +base_tax_amount_after_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Tax Amount After Discount Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 20 | +item_wise_tax_detail |
+ + Code | ++ Item Wise Tax Detail + + | ++ |
| 21 | +parenttype |
+ + Data | ++ Parenttype + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Purchase Invoice + + + +
- + + +Purchase Order + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt + + + +
- + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges Template + + + +
- + + +Supplier Quotation + + + +
Purchase Taxes and Charges Template
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPurchase Taxes and Charges Template
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 2 | +is_default |
+ + Check | ++ Default + + | ++ |
| 3 | +disabled |
+ + Check | ++ Disabled + + | ++ |
| 4 | +column_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 6 | +section_break6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +taxes |
+ + Table | ++ Purchase Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.purchase_taxes_and_charges_template.purchase_taxes_and_charges_template
+ + + + + + + +Class PurchaseTaxesandChargesTemplate
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Purchase Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Order + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier Quotation + + + + + +
- + + +Tax Rule + + + + +
Salary Component Account
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSalary Component Account
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 2 | +default_account |
+ + Link | +
+ Default Account
+ + Default Bank / Cash account will be automatically updated in Salary Journal Entry when this mode is selected. + |
+ + + + + +Account + + + + | +
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Salary Component + + + +
Sales Invoice
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSales Invoice
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +customer_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-user+ |
+
| 2 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 3 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ SINV- +SINV-RET-+ |
+
| 4 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 5 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ |
| 6 | +tax_id |
+ + Data | ++ Tax Id + + | ++ |
| 7 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 8 | +is_pos |
+ + Check | ++ Include Payment (POS) + + | ++ |
| 9 | +offline_pos_name |
+ + Data | ++ Offline POS Name + + | ++ |
| 10 | +pos_profile |
+ + Link | ++ POS Profile + + | ++ + + + +POS Profile + + + + | +
| 11 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 13 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 14 | +posting_time |
+ + Time | ++ Posting Time + + | ++ |
| 15 | +set_posting_time |
+ + Check | ++ Edit Posting Date and Time + + | ++ |
| 16 | +due_date |
+ + Date | ++ Payment Due Date + + | ++ |
| 17 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Sales Invoice + + + + | +
| 18 | +returns |
+ + Section Break | ++ Returns + + | ++ |
| 19 | +is_return |
+ + Check | ++ Is Return + + | ++ |
| 20 | +return_against |
+ + Link | ++ Return Against Sales Invoice + + | ++ + + + +Sales Invoice + + + + | +
| 21 | +address_and_contact |
+ + Section Break | ++ Address and Contact + + | ++ |
| 22 | +customer_address |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 23 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 24 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 25 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 26 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Small Text | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 27 | +contact_email |
+ + Data | ++ Contact Email + + | +
+ |
+
| 28 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 29 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 30 | +shipping_address_name |
+ + Link | ++ Shipping Address Name + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 31 | +shipping_address |
+ + Small Text | ++ Shipping Address + + | ++ |
| 32 | +company_address |
+ + Link | ++ Company Address Name + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 33 | +company_address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Company Address + + | ++ |
| 34 | +currency_and_price_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Currency and Price List + + | ++ |
| 35 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 36 | +conversion_rate |
+ + Float | +
+ Exchange Rate
+ + Rate at which Customer Currency is converted to customer's base currency + |
+ + |
| 37 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 38 | +selling_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 39 | +price_list_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Price List Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 40 | +plc_conversion_rate |
+ + Float | +
+ Price List Exchange Rate
+ + Rate at which Price list currency is converted to customer's base currency + |
+ + |
| 41 | +ignore_pricing_rule |
+ + Check | ++ Ignore Pricing Rule + + | ++ |
| 42 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 43 | +update_stock |
+ + Check | ++ Update Stock + + | ++ |
| 44 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Sales Invoice Item + + + + | +
| 45 | +packing_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Packing List + + | +
+ fa fa-suitcase+ |
+
| 46 | +packed_items |
+ + Table | ++ Packed Items + + | ++ + + + +Packed Item + + + + | +
| 47 | +product_bundle_help |
+ + HTML | ++ Product Bundle Help + + | ++ |
| 48 | +time_sheet_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Time Sheet List + + | ++ |
| 49 | +timesheets |
+ + Table | ++ Time Sheets + + | ++ + + + +Sales Invoice Timesheet + + + + | +
| 50 | +total_billing_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Billing Amount + + | ++ |
| 51 | +section_break_30 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 52 | +base_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 53 | +base_net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 54 | +column_break_32 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 55 | +net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 56 | +total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 57 | +taxes_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-money+ |
+
| 58 | +taxes_and_charges |
+ + Link | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Sales Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 59 | +column_break_38 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 60 | +shipping_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Shipping Rule + + | ++ + + + +Shipping Rule + + + + | +
| 61 | +section_break_40 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 62 | +taxes |
+ + Table | ++ Sales Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Sales Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
| 63 | +sec_tax_breakup |
+ + Section Break | ++ Tax Breakup + + | ++ |
| 64 | +other_charges_calculation |
+ + Text | ++ Taxes and Charges Calculation + + | ++ |
| 65 | +section_break_43 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 66 | +base_total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 67 | +column_break_47 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 68 | +total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 69 | +section_break_49 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Additional Discount + + | ++ |
| 70 | +apply_discount_on |
+ + Select | ++ Apply Additional Discount On + + | +
+ +Grand Total +Net Total+ |
+
| 71 | +base_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 72 | +column_break_51 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 73 | +additional_discount_percentage |
+ + Float | ++ Additional Discount Percentage + + | ++ |
| 74 | +discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 75 | +totals |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-money+ |
+
| 76 | +base_grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 77 | +base_rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 78 | +base_in_words |
+ + Data | +
+ In Words (Company Currency)
+ + In Words will be visible once you save the Sales Invoice. + |
+ + |
| 79 | +column_break5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 80 | +grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 81 | +rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 82 | +in_words |
+ + Data | ++ In Words + + | ++ |
| 83 | +total_advance |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Advance + + | +
+ party_account_currency+ |
+
| 84 | +outstanding_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Outstanding Amount + + | +
+ party_account_currency+ |
+
| 85 | +advances_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Advance Payments + + | +
+ fa fa-money+ |
+
| 86 | +get_advances |
+ + Button | ++ Get Advances Received + + | ++ |
| 87 | +advances |
+ + Table | ++ Advances + + | ++ + + + +Sales Invoice Advance + + + + | +
| 88 | +payments_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Payments + + | +
+ fa fa-money+ |
+
| 89 | +cash_bank_account |
+ + Link | ++ Cash/Bank Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 90 | +payments |
+ + Table | ++ Sales Invoice Payment + + | ++ + + + +Sales Invoice Payment + + + + | +
| 91 | +section_break_84 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 92 | +base_paid_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Paid Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 93 | +column_break_86 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 94 | +paid_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Paid Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 95 | +section_break_88 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 96 | +base_change_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Base Change Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 97 | +column_break_90 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 98 | +change_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Change Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 99 | +account_for_change_amount |
+ + Link | ++ Account for Change Amount + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 100 | +column_break4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Write Off + + | ++ |
| 101 | +write_off_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Write Off Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 102 | +base_write_off_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Write Off Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 103 | +write_off_outstanding_amount_automatically |
+ + Check | ++ Write Off Outstanding Amount + + | ++ |
| 104 | +column_break_74 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 105 | +write_off_account |
+ + Link | ++ Write Off Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 106 | +write_off_cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Write Off Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 107 | +terms_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Terms + + | ++ |
| 108 | +tc_name |
+ + Link | ++ Terms + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 109 | +terms |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Terms and Conditions Details + + | ++ |
| 110 | +edit_printing_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Printing Settings + + | ++ |
| 111 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 112 | +language |
+ + Data | ++ Print Language + + | ++ |
| 113 | +column_break_84 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 114 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 115 | +more_information |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | ++ |
| 116 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 117 | +campaign |
+ + Link | ++ Campaign + + | ++ + + + +Campaign + + + + | +
| 118 | +col_break23 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 119 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +Return +Credit Note Issued +Submitted +Paid +Unpaid +Overdue +Cancelled+ |
+
| 120 | +source |
+ + Link | ++ Source + + | ++ + + + +Lead Source + + + + | +
| 121 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Accounting Details + + | +
+ fa fa-file-text+ |
+
| 122 | +debit_to |
+ + Link | ++ Debit To + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 123 | +party_account_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Party Account Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 124 | +is_opening |
+ + Select | ++ Is Opening Entry + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 125 | +c_form_applicable |
+ + Select | ++ C-Form Applicable + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 126 | +c_form_no |
+ + Link | ++ C-Form No + + | ++ + + + +C-Form + + + + | +
| 127 | +column_break8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 128 | +remarks |
+ + Small Text | ++ Remarks + + | ++ |
| 129 | +sales_team_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Commission + + | +
+ fa fa-group+ |
+
| 130 | +sales_partner |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Partner + + | ++ + + + +Sales Partner + + + + | +
| 131 | +column_break10 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 132 | +commission_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Commission Rate (%) + + | ++ |
| 133 | +total_commission |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Commission + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 134 | +section_break2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Sales Team + + | ++ |
| 135 | +sales_team |
+ + Table | ++ Sales Team1 + + | ++ + + + +Sales Team + + + + | +
| 136 | +recurring_invoice |
+ + Section Break | ++ Recurring Invoice + + | +
+ fa fa-time+ |
+
| 137 | +column_break11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ Settings + + | ++ |
| 138 | +is_recurring |
+ + Check | ++ Is Recurring + + | ++ |
| 139 | +recurring_id |
+ + Link | ++ Reference Document + + | ++ + + + +Sales Invoice + + + + | +
| 140 | +recurring_type |
+ + Select | ++ Frequency + + | +
+ +Monthly +Quarterly +Half-yearly +Yearly+ |
+
| 141 | +repeat_on_day_of_month |
+ + Int | ++ Repeat on Day of Month + + | ++ |
| 142 | +end_date |
+ + Date | ++ End Date + + | ++ |
| 143 | +submit_on_creation |
+ + Check | ++ Submit on creation + + | ++ |
| 144 | +notify_by_email |
+ + Check | ++ Notify by email + + | ++ |
| 145 | +notification_email_address |
+ + Code | ++ Notification Email Address + + | +
+ |
+
| 146 | +recurring_print_format |
+ + Link | ++ Recurring Print Format + + | ++ + + + +Print Format + + + + | +
| 147 | +column_break12 |
+ + Column Break | ++ This Document + + | ++ |
| 148 | +from_date |
+ + Date | ++ From Date + + | ++ |
| 149 | +to_date |
+ + Date | ++ To Date + + | ++ |
| 150 | +next_date |
+ + Date | ++ Next Date + + | ++ |
| 151 | +against_income_account |
+ + Small Text | ++ Against Income Account + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.sales_invoice.sales_invoice
+ + + + + + + +Class SalesInvoice
+ +Inherits from erpnext.controllers.selling_controller.SellingController + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + add_remarks + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + add_timesheet_data + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + before_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + before_save + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_billing_amount_for_timesheet + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_credit_limit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_prev_docstatus + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + clear_unallocated_mode_of_payments + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_company_abbr + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_gl_entries + (self, warehouse_account=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_warehouse + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_customer_gl_entry + (self, gl_entries) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_gl_entries + (self, gl_entries=None, repost_future_gle=True, from_repost=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_gle_for_change_amount + (self, gl_entries) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_item_gl_entries + (self, gl_entries) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_pos_gl_entries + (self, gl_entries) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_tax_gl_entries + (self, gl_entries) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_write_off_gl_entry + (self, gl_entries) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_recurring + (self, reference_doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_against_income_account + (self) +
+Set against account for debit to account
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_billing_hours_and_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_income_account_for_fixed_assets + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_indicator + (self) +
+Set indicator for portal
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_missing_values + (self, for_validate=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_paid_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_pos_fields + (self, for_validate=False) +
+Set retail related fields from POS Profiles
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_serial_no_against_delivery_note + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + so_dn_required + (self) +
+check in manage account if sales order / delivery note required or not.
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_billing_status_in_dn + (self, update_modified=True) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_current_stock + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_packing_list + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_serial_no + (self, in_cancel=False) +
+update Sales Invoice refrence in Serial No
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_status_updater_args + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_time_sheet + (self, sales_invoice) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_time_sheet_detail + (self, timesheet, args, sales_invoice) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_timesheet_billing_for_project + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_account_for_change_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_auto_set_posting_time + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_c_form + (self) +
+Blank C-form no if C-form applicable marked as 'No'
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_c_form_on_cancel + (self) +
+Display message if C-Form no exists on cancellation of Sales Invoice
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_debit_to_acc + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_delivery_note + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_dropship_item + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_item_code + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_pos + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_pos_paid_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_proj_cust + (self) +
+check for does customer belong to same project as entered..
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_serial_against_delivery_note + (self) +
+ validate if the serial numbers in Sales Invoice Items are same as in
+ Delivery Note Item
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_serial_against_sales_invoice + (self) +
+check if serial number is already used in other sales invoice
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_serial_numbers + (self) +
+ validate serial number agains Delivery Note and Sales Invoice
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_time_sheets_are_submitted + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_warehouse + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_with_previous_doc + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_write_off_account + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.sales_invoice.sales_invoice.get_bank_cash_account
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.sales_invoice.sales_invoice.get_bank_cash_account + (mode_of_payment, company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.sales_invoice.sales_invoice.get_list_context + (context=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.sales_invoice.sales_invoice.make_delivery_note
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.sales_invoice.sales_invoice.make_delivery_note + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.sales_invoice.sales_invoice.make_sales_return
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.sales_invoice.sales_invoice.make_sales_return + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.sales_invoice.sales_invoice.set_account_for_mode_of_payment + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +C-Form Invoice Detail + + + + + +
- + + +Delivery Note Item + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Serial No + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Timesheet + + + + + +
- + + +Timesheet Detail + + + + +
Sales Invoice Advance
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSales Invoice Advance
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +reference_type |
+ + Link | ++ Reference Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 2 | +reference_name |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Reference Name + + | +
+ reference_type+ |
+
| 3 | +remarks |
+ + Text | ++ Remarks + + | ++ |
| 4 | +reference_row |
+ + Data | ++ Reference Row + + | ++ |
| 5 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +advance_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Advance amount + + | +
+ party_account_currency+ |
+
| 7 | +allocated_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Allocated amount + + | +
+ party_account_currency+ |
+
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + +
Sales Invoice Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSales Invoice Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +barcode |
+ + Data | ++ Barcode + + | ++ |
| 2 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 3 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 5 | +customer_item_code |
+ + Data | ++ Customer's Item Code + + | ++ |
| 6 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Edit Description + + | ++ |
| 7 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 8 | +column_break_8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 10 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 11 | +quantity_and_rate |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Quantity + + | ++ |
| 13 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 14 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 16 | +conversion_factor |
+ + Float | ++ UOM Conversion Factor + + | ++ |
| 17 | +stock_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty as per Stock UOM + + | ++ |
| 18 | +section_break_17 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 20 | +base_price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 21 | +discount_and_margin |
+ + Section Break | ++ Discount and Margin + + | ++ |
| 22 | +margin_type |
+ + Select | ++ Margin Type + + | +
+ +Percentage +Amount+ |
+
| 23 | +margin_rate_or_amount |
+ + Float | ++ Margin Rate or Amount + + | ++ |
| 24 | +rate_with_margin |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate With Margin + + | ++ |
| 25 | +column_break_19 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 26 | +discount_percentage |
+ + Percent | ++ Discount (%) on Price List Rate with Margin + + | ++ |
| 27 | +section_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 29 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 30 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 31 | +base_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 32 | +base_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 33 | +pricing_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Pricing Rule + + | ++ + + + +Pricing Rule + + + + | +
| 34 | +section_break_21 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 35 | +net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 36 | +net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 37 | +column_break_24 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 38 | +base_net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 39 | +base_net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 40 | +drop_ship |
+ + Section Break | ++ Drop Ship + + | ++ |
| 41 | +delivered_by_supplier |
+ + Check | ++ Delivered By Supplier + + | ++ |
| 42 | +accounting |
+ + Section Break | ++ Accounting Details + + | ++ |
| 43 | +income_account |
+ + Link | ++ Income Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 44 | +expense_account |
+ + Link | ++ Expense Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 45 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 46 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 47 | +warehouse_and_reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Stock Details + + | ++ |
| 48 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 49 | +target_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Warehouse (Optional) + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 50 | +quality_inspection |
+ + Link | ++ Quality Inspection + + | ++ + + + +Quality Inspection + + + + | +
| 51 | +batch_no |
+ + Link | ++ Batch No + + | ++ + + + +Batch + + + + | +
| 52 | +col_break5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 53 | +allow_zero_valuation_rate |
+ + Check | ++ Allow Zero Valuation Rate + + | ++ |
| 54 | +serial_no |
+ + Small Text | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
| 55 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 56 | +brand |
+ + Data | ++ Brand Name + + | ++ |
| 57 | +item_tax_rate |
+ + Small Text | ++ Item Tax Rate + + | ++ |
| 58 | +actual_batch_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Available Batch Qty at Warehouse + + | ++ |
| 59 | +actual_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Available Qty at Warehouse + + | ++ |
| 60 | +edit_references |
+ + Section Break | ++ References + + | ++ |
| 61 | +sales_order |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Order + + | ++ + + + +Sales Order + + + + | +
| 62 | +so_detail |
+ + Data | ++ Sales Order Item + + | ++ |
| 63 | +column_break_50 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 64 | +delivery_note |
+ + Link | ++ Delivery Note + + | ++ + + + +Delivery Note + + + + | +
| 65 | +dn_detail |
+ + Data | ++ Delivery Note Item + + | ++ |
| 66 | +delivered_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Delivered Qty + + | ++ |
| 67 | +is_fixed_asset |
+ + Check | ++ Is Fixed Asset + + | ++ |
| 68 | +asset |
+ + Link | ++ Asset + + | ++ + + + +Asset + + + + | +
| 69 | +section_break_54 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 70 | +page_break |
+ + Check | ++ Page Break + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + +
Sales Invoice Payment
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSales Invoice Payment
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +mode_of_payment |
+ + Link | ++ Mode of Payment + + | ++ + + + +Mode of Payment + + + + | +
| 2 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +account |
+ + Link | ++ Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 5 | +type |
+ + Read Only | ++ Type + + | +
+ mode_of_payment.type+ |
+
| 6 | +base_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Base Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +POS Profile + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + +
Sales Invoice Timesheet
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSales Invoice Timesheet
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +time_sheet |
+ + Link | ++ Time Sheet + + | ++ + + + +Timesheet + + + + | +
| 2 | +billing_hours |
+ + Float | ++ Billing Hours + + | ++ |
| 3 | +billing_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Billing Amount + + | ++ |
| 4 | +timesheet_detail |
+ + Data | ++ Timesheet Detail + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + +
Sales Taxes and Charges
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSales Taxes and Charges
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +charge_type |
+ + Select | ++ Type + + | +
+ +Actual +On Net Total +On Previous Row Amount +On Previous Row Total+ |
+
| 2 | +row_id |
+ + Data | ++ Reference Row # + + | ++ |
| 3 | +account_head |
+ + Link | ++ Account Head + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 4 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 5 | +col_break_1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 7 | +included_in_print_rate |
+ + Check | +
+ Is this Tax included in Basic Rate?
+ + If checked, the tax amount will be considered as already included in the Print Rate / Print Amount + |
+ + |
| 8 | +section_break_8 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +rate |
+ + Float | ++ Rate + + | ++ |
| 10 | +section_break_9 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +tax_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 12 | +total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 13 | +tax_amount_after_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Tax Amount After Discount Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 14 | +column_break_13 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +base_tax_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 16 | +base_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 17 | +base_tax_amount_after_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Tax Amount After Discount Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 18 | +item_wise_tax_detail |
+ + Code | ++ Item Wise Tax Detail + + | ++ |
| 19 | +parenttype |
+ + Data | ++ Parenttype + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Delivery Note + + + +
- + + +Quotation + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + +
- + + +Sales Order + + + +
- + + +Sales Taxes and Charges Template + + + +
Sales Taxes and Charges Template
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSales Taxes and Charges Template
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 2 | +is_default |
+ + Check | ++ Default + + | ++ |
| 3 | +disabled |
+ + Check | ++ Disabled + + | ++ |
| 4 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 6 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +taxes |
+ + Table | +
+ Sales Taxes and Charges
+ + * Will be calculated in the transaction. + |
+ + + + + +Sales Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.sales_taxes_and_charges_template.sales_taxes_and_charges_template
+ + + + + + + +Class SalesTaxesandChargesTemplate
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + set_missing_values + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.sales_taxes_and_charges_template.sales_taxes_and_charges_template.valdiate_taxes_and_charges_template + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.sales_taxes_and_charges_template.sales_taxes_and_charges_template.validate_disabled + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Delivery Note + + + + + +
- + + +POS Profile + + + + + +
- + + +Quotation + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Order + + + + + +
- + + +Tax Rule + + + + +
Shipping Rule
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabShipping Rule
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +label |
+ + Data | +
+ Shipping Rule Label
+ + example: Next Day Shipping + |
+ + |
| 2 | +disabled |
+ + Check | ++ Disabled + + | ++ |
| 3 | +calculate_based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Calculate Based On + + | +
+ Net Total +Net Weight+ |
+
| 4 | +rule_conditions_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Shipping Rule Conditions + + | ++ |
| 5 | +conditions |
+ + Table | ++ Shipping Rule Conditions + + | ++ + + + +Shipping Rule Condition + + + + | +
| 6 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Valid for Countries + + | ++ |
| 7 | +worldwide_shipping |
+ + Check | ++ Worldwide Shipping + + | ++ |
| 8 | +countries |
+ + Table | ++ Valid for Countries + + | ++ + + + +Shipping Rule Country + + + + | +
| 9 | +section_break_10 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 11 | +column_break_12 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +account |
+ + Link | ++ Shipping Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 13 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.shipping_rule.shipping_rule
+ + + + + + + +Class FromGreaterThanToError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class ManyBlankToValuesError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class OverlappingConditionError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class ShippingRule
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + sort_shipping_rule_conditions + (self) +
+Sort Shipping Rule Conditions based on increasing From Value
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_from_to_values + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_overlapping_shipping_rule_conditions + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Delivery Note + + + + + +
- + + +Quotation + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Order + + + + +
Shipping Rule Condition
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabShipping Rule Condition
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +from_value |
+ + Float | ++ From Value + + | ++ |
| 2 | +to_value |
+ + Float | ++ To Value + + | ++ |
| 3 | +shipping_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Shipping Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Shipping Rule + + + +
Shipping Rule Country
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabShipping Rule Country
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +country |
+ + Link | ++ Country + + | ++ + + + +Country + + + + | +
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Shipping Rule + + + +
Tax Rule
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabTax Rule
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +tax_type |
+ + Select | ++ Tax Type + + | +
+ Sales +Purchase+ |
+
| 2 | +use_for_shopping_cart |
+ + Check | ++ Use for Shopping Cart + + | ++ |
| 3 | +column_break_1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +sales_tax_template |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Tax Template + + | ++ + + + +Sales Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 5 | +purchase_tax_template |
+ + Link | ++ Purchase Tax Template + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 6 | +filters |
+ + Section Break | ++ Filters + + | ++ |
| 7 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 8 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 9 | +billing_city |
+ + Data | ++ Billing City + + | ++ |
| 10 | +billing_county |
+ + Data | ++ Billing County + + | ++ |
| 11 | +billing_state |
+ + Data | ++ Billing State + + | ++ |
| 12 | +billing_country |
+ + Link | ++ Billing Country + + | ++ + + + +Country + + + + | +
| 13 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 15 | +supplier_type |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier Type + + | ++ + + + +Supplier Type + + + + | +
| 16 | +shipping_city |
+ + Data | ++ Shipping City + + | ++ |
| 17 | +shipping_county |
+ + Data | ++ Shipping County + + | ++ |
| 18 | +shipping_state |
+ + Data | ++ Shipping State + + | ++ |
| 19 | +shipping_country |
+ + Link | ++ Shipping Country + + | ++ + + + +Country + + + + | +
| 20 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Validity + + | ++ |
| 21 | +from_date |
+ + Date | ++ From Date + + | ++ |
| 22 | +column_break_7 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +to_date |
+ + Date | ++ To Date + + | ++ |
| 24 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +priority |
+ + Int | ++ Priority + + | ++ |
| 26 | +column_break_20 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 27 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.accounts.doctype.tax_rule.tax_rule
+ + + + + + + +Class ConflictingTaxRule
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class IncorrectCustomerGroup
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class IncorrectSupplierType
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class TaxRule
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + __setup__ + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_filters + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_tax_template + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_use_for_shopping_cart + (self) +
+If shopping cart is enabled and no tax rule exists for shopping cart, enable this one
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.accounts.doctype.tax_rule.tax_rule.get_party_details
+
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.tax_rule.tax_rule.get_party_details + (party, party_type, args=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.accounts.doctype.tax_rule.tax_rule.get_tax_template + (posting_date, args) +
+Get matching tax rule
++ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/buying/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/buying/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/buying/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/buying/buying_settings.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/buying/buying_settings.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ba56628e --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/buying/buying_settings.html @@ -0,0 +1,212 @@ + + + + + + + +
Buying Settings
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+Settings for Buying Module
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +supp_master_name |
+ + Select | ++ Supplier Naming By + + | +
+ Supplier Name +Naming Series+ |
+
| 2 | +supplier_type |
+ + Link | ++ Default Supplier Type + + | ++ + + + +Supplier Type + + + + | +
| 3 | +buying_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Default Buying Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 4 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +po_required |
+ + Select | ++ Purchase Order Required + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 6 | +pr_required |
+ + Select | ++ Purchase Receipt Required + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 7 | +maintain_same_rate |
+ + Check | ++ Maintain same rate throughout purchase cycle + + | ++ |
| 8 | +allow_multiple_items |
+ + Check | ++ Allow Item to be added multiple times in a transaction + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.buying.doctype.buying_settings.buying_settings
+ + + + + + + +Class BuyingSettings
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/buying/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/buying/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..246ecc41 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/buying/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
Module buying
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+DocTypes for buying
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/buying/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/buying/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/buying/purchase_order.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/buying/purchase_order.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3538115f --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/buying/purchase_order.html @@ -0,0 +1,2040 @@ + + + + + + + +Purchase Order
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPurchase Order
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +supplier_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-user+ |
+
| 2 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 3 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ PO-+ |
+
| 4 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 5 | +get_items_from_open_material_requests |
+ + Button | ++ Get Items from Open Material Requests + + | ++ |
| 6 | +is_subcontracted |
+ + Select | ++ Supply Raw Materials + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 7 | +supplier_name |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Name + + | ++ |
| 8 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +transaction_date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 10 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Order + + + + | +
| 11 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 12 | +drop_ship |
+ + Section Break | ++ Drop Ship + + | ++ |
| 13 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 14 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ |
| 15 | +column_break_19 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 16 | +customer_contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Contact + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 17 | +customer_contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Customer Contact + + | ++ |
| 18 | +customer_contact_mobile |
+ + Small Text | ++ Customer Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 19 | +customer_contact_email |
+ + Code | ++ Customer Contact Email + + | +
+ |
+
| 20 | +section_addresses |
+ + Section Break | ++ Address and Contact + + | ++ |
| 21 | +supplier_address |
+ + Link | ++ Select Supplier Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 22 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 23 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 24 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 25 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Small Text | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 26 | +contact_email |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact Email + + | ++ |
| 27 | +col_break_address |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +shipping_address |
+ + Link | ++ Select Shipping Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 29 | +shipping_address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Shipping Address + + | ++ |
| 30 | +currency_and_price_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Currency and Price List + + | +
+ fa fa-tag+ |
+
| 31 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 32 | +conversion_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Exchange Rate + + | ++ |
| 33 | +cb_price_list |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 34 | +buying_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 35 | +price_list_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Price List Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 36 | +plc_conversion_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Price List Exchange Rate + + | ++ |
| 37 | +ignore_pricing_rule |
+ + Check | ++ Ignore Pricing Rule + + | ++ |
| 38 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 39 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Order Item + + + + | +
| 40 | +get_last_purchase_rate |
+ + Button | ++ Get last purchase rate + + | ++ |
| 41 | +link_to_mrs |
+ + Button | ++ Link to material requests + + | ++ |
| 42 | +sb_last_purchase |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 43 | +base_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 44 | +base_net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 45 | +column_break_26 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 46 | +total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 47 | +net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 48 | +taxes_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-money+ |
+
| 49 | +taxes_and_charges |
+ + Link | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 50 | +taxes |
+ + Table | ++ Purchase Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
| 51 | +sec_tax_breakup |
+ + Section Break | ++ Tax Breakup + + | ++ |
| 52 | +other_charges_calculation |
+ + Text | ++ Taxes and Charges Calculation + + | ++ |
| 53 | +totals |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-money+ |
+
| 54 | +base_taxes_and_charges_added |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Added (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 55 | +base_taxes_and_charges_deducted |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Deducted (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 56 | +base_total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 57 | +column_break_39 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 58 | +taxes_and_charges_added |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Added + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 59 | +taxes_and_charges_deducted |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Deducted + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 60 | +total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 61 | +discount_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Additional Discount + + | ++ |
| 62 | +apply_discount_on |
+ + Select | ++ Apply Additional Discount On + + | +
+ +Grand Total +Net Total+ |
+
| 63 | +base_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 64 | +column_break_45 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 65 | +additional_discount_percentage |
+ + Float | ++ Additional Discount Percentage + + | ++ |
| 66 | +discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 67 | +totals_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 68 | +base_grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 69 | +base_in_words |
+ + Data | +
+ In Words (Company Currency)
+ + In Words will be visible once you save the Purchase Order. + |
+ + |
| 70 | +base_rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 71 | +column_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 72 | +grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 73 | +in_words |
+ + Data | ++ In Words + + | ++ |
| 74 | +advance_paid |
+ + Currency | ++ Advance Paid + + | +
+ party_account_currency+ |
+
| 75 | +terms_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | +
+ fa fa-legal+ |
+
| 76 | +tc_name |
+ + Link | ++ Terms + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 77 | +terms |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | ++ |
| 78 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | ++ |
| 79 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +To Receive and Bill +To Bill +To Receive +Completed +Cancelled +Closed +Delivered+ |
+
| 80 | +ref_sq |
+ + Data | ++ Ref SQ + + | ++ |
| 81 | +party_account_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Party Account Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 82 | +column_break_74 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 83 | +per_received |
+ + Percent | ++ % Received + + | ++ |
| 84 | +per_billed |
+ + Percent | ++ % Billed + + | ++ |
| 85 | +column_break5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Printing Settings + + | ++ |
| 86 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 87 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 88 | +column_break_86 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 89 | +group_same_items |
+ + Check | ++ Group same items + + | ++ |
| 90 | +language |
+ + Data | ++ Print Language + + | ++ |
| 91 | +raw_material_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Raw Materials Supplied + + | +
+ fa fa-truck+ |
+
| 92 | +supplied_items |
+ + Table | ++ Supplied Items + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Order Item Supplied + + + + | +
| 93 | +recurring_order |
+ + Section Break | ++ Recurring Order + + | +
+ fa fa-time+ |
+
| 94 | +column_break |
+ + Column Break | ++ Settings + + | ++ |
| 95 | +is_recurring |
+ + Check | ++ Is Recurring + + | ++ |
| 96 | +recurring_id |
+ + Link | ++ Reference Document + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Order + + + + | +
| 97 | +recurring_type |
+ + Select | ++ Frequency + + | +
+ Monthly +Quarterly +Half-yearly +Yearly+ |
+
| 98 | +repeat_on_day_of_month |
+ + Int | ++ Repeat on Day of Month + + | ++ |
| 99 | +end_date |
+ + Date | ++ End Date + + | ++ |
| 100 | +submit_on_creation |
+ + Check | ++ Submit on creation + + | ++ |
| 101 | +notify_by_email |
+ + Check | ++ Notify by email + + | ++ |
| 102 | +notification_email_address |
+ + Code | ++ Notification Email Address + + | +
+ |
+
| 103 | +recurring_print_format |
+ + Link | ++ Recurring Print Format + + | ++ + + + +Print Format + + + + | +
| 104 | +column_break83 |
+ + Column Break | ++ This Document + + | ++ |
| 105 | +from_date |
+ + Date | ++ From Date + + | ++ |
| 106 | +to_date |
+ + Date | ++ To Date + + | ++ |
| 107 | +next_date |
+ + Date | ++ Next Date + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.buying.doctype.purchase_order.purchase_order
+ + + + + + + +Class PurchaseOrder
+ +Inherits from erpnext.controllers.buying_controller.BuyingController + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_for_closed_status + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_modified_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_last_purchase_rate + (self) +
+get last purchase rates for all items
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_schedule_dates + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + has_drop_ship_item + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + is_against_so + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_received_qty_for_drop_ship_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_delivered_qty_in_sales_order + (self) +
+Update delivered qty in Sales Order for drop ship
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_ordered_qty + (self, po_item_rows=None) +
+update requested qty (before ordered_qty is updated)
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_requested_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_status + (self, status) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_status_updater + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_minimum_order_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_with_previous_doc + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.buying.doctype.purchase_order.purchase_order.close_or_unclose_purchase_orders
+
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.purchase_order.purchase_order.close_or_unclose_purchase_orders + (names, status) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.buying.doctype.purchase_order.purchase_order.make_purchase_invoice
+
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.purchase_order.purchase_order.make_purchase_invoice + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.buying.doctype.purchase_order.purchase_order.make_purchase_receipt
+
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.purchase_order.purchase_order.make_purchase_receipt + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.buying.doctype.purchase_order.purchase_order.make_stock_entry
+
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.purchase_order.purchase_order.make_stock_entry + (purchase_order, item_code) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.purchase_order.purchase_order.set_missing_values + (source, target) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.buying.doctype.purchase_order.purchase_order.update_status
+
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.purchase_order.purchase_order.update_status + (status, name) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Purchase Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Order + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt Item + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Entry + + + + +
Purchase Order Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPurchase Order Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +supplier_part_no |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Part Number + + | ++ |
| 3 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +schedule_date |
+ + Date | ++ Reqd By Date + + | ++ |
| 6 | +expected_delivery_date |
+ + Date | ++ Expected Delivery Date + + | ++ |
| 7 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 8 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 9 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 11 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 12 | +quantity_and_rate |
+ + Section Break | ++ Quantity and Rate + + | ++ |
| 13 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Quantity + + | ++ |
| 14 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 15 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 16 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 17 | +conversion_factor |
+ + Float | ++ UOM Conversion Factor + + | ++ |
| 18 | +sec_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 20 | +discount_percentage |
+ + Percent | ++ Discount on Price List Rate (%) + + | ++ |
| 21 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 22 | +base_price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 23 | +sec_break2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 24 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 25 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 26 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 27 | +base_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 28 | +base_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 29 | +pricing_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Pricing Rule + + | ++ + + + +Pricing Rule + + + + | +
| 30 | +section_break_29 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 31 | +net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 32 | +net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 33 | +column_break_32 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 34 | +base_net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 35 | +base_net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 36 | +warehouse_and_reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Warehouse and Reference + + | ++ |
| 37 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 38 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 39 | +material_request |
+ + Link | ++ Material Request + + | ++ + + + +Material Request + + + + | +
| 40 | +material_request_item |
+ + Data | ++ Material Request Item + + | ++ |
| 41 | +sales_order |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Order + + | ++ + + + +Sales Order + + + + | +
| 42 | +sales_order_item |
+ + Data | ++ Sales Order Item + + | ++ |
| 43 | +supplier_quotation |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier Quotation + + | ++ + + + +Supplier Quotation + + + + | +
| 44 | +supplier_quotation_item |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier Quotation Item + + | ++ + + + +Supplier Quotation Item + + + + | +
| 45 | +delivered_by_supplier |
+ + Check | ++ To be delivered to customer + + | ++ |
| 46 | +col_break5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 47 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 48 | +brand |
+ + Link | ++ Brand + + | ++ + + + +Brand + + + + | +
| 49 | +bom |
+ + Link | ++ BOM + + | ++ + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 50 | +stock_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty as per Stock UOM + + | ++ |
| 51 | +received_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Received Qty + + | ++ |
| 52 | +returned_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Returned Qty + + | ++ |
| 53 | +billed_amt |
+ + Currency | ++ Billed Amt + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 54 | +item_tax_rate |
+ + Code | +
+ Item Tax Rate
+ + Tax detail table fetched from item master as a string and stored in this field. +Used for Taxes and Charges + |
+ + |
| 55 | +page_break |
+ + Check | ++ Page Break + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Purchase Order + + + +
Purchase Order Item Supplied
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPurchase Order Item Supplied
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +main_item_code |
+ + Data | ++ Item Code + + | ++ |
| 2 | +rm_item_code |
+ + Data | ++ Raw Material Item Code + + | ++ |
| 3 | +required_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Supplied Qty + + | ++ |
| 4 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 5 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 6 | +bom_detail_no |
+ + Data | ++ BOM Detail No + + | ++ |
| 7 | +reference_name |
+ + Data | ++ Reference Name + + | ++ |
| 8 | +conversion_factor |
+ + Float | ++ Conversion Factor + + | ++ |
| 9 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock Uom + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Purchase Order + + + +
Purchase Receipt Item Supplied
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPurchase Receipt Item Supplied
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +main_item_code |
+ + Data | ++ Item Code + + | ++ |
| 2 | +rm_item_code |
+ + Data | ++ Raw Material Item Code + + | ++ |
| 3 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 4 | +batch_no |
+ + Link | ++ Batch No + + | ++ + + + +Batch + + + + | +
| 5 | +serial_no |
+ + Text | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
| 6 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +required_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Required Qty + + | ++ |
| 8 | +consumed_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Consumed Qty + + | ++ |
| 9 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock Uom + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 10 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 11 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 12 | +conversion_factor |
+ + Float | ++ Conversion Factor + + | ++ |
| 13 | +current_stock |
+ + Float | ++ Current Stock + + | ++ |
| 14 | +reference_name |
+ + Data | ++ Reference Name + + | ++ |
| 15 | +bom_detail_no |
+ + Data | ++ BOM Detail No + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Purchase Invoice + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt + + + +
Request for Quotation
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabRequest for Quotation
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ RFQ-+ |
+
| 2 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 3 | +vendor |
+ + Link | +
+ Supplier
+ + For individual supplier + |
+ + + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 4 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +transaction_date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 6 | +suppliers_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +suppliers |
+ + Table | ++ Supplier Detail + + | ++ + + + +Request for Quotation Supplier + + + + | +
| 8 | +get_suppliers_button |
+ + Button | ++ Get Suppliers + + | ++ |
| 9 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 10 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Request for Quotation Item + + + + | +
| 11 | +link_to_mrs |
+ + Button | ++ Link to material requests + + | ++ |
| 12 | +supplier_response_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +standard_reply |
+ + Link | ++ Standard Reply + + | ++ + + + +Standard Reply + + + + | +
| 14 | +message_for_supplier |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Message for Supplier + + | ++ |
| 15 | +terms_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | +
+ fa fa-legal+ |
+
| 16 | +tc_name |
+ + Link | ++ Terms + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 17 | +terms |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | ++ |
| 18 | +printing_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Printing Settings + + | ++ |
| 19 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 20 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 21 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ fa fa-file-text+ |
+
| 22 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +Submitted +Cancelled+ |
+
| 23 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 24 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Request for Quotation + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.buying.doctype.request_for_quotation.request_for_quotation
+ + + + + + + +Class RequestforQuotation
+ +Inherits from erpnext.controllers.buying_controller.BuyingController + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + create_user + (self, rfq_supplier, link) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_attachments + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_link + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + send_email + (self, data, sender, subject, message, attachments) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + send_to_supplier + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + supplier_rfq_mail + (self, data, update_password_link, rfq_link) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_contact_of_supplier + (self, rfq_supplier, user) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_email_id + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_supplier_contact + (self, rfq_supplier, link) +
+Create a new user for the supplier if not set in contact
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_supplier_part_no + (self, args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_duplicate_supplier + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_email_id + (self, args) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.request_for_quotation.request_for_quotation.add_items + (sq_doc, supplier, items) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.request_for_quotation.request_for_quotation.check_portal_enabled + (reference_doctype) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.request_for_quotation.request_for_quotation.create_rfq_items + (sq_doc, supplier, data) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.buying.doctype.request_for_quotation.request_for_quotation.create_supplier_quotation
+
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.request_for_quotation.request_for_quotation.create_supplier_quotation + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.buying.doctype.request_for_quotation.request_for_quotation.get_item_from_material_requests_based_on_supplier
+
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.request_for_quotation.request_for_quotation.get_item_from_material_requests_based_on_supplier + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.request_for_quotation.request_for_quotation.get_list_context + (context=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.buying.doctype.request_for_quotation.request_for_quotation.get_pdf
+
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.request_for_quotation.request_for_quotation.get_pdf + (doctype, name, supplier_idx) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.request_for_quotation.request_for_quotation.get_rfq_doc + (doctype, name, supplier_idx) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.request_for_quotation.request_for_quotation.get_supplier_contacts + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.buying.doctype.request_for_quotation.request_for_quotation.make_supplier_quotation
+
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.request_for_quotation.request_for_quotation.make_supplier_quotation + (source_name, for_supplier, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.buying.doctype.request_for_quotation.request_for_quotation.send_supplier_emails
+
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.request_for_quotation.request_for_quotation.send_supplier_emails + (rfq_name) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Request for Quotation + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier Quotation Item + + + + +
Request for Quotation Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabRequest for Quotation Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +supplier_part_no |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Part No + + | ++ |
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 5 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 6 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 7 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 9 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 10 | +quantity |
+ + Section Break | ++ Quantity + + | ++ |
| 11 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Quantity + + | ++ |
| 12 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +schedule_date |
+ + Date | ++ Required Date + + | ++ |
| 14 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 15 | +warehouse_and_reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Warehouse and Reference + + | ++ |
| 16 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 17 | +project_name |
+ + Link | ++ Project Name + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 18 | +material_request |
+ + Link | ++ Material Request + + | ++ + + + +Material Request + + + + | +
| 19 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 20 | +material_request_item |
+ + Data | ++ Material Request Item + + | ++ |
| 21 | +brand |
+ + Link | ++ Brand + + | ++ + + + +Brand + + + + | +
| 22 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 23 | +page_break |
+ + Check | ++ Page Break + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Request for Quotation + + + +
Request for Quotation Supplier
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabRequest for Quotation Supplier
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +send_email |
+ + Check | ++ Send Email + + | ++ |
| 2 | +email_sent |
+ + Check | ++ Email Sent + + | ++ |
| 3 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 4 | +contact |
+ + Link | ++ Contact + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 5 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +supplier_name |
+ + Read Only | ++ Supplier Name + + | +
+ supplier.supplier_name+ |
+
| 7 | +email_id |
+ + Data | ++ Email Id + + | +
+ contact.email_id+ |
+
| 8 | +download_pdf |
+ + Button | ++ Download PDF + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Request for Quotation + + + +
Supplier
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSupplier
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +basic_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Name and Type + + | +
+ fa fa-user+ |
+
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ SUPP-+ |
+
| 3 | +supplier_name |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +country |
+ + Link | ++ Country + + | ++ + + + +Country + + + + | +
| 5 | +tax_id |
+ + Data | ++ Tax ID + + | ++ |
| 6 | +image |
+ + Attach Image | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 7 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +supplier_type |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier Type + + | ++ + + + +Supplier Type + + + + | +
| 9 | +language |
+ + Link | ++ Print Language + + | ++ + + + +Language + + + + | +
| 10 | +disabled |
+ + Check | ++ Disabled + + | ++ |
| 11 | +warn_rfqs |
+ + Check | ++ Warn RFQs + + | ++ |
| 12 | +warn_pos |
+ + Check | ++ Warn POs + + | ++ |
| 13 | +prevent_rfqs |
+ + Check | ++ Prevent RFQs + + | ++ |
| 14 | +prevent_pos |
+ + Check | ++ Prevent POs + + | ++ |
| 15 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Currency and Price List + + | ++ |
| 16 | +default_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Billing Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 17 | +column_break_10 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +default_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 19 | +section_credit_limit |
+ + Section Break | ++ Credit Limit + + | ++ |
| 20 | +credit_days_based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Credit Days Based On + + | +
+ +Fixed Days +Last Day of the Next Month+ |
+
| 21 | +credit_days |
+ + Int | ++ Credit Days + + | ++ |
| 22 | +address_contacts |
+ + Section Break | ++ Address and Contacts + + | +
+ fa fa-map-marker+ |
+
| 23 | +address_html |
+ + HTML | ++ Address HTML + + | ++ |
| 24 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +contact_html |
+ + HTML | ++ Contact HTML + + | ++ |
| 26 | +default_payable_accounts |
+ + Section Break | ++ Default Payable Accounts + + | ++ |
| 27 | +accounts |
+ + Table | +
+ Accounts
+ + Mention if non-standard payable account + |
+ + + + + +Party Account + + + + | +
| 28 | +column_break2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | ++ |
| 29 | +website |
+ + Data | ++ Website + + | ++ |
| 30 | +supplier_details |
+ + Text | +
+ Supplier Details
+ + Statutory info and other general information about your Supplier + |
+ + |
| 31 | +is_frozen |
+ + Check | ++ Is Frozen + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.buying.doctype.supplier.supplier
+ + + + + + + +Class Supplier
+ +Inherits from erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.TransactionBase + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + after_rename + (self, olddn, newdn, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + load_dashboard_info + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + onload + (self) +
+Load address and contacts in __onload
+ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Asset + + + + + +
- + + +Batch + + + + + +
- + + +Item + + + + + +
- + + +Item Supplier + + + + + +
- + + +Landed Cost Purchase Receipt + + + + + +
- + + +Pricing Rule + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Order + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt + + + + + +
- + + +Request for Quotation + + + + + +
- + + +Request for Quotation Supplier + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Order Item + + + + + +
- + + +Serial No + + + + + +
- + + +SMS Center + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier Quotation + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier Scorecard + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier Scorecard Period + + + + + +
- + + +Tax Rule + + + + + +
- + + +Training Event + + + + + +
- + + +Vehicle Log + + + + +
Supplier Quotation
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSupplier Quotation
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +supplier_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-user+ |
+
| 2 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 3 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ SQTN-+ |
+
| 4 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 5 | +supplier_name |
+ + Data | ++ Name + + | ++ |
| 6 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +transaction_date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 8 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Supplier Quotation + + + + | +
| 9 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 10 | +address_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Address and Contact + + | ++ |
| 11 | +supplier_address |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 12 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 13 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 14 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 15 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Small Text | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 16 | +contact_email |
+ + Data | ++ Contact Email + + | +
+ |
+
| 17 | +currency_and_price_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Currency and Price List + + | +
+ fa fa-tag+ |
+
| 18 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 19 | +conversion_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Exchange Rate + + | ++ |
| 20 | +cb_price_list |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 21 | +buying_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 22 | +price_list_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Price List Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 23 | +plc_conversion_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Price List Exchange Rate + + | ++ |
| 24 | +ignore_pricing_rule |
+ + Check | ++ Ignore Pricing Rule + + | ++ |
| 25 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 26 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Supplier Quotation Item + + + + | +
| 27 | +link_to_mrs |
+ + Button | ++ Link to material requests + + | ++ |
| 28 | +section_break_22 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 29 | +base_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 30 | +base_net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 31 | +column_break_24 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 32 | +total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 33 | +net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 34 | +taxes_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ fa fa-money+ |
+
| 35 | +taxes_and_charges |
+ + Link | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 36 | +taxes |
+ + Table | ++ Purchase Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
| 37 | +tax_breakup |
+ + Section Break | ++ Tax Breakup + + | ++ |
| 38 | +other_charges_calculation |
+ + Text | ++ Taxes and Charges Calculation + + | ++ |
| 39 | +totals |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-money+ |
+
| 40 | +base_taxes_and_charges_added |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Added (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 41 | +base_taxes_and_charges_deducted |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Deducted (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 42 | +base_total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 43 | +column_break_37 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 44 | +taxes_and_charges_added |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Added + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 45 | +taxes_and_charges_deducted |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Deducted + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 46 | +total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 47 | +section_break_41 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Additional Discount + + | ++ |
| 48 | +apply_discount_on |
+ + Select | ++ Apply Additional Discount On + + | +
+ +Grand Total +Net Total+ |
+
| 49 | +base_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 50 | +column_break_43 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 51 | +additional_discount_percentage |
+ + Float | ++ Additional Discount Percentage + + | ++ |
| 52 | +discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 53 | +section_break_46 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 54 | +base_grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 55 | +base_in_words |
+ + Data | ++ In Words (Company Currency) + + | ++ |
| 56 | +base_rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 57 | +column_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 58 | +grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 59 | +in_words |
+ + Data | ++ In Words + + | ++ |
| 60 | +terms_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | +
+ fa fa-legal+ |
+
| 61 | +tc_name |
+ + Link | ++ Terms + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 62 | +terms |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | ++ |
| 63 | +printing_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Printing Settings + + | ++ |
| 64 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 65 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 66 | +language |
+ + Data | ++ Print Language + + | ++ |
| 67 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ fa fa-file-text+ |
+
| 68 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +Submitted +Stopped +Cancelled+ |
+
| 69 | +column_break_57 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 70 | +is_subcontracted |
+ + Select | ++ Is Subcontracted + + | +
+ +Yes +No+ |
+
| 71 | +reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Reference + + | ++ |
| 72 | +opportunity |
+ + Link | ++ Opportunity + + | ++ + + + +Opportunity + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.buying.doctype.supplier_quotation.supplier_quotation
+ + + + + + + +Class SupplierQuotation
+ +Inherits from erpnext.controllers.buying_controller.BuyingController + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_with_previous_doc + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.supplier_quotation.supplier_quotation.get_list_context + (context=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.buying.doctype.supplier_quotation.supplier_quotation.make_purchase_order
+
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.supplier_quotation.supplier_quotation.make_purchase_order + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.buying.doctype.supplier_quotation.supplier_quotation.make_quotation
+
+ + + erpnext.buying.doctype.supplier_quotation.supplier_quotation.make_quotation + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Purchase Order Item + + + + + +
- + + +Quotation + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier Quotation + + + + +
Supplier Quotation Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSupplier Quotation Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +supplier_part_no |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Part Number + + | ++ |
| 3 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +lead_time_days |
+ + Int | ++ Lead Time in days + + | ++ |
| 6 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 7 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 8 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 10 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 11 | +quantity_and_rate |
+ + Section Break | ++ Quantity and Rate + + | ++ |
| 12 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Quantity + + | ++ |
| 13 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 14 | +price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 15 | +discount_percentage |
+ + Percent | ++ Discount on Price List Rate (%) + + | ++ |
| 16 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 17 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 18 | +conversion_factor |
+ + Float | ++ UOM Conversion Factor + + | ++ |
| 19 | +base_price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 20 | +sec_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 21 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 22 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 23 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 24 | +base_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 25 | +base_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 26 | +pricing_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Pricing Rule + + | ++ + + + +Pricing Rule + + + + | +
| 27 | +section_break_24 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate + + | ++ |
| 29 | +net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 30 | +column_break_27 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 31 | +base_net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 32 | +base_net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 33 | +warehouse_and_reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Warehouse and Reference + + | ++ |
| 34 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 35 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 36 | +prevdoc_doctype |
+ + Data | ++ Prevdoc DocType + + | ++ |
| 37 | +material_request |
+ + Link | ++ Material Request + + | ++ + + + +Material Request + + + + | +
| 38 | +request_for_quotation |
+ + Link | ++ Request for Quotation + + | ++ + + + +Request for Quotation + + + + | +
| 39 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 40 | +material_request_item |
+ + Data | ++ Material Request Item + + | ++ |
| 41 | +request_for_quotation_item |
+ + Data | ++ Request for Quotation Item + + | ++ |
| 42 | +brand |
+ + Link | ++ Brand + + | ++ + + + +Brand + + + + | +
| 43 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 44 | +item_tax_rate |
+ + Code | +
+ Item Tax Rate
+ + Tax detail table fetched from item master as a string and stored in this field. +Used for Taxes and Charges + |
+ + |
| 45 | +section_break_44 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 46 | +stock_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty as per Stock UOM + + | ++ |
| 47 | +page_break |
+ + Check | ++ Page Break + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Supplier Quotation + + + +
Module crm
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+DocTypes for crm
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/crm/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/crm/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/crm/lead.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/crm/lead.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..691b0ea8 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/crm/lead.html @@ -0,0 +1,919 @@ + + + + + + + +Lead
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabLead
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +lead_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-user+ |
+
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ LEAD-+ |
+
| 3 | +salutation |
+ + Link | ++ Salutation + + | ++ + + + +Salutation + + + + | +
| 4 | +lead_name |
+ + Data | ++ Person Name + + | ++ |
| 5 | +gender |
+ + Link | ++ Gender + + | ++ + + + +Gender + + + + | +
| 6 | +email_id |
+ + Data | ++ Email Address + + | +
+ |
+
| 7 | +col_break123 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Lead +Open +Replied +Opportunity +Quotation +Lost Quotation +Interested +Converted +Do Not Contact+ |
+
| 9 | +source |
+ + Link | ++ Source + + | ++ + + + +Lead Source + + + + | +
| 10 | +company_name |
+ + Data | ++ Organization Name + + | ++ |
| 11 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ From Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 12 | +campaign_name |
+ + Link | ++ Campaign Name + + | ++ + + + +Campaign + + + + | +
| 13 | +image |
+ + Attach Image | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 14 | +section_break_12 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +lead_owner |
+ + Link | ++ Lead Owner + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
| 16 | +column_break_14 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 17 | +contact_by |
+ + Link | ++ Next Contact By + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
| 18 | +contact_date |
+ + Datetime | +
+ Next Contact Date
+ + Add to calendar on this date + |
+ + |
| 19 | +contact_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Address & Contact + + | +
+ fa fa-map-marker+ |
+
| 20 | +address_desc |
+ + HTML | ++ Address Desc + + | ++ |
| 21 | +address_html |
+ + HTML | ++ Address HTML + + | ++ |
| 22 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +phone |
+ + Data | ++ Phone + + | ++ |
| 24 | +mobile_no |
+ + Data | ++ Mobile No. + + | ++ |
| 25 | +fax |
+ + Data | ++ Fax + + | ++ |
| 26 | +website |
+ + Data | ++ Website + + | ++ |
| 27 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 28 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ fa fa-file-text+ |
+
| 29 | +type |
+ + Select | ++ Lead Type + + | +
+ +Client +Channel Partner +Consultant+ |
+
| 30 | +market_segment |
+ + Select | ++ Market Segment + + | +
+ +Lower Income +Middle Income +Upper Income+ |
+
| 31 | +industry |
+ + Link | ++ Industry + + | ++ + + + +Industry Type + + + + | +
| 32 | +request_type |
+ + Select | ++ Request Type + + | +
+ +Product Enquiry +Request for Information +Suggestions +Other+ |
+
| 33 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 34 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 35 | +unsubscribed |
+ + Check | ++ Unsubscribed + + | ++ |
| 36 | +blog_subscriber |
+ + Check | ++ Blog Subscriber + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.crm.doctype.lead.lead
+ + + + + + + +Class Lead
+ +Inherits from erpnext.controllers.selling_controller.SellingController + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + add_calendar_event + (self, opts=None, force=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_email_id_is_unique + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + has_customer + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + has_lost_quotation + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + has_opportunity + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + has_quotation + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.lead.lead._make_customer + (source_name, target_doc=None, ignore_permissions=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.crm.doctype.lead.lead.get_lead_details
+
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.lead.lead.get_lead_details + (lead, posting_date=None, company=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.crm.doctype.lead.lead.make_customer
+
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.lead.lead.make_customer + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.crm.doctype.lead.lead.make_opportunity
+
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.lead.lead.make_opportunity + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.crm.doctype.lead.lead.make_quotation
+
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.lead.lead.make_quotation + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Customer + + + + + +
- + + +Issue + + + + + +
- + + +Opportunity + + + + + +
- + + +Quotation + + + + +
Opportunity
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabOpportunity
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +from_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-user+ |
+
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ OPTY-+ |
+
| 3 | +enquiry_from |
+ + Select | ++ Opportunity From + + | +
+ +Lead +Customer+ |
+
| 4 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 5 | +lead |
+ + Link | ++ Lead + + | ++ + + + +Lead + + + + | +
| 6 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer / Lead Name + + | ++ |
| 7 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 9 | +enquiry_type |
+ + Select | ++ Opportunity Type + + | +
+ Sales +Maintenance+ |
+
| 10 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Open +Quotation +Converted +Lost +Replied +Closed+ |
+
| 11 | +order_lost_reason |
+ + Small Text | ++ Lost Reason + + | ++ |
| 12 | +mins_to_first_response |
+ + Float | ++ Mins to first response + + | ++ |
| 13 | +with_items |
+ + Check | ++ With Items + + | ++ |
| 14 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 15 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Opportunity Item + + + + | +
| 16 | +contact_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Contact Info + + | +
+ fa fa-bullhorn+ |
+
| 17 | +customer_address |
+ + Link | ++ Customer / Lead Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 18 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 19 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 20 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 21 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 22 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 23 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 24 | +contact_email |
+ + Data | ++ Contact Email + + | ++ |
| 25 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 26 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Source + + | +
+ fa fa-file-text+ |
+
| 27 | +source |
+ + Link | ++ Source + + | ++ + + + +Lead Source + + + + | +
| 28 | +campaign |
+ + Link | +
+ Campaign
+ + Enter name of campaign if source of enquiry is campaign + |
+ + + + + +Campaign + + + + | +
| 29 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 30 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 31 | +transaction_date |
+ + Date | ++ Opportunity Date + + | ++ |
| 32 | +next_contact |
+ + Section Break | ++ Next Contact + + | ++ |
| 33 | +contact_by |
+ + Link | +
+ Next Contact By
+ + Your sales person who will contact the customer in future + |
+ + + + + +User + + + + | +
| 34 | +contact_date |
+ + Datetime | +
+ Next Contact Date
+ + Your sales person will get a reminder on this date to contact the customer + |
+ + |
| 35 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 36 | +to_discuss |
+ + Small Text | ++ To Discuss + + | ++ |
| 37 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Opportunity + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.crm.doctype.opportunity.opportunity
+ + + + + + + +Class Opportunity
+ +Inherits from erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.TransactionBase + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + add_calendar_event + (self, opts=None, force=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + after_insert + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + declare_enquiry_lost + (self, arg) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + has_active_quotation + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + has_lost_quotation + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + has_ordered_quotation + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_new_lead_if_required + (self) +
+Set lead against new opportunity
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_cust_name + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_item_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_lead_cust + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.opportunity.opportunity.auto_close_opportunity + () +
+auto close the Replied Opportunities after 7 days
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.crm.doctype.opportunity.opportunity.get_item_details
+
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.opportunity.opportunity.get_item_details + (item_code) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.crm.doctype.opportunity.opportunity.make_quotation
+
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.opportunity.opportunity.make_quotation + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.crm.doctype.opportunity.opportunity.make_supplier_quotation
+
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.opportunity.opportunity.make_supplier_quotation + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.crm.doctype.opportunity.opportunity.set_multiple_status
+
+ + + erpnext.crm.doctype.opportunity.opportunity.set_multiple_status + (names, status) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Opportunity + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier Quotation + + + + +
Opportunity Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabOpportunity Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty + + | ++ |
| 4 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 5 | +brand |
+ + Link | ++ Brand + + | ++ + + + +Brand + + + + | +
| 6 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 8 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 9 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 10 | +column_break_8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 12 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 13 | +basic_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Basic Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Opportunity + + + +
Module erpnext_integrations
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+DocTypes for erpnext_integrations
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/erpnext_integrations/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/erpnext_integrations/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/healthcare/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/healthcare/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/healthcare/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/healthcare/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/healthcare/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1692dbc4 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/healthcare/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +Module healthcare
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+DocTypes for healthcare
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/healthcare/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/healthcare/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/appraisal.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/appraisal.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2ecff960 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/appraisal.html @@ -0,0 +1,493 @@ + + + + + + + +Appraisal
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabAppraisal
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +employee_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ APRSL+ |
+
| 3 | +kra_template |
+ + Link | ++ Appraisal Template + + | ++ + + + +Appraisal Template + + + + | +
| 4 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ For Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 5 | +employee_name |
+ + Data | ++ For Employee Name + + | ++ |
| 6 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +Submitted +Completed +Cancelled+ |
+
| 8 | +start_date |
+ + Date | ++ Start Date + + | ++ |
| 9 | +end_date |
+ + Date | ++ End Date + + | ++ |
| 10 | +section_break0 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Goals + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 11 | +goals |
+ + Table | ++ Goals + + | ++ + + + +Appraisal Goal + + + + | +
| 12 | +calculate_total_score |
+ + Button | ++ Calculate Total Score + + | +
+ calculate_total+ |
+
| 13 | +total_score |
+ + Float | ++ Total Score (Out of 5) + + | ++ |
| 14 | +section_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +remarks |
+ + Text | +
+ Remarks
+ + Any other remarks, noteworthy effort that should go in the records. + |
+ + |
| 16 | +other_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 17 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 18 | +column_break_17 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Appraisal + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.appraisal.appraisal
+ + + + + + + +Class Appraisal
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + calculate_total + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_employee_name + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_dates + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_existing_appraisal + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.appraisal.appraisal.fetch_appraisal_template
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.appraisal.appraisal.fetch_appraisal_template + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Appraisal + + + + +
Appraisal Goal
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabAppraisal Goal
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +kra |
+ + Small Text | +
+ Goal
+ + Key Responsibility Area + |
+ + |
| 2 | +section_break_2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +per_weightage |
+ + Float | ++ Weightage (%) + + | ++ |
| 4 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +score |
+ + Float | ++ Score (0-5) + + | ++ |
| 6 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +score_earned |
+ + Float | ++ Score Earned + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Appraisal + + + +
Appraisal Template
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabAppraisal Template
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +kra_title |
+ + Data | ++ Appraisal Template Title + + | ++ |
| 2 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 3 | +goals |
+ + Table | ++ Goals + + | ++ + + + +Appraisal Template Goal + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.appraisal_template.appraisal_template
+ + + + + + + +Class AppraisalTemplate
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + check_total_points + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Appraisal + + + + +
Appraisal Template Goal
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabAppraisal Template Goal
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +kra |
+ + Small Text | +
+ KRA
+ + Key Performance Area + |
+ + |
| 2 | +per_weightage |
+ + Float | ++ Weightage (%) + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Appraisal Template + + + +
Attendance
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabAttendance
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +attendance_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ ATT-+ |
+
| 3 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 4 | +employee_name |
+ + Read Only | ++ Employee Name + + | ++ |
| 5 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Present +Absent +On Leave +Half Day+ |
+
| 6 | +leave_type |
+ + Link | ++ Leave Type + + | ++ + + + +Leave Type + + + + | +
| 7 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +attendance_date |
+ + Date | ++ Attendance Date + + | ++ |
| 9 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 10 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Attendance + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.attendance.attendance
+ + + + + + + +Class Attendance
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + check_leave_record + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_attendance_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_duplicate_record + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_employee + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Attendance + + + + +
Branch
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabBranch
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +branch |
+ + Data | ++ Branch + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.branch.branch
+ + + + + + + +Class Branch
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Employee + + + + + +
- + + +Employee Attendance Tool + + + + + +
- + + +Employee Internal Work History + + + + + +
- + + +Leave Control Panel + + + + + +
- + + +Process Payroll + + + + + +
- + + +SMS Center + + + + +
Daily Work Summary
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabDaily Work Summary
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 2 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Open +Sent+ |
+
| 3 | +email_sent_to |
+ + Code | ++ Email Sent To + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.daily_work_summary.daily_work_summary
+ + + + + + + +Class DailyWorkSummary
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + get_message_details + (self) +
+Return args for template
++ + + + + +
+ + + send_mails + (self, settings, emails) +
+Send emails to get daily work summary to all employees
++ + + + + +
+ + + send_summary + (self) +
+Send summary of all replies. Called at midnight
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.daily_work_summary.daily_work_summary.get_employee_emails + (company, only_working=True) +
+Returns list of Employee user ids for the given company who are working today
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
company- Companyname
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/daily_work_summary_settings.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/daily_work_summary_settings.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..02c939cf --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/daily_work_summary_settings.html @@ -0,0 +1,192 @@ + + + + + + + +
Daily Work Summary Settings
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +select_companies |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Select Companies
+ + Emails will be sent to all Active Employees of the company at the given hour, if they do not have holiday. Summary of responses will be sent at midnight. + |
+ + |
| 2 | +companies |
+ + Table | ++ Companies + + | ++ + + + +Daily Work Summary Settings Company + + + + | +
| 3 | +message_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Message + + | ++ |
| 4 | +subject |
+ + Data | ++ Subject + + | ++ |
| 5 | +message |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Message + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.daily_work_summary_settings.daily_work_summary_settings
+ + + + + + + +Class DailyWorkSummarySettings
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.daily_work_summary_settings.daily_work_summary_settings.send_summary + () +
+Send summary to everyone
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.daily_work_summary_settings.daily_work_summary_settings.trigger_emails + () +
+Send emails to Employees of the enabled companies at the give hour asking + them what did they work on today
++ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/daily_work_summary_settings_company.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/daily_work_summary_settings_company.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c2db19ea --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/daily_work_summary_settings_company.html @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + + + + + + + +
Daily Work Summary Settings Company
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabDaily Work Summary Settings Company
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 2 | +send_emails_at |
+ + Select | ++ Send Emails At + + | +
+ 00:00 +01:00 +02:00 +03:00 +04:00 +05:00 +06:00 +07:00 +08:00 +09:00 +10:00 +11:00 +12:00 +13:00 +14:00 +15:00 +16:00 +17:00 +18:00 +19:00 +20:00 +21:00 +22:00 +23:00+ |
+
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Daily Work Summary Settings + + + +
Department
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabDepartment
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +department_name |
+ + Data | ++ Department + + | ++ |
| 2 | +leave_block_list |
+ + Link | +
+ Leave Block List
+ + Days for which Holidays are blocked for this department. + |
+ + + + + +Leave Block List + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.department.department
+ + + + + + + +Class Department
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Course + + + + + +
- + + +Employee + + + + + +
- + + +Employee Attendance Tool + + + + + +
- + + +Employee Internal Work History + + + + + +
- + + +Instructor + + + + + +
- + + +Leave Control Panel + + + + + +
- + + +Process Payroll + + + + + +
- + + +Program + + + + + +
- + + +SMS Center + + + + +
Designation
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabDesignation
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +designation_name |
+ + Data | ++ Designation + + | ++ |
| 2 | +description |
+ + Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.designation.designation
+ + + + + + + +Class Designation
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Authorization Rule + + + + + +
- + + +Employee + + + + + +
- + + +Employee Internal Work History + + + + + +
- + + +Leave Control Panel + + + + + +
- + + +Offer Letter + + + + + +
- + + +Process Payroll + + + + +
Employee
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabEmployee
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +basic_information |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +employee |
+ + Data | ++ Employee + + | ++ |
| 3 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ EMP/+ |
+
| 4 | +salutation |
+ + Link | ++ Salutation + + | ++ + + + +Salutation + + + + | +
| 5 | +employee_name |
+ + Data | ++ Full Name + + | ++ |
| 6 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 7 | +user_id |
+ + Link | +
+ User ID
+ + System User (login) ID. If set, it will become default for all HR forms. + |
+ + + + + +User + + + + | +
| 8 | +create_user |
+ + Button | ++ Create User + + | ++ |
| 9 | +image |
+ + Attach Image | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 10 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +employee_number |
+ + Data | ++ Employee Number + + | ++ |
| 12 | +date_of_joining |
+ + Date | ++ Date of Joining + + | ++ |
| 13 | +date_of_birth |
+ + Date | +
+ Date of Birth
+ + You can enter any date manually + |
+ + |
| 14 | +gender |
+ + Link | ++ Gender + + | ++ + + + +Gender + + + + | +
| 15 | +employment_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Employment Details + + | ++ |
| 16 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Active +Left+ |
+
| 17 | +employment_type |
+ + Link | ++ Employment Type + + | ++ + + + +Employment Type + + + + | +
| 18 | +holiday_list |
+ + Link | +
+ Holiday List
+ + Applicable Holiday List + |
+ + + + + +Holiday List + + + + | +
| 19 | +col_break_22 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 20 | +scheduled_confirmation_date |
+ + Date | ++ Offer Date + + | ++ |
| 21 | +final_confirmation_date |
+ + Date | ++ Confirmation Date + + | ++ |
| 22 | +contract_end_date |
+ + Date | ++ Contract End Date + + | ++ |
| 23 | +date_of_retirement |
+ + Date | ++ Date Of Retirement + + | ++ |
| 24 | +job_profile |
+ + Section Break | ++ Job Profile + + | ++ |
| 25 | +branch |
+ + Link | ++ Branch + + | ++ + + + +Branch + + + + | +
| 26 | +department |
+ + Link | ++ Department + + | ++ + + + +Department + + + + | +
| 27 | +designation |
+ + Link | ++ Designation + + | ++ + + + +Designation + + + + | +
| 28 | +company_email |
+ + Data | +
+ Company Email
+ + Provide Email Address registered in company + |
+
+ |
+
| 29 | +notice_number_of_days |
+ + Int | ++ Notice (days) + + | ++ |
| 30 | +salary_information |
+ + Column Break | ++ Salary Information + + | ++ |
| 31 | +salary_mode |
+ + Select | ++ Salary Mode + + | +
+ +Bank +Cash +Cheque+ |
+
| 32 | +bank_name |
+ + Data | ++ Bank Name + + | ++ |
| 33 | +bank_ac_no |
+ + Data | ++ Bank A/C No. + + | ++ |
| 34 | +organization_profile |
+ + Section Break | ++ Organization Profile + + | ++ |
| 35 | +reports_to |
+ + Link | ++ Reports to + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 36 | +leave_approvers |
+ + Table | +
+ Leave Approvers
+ + The first Leave Approver in the list will be set as the default Leave Approver + |
+ + + + + +Employee Leave Approver + + + + | +
| 37 | +contact_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Contact Details + + | ++ |
| 38 | +prefered_contact_email |
+ + Select | ++ Prefered Contact Email + + | +
+ +Company Email +Personal Email +User ID+ |
+
| 39 | +prefered_email |
+ + Data | ++ Prefered Email + + | +
+ |
+
| 40 | +cell_number |
+ + Data | ++ Cell Number + + | ++ |
| 41 | +personal_email |
+ + Data | ++ Personal Email + + | +
+ |
+
| 42 | +unsubscribed |
+ + Check | ++ Unsubscribed + + | ++ |
| 43 | +person_to_be_contacted |
+ + Data | ++ Emergency Contact + + | ++ |
| 44 | +relation |
+ + Data | ++ Relation + + | ++ |
| 45 | +emergency_phone_number |
+ + Data | ++ Emergency Phone + + | ++ |
| 46 | +column_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 47 | +permanent_accommodation_type |
+ + Select | ++ Permanent Address Is + + | +
+ +Rented +Owned+ |
+
| 48 | +permanent_address |
+ + Small Text | ++ Permanent Address + + | ++ |
| 49 | +current_accommodation_type |
+ + Select | ++ Current Address Is + + | +
+ +Rented +Owned+ |
+
| 50 | +current_address |
+ + Small Text | ++ Current Address + + | ++ |
| 51 | +sb53 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 52 | +bio |
+ + Text Editor | +
+ Bio
+ + Short biography for website and other publications. + |
+ + |
| 53 | +personal_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Personal Details + + | ++ |
| 54 | +passport_number |
+ + Data | ++ Passport Number + + | ++ |
| 55 | +date_of_issue |
+ + Date | ++ Date of Issue + + | ++ |
| 56 | +valid_upto |
+ + Date | ++ Valid Upto + + | ++ |
| 57 | +place_of_issue |
+ + Data | ++ Place of Issue + + | ++ |
| 58 | +column_break6 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 59 | +marital_status |
+ + Select | ++ Marital Status + + | +
+ +Single +Married +Divorced +Widowed+ |
+
| 60 | +blood_group |
+ + Select | ++ Blood Group + + | +
+ +A+ +A- +B+ +B- +AB+ +AB- +O+ +O-+ |
+
| 61 | +family_background |
+ + Small Text | +
+ Family Background
+ + Here you can maintain family details like name and occupation of parent, spouse and children + |
+ + |
| 62 | +health_details |
+ + Small Text | +
+ Health Details
+ + Here you can maintain height, weight, allergies, medical concerns etc + |
+ + |
| 63 | +educational_qualification |
+ + Section Break | ++ Educational Qualification + + | ++ |
| 64 | +education |
+ + Table | ++ Education + + | ++ + + + +Employee Education + + + + | +
| 65 | +previous_work_experience |
+ + Section Break | ++ Previous Work Experience + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 66 | +external_work_history |
+ + Table | ++ External Work History + + | ++ + + + +Employee External Work History + + + + | +
| 67 | +history_in_company |
+ + Section Break | ++ History In Company + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 68 | +internal_work_history |
+ + Table | ++ Internal Work History + + | ++ + + + +Employee Internal Work History + + + + | +
| 69 | +exit |
+ + Section Break | ++ Exit + + | ++ |
| 70 | +resignation_letter_date |
+ + Date | ++ Resignation Letter Date + + | ++ |
| 71 | +relieving_date |
+ + Date | ++ Relieving Date + + | ++ |
| 72 | +reason_for_leaving |
+ + Data | ++ Reason for Leaving + + | ++ |
| 73 | +leave_encashed |
+ + Select | ++ Leave Encashed? + + | +
+ +Yes +No+ |
+
| 74 | +encashment_date |
+ + Date | ++ Encashment Date + + | ++ |
| 75 | +exit_interview_details |
+ + Column Break | ++ Exit Interview Details + + | ++ |
| 76 | +held_on |
+ + Date | ++ Held On + + | ++ |
| 77 | +reason_for_resignation |
+ + Select | ++ Reason for Resignation + + | +
+ +Better Prospects +Health Concerns+ |
+
| 78 | +new_workplace |
+ + Data | ++ New Workplace + + | ++ |
| 79 | +feedback |
+ + Small Text | ++ Feedback + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.employee.employee
+ + + + + + + +Class Employee
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_user + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_user_permissions + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_duplicate_user_id + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_email + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_employee_leave_approver + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_for_enabled_user_id + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_prefered_email + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_reports_to + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_status + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + +
Class EmployeeUserDisabledError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.employee.employee.create_user
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee.employee.create_user + (employee, user=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.employee.employee.deactivate_sales_person
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee.employee.deactivate_sales_person + (status=None, employee=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee.employee.get_employees_who_are_born_today + () +
+Get Employee properties whose birthday is today.
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee.employee.get_holiday_list_for_employee + (employee, raise_exception=True) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.employee.employee.get_retirement_date
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee.employee.get_retirement_date + (date_of_birth=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee.employee.get_timeline_data + (doctype, name) +
+Return timeline for attendance
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee.employee.is_holiday + (employee, date=None) +
+Returns True if given Employee has an holiday on the given date
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
employee- Employeename
+date- Date to check. Will check for today if None
+
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee.employee.send_birthday_reminders + () +
+Send Employee birthday reminders if no 'Stop Birthday Reminders' is not set.
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee.employee.update_user_permissions + (doc, method) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee.employee.validate_employee_role + (doc, method) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Activity Cost + + + + + +
- + + +Appraisal + + + + + +
- + + +Attendance + + + + + +
- + + +Authorization Rule + + + + + +
- + + +Employee + + + + + +
- + + +Employee Loan + + + + + +
- + + +Employee Loan Application + + + + + +
- + + +Expense Claim + + + + + +
- + + +Instructor + + + + + +
- + + +Leave Allocation + + + + + +
- + + +Leave Application + + + + + +
- + + +Salary Slip + + + + + +
- + + +Salary Structure Employee + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Person + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier Scorecard + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier Scorecard Scoring Standing + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier Scorecard Standing + + + + + +
- + + +Timesheet + + + + + +
- + + +Training Event Employee + + + + + +
- + + +Training Feedback + + + + + +
- + + +Training Result Employee + + + + + +
- + + +Vehicle + + + + + +
- + + +Vehicle Log + + + + +
Employee Attendance Tool
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 2 | +department |
+ + Link | ++ Department + + | ++ + + + +Department + + + + | +
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +branch |
+ + Link | ++ Branch + + | ++ + + + +Branch + + + + | +
| 5 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 6 | +unmarked_attendance_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Unmarked Attendance + + | ++ |
| 7 | +employees_html |
+ + HTML | ++ Employees HTML + + | ++ |
| 8 | +marked_attendance_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Marked Attendance + + | ++ |
| 9 | +marked_attendance_html |
+ + HTML | ++ Marked Attendance HTML + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.employee_attendance_tool.employee_attendance_tool
+ + + + + + + +Class EmployeeAttendanceTool
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.employee_attendance_tool.employee_attendance_tool.get_employees
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee_attendance_tool.employee_attendance_tool.get_employees + (date, department=None, branch=None, company=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.employee_attendance_tool.employee_attendance_tool.mark_employee_attendance
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee_attendance_tool.employee_attendance_tool.mark_employee_attendance + (employee_list, status, date, leave_type=None, company=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/employee_education.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/employee_education.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..445a519c --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/employee_education.html @@ -0,0 +1,141 @@ + + + + + + + +
Employee Education
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabEmployee Education
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +school_univ |
+ + Small Text | ++ School/University + + | ++ |
| 2 | +qualification |
+ + Data | ++ Qualification + + | ++ |
| 3 | +level |
+ + Select | ++ Level + + | +
+ Graduate +Post Graduate +Under Graduate+ |
+
| 4 | +year_of_passing |
+ + Int | ++ Year of Passing + + | ++ |
| 5 | +class_per |
+ + Data | ++ Class / Percentage + + | ++ |
| 6 | +maj_opt_subj |
+ + Text | ++ Major/Optional Subjects + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Employee + + + +
Employee External Work History
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabEmployee External Work History
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +company_name |
+ + Data | ++ Company + + | ++ |
| 2 | +designation |
+ + Data | ++ Designation + + | ++ |
| 3 | +salary |
+ + Currency | ++ Salary + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 4 | +address |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 5 | +contact |
+ + Data | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 6 | +total_experience |
+ + Data | ++ Total Experience + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Employee + + + +
Employee Internal Work History
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabEmployee Internal Work History
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +branch |
+ + Link | ++ Branch + + | ++ + + + +Branch + + + + | +
| 2 | +department |
+ + Link | ++ Department + + | ++ + + + +Department + + + + | +
| 3 | +designation |
+ + Link | ++ Designation + + | ++ + + + +Designation + + + + | +
| 4 | +from_date |
+ + Date | ++ From Date + + | ++ |
| 5 | +to_date |
+ + Date | ++ To Date + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Employee + + + +
Employee Leave Approver
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabEmployee Leave Approver
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +leave_approver |
+ + Link | ++ Leave Approver + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Employee + + + +
Employee Loan
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabEmployee Loan
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 2 | +employee_name |
+ + Read Only | ++ Employee Name + + | +
+ employee.employee_name+ |
+
| 3 | +employee_loan_application |
+ + Link | ++ Employee Loan Application + + | ++ + + + +Employee Loan Application + + + + | +
| 4 | +loan_type |
+ + Link | ++ Loan Type + + | ++ + + + +Loan Type + + + + | +
| 5 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 7 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 8 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Sanctioned +Partially Disbursed +Fully Disbursed +Repaid/Closed+ |
+
| 9 | +repay_from_salary |
+ + Check | ++ Repay from Salary + + | ++ |
| 10 | +section_break_8 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Loan Details + + | ++ |
| 11 | +loan_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Loan Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 12 | +rate_of_interest |
+ + Percent | ++ Rate of Interest (%) / Year + + | +
+ loan_type.rate_of_interest+ |
+
| 13 | +disbursement_date |
+ + Date | ++ Disbursement Date + + | ++ |
| 14 | +column_break_11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +repayment_method |
+ + Select | ++ Repayment Method + + | +
+ +Repay Fixed Amount per Period +Repay Over Number of Periods+ |
+
| 16 | +repayment_periods |
+ + Int | ++ Repayment Period in Months + + | ++ |
| 17 | +monthly_repayment_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Monthly Repayment Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 18 | +account_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Account Info + + | ++ |
| 19 | +mode_of_payment |
+ + Link | ++ Mode of Payment + + | ++ + + + +Mode of Payment + + + + | +
| 20 | +payment_account |
+ + Link | ++ Payment Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 21 | +column_break_9 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 22 | +employee_loan_account |
+ + Link | ++ Employee Loan Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 23 | +interest_income_account |
+ + Link | ++ Interest Income Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 24 | +section_break_15 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Repayment Schedule + + | ++ |
| 25 | +repayment_schedule |
+ + Table | ++ Repayment Schedule + + | ++ + + + +Repayment Schedule + + + + | +
| 26 | +section_break_17 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Totals + + | ++ |
| 27 | +total_payment |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Payment + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 28 | +column_break_19 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 29 | +total_interest_payable |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Interest Payable + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 30 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Employee Loan + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.employee_loan.employee_loan
+ + + + + + + +Class EmployeeLoan
+ +Inherits from erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.AccountsController + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + calculate_totals + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_jv_entry + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_repayment_schedule + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_repayment_period + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee_loan.employee_loan.check_repayment_method + (repayment_method, loan_amount, monthly_repayment_amount, repayment_periods) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.employee_loan.employee_loan.get_employee_loan_application
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee_loan.employee_loan.get_employee_loan_application + (employee_loan_application) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee_loan.employee_loan.get_monthly_repayment_amount + (repayment_method, loan_amount, rate_of_interest, repayment_periods) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.employee_loan.employee_loan.make_jv_entry
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee_loan.employee_loan.make_jv_entry + (employee_loan, company, employee_loan_account, employee, loan_amount, payment_account) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee_loan.employee_loan.update_disbursement_status + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Employee Loan + + + + +
Employee Loan Application
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabEmployee Loan Application
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 2 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 3 | +employee_name |
+ + Read Only | ++ Employee Name + + | +
+ employee.employee_name+ |
+
| 4 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Open +Approved +Rejected+ |
+
| 6 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 7 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Loan Info + + | ++ |
| 8 | +loan_type |
+ + Link | ++ Loan Type + + | ++ + + + +Loan Type + + + + | +
| 9 | +loan_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Loan Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 10 | +required_by_date |
+ + Date | ++ Required by Date + + | ++ |
| 11 | +column_break_7 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Reason + + | ++ |
| 13 | +repayment_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Repayment Info + + | ++ |
| 14 | +repayment_method |
+ + Select | ++ Repayment Method + + | +
+ +Repay Fixed Amount per Period +Repay Over Number of Periods+ |
+
| 15 | +rate_of_interest |
+ + Percent | ++ Rate of Interest + + | +
+ loan_type.rate_of_interest+ |
+
| 16 | +total_payable_interest |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Payable Interest + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 17 | +column_break_11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +repayment_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Monthly Repayment Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 19 | +repayment_periods |
+ + Int | ++ Repayment Period in Months + + | ++ |
| 20 | +total_payable_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Payable Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 21 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Employee Loan Application + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.employee_loan_application.employee_loan_application
+ + + + + + + +Class EmployeeLoanApplication
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + calculate_payable_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_repayment_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_loan_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.employee_loan_application.employee_loan_application.make_employee_loan
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.employee_loan_application.employee_loan_application.make_employee_loan + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Employee Loan + + + + + +
- + + +Employee Loan Application + + + + +
Employment Type
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabEmployment Type
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +employee_type_name |
+ + Data | ++ Employment Type + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.employment_type.employment_type
+ + + + + + + +Class EmploymentType
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Employee + + + + + +
- + + +Leave Control Panel + + + + +
Expense Claim
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabExpense Claim
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ EXP+ |
+
| 2 | +is_paid |
+ + Check | ++ Is Paid + + | ++ |
| 3 | +approval_status |
+ + Select | ++ Approval Status + + | +
+ Draft +Approved +Rejected+ |
+
| 4 | +exp_approver |
+ + Link | +
+ Approver
+ + A user with "Expense Approver" role + |
+ + + + + +User + + + + | +
| 5 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +total_claimed_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Claimed Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 7 | +total_sanctioned_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Sanctioned Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 8 | +expense_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +expenses |
+ + Table | ++ Expenses + + | ++ + + + +Expense Claim Detail + + + + | +
| 10 | +sb1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 11 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 12 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ From Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 13 | +employee_name |
+ + Data | ++ Employee Name + + | ++ |
| 14 | +vehicle_log |
+ + Link | ++ Vehicle Log + + | ++ + + + +Vehicle Log + + + + | +
| 15 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 16 | +task |
+ + Link | ++ Task + + | ++ + + + +Task + + + + | +
| 17 | +cb1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +total_amount_reimbursed |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Amount Reimbursed + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 19 | +remark |
+ + Small Text | ++ Remark + + | ++ |
| 20 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 21 | +email_id |
+ + Data | ++ Employees Email Id + + | ++ |
| 22 | +accounting_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Accounting Details + + | ++ |
| 23 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 24 | +mode_of_payment |
+ + Link | ++ Mode of Payment + + | ++ + + + +Mode of Payment + + + + | +
| 25 | +column_break_24 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 26 | +payable_account |
+ + Link | ++ Payable Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 27 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 28 | +more_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Details + + | ++ |
| 29 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Draft +Paid +Unpaid +Rejected +Submitted +Cancelled+ |
+
| 30 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Expense Claim + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.expense_claim.expense_claim
+ + + + + + + +Class ExpenseClaim
+ +Inherits from erpnext.controllers.accounts_controller.AccountsController + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + calculate_total_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_gl_entries + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_gl_entries + (self, cancel=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_cost_center + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_expense_account + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_payable_account + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_status + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_task + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_task_and_project + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_account_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_expense_approver + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_sanctioned_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + +
Class InvalidExpenseApproverError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.expense_claim.expense_claim.get_expense_approver
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.expense_claim.expense_claim.get_expense_approver + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.expense_claim.expense_claim.get_expense_claim_account
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.expense_claim.expense_claim.get_expense_claim_account + (expense_claim_type, company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.expense_claim.expense_claim.make_bank_entry
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.expense_claim.expense_claim.make_bank_entry + (docname) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.expense_claim.expense_claim.update_reimbursed_amount + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Expense Claim + + + + +
Expense Claim Account
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabExpense Claim Account
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 2 | +default_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Expense Claim Type + + + +
Expense Claim Detail
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabExpense Claim Detail
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +expense_date |
+ + Date | ++ Expense Date + + | ++ |
| 2 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +expense_type |
+ + Link | ++ Expense Claim Type + + | ++ + + + +Expense Claim Type + + + + | +
| 4 | +default_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 5 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 7 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +claim_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Claim Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 9 | +column_break_8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +sanctioned_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Sanctioned Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Expense Claim + + + +
Expense Claim Type
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabExpense Claim Type
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +expense_type |
+ + Data | ++ Expense Claim Type + + | ++ |
| 2 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 3 | +accounts |
+ + Table | ++ Accounts + + | ++ + + + +Expense Claim Account + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.expense_claim_type.expense_claim_type
+ + + + + + + +Class ExpenseClaimType
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_accounts + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_repeating_companies + (self) +
+Error when Same Company is entered multiple times in accounts
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Expense Claim Detail + + + + +
Holiday
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabHoliday
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +holiday_date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 2 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Holiday List + + + +
Holiday List
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabHoliday List
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +holiday_list_name |
+ + Data | ++ Holiday List Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +from_date |
+ + Date | ++ From Date + + | ++ |
| 3 | +to_date |
+ + Date | ++ To Date + + | ++ |
| 4 | +weekly_off |
+ + Select | ++ Weekly Off + + | +
+ +Sunday +Monday +Tuesday +Wednesday +Thursday +Friday +Saturday+ |
+
| 5 | +get_weekly_off_dates |
+ + Button | ++ Get Weekly Off Dates + + | +
+ get_weekly_off_dates+ |
+
| 6 | +holidays |
+ + Table | ++ Holidays + + | ++ + + + +Holiday + + + + | +
| 7 | +clear_table |
+ + Button | ++ Clear Table + + | +
+ clear_table+ |
+
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.holiday_list.holiday_list
+ + + + + + + +Class HolidayList
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + clear_table + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_weekly_off_date_list + (self, start_date, end_date) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_weekly_off_dates + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_days + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_values + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + +
Class OverlapError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.holiday_list.holiday_list.get_events
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.holiday_list.holiday_list.get_events + (start, end, filters=None) +
+Returns events for Gantt / Calendar view rendering.
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
start- Start date-time.
+end- End date-time.
+filters- Filters (JSON).
+
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Company + + + + + +
- + + +Employee + + + + + +
- + + +Workstation + + + + +
HR Settings
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +employee_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Employee Settings + + | ++ |
| 2 | +retirement_age |
+ + Data | +
+ Retirement Age
+ + Enter retirement age in years + |
+ + |
| 3 | +emp_created_by |
+ + Select | +
+ Employee Records to be created by
+ + Employee record is created using selected field. + |
+
+ Naming Series +Employee Number +Full Name+ |
+
| 4 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +stop_birthday_reminders |
+ + Check | +
+ Stop Birthday Reminders
+ + Don't send Employee Birthday Reminders + |
+ + |
| 6 | +maintain_bill_work_hours_same |
+ + Check | ++ Maintain Billing Hours and Working Hours Same on Timesheet + + | ++ |
| 7 | +payroll_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Payroll Settings + + | ++ |
| 8 | +include_holidays_in_total_working_days |
+ + Check | +
+ Include holidays in Total no. of Working Days
+ + If checked, Total no. of Working Days will include holidays, and this will reduce the value of Salary Per Day + |
+ + |
| 9 | +email_salary_slip_to_employee |
+ + Check | +
+ Email Salary Slip to Employee
+ + Emails salary slip to employee based on preferred email selected in Employee + |
+ + |
| 10 | +max_working_hours_against_timesheet |
+ + Float | ++ Max working hours against Timesheet + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.hr_settings.hr_settings
+ + + + + + + +Class HRSettings
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..199ccd2f --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
Module hr
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+DocTypes for hr
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/interest.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/interest.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e25abf91 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/interest.html @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + +Interest
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabInterest
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +interest |
+ + Data | ++ Interest + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.interest.interest
+ + + + + + + +Class Interest
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Guardian Interest + + + + +
Job Applicant
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabJob Applicant
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +applicant_name |
+ + Data | ++ Applicant Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +email_id |
+ + Data | ++ Email Address + + | +
+ |
+
| 3 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Open +Replied +Rejected +Hold+ |
+
| 4 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +job_title |
+ + Link | ++ Job Opening + + | ++ + + + +Job Opening + + + + | +
| 6 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +cover_letter |
+ + Text | ++ Cover Letter + + | ++ |
| 8 | +resume_attachment |
+ + Attach | ++ Resume Attachment + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.job_applicant.job_applicant
+ + + + + + + +Class DuplicationError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class JobApplicant
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_email_id_is_unique + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Offer Letter + + + + +
Job Opening
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabJob Opening
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +job_title |
+ + Data | ++ Job Title + + | ++ |
| 2 | +publish |
+ + Check | ++ Publish on website + + | ++ |
| 3 | +route |
+ + Data | ++ Route + + | ++ |
| 4 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Open +Closed+ |
+
| 5 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | +
+ Description
+ + Job profile, qualifications required etc. + |
+ + |
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.job_opening.job_opening
+ + + + + + + +Class JobOpening
+ +Inherits from frappe.website.website_generator.WebsiteGenerator + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + get_context + (self, context) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.job_opening.job_opening.get_list_context + (context) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Job Applicant + + + + +
Leave Allocation
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabLeave Allocation
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ LAL/+ |
+
| 3 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 4 | +employee_name |
+ + Data | ++ Employee Name + + | ++ |
| 5 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 7 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +leave_type |
+ + Link | ++ Leave Type + + | ++ + + + +Leave Type + + + + | +
| 9 | +from_date |
+ + Date | ++ From Date + + | ++ |
| 10 | +to_date |
+ + Date | ++ To Date + + | ++ |
| 11 | +column_break_10 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +new_leaves_allocated |
+ + Float | ++ New Leaves Allocated + + | ++ |
| 13 | +carry_forward |
+ + Check | ++ Add unused leaves from previous allocations + + | ++ |
| 14 | +carry_forwarded_leaves |
+ + Float | ++ Unused leaves + + | ++ |
| 15 | +total_leaves_allocated |
+ + Float | ++ Total Leaves Allocated + + | ++ |
| 16 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Leave Allocation + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_allocation.leave_allocation
+ + + + + + + +Class BackDatedAllocationError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class LeaveAllocation
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + on_update_after_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_total_leaves_allocated + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_against_leave_applications + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_allocation_overlap + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_back_dated_allocation + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_lwp + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_new_leaves_allocated_value + (self) +
+validate that leave allocation is in multiples of 0.5
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_period + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_total_leaves_allocated + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + +
Class LessAllocationError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class OverAllocationError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class OverlapError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class ValueMultiplierError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_allocation.leave_allocation.get_carry_forwarded_leaves
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_allocation.leave_allocation.get_carry_forwarded_leaves + (employee, leave_type, date, carry_forward=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_allocation.leave_allocation.validate_carry_forward + (leave_type) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Leave Allocation + + + + +
Leave Application
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabLeave Application
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ LAP/+ |
+
| 2 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Open +Approved +Rejected+ |
+
| 3 | +column_break_12 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +leave_type |
+ + Link | ++ Leave Type + + | ++ + + + +Leave Type + + + + | +
| 5 | +leave_balance |
+ + Float | ++ Leave Balance Before Application + + | ++ |
| 6 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +from_date |
+ + Date | ++ From Date + + | ++ |
| 8 | +to_date |
+ + Date | ++ To Date + + | ++ |
| 9 | +half_day |
+ + Check | ++ Half Day + + | ++ |
| 10 | +half_day_date |
+ + Date | ++ Half Day Date + + | ++ |
| 11 | +total_leave_days |
+ + Float | ++ Total Leave Days + + | ++ |
| 12 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Reason + + | ++ |
| 14 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 16 | +employee_name |
+ + Data | ++ Employee Name + + | ++ |
| 17 | +column_break_15 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +leave_approver |
+ + Link | ++ Leave Approver + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
| 19 | +leave_approver_name |
+ + Read Only | ++ Leave Approver Name + + | ++ |
| 20 | +sb10 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 21 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 22 | +follow_via_email |
+ + Check | ++ Follow via Email + + | ++ |
| 23 | +column_break_17 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 24 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 25 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 26 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Leave Application + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application
+ + + + + + + +Class AttendanceAlreadyMarkedError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class InvalidLeaveApproverError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class LeaveApplication
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_total_leaves_on_half_day + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + notify + (self, args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + notify_employee + (self, status) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + notify_leave_approver + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + show_block_day_warning + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + throw_overlap_error + (self, d) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_attendance + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_back_dated_application + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_balance_leaves + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_block_days + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_dates + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_dates_acorss_allocation + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_leave_approver + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_leave_overlap + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_max_days + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_salary_processed_days + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + +
Class LeaveApproverIdentityError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class LeaveDayBlockedError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class OverlapError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.add_block_dates + (events, start, end, employee, company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.add_department_leaves + (events, start, end, employee, company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.add_holidays + (events, start, end, employee, company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.add_leaves + (events, start, end, match_conditions=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.get_approved_leaves_for_period + (employee, leave_type, from_date, to_date) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.get_approvers
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.get_approvers + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.get_events
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.get_events + (start, end, filters=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.get_holidays + (employee, from_date, to_date) +
+get holidays between two dates for the given employee
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.get_leave_allocation_records + (date, employee=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.get_leave_balance_on
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.get_leave_balance_on + (employee, leave_type, date, allocation_records=None, consider_all_leaves_in_the_allocation_period=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.get_number_of_leave_days
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.get_number_of_leave_days + (employee, leave_type, from_date, to_date, half_day=None, half_day_date=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_application.leave_application.is_lwp + (leave_type) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Leave Application + + + + +
Leave Block List
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabLeave Block List
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +leave_block_list_name |
+ + Data | ++ Leave Block List Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 3 | +applies_to_all_departments |
+ + Check | +
+ Applies to Company
+ + If not checked, the list will have to be added to each Department where it has to be applied. + |
+ + |
| 4 | +block_days |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Block Days
+ + Stop users from making Leave Applications on following days. + |
+ + |
| 5 | +leave_block_list_dates |
+ + Table | ++ Leave Block List Dates + + | ++ + + + +Leave Block List Date + + + + | +
| 6 | +allow_list |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Allow Users
+ + Allow the following users to approve Leave Applications for block days. + |
+ + |
| 7 | +leave_block_list_allowed |
+ + Table | ++ Leave Block List Allowed + + | ++ + + + +Leave Block List Allow + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_block_list.leave_block_list
+ + + + + + + +Class LeaveBlockList
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_block_list.leave_block_list.get_applicable_block_dates
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_block_list.leave_block_list.get_applicable_block_dates + (from_date, to_date, employee=None, company=None, all_lists=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_block_list.leave_block_list.get_applicable_block_lists + (employee=None, company=None, all_lists=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_block_list.leave_block_list.is_user_in_allow_list + (block_list) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Department + + + + +
Leave Block List Allow
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabLeave Block List Allow
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +allow_user |
+ + Link | ++ Allow User + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Leave Block List + + + +
Leave Block List Date
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabLeave Block List Date
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +block_date |
+ + Date | ++ Block Date + + | ++ |
| 2 | +reason |
+ + Text | ++ Reason + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Leave Block List + + + +
Leave Control Panel
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 3 | +employment_type |
+ + Link | +
+ Employment Type
+ + Leave blank if considered for all employee types + |
+ + + + + +Employment Type + + + + | +
| 4 | +branch |
+ + Link | +
+ Branch
+ + Leave blank if considered for all branches + |
+ + + + + +Branch + + + + | +
| 5 | +department |
+ + Link | +
+ Department
+ + Leave blank if considered for all departments + |
+ + + + + +Department + + + + | +
| 6 | +designation |
+ + Link | +
+ Designation
+ + Leave blank if considered for all designations + |
+ + + + + +Designation + + + + | +
| 7 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +from_date |
+ + Date | ++ From Date + + | ++ |
| 9 | +to_date |
+ + Date | ++ To Date + + | ++ |
| 10 | +leave_type |
+ + Link | ++ Leave Type + + | ++ + + + +Leave Type + + + + | +
| 11 | +carry_forward |
+ + Check | +
+ Carry Forward
+ + Please select Carry Forward if you also want to include previous fiscal year's balance leaves to this fiscal year + |
+ + |
| 12 | +no_of_days |
+ + Float | ++ New Leaves Allocated (In Days) + + | ++ |
| 13 | +allocate |
+ + Button | ++ Allocate + + | +
+ allocate_leave+ |
+
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_control_panel.leave_control_panel
+ + + + + + + +Class LeaveControlPanel
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + allocate_leave + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_employees + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + to_date_validation + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_values + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/leave_type.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/leave_type.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9cf866a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/leave_type.html @@ -0,0 +1,202 @@ + + + + + + + +
Leave Type
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabLeave Type
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +leave_type_name |
+ + Data | ++ Leave Type Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +max_days_allowed |
+ + Data | ++ Max Days Leave Allowed + + | ++ |
| 3 | +is_carry_forward |
+ + Check | ++ Is Carry Forward + + | ++ |
| 4 | +is_encash |
+ + Check | ++ Is Encash + + | ++ |
| 5 | +is_lwp |
+ + Check | ++ Is Leave Without Pay + + | ++ |
| 6 | +allow_negative |
+ + Check | ++ Allow Negative Balance + + | ++ |
| 7 | +include_holiday |
+ + Check | ++ Include holidays within leaves as leaves + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.leave_type.leave_type
+ + + + + + + +Class LeaveType
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Attendance + + + + + +
- + + +Leave Allocation + + + + + +
- + + +Leave Application + + + + + +
- + + +Leave Control Panel + + + + +
Loan Type
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabLoan Type
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +loan_name |
+ + Data | ++ Loan Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +maximum_loan_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Maximum Loan Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 3 | +rate_of_interest |
+ + Percent | ++ Rate of Interest (%) Yearly + + | ++ |
| 4 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +disabled |
+ + Check | ++ Disabled + + | ++ |
| 6 | +description |
+ + Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.loan_type.loan_type
+ + + + + + + +Class LoanType
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Employee Loan + + + + + +
- + + +Employee Loan Application + + + + +
Offer Letter
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabOffer Letter
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +job_applicant |
+ + Link | ++ Job Applicant + + | ++ + + + +Job Applicant + + + + | +
| 2 | +applicant_name |
+ + Data | ++ Applicant Name + + | +
+ job_applicant.applicant_name+ |
+
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Awaiting Response +Accepted +Rejected+ |
+
| 5 | +offer_date |
+ + Date | ++ Offer Date + + | ++ |
| 6 | +designation |
+ + Link | ++ Designation + + | ++ + + + +Designation + + + + | +
| 7 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 8 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +offer_terms |
+ + Table | ++ Offer Letter Terms + + | ++ + + + +Offer Letter Term + + + + | +
| 10 | +section_break_14 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +select_terms |
+ + Link | ++ Select Terms and Conditions + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 12 | +terms |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | ++ |
| 13 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Offer Letter + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.offer_letter.offer_letter
+ + + + + + + +Class OfferLetter
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.offer_letter.offer_letter.make_employee
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.offer_letter.offer_letter.make_employee + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Offer Letter + + + + +
Offer Letter Term
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabOffer Letter Term
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +offer_term |
+ + Link | ++ Offer Term + + | ++ + + + +Offer Term + + + + | +
| 2 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +value |
+ + Small Text | ++ Value / Description + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Offer Letter + + + +
Offer Term
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabOffer Term
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +offer_term |
+ + Data | ++ Offer Term + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.offer_term.offer_term
+ + + + + + + +Class OfferTerm
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Offer Letter Term + + + + +
Process Payroll
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +section_break0 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Select Employees + + | ++ |
| 2 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 4 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 5 | +payroll_frequency |
+ + Select | ++ Payroll Frequency + + | +
+ +Monthly +Fortnightly +Bimonthly +Weekly +Daily+ |
+
| 6 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +branch |
+ + Link | ++ Branch + + | ++ + + + +Branch + + + + | +
| 8 | +department |
+ + Link | ++ Department + + | ++ + + + +Department + + + + | +
| 9 | +designation |
+ + Link | ++ Designation + + | ++ + + + +Designation + + + + | +
| 10 | +section_break_8 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +salary_slip_based_on_timesheet |
+ + Check | ++ Salary Slip Based on Timesheet + + | ++ |
| 12 | +select_payroll_period |
+ + Section Break | ++ Select Payroll Period + + | ++ |
| 13 | +start_date |
+ + Date | ++ Start Date + + | ++ |
| 14 | +column_break_11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +end_date |
+ + Date | ++ End Date + + | ++ |
| 16 | +section_break_16 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Accounts + + | ++ |
| 17 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 18 | +column_break_18 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 20 | +process_payroll |
+ + Section Break | ++ Process Payroll + + | ++ |
| 21 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 22 | +create_salary_slip |
+ + Button | +
+ Create Salary Slip
+ + Creates salary slip for above mentioned criteria. + |
+ + |
| 23 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 24 | +submit_salary_slip |
+ + Button | +
+ Submit Salary Slip
+ + Submit all salary slips for the above selected criteria + |
+ + |
| 25 | +account |
+ + Section Break | ++ Payment Entry + + | ++ |
| 26 | +payment_account |
+ + Link | +
+ Payment Account
+ + Select Payment Account to make Bank Entry + |
+ + + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 27 | +make_bank_entry |
+ + Button | +
+ Make Bank Entry
+ + Create Bank Entry for the total salary paid for the above selected criteria + |
+ + |
| 28 | +section_break2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 29 | +activity_log |
+ + HTML | ++ Activity Log + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.process_payroll.process_payroll
+ + + + + + + +Class ProcessPayroll
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + check_mandatory + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + create_log + (self, ss_list) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + create_salary_slips + (self) +
+ Creates salary slip for selected employees if already not created
++ + + + + +
+ + + create_submit_log + (self, submitted_ss, not_submitted_ss, jv_name) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + format_as_links + (self, salary_slip) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_account + (self, component_dict=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_default_payroll_payable_account + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_emp_list + (self) +
+ Returns list of active employees based on selected criteria
+ and for which salary structure exists
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_filter_condition + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_joining_releiving_condition + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_loan_accounts + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_sal_slip_list + (self, ss_status, as_dict=False) +
+ Returns list of salary slips based on selected criteria
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_salary_component_account + (self, salary_component) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_salary_component_total + (self, component_type=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_salary_components + (self, component_type) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_total_salary_and_loan_amounts + (self) +
+ Get total loan principal, loan interest and salary amount from submitted salary slip based on selected criteria
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_accural_jv_entry + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_payment_entry + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_start_end_dates + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + submit_salary_slips + (self) +
+ Submit all salary slips based on selected criteria
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_salary_slip_status + (self, jv_name=None) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.process_payroll.process_payroll.get_end_date
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.process_payroll.process_payroll.get_end_date + (start_date, frequency) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.process_payroll.process_payroll.get_frequency_kwargs + (frequency_name) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.process_payroll.process_payroll.get_month_details + (year, month) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.process_payroll.process_payroll.get_start_end_dates
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.process_payroll.process_payroll.get_start_end_dates + (payroll_frequency, start_date=None, company=None) +
+Returns dict of start and end dates for given payroll frequency based on start_date
++ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/repayment_schedule.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/repayment_schedule.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ccbfdeaa --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/repayment_schedule.html @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + +
Repayment Schedule
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabRepayment Schedule
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +payment_date |
+ + Date | ++ Payment Date + + | ++ |
| 2 | +principal_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Principal Amount + + | ++ |
| 3 | +interest_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Interest Amount + + | ++ |
| 4 | +total_payment |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Payment + + | ++ |
| 5 | +balance_loan_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Balance Loan Amount + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Employee Loan + + + +
Salary Component
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSalary Component
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +salary_component |
+ + Data | ++ Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +salary_component_abbr |
+ + Data | ++ Abbr + + | ++ |
| 3 | +type |
+ + Select | ++ Type + + | +
+ Earning +Deduction+ |
+
| 4 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 5 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +accounts |
+ + Table | ++ Accounts + + | ++ + + + +Salary Component Account + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.salary_component.salary_component
+ + + + + + + +Class SalaryComponent
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_abbr + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Salary Detail + + + + + +
- + + +Salary Structure + + + + +
Salary Detail
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSalary Detail
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +salary_component |
+ + Link | ++ Component + + | ++ + + + +Salary Component + + + + | +
| 2 | +abbr |
+ + Data | ++ Abbr + + | +
+ salary_component.salary_component_abbr+ |
+
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +statistical_component |
+ + Check | +
+ Statistical Component
+ + If selected, the value specified or calculated in this component will not contribute to the earnings or deductions. However, it's value can be referenced by other components that can be added or deducted. + |
+ + |
| 5 | +section_break_2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +condition |
+ + Code | ++ Condition + + | ++ |
| 7 | +amount_based_on_formula |
+ + Check | ++ Amount based on formula + + | ++ |
| 8 | +formula |
+ + Code | ++ Formula + + | ++ |
| 9 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 10 | +depends_on_lwp |
+ + Check | ++ Depends on Leave Without Pay + + | ++ |
| 11 | +default_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Default Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 12 | +section_break_11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +condition_and_formula_help |
+ + HTML | ++ Condition and Formula Help + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Salary Slip + + + +
- + + +Salary Structure + + + +
Salary Slip
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSalary Slip
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 3 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 4 | +employee_name |
+ + Read Only | ++ Employee Name + + | +
+ employee.employee_name+ |
+
| 5 | +department |
+ + Read Only | ++ Department + + | +
+ employee.department+ |
+
| 6 | +designation |
+ + Read Only | ++ Designation + + | +
+ employee.designation+ |
+
| 7 | +branch |
+ + Read Only | ++ Branch + + | +
+ employee.branch+ |
+
| 8 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Draft +Submitted +Cancelled+ |
+
| 10 | +journal_entry |
+ + Link | ++ Journal Entry + + | ++ + + + +Journal Entry + + + + | +
| 11 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 12 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 13 | +section_break_10 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +salary_slip_based_on_timesheet |
+ + Check | ++ Salary Slip Based on Timesheet + + | ++ |
| 15 | +start_date |
+ + Date | ++ Start Date + + | ++ |
| 16 | +end_date |
+ + Date | ++ End Date + + | ++ |
| 17 | +column_break_15 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +salary_structure |
+ + Link | ++ Salary Structure + + | ++ + + + +Salary Structure + + + + | +
| 19 | +payroll_frequency |
+ + Select | ++ Payroll Frequency + + | +
+ +Monthly +Fortnightly +Bimonthly +Weekly +Daily+ |
+
| 20 | +total_working_days |
+ + Float | ++ Working Days + + | ++ |
| 21 | +leave_without_pay |
+ + Float | ++ Leave Without Pay + + | ++ |
| 22 | +payment_days |
+ + Float | ++ Payment Days + + | ++ |
| 23 | +hourly_wages |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 24 | +timesheets |
+ + Table | ++ Salary Slip Timesheet + + | ++ + + + +Salary Slip Timesheet + + + + | +
| 25 | +column_break_20 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 26 | +total_working_hours |
+ + Float | ++ Total Working Hours + + | ++ |
| 27 | +hour_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Hour Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 28 | +section_break_26 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 29 | +bank_name |
+ + Data | ++ Bank Name + + | ++ |
| 30 | +bank_account_no |
+ + Data | ++ Bank Account No. + + | ++ |
| 31 | +column_break_01 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 32 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Salary Slip + + + + | +
| 33 | +earning_deduction |
+ + Section Break | ++ Earning & Deduction + + | ++ |
| 34 | +earning |
+ + Column Break | ++ Earning + + | ++ |
| 35 | +earnings |
+ + Table | ++ Earnings + + | ++ + + + +Salary Detail + + + + | +
| 36 | +deduction |
+ + Column Break | ++ Deduction + + | ++ |
| 37 | +deductions |
+ + Table | ++ Deductions + + | ++ + + + +Salary Detail + + + + | +
| 38 | +totals |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 39 | +gross_pay |
+ + Currency | ++ Gross Pay + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 40 | +column_break_25 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 41 | +total_deduction |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Deduction + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 42 | +loan_repayment |
+ + Section Break | ++ Loan repayment + + | ++ |
| 43 | +principal_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Principal Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 44 | +interest_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Interest Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 45 | +column_break_48 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 46 | +total_loan_repayment |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Loan Repayment + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 47 | +net_pay_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ net pay info + + | ++ |
| 48 | +net_pay |
+ + Currency | +
+ Net Pay
+ + Gross Pay - Total Deduction - Loan Repayment + |
+
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 49 | +column_break_53 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 50 | +rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 51 | +section_break_55 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 52 | +total_in_words |
+ + Data | +
+ Total in words
+ + Net Pay (in words) will be visible once you save the Salary Slip. + |
+ + |
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.salary_slip.salary_slip
+ + + + + + + +Class SalarySlip
+ +Inherits from erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.TransactionBase + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + add_earning_for_hourly_wages + (self, doc, salary_component, amount) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_component_amounts + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_lwp + (self, holidays, working_days) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_net_pay + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_existing + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_sal_struct + (self, joining_date, relieving_date) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + email_salary_slip + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + eval_condition_and_formula + (self, d, data) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_data_for_eval + (self) +
+Returns data for evaluating formula
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_date_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_emp_and_leave_details + (self) +
+First time, load all the components from salary structure
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_holidays_for_employee + (self, start_date, end_date) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_leave_details + (self, joining_date=None, relieving_date=None, lwp=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_payment_days + (self, joining_date, relieving_date) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_status + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + process_salary_structure + (self) +
+Calculate salary after salary structure details have been updated
++ + + + + +
+ + + pull_emp_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + pull_sal_struct + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_loan_repayment + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_status + (self, status=None) +
+Get and update status
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_time_sheet + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + sum_components + (self, component_type, total_field) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_component_row + (self, struct_row, amount, key) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_status + (self, salary_slip=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_dates + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.salary_slip.salary_slip.unlink_ref_doc_from_salary_slip + (ref_no) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Salary Slip + + + + + +
- + + +Timesheet + + + + +
Salary Slip Timesheet
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSalary Slip Timesheet
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +time_sheet |
+ + Link | ++ Time Sheet + + | ++ + + + +Timesheet + + + + | +
| 2 | +working_hours |
+ + Float | ++ Working Hours + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Salary Slip + + + +
Salary Structure
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSalary Structure
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 3 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 4 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +is_active |
+ + Select | ++ Is Active + + | +
+ +Yes +No+ |
+
| 6 | +payroll_frequency |
+ + Select | ++ Payroll Frequency + + | +
+ +Monthly +Fortnightly +Bimonthly +Weekly +Daily+ |
+
| 7 | +is_default |
+ + Select | ++ Is Default + + | +
+ Yes +No+ |
+
| 8 | +employee_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +employees |
+ + Table | +
+ Employees
+ + Select employees for current Salary Structure + |
+ + + + + +Salary Structure Employee + + + + | +
| 10 | +time_sheet_earning_detail |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +salary_slip_based_on_timesheet |
+ + Check | ++ Salary Slip Based on Timesheet + + | ++ |
| 12 | +column_break_17 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +salary_component |
+ + Link | +
+ Salary Component
+ + Salary Component for timesheet based payroll. + |
+ + + + + +Salary Component + + + + | +
| 14 | +hour_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Hour Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 15 | +earning_deduction |
+ + Section Break | +
+
+ + Salary breakup based on Earning and Deduction. + |
+ + |
| 16 | +earning |
+ + Section Break | ++ Earning + + | ++ |
| 17 | +earnings |
+ + Table | ++ Earnings + + | ++ + + + +Salary Detail + + + + | +
| 18 | +deduction |
+ + Section Break | ++ Deduction + + | ++ |
| 19 | +deductions |
+ + Table | ++ Deductions + + | ++ + + + +Salary Detail + + + + | +
| 20 | +net_pay_detail |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 21 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 22 | +total_earning |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Earning + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 23 | +total_deduction |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Deduction + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 24 | +net_pay |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Pay + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 25 | +account |
+ + Section Break | ++ Account + + | ++ |
| 26 | +mode_of_payment |
+ + Link | ++ Mode of Payment + + | ++ + + + +Mode of Payment + + + + | +
| 27 | +column_break_28 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +payment_account |
+ + Link | ++ Payment Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.salary_structure.salary_structure
+ + + + + + + +Class SalaryStructure
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + get_ss_values + (self, employee) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.salary_structure.salary_structure.get_employees
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.salary_structure.salary_structure.get_employees + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.salary_structure.salary_structure.make_salary_slip
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.salary_structure.salary_structure.make_salary_slip + (source_name, target_doc=None, employee=None, as_print=False, print_format=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Salary Slip + + + + +
Salary Structure Employee
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSalary Structure Employee
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 2 | +employee_name |
+ + Read Only | ++ Employee Name + + | +
+ employee.employee_name+ |
+
| 3 | +from_date |
+ + Date | ++ From Date + + | ++ |
| 4 | +to_date |
+ + Date | ++ To Date + + | ++ |
| 5 | +base |
+ + Currency | ++ Base + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 6 | +variable |
+ + Currency | ++ Variable + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Salary Structure + + + +
Training Event
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabTraining Event
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +event_name |
+ + Data | ++ Event Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +event_status |
+ + Select | ++ Event Status + + | +
+ Scheduled +Completed +Cancelled+ |
+
| 3 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +type |
+ + Select | ++ Type + + | +
+ Seminar +Theory +Workshop +Conference +Exam +Internet+ |
+
| 5 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +trainer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Trainer Name + + | ++ |
| 7 | +trainer_email |
+ + Data | ++ Trainer Email + + | ++ |
| 8 | +column_break_7 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 10 | +contact_number |
+ + Data | ++ Contact Number + + | ++ |
| 11 | +section_break_9 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +course |
+ + Link | ++ Course + + | ++ + + + +Course + + + + | +
| 13 | +location |
+ + Data | ++ Location + + | ++ |
| 14 | +column_break_12 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +start_time |
+ + Datetime | ++ Start Time + + | ++ |
| 16 | +end_time |
+ + Datetime | ++ End Time + + | ++ |
| 17 | +section_break_15 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +introduction |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Introduction + + | ++ |
| 19 | +section_break_18 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Attendees + + | ++ |
| 20 | +send_email |
+ + Check | +
+ Send Email
+ + Will send an email about the event to employees with status 'Open' + |
+ + |
| 21 | +employees |
+ + Table | ++ Employees + + | ++ + + + +Training Event Employee + + + + | +
| 22 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Training Event + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.training_event.training_event
+ + + + + + + +Class TrainingEvent
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + invite_employee + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update_after_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Training Event + + + + + +
- + + +Training Feedback + + + + + +
- + + +Training Result + + + + +
Training Event Employee
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabTraining Event Employee
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 2 | +employee_name |
+ + Read Only | ++ Employee Name + + | +
+ employee.employee_name+ |
+
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Open +Invited +Confirmed +Attended +Withdrawn+ |
+
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Training Event + + + +
Training Feedback
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabTraining Feedback
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 2 | +employee_name |
+ + Read Only | ++ Employee Name + + | +
+ employee.employee_name+ |
+
| 3 | +course |
+ + Link | ++ Course + + | ++ + + + +Course + + + + | +
| 4 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +training_event |
+ + Link | ++ Training Event + + | ++ + + + +Training Event + + + + | +
| 6 | +event_name |
+ + Data | ++ Event Name + + | ++ |
| 7 | +trainer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Trainer Name + + | ++ |
| 8 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +feedback |
+ + Text | ++ Feedback + + | ++ |
| 10 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Training Feedback + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.training_feedback.training_feedback
+ + + + + + + +Class TrainingFeedback
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Training Feedback + + + + +
Training Result
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabTraining Result
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +training_event |
+ + Link | ++ Training Event + + | ++ + + + +Training Event + + + + | +
| 2 | +section_break_3 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +employees |
+ + Table | ++ Employees + + | ++ + + + +Training Result Employee + + + + | +
| 4 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Training Result + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.training_result.training_result
+ + + + + + + +Class TrainingResult
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + send_result + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.training_result.training_result.get_employees
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.training_result.training_result.get_employees + (training_event) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Training Result + + + + +
Training Result Employee
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabTraining Result Employee
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 2 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +employee_name |
+ + Read Only | ++ Employee Name + + | +
+ employee.employee_name+ |
+
| 4 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +hours |
+ + Float | ++ Hours + + | ++ |
| 6 | +grade |
+ + Data | ++ Grade + + | ++ |
| 7 | +column_break_7 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +comments |
+ + Text | ++ Comments + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Training Result + + + +
Upload Attendance
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +download_template |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Download Template
+ + Download the Template, fill appropriate data and attach the modified file. +All dates and employee combination in the selected period will come in the template, with existing attendance records + |
+ + |
| 2 | +att_fr_date |
+ + Date | ++ Attendance From Date + + | ++ |
| 3 | +att_to_date |
+ + Date | ++ Attendance To Date + + | ++ |
| 4 | +get_template |
+ + Button | ++ Get Template + + | ++ |
| 5 | +upload_attendance_data |
+ + Section Break | ++ Import Attendance + + | ++ |
| 6 | +upload_html |
+ + HTML | ++ Upload HTML + + | ++ |
| 7 | +import_log |
+ + HTML | ++ Import Log + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.upload_attendance.upload_attendance
+ + + + + + + +Class UploadAttendance
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.upload_attendance.upload_attendance.add_data + (w, args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.upload_attendance.upload_attendance.add_header + (w) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.upload_attendance.upload_attendance.get_active_employees + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.upload_attendance.upload_attendance.get_dates + (args) +
+get list of dates in between from date and to date
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.upload_attendance.upload_attendance.get_existing_attendance_records + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.upload_attendance.upload_attendance.get_naming_series + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.upload_attendance.upload_attendance.get_template
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.upload_attendance.upload_attendance.get_template + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.upload_attendance.upload_attendance.upload
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.upload_attendance.upload_attendance.upload + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/vehicle.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/vehicle.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3a5197a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hr/vehicle.html @@ -0,0 +1,470 @@ + + + + + + + +
Vehicle
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabVehicle
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +license_plate |
+ + Data | ++ License Plate + + | ++ |
| 2 | +make |
+ + Data | ++ Make + + | ++ |
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +model |
+ + Data | ++ Model + + | ++ |
| 5 | +vehicle_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Details + + | ++ |
| 6 | +last_odometer |
+ + Int | ++ Odometer Value (Last) + + | ++ |
| 7 | +acquisition_date |
+ + Date | ++ Acquisition Date + + | ++ |
| 8 | +location |
+ + Data | ++ Location + + | ++ |
| 9 | +column_break_8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +chassis_no |
+ + Data | ++ Chassis No + + | ++ |
| 11 | +vehicle_value |
+ + Currency | ++ Vehicle Value + + | ++ |
| 12 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 13 | +insurance_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Insurance Details + + | ++ |
| 14 | +insurance_company |
+ + Data | ++ Insurance Company + + | ++ |
| 15 | +policy_no |
+ + Data | ++ Policy No + + | ++ |
| 16 | +column_break_15 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 17 | +start_date |
+ + Date | ++ Start Date + + | ++ |
| 18 | +end_date |
+ + Date | ++ End Date + + | ++ |
| 19 | +additional_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Additional Details + + | ++ |
| 20 | +fuel_type |
+ + Select | ++ Fuel Type + + | +
+ Petrol +Diesel +Natural Gas +Electric+ |
+
| 21 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ Fuel UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 22 | +carbon_check_date |
+ + Date | ++ Last Carbon Check + + | ++ |
| 23 | +column_break_21 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 24 | +color |
+ + Data | ++ Color + + | ++ |
| 25 | +wheels |
+ + Int | ++ Wheels + + | ++ |
| 26 | +doors |
+ + Int | ++ Doors + + | ++ |
| 27 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Vehicle + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.vehicle.vehicle
+ + + + + + + +Class Vehicle
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Vehicle + + + + + +
- + + +Vehicle Log + + + + +
Vehicle Log
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabVehicle Log
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +vehicle_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-user+ |
+
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ VLOG.+ |
+
| 3 | +license_plate |
+ + Link | ++ License Plate + + | ++ + + + +Vehicle + + + + | +
| 4 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 5 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +column_break_7 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +model |
+ + Read Only | ++ Model + + | ++ |
| 8 | +make |
+ + Read Only | ++ Make + + | ++ |
| 9 | +odometer_reading |
+ + Section Break | ++ Odometer Reading + + | ++ |
| 10 | +date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 11 | +odometer |
+ + Int | ++ Odometer + + | ++ |
| 12 | +refuelling_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Refuelling Details + + | ++ |
| 13 | +fuel_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Fuel Qty + + | ++ |
| 14 | +price |
+ + Currency | ++ Fuel Price + + | ++ |
| 15 | +column_break_15 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 16 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 17 | +invoice |
+ + Data | ++ Invoice Ref + + | ++ |
| 18 | +service_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Service Details + + | ++ |
| 19 | +service_detail |
+ + Table | ++ Service Detail + + | ++ + + + +Vehicle Service + + + + | +
| 20 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Vehicle Log + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.hr.doctype.vehicle_log.vehicle_log
+ + + + + + + +Class VehicleLog
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.vehicle_log.vehicle_log.get_make_model
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.vehicle_log.vehicle_log.get_make_model + (license_plate) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.hr.doctype.vehicle_log.vehicle_log.make_expense_claim
+
+ + + erpnext.hr.doctype.vehicle_log.vehicle_log.make_expense_claim + (docname) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Expense Claim + + + + + +
- + + +Vehicle Log + + + + +
Vehicle Service
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabVehicle Service
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +service_item |
+ + Select | ++ Service Item + + | +
+ +Brake Oil +Brake Pad +Clutch Plate +Engine Oil +Oil Change +Wheels+ |
+
| 2 | +type |
+ + Select | ++ Type + + | +
+ +Inspection +Service +Change+ |
+
| 3 | +frequency |
+ + Select | ++ Frequency + + | +
+ +Mileage +Monthly +Quarterly +Half Yearly +Yearly+ |
+
| 4 | +expense_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Expense + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Vehicle Log + + + +
Hub Settings
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +publish |
+ + Check | ++ Publish Items to Hub + + | ++ |
| 2 | +section_break_2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +publish_pricing |
+ + Check | ++ Publish Pricing + + | ++ |
| 4 | +publish_availability |
+ + Check | ++ Publish Availability + + | ++ |
| 5 | +column_break_5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +sync_now |
+ + Button | ++ Sync Now + + | +
+ sync+ |
+
| 7 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +seller_name |
+ + Data | ++ Seller Name + + | ++ |
| 9 | +seller_country |
+ + Link | ++ Seller Country + + | ++ + + + +Country + + + + | +
| 10 | +seller_email |
+ + Data | ++ Seller Email + + | +
+ |
+
| 11 | +column_break_10 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +seller_city |
+ + Data | ++ Seller City + + | ++ |
| 13 | +seller_website |
+ + Data | ++ Seller Website + + | ++ |
| 14 | +section_break_13 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +seller_description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Seller Description + + | ++ |
| 16 | +name_token |
+ + Data | ++ Name Token + + | ++ |
| 17 | +access_token |
+ + Data | ++ Access Token + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.hub_node.doctype.hub_settings.hub_settings
+ + + + + + + +Class HubSettings
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + get_args + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + publish_selling_items + (self) +
+Set publish_in_hub=1 for all Sales Items
+ + + + + +
+ + + register + (self) +
+Register at hub.erpnext.com, save name_token and access_token
+ + + + + +
+ + + sync + (self, verbose=True) +
+Sync items with hub.erpnext.com
++ + + + + +
+ + + unpublish + (self) +
+Unpublish from hub.erpnext.com
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_seller_details + (self) +
+Update details at hub.erpnext.com
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hub_node/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hub_node/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f20ef05e --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hub_node/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
Module hub_node
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+DocTypes for hub_node
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hub_node/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/hub_node/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d2a14f8c --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ + + + + + +ERPNext: Models (DocTypes)
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Browse DocTypes by Module
+ +Contents
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/maintenance/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/maintenance/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/maintenance/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/maintenance/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/maintenance/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d9b738c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/maintenance/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +Module maintenance
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+DocTypes for maintenance
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/maintenance/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/maintenance/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/maintenance/maintenance_schedule.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/maintenance/maintenance_schedule.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4c928331 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/maintenance/maintenance_schedule.html @@ -0,0 +1,701 @@ + + + + + + + +Maintenance Schedule
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabMaintenance Schedule
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +customer_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-user+ |
+
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ MS+ |
+
| 3 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 4 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +Submitted +Cancelled+ |
+
| 6 | +transaction_date |
+ + Date | ++ Transaction Date + + | ++ |
| 7 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 8 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Maintenance Schedule Item + + + + | +
| 9 | +schedule |
+ + Section Break | ++ Schedule + + | +
+ fa fa-time+ |
+
| 10 | +generate_schedule |
+ + Button | ++ Generate Schedule + + | ++ |
| 11 | +schedules |
+ + Table | ++ Schedules + + | ++ + + + +Maintenance Schedule Detail + + + + | +
| 12 | +contact_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Contact Info + + | ++ |
| 13 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ |
| 14 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 15 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Data | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 16 | +contact_email |
+ + Data | ++ Contact Email + + | ++ |
| 17 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 18 | +column_break_17 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +customer_address |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 20 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 21 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 22 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 23 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 24 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Maintenance Schedule + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.maintenance.doctype.maintenance_schedule.maintenance_schedule
+ + + + + + + +Class MaintenanceSchedule
+ +Inherits from erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.TransactionBase + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + check_serial_no_added + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + create_schedule_list + (self, start_date, end_date, no_of_visit, sales_person) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + generate_schedule + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_amc_date + (self, serial_nos, amc_expiry_date=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_dates_with_periodicity + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_maintenance_detail + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_sales_order + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_schedule + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_schedule_date_for_holiday_list + (self, schedule_date, sales_person) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_serial_no + (self, serial_nos, amc_start_date) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.maintenance.doctype.maintenance_schedule.maintenance_schedule.make_maintenance_visit
+
+ + + erpnext.maintenance.doctype.maintenance_schedule.maintenance_schedule.make_maintenance_visit + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Maintenance Schedule + + + + +
Maintenance Schedule Detail
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabMaintenance Schedule Detail
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +scheduled_date |
+ + Date | ++ Scheduled Date + + | ++ |
| 4 | +actual_date |
+ + Date | ++ Actual Date + + | ++ |
| 5 | +sales_person |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Person + + | ++ + + + +Sales Person + + + + | +
| 6 | +serial_no |
+ + Small Text | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Maintenance Schedule + + + +
Maintenance Schedule Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabMaintenance Schedule Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 4 | +schedule_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +start_date |
+ + Date | ++ Start Date + + | ++ |
| 6 | +end_date |
+ + Date | ++ End Date + + | ++ |
| 7 | +periodicity |
+ + Select | ++ Periodicity + + | +
+ +Weekly +Monthly +Quarterly +Half Yearly +Yearly +Random+ |
+
| 8 | +no_of_visits |
+ + Int | ++ No of Visits + + | ++ |
| 9 | +sales_person |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Person + + | ++ + + + +Sales Person + + + + | +
| 10 | +reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Reference + + | ++ |
| 11 | +serial_no |
+ + Small Text | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
| 12 | +sales_order |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Order + + | ++ + + + +Sales Order + + + + | +
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Maintenance Schedule + + + +
Maintenance Visit
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabMaintenance Visit
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +customer_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-user+ |
+
| 2 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ MV+ |
+
| 4 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 5 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ |
| 6 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 7 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 8 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Data | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 9 | +contact_email |
+ + Data | ++ Contact Email + + | ++ |
| 10 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +mntc_date |
+ + Date | ++ Maintenance Date + + | ++ |
| 12 | +mntc_time |
+ + Time | ++ Maintenance Time + + | ++ |
| 13 | +maintenance_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-wrench+ |
+
| 14 | +completion_status |
+ + Select | ++ Completion Status + + | +
+ +Partially Completed +Fully Completed+ |
+
| 15 | +column_break_14 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 16 | +maintenance_type |
+ + Select | ++ Maintenance Type + + | +
+ +Scheduled +Unscheduled +Breakdown+ |
+
| 17 | +section_break0 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-wrench+ |
+
| 18 | +purposes |
+ + Table | ++ Purposes + + | ++ + + + +Maintenance Visit Purpose + + + + | +
| 19 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ fa fa-file-text+ |
+
| 20 | +customer_feedback |
+ + Small Text | ++ Customer Feedback + + | ++ |
| 21 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 22 | +status |
+ + Data | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +Cancelled +Submitted+ |
+
| 23 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Maintenance Visit + + + + | +
| 24 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 25 | +contact_info_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Contact Info + + | +
+ fa fa-bullhorn+ |
+
| 26 | +customer_address |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 27 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 28 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 29 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 30 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.maintenance.doctype.maintenance_visit.maintenance_visit
+ + + + + + + +Class MaintenanceVisit
+ +Inherits from erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.TransactionBase + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + check_if_last_visit + (self) +
+check if last maintenance visit against same sales order/ Warranty Claim
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_customer_issue + (self, flag) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_serial_no + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Maintenance Visit + + + + +
Maintenance Visit Purpose
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabMaintenance Visit Purpose
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +serial_no |
+ + Small Text | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
| 4 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 5 | +work_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +service_person |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Person + + | ++ + + + +Sales Person + + + + | +
| 7 | +work_done |
+ + Small Text | ++ Work Done + + | ++ |
| 8 | +prevdoc_doctype |
+ + Link | ++ Document Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 9 | +prevdoc_docname |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Against Document No + + | +
+ prevdoc_doctype+ |
+
| 10 | +prevdoc_detail_docname |
+ + Data | ++ Against Document Detail No + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Maintenance Visit + + + +
BOM
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabBOM
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item |
+ + Link | +
+ Item
+ + Item to be manufactured or repacked + |
+ + + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +quantity |
+ + Float | +
+ Quantity
+ + Quantity of item obtained after manufacturing / repacking from given quantities of raw materials + |
+ + |
| 4 | +cb0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +is_active |
+ + Check | ++ Is Active + + | ++ |
| 6 | +is_default |
+ + Check | ++ Is Default + + | ++ |
| 7 | +with_operations |
+ + Check | +
+ With Operations
+ + Manage cost of operations + |
+ + |
| 8 | +rm_cost_as_per |
+ + Select | ++ Rate Of Materials Based On + + | +
+ Valuation Rate +Last Purchase Rate +Price List+ |
+
| 9 | +buying_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 10 | +currency_detail |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 12 | +column_break_12 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +conversion_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Conversion Rate + + | ++ |
| 14 | +operations_section |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Operations
+ + Specify the operations, operating cost and give a unique Operation no to your operations. + |
+ + |
| 15 | +operations |
+ + Table | ++ Operations + + | ++ + + + +BOM Operation + + + + | +
| 16 | +materials_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Materials + + | ++ |
| 17 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +BOM Item + + + + | +
| 18 | +scrap_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Scrap + + | ++ |
| 19 | +scrap_items |
+ + Table | ++ Scrap Items + + | ++ + + + +BOM Scrap Item + + + + | +
| 20 | +costing |
+ + Section Break | ++ Costing + + | ++ |
| 21 | +operating_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Operating Cost + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 22 | +raw_material_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Raw Material Cost + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 23 | +scrap_material_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Scrap Material Cost + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 24 | +cb1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +base_operating_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Operating Cost (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 26 | +base_raw_material_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Raw Material Cost(Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 27 | +base_scrap_material_cost |
+ + Data | ++ Scrap Material Cost(Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 28 | +total_cost_of_bom |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 29 | +total_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Cost + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 30 | +column_break_26 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 31 | +base_total_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Cost(Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 32 | +more_info_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 33 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 34 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 35 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 36 | +col_break23 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 37 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ Item UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 38 | +section_break_25 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 39 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Item Description + + | ++ |
| 40 | +column_break_27 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 41 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 42 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 43 | +section_break0 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Materials Required (Exploded) + + | ++ |
| 44 | +exploded_items |
+ + Table | ++ Exploded_items + + | ++ + + + +BOM Explosion Item + + + + | +
| 45 | +website_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Website + + | ++ |
| 46 | +show_in_website |
+ + Check | ++ Show in Website + + | ++ |
| 47 | +route |
+ + Small Text | ++ Route + + | ++ |
| 48 | +website_image |
+ + Attach Image | +
+ Image
+ + Item Image (if not slideshow) + |
+ + |
| 49 | +thumbnail |
+ + Data | ++ Thumbnail + + | ++ |
| 50 | +sb_web_spec |
+ + Section Break | ++ Website Specifications + + | ++ |
| 51 | +web_long_description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Website Description + + | ++ |
| 52 | +show_items |
+ + Check | ++ Show Items + + | ++ |
| 53 | +show_operations |
+ + Check | ++ Show Operations + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.bom.bom
+ + + + + + + +Class BOM
+ +Inherits from frappe.website.website_generator.WebsiteGenerator + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + add_exploded_items + (self) +
+Add items to Flat BOM table
++ + + + + +
+ + + add_to_cur_exploded_items + (self, args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_cost + (self) +
+Calculate bom totals
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_op_cost + (self) +
+Update workstation rate and calculates totals
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_rm_cost + (self) +
+Fetch RM rate as per today's valuation rate and calculate totals
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_sm_cost + (self) +
+Fetch RM rate as per today's valuation rate and calculate totals
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_recursion + (self) +
+Check whether recursion occurs in any bom
++ + + + + +
+ + + clear_operations + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + company_currency + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_bom_material_detail + (self, args=None) +
+Get raw material details like uom, desc and rate
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_bom_unitcost + (self, bom_no) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_child_exploded_items + (self, bom_no, stock_qty) +
+Add all items from Flat BOM of child BOM
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_context + (self, context) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_exploded_items + (self) +
+Get all raw materials including items from child bom
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_item_det + (self, item_code) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_rm_rate + (self, arg) +
+Get raw material rate as per selected method, if bom exists takes bom cost
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_valuation_rate + (self, args) +
+Get weighted average of valuation rate from all warehouses
++ + + + + +
+ + + manage_default_bom + (self) +
+Uncheck others if current one is selected as default, + update default bom in item master
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update_after_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_bom_material_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_conversion_rate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + traverse_tree + (self, bom_list=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_cost + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_cost_and_exploded_items + (self, bom_list=[]) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_exploded_items + (self) +
+Update Flat BOM, following will be correct data
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_stock_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_bom_currecny + (self, item) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_bom_links + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_currency + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_main_item + (self) +
+Validate main FG item
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_materials + (self) +
+Validate raw material entries
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_operations + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_rm_item + (self, item) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.bom.bom.get_bom_items
+
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.bom.bom.get_bom_items + (bom, company, qty=1, fetch_exploded=1) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.bom.bom.get_bom_items_as_dict + (bom, company, qty=1, fetch_exploded=1, fetch_scrap_items=0) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.bom.bom.get_children
+
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.bom.bom.get_children + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.bom.bom.get_list_context + (context) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.bom.bom.validate_bom_no + (item, bom_no) +
+Validate BOM No of sub-contracted items
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +BOM + + + + + +
- + + +BOM Item + + + + + +
- + + +BOM Replace Tool + + + + + +
- + + +Item + + + + + +
- + + +Production Order + + + + + +
- + + +Production Order Operation + + + + + +
- + + +Production Plan Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Order Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt Item + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Entry Detail + + + + +
BOM Explosion Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabBOM Explosion Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +cb |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +source_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Source Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 5 | +section_break_3 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 7 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 9 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 10 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +stock_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Stock Qty + + | ++ |
| 12 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 13 | +qty_consumed_per_unit |
+ + Float | ++ Qty Consumed Per Unit + + | ++ |
| 14 | +column_break_8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 16 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +BOM + + + +
BOM Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabBOM Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +bom_no |
+ + Link | ++ BOM No + + | ++ + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 5 | +source_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Source Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 6 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Item Description + + | ++ |
| 8 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 10 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 11 | +quantity_and_rate |
+ + Section Break | ++ Quantity and Rate + + | ++ |
| 12 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty + + | ++ |
| 13 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 14 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +stock_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Stock Qty + + | ++ |
| 16 | +conversion_factor |
+ + Float | ++ Conversion Factor + + | ++ |
| 17 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 18 | +rate |
+ + Currency | +
+ Rate
+ + See "Rate Of Materials Based On" in Costing Section + |
+
+ currency+ |
+
| 19 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 20 | +base_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Basic Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 21 | +base_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 22 | +section_break_18 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +scrap |
+ + Float | ++ Scrap % + + | ++ |
| 24 | +qty_consumed_per_unit |
+ + Float | ++ Qty Consumed Per Unit + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +BOM + + + +
BOM Operation
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabBOM Operation
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +operation |
+ + Link | ++ Operation + + | ++ + + + +Operation + + + + | +
| 2 | +workstation |
+ + Link | ++ Workstation + + | ++ + + + +Workstation + + + + | +
| 3 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 4 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +hour_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Hour Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 6 | +time_in_mins |
+ + Float | +
+ Operation Time
+ + In minutes + |
+ + |
| 7 | +operating_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Operating Cost + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 8 | +base_hour_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Base Hour Rate(Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 9 | +base_operating_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Operating Cost(Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 10 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +BOM + + + +
BOM Replace Tool
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+Replace a particular BOM in all other BOMs where it is used. It will replace the old BOM link, update cost and regenerate "BOM Explosion Item" table as per new BOM
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +current_bom |
+ + Link | +
+ Current BOM
+ + The BOM which will be replaced + |
+ + + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 2 | +new_bom |
+ + Link | +
+ New BOM
+ + The new BOM after replacement + |
+ + + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 3 | +replace |
+ + Button | ++ Replace + + | +
+ replace_bom+ |
+
+
Controller
+erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.bom_replace_tool.bom_replace_tool
+ + + + + + + +Class BOMReplaceTool
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + get_parent_boms + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + replace_bom + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_new_bom + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_bom + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/manufacturing/bom_scrap_item.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/manufacturing/bom_scrap_item.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a8a0a71f --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/manufacturing/bom_scrap_item.html @@ -0,0 +1,211 @@ + + + + + + + +
BOM Scrap Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabBOM Scrap Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +quantity_and_rate |
+ + Section Break | ++ Quantity and Rate + + | ++ |
| 4 | +stock_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty + + | ++ |
| 5 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 6 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 7 | +column_break_6 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 9 | +base_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Basic Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 10 | +base_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Basic Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +BOM + + + +
BOM Website Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabBOM Website Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | +
+ Workstation+ |
+
| 3 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Item Description + + | ++ |
| 4 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty + + | ++ |
| 5 | +website_image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
BOM Website Operation
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabBOM Website Operation
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +operation |
+ + Link | ++ Operation + + | ++ + + + +Operation + + + + | +
| 2 | +workstation |
+ + Link | ++ Workstation + + | ++ + + + +Workstation + + + + | +
| 3 | +time_in_mins |
+ + Float | ++ Operation Time + + | ++ |
| 4 | +website_image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 5 | +thumbnail |
+ + Data | ++ Thumbnail + + | ++ |
Module manufacturing
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+DocTypes for manufacturing
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/manufacturing/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/manufacturing/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/manufacturing/manufacturing_settings.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/manufacturing/manufacturing_settings.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5bc590c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/manufacturing/manufacturing_settings.html @@ -0,0 +1,272 @@ + + + + + + + +Manufacturing Settings
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +capacity_planning |
+ + Section Break | ++ Capacity Planning + + | ++ |
| 2 | +disable_capacity_planning |
+ + Check | +
+ Disable Capacity Planning and Time Tracking
+ + Disables creation of time logs against Production Orders. Operations shall not be tracked against Production Order + |
+ + |
| 3 | +allow_overtime |
+ + Check | +
+ Allow Overtime
+ + Plan time logs outside Workstation Working Hours. + |
+ + |
| 4 | +allow_production_on_holidays |
+ + Check | ++ Allow Production on Holidays + + | ++ |
| 5 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +capacity_planning_for_days |
+ + Int | +
+ Capacity Planning For (Days)
+ + Try planning operations for X days in advance. + |
+ + |
| 7 | +mins_between_operations |
+ + Int | +
+ Time Between Operations (in mins)
+ + Default 10 mins + |
+ + |
| 8 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +over_production_allowance_percentage |
+ + Percent | ++ Over Production Allowance Percentage + + | ++ |
| 10 | +backflush_raw_materials_based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Backflush Raw Materials Based On + + | +
+ BOM +Material Transferred for Manufacture+ |
+
| 11 | +column_break_11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +default_wip_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Default Work In Progress Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 13 | +default_fg_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Default Finished Goods Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.manufacturing_settings.manufacturing_settings
+ + + + + + + +Class ManufacturingSettings
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.manufacturing_settings.manufacturing_settings.get_mins_between_operations + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/manufacturing/operation.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/manufacturing/operation.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..ea12f290 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/manufacturing/operation.html @@ -0,0 +1,177 @@ + + + + + + + +
Operation
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabOperation
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +workstation |
+ + Link | ++ Default Workstation + + | ++ + + + +Workstation + + + + | +
| 2 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +description |
+ + Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.operation.operation
+ + + + + + + +Class Operation
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +BOM Operation + + + + + +
- + + +BOM Website Operation + + + + + +
- + + +Production Order Operation + + + + + +
- + + +Timesheet Detail + + + + +
Production Order
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabProduction Order
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-gift+ |
+
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ PRO-+ |
+
| 3 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +Submitted +Not Started +In Process +Completed +Stopped +Cancelled+ |
+
| 4 | +production_item |
+ + Link | ++ Item To Manufacture + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 5 | +bom_no |
+ + Link | ++ BOM No + + | ++ + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 6 | +use_multi_level_bom |
+ + Check | +
+ Use Multi-Level BOM
+ + Plan material for sub-assemblies + |
+ + |
| 7 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty To Manufacture + + | ++ |
| 9 | +material_transferred_for_manufacturing |
+ + Float | ++ Material Transferred for Manufacturing + + | ++ |
| 10 | +produced_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Manufactured Qty + + | ++ |
| 11 | +sales_order |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Order + + | ++ + + + +Sales Order + + + + | +
| 12 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 13 | +skip_transfer |
+ + Check | +
+ Skip Material Transfer
+ + Check if material transfer entry is not required + |
+ + |
| 14 | +warehouses |
+ + Section Break | ++ Warehouses + + | +
+ fa fa-building+ |
+
| 15 | +wip_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Work-in-Progress Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 16 | +fg_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Target Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 17 | +column_break_12 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +scrap_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Scrap Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 19 | +required_items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Required Items + + | ++ |
| 20 | +required_items |
+ + Table | ++ Required Items + + | ++ + + + +Production Order Item + + + + | +
| 21 | +time |
+ + Section Break | ++ Time + + | +
+ fa fa-time+ |
+
| 22 | +planned_start_date |
+ + Datetime | ++ Planned Start Date + + | ++ |
| 23 | +actual_start_date |
+ + Datetime | ++ Actual Start Date + + | ++ |
| 24 | +column_break_13 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +planned_end_date |
+ + Datetime | ++ Planned End Date + + | ++ |
| 26 | +actual_end_date |
+ + Datetime | ++ Actual End Date + + | ++ |
| 27 | +expected_delivery_date |
+ + Date | ++ Expected Delivery Date + + | ++ |
| 28 | +operations_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Operations + + | +
+ fa fa-wrench+ |
+
| 29 | +operations |
+ + Table | ++ Operations + + | ++ + + + +Production Order Operation + + + + | +
| 30 | +section_break_22 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Operation Cost + + | ++ |
| 31 | +planned_operating_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Planned Operating Cost + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 32 | +actual_operating_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Actual Operating Cost + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 33 | +additional_operating_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Operating Cost + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 34 | +column_break_24 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 35 | +total_operating_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Operating Cost + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 36 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ fa fa-file-text+ |
+
| 37 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Item Description + + | ++ |
| 38 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 39 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 40 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 41 | +material_request |
+ + Link | +
+ Material Request
+ + Manufacture against Material Request + |
+ + + + + +Material Request + + + + | +
| 42 | +material_request_item |
+ + Data | ++ Material Request Item + + | ++ |
| 43 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Production Order + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order
+ + + + + + + +Class ItemHasVariantError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class OperationTooLongError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class OverProductionError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class ProductionOrder
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + before_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_operating_cost + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_time + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_operation_fits_in_working_hours + (self, d) +
+Raises expection if operation is longer than working hours in the given workstation.
++ + + + + +
+ + + delete_timesheet + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_holidays + (self, workstation) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_items_and_operations_from_bom + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_operations_data + (self, data) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_start_end_time + (self, timesheet, operation_id) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_status + (self, status=None) +
+Return the status based on stock entries against this production order
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_time_logs + (self, open_new=False) +
+Capacity Planning. Plan time logs based on earliest availablity of workstation after + Planned Start Date. Time logs will be created and remain in Draft mode and must be submitted + before manufacturing entry can be made.
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_actual_dates + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_available_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_production_order_operations + (self) +
+Fetch operations from BOM and set in 'Production Order'
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_required_items + (self) +
+set required_items for production to keep track of reserved qty
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_start_end_time_for_workstation + (self, data, index) +
+Set start and end time for given operation. If first operation, set start as
+ planned_start_date, else add time diff to end time of earlier operation.
+ + + + + +
+ + + update_completed_qty_in_material_request + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_operation_status + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_planned_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_production_order_qty + (self) +
+Update Manufactured Qty and Material Transferred for Qty in Production Order + based on Stock Entry
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_required_items + (self) +
+ update bin reserved_qty_for_production
+ called from Stock Entry for production, after submit, cancel
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_reserved_qty_for_production + (self, items=None) +
+update reservedqtyfor_production in bins
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_status + (self, status=None) +
+Update status of production order if unknown
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_transaferred_qty_for_required_items + (self) +
+update transferred qty from submitted stock entries for that item against + the production order
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_operation_time + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_production_item + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_production_order_against_so + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_sales_order + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_warehouse_belongs_to_company + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + +
Class StockOverProductionError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.add_timesheet_detail
+
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.add_timesheet_detail + (timesheet, args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.check_if_scrap_warehouse_mandatory
+
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.check_if_scrap_warehouse_mandatory + (bom_no) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.get_default_warehouse
+
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.get_default_warehouse + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.get_events
+
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.get_events + (start, end, filters=None) +
+Returns events for Gantt / Calendar view rendering.
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
start- Start date-time.
+end- End date-time.
+filters- Filters (JSON).
+
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.get_item_details
+
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.get_item_details + (item, project=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.make_new_timesheet
+
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.make_new_timesheet + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.make_stock_entry
+
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.make_stock_entry + (production_order_id, purpose, qty=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.make_timesheet
+
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.make_timesheet + (production_order) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.stop_unstop
+
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_order.production_order.stop_unstop + (production_order, status) +
+Called from client side on Stop/Unstop event
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Production Order + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Timesheet + + + + +
Production Order Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabProduction Order Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +source_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Source Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 5 | +description |
+ + Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 6 | +qty_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Qty + + | ++ |
| 7 | +required_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Required Qty + + | ++ |
| 8 | +transferred_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Transferred Qty + + | ++ |
| 9 | +column_break_9 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +available_qty_at_source_warehouse |
+ + Float | ++ Available Qty at Source Warehouse + + | ++ |
| 11 | +available_qty_at_wip_warehouse |
+ + Float | ++ Available Qty at WIP Warehouse + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Production Order + + + +
Production Order Operation
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabProduction Order Operation
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +operation |
+ + Link | ++ Operation + + | ++ + + + +Operation + + + + | +
| 3 | +bom |
+ + Link | ++ BOM + + | ++ + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 4 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Operation Description + + | ++ |
| 5 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +completed_qty |
+ + Float | +
+ Completed Qty
+ + Operation completed for how many finished goods? + |
+ + |
| 7 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Pending +Work in Progress +Completed+ |
+
| 8 | +workstation |
+ + Link | ++ Workstation + + | ++ + + + +Workstation + + + + | +
| 9 | +estimated_time_and_cost |
+ + Section Break | ++ Estimated Time and Cost + + | ++ |
| 10 | +planned_start_time |
+ + Datetime | ++ Planned Start Time + + | ++ |
| 11 | +planned_end_time |
+ + Datetime | ++ Planned End Time + + | ++ |
| 12 | +column_break_10 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +time_in_mins |
+ + Float | +
+ Operation Time
+ + in Minutes + |
+ + |
| 14 | +hour_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Hour Rate + + | ++ |
| 15 | +planned_operating_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Planned Operating Cost + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 16 | +section_break_9 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Actual Time and Cost + + | ++ |
| 17 | +actual_start_time |
+ + Datetime | ++ Actual Start Time + + | ++ |
| 18 | +actual_end_time |
+ + Datetime | +
+ Actual End Time
+ + Updated via 'Time Log' + |
+ + |
| 19 | +column_break_11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 20 | +actual_operation_time |
+ + Float | +
+ Actual Operation Time
+ + in Minutes +Updated via 'Time Log' + |
+ + |
| 21 | +actual_operating_cost |
+ + Currency | +
+ Actual Operating Cost
+ + (Hour Rate / 60) * Actual Operation Time + |
+
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Production Order + + + +
Production Plan Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabProduction Plan Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +bom_no |
+ + Link | ++ BOM No + + | ++ + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 3 | +planned_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Planned Qty + + | ++ |
| 4 | +planned_start_date |
+ + Datetime | ++ Planned Start Date + + | ++ |
| 5 | +column_break_6 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | +
+ Warehouse
+ + Reserved Warehouse in Sales Order / Finished Goods Warehouse + |
+ + + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 7 | +sales_order |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Order + + | ++ + + + +Sales Order + + + + | +
| 8 | +material_request |
+ + Link | ++ Material Request + + | ++ + + + +Material Request + + + + | +
| 9 | +pending_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Pending Qty + + | ++ |
| 10 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 11 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 12 | +material_request_item |
+ + Data | ++ material_request_item + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Production Planning Tool + + + +
Production Plan Material Request
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabProduction Plan Material Request
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +material_request |
+ + Link | ++ Material Request + + | ++ + + + +Material Request + + + + | +
| 2 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +material_request_date |
+ + Date | ++ Material Request Date + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Production Planning Tool + + + +
Production Plan Sales Order
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabProduction Plan Sales Order
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +sales_order |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Order + + | ++ + + + +Sales Order + + + + | +
| 2 | +sales_order_date |
+ + Date | ++ Salse Order Date + + | ++ |
| 3 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 5 | +grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Production Planning Tool + + + +
Production Planning Tool
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +get_items_from |
+ + Select | ++ Get Items From + + | +
+ +Sales Order +Material Request+ |
+
| 2 | +filters |
+ + Section Break | ++ Filters + + | ++ |
| 3 | +fg_item |
+ + Link | ++ Item + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 4 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 5 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 6 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 7 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +from_date |
+ + Date | ++ From Date + + | ++ |
| 9 | +to_date |
+ + Date | ++ To Date + + | ++ |
| 10 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 11 | +section_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +get_sales_orders |
+ + Button | +
+ Get Sales Orders
+ + Pull sales orders (pending to deliver) based on the above criteria + |
+ + |
| 13 | +sales_orders |
+ + Table | ++ Sales Orders + + | ++ + + + +Production Plan Sales Order + + + + | +
| 14 | +section_break_16 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +get_material_request |
+ + Button | +
+ Get Material Request
+ + Pull Material Request of type Manufacture based on the above criteria + |
+ + |
| 16 | +material_requests |
+ + Table | ++ Material Requests + + | ++ + + + +Production Plan Material Request + + + + | +
| 17 | +items_for_production |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Select Items
+ + Enter items and planned qty for which you want to raise production orders or download raw materials for analysis. + |
+ + |
| 18 | +get_items |
+ + Button | ++ Get Items + + | ++ |
| 19 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Production Plan Item + + + + | +
| 20 | +create_production_orders |
+ + Section Break | ++ Production Orders + + | ++ |
| 21 | +create_production_order |
+ + Button | +
+ Create Production Orders
+ + Separate production order will be created for each finished good item. + |
+ + |
| 22 | +sb5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Material Requirement + + | ++ |
| 23 | +purchase_request_for_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Material Request For Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 24 | +create_material_requests_for_all_required_qty |
+ + Check | ++ Create for full quantity, ignoring quantity already on order + + | ++ |
| 25 | +create_material_requests |
+ + Button | ++ Create Material Requests + + | ++ |
| 26 | +download_materials_required |
+ + Button | +
+ Download Materials Required
+ + Download a report containing all raw materials with their latest inventory status + |
+ + |
| 27 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +create_material_requests_non_stock_request |
+ + Check | +
+ Include non-stock items
+ + If checked, Will include non-stock items in the Material Requests. + |
+ + |
| 29 | +use_multi_level_bom |
+ + Check | +
+ Use Multi-Level BOM
+ + If checked, all the children of each production item will be included in the Material Requests. + |
+ + |
| 30 | +only_raw_materials |
+ + Check | +
+ Only Obtain Raw Materials
+ + If checked, only Purchase material requests for final raw materials will be included in the Material Requests. Otherwise, Material Requests for parent items will be created + |
+ + |
| 31 | +include_subcontracted |
+ + Check | +
+ Include sub-contracted raw materials
+ + If checked, raw materials for items that are sub-contracted will be included in the Material Requests + |
+ + |
+
Controller
+erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.production_planning_tool.production_planning_tool
+ + + + + + + +Class ProductionPlanningTool
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + add_items + (self, items) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + add_mr_in_table + (self, pending_mr) +
+Add Material Requests in the table
++ + + + + +
+ + + add_so_in_table + (self, open_so) +
+Add sales orders in the table
++ + + + + +
+ + + clear_table + (self, table_name) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + create_material_request + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + create_production_order + (self, item_dict) +
+Create production order. Called from Production Planning Tool
++ + + + + +
+ + + download_raw_materials + (self) +
+Create csv data for required raw material to produce finished goods
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_csv + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_item_projected_qty + (self, item) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_mr_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_open_sales_orders + (self) +
+Pull sales orders which are pending to deliver based on criteria selected
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_pending_material_requests + (self) +
+Pull Material Requests that are pending based on criteria selected
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_production_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_projected_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_raw_materials + (self, bom_dict, non_stock_item=0) +
+Get raw materials considering sub-assembly items + { + "itemcode": [qtyrequired, description, stockuom, minorder_qty] + }
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_requested_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_so_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_so_wise_planned_qty + (self) +
+ bom_dict {
+ bom_no: ['sales_order', 'qty']
+ }
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_subitems + (self, bom_wise_item_details, bom, parent_qty, include_sublevel, only_raw, supply_subs, non_stock_item=0) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_items_dict + (self, item_list) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + raise_material_requests + (self) +
+ Raise Material Request if projected qty is less than qty required
+ Requested qty should be shortage qty considering minimum order qty
++ + + + + +
+ + + raise_production_orders + (self) +
+It will raise production order (Draft) for all distinct FG items
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_company + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_data + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/manufacturing/workstation.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/manufacturing/workstation.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..37071043 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/manufacturing/workstation.html @@ -0,0 +1,473 @@ + + + + + + + +
Workstation
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabWorkstation
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +description_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 2 | +workstation_name |
+ + Data | ++ Workstation Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +description |
+ + Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 4 | +over_heads |
+ + Section Break | ++ Operating Costs + + | ++ |
| 5 | +hour_rate_electricity |
+ + Currency | +
+ Electricity Cost
+ + per hour + |
+ + |
| 6 | +hour_rate_consumable |
+ + Currency | +
+ Consumable Cost
+ + per hour + |
+ + |
| 7 | +column_break_11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +hour_rate_rent |
+ + Currency | +
+ Rent Cost
+ + per hour + |
+ + |
| 9 | +hour_rate_labour |
+ + Currency | +
+ Wages
+ + Wages per hour + |
+ + |
| 10 | +hour_rate |
+ + Currency | +
+ Net Hour Rate
+ + per hour + |
+ + |
| 11 | +working_hours_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Working Hours + + | ++ |
| 12 | +working_hours |
+ + Table | ++ Working Hours + + | ++ + + + +Workstation Working Hour + + + + | +
| 13 | +holiday_list |
+ + Link | ++ Holiday List + + | ++ + + + +Holiday List + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.workstation.workstation
+ + + + + + + +Class NotInWorkingHoursError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class OverlapError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class Workstation
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_bom_operation + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_overlap_for_operation_timings + (self) +
+Check if there is no overlap in setting Workstation Operating Hours
++ + +
+ + + + + +
Class WorkstationHolidayError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.workstation.workstation.check_if_within_operating_hours + (workstation, operation, from_datetime, to_datetime) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.workstation.workstation.check_workstation_for_holiday + (workstation, from_datetime, to_datetime) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.workstation.workstation.get_default_holiday_list
+
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.workstation.workstation.get_default_holiday_list + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.manufacturing.doctype.workstation.workstation.is_within_operating_hours + (workstation, operation, from_datetime, to_datetime) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +BOM Operation + + + + + +
- + + +BOM Website Operation + + + + + +
- + + +Operation + + + + + +
- + + +Production Order Operation + + + + + +
- + + +Timesheet Detail + + + + +
Workstation Working Hour
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabWorkstation Working Hour
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +start_time |
+ + Time | ++ Start Time + + | ++ |
| 2 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +end_time |
+ + Time | ++ End Time + + | ++ |
| 4 | +enabled |
+ + Check | ++ Enabled + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Workstation + + + +
Homepage
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 2 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ TItle + + | ++ |
| 3 | +tag_line |
+ + Data | +
+ Tag Line
+ + Company Tagline for website homepage + |
+ + |
| 4 | +description |
+ + Text | +
+ Description
+ + Company Description for website homepage + |
+ + |
| 5 | +products_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Products + + | ++ |
| 6 | +products_url |
+ + Data | ++ URL for "All Products" + + | ++ |
| 7 | +products |
+ + Table | +
+ Products
+ + Products to be shown on website homepage + |
+ + + + + +Homepage Featured Product + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.portal.doctype.homepage.homepage
+ + + + + + + +Class Homepage
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + setup_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/portal/homepage_featured_product.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/portal/homepage_featured_product.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3fa4d67a --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/portal/homepage_featured_product.html @@ -0,0 +1,194 @@ + + + + + + + +
Homepage Featured Product
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabHomepage Featured Product
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +view |
+ + Button | ++ View + + | ++ |
| 5 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 6 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 7 | +column_break_7 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +image |
+ + Attach Image | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 9 | +thumbnail |
+ + Attach Image | ++ Thumbnail + + | ++ |
| 10 | +route |
+ + Small Text | ++ route + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Homepage + + + +
Module portal
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+DocTypes for portal
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/portal/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/portal/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/portal/products_settings.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/portal/products_settings.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..4d06aef4 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/portal/products_settings.html @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ + + + + + + + +Products Settings
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +home_page_is_products |
+ + Check | +
+ Home Page is Products
+ + If checked, the Home page will be the default Item Group for the website + |
+ + |
| 2 | +products_as_list |
+ + Check | ++ Show Products as a List + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.portal.doctype.products_settings.products_settings
+ + + + + + + +Class ProductsSettings
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.portal.doctype.products_settings.products_settings.home_page_is_products + (doc, method) +
+Called on saving Website Settings
++ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/projects/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/projects/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/projects/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/projects/activity_cost.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/projects/activity_cost.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e4aef361 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/projects/activity_cost.html @@ -0,0 +1,262 @@ + + + + + + + +
Activity Cost
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabActivity Cost
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +activity_type |
+ + Link | ++ Activity Type + + | ++ + + + +Activity Type + + + + | +
| 2 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 4 | +employee_name |
+ + Data | ++ Employee Name + + | ++ |
| 5 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +billing_rate |
+ + Currency | +
+ Billing Rate
+ + per hour + |
+ + |
| 7 | +column_break_6 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +costing_rate |
+ + Currency | +
+ Costing Rate
+ + per hour + |
+ + |
| 9 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ title + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.projects.doctype.activity_cost.activity_cost
+ + + + + + + +Class ActivityCost
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + check_unique + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_title + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + +
Class DuplicationError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/projects/activity_type.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/projects/activity_type.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c4d3314b --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/projects/activity_type.html @@ -0,0 +1,148 @@ + + + + + + + +
Activity Type
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabActivity Type
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +activity_type |
+ + Data | ++ Activity Type + + | ++ |
| 2 | +costing_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Default Costing Rate + + | ++ |
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +billing_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Default Billing Rate + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.projects.doctype.activity_type.activity_type
+ + + + + + + +Class ActivityType
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Activity Cost + + + + + +
- + + +Timesheet Detail + + + + +
Dependent Task
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabDependent Task
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +task |
+ + Link | ++ Task + + | ++ + + + +Task + + + + | +
Module projects
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+DocTypes for projects
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/projects/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/projects/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/projects/project.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/projects/project.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c1f81983 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/projects/project.html @@ -0,0 +1,1217 @@ + + + + + + + +Project
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabProject
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +project_name |
+ + Data | ++ Project Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Open +Completed +Cancelled+ |
+
| 3 | +project_type |
+ + Link | ++ Project Type + + | ++ + + + +Project Type + + + + | +
| 4 | +is_active |
+ + Select | ++ Is Active + + | +
+ Yes +No+ |
+
| 5 | +percent_complete_method |
+ + Select | ++ % Complete Method + + | +
+ Task Completion +Task Progress +Task Weight+ |
+
| 6 | +column_break_5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +priority |
+ + Select | ++ Priority + + | +
+ Medium +Low +High+ |
+
| 8 | +expected_start_date |
+ + Date | ++ Expected Start Date + + | ++ |
| 9 | +expected_end_date |
+ + Date | ++ Expected End Date + + | ++ |
| 10 | +percent_complete |
+ + Percent | ++ % Completed + + | ++ |
| 11 | +customer_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Customer Details + + | +
+ fa fa-user+ |
+
| 12 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 13 | +column_break_14 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +sales_order |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Order + + | ++ + + + +Sales Order + + + + | +
| 15 | +users_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Users + + | ++ |
| 16 | +users |
+ + Table | +
+ Users
+ + Project will be accessible on the website to these users + |
+ + + + + +Project User + + + + | +
| 17 | +sb_milestones |
+ + Section Break | ++ Tasks + + | +
+ fa fa-flag+ |
+
| 18 | +tasks |
+ + Table | ++ Tasks + + | ++ + + + +Project Task + + + + | +
| 19 | +copied_from |
+ + Data | ++ Copied From + + | ++ |
| 20 | +section_break0 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Notes + + | +
+ fa fa-list+ |
+
| 21 | +notes |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Notes + + | ++ |
| 22 | +section_break_18 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Start and End Dates + + | ++ |
| 23 | +actual_start_date |
+ + Data | ++ Actual Start Date + + | ++ |
| 24 | +actual_time |
+ + Float | ++ Actual Time (in Hours) + + | ++ |
| 25 | +column_break_20 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 26 | +actual_end_date |
+ + Date | ++ Actual End Date + + | ++ |
| 27 | +project_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Costing and Billing + + | +
+ fa fa-money+ |
+
| 28 | +estimated_costing |
+ + Currency | ++ Estimated Cost + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 29 | +total_costing_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Costing Amount (via Time Logs) + + | ++ |
| 30 | +total_expense_claim |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Expense Claim (via Expense Claims) + + | ++ |
| 31 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 32 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Default Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 33 | +column_break_28 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 34 | +total_billing_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Billing Amount (via Time Logs) + + | ++ |
| 35 | +total_purchase_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Purchase Cost (via Purchase Invoice) + + | ++ |
| 36 | +total_sales_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Sales Cost (via Sales Order) + + | ++ |
| 37 | +margin |
+ + Section Break | ++ Margin + + | ++ |
| 38 | +gross_margin |
+ + Currency | ++ Gross Margin + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 39 | +column_break_37 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 40 | +per_gross_margin |
+ + Percent | ++ Gross Margin % + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.projects.doctype.project.project
+ + + + + + + +Class Project
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + __setup__ + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + after_insert + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_tasks + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + load_tasks + (self) +
+Load tasks from the database
+ + + + + +
+ + + map_custom_fields + (self, source, target) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + onload + (self) +
+Load project tasks for quick view
++ + + + + +
+ + + send_welcome_email + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + sync_tasks + (self) +
+sync tasks and remove table
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_costing + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_dependencies_on_duplicated_project + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_percent_complete + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_project + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_purchase_costing + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_sales_costing + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_dates + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_weights + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.projects.doctype.project.project.get_cost_center_name
+
+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.project.project.get_cost_center_name + (project) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.project.project.get_list_context + (context=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.project.project.get_project_list + (doctype, txt, filters, limit_start, limit_page_length=20, order_by=modified) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.project.project.get_timeline_data + (doctype, name) +
+Return timeline for attendance
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.project.project.get_users_for_project + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Bank Guarantee + + + + + +
- + + +BOM + + + + + +
- + + +Budget + + + + + +
- + + +Delivery Note + + + + + +
- + + +Expense Claim + + + + + +
- + + +GL Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Issue + + + + + +
- + + +Journal Entry Account + + + + + +
- + + +Material Request Item + + + + + +
- + + +Payment Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Process Payroll + + + + + +
- + + +Production Order + + + + + +
- + + +Production Planning Tool + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Order Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt Item + + + + + +
- + + +Request for Quotation Item + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Order + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Ledger Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier Quotation Item + + + + + +
- + + +Task + + + + + +
- + + +Timesheet Detail + + + + +
Project Task
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabProject Task
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 2 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Open +Working +Pending Review +Closed +Cancelled+ |
+
| 3 | +edit_task |
+ + Button | ++ View Task + + | ++ |
| 4 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +start_date |
+ + Date | ++ Start Date + + | ++ |
| 6 | +end_date |
+ + Date | ++ End Date + + | ++ |
| 7 | +task_weight |
+ + Float | ++ Weight + + | ++ |
| 8 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 10 | +task_id |
+ + Link | ++ Task ID + + | ++ + + + +Task + + + + | +
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Project + + + +
Project User
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabProject User
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +user |
+ + Link | ++ User + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
| 2 | +welcome_email_sent |
+ + Check | ++ Welcome email sent + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Project + + + +
Task
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabTask
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +subject |
+ + Data | ++ Subject + + | ++ |
| 2 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 3 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Open +Working +Pending Review +Overdue +Closed +Cancelled+ |
+
| 5 | +priority |
+ + Select | ++ Priority + + | +
+ Low +Medium +High +Urgent+ |
+
| 6 | +section_break_10 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +exp_start_date |
+ + Date | ++ Expected Start Date + + | ++ |
| 8 | +expected_time |
+ + Float | ++ Expected Time (in hours) + + | ++ |
| 9 | +task_weight |
+ + Float | ++ Weight + + | ++ |
| 10 | +column_break_11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +exp_end_date |
+ + Date | ++ Expected End Date + + | ++ |
| 12 | +progress |
+ + Percent | ++ % Progress + + | ++ |
| 13 | +is_milestone |
+ + Check | ++ Is Milestone + + | ++ |
| 14 | +section_break0 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 15 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Details + + | ++ |
| 16 | +section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Depends On + + | ++ |
| 17 | +depends_on |
+ + Table | ++ depends_on + + | ++ + + + +Task Depends On + + + + | +
| 18 | +depends_on_tasks |
+ + Data | ++ Depends on Tasks + + | ++ |
| 19 | +actual |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 20 | +act_start_date |
+ + Date | ++ Actual Start Date (via Time Sheet) + + | ++ |
| 21 | +actual_time |
+ + Float | ++ Actual Time (in hours) + + | ++ |
| 22 | +column_break_15 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +act_end_date |
+ + Date | ++ Actual End Date (via Time Sheet) + + | ++ |
| 24 | +section_break_17 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +total_costing_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Costing Amount (via Time Sheet) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 26 | +total_expense_claim |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Expense Claim (via Expense Claim) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 27 | +column_break_20 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +total_billing_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Billing Amount (via Time Sheet) + + | ++ |
| 29 | +more_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 30 | +review_date |
+ + Date | ++ Review Date + + | ++ |
| 31 | +closing_date |
+ + Date | ++ Closing Date + + | ++ |
| 32 | +column_break_22 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 33 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.projects.doctype.task.task
+ + + + + + + +Class CircularReferenceError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class Task
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + check_recursion + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_customer_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_project_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + has_webform_permission + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + reschedule_dependent_tasks + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_depends_on + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_project + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_time_and_costing + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_total_expense_claim + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_dates + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_progress + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_status + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.projects.doctype.task.task.get_events
+
+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.task.task.get_events + (start, end, filters=None) +
+Returns events for Gantt / Calendar view rendering.
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
start- Start date-time.
+end- End date-time.
+filters- Filters (JSON).
+
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.task.task.get_project + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.projects.doctype.task.task.set_multiple_status
+
+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.task.task.set_multiple_status + (names, status) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.task.task.set_tasks_as_overdue + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Dependent Task + + + + + +
- + + +Expense Claim + + + + + +
- + + +Project Task + + + + + +
- + + +Task Depends On + + + + + +
- + + +Timesheet Detail + + + + +
Task Depends On
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabTask Depends On
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +task |
+ + Link | ++ Task + + | ++ + + + +Task + + + + | +
| 2 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +subject |
+ + Text | ++ Subject + + | ++ |
| 4 | +project |
+ + Text | ++ Project + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Task + + + +
Timesheet
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabTimesheet
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ TS- +TLB-+ |
+
| 2 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 3 | +sales_invoice |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Invoice + + | ++ + + + +Sales Invoice + + + + | +
| 4 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +salary_slip |
+ + Link | ++ Salary Slip + + | ++ + + + +Salary Slip + + + + | +
| 6 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Draft +Submitted +Billed +Payslip +Completed +Cancelled+ |
+
| 7 | +employee_detail |
+ + Section Break | ++ Employee Detail + + | ++ |
| 8 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 9 | +employee_name |
+ + Data | ++ Employee Name + + | ++ |
| 10 | +user |
+ + Link | ++ User + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
| 11 | +column_break_9 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +start_date |
+ + Date | ++ Start Date + + | ++ |
| 13 | +end_date |
+ + Date | ++ End Date + + | ++ |
| 14 | +production_detail |
+ + Section Break | ++ Production Detail + + | ++ |
| 15 | +production_order |
+ + Link | ++ Production Order + + | ++ + + + +Production Order + + + + | +
| 16 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 17 | +time_logs |
+ + Table | ++ Time Sheets + + | ++ + + + +Timesheet Detail + + + + | +
| 18 | +working_hours |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +total_hours |
+ + Float | ++ Total Working Hours + + | ++ |
| 20 | +billing_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Billing Details + + | ++ |
| 21 | +total_billable_hours |
+ + Float | ++ Total Billable Hours + + | ++ |
| 22 | +total_billed_hours |
+ + Float | ++ Total Billed Hours + + | ++ |
| 23 | +total_costing_amount |
+ + Float | ++ Total Costing Amount + + | ++ |
| 24 | +column_break_10 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +total_billable_amount |
+ + Float | ++ Total Billable Amount + + | ++ |
| 26 | +total_billed_amount |
+ + Float | ++ Total Billed Amount + + | ++ |
| 27 | +per_billed |
+ + Percent | ++ % Amount Billed + + | ++ |
| 28 | +section_break_18 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 29 | +note |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Note + + | ++ |
| 30 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Timesheet + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.projects.doctype.timesheet.timesheet
+ + + + + + + +Class OverProductionLoggedError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class OverlapError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class Timesheet
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + before_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_percentage_billed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_total_amounts + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_workstation_timings + (self, args) +
+Checks if Time Log is between operating hours of the Workstation.
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_workstation_working_day + (self, data) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_actual_timesheet_summary + (self, operation_id) +
+Returns 'Actual Operating Time'.
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_last_working_slot + (self, time_sheet, workstation) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_overlap_for + (self, fieldname, args, value) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_to_time + (self, data) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + move_to_next_day + (self, data) +
+Move start and end time one day forward
++ + + + + +
+ + + move_to_next_non_overlapping_slot + (self, data) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + schedule_for_production_order + (self, index) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_dates + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_employee_name + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_status + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_billing_hours + (self, args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_cost + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_production_order + (self, time_sheet) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_task_and_project + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_dates + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_mandatory_fields + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_overlap + (self, data) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_overlap_for + (self, fieldname, args, value) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_time_logs + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.projects.doctype.timesheet.timesheet.get_activity_cost
+
+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.timesheet.timesheet.get_activity_cost + (employee=None, activity_type=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.projects.doctype.timesheet.timesheet.get_events
+
+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.timesheet.timesheet.get_events + (start, end, filters=None) +
+Returns events for Gantt / Calendar view rendering.
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
start- Start date-time.
+end- End date-time.
+filters- Filters (JSON).
+
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.projects.doctype.timesheet.timesheet.get_projectwise_timesheet_data
+
+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.timesheet.timesheet.get_projectwise_timesheet_data + (project, parent=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.projects.doctype.timesheet.timesheet.get_timesheet
+
+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.timesheet.timesheet.get_timesheet + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.projects.doctype.timesheet.timesheet.get_timesheet_data
+
+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.timesheet.timesheet.get_timesheet_data + (name, project) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.projects.doctype.timesheet.timesheet.make_salary_slip
+
+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.timesheet.timesheet.make_salary_slip + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.projects.doctype.timesheet.timesheet.make_sales_invoice
+
+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.timesheet.timesheet.make_sales_invoice + (source_name, target=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.projects.doctype.timesheet.timesheet.set_missing_values + (time_sheet, target) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Salary Slip Timesheet + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice Timesheet + + + + + +
- + + +Timesheet + + + + +
Timesheet Detail
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabTimesheet Detail
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +activity_type |
+ + Link | ++ Activity Type + + | ++ + + + +Activity Type + + + + | +
| 2 | +from_time |
+ + Datetime | ++ From Time + + | ++ |
| 3 | +section_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +hours |
+ + Float | ++ Hrs + + | ++ |
| 5 | +to_time |
+ + Datetime | ++ To Time + + | ++ |
| 6 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +completed_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Completed Qty + + | ++ |
| 8 | +workstation |
+ + Link | ++ Workstation + + | ++ + + + +Workstation + + + + | +
| 9 | +column_break_12 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +operation |
+ + Link | ++ Operation + + | ++ + + + +Operation + + + + | +
| 11 | +operation_id |
+ + Data | ++ Operation Id + + | ++ |
| 12 | +project_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 14 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +task |
+ + Link | ++ Task + + | ++ + + + +Task + + + + | +
| 16 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 17 | +billable |
+ + Check | ++ Bill + + | ++ |
| 18 | +column_break_8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +billing_hours |
+ + Float | ++ Billing Hours + + | ++ |
| 20 | +section_break_11 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 21 | +billing_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Billing Rate + + | ++ |
| 22 | +billing_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Billing Amount + + | ++ |
| 23 | +column_break_14 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 24 | +costing_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Costing Rate + + | ++ |
| 25 | +costing_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Costing Amount + + | ++ |
| 26 | +reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Reference + + | ++ |
| 27 | +sales_invoice |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Invoice + + | ++ + + + +Sales Invoice + + + + | +
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Timesheet + + + +
GST HSN Code
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabGST HSN Code
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +hsn_code |
+ + Data | ++ HSN Code + + | ++ |
| 2 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.regional.doctype.gst_hsn_code.gst_hsn_code
+ + + + + + + +Class GSTHSNCode
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/regional/gst_settings.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/regional/gst_settings.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0a6a470f --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/regional/gst_settings.html @@ -0,0 +1,196 @@ + + + + + + + +
GST Settings
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +gst_summary |
+ + HTML | ++ GST Summary + + | ++ |
| 2 | +gstin_email_sent_on |
+ + Date | ++ GSTIN Email Sent On + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.regional.doctype.gst_settings.gst_settings
+ + + + + + + +Class EmailMissing
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class GSTSettings
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.regional.doctype.gst_settings.gst_settings._send_gstin_reminder + (party_type, party, default_email_id=None, sent_to=None) +
+Send GST Reminder email
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.regional.doctype.gst_settings.gst_settings.send_gstin_reminder
+
+ + + erpnext.regional.doctype.gst_settings.gst_settings.send_gstin_reminder + (party_type, party) +
+Send GSTIN reminder to one party (called from Customer, Supplier form)
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.regional.doctype.gst_settings.gst_settings.send_gstin_reminder_to_all_parties + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.regional.doctype.gst_settings.gst_settings.send_reminder
+
+ + + erpnext.regional.doctype.gst_settings.gst_settings.send_reminder + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/regional/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/regional/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0892aad5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/regional/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
Module regional
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+DocTypes for regional
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/regional/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/regional/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/academic_term.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/academic_term.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..97b5369b --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/academic_term.html @@ -0,0 +1,285 @@ + + + + + + + +Academic Term
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabAcademic Term
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +academic_year |
+ + Link | ++ Academic Year + + | ++ + + + +Academic Year + + + + | +
| 2 | +term_name |
+ + Data | ++ Term Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +term_start_date |
+ + Date | ++ Term Start Date + + | ++ |
| 4 | +term_end_date |
+ + Date | ++ Term End Date + + | ++ |
| 5 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.academic_term.academic_term
+ + + + + + + +Class AcademicTerm
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.schools.doctype.academic_term.academic_term.validate_duplication + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Course Scheduling Tool + + + + + +
- + + +Fee Structure + + + + + +
- + + +Fees + + + + + +
- + + +Program Enrollment + + + + + +
- + + +Program Enrollment Fee + + + + + +
- + + +Program Fee + + + + + +
- + + +School Settings + + + + + +
- + + +Student Group + + + + + +
- + + +Student Group Creation Tool + + + + + +
- + + +Student Log + + + + +
Academic Year
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabAcademic Year
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +academic_year_name |
+ + Data | ++ Academic Year Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +year_start_date |
+ + Date | ++ Year Start Date + + | ++ |
| 3 | +year_end_date |
+ + Date | ++ Year End Date + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.academic_year.academic_year
+ + + + + + + +Class AcademicYear
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Academic Term + + + + + +
- + + +Course Scheduling Tool + + + + + +
- + + +Fees + + + + + +
- + + +Program Enrollment + + + + + +
- + + +Program Enrollment Tool + + + + + +
- + + +School Settings + + + + + +
- + + +Student Admission + + + + + +
- + + +Student Applicant + + + + + +
- + + +Student Batch Creation Tool + + + + + +
- + + +Student Group + + + + + +
- + + +Student Group Creation Tool + + + + + +
- + + +Student Log + + + + +
Assessment Criteria
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabAssessment Criteria
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +assessment_criteria |
+ + Data | ++ Assessment Criteria + + | ++ |
| 2 | +assessment_criteria_group |
+ + Link | ++ Assessment Criteria Group + + | ++ + + + +Assessment Criteria Group + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.assessment_criteria.assessment_criteria
+ + + + + + + +Class AssessmentCriteria
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Assessment Plan Criteria + + + + + +
- + + +Assessment Result Detail + + + + + +
- + + +Course Assessment Criteria + + + + +
Assessment Criteria Group
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabAssessment Criteria Group
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +assessment_criteria_group |
+ + Data | ++ Assessment Criteria Group + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.assessment_criteria_group.assessment_criteria_group
+ + + + + + + +Class AssessmentCriteriaGroup
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Assessment Criteria + + + + +
Assessment Group
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabAssessment Group
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +assessment_group_name |
+ + Data | ++ Assessment Group Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +is_group |
+ + Check | ++ Is Group + + | ++ |
| 3 | +section_break_2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +parent_assessment_group |
+ + Link | ++ Parent Assessment Group + + | ++ + + + +Assessment Group + + + + | +
| 5 | +lft |
+ + Int | ++ lft + + | ++ |
| 6 | +rgt |
+ + Int | ++ rgt + + | ++ |
| 7 | +old_parent |
+ + Link | ++ old_parent + + | ++ + + + +Assessment Group + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.assessment_group.assessment_group
+ + + + + + + +Class AssessmentGroup
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Assessment Group + + + + + +
- + + +Assessment Plan + + + + +
Assessment Plan
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabAssessment Plan
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +assessment_name |
+ + Data | ++ Assessment Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +student_group |
+ + Link | ++ Student Group + + | ++ + + + +Student Group + + + + | +
| 3 | +course |
+ + Link | ++ Course + + | ++ + + + +Course + + + + | +
| 4 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +assessment_group |
+ + Link | ++ Assessment Group + + | ++ + + + +Assessment Group + + + + | +
| 6 | +maximum_assessment_score |
+ + Float | ++ Maximum Assessment Score + + | ++ |
| 7 | +grading_scale |
+ + Link | ++ Grading Scale + + | ++ + + + +Grading Scale + + + + | +
| 8 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Schedule + + | ++ |
| 9 | +schedule_date |
+ + Date | ++ Schedule Date + + | ++ |
| 10 | +room |
+ + Link | ++ Room + + | ++ + + + +Room + + + + | +
| 11 | +examiner |
+ + Link | ++ Examiner + + | ++ + + + +Instructor + + + + | +
| 12 | +examiner_name |
+ + Data | ++ Examiner Name + + | ++ |
| 13 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +from_time |
+ + Time | ++ From Time + + | ++ |
| 15 | +to_time |
+ + Time | ++ To Time + + | ++ |
| 16 | +supervisor |
+ + Link | ++ Supervisor + + | ++ + + + +Instructor + + + + | +
| 17 | +supervisor_name |
+ + Data | ++ Supervisor Name + + | ++ |
| 18 | +section_break_20 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +assessment_criteria |
+ + Table | ++ Assessment Criteria + + | ++ + + + +Assessment Plan Criteria + + + + | +
| 20 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Assessment Plan + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.assessment_plan.assessment_plan
+ + + + + + + +Class AssessmentPlan
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_assessment_criteria + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_max_score + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_overlap + (self) +
+Validates overlap for Student Group, Instructor, Room
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Assessment Plan + + + + + +
- + + +Assessment Result + + + + + +
- + + +Assessment Result Tool + + + + +
Assessment Plan Criteria
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabAssessment Plan Criteria
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +assessment_criteria |
+ + Link | ++ Assessment Criteria + + | ++ + + + +Assessment Criteria + + + + | +
| 2 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +maximum_score |
+ + Float | ++ Maximum Score + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Assessment Plan + + + +
Assessment Result
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabAssessment Result
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +student |
+ + Link | ++ Student + + | ++ + + + +Student + + + + | +
| 2 | +student_name |
+ + Data | ++ Student Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +assessment_plan |
+ + Link | ++ Assessment Plan + + | ++ + + + +Assessment Plan + + + + | +
| 5 | +grading_scale |
+ + Link | ++ Grading Scale + + | ++ + + + +Grading Scale + + + + | +
| 6 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +details |
+ + Table | ++ Details + + | ++ + + + +Assessment Result Detail + + + + | +
| 8 | +section_break_8 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +maximum_score |
+ + Float | ++ Maximum Score + + | ++ |
| 10 | +total_score |
+ + Float | ++ Total Score + + | ++ |
| 11 | +column_break_11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +grade |
+ + Data | ++ Grade + + | ++ |
| 13 | +section_break_13 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +comment |
+ + Long Text | ++ Comment + + | ++ |
| 15 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Assessment Result + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.assessment_result.assessment_result
+ + + + + + + +Class AssessmentResult
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_grade + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_maximum_score + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Assessment Result + + + + +
Assessment Result Detail
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabAssessment Result Detail
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +assessment_criteria |
+ + Link | ++ Assessment Criteria + + | ++ + + + +Assessment Criteria + + + + | +
| 2 | +maximum_score |
+ + Float | ++ Maximum Score + + | ++ |
| 3 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +score |
+ + Float | ++ Score + + | ++ |
| 5 | +grade |
+ + Data | ++ Grade + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Assessment Result + + + +
Assessment Result Tool
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +assessment_plan |
+ + Link | ++ Assessment Plan + + | ++ + + + +Assessment Plan + + + + | +
| 2 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +student_group |
+ + Link | ++ Student Group + + | ++ + + + +Student Group + + + + | +
| 4 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +result_html |
+ + HTML | ++ Result HTML + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.assessment_result_tool.assessment_result_tool
+ + + + + + + +Class AssessmentResultTool
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/course.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/course.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..1638fd05 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/course.html @@ -0,0 +1,368 @@ + + + + + + + +
Course
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabCourse
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +course_name |
+ + Data | ++ Course Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +department |
+ + Link | ++ Department + + | ++ + + + +Department + + + + | +
| 3 | +parent_course |
+ + Data | ++ Parent Course (Leave blank, if this isn't part of Parent Course) + + | ++ |
| 4 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +course_code |
+ + Data | ++ Course Code + + | ++ |
| 6 | +course_abbreviation |
+ + Data | ++ Course Abbreviation + + | ++ |
| 7 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +course_intro |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Course Intro + + | ++ |
| 9 | +assessment |
+ + Section Break | ++ Assessment + + | ++ |
| 10 | +default_grading_scale |
+ + Link | ++ Default Grading Scale + + | ++ + + + +Grading Scale + + + + | +
| 11 | +assessment_criteria |
+ + Table | ++ Assessment Criteria + + | ++ + + + +Course Assessment Criteria + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.course.course
+ + + + + + + +Class Course
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_assessment_criteria + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Assessment Plan + + + + + +
- + + +Course Schedule + + + + + +
- + + +Course Scheduling Tool + + + + + +
- + + +Discussion + + + + + +
- + + +Program Course + + + + + +
- + + +Program Enrollment Course + + + + + +
- + + +Student Group + + + + + +
- + + +Student Group Creation Tool Course + + + + + +
- + + +Topic + + + + + +
- + + +Training Event + + + + + +
- + + +Training Feedback + + + + +
Course Assessment Criteria
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabCourse Assessment Criteria
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +assessment_criteria |
+ + Link | ++ Assessment Criteria + + | ++ + + + +Assessment Criteria + + + + | +
| 2 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +weightage |
+ + Percent | ++ Weightage + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Course + + + +
Course Schedule
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabCourse Schedule
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +student_group |
+ + Link | ++ Student Group + + | ++ + + + +Student Group + + + + | +
| 2 | +instructor |
+ + Link | ++ Instructor + + | ++ + + + +Instructor + + + + | +
| 3 | +instructor_name |
+ + Read Only | ++ Instructor Name + + | +
+ instructor.Instructor_name+ |
+
| 4 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Naming Series + + | +
+ SH+ |
+
| 6 | +course |
+ + Link | ++ Course + + | ++ + + + +Course + + + + | +
| 7 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +schedule_date |
+ + Date | ++ Schedule Date + + | ++ |
| 9 | +room |
+ + Link | ++ Room + + | ++ + + + +Room + + + + | +
| 10 | +column_break_9 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +from_time |
+ + Time | ++ From Time + + | ++ |
| 12 | +to_time |
+ + Time | ++ To Time + + | ++ |
| 13 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.course_schedule.course_schedule
+ + + + + + + +Class CourseSchedule
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + set_title + (self) +
+Set document Title
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_course + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_date + (self) +
+Validates if fromtime is greater than totime
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_overlap + (self) +
+Validates overlap for Student Group, Instructor, Room
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Student Attendance + + + + + +
- + + +Student Attendance Tool + + + + +
Course Scheduling Tool
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +student_group |
+ + Link | ++ Student Group + + | ++ + + + +Student Group + + + + | +
| 2 | +course |
+ + Link | ++ Course + + | ++ + + + +Course + + + + | +
| 3 | +program |
+ + Link | ++ Program + + | ++ + + + +Program + + + + | +
| 4 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +academic_year |
+ + Link | ++ Academic Year + + | ++ + + + +Academic Year + + + + | +
| 6 | +academic_term |
+ + Link | ++ Academic Term + + | ++ + + + +Academic Term + + + + | +
| 7 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +instructor |
+ + Link | ++ Instructor + + | ++ + + + +Instructor + + + + | +
| 9 | +instructor_name |
+ + Read Only | ++ Instructor Name + + | +
+ instructor.instructor_name+ |
+
| 10 | +column_break_9 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +room |
+ + Link | ++ Room + + | ++ + + + +Room + + + + | +
| 12 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +from_time |
+ + Time | ++ From Time + + | ++ |
| 14 | +course_start_date |
+ + Date | ++ Course Start Date + + | ++ |
| 15 | +day |
+ + Select | ++ Day + + | +
+ +Monday +Tuesday +Wednesday +Thursday +Friday +Saturday +Sunday+ |
+
| 16 | +rechedule |
+ + Check | ++ Rechedule + + | ++ |
| 17 | +column_break_15 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +to_time |
+ + Time | ++ To TIme + + | ++ |
| 19 | +course_end_date |
+ + Date | ++ Course End Date + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.course_scheduling_tool.course_scheduling_tool
+ + + + + + + +Class CourseSchedulingTool
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + delete_course_schedule + (self, rescheduled, reschedule_errors) +
+Delete all course schedule within the Date range and specified filters
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_course_schedule + (self, date) +
+Makes a new Course Schedule.
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
date- Date on which Course Schedule will be created.
+
+ + + + + +
+ + + schedule_course + (self) +
+Creates course schedules as per specified parametes
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_date + (self) +
+Validates if Course Start Date is greater than Course End Date
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_mandatory + (self) +
+Validates all mandatory fields
++ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/fee_category.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/fee_category.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7a4ca3db --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/fee_category.html @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + +
Fee Category
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabFee Category
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +category_name |
+ + Data | ++ Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.fee_category.fee_category
+ + + + + + + +Class FeeCategory
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Fee Component + + + + +
Fee Component
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabFee Component
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +fees_category |
+ + Link | ++ Fees Category + + | ++ + + + +Fee Category + + + + | +
| 2 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Fee Structure + + + +
- + + +Fees + + + +
Fee Structure
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabFee Structure
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +program |
+ + Link | ++ Program + + | ++ + + + +Program + + + + | +
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Naming Series + + | +
+ FS.+ |
+
| 3 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +academic_term |
+ + Link | ++ Academic Term + + | ++ + + + +Academic Term + + + + | +
| 5 | +student_category |
+ + Link | ++ Student Category + + | ++ + + + +Student Category + + + + | +
| 6 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +components |
+ + Table | ++ Components + + | ++ + + + +Fee Component + + + + | +
| 8 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +total_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Amount + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.fee_structure.fee_structure
+ + + + + + + +Class FeeStructure
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + calculate_total + (self) +
+Calculates total amount.
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Fees + + + + + +
- + + +Program Enrollment Fee + + + + + +
- + + +Program Fee + + + + +
Fees
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabFees
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +student |
+ + Link | ++ Student + + | ++ + + + +Student + + + + | +
| 2 | +academic_year |
+ + Link | ++ Academic Year + + | ++ + + + +Academic Year + + + + | +
| 3 | +academic_term |
+ + Link | ++ Academic Term + + | ++ + + + +Academic Term + + + + | +
| 4 | +fee_structure |
+ + Link | ++ Fee Structure + + | ++ + + + +Fee Structure + + + + | +
| 5 | +due_date |
+ + Date | ++ Due Date + + | ++ |
| 6 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +student_name |
+ + Data | ++ Student Name + + | ++ |
| 8 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Naming Series + + | +
+ FEE.+ |
+
| 9 | +program |
+ + Link | ++ Program + + | ++ + + + +Program + + + + | +
| 10 | +program_enrollment |
+ + Link | ++ Program Enrollment + + | ++ + + + +Program Enrollment + + + + | +
| 11 | +student_category |
+ + Link | ++ Student Category + + | ++ + + + +Student Category + + + + | +
| 12 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +components |
+ + Table | ++ Components + + | ++ + + + +Fee Component + + + + | +
| 14 | +section_break_10 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Fees + + + + | +
| 16 | +column_break_11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 17 | +total_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Amount + + | ++ |
| 18 | +paid_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Paid Amount + + | ++ |
| 19 | +outstanding_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Outstanding Amount + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.fees.fees
+ + + + + + + +Class Fees
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + calculate_total + (self) +
+Calculates total amount.
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.schools.doctype.fees.fees.get_fee_list + (doctype, txt, filters, limit_start, limit_page_length=20, order_by=modified) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.schools.doctype.fees.fees.get_list_context + (context=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Fees + + + + +
Grading Scale
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabGrading Scale
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +grading_scale_name |
+ + Data | ++ Grading Scale Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 3 | +grading_intervals_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Grading Scale Intervals + + | ++ |
| 4 | +intervals |
+ + Table | ++ Intervals + + | ++ + + + +Grading Scale Interval + + + + | +
| 5 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Grading Scale + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.grading_scale.grading_scale
+ + + + + + + +Class GradingScale
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Assessment Plan + + + + + +
- + + +Assessment Result + + + + + +
- + + +Course + + + + + +
- + + +Grading Scale + + + + +
Grading Scale Interval
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabGrading Scale Interval
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +grade_code |
+ + Data | ++ Grade Code + + | ++ |
| 2 | +threshold |
+ + Percent | ++ Threshold + + | ++ |
| 3 | +grade_description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Grade Description + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Grading Scale + + + +
Guardian
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabGuardian
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +guardian_name |
+ + Data | ++ Guardian Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +email_address |
+ + Data | ++ Email Address + + | ++ |
| 3 | +mobile_number |
+ + Data | ++ Mobile Number + + | ++ |
| 4 | +alternate_number |
+ + Data | ++ Alternate Number + + | ++ |
| 5 | +date_of_birth |
+ + Date | ++ Date of Birth + + | ++ |
| 6 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +education |
+ + Data | ++ Education + + | ++ |
| 8 | +occupation |
+ + Data | ++ Occupation + + | ++ |
| 9 | +designation |
+ + Data | ++ Designation + + | ++ |
| 10 | +work_address |
+ + Text | ++ Work Address + + | ++ |
| 11 | +image |
+ + Attach Image | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 12 | +section_break_13 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Guardian Of + + | ++ |
| 13 | +students |
+ + Table | ++ Students + + | ++ + + + +Guardian Student + + + + | +
| 14 | +section_break_8 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Guardian Interests + + | ++ |
| 15 | +interests |
+ + Table | ++ Interests + + | ++ + + + +Guardian Interest + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.guardian.guardian
+ + + + + + + +Class Guardian
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + __setup__ + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + load_students + (self) +
+Load students from the database
+ + + + + +
+ + + onload + (self) +
+Load Students for quick view
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Student Guardian + + + + +
Guardian Interest
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabGuardian Interest
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +interest |
+ + Link | ++ Interest + + | ++ + + + +Interest + + + + | +
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Guardian + + + +
Guardian Student
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabGuardian Student
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +student |
+ + Link | ++ Student + + | ++ + + + +Student + + + + | +
| 2 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +student_name |
+ + Data | ++ Student Name + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Guardian + + + +
Module schools
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+DocTypes for schools
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/instructor.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/instructor.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0d17e4fe --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/instructor.html @@ -0,0 +1,219 @@ + + + + + + + +Instructor
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabInstructor
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +instructor_name |
+ + Data | ++ Instructor Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 3 | +column_break_5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Naming Series + + | +
+ INS/+ |
+
| 5 | +department |
+ + Link | ++ Department + + | ++ + + + +Department + + + + | +
| 6 | +image |
+ + Attach Image | ++ Image + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.instructor.instructor
+ + + + + + + +Class Instructor
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Announcement + + + + + +
- + + +Assessment Plan + + + + + +
- + + +Course Schedule + + + + + +
- + + +Course Scheduling Tool + + + + + +
- + + +Student Group Instructor + + + + +
Program
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabProgram
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +program_name |
+ + Data | ++ Program Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +department |
+ + Link | ++ Department + + | ++ + + + +Department + + + + | +
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +program_code |
+ + Data | ++ Program Code + + | ++ |
| 5 | +program_abbreviation |
+ + Data | ++ Program Abbreviation + + | ++ |
| 6 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Course + + | ++ |
| 7 | +courses |
+ + Table | ++ Courses + + | ++ + + + +Program Course + + + + | +
| 8 | +fee_schedule |
+ + Section Break | ++ Fee Schedule + + | ++ |
| 9 | +fees |
+ + Table | ++ Fees + + | ++ + + + +Program Fee + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.program.program
+ + + + + + + +Class Program
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Course Scheduling Tool + + + + + +
- + + +Fee Structure + + + + + +
- + + +Fees + + + + + +
- + + +Program Enrollment + + + + + +
- + + +Program Enrollment Tool + + + + + +
- + + +Student Admission + + + + + +
- + + +Student Applicant + + + + + +
- + + +Student Batch Creation Tool + + + + + +
- + + +Student Group + + + + + +
- + + +Student Group Creation Tool + + + + + +
- + + +Student Log + + + + +
Program Course
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabProgram Course
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +course |
+ + Link | ++ Course + + | ++ + + + +Course + + + + | +
| 2 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +course_name |
+ + Data | ++ Course Name + + | +
+ course.course_name+ |
+
| 4 | +required |
+ + Check | ++ Mandatory + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Program + + + +
Program Enrollment
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabProgram Enrollment
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +student |
+ + Link | ++ Student + + | ++ + + + +Student + + + + | +
| 2 | +student_name |
+ + Read Only | ++ Student Name + + | +
+ student.title+ |
+
| 3 | +student_category |
+ + Link | ++ Student Category + + | ++ + + + +Student Category + + + + | +
| 4 | +school_house |
+ + Link | ++ School House + + | ++ + + + +School House + + + + | +
| 5 | +boarding_student |
+ + Check | +
+ Boarding Student
+ + Check this if the Student is residing at the Institute's Hostel. + |
+ + |
| 6 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +program |
+ + Link | ++ Program + + | ++ + + + +Program + + + + | +
| 8 | +student_batch_name |
+ + Link | ++ Student Batch + + | ++ + + + +Student Batch Name + + + + | +
| 9 | +academic_year |
+ + Link | ++ Academic Year + + | ++ + + + +Academic Year + + + + | +
| 10 | +academic_term |
+ + Link | ++ Academic Term + + | ++ + + + +Academic Term + + + + | +
| 11 | +enrollment_date |
+ + Date | ++ Enrollment Date + + | ++ |
| 12 | +transportation |
+ + Section Break | ++ Transportation + + | ++ |
| 13 | +mode_of_transportation |
+ + Select | ++ Mode of Transportation + + | +
+ +Walking +School Bus +Public Transport +Self-Driving Vehicle +Pick/Drop by Guardian+ |
+
| 14 | +column_break_13 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +vehicle_no |
+ + Data | ++ Vehicle/Bus Number + + | ++ |
| 16 | +enrolled_courses |
+ + Section Break | ++ Enrolled courses + + | ++ |
| 17 | +courses |
+ + Table | ++ Courses + + | ++ + + + +Program Enrollment Course + + + + | +
| 18 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Fees + + | ++ |
| 19 | +fees |
+ + Table | ++ Fees + + | ++ + + + +Program Fee + + + + | +
| 20 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Program Enrollment + + + + | +
| 21 | +image |
+ + Attach Image | ++ Image + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.program_enrollment.program_enrollment
+ + + + + + + +Class ProgramEnrollment
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + get_courses + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_fee_records + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_student_joining_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_duplication + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.schools.doctype.program_enrollment.program_enrollment.get_program_courses
+
+ + + erpnext.schools.doctype.program_enrollment.program_enrollment.get_program_courses + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.schools.doctype.program_enrollment.program_enrollment.get_students
+
+ + + erpnext.schools.doctype.program_enrollment.program_enrollment.get_students + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Fees + + + + + +
- + + +Program Enrollment + + + + +
Program Enrollment Course
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabProgram Enrollment Course
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +course |
+ + Link | ++ Course + + | ++ + + + +Course + + + + | +
| 2 | +course_name |
+ + Data | ++ Course Name + + | +
+ course.course_name+ |
+
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Program Enrollment + + + +
Program Enrollment Fee
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabProgram Enrollment Fee
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +academic_term |
+ + Link | ++ Academic Term + + | ++ + + + +Academic Term + + + + | +
| 2 | +fee_structure |
+ + Link | ++ Fee Structure + + | ++ + + + +Fee Structure + + + + | +
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +due_date |
+ + Date | ++ Due Date + + | ++ |
| 5 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | ++ |
Program Enrollment Tool
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +get_students_from |
+ + Select | ++ Get Students From + + | +
+ +Student Applicants +Program Enrollments+ |
+
| 2 | +program |
+ + Link | ++ Program + + | ++ + + + +Program + + + + | +
| 3 | +academic_year |
+ + Link | ++ Academic Year + + | ++ + + + +Academic Year + + + + | +
| 4 | +get_students |
+ + Button | ++ Get Students + + | ++ |
| 5 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +students |
+ + Table | ++ Students + + | ++ + + + +Program Enrollment Tool Student + + + + | +
| 7 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +new_program |
+ + Link | ++ New Program + + | ++ + + + +Program + + + + | +
| 9 | +new_academic_year |
+ + Link | ++ New Academic Year + + | ++ + + + +Academic Year + + + + | +
| 10 | +enroll_students |
+ + Button | ++ Enroll Students + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.program_enrollment_tool.program_enrollment_tool
+ + + + + + + +Class ProgramEnrollmentTool
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + enroll_students + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_students + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/program_enrollment_tool_student.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/program_enrollment_tool_student.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..63a857e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/program_enrollment_tool_student.html @@ -0,0 +1,131 @@ + + + + + + + +
Program Enrollment Tool Student
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabProgram Enrollment Tool Student
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +student_applicant |
+ + Link | ++ Student Applicant + + | ++ + + + +Student Applicant + + + + | +
| 2 | +student |
+ + Link | ++ Student + + | ++ + + + +Student + + + + | +
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +student_name |
+ + Data | ++ Student Name + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Program Enrollment Tool + + + +
Program Fee
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabProgram Fee
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +academic_term |
+ + Link | ++ Academic Term + + | ++ + + + +Academic Term + + + + | +
| 2 | +fee_structure |
+ + Link | ++ Fee Structure + + | ++ + + + +Fee Structure + + + + | +
| 3 | +student_category |
+ + Link | ++ Student Category + + | ++ + + + +Student Category + + + + | +
| 4 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +due_date |
+ + Date | ++ Due Date + + | ++ |
| 6 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Program + + + +
- + + +Program Enrollment + + + +
Room
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabRoom
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +room_name |
+ + Data | ++ Room Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +room_number |
+ + Data | ++ Room Number + + | ++ |
| 3 | +seating_capacity |
+ + Data | ++ Seating Capacity + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.room.room
+ + + + + + + +Class Room
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Assessment Plan + + + + + +
- + + +Course Schedule + + + + + +
- + + +Course Scheduling Tool + + + + +
School House
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSchool House
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +house_name |
+ + Data | ++ House Name + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.school_house.school_house
+ + + + + + + +Class SchoolHouse
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Program Enrollment + + + + +
School Settings
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +current_academic_year |
+ + Link | ++ Current Academic Year + + | ++ + + + +Academic Year + + + + | +
| 2 | +current_academic_term |
+ + Link | ++ Current Academic Term + + | ++ + + + +Academic Term + + + + | +
| 3 | +attendance_freeze_date |
+ + Date | ++ Attendance Freeze Date + + | ++ |
| 4 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +validate_batch |
+ + Check | +
+ Validate Batch for Students in Student Group
+ + For Batch based Student Group, the Student Batch will be validated for every Student from the Program Enrollment. + |
+ + |
| 6 | +validate_course |
+ + Check | +
+ Validate Enrolled Course for Students in Student Group
+ + For Course based Student Group, the Course will be validated for every Student from the enrolled Courses in Program Enrollment. + |
+ + |
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.school_settings.school_settings
+ + + + + + + +Class SchoolSettings
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + get_defaults + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+update defaults
++ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/student.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/student.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..685b7ca9 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/student.html @@ -0,0 +1,731 @@ + + + + + + + +
Student
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabStudent
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +section_break_1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +enabled |
+ + Check | ++ Enabled + + | ++ |
| 3 | +section_break_3 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +first_name |
+ + Data | ++ First Name + + | ++ |
| 5 | +middle_name |
+ + Data | ++ Middle Name + + | ++ |
| 6 | +last_name |
+ + Data | ++ Last Name + + | ++ |
| 7 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Naming Series + + | +
+ STUD.+ |
+
| 9 | +student_email_id |
+ + Data | ++ Student Email Address + + | ++ |
| 10 | +student_mobile_number |
+ + Data | ++ Student Mobile Number + + | ++ |
| 11 | +joining_date |
+ + Date | ++ Joining Date + + | ++ |
| 12 | +image |
+ + Attach Image | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 13 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Personal Details + + | ++ |
| 14 | +date_of_birth |
+ + Date | ++ Date of Birth + + | ++ |
| 15 | +blood_group |
+ + Select | ++ Blood Group + + | +
+ +A+ +A- +B+ +B- +O+ +O- +AB+ +AB-+ |
+
| 16 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 17 | +gender |
+ + Select | ++ Gender + + | +
+ +Male +Female +Other+ |
+
| 18 | +nationality |
+ + Data | ++ Nationality + + | ++ |
| 19 | +student_applicant |
+ + Link | ++ Student Applicant + + | ++ + + + +Student Applicant + + + + | +
| 20 | +section_break_22 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Home Address + + | ++ |
| 21 | +address_line_1 |
+ + Data | ++ Address Line 1 + + | ++ |
| 22 | +address_line_2 |
+ + Data | ++ Address Line 2 + + | ++ |
| 23 | +pincode |
+ + Data | ++ Pincode + + | ++ |
| 24 | +column_break_20 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +city |
+ + Data | ++ City + + | ++ |
| 26 | +state |
+ + Data | ++ State + + | ++ |
| 27 | +section_break_18 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Guardian Details + + | ++ |
| 28 | +guardians |
+ + Table | ++ Guardians + + | ++ + + + +Student Guardian + + + + | +
| 29 | +section_break_20 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Sibling Details + + | +
+ Country+ |
+
| 30 | +siblings |
+ + Table | ++ Siblings + + | ++ + + + +Student Sibling + + + + | +
| 31 | +exit |
+ + Section Break | ++ Exit + + | ++ |
| 32 | +date_of_leaving |
+ + Date | ++ Date of Leaving + + | ++ |
| 33 | +leaving_certificate_number |
+ + Data | ++ Leaving Certificate Number + + | ++ |
| 34 | +column_break_31 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 35 | +reason_for_leaving |
+ + Text | ++ Reason For Leaving + + | ++ |
| 36 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.student.student
+ + + + + + + +Class Student
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + check_unique + (self) +
+Validates if the Student Applicant is Unique
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_applicant_status + (self) +
+Updates Student Applicant status to Admitted
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_student_name_in_linked_doctype + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.schools.doctype.student.student.get_timeline_data + (doctype, name) +
+Return timeline for attendance
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Announcement + + + + + +
- + + +Assessment Result + + + + + +
- + + +Fees + + + + + +
- + + +Guardian Student + + + + + +
- + + +Program Enrollment + + + + + +
- + + +Program Enrollment Tool Student + + + + + +
- + + +Student Attendance + + + + + +
- + + +Student Group Student + + + + + +
- + + +Student Leave Application + + + + + +
- + + +Student Log + + + + + +
- + + +Student Sibling + + + + +
Student Admission
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabStudent Admission
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +academic_year |
+ + Link | ++ Academic Year + + | ++ + + + +Academic Year + + + + | +
| 2 | +admission_start_date |
+ + Date | ++ Admission Start Date + + | ++ |
| 3 | +admission_end_date |
+ + Date | ++ Admission End Date + + | ++ |
| 4 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 5 | +naming_series_for_student_applicant |
+ + Data | ++ Naming Series (for Student Applicant) + + | ++ |
| 6 | +publish |
+ + Check | ++ Publish on website + + | ++ |
| 7 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +program |
+ + Link | ++ Program + + | ++ + + + +Program + + + + | +
| 9 | +application_fee |
+ + Currency | ++ Application Fee + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 10 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 11 | +route |
+ + Data | ++ Route + + | ++ |
| 12 | +application_form_route |
+ + Data | ++ Application Form Route + + | ++ |
| 13 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +introduction |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Introduction + + | ++ |
| 15 | +eligibility |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Eligibility + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.student_admission.student_admission
+ + + + + + + +Class StudentAdmission
+ +Inherits from frappe.website.website_generator.WebsiteGenerator + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_context + (self, context) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_title + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.schools.doctype.student_admission.student_admission.get_list_context + (context) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Student Applicant + + + + +
Student Applicant
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabStudent Applicant
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +first_name |
+ + Data | ++ First Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +middle_name |
+ + Data | ++ Middle Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +last_name |
+ + Data | ++ Last Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +program |
+ + Link | ++ Program + + | ++ + + + +Program + + + + | +
| 5 | +paid |
+ + Check | ++ Paid + + | ++ |
| 6 | +column_break_8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Naming Series + + | +
+ AP+ |
+
| 8 | +application_status |
+ + Select | ++ Application Status + + | +
+ Applied +Approved +Rejected +Admitted+ |
+
| 9 | +application_date |
+ + Date | ++ Application Date + + | ++ |
| 10 | +academic_year |
+ + Link | ++ Academic Year + + | ++ + + + +Academic Year + + + + | +
| 11 | +student_admission |
+ + Link | ++ Student Admission + + | ++ + + + +Student Admission + + + + | +
| 12 | +image |
+ + Attach Image | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 13 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Personal Details + + | ++ |
| 14 | +date_of_birth |
+ + Date | ++ Date of Birth + + | ++ |
| 15 | +gender |
+ + Select | ++ Gender + + | +
+ +Male +Female+ |
+
| 16 | +blood_group |
+ + Select | ++ Blood Group + + | +
+ +A+ +A- +B+ +B- +O+ +O- +AB+ +AB-+ |
+
| 17 | +column_break_12 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +student_email_id |
+ + Data | ++ Student Email Address + + | ++ |
| 19 | +student_mobile_number |
+ + Data | ++ Student Mobile Number + + | ++ |
| 20 | +nationality |
+ + Data | ++ Nationality + + | ++ |
| 21 | +home_address |
+ + Section Break | ++ Home Address + + | ++ |
| 22 | +address_line_1 |
+ + Data | ++ Address Line 1 + + | ++ |
| 23 | +address_line_2 |
+ + Data | ++ Address Line 2 + + | ++ |
| 24 | +pincode |
+ + Data | ++ Pincode + + | ++ |
| 25 | +column_break_23 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 26 | +city |
+ + Data | ++ City + + | ++ |
| 27 | +state |
+ + Data | ++ State + + | ++ |
| 28 | +section_break_20 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Guardian Details + + | ++ |
| 29 | +guardians |
+ + Table | ++ Guardians + + | ++ + + + +Student Guardian + + + + | +
| 30 | +section_break_21 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Sibling Details + + | ++ |
| 31 | +siblings |
+ + Table | ++ Siblings + + | ++ + + + +Student Sibling + + + + | +
| 32 | +section_break_23 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 33 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 34 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Student Applicant + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.student_applicant.student_applicant
+ + + + + + + +Class StudentApplicant
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_payment_authorized + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update_after_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Program Enrollment Tool Student + + + + + +
- + + +Student + + + + + +
- + + +Student Applicant + + + + +
Student Attendance
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabStudent Attendance
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +student |
+ + Link | ++ Student + + | ++ + + + +Student + + + + | +
| 2 | +course_schedule |
+ + Link | ++ Course Schedule + + | ++ + + + +Course Schedule + + + + | +
| 3 | +date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 4 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +student_name |
+ + Read Only | ++ Student Name + + | +
+ student.title+ |
+
| 6 | +student_group |
+ + Link | ++ Student Group + + | ++ + + + +Student Group + + + + | +
| 7 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Present +Absent+ |
+
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.student_attendance.student_attendance
+ + + + + + + +Class StudentAttendance
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_course_schedule + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_duplication + (self) +
+Check if the Attendance Record is Unique
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_mandatory + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_student + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/student_attendance_tool.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/student_attendance_tool.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6e0c8b29 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/student_attendance_tool.html @@ -0,0 +1,214 @@ + + + + + + + +
Student Attendance Tool
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Based On + + | +
+ Student Group +Course Schedule+ |
+
| 2 | +group_based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Group Based On + + | +
+ Batch +Course +Activity+ |
+
| 3 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +student_group |
+ + Link | ++ Student Group + + | ++ + + + +Student Group + + + + | +
| 5 | +course_schedule |
+ + Link | ++ Course Schedule + + | ++ + + + +Course Schedule + + + + | +
| 6 | +date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 7 | +attendance |
+ + Section Break | ++ Attendance + + | ++ |
| 8 | +students_html |
+ + HTML | ++ Students HTML + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.student_attendance_tool.student_attendance_tool
+ + + + + + + +Class StudentAttendanceTool
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.schools.doctype.student_attendance_tool.student_attendance_tool.get_student_attendance_records
+
+ + + erpnext.schools.doctype.student_attendance_tool.student_attendance_tool.get_student_attendance_records + (based_on, date=None, student_group=None, course_schedule=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/student_batch_name.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/student_batch_name.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c7927e41 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/student_batch_name.html @@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ + + + + + + + +
Student Batch Name
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabStudent Batch Name
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +batch_name |
+ + Data | ++ Batch Name + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.student_batch_name.student_batch_name
+ + + + + + + +Class StudentBatchName
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Program Enrollment + + + + + +
- + + +Student Batch Creation Tool + + + + + +
- + + +Student Group + + + + + +
- + + +Student Group Creation Tool Course + + + + + +
- + + +Student Log + + + + +
Student Category
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabStudent Category
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +category |
+ + Data | ++ Category + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.student_category.student_category
+ + + + + + + +Class StudentCategory
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Fee Structure + + + + + +
- + + +Fees + + + + + +
- + + +Program Enrollment + + + + + +
- + + +Program Fee + + + + +
Student Group
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabStudent Group
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +academic_year |
+ + Link | ++ Academic Year + + | ++ + + + +Academic Year + + + + | +
| 2 | +group_based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Group Based on + + | +
+ +Batch +Course +Activity+ |
+
| 3 | +student_group_name |
+ + Data | ++ Student Group Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +max_strength |
+ + Int | +
+ Max Strength
+ + Set 0 for no limit + |
+ + |
| 5 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +academic_term |
+ + Link | ++ Academic Term + + | ++ + + + +Academic Term + + + + | +
| 7 | +program |
+ + Link | ++ Program + + | ++ + + + +Program + + + + | +
| 8 | +batch |
+ + Link | ++ Batch + + | ++ + + + +Student Batch Name + + + + | +
| 9 | +course |
+ + Link | ++ Course + + | ++ + + + +Course + + + + | +
| 10 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Students + + | ++ |
| 11 | +get_students |
+ + Button | ++ Get Students + + | ++ |
| 12 | +students |
+ + Table | ++ Students + + | ++ + + + +Student Group Student + + + + | +
| 13 | +section_break_12 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Instructors + + | ++ |
| 14 | +instructors |
+ + Table | ++ Instructors + + | ++ + + + +Student Group Instructor + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.student_group.student_group
+ + + + + + + +Class StudentGroup
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_and_set_child_table_fields + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_mandatory_fields + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_strength + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_students + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.schools.doctype.student_group.student_group.fetch_students
+
+ + + erpnext.schools.doctype.student_group.student_group.fetch_students + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.schools.doctype.student_group.student_group.get_program_enrollment + (academic_year, academic_term=None, program=None, batch=None, course=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.schools.doctype.student_group.student_group.get_students
+
+ + + erpnext.schools.doctype.student_group.student_group.get_students + (academic_year, group_based_on, academic_term=None, program=None, batch=None, course=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Announcement + + + + + +
- + + +Assessment Plan + + + + + +
- + + +Assessment Result Tool + + + + + +
- + + +Course Schedule + + + + + +
- + + +Course Scheduling Tool + + + + + +
- + + +Student Attendance + + + + + +
- + + +Student Attendance Tool + + + + +
Student Group Creation Tool
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +academic_year |
+ + Link | ++ Academic Year + + | ++ + + + +Academic Year + + + + | +
| 2 | +academic_term |
+ + Link | +
+ Academic Term
+ + Leave blank if you make students groups per year + |
+ + + + + +Academic Term + + + + | +
| 3 | +get_courses |
+ + Button | ++ Get Courses + + | ++ |
| 4 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +program |
+ + Link | ++ Program + + | ++ + + + +Program + + + + | +
| 6 | +separate_groups |
+ + Check | +
+ Separate course based Group for every Batch
+ + Leave unchecked if you don't want to consider batch while making course based groups. + |
+ + |
| 7 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +courses |
+ + Table | ++ Courses + + | ++ + + + +Student Group Creation Tool Course + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.student_group_creation_tool.student_group_creation_tool
+ + + + + + + +Class StudentGroupCreationTool
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + create_student_groups + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_courses + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/student_group_creation_tool_course.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/student_group_creation_tool_course.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7ee73d9d --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/student_group_creation_tool_course.html @@ -0,0 +1,173 @@ + + + + + + + +
Student Group Creation Tool Course
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabStudent Group Creation Tool Course
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +group_based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Group Based On + + | +
+ +Batch +Course+ |
+
| 2 | +course |
+ + Link | ++ Course + + | ++ + + + +Course + + + + | +
| 3 | +batch |
+ + Link | ++ Batch + + | ++ + + + +Student Batch Name + + + + | +
| 4 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +student_group_name |
+ + Data | ++ Student Group Name + + | ++ |
| 6 | +course_code |
+ + Read Only | ++ Course Code + + | +
+ course.course_name+ |
+
| 7 | +max_strength |
+ + Int | ++ Max Strength + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Student Group Creation Tool + + + +
Student Group Instructor
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabStudent Group Instructor
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +instructor |
+ + Link | ++ Instructor + + | ++ + + + +Instructor + + + + | +
| 2 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +instructor_name |
+ + Read Only | ++ Instructor Name + + | +
+ instructor.instructor_name+ |
+
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Student Group + + + +
Student Group Student
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabStudent Group Student
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +student |
+ + Link | ++ Student + + | ++ + + + +Student + + + + | +
| 2 | +student_name |
+ + Data | ++ Student Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +group_roll_number |
+ + Int | ++ Group Roll Number + + | ++ |
| 5 | +active |
+ + Check | ++ Active + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Student Group + + + +
Student Guardian
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabStudent Guardian
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +guardian |
+ + Link | ++ Guardian + + | ++ + + + +Guardian + + + + | +
| 2 | +guardian_name |
+ + Data | ++ Guardian Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +relation |
+ + Select | ++ Relation + + | +
+ +Mother +Father +Others+ |
+
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Student + + + +
- + + +Student Applicant + + + +
Student Language
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabStudent Language
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +language_name |
+ + Data | ++ Language Name + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.student_language.student_language
+ + + + + + + +Class StudentLanguage
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/student_leave_application.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/student_leave_application.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..dac84bb3 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/student_leave_application.html @@ -0,0 +1,220 @@ + + + + + + + +
Student Leave Application
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabStudent Leave Application
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +student |
+ + Link | ++ Student + + | ++ + + + +Student + + + + | +
| 2 | +student_name |
+ + Read Only | ++ Student Name + + | +
+ student.title+ |
+
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +from_date |
+ + Date | ++ From Date + + | ++ |
| 5 | +to_date |
+ + Date | ++ To Date + + | ++ |
| 6 | +mark_as_present |
+ + Check | +
+ Mark as Present
+ + Will show the student as Present in Student Monthly Attendance Report + |
+ + |
| 7 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +reason |
+ + Text | ++ Reason + + | ++ |
| 9 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Student Leave Application + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.student_leave_application.student_leave_application
+ + + + + + + +Class StudentLeaveApplication
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Student Leave Application + + + + +
Student Log
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabStudent Log
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +student |
+ + Link | ++ Student + + | ++ + + + +Student + + + + | +
| 2 | +student_name |
+ + Read Only | ++ Student Name + + | +
+ student.title+ |
+
| 3 | +type |
+ + Select | ++ Type + + | +
+ General +Academic +Medical +Achievement+ |
+
| 4 | +date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 5 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +academic_year |
+ + Link | ++ Academic Year + + | ++ + + + +Academic Year + + + + | +
| 7 | +academic_term |
+ + Link | ++ Academic Term + + | ++ + + + +Academic Term + + + + | +
| 8 | +program |
+ + Link | ++ Program + + | ++ + + + +Program + + + + | +
| 9 | +student_batch |
+ + Link | ++ Student Batch + + | ++ + + + +Student Batch Name + + + + | +
| 10 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +log |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Log + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.schools.doctype.student_log.student_log
+ + + + + + + +Class StudentLog
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/student_sibling.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/student_sibling.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2478bd4e --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/schools/student_sibling.html @@ -0,0 +1,184 @@ + + + + + + + +
Student Sibling
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabStudent Sibling
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +studying_in_same_institute |
+ + Select | ++ Studying in Same Institute + + | +
+ NO +YES+ |
+
| 2 | +full_name |
+ + Data | ++ Full Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +gender |
+ + Select | ++ Gender + + | +
+ +Male +Female+ |
+
| 4 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +student |
+ + Link | ++ Student ID + + | ++ + + + +Student + + + + | +
| 6 | +institution |
+ + Data | ++ Institution + + | ++ |
| 7 | +program |
+ + Data | ++ Program + + | ++ |
| 8 | +date_of_birth |
+ + Date | ++ Date of Birth + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Student + + + +
- + + +Student Applicant + + + +
Student Siblings
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabStudent Siblings
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +name1 |
+ + Data | ++ Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +gender |
+ + Select | ++ Gender + + | +
+ +Male +Female+ |
+
| 3 | +date_of_birth |
+ + Date | ++ Date of Birth + + | ++ |
Campaign
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabCampaign
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +campaign |
+ + Section Break | ++ Campaign + + | ++ |
| 2 | +campaign_name |
+ + Data | ++ Campaign Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Naming Series + + | +
+ Campaign-.####+ |
+
| 4 | +description |
+ + Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.selling.doctype.campaign.campaign
+ + + + + + + +Class Campaign
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Delivery Note + + + + + +
- + + +Lead + + + + + +
- + + +Opportunity + + + + + +
- + + +POS Profile + + + + + +
- + + +Pricing Rule + + + + + +
- + + +Quotation + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Order + + + + +
Customer
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabCustomer
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +basic_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Name and Type + + | +
+ fa fa-user+ |
+
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ CUST-+ |
+
| 3 | +salutation |
+ + Link | ++ Salutation + + | ++ + + + +Salutation + + + + | +
| 4 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Full Name + + | ++ |
| 5 | +gender |
+ + Link | ++ Gender + + | ++ + + + +Gender + + + + | +
| 6 | +customer_type |
+ + Select | ++ Type + + | +
+ Company +Individual+ |
+
| 7 | +lead_name |
+ + Link | ++ From Lead + + | ++ + + + +Lead + + + + | +
| 8 | +image |
+ + Attach Image | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 9 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 11 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 12 | +tax_id |
+ + Data | ++ Tax ID + + | ++ |
| 13 | +disabled |
+ + Check | ++ Disabled + + | ++ |
| 14 | +currency_and_price_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Currency and Price List + + | ++ |
| 15 | +default_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Billing Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 16 | +default_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Default Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 17 | +column_break_14 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +language |
+ + Link | ++ Print Language + + | ++ + + + +Language + + + + | +
| 19 | +address_contacts |
+ + Section Break | ++ Address and Contact + + | +
+ fa fa-map-marker+ |
+
| 20 | +address_html |
+ + HTML | ++ Address HTML + + | ++ |
| 21 | +website |
+ + Data | ++ Website + + | ++ |
| 22 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +contact_html |
+ + HTML | ++ Contact HTML + + | ++ |
| 24 | +default_receivable_accounts |
+ + Section Break | ++ Accounting + + | ++ |
| 25 | +accounts |
+ + Table | +
+ Accounts
+ + Mention if non-standard receivable account + |
+ + + + + +Party Account + + + + | +
| 26 | +credit_limit_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Credit Limit + + | ++ |
| 27 | +credit_days_based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Credit Days Based On + + | +
+ +Fixed Days +Last Day of the Next Month+ |
+
| 28 | +credit_days |
+ + Int | ++ Credit Days + + | ++ |
| 29 | +credit_limit |
+ + Currency | ++ Credit Limit + + | ++ |
| 30 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ fa fa-file-text+ |
+
| 31 | +customer_details |
+ + Text | +
+ Customer Details
+ + Additional information regarding the customer. + |
+ + |
| 32 | +is_frozen |
+ + Check | ++ Is Frozen + + | ++ |
| 33 | +sales_team_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Sales Partner and Commission + + | +
+ fa fa-group+ |
+
| 34 | +default_sales_partner |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Partner + + | ++ + + + +Sales Partner + + + + | +
| 35 | +default_commission_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Commission Rate + + | ++ |
| 36 | +sales_team_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Sales Team + + | ++ |
| 37 | +sales_team |
+ + Table | ++ Sales Team Details + + | ++ + + + +Sales Team + + + + | +
| 38 | +customer_pos_id |
+ + Data | ++ Customer POS id + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.selling.doctype.customer.customer
+ + + + + + + +Class Customer
+ +Inherits from erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.TransactionBase + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + after_insert + (self) +
+If customer created from Lead, update customer id in quotations, opportunities
++ + + + + +
+ + + after_rename + (self, olddn, newdn, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + create_lead_address_contact + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_customer_name + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + load_dashboard_info + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + onload + (self) +
+Load address and contacts in __onload
+ + + + + +
+ + + update_lead_status + (self) +
+If Customer created from Lead, update lead status to "Converted" + update Customer link in Quotation, Opportunity
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_credit_limit_on_change + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_name_with_customer_group + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.customer.customer.check_credit_limit + (customer, company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.customer.customer.get_credit_limit + (customer, company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.customer.customer.get_customer_list + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.customer.customer.get_customer_outstanding + (customer, company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Bank Guarantee + + + + + +
- + + +C-Form + + + + + +
- + + +Delivery Note + + + + + +
- + + +Installation Note + + + + + +
- + + +Issue + + + + + +
- + + +Item Customer Detail + + + + + +
- + + +Lead + + + + + +
- + + +Maintenance Schedule + + + + + +
- + + +Maintenance Visit + + + + + +
- + + +Opportunity + + + + + +
- + + +POS Profile + + + + + +
- + + +Pricing Rule + + + + + +
- + + +Production Plan Sales Order + + + + + +
- + + +Production Planning Tool + + + + + +
- + + +Project + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Order + + + + + +
- + + +Quotation + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Order + + + + + +
- + + +Serial No + + + + + +
- + + +SMS Center + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Tax Rule + + + + + +
- + + +Warranty Claim + + + + +
Module selling
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+DocTypes for selling
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/selling/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/selling/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/selling/industry_type.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/selling/industry_type.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0f4a3742 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/selling/industry_type.html @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + +Industry Type
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabIndustry Type
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +industry |
+ + Data | ++ Industry + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.selling.doctype.industry_type.industry_type
+ + + + + + + +Class IndustryType
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Lead + + + + +
Installation Note
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabInstallation Note
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +installation_note |
+ + Section Break | ++ Installation Note + + | ++ |
| 2 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ IN-+ |
+
| 4 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 5 | +customer_address |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 6 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 7 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Name + + | ++ |
| 8 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 9 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 10 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Small Text | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 11 | +contact_email |
+ + Data | ++ Contact Email + + | +
+ |
+
| 12 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 13 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 14 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +inst_date |
+ + Date | ++ Installation Date + + | ++ |
| 16 | +inst_time |
+ + Time | ++ Installation Time + + | ++ |
| 17 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Draft +Submitted +Cancelled+ |
+
| 18 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 19 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Installation Note + + + + | +
| 20 | +remarks |
+ + Small Text | ++ Remarks + + | ++ |
| 21 | +item_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 22 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Installation Note Item + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.selling.doctype.installation_note.installation_note
+ + + + + + + +Class InstallationNote
+ +Inherits from erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.TransactionBase + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_item_table + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_prevdoc_serial_no + (self, prevdoc_detail_docname) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + is_serial_no_added + (self, item_code, serial_no) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + is_serial_no_exist + (self, item_code, serial_no) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + is_serial_no_match + (self, cur_s_no, prevdoc_s_no, prevdoc_docname) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_installation_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_serial_no + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Installation Note + + + + +
Installation Note Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabInstallation Note Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +serial_no |
+ + Small Text | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
| 3 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Installed Qty + + | ++ |
| 4 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 5 | +prevdoc_detail_docname |
+ + Data | ++ Against Document Detail No + + | ++ |
| 6 | +prevdoc_docname |
+ + Data | ++ Against Document No + + | ++ |
| 7 | +prevdoc_doctype |
+ + Data | ++ Document Type + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Installation Note + + + +
Lead Source
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabLead Source
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +source_name |
+ + Data | ++ Source Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +details |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Details + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.selling.doctype.lead_source.lead_source
+ + + + + + + +Class LeadSource
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Delivery Note + + + + + +
- + + +Lead + + + + + +
- + + +Opportunity + + + + + +
- + + +Quotation + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Order + + + + +
Product Bundle
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabProduct Bundle
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +basic_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +new_item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Parent Item + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 3 | +item_section |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Items
+ + List items that form the package. + |
+ + |
| 4 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Product Bundle Item + + + + | +
| 5 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +about |
+ + HTML | ++ + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.selling.doctype.product_bundle.product_bundle
+ + + + + + + +Class ProductBundle
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_child_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_main_item + (self) +
+Validates, main Item is not a stock item
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.product_bundle.product_bundle.get_new_item_code + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/selling/product_bundle_item.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/selling/product_bundle_item.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a3b9608e --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/selling/product_bundle_item.html @@ -0,0 +1,143 @@ + + + + + + + +
Product Bundle Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabProduct Bundle Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty + + | ++ |
| 3 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 4 | +rate |
+ + Float | ++ Rate + + | ++ |
| 5 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Product Bundle + + + +
Quotation
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabQuotation
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +customer_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-user+ |
+
| 2 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 3 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ QTN-+ |
+
| 4 | +quotation_to |
+ + Select | ++ Quotation To + + | +
+ +Lead +Customer+ |
+
| 5 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 6 | +lead |
+ + Link | ++ Lead + + | ++ + + + +Lead + + + + | +
| 7 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ |
| 8 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Quotation + + + + | +
| 10 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 11 | +transaction_date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 12 | +valid_till |
+ + Date | ++ Valid Till + + | ++ |
| 13 | +order_type |
+ + Select | ++ Order Type + + | +
+ +Sales +Maintenance +Shopping Cart+ |
+
| 14 | +contact_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Address and Contact + + | +
+ fa fa-bullhorn+ |
+
| 15 | +customer_address |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 16 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 17 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 18 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 19 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Small Text | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 20 | +contact_email |
+ + Data | ++ Contact Email + + | +
+ |
+
| 21 | +col_break98 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 22 | +shipping_address_name |
+ + Link | ++ Shipping Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 23 | +shipping_address |
+ + Small Text | ++ Shipping Address + + | ++ |
| 24 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 25 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 26 | +currency_and_price_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Currency and Price List + + | +
+ fa fa-tag+ |
+
| 27 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 28 | +conversion_rate |
+ + Float | +
+ Exchange Rate
+ + Rate at which customer's currency is converted to company's base currency + |
+ + |
| 29 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 30 | +selling_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 31 | +price_list_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Price List Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 32 | +plc_conversion_rate |
+ + Float | +
+ Price List Exchange Rate
+ + Rate at which Price list currency is converted to company's base currency + |
+ + |
| 33 | +ignore_pricing_rule |
+ + Check | ++ Ignore Pricing Rule + + | ++ |
| 34 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 35 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Quotation Item + + + + | +
| 36 | +sec_break23 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 37 | +base_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 38 | +base_net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 39 | +column_break_28 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 40 | +total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 41 | +net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 42 | +taxes_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ fa fa-money+ |
+
| 43 | +taxes_and_charges |
+ + Link | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Sales Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 44 | +column_break_34 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 45 | +shipping_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Shipping Rule + + | ++ + + + +Shipping Rule + + + + | +
| 46 | +section_break_36 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 47 | +taxes |
+ + Table | ++ Sales Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Sales Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
| 48 | +sec_tax_breakup |
+ + Section Break | ++ Tax Breakup + + | ++ |
| 49 | +other_charges_calculation |
+ + Text | ++ Taxes and Charges Calculation + + | ++ |
| 50 | +section_break_39 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 51 | +base_total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 52 | +column_break_42 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 53 | +total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 54 | +section_break_44 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Additional Discount + + | ++ |
| 55 | +apply_discount_on |
+ + Select | ++ Apply Additional Discount On + + | +
+ +Grand Total +Net Total+ |
+
| 56 | +base_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 57 | +column_break_46 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 58 | +additional_discount_percentage |
+ + Float | ++ Additional Discount Percentage + + | ++ |
| 59 | +discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 60 | +totals |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-money+ |
+
| 61 | +base_grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 62 | +base_in_words |
+ + Data | +
+ In Words (Company Currency)
+ + In Words will be visible once you save the Quotation. + |
+ + |
| 63 | +base_rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 64 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 65 | +grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 66 | +rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 67 | +in_words |
+ + Data | ++ In Words + + | ++ |
| 68 | +terms_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | +
+ fa fa-legal+ |
+
| 69 | +tc_name |
+ + Link | ++ Terms + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 70 | +terms |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Term Details + + | ++ |
| 71 | +print_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Print Settings + + | ++ |
| 72 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 73 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 74 | +column_break_73 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 75 | +language |
+ + Data | ++ Print Language + + | ++ |
| 76 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ fa fa-file-text+ |
+
| 77 | +campaign |
+ + Link | ++ Campaign + + | ++ + + + +Campaign + + + + | +
| 78 | +source |
+ + Link | ++ Source + + | ++ + + + +Lead Source + + + + | +
| 79 | +order_lost_reason |
+ + Small Text | ++ Quotation Lost Reason + + | ++ |
| 80 | +column_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 81 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Draft +Submitted +Ordered +Lost +Cancelled +Open +Replied+ |
+
| 82 | +enq_det |
+ + Text | ++ Opportunity Item + + | ++ |
| 83 | +supplier_quotation |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier Quotation + + | ++ + + + +Supplier Quotation + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.selling.doctype.quotation.quotation
+ + + + + + + +Class Quotation
+ +Inherits from erpnext.controllers.selling_controller.SellingController + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + check_item_table + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + declare_order_lost + (self, arg) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + has_sales_order + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + print_other_charges + (self, docname) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_lead + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_opportunity + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_order_type + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_quotation_to + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.quotation.quotation._make_customer + (source_name, ignore_permissions=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.quotation.quotation._make_sales_order + (source_name, target_doc=None, ignore_permissions=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.quotation.quotation.get_list_context + (context=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.quotation.quotation.make_sales_order
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.quotation.quotation.make_sales_order + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Quotation + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Order Item + + + + +
Quotation Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabQuotation Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +customer_item_code |
+ + Data | ++ Customer's Item Code + + | ++ |
| 3 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 5 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 6 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 7 | +column_break_7 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 9 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 10 | +quantity_and_rate |
+ + Section Break | ++ Quantity and Rate + + | ++ |
| 11 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Quantity + + | ++ |
| 12 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 13 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 15 | +conversion_factor |
+ + Float | ++ UOM Conversion Factor + + | ++ |
| 16 | +stock_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty as per Stock UOM + + | ++ |
| 17 | +section_break_16 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 19 | +base_price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 20 | +discount_and_margin |
+ + Section Break | ++ Discount and Margin + + | ++ |
| 21 | +margin_type |
+ + Select | ++ Margin Type + + | +
+ +Percentage +Amount+ |
+
| 22 | +margin_rate_or_amount |
+ + Float | ++ Margin Rate or Amount + + | ++ |
| 23 | +rate_with_margin |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate With Margin + + | ++ |
| 24 | +column_break_18 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +discount_percentage |
+ + Percent | ++ Discount (%) on Price List Rate with Margin + + | ++ |
| 26 | +section_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 27 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 28 | +net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate + + | ++ |
| 29 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 30 | +net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 31 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 32 | +base_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 33 | +base_net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate (Company Currency) + + | ++ |
| 34 | +base_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 35 | +base_net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 36 | +pricing_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Pricing Rule + + | ++ + + + +Pricing Rule + + + + | +
| 37 | +item_balance |
+ + Section Break | ++ Item Balance + + | ++ |
| 38 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 39 | +column_break_30 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 40 | +projected_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Projected Qty + + | ++ |
| 41 | +actual_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Actual Qty + + | ++ |
| 42 | +stock_balance |
+ + Button | ++ Stock Balance + + | ++ |
| 43 | +reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Reference + + | ++ |
| 44 | +prevdoc_doctype |
+ + Link | ++ Against Doctype + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 45 | +prevdoc_docname |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Against Docname + + | +
+ prevdoc_doctype+ |
+
| 46 | +item_tax_rate |
+ + Code | ++ Item Tax Rate + + | ++ |
| 47 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 48 | +page_break |
+ + Check | ++ Page Break + + | ++ |
| 49 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 50 | +brand |
+ + Link | ++ Brand + + | ++ + + + +Brand + + + + | +
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Quotation + + + +
Sales Order
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSales Order
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +customer_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-user+ |
+
| 2 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 4 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ SO-+ |
+
| 5 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 6 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ |
| 7 | +order_type |
+ + Select | ++ Order Type + + | +
+ +Sales +Maintenance +Shopping Cart+ |
+
| 8 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Sales Order + + + + | +
| 10 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 11 | +transaction_date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 12 | +final_delivery_date |
+ + Date | ++ Final Delivery Date + + | ++ |
| 13 | +po_no |
+ + Data | ++ Customer's Purchase Order + + | ++ |
| 14 | +po_date |
+ + Date | ++ Customer's Purchase Order Date + + | ++ |
| 15 | +tax_id |
+ + Data | ++ Tax Id + + | ++ |
| 16 | +contact_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Address and Contact + + | +
+ fa fa-bullhorn+ |
+
| 17 | +customer_address |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 18 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 19 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 20 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 21 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Small Text | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 22 | +contact_email |
+ + Data | ++ Contact Email + + | +
+ |
+
| 23 | +col_break46 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 24 | +shipping_address_name |
+ + Link | ++ Shipping Address Name + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 25 | +shipping_address |
+ + Small Text | ++ Shipping Address + + | ++ |
| 26 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 27 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 28 | +currency_and_price_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Currency and Price List + + | +
+ fa fa-tag+ |
+
| 29 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 30 | +conversion_rate |
+ + Float | +
+ Exchange Rate
+ + Rate at which customer's currency is converted to company's base currency + |
+ + |
| 31 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 32 | +selling_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 33 | +price_list_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Price List Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 34 | +plc_conversion_rate |
+ + Float | +
+ Price List Exchange Rate
+ + Rate at which Price list currency is converted to company's base currency + |
+ + |
| 35 | +ignore_pricing_rule |
+ + Check | ++ Ignore Pricing Rule + + | ++ |
| 36 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 37 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Sales Order Item + + + + | +
| 38 | +section_break_31 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 39 | +column_break_33a |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 40 | +base_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 41 | +base_net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 42 | +column_break_33 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 43 | +total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 44 | +net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 45 | +taxes_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ fa fa-money+ |
+
| 46 | +taxes_and_charges |
+ + Link | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Sales Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 47 | +column_break_38 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 48 | +shipping_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Shipping Rule + + | ++ + + + +Shipping Rule + + + + | +
| 49 | +section_break_40 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 50 | +taxes |
+ + Table | ++ Sales Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Sales Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
| 51 | +sec_tax_breakup |
+ + Section Break | ++ Tax Breakup + + | ++ |
| 52 | +other_charges_calculation |
+ + Text | ++ Taxes and Charges Calculation + + | ++ |
| 53 | +section_break_43 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 54 | +base_total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 55 | +column_break_46 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 56 | +total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 57 | +section_break_48 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Additional Discount + + | ++ |
| 58 | +apply_discount_on |
+ + Select | ++ Apply Additional Discount On + + | +
+ +Grand Total +Net Total+ |
+
| 59 | +base_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 60 | +column_break_50 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 61 | +additional_discount_percentage |
+ + Float | ++ Additional Discount Percentage + + | ++ |
| 62 | +discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 63 | +totals |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-money+ |
+
| 64 | +base_grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 65 | +base_rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 66 | +base_in_words |
+ + Data | +
+ In Words (Company Currency)
+ + In Words will be visible once you save the Sales Order. + |
+ + |
| 67 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 68 | +grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 69 | +rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 70 | +in_words |
+ + Data | ++ In Words + + | ++ |
| 71 | +advance_paid |
+ + Currency | ++ Advance Paid + + | +
+ party_account_currency+ |
+
| 72 | +packing_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Packing List + + | +
+ fa fa-suitcase+ |
+
| 73 | +packed_items |
+ + Table | ++ Packed Items + + | ++ + + + +Packed Item + + + + | +
| 74 | +terms_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | +
+ fa fa-legal+ |
+
| 75 | +tc_name |
+ + Link | ++ Terms + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 76 | +terms |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Terms and Conditions Details + + | ++ |
| 77 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ fa fa-file-text+ |
+
| 78 | +project |
+ + Link | +
+ Project
+ + Track this Sales Order against any Project + |
+ + + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 79 | +party_account_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Party Account Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 80 | +column_break_77 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 81 | +source |
+ + Link | ++ Source + + | ++ + + + +Lead Source + + + + | +
| 82 | +campaign |
+ + Link | ++ Campaign + + | ++ + + + +Campaign + + + + | +
| 83 | +printing_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Printing Details + + | ++ |
| 84 | +language |
+ + Data | ++ Print Language + + | ++ |
| 85 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 86 | +column_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 87 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 88 | +group_same_items |
+ + Check | ++ Group same items + + | ++ |
| 89 | +section_break_78 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Billing and Delivery Status + + | ++ |
| 90 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +To Deliver and Bill +To Bill +To Deliver +Completed +Cancelled +Closed+ |
+
| 91 | +delivery_status |
+ + Select | ++ Delivery Status + + | +
+ Not Delivered +Fully Delivered +Partly Delivered +Closed +Not Applicable+ |
+
| 92 | +per_delivered |
+ + Percent | +
+ % Delivered
+ + % of materials delivered against this Sales Order + |
+ + |
| 93 | +column_break_81 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 94 | +per_billed |
+ + Percent | +
+ % Amount Billed
+ + % of materials billed against this Sales Order + |
+ + |
| 95 | +billing_status |
+ + Select | ++ Billing Status + + | +
+ Not Billed +Fully Billed +Partly Billed +Closed+ |
+
| 96 | +sales_team_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Commission + + | +
+ fa fa-group+ |
+
| 97 | +sales_partner |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Partner + + | ++ + + + +Sales Partner + + + + | +
| 98 | +column_break7 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 99 | +commission_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Commission Rate + + | ++ |
| 100 | +total_commission |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Commission + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 101 | +section_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Sales Team + + | ++ |
| 102 | +sales_team |
+ + Table | ++ Sales Team1 + + | ++ + + + +Sales Team + + + + | +
| 103 | +recurring_order |
+ + Section Break | ++ Recurring Order + + | +
+ fa fa-time+ |
+
| 104 | +settings |
+ + Column Break | ++ Settings + + | ++ |
| 105 | +is_recurring |
+ + Check | ++ Is Recurring + + | ++ |
| 106 | +recurring_id |
+ + Link | ++ Reference Document + + | ++ + + + +Sales Order + + + + | +
| 107 | +recurring_type |
+ + Select | ++ Frequency + + | +
+ +Monthly +Quarterly +Half-yearly +Yearly+ |
+
| 108 | +repeat_on_day_of_month |
+ + Int | ++ Repeat on Day of Month + + | ++ |
| 109 | +end_date |
+ + Date | ++ Recurring Upto + + | ++ |
| 110 | +submit_on_creation |
+ + Check | ++ Submit on creation + + | ++ |
| 111 | +notify_by_email |
+ + Check | ++ Notify by email + + | ++ |
| 112 | +notification_email_address |
+ + Code | ++ Notification Email Address + + | +
+ |
+
| 113 | +recurring_print_format |
+ + Link | ++ Recurring Print Format + + | ++ + + + +Print Format + + + + | +
| 114 | +column_break83 |
+ + Column Break | ++ This Document + + | ++ |
| 115 | +from_date |
+ + Date | ++ From Date + + | ++ |
| 116 | +to_date |
+ + Date | ++ To Date + + | ++ |
| 117 | +next_date |
+ + Date | ++ Next Date + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order
+ + + + + + + +Class SalesOrder
+ +Inherits from erpnext.controllers.selling_controller.SellingController + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + before_update_after_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_credit_limit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_modified_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_nextdoc_docstatus + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_production_order_items + (self) +
+Returns items with BOM that already do not have a linked production order
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_recurring + (self, reference_doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + product_bundle_has_stock_item + (self, product_bundle) +
+Returns true if product bundle has stock item
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_indicator + (self) +
+Set indicator for portal
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_delivery_status + (self) +
+Update delivery status from Purchase Order for drop shipping
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_enquiry_status + (self, prevdoc, flag) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_prevdoc_status + (self, flag) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_project + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_reserved_qty + (self, so_item_rows=None) +
+update requested qty (before ordered_qty is updated)
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_status + (self, status) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_delivery_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_drop_ship + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_for_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_order_type + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_po + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_proj_cust + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_sales_mntc_quotation + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_supplier_after_submit + (self) +
+Check that supplier is the same after submit if PO is already made
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_warehouse + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_with_previous_doc + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + +
Class WarehouseRequired
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.close_or_unclose_sales_orders
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.close_or_unclose_sales_orders + (names, status) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.get_events
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.get_events + (start, end, filters=None) +
+Returns events for Gantt / Calendar view rendering.
+ +Parameters:
+ +-
+
start- Start date-time.
+end- End date-time.
+filters- Filters (JSON).
+
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.get_list_context + (context=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.get_supplier
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.get_supplier + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_delivery_note
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_delivery_note + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_maintenance_schedule
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_maintenance_schedule + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_maintenance_visit
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_maintenance_visit + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_material_request
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_material_request + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_production_orders
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_production_orders + (items, sales_order, company, project=None) +
+Make Production Orders against the given Sales Order for the given items
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_project
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_project + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_purchase_order_for_drop_shipment
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_purchase_order_for_drop_shipment + (source_name, for_supplier, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_sales_invoice
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.make_sales_invoice + (source_name, target_doc=None, ignore_permissions=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.update_status
+
+ + + erpnext.selling.doctype.sales_order.sales_order.update_status + (status, name) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Delivery Note Item + + + + + +
- + + +Maintenance Schedule Item + + + + + +
- + + +Material Request Item + + + + + +
- + + +Production Order + + + + + +
- + + +Production Plan Item + + + + + +
- + + +Production Plan Sales Order + + + + + +
- + + +Project + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Order Item + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Order + + + + +
Sales Order Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSales Order Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +customer_item_code |
+ + Data | ++ Customer's Item Code + + | ++ |
| 3 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 5 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 6 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 7 | +delivery_date |
+ + Date | ++ Delivery Date + + | ++ |
| 8 | +column_break_7 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 10 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 11 | +quantity_and_rate |
+ + Section Break | ++ Quantity and Rate + + | ++ |
| 12 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Quantity + + | ++ |
| 13 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 14 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 16 | +conversion_factor |
+ + Float | ++ UOM Conversion Factor + + | ++ |
| 17 | +stock_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty as per Stock UOM + + | ++ |
| 18 | +section_break_16 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 20 | +base_price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 21 | +discount_and_margin |
+ + Section Break | ++ Discount and Margin + + | ++ |
| 22 | +margin_type |
+ + Select | ++ Margin Type + + | +
+ +Percentage +Amount+ |
+
| 23 | +margin_rate_or_amount |
+ + Float | ++ Margin Rate or Amount + + | ++ |
| 24 | +rate_with_margin |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate With Margin + + | ++ |
| 25 | +column_break_19 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 26 | +discount_percentage |
+ + Percent | ++ Discount (%) on Price List Rate with Margin + + | ++ |
| 27 | +section_break_simple1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 29 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 30 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 31 | +base_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Basic Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 32 | +base_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 33 | +pricing_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Pricing Rule + + | ++ + + + +Pricing Rule + + + + | +
| 34 | +section_break_24 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 35 | +net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 36 | +net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 37 | +column_break_27 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 38 | +base_net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 39 | +base_net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 40 | +drop_ship_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Drop Ship + + | ++ |
| 41 | +delivered_by_supplier |
+ + Check | ++ Supplier delivers to Customer + + | ++ |
| 42 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 43 | +warehouse_and_reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Warehouse and Reference + + | ++ |
| 44 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Delivery Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 45 | +target_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Warehouse (Optional) + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 46 | +prevdoc_docname |
+ + Link | ++ Quotation + + | ++ + + + +Quotation + + + + | +
| 47 | +brand |
+ + Link | ++ Brand Name + + | ++ + + + +Brand + + + + | +
| 48 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 49 | +page_break |
+ + Check | ++ Page Break + + | ++ |
| 50 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 51 | +projected_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Projected Qty + + | ++ |
| 52 | +actual_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Actual Qty + + | ++ |
| 53 | +ordered_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Ordered Qty + + | ++ |
| 54 | +delivered_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Delivered Qty + + | ++ |
| 55 | +returned_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Returned Qty + + | ++ |
| 56 | +billed_amt |
+ + Currency | ++ Billed Amt + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 57 | +valuation_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Valuation Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 58 | +gross_profit |
+ + Currency | ++ Gross Profit + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 59 | +planned_qty |
+ + Float | +
+ Planned Quantity
+ + For Production + |
+ + |
| 60 | +produced_qty |
+ + Float | +
+ Produced Quantity
+ + For Production + |
+ + |
| 61 | +item_tax_rate |
+ + Code | ++ Item Tax Rate + + | ++ |
| 62 | +transaction_date |
+ + Date | +
+ Sales Order Date
+ + Used for Production Plan + |
+ + |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Sales Order + + + +
Sales Team
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSales Team
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +sales_person |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Person + + | ++ + + + +Sales Person + + + + | +
| 2 | +contact_no |
+ + Data | ++ Contact No. + + | ++ |
| 3 | +allocated_percentage |
+ + Float | ++ Contribution (%) + + | ++ |
| 4 | +allocated_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Contribution to Net Total + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 5 | +incentives |
+ + Currency | ++ Incentives + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Customer + + + +
- + + +Delivery Note + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + +
- + + +Sales Order + + + +
Selling Settings
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+Settings for Selling Module
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +cust_master_name |
+ + Select | ++ Customer Naming By + + | +
+ Customer Name +Naming Series+ |
+
| 2 | +campaign_naming_by |
+ + Select | ++ Campaign Naming By + + | +
+ Campaign Name +Naming Series+ |
+
| 3 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Default Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 4 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Default Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 5 | +selling_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Default Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 6 | +close_opportunity_after_days |
+ + Int | +
+ Close Opportunity After Days
+ + Auto close Opportunity after 15 days + |
+ + |
| 7 | +column_break_5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +so_required |
+ + Select | ++ Sales Order Required + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 9 | +dn_required |
+ + Select | ++ Delivery Note Required + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 10 | +maintain_same_sales_rate |
+ + Check | ++ Maintain Same Rate Throughout Sales Cycle + + | ++ |
| 11 | +editable_price_list_rate |
+ + Check | ++ Allow user to edit Price List Rate in transactions + + | ++ |
| 12 | +allow_multiple_items |
+ + Check | ++ Allow Item to be added multiple times in a transaction + + | ++ |
| 13 | +allow_against_multiple_purchase_orders |
+ + Check | ++ Allow multiple Sales Orders against a Customer's Purchase Order + + | ++ |
| 14 | +validate_selling_price |
+ + Check | ++ Validate Selling Price for Item against Purchase Rate or Valuation Rate + + | ++ |
| 15 | +hide_tax_id |
+ + Check | ++ Hide Customer's Tax Id from Sales Transactions + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.selling.doctype.selling_settings.selling_settings
+ + + + + + + +Class SellingSettings
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + toggle_hide_tax_id + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/selling/sms_center.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/selling/sms_center.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e407d82a --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/selling/sms_center.html @@ -0,0 +1,344 @@ + + + + + + + +
SMS Center
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +send_to |
+ + Select | ++ Send To + + | +
+ +All Contact +All Customer Contact +All Supplier Contact +All Sales Partner Contact +All Lead (Open) +All Employee (Active) +All Sales Person+ |
+
| 3 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 4 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 5 | +sales_partner |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Partner + + | ++ + + + +Sales Partner + + + + | +
| 6 | +department |
+ + Link | ++ Department + + | ++ + + + +Department + + + + | +
| 7 | +branch |
+ + Link | ++ Branch + + | ++ + + + +Branch + + + + | +
| 8 | +create_receiver_list |
+ + Button | ++ Create Receiver List + + | +
+ create_receiver_list+ |
+
| 9 | +receiver_list |
+ + Code | ++ Receiver List + + | ++ |
| 10 | +column_break9 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +message |
+ + Text | +
+ Message
+ + Messages greater than 160 characters will be split into multiple messages + |
+ + |
| 12 | +total_characters |
+ + Int | ++ Total Characters + + | ++ |
| 13 | +total_messages |
+ + Int | ++ Total Message(s) + + | ++ |
| 14 | +send_sms |
+ + Button | ++ Send SMS + + | +
+ send_sms+ |
+
+
Controller
+erpnext.selling.doctype.sms_center.sms_center
+ + + + + + + +Class SMSCenter
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + create_receiver_list + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_receiver_nos + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + send_sms + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/authorization_control.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/authorization_control.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7e06aeba --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/authorization_control.html @@ -0,0 +1,159 @@ + + + + + + + +
Authorization Control
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|
+
Controller
+erpnext.setup.doctype.authorization_control.authorization_control
+ + + + + + + +Class AuthorizationControl
+ +Inherits from erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.TransactionBase + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + bifurcate_based_on_type + (self, doctype_name, total, av_dis, based_on, doc_obj, val, company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_appr_user_role + (self, det, doctype_name, total, based_on, condition, item, company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_approver_name + (self, doctype_name, total, doc_obj=) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_value_based_rule + (self, doctype_name, employee, total_claimed_amount, company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_approving_authority + (self, doctype_name, company, total, doc_obj=) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_auth_rule + (self, doctype_name, total, based_on, cond, company, item=) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/authorization_rule.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/authorization_rule.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..8c4cd428 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/authorization_rule.html @@ -0,0 +1,420 @@ + + + + + + + +
Authorization Rule
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabAuthorization Rule
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +transaction |
+ + Select | ++ Transaction + + | +
+ +Sales Order +Purchase Order +Quotation +Delivery Note +Sales Invoice +Purchase Invoice +Purchase Receipt +Appraisal+ |
+
| 2 | +based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Based On + + | +
+ +Grand Total +Average Discount +Customerwise Discount +Itemwise Discount +Not Applicable+ |
+
| 3 | +customer_or_item |
+ + Select | ++ Customer or Item + + | +
+ Customer +Item+ |
+
| 4 | +master_name |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Customer / Item Name + + | +
+ customer_or_item+ |
+
| 5 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 7 | +section_break_17 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +value |
+ + Float | ++ Authorized Value + + | ++ |
| 9 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +system_role |
+ + Link | ++ Applicable To (Role) + + | ++ + + + +Role + + + + | +
| 11 | +to_emp |
+ + Link | ++ Applicable To (Employee) + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 12 | +column_break_10 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +system_user |
+ + Link | ++ Applicable To (User) + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
| 14 | +to_designation |
+ + Link | ++ Applicable To (Designation) + + | ++ + + + +Designation + + + + | +
| 15 | +section_break_13 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 16 | +approving_role |
+ + Link | ++ Approving Role (above authorized value) + + | ++ + + + +Role + + + + | +
| 17 | +column_break_15 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +approving_user |
+ + Link | ++ Approving User (above authorized value) + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.setup.doctype.authorization_rule.authorization_rule
+ + + + + + + +Class AuthorizationRule
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + check_duplicate_entry + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_rule + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/brand.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/brand.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9ab51422 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/brand.html @@ -0,0 +1,214 @@ + + + + + + + +
Brand
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabBrand
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +brand |
+ + Data | ++ Brand Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +description |
+ + Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.setup.doctype.brand.brand
+ + + + + + + +Class Brand
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Delivery Note Item + + + + + +
- + + +Item + + + + + +
- + + +Material Request Item + + + + + +
- + + +Opportunity Item + + + + + +
- + + +Pricing Rule + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Order Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt Item + + + + + +
- + + +Quotation Item + + + + + +
- + + +Request for Quotation Item + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Order Item + + + + + +
- + + +Serial No + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier Quotation Item + + + + +
Company
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabCompany
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +company_name |
+ + Data | ++ Company + + | ++ |
| 3 | +abbr |
+ + Data | ++ Abbr + + | ++ |
| 4 | +change_abbr |
+ + Button | ++ Change Abbreviation + + | ++ |
| 5 | +cb0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +domain |
+ + Select | ++ Domain + + | +
+ Distribution +Manufacturing +Retail +Services +Education +Other+ |
+
| 7 | +charts_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Default Values + + | ++ |
| 8 | +default_letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Default Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 9 | +default_holiday_list |
+ + Link | ++ Default Holiday List + + | ++ + + + +Holiday List + + + + | +
| 10 | +default_terms |
+ + Link | ++ Default Terms + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 11 | +default_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Default Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 12 | +column_break_10 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +country |
+ + Link | ++ Country + + | ++ + + + +Country + + + + | +
| 14 | +create_chart_of_accounts_based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Create Chart Of Accounts Based On + + | +
+ +Standard Template +Existing Company+ |
+
| 15 | +chart_of_accounts |
+ + Select | ++ Chart Of Accounts Template + + | ++ |
| 16 | +existing_company |
+ + Link | ++ Existing Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 17 | +sales_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Sales + + | ++ |
| 18 | +sales_monthly_history |
+ + Small Text | ++ Sales Monthly History + + | ++ |
| 19 | +sales_target |
+ + Currency | ++ Sales Target + + | +
+ default_currency+ |
+
| 20 | +column_break_goals |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 21 | +total_monthly_sales |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Monthly Sales + + | +
+ default_currency+ |
+
| 22 | +default_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Accounts Settings + + | ++ |
| 23 | +default_bank_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Bank Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 24 | +default_cash_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Cash Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 25 | +default_receivable_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Receivable Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 26 | +round_off_account |
+ + Link | ++ Round Off Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 27 | +write_off_account |
+ + Link | ++ Write Off Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 28 | +exchange_gain_loss_account |
+ + Link | ++ Exchange Gain / Loss Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 29 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 30 | +default_payable_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Payable Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 31 | +default_expense_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Cost of Goods Sold Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 32 | +default_income_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Income Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 33 | +default_payroll_payable_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Payroll Payable Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 34 | +round_off_cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Round Off Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 35 | +section_break_22 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 36 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Default Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 37 | +credit_limit |
+ + Currency | ++ Credit Limit + + | +
+ default_currency+ |
+
| 38 | +column_break_26 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 39 | +credit_days_based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Credit Days Based On + + | +
+ +Fixed Days +Last Day of the Next Month+ |
+
| 40 | +credit_days |
+ + Int | ++ Credit Days + + | ++ |
| 41 | +auto_accounting_for_stock_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Stock Settings + + | ++ |
| 42 | +enable_perpetual_inventory |
+ + Check | ++ Enable Perpetual Inventory + + | ++ |
| 43 | +default_inventory_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Inventory Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 44 | +stock_adjustment_account |
+ + Link | ++ Stock Adjustment Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 45 | +column_break_32 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 46 | +stock_received_but_not_billed |
+ + Link | ++ Stock Received But Not Billed + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 47 | +expenses_included_in_valuation |
+ + Link | ++ Expenses Included In Valuation + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 48 | +fixed_asset_depreciation_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Fixed Asset Depreciation Settings + + | ++ |
| 49 | +accumulated_depreciation_account |
+ + Link | ++ Accumulated Depreciation Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 50 | +depreciation_expense_account |
+ + Link | ++ Depreciation Expense Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 51 | +column_break_40 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 52 | +disposal_account |
+ + Link | ++ Gain/Loss Account on Asset Disposal + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 53 | +depreciation_cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Asset Depreciation Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 54 | +company_info |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Company Info
+ + For reference only. + |
+ + |
| 55 | +address_html |
+ + HTML | ++ + + | ++ |
| 56 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 57 | +phone_no |
+ + Data | ++ Phone No + + | +
+ Phone+ |
+
| 58 | +fax |
+ + Data | ++ Fax + + | +
+ Phone+ |
+
| 59 | +email |
+ + Data | ++ Email + + | +
+ |
+
| 60 | +website |
+ + Data | ++ Website + + | ++ |
| 61 | +registration_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 62 | +registration_details |
+ + Code | +
+ Registration Details
+ + Company registration numbers for your reference. Tax numbers etc. + |
+ + |
| 63 | +delete_company_transactions |
+ + Button | ++ Delete Company Transactions + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.setup.doctype.company.company
+ + + + + + + +Class Company
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + _set_default_account + (self, fieldname, account_type) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + abbreviate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + after_rename + (self, olddn, newdn, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + before_rename + (self, olddn, newdn, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_if_transactions_exist + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + create_default_accounts + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + create_default_cost_center + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + create_default_warehouses + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + install_country_fixtures + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_trash + (self) +
+ Trash accounts and cost centers for this company if no gl entry exists
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_default_accounts + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_mode_of_payment_account + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_abbr + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_coa_input + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_currency + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_default_accounts + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_perpetual_inventory + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.company.company.cache_companies_monthly_sales_history + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.company.company.get_name_with_abbr + (name, company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.setup.doctype.company.company.replace_abbr
+
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.company.company.replace_abbr + (company, old, new) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.company.company.update_company_current_month_sales + (company) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.company.company.update_company_monthly_sales + (company) +
+Cache past year monthly sales of every company based on sales invoices
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Account + + + + + +
- + + +Appraisal + + + + + +
- + + +Asset + + + + + +
- + + +Asset Category Account + + + + + +
- + + +Asset Movement + + + + + +
- + + +Attendance + + + + + +
- + + +Authorization Rule + + + + + +
- + + +BOM + + + + + +
- + + +Budget + + + + + +
- + + +C-Form + + + + + +
- + + +Company + + + + + +
- + + +Cost Center + + + + + +
- + + +Daily Work Summary + + + + + +
- + + +Daily Work Summary Settings Company + + + + + +
- + + +Delivery Note + + + + + +
- + + +Email Digest + + + + + +
- + + +Employee + + + + + +
- + + +Employee Attendance Tool + + + + + +
- + + +Employee Loan + + + + + +
- + + +Employee Loan Application + + + + + +
- + + +Expense Claim + + + + + +
- + + +Expense Claim Account + + + + + +
- + + +Fiscal Year Company + + + + + +
- + + +GL Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Global Defaults + + + + + +
- + + +Homepage + + + + + +
- + + +Installation Note + + + + + +
- + + +Issue + + + + + +
- + + +Journal Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Landed Cost Voucher + + + + + +
- + + +Lead + + + + + +
- + + +Leave Application + + + + + +
- + + +Leave Block List + + + + + +
- + + +Leave Control Panel + + + + + +
- + + +Maintenance Schedule + + + + + +
- + + +Maintenance Visit + + + + + +
- + + +Material Request + + + + + +
- + + +Mode of Payment Account + + + + + +
- + + +Offer Letter + + + + + +
- + + +Opportunity + + + + + +
- + + +Party Account + + + + + +
- + + +Payment Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Payment Reconciliation + + + + + +
- + + +Period Closing Voucher + + + + + +
- + + +POS Profile + + + + + +
- + + +Pricing Rule + + + + + +
- + + +Process Payroll + + + + + +
- + + +Production Order + + + + + +
- + + +Production Planning Tool + + + + + +
- + + +Project + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Order + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges Template + + + + + +
- + + +Quotation + + + + + +
- + + +Request for Quotation + + + + + +
- + + +Salary Component Account + + + + + +
- + + +Salary Slip + + + + + +
- + + +Salary Structure + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Order + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Taxes and Charges Template + + + + + +
- + + +Serial No + + + + + +
- + + +Shipping Rule + + + + + +
- + + +Shopping Cart Settings + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Ledger Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Reconciliation + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier Quotation + + + + + +
- + + +Task + + + + + +
- + + +Tax Rule + + + + + +
- + + +Timesheet + + + + + +
- + + +Warehouse + + + + + +
- + + +Warranty Claim + + + + +
Currency Exchange
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabCurrency Exchange
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 2 | +from_currency |
+ + Link | ++ From Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 3 | +to_currency |
+ + Link | ++ To Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 4 | +exchange_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Exchange Rate + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.setup.doctype.currency_exchange.currency_exchange
+ + + + + + + +Class CurrencyExchange
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/customer_group.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/customer_group.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f7f28aab --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/customer_group.html @@ -0,0 +1,452 @@ + + + + + + + +
Customer Group
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabCustomer Group
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +customer_group_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Group Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +parent_customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Parent Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 3 | +is_group |
+ + Check | +
+ Is Group
+ + Only leaf nodes are allowed in transaction + |
+ + |
| 4 | +cb0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +default_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Default Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 6 | +credit_days_based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Credit Days Based On + + | +
+ +Fixed Days +Last Day of the Next Month+ |
+
| 7 | +credit_days |
+ + Int | ++ Credit Days + + | ++ |
| 8 | +credit_limit |
+ + Currency | ++ Credit Limit + + | ++ |
| 9 | +lft |
+ + Int | ++ lft + + | ++ |
| 10 | +rgt |
+ + Int | ++ rgt + + | ++ |
| 11 | +old_parent |
+ + Link | ++ old_parent + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 12 | +default_receivable_account |
+ + Section Break | ++ Default Receivable Account + + | ++ |
| 13 | +accounts |
+ + Table | +
+ Accounts
+ + Mention if non-standard receivable account applicable + |
+ + + + + +Party Account + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.setup.doctype.customer_group.customer_group
+ + + + + + + +Class CustomerGroup
+ +Inherits from frappe.utils.nestedset.NestedSet + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_name_with_customer + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Customer + + + + + +
- + + +Customer Group + + + + + +
- + + +Delivery Note + + + + + +
- + + +Installation Note + + + + + +
- + + +Maintenance Schedule + + + + + +
- + + +Maintenance Visit + + + + + +
- + + +Opportunity + + + + + +
- + + +POS Customer Group + + + + + +
- + + +Pricing Rule + + + + + +
- + + +Quotation + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Order + + + + + +
- + + +Selling Settings + + + + + +
- + + +Shopping Cart Settings + + + + + +
- + + +Tax Rule + + + + + +
- + + +Warranty Claim + + + + +
Email Digest
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabEmail Digest
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Email Digest Settings + + | ++ |
| 2 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +enabled |
+ + Check | ++ Enabled + + | ++ |
| 4 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ For Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 5 | +frequency |
+ + Select | ++ How frequently? + + | +
+ Daily +Weekly +Monthly+ |
+
| 6 | +next_send |
+ + Data | ++ Next email will be sent on: + + | ++ |
| 7 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +recipient_list |
+ + Code | +
+ Recipients
+ + Note: Email will not be sent to disabled users + |
+
+ |
+
| 9 | +addremove_recipients |
+ + Button | ++ Add/Remove Recipients + + | ++ |
| 10 | +accounts |
+ + Section Break | ++ Accounts + + | ++ |
| 11 | +accounts_module |
+ + Column Break | ++ Profit & Loss + + | ++ |
| 12 | +income |
+ + Check | ++ New Income + + | ++ |
| 13 | +expenses_booked |
+ + Check | ++ New Expenses + + | ++ |
| 14 | +income_year_to_date |
+ + Check | ++ Annual Income + + | ++ |
| 15 | +expense_year_to_date |
+ + Check | ++ Annual Expenses + + | ++ |
| 16 | +column_break_16 |
+ + Column Break | ++ Balance Sheet + + | ++ |
| 17 | +bank_balance |
+ + Check | ++ Bank Balance + + | ++ |
| 18 | +credit_balance |
+ + Check | ++ Credit Balance + + | ++ |
| 19 | +invoiced_amount |
+ + Check | ++ Receivables + + | ++ |
| 20 | +payables |
+ + Check | ++ Payables + + | ++ |
| 21 | +operation |
+ + Section Break | ++ Operations + + | ++ |
| 22 | +column_break_21 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +sales_order |
+ + Check | ++ New Sales Orders + + | ++ |
| 24 | +pending_sales_orders |
+ + Check | ++ Pending Sales Orders + + | ++ |
| 25 | +purchase_order |
+ + Check | ++ New Purchase Orders + + | ++ |
| 26 | +pending_purchase_orders |
+ + Check | ++ Pending Purchase Orders + + | ++ |
| 27 | +column_break_operation |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +new_quotations |
+ + Check | ++ New Quotations + + | ++ |
| 29 | +pending_quotations |
+ + Check | ++ Pending Quotations + + | ++ |
| 30 | +issue |
+ + Check | ++ Open Issues + + | ++ |
| 31 | +project |
+ + Check | ++ Open Projects + + | ++ |
| 32 | +other |
+ + Section Break | ++ Other + + | ++ |
| 33 | +tools |
+ + Column Break | ++ Tools + + | ++ |
| 34 | +calendar_events |
+ + Check | ++ Upcoming Calendar Events + + | ++ |
| 35 | +todo_list |
+ + Check | ++ Open To Do + + | ++ |
| 36 | +notifications |
+ + Check | ++ Open Notifications + + | ++ |
| 37 | +column_break_32 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 38 | +add_quote |
+ + Check | ++ Add Quote + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.setup.doctype.email_digest.email_digest
+ + + + + + + +Class EmailDigest
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + fmt_money + (self, value, absol=True) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_bank_balance + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_calendar_events + (self) +
+Get calendar events for given user
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_credit_balance + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_expense_year_to_date + (self) +
+Get income to date
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_expenses_booked + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_from_to_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_income + (self) +
+Get income for given period
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_income_year_to_date + (self) +
+Get income to date
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_invoiced_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_issue_count + (self) +
+Get count of Issue
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_issue_list + (self, user_id=None) +
+Get issue list
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_msg_html + (self) +
+Build email digest content
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_new_quotations + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_next_sending + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_notifications + (self) +
+Get notifications for user
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_payables + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_pending_purchase_orders + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_pending_quotations + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_pending_sales_orders + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_period_amounts + (self, accounts, fieldname) +
+Get amounts for current and past periods
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_project_count + (self) +
+Get count of Project
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_project_list + (self, user_id=None) +
+Get project list
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_purchase_order + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_root_type_accounts + (self, root_type) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_sales_order + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_summary_of_doc + (self, doc_type, fieldname) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_summary_of_pending + (self, doc_type, fieldname, getfield) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_summary_of_pending_quotations + (self, fieldname) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_todo_count + (self, user_id=None) +
+Get count of Todo
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_todo_list + (self, user_id=None) +
+Get to-do list
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_total_on + (self, doc_type, from_date, to_date) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_type_balance + (self, fieldname, account_type, root_type=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_users + (self) +
+get list of users
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_year_to_date_balance + (self, root_type, fieldname) +
+Get income to date
++ + + + + +
+ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + send + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_accounting_cards + (self, context) +
+Create accounting cards if checked
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_dates + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_style + (self, context) +
+Set standard digest style
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_title + (self, context) +
+Set digest title
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.setup.doctype.email_digest.email_digest.get_digest_msg
+
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.email_digest.email_digest.get_digest_msg + (name) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.email_digest.email_digest.send + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/global_defaults.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/global_defaults.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9f4a4974 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/global_defaults.html @@ -0,0 +1,270 @@ + + + + + + + +
Global Defaults
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +default_company |
+ + Link | ++ Default Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 2 | +current_fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Current Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 3 | +country |
+ + Link | ++ Country + + | ++ + + + +Country + + + + | +
| 4 | +column_break_8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +default_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Default Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 6 | +hide_currency_symbol |
+ + Select | +
+ Hide Currency Symbol
+ + Do not show any symbol like $ etc next to currencies. + |
+
+ +No +Yes+ |
+
| 7 | +disable_rounded_total |
+ + Check | +
+ Disable Rounded Total
+ + If disable, 'Rounded Total' field will not be visible in any transaction + |
+ + |
| 8 | +disable_in_words |
+ + Check | +
+ Disable In Words
+ + If disable, 'In Words' field will not be visible in any transaction + |
+ + |
+
Controller
+erpnext.setup.doctype.global_defaults.global_defaults
+ + + + + + + +Class GlobalDefaults
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + get_defaults + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+update defaults
++ + + + + +
+ + + toggle_in_words + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + toggle_rounded_total + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0e09716f --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ + + + + + +
Module setup
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+DocTypes for setup
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/item_group.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/item_group.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..5a1fec35 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/item_group.html @@ -0,0 +1,734 @@ + + + + + + + +Item Group
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabItem Group
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +gs |
+ + Section Break | ++ General Settings + + | ++ |
| 2 | +item_group_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Group Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +parent_item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Parent Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 4 | +is_group |
+ + Check | +
+ Is Group
+ + Only leaf nodes are allowed in transaction + |
+ + |
| 5 | +column_break_5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +default_income_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Income Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 7 | +default_expense_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Expense Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 8 | +default_cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Default Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 9 | +sb9 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Website Settings + + | ++ |
| 10 | +show_in_website |
+ + Check | +
+ Show in Website
+ + Check this if you want to show in website + |
+ + |
| 11 | +route |
+ + Data | ++ Route + + | ++ |
| 12 | +slideshow |
+ + Link | +
+ Slideshow
+ + Show this slideshow at the top of the page + |
+ + + + + +Website Slideshow + + + + | +
| 13 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | +
+ Description
+ + HTML / Banner that will show on the top of product list. + |
+ + |
| 14 | +website_specifications |
+ + Table | ++ Website Specifications + + | ++ + + + +Item Website Specification + + + + | +
| 15 | +lft |
+ + Int | ++ lft + + | ++ |
| 16 | +rgt |
+ + Int | ++ rgt + + | ++ |
| 17 | +old_parent |
+ + Link | ++ old_parent + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.setup.doctype.item_group.item_group
+ + + + + + + +Class ItemGroup
+ +Inherits from frappe.utils.nestedset.NestedSet, frappe.website.website_generator.WebsiteGenerator + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + after_rename + (self, olddn, newdn, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_context + (self, context) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_route + (self) +
+Make website route
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_name_with_item + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.item_group.item_group.get_child_groups + (item_group_name) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.item_group.item_group.get_group_item_count + (item_group) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.item_group.item_group.get_item_for_list_in_html + (context) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.item_group.item_group.get_parent_item_groups + (item_group_name) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.setup.doctype.item_group.item_group.get_product_list_for_group
+
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.item_group.item_group.get_product_list_for_group + (product_group=None, start=0, limit=10, search=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.item_group.item_group.invalidate_cache_for + (doc, item_group=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Delivery Note Item + + + + + +
- + + +Item + + + + + +
- + + +Item Group + + + + + +
- + + +Material Request Item + + + + + +
- + + +Opportunity Item + + + + + +
- + + +POS Item Group + + + + + +
- + + +Pricing Rule + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Order Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt Item + + + + + +
- + + +Quotation Item + + + + + +
- + + +Request for Quotation Item + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Order Item + + + + + +
- + + +Serial No + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Settings + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier Quotation Item + + + + + +
- + + +Target Detail + + + + + +
- + + +Website Item Group + + + + +
Naming Series
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+Set prefix for numbering series on your transactions
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +setup_series |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Setup Series
+ + Set prefix for numbering series on your transactions + |
+ + |
| 2 | +select_doc_for_series |
+ + Select | ++ Select Transaction + + | ++ |
| 3 | +help_html |
+ + HTML | ++ Help HTML + + | ++ |
| 4 | +set_options |
+ + Text | ++ Series List for this Transaction + + | ++ |
| 5 | +user_must_always_select |
+ + Check | +
+ User must always select
+ + Check this if you want to force the user to select a series before saving. There will be no default if you check this. + |
+ + |
| 6 | +update |
+ + Button | ++ Update + + | ++ |
| 7 | +update_series |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Update Series
+ + Change the starting / current sequence number of an existing series. + |
+ + |
| 8 | +prefix |
+ + Select | ++ Prefix + + | ++ |
| 9 | +current_value |
+ + Int | +
+ Current Value
+ + This is the number of the last created transaction with this prefix + |
+ + |
| 10 | +update_series_start |
+ + Button | ++ Update Series Number + + | +
+ update_series_start+ |
+
+
Controller
+erpnext.setup.doctype.naming_series.naming_series
+ + + + + + + +Class NamingSeries
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + check_duplicate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_current + (self, arg=None) +
+get series current
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_options + (self, arg=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_transactions + (self, arg=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + insert_series + (self, series) +
+insert series if missing
++ + + + + +
+ + + parse_naming_series + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + scrub_options_list + (self, ol) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_series_for + (self, doctype, ol) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_series + (self, arg=None) +
+update series list
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_series_start + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_series_name + (self, n) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + +
Class NamingSeriesNotSetError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.naming_series.naming_series.get_default_naming_series + (doctype) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.naming_series.naming_series.set_by_naming_series + (doctype, fieldname, naming_series, hide_name_field=True) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/notification_control.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/notification_control.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..9d4e7169 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/notification_control.html @@ -0,0 +1,354 @@ + + + + + + + +
Notification Control
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+Send automatic emails to Contacts on Submitting transactions.
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +send_autonotification_for |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Prompt for Email on Submission of
+ + When any of the checked transactions are "Submitted", an email pop-up automatically opened to send an email to the associated "Contact" in that transaction, with the transaction as an attachment. The user may or may not send the email. + |
+ + |
| 2 | +sales |
+ + Column Break | ++ Sales + + | ++ |
| 3 | +quotation |
+ + Check | ++ Quotation + + | ++ |
| 4 | +sales_order |
+ + Check | ++ Sales Order + + | ++ |
| 5 | +delivery_note |
+ + Check | ++ Delivery Note + + | ++ |
| 6 | +sales_invoice |
+ + Check | ++ Sales Invoice + + | ++ |
| 7 | +purchase |
+ + Column Break | ++ Purchase + + | ++ |
| 8 | +purchase_order |
+ + Check | ++ Purchase Order + + | ++ |
| 9 | +purchase_receipt |
+ + Check | ++ Purchase Receipt + + | ++ |
| 10 | +expense_claim |
+ + Check | ++ Expense Claim + + | ++ |
| 11 | +customize_the_notification |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Customize the Notification
+ + Customize the introductory text that goes as a part of that email. Each transaction has a separate introductory text. + |
+ + |
| 12 | +select_transaction |
+ + Select | ++ Select Transaction + + | +
+ +Quotation +Sales Order +Delivery Note +Sales Invoice +Purchase Order +Purchase Receipt +Expense Claim +Expense Claim Approved +Expense Claim Rejected+ |
+
| 13 | +custom_message |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Custom Message + + | ++ |
| 14 | +quotation_message |
+ + Text | ++ Quotation Message + + | ++ |
| 15 | +sales_order_message |
+ + Text | ++ Sales Order Message + + | ++ |
| 16 | +delivery_note_message |
+ + Text | ++ Delivery Note Message + + | ++ |
| 17 | +sales_invoice_message |
+ + Text | ++ Sales Invoice Message + + | ++ |
| 18 | +purchase_order_message |
+ + Text | ++ Purchase Order Message + + | ++ |
| 19 | +purchase_receipt_message |
+ + Text | ++ Purchase Receipt Message + + | ++ |
| 20 | +expense_claim_approved_message |
+ + Text | ++ Expense Claim Approved Message + + | ++ |
| 21 | +expense_claim_rejected_message |
+ + Text | ++ Expense Claim Rejected Message + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.setup.doctype.notification_control.notification_control
+ + + + + + + +Class NotificationControl
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/party_type.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/party_type.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e6e870b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/party_type.html @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + + +
Party Type
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabParty Type
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +party_type |
+ + Link | ++ Party Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.setup.doctype.party_type.party_type
+ + + + + + + +Class PartyType
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.setup.doctype.party_type.party_type.get_party_type
+
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.party_type.party_type.get_party_type + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/print_heading.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/print_heading.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..20ce50fc --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/print_heading.html @@ -0,0 +1,232 @@ + + + + + + + +
Print Heading
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPrint Heading
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +print_heading |
+ + Data | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ |
| 2 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.setup.doctype.print_heading.print_heading
+ + + + + + + +Class PrintHeading
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Delivery Note + + + + + +
- + + +Journal Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Material Request + + + + + +
- + + +Payment Entry + + + + + +
- + + +POS Profile + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Order + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt + + + + + +
- + + +Quotation + + + + + +
- + + +Request for Quotation + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Order + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier Quotation + + + + +
Quotation Lost Reason
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabQuotation Lost Reason
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +order_lost_reason |
+ + Data | ++ Quotation Lost Reason + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.setup.doctype.quotation_lost_reason.quotation_lost_reason
+ + + + + + + +Class QuotationLostReason
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/sales_partner.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/sales_partner.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..647dc600 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/sales_partner.html @@ -0,0 +1,517 @@ + + + + + + + +
Sales Partner
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSales Partner
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +partner_name |
+ + Data | ++ Sales Partner Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +partner_type |
+ + Select | ++ Partner Type + + | +
+ +Channel Partner +Distributor +Dealer +Agent +Retailer +Implementation Partner +Reseller+ |
+
| 3 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 4 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +commission_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Commission Rate + + | ++ |
| 6 | +address_contacts |
+ + Section Break | ++ Address & Contacts + + | ++ |
| 7 | +address_desc |
+ + HTML | ++ Address Desc + + | ++ |
| 8 | +address_html |
+ + HTML | ++ Address HTML + + | ++ |
| 9 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +contact_desc |
+ + HTML | ++ Contact Desc + + | ++ |
| 11 | +contact_html |
+ + HTML | ++ Contact HTML + + | ++ |
| 12 | +partner_target_details_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Sales Partner Target + + | ++ |
| 13 | +targets |
+ + Table | ++ Targets + + | ++ + + + +Target Detail + + + + | +
| 14 | +distribution_id |
+ + Link | +
+ Target Distribution
+ + Select Monthly Distribution to unevenly distribute targets across months. + |
+ + + + + +Monthly Distribution + + + + | +
| 15 | +website |
+ + Section Break | ++ Website + + | ++ |
| 16 | +show_in_website |
+ + Check | ++ Show In Website + + | ++ |
| 17 | +section_break_17 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +route |
+ + Data | ++ Route + + | ++ |
| 19 | +column_break_20 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 20 | +logo |
+ + Attach | ++ Logo + + | ++ |
| 21 | +partner_website |
+ + Data | ++ Partner website + + | ++ |
| 22 | +section_break_22 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +introduction |
+ + Text | ++ Introduction + + | ++ |
| 24 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.setup.doctype.sales_partner.sales_partner
+ + + + + + + +Class SalesPartner
+ +Inherits from frappe.website.website_generator.WebsiteGenerator + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_context + (self, context) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + onload + (self) +
+Load address and contacts in __onload
+ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Customer + + + + + +
- + + +Delivery Note + + + + + +
- + + +Pricing Rule + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Order + + + + + +
- + + +SMS Center + + + + +
Sales Person
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSales Person
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +name_and_employee_id |
+ + Section Break | ++ Name and Employee ID + + | +
+ icon-user+ |
+
| 2 | +sales_person_name |
+ + Data | ++ Sales Person Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +parent_sales_person |
+ + Link | +
+ Parent Sales Person
+ + Select company name first. + |
+ + + + + +Sales Person + + + + | +
| 4 | +is_group |
+ + Check | ++ Is Group + + | ++ |
| 5 | +cb0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +employee |
+ + Link | ++ Employee + + | ++ + + + +Employee + + + + | +
| 7 | +enabled |
+ + Check | ++ Enabled + + | ++ |
| 8 | +lft |
+ + Int | ++ lft + + | ++ |
| 9 | +rgt |
+ + Int | ++ rgt + + | ++ |
| 10 | +old_parent |
+ + Data | ++ old_parent + + | ++ |
| 11 | +target_details_section_break |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Sales Person Targets
+ + Set targets Item Group-wise for this Sales Person. + |
+
+ icon-bullseye+ |
+
| 12 | +targets |
+ + Table | ++ Targets + + | ++ + + + +Target Detail + + + + | +
| 13 | +distribution_id |
+ + Link | +
+ Target Distribution
+ + Select Monthly Distribution to unevenly distribute targets across months. + |
+ + + + + +Monthly Distribution + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.setup.doctype.sales_person.sales_person
+ + + + + + + +Class SalesPerson
+ +Inherits from frappe.utils.nestedset.NestedSet + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + get_email_id + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_employee_id + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Maintenance Schedule Detail + + + + + +
- + + +Maintenance Schedule Item + + + + + +
- + + +Maintenance Visit Purpose + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Person + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Team + + + + + +
- + + +Territory + + + + +
SMS Parameter
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSMS Parameter
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +parameter |
+ + Data | ++ Parameter + + | ++ |
| 2 | +value |
+ + Data | ++ Value + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +SMS Settings + + + +
SMS Settings
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +sms_gateway_url |
+ + Data | +
+ SMS Gateway URL
+ + Eg. smsgateway.com/api/send_sms.cgi + |
+ + |
| 3 | +message_parameter |
+ + Data | +
+ Message Parameter
+ + Enter url parameter for message + |
+ + |
| 4 | +receiver_parameter |
+ + Data | +
+ Receiver Parameter
+ + Enter url parameter for receiver nos + |
+ + |
| 5 | +sms_sender_name |
+ + Data | ++ SMS Sender Name + + | ++ |
| 6 | +static_parameters_section |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +parameters |
+ + Table | +
+ Static Parameters
+ + Enter static url parameters here (Eg. sender=ERPNext, username=ERPNext, password=1234 etc.) + |
+ + + + + +SMS Parameter + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.setup.doctype.sms_settings.sms_settings
+ + + + + + + +Class SMSSettings
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.sms_settings.sms_settings.create_sms_log + (args, sent_to) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.setup.doctype.sms_settings.sms_settings.get_contact_number
+
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.sms_settings.sms_settings.get_contact_number + (contact_name, ref_doctype, ref_name) +
+returns mobile number of the contact
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.sms_settings.sms_settings.get_sender_name + () +
+returns name as SMS sender
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.sms_settings.sms_settings.send_request + (gateway_url, params) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.setup.doctype.sms_settings.sms_settings.send_sms
+
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.sms_settings.sms_settings.send_sms + (receiver_list, msg, sender_name=, success_msg=True) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.sms_settings.sms_settings.send_via_gateway + (arg) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.sms_settings.sms_settings.validate_receiver_nos + (receiver_list) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/supplier_type.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/supplier_type.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f8a79121 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/setup/supplier_type.html @@ -0,0 +1,204 @@ + + + + + + + +
Supplier Type
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSupplier Type
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +supplier_type |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Type + + | ++ |
| 2 | +section_credit_limit |
+ + Section Break | ++ Credit Limit + + | ++ |
| 3 | +credit_days_based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Credit Days Based On + + | +
+ +Fixed Days +Last Day of the Next Month+ |
+
| 4 | +credit_days |
+ + Int | ++ Credit Days + + | ++ |
| 5 | +default_payable_account |
+ + Section Break | ++ Default Payable Account + + | ++ |
| 6 | +accounts |
+ + Table | +
+ Accounts
+ + Mention if non-standard receivable account applicable + |
+ + + + + +Party Account + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.setup.doctype.supplier_type.supplier_type
+ + + + + + + +Class SupplierType
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Buying Settings + + + + + +
- + + +Pricing Rule + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier + + + + + +
- + + +Tax Rule + + + + +
Target Detail
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabTarget Detail
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 2 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Link | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ + + + +Fiscal Year + + + + | +
| 3 | +target_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Target Qty + + | ++ |
| 4 | +target_amount |
+ + Float | ++ Target Amount + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Sales Partner + + + +
- + + +Sales Person + + + +
- + + +Territory + + + +
Terms and Conditions
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabTerms and Conditions
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 2 | +disabled |
+ + Check | ++ Disabled + + | ++ |
| 3 | +terms |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | ++ |
| 4 | +terms_and_conditions_help |
+ + HTML | ++ Terms and Conditions Help + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.setup.doctype.terms_and_conditions.terms_and_conditions
+ + + + + + + +Class TermsandConditions
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.setup.doctype.terms_and_conditions.terms_and_conditions.get_terms_and_conditions
+
+ + + erpnext.setup.doctype.terms_and_conditions.terms_and_conditions.get_terms_and_conditions + (template_name, doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Company + + + + + +
- + + +Delivery Note + + + + + +
- + + +Material Request + + + + + +
- + + +Offer Letter + + + + + +
- + + +POS Profile + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Order + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt + + + + + +
- + + +Quotation + + + + + +
- + + +Request for Quotation + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Order + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier Quotation + + + + +
Territory
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabTerritory
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +territory_name |
+ + Data | ++ Territory Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +parent_territory |
+ + Link | ++ Parent Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 3 | +is_group |
+ + Check | +
+ Is Group
+ + Only leaf nodes are allowed in transaction + |
+ + |
| 4 | +cb0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +territory_manager |
+ + Link | +
+ Territory Manager
+ + For reference + |
+ + + + + +Sales Person + + + + | +
| 6 | +lft |
+ + Int | ++ lft + + | ++ |
| 7 | +rgt |
+ + Int | ++ rgt + + | ++ |
| 8 | +old_parent |
+ + Link | ++ old_parent + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 9 | +target_details_section_break |
+ + Section Break | +
+ Territory Targets
+ + Set Item Group-wise budgets on this Territory. You can also include seasonality by setting the Distribution. + |
+ + |
| 10 | +targets |
+ + Table | ++ Targets + + | ++ + + + +Target Detail + + + + | +
| 11 | +distribution_id |
+ + Link | +
+ Target Distribution
+ + Select Monthly Distribution to unevenly distribute targets across months. + |
+ + + + + +Monthly Distribution + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.setup.doctype.territory.territory
+ + + + + + + +Class Territory
+ +Inherits from frappe.utils.nestedset.NestedSet + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +C-Form Invoice Detail + + + + + +
- + + +Customer + + + + + +
- + + +Delivery Note + + + + + +
- + + +Installation Note + + + + + +
- + + +Lead + + + + + +
- + + +Maintenance Schedule + + + + + +
- + + +Maintenance Visit + + + + + +
- + + +Opportunity + + + + + +
- + + +POS Profile + + + + + +
- + + +Pricing Rule + + + + + +
- + + +Quotation + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Order + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Partner + + + + + +
- + + +Selling Settings + + + + + +
- + + +Territory + + + + + +
- + + +Warranty Claim + + + + +
UOM
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabUOM
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +uom_name |
+ + Data | ++ UOM Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +must_be_whole_number |
+ + Check | +
+ Must be Whole Number
+ + Check this to disallow fractions. (for Nos) + |
+ + |
+
Controller
+erpnext.setup.doctype.uom.uom
+ + + + + + + +Class UOM
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Bin + + + + + +
- + + +BOM + + + + + +
- + + +BOM Explosion Item + + + + + +
- + + +BOM Item + + + + + +
- + + +BOM Scrap Item + + + + + +
- + + +Delivery Note Item + + + + + +
- + + +Item + + + + + +
- + + +Material Request Item + + + + + +
- + + +Opportunity Item + + + + + +
- + + +Packed Item + + + + + +
- + + +Packing Slip + + + + + +
- + + +Packing Slip Item + + + + + +
- + + +Product Bundle Item + + + + + +
- + + +Production Order + + + + + +
- + + +Production Plan Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Order Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Order Item Supplied + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt Item Supplied + + + + + +
- + + +Quotation Item + + + + + +
- + + +Request for Quotation Item + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Order Item + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Entry Detail + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Ledger Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Settings + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier Quotation Item + + + + + +
- + + +UOM Conversion Detail + + + + + +
- + + +Vehicle + + + + +
Website Item Group
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabWebsite Item Group
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Item + + + +
Module shopping_cart
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+DocTypes for shopping_cart
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/shopping_cart/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/shopping_cart/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/shopping_cart/shopping_cart_settings.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/shopping_cart/shopping_cart_settings.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..6a8b072d --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/shopping_cart/shopping_cart_settings.html @@ -0,0 +1,494 @@ + + + + + + + +Shopping Cart Settings
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+Default settings for Shopping Cart
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +enabled |
+ + Check | ++ Enable Shopping Cart + + | ++ |
| 2 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +show_attachments |
+ + Check | +
+ Show Public Attachments
+ + Attachments can be shown without enabling the shopping cart + |
+ + |
| 4 | +section_break_2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 6 | +price_list |
+ + Link | +
+ Price List
+ + Prices will not be shown if Price List is not set + |
+ + + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 7 | +show_quantity_in_website |
+ + Check | ++ Show Quantity in Website + + | ++ |
| 8 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +default_customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Default Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 10 | +quotation_series |
+ + Select | ++ Quotation Series + + | ++ |
| 11 | +section_break_8 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Checkout Settings + + | ++ |
| 12 | +enable_checkout |
+ + Check | ++ Enable Checkout + + | ++ |
| 13 | +payment_success_url |
+ + Select | +
+ Payment Success Url
+ + After payment completion redirect user to selected page. + |
+
+ +Orders +Invoices +My Account+ |
+
| 14 | +column_break_11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +payment_gateway_account |
+ + Link | ++ Payment Gateway Account + + | ++ + + + +Payment Gateway Account + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.shopping_cart.doctype.shopping_cart_settings.shopping_cart_settings
+ + + + + + + +Class ShoppingCartSettings
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + get_shipping_rules + (self, shipping_territory) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_tax_master + (self, billing_territory) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_exchange_rates_exist + (self) +
+check if exchange rates exist for all Price List currencies (to company's currency)
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_tax_rule + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + +
Class ShoppingCartSetupError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.doctype.shopping_cart_settings.shopping_cart_settings.check_shopping_cart_enabled + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.doctype.shopping_cart_settings.shopping_cart_settings.get_shopping_cart_settings + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.doctype.shopping_cart_settings.shopping_cart_settings.is_cart_enabled + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.doctype.shopping_cart_settings.shopping_cart_settings.show_attachments + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.doctype.shopping_cart_settings.shopping_cart_settings.show_quantity_in_website + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.shopping_cart.doctype.shopping_cart_settings.shopping_cart_settings.validate_cart_settings + (doc, method) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/stock/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/stock/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/stock/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/stock/batch.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/stock/batch.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..390018ad --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/stock/batch.html @@ -0,0 +1,535 @@ + + + + + + + +
Batch
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabBatch
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +batch_id |
+ + Data | ++ Batch ID + + | ++ |
| 2 | +item |
+ + Link | ++ Item + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 3 | +image |
+ + Attach Image | ++ image + + | ++ |
| 4 | +parent_batch |
+ + Link | ++ Parent Batch + + | ++ + + + +Batch + + + + | +
| 5 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +expiry_date |
+ + Date | ++ Expiry Date + + | ++ |
| 7 | +source |
+ + Section Break | ++ Source + + | ++ |
| 8 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 9 | +column_break_9 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +reference_doctype |
+ + Link | ++ Source Document Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 11 | +reference_name |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Source Document Name + + | +
+ reference_doctype+ |
+
| 12 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Batch Description + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.stock.doctype.batch.batch
+ + + + + + + +Class Batch
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + autoname + (self) +
+Generate random ID for batch if not specified
++ + + + + +
+ + + item_has_batch_enabled + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + +
Class UnableToSelectBatchError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.batch.batch.get_batch_no + (item_code, warehouse, qty, throw=False) +
+get the smallest batch with for the given item_code, warehouse and qty
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.batch.batch.get_batch_qty
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.batch.batch.get_batch_qty + (batch_no=None, warehouse=None, item_code=None) +
+Returns batch actual qty if warehouse is passed, + or returns dict of qty by warehouse if warehouse is None
+ +The user must pass either batch_no or batch_no + warehouse or item_code + warehouse
+Parameters:
+ +-
+
batch_no- Optional - give qty for this batch no
+warehouse- Optional - give qty for this warehouse
+item_code- Optional - give qty for this item
+
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.batch.batch.get_batches_by_oldest
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.batch.batch.get_batches_by_oldest + (item_code, warehouse) +
+Returns the oldest batch and qty for the given item_code and warehouse
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.batch.batch.set_batch_nos + (doc, warehouse_field, throw=False) +
+Automatically select batch_no for outgoing items in item table
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.batch.batch.split_batch
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.batch.batch.split_batch + (batch_no, item_code, warehouse, qty, new_batch_id=None) +
+Split the batch into a new batch
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Batch + + + + + +
- + + +Delivery Note Item + + + + + +
- + + +Packed Item + + + + + +
- + + +Packing Slip Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt Item Supplied + + + + + +
- + + +Quality Inspection + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Entry Detail + + + + +
Bin
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabBin
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 2 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 3 | +reserved_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Reserved Quantity + + | ++ |
| 4 | +actual_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Actual Quantity + + | ++ |
| 5 | +ordered_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Ordered Quantity + + | ++ |
| 6 | +indented_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Requested Quantity + + | ++ |
| 7 | +planned_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Planned Qty + + | ++ |
| 8 | +projected_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Projected Qty + + | ++ |
| 9 | +reserved_qty_for_production |
+ + Float | ++ Reserved Qty for Production + + | ++ |
| 10 | +ma_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Moving Average Rate + + | ++ |
| 11 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 12 | +fcfs_rate |
+ + Float | ++ FCFS Rate + + | ++ |
| 13 | +valuation_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Valuation Rate + + | ++ |
| 14 | +stock_value |
+ + Float | ++ Stock Value + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.stock.doctype.bin.bin
+ + + + + + + +Class Bin
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + get_first_sle + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_projected_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_qty + (self, args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_reserved_qty_for_production + (self) +
+Update qty reserved for production from Production Item tables + in open production orders
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_stock + (self, args, allow_negative_stock=False, via_landed_cost_voucher=False) +
+Called from erpnext.stock.utils.update_bin
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_mandatory + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.bin.bin.on_doctype_update + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.bin.bin.update_item_projected_qty + (item_code) +
+Set totalprojectedqty in Item as sum of projected qty in all warehouses
++ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/stock/customs_tariff_number.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/stock/customs_tariff_number.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..67a743da --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/stock/customs_tariff_number.html @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + +
Customs Tariff Number
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabCustoms Tariff Number
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +tariff_number |
+ + Data | ++ Tariff Number + + | ++ |
| 2 | +description |
+ + Data | ++ Description + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.stock.doctype.customs_tariff_number.customs_tariff_number
+ + + + + + + +Class CustomsTariffNumber
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Item + + + + +
Delivery Note
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabDelivery Note
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +delivery_to_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Delivery To + + | +
+ fa fa-user+ |
+
| 2 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 4 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ DN- +DN-RET-+ |
+
| 5 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 6 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ |
| 7 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Delivery Note + + + + | +
| 9 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 10 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 11 | +posting_time |
+ + Time | ++ Posting Time + + | ++ |
| 12 | +set_posting_time |
+ + Check | ++ Edit Posting Date and Time + + | ++ |
| 13 | +po_no |
+ + Data | ++ Customer's Purchase Order No + + | ++ |
| 14 | +po_date |
+ + Date | ++ Customer's Purchase Order Date + + | ++ |
| 15 | +is_return |
+ + Check | ++ Is Return + + | ++ |
| 16 | +return_against |
+ + Link | ++ Return Against Delivery Note + + | ++ + + + +Delivery Note + + + + | +
| 17 | +contact_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Address and Contact + + | +
+ fa fa-bullhorn+ |
+
| 18 | +shipping_address_name |
+ + Link | ++ Shipping Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 19 | +shipping_address |
+ + Small Text | ++ Shipping Address + + | ++ |
| 20 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 21 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 22 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Small Text | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 23 | +contact_email |
+ + Data | ++ Contact Email + + | +
+ |
+
| 24 | +col_break21 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +customer_address |
+ + Link | ++ Billing Address Name + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 26 | +tax_id |
+ + Data | ++ Tax Id + + | ++ |
| 27 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Billing Address + + | ++ |
| 28 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 29 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 30 | +currency_and_price_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Currency and Price List + + | +
+ fa fa-tag+ |
+
| 31 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 32 | +conversion_rate |
+ + Float | +
+ Exchange Rate
+ + Rate at which customer's currency is converted to company's base currency + |
+ + |
| 33 | +col_break23 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 34 | +selling_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 35 | +price_list_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Price List Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 36 | +plc_conversion_rate |
+ + Float | +
+ Price List Exchange Rate
+ + Rate at which Price list currency is converted to company's base currency + |
+ + |
| 37 | +ignore_pricing_rule |
+ + Check | ++ Ignore Pricing Rule + + | ++ |
| 38 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 39 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Delivery Note Item + + + + | +
| 40 | +packing_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Packing List + + | +
+ fa fa-suitcase+ |
+
| 41 | +packed_items |
+ + Table | ++ Packed Items + + | ++ + + + +Packed Item + + + + | +
| 42 | +product_bundle_help |
+ + HTML | ++ Product Bundle Help + + | ++ |
| 43 | +section_break_31 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 44 | +base_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 45 | +base_net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 46 | +column_break_33 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 47 | +total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 48 | +net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 49 | +taxes_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ fa fa-money+ |
+
| 50 | +taxes_and_charges |
+ + Link | +
+ Taxes and Charges
+ + If you have created a standard template in Sales Taxes and Charges Template, select one and click on the button below. + |
+ + + + + +Sales Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 51 | +column_break_39 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 52 | +shipping_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Shipping Rule + + | ++ + + + +Shipping Rule + + + + | +
| 53 | +section_break_41 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 54 | +taxes |
+ + Table | ++ Sales Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Sales Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
| 55 | +sec_tax_breakup |
+ + Section Break | ++ Tax Breakup + + | ++ |
| 56 | +other_charges_calculation |
+ + Text | ++ Taxes and Charges Calculation + + | ++ |
| 57 | +section_break_44 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 58 | +base_total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 59 | +column_break_47 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 60 | +total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 61 | +section_break_49 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Additional Discount + + | ++ |
| 62 | +apply_discount_on |
+ + Select | ++ Apply Additional Discount On + + | +
+ +Grand Total +Net Total+ |
+
| 63 | +base_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 64 | +column_break_51 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 65 | +additional_discount_percentage |
+ + Float | ++ Additional Discount Percentage + + | ++ |
| 66 | +discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 67 | +totals |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-money+ |
+
| 68 | +base_grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 69 | +base_rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 70 | +base_in_words |
+ + Data | +
+ In Words (Company Currency)
+ + In Words will be visible once you save the Delivery Note. + |
+ + |
| 71 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 72 | +grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 73 | +rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 74 | +in_words |
+ + Data | +
+ In Words
+ + In Words (Export) will be visible once you save the Delivery Note. + |
+ + |
| 75 | +terms_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | +
+ fa fa-legal+ |
+
| 76 | +tc_name |
+ + Link | ++ Terms + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 77 | +terms |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Terms and Conditions Details + + | ++ |
| 78 | +transporter_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Transporter Info + + | +
+ fa fa-truck+ |
+
| 79 | +transporter_name |
+ + Data | ++ Transporter Name + + | ++ |
| 80 | +col_break34 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 81 | +lr_no |
+ + Data | ++ Vehicle No + + | ++ |
| 82 | +lr_date |
+ + Date | ++ Vehicle Dispatch Date + + | ++ |
| 83 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ fa fa-file-text+ |
+
| 84 | +project |
+ + Link | +
+ Project
+ + Track this Delivery Note against any Project + |
+ + + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 85 | +campaign |
+ + Link | ++ Campaign + + | ++ + + + +Campaign + + + + | +
| 86 | +source |
+ + Link | ++ Source + + | ++ + + + +Lead Source + + + + | +
| 87 | +column_break5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 88 | +per_billed |
+ + Percent | ++ % Amount Billed + + | ++ |
| 89 | +printing_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Printing Details + + | ++ |
| 90 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 91 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 92 | +language |
+ + Data | ++ Print Language + + | ++ |
| 93 | +column_break_88 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 94 | +print_without_amount |
+ + Check | ++ Print Without Amount + + | ++ |
| 95 | +section_break_83 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Status + + | ++ |
| 96 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +To Bill +Completed +Cancelled +Closed+ |
+
| 97 | +per_installed |
+ + Percent | +
+ % Installed
+ + % of materials delivered against this Delivery Note + |
+ + |
| 98 | +installation_status |
+ + Select | ++ Installation Status + + | ++ |
| 99 | +column_break_89 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 100 | +to_warehouse |
+ + Link | +
+ To Warehouse
+ + Required only for sample item. + |
+ + + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 101 | +excise_page |
+ + Data | ++ Excise Page Number + + | ++ |
| 102 | +instructions |
+ + Text | ++ Instructions + + | ++ |
| 103 | +sales_team_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Commission + + | +
+ fa fa-group+ |
+
| 104 | +sales_partner |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Partner + + | ++ + + + +Sales Partner + + + + | +
| 105 | +column_break7 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 106 | +commission_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Commission Rate (%) + + | ++ |
| 107 | +total_commission |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Commission + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 108 | +section_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Sales Team + + | ++ |
| 109 | +sales_team |
+ + Table | ++ Sales Team1 + + | ++ + + + +Sales Team + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note
+ + + + + + + +Class DeliveryNote
+ +Inherits from erpnext.controllers.selling_controller.SellingController + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + before_print + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + cancel_packing_slips + (self) +
+ Cancel submitted packing slips related to this delivery note
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_credit_limit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_next_docstatus + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_actual_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + so_required + (self) +
+check in manage account if sales order required or not
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_billing_status + (self, update_modified=True) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_current_stock + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_status + (self, status) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_for_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_packed_qty + (self) +
+ Validate that if packed qty exists, it should be equal to qty
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_proj_cust + (self) +
+check for does customer belong to same project as entered..
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_warehouse + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_with_previous_doc + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.get_invoiced_qty_map + (delivery_note) +
+returns a map: {dndetail: invoicedqty}
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.get_list_context + (context=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.make_installation_note
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.make_installation_note + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.make_packing_slip
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.make_packing_slip + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.make_sales_invoice
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.make_sales_invoice + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.make_sales_return
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.make_sales_return + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.update_billed_amount_based_on_so + (so_detail, update_modified=True) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.update_delivery_note_status
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.delivery_note.delivery_note.update_delivery_note_status + (docname, status) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Delivery Note + + + + + +
- + + +Packing Slip + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Entry + + + + +
Delivery Note Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabDelivery Note Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +barcode |
+ + Data | ++ Barcode + + | ++ |
| 2 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 3 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +customer_item_code |
+ + Data | ++ Customer's Item Code + + | ++ |
| 6 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 7 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 8 | +column_break_8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 10 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 11 | +quantity_and_rate |
+ + Section Break | ++ Quantity and Rate + + | ++ |
| 12 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Quantity + + | ++ |
| 13 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 14 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 16 | +conversion_factor |
+ + Float | ++ UOM Conversion Factor + + | ++ |
| 17 | +stock_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty as per Stock UOM + + | ++ |
| 18 | +section_break_17 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 20 | +base_price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 21 | +discount_and_margin |
+ + Section Break | ++ Discount and Margin + + | ++ |
| 22 | +margin_type |
+ + Select | ++ Margin Type + + | +
+ +Percentage +Amount+ |
+
| 23 | +margin_rate_or_amount |
+ + Float | ++ Margin Rate or Amount + + | ++ |
| 24 | +rate_with_margin |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate With Margin + + | ++ |
| 25 | +column_break_19 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 26 | +discount_percentage |
+ + Float | ++ Discount (%) on Price List Rate with Margin + + | ++ |
| 27 | +section_break_1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 29 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 30 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 31 | +base_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 32 | +base_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 33 | +pricing_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Pricing Rule + + | ++ + + + +Pricing Rule + + + + | +
| 34 | +section_break_25 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 35 | +net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 36 | +net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 37 | +column_break_28 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 38 | +base_net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 39 | +base_net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 40 | +warehouse_and_reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Warehouse and Reference + + | ++ |
| 41 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ From Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 42 | +target_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Warehouse (Optional) + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 43 | +quality_inspection |
+ + Link | ++ Quality Inspection + + | ++ + + + +Quality Inspection + + + + | +
| 44 | +section_break_40 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 45 | +serial_no |
+ + Text | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
| 46 | +batch_no |
+ + Link | ++ Batch No + + | ++ + + + +Batch + + + + | +
| 47 | +actual_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Available Qty at From Warehouse + + | ++ |
| 48 | +actual_batch_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Available Batch Qty at From Warehouse + + | ++ |
| 49 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 50 | +brand |
+ + Link | ++ Brand Name + + | ++ + + + +Brand + + + + | +
| 51 | +item_tax_rate |
+ + Small Text | ++ Item Tax Rate + + | ++ |
| 52 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 53 | +expense_account |
+ + Link | ++ Expense Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 54 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 55 | +allow_zero_valuation_rate |
+ + Check | ++ Allow Zero Valuation Rate + + | ++ |
| 56 | +against_sales_order |
+ + Link | ++ Against Sales Order + + | ++ + + + +Sales Order + + + + | +
| 57 | +against_sales_invoice |
+ + Link | ++ Against Sales Invoice + + | ++ + + + +Sales Invoice + + + + | +
| 58 | +so_detail |
+ + Data | ++ Against Sales Order Item + + | ++ |
| 59 | +si_detail |
+ + Data | ++ Against Sales Invoice Item + + | ++ |
| 60 | +installed_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Installed Qty + + | ++ |
| 61 | +billed_amt |
+ + Currency | ++ Billed Amt + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 62 | +page_break |
+ + Check | ++ Page Break + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Delivery Note + + + +
Module stock
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+DocTypes for stock
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/stock/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/stock/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/stock/item.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/stock/item.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..484473cd --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/stock/item.html @@ -0,0 +1,2672 @@ + + + + + + + +Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabItem
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +name_and_description_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-flag+ |
+
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ ITEM-+ |
+
| 3 | +item_code |
+ + Data | ++ Item Code + + | ++ |
| 4 | +variant_of |
+ + Link | +
+ Variant Of
+ + If item is a variant of another item then description, image, pricing, taxes etc will be set from the template unless explicitly specified + |
+ + + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 5 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 6 | +barcode |
+ + Data | ++ Barcode + + | ++ |
| 7 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 8 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Default Unit of Measure + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 9 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +disabled |
+ + Check | ++ Disabled + + | ++ |
| 11 | +is_stock_item |
+ + Check | ++ Maintain Stock + + | ++ |
| 12 | +opening_stock |
+ + Float | ++ Opening Stock + + | ++ |
| 13 | +valuation_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Valuation Rate + + | ++ |
| 14 | +standard_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Standard Selling Rate + + | ++ |
| 15 | +is_fixed_asset |
+ + Check | ++ Is Fixed Asset + + | ++ |
| 16 | +asset_category |
+ + Link | ++ Asset Category + + | ++ + + + +Asset Category + + + + | +
| 17 | +tolerance |
+ + Float | ++ Allow over delivery or receipt upto this percent + + | ++ |
| 18 | +image |
+ + Attach Image | ++ Image + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 19 | +section_break_11 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 20 | +brand |
+ + Link | ++ Brand + + | ++ + + + +Brand + + + + | +
| 21 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 22 | +inventory |
+ + Section Break | ++ Inventory + + | +
+ fa fa-truck+ |
+
| 23 | +default_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Default Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 24 | +end_of_life |
+ + Date | ++ End of Life + + | ++ |
| 25 | +default_material_request_type |
+ + Select | ++ Default Material Request Type + + | +
+ Purchase +Material Transfer +Material Issue +Manufacture+ |
+
| 26 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 27 | +valuation_method |
+ + Select | ++ Valuation Method + + | +
+ +FIFO +Moving Average+ |
+
| 28 | +warranty_period |
+ + Data | ++ Warranty Period (in days) + + | ++ |
| 29 | +net_weight |
+ + Float | ++ Net Weight + + | ++ |
| 30 | +weight_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Weight UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 31 | +reorder_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Auto re-order + + | +
+ fa fa-rss+ |
+
| 32 | +reorder_levels |
+ + Table | +
+ Reorder level based on Warehouse
+ + Will also apply for variants unless overrridden + |
+ + + + + +Item Reorder + + + + | +
| 33 | +unit_of_measure_conversion |
+ + Section Break | ++ Units of Measure + + | ++ |
| 34 | +uoms |
+ + Table | +
+ UOMs
+ + Will also apply for variants + |
+ + + + + +UOM Conversion Detail + + + + | +
| 35 | +serial_nos_and_batches |
+ + Section Break | ++ Serial Nos and Batches + + | ++ |
| 36 | +has_batch_no |
+ + Check | ++ Has Batch No + + | ++ |
| 37 | +create_new_batch |
+ + Check | ++ Automatically Create New Batch + + | ++ |
| 38 | +column_break_37 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 39 | +has_serial_no |
+ + Check | ++ Has Serial No + + | ++ |
| 40 | +serial_no_series |
+ + Data | +
+ Serial Number Series
+ + Example: ABCD.##### +If series is set and Serial No is not mentioned in transactions, then automatic serial number will be created based on this series. If you always want to explicitly mention Serial Nos for this item. leave this blank. + |
+ + |
| 41 | +variants_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Variants + + | ++ |
| 42 | +has_variants |
+ + Check | +
+ Has Variants
+ + If this item has variants, then it cannot be selected in sales orders etc. + |
+ + |
| 43 | +variant_based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Variant Based On + + | +
+ Item Attribute +Manufacturer+ |
+
| 44 | +attributes |
+ + Table | ++ Attributes + + | ++ + + + +Item Variant Attribute + + + + | +
| 45 | +purchase_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Purchase Details + + | +
+ fa fa-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 46 | +is_purchase_item |
+ + Check | ++ Is Purchase Item + + | ++ |
| 47 | +min_order_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Minimum Order Qty + + | ++ |
| 48 | +safety_stock |
+ + Float | ++ Safety Stock + + | ++ |
| 49 | +lead_time_days |
+ + Int | +
+ Lead Time in days
+ + Average time taken by the supplier to deliver + |
+ + |
| 50 | +buying_cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Default Buying Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 51 | +expense_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Expense Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 52 | +last_purchase_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Last Purchase Rate + + | ++ |
| 53 | +supplier_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Supplier Details + + | ++ |
| 54 | +default_supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Default Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 55 | +delivered_by_supplier |
+ + Check | ++ Delivered by Supplier (Drop Ship) + + | ++ |
| 56 | +manufacturer |
+ + Link | ++ Manufacturer + + | ++ + + + +Manufacturer + + + + | +
| 57 | +manufacturer_part_no |
+ + Data | ++ Manufacturer Part Number + + | ++ |
| 58 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ Item Code for Suppliers + + | ++ |
| 59 | +supplier_items |
+ + Table | ++ Supplier Items + + | ++ + + + +Item Supplier + + + + | +
| 60 | +foreign_trade_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Foreign Trade Details + + | ++ |
| 61 | +country_of_origin |
+ + Link | ++ Country of Origin + + | ++ + + + +Country + + + + | +
| 62 | +column_break_59 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 63 | +customs_tariff_number |
+ + Link | ++ Customs Tariff Number + + | ++ + + + +Customs Tariff Number + + + + | +
| 64 | +sales_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Sales Details + + | +
+ fa fa-tag+ |
+
| 65 | +is_sales_item |
+ + Check | ++ Is Sales Item + + | ++ |
| 66 | +publish_in_hub |
+ + Check | +
+ Publish in Hub
+ + Publish Item to hub.erpnext.com + |
+ + |
| 67 | +synced_with_hub |
+ + Check | ++ Synced With Hub + + | ++ |
| 68 | +income_account |
+ + Link | ++ Default Income Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 69 | +selling_cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Default Selling Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 70 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ Customer Item Codes + + | ++ |
| 71 | +customer_items |
+ + Table | ++ Customer Items + + | ++ + + + +Item Customer Detail + + + + | +
| 72 | +max_discount |
+ + Float | ++ Max Discount (%) + + | ++ |
| 73 | +item_tax_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Item Tax + + | +
+ fa fa-money+ |
+
| 74 | +taxes |
+ + Table | +
+ Taxes
+ + Will also apply for variants + |
+ + + + + +Item Tax + + + + | +
| 75 | +inspection_criteria |
+ + Section Break | ++ Inspection Criteria + + | +
+ fa fa-search+ |
+
| 76 | +inspection_required_before_purchase |
+ + Check | ++ Inspection Required before Purchase + + | ++ |
| 77 | +inspection_required_before_delivery |
+ + Check | ++ Inspection Required before Delivery + + | ++ |
| 78 | +quality_parameters |
+ + Table | +
+ Quality Parameters
+ + Will also apply to variants + |
+ + + + + +Item Quality Inspection Parameter + + + + | +
| 79 | +manufacturing |
+ + Section Break | ++ Manufacturing + + | +
+ fa fa-cogs+ |
+
| 80 | +default_bom |
+ + Link | ++ Default BOM + + | ++ + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 81 | +is_sub_contracted_item |
+ + Check | +
+ Supply Raw Materials for Purchase
+ + If subcontracted to a vendor + |
+ + |
| 82 | +column_break_74 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 83 | +customer_code |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Code + + | ++ |
| 84 | +website_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Website + + | +
+ fa fa-globe+ |
+
| 85 | +show_in_website |
+ + Check | ++ Show in Website + + | ++ |
| 86 | +show_variant_in_website |
+ + Check | ++ Show in Website (Variant) + + | ++ |
| 87 | +route |
+ + Small Text | ++ Route + + | ++ |
| 88 | +weightage |
+ + Int | +
+ Weightage
+ + Items with higher weightage will be shown higher + |
+ + |
| 89 | +slideshow |
+ + Link | +
+ Slideshow
+ + Show a slideshow at the top of the page + |
+ + + + + +Website Slideshow + + + + | +
| 90 | +website_image |
+ + Attach | +
+ Image
+ + Item Image (if not slideshow) + |
+ + |
| 91 | +thumbnail |
+ + Data | ++ Thumbnail + + | ++ |
| 92 | +cb72 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 93 | +website_warehouse |
+ + Link | +
+ Website Warehouse
+ + Show "In Stock" or "Not in Stock" based on stock available in this warehouse. + |
+ + + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 94 | +website_item_groups |
+ + Table | +
+ Website Item Groups
+ + List this Item in multiple groups on the website. + |
+ + + + + +Website Item Group + + + + | +
| 95 | +sb72 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Website Specifications + + | ++ |
| 96 | +copy_from_item_group |
+ + Button | ++ Copy From Item Group + + | ++ |
| 97 | +website_specifications |
+ + Table | ++ Website Specifications + + | ++ + + + +Item Website Specification + + + + | +
| 98 | +web_long_description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Website Description + + | ++ |
| 99 | +total_projected_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Total Projected Qty + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.stock.doctype.item.item
+ + + + + + + +Class DuplicateReorderRows
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class Item
+ +Inherits from frappe.website.website_generator.WebsiteGenerator + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + add_default_uom_in_conversion_factor_table + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + add_price + (self, price_list=None) +
+Add a new price
++ + + + + +
+ + + after_insert + (self) +
+set opening stock and item price
++ + + + + +
+ + + after_rename + (self, old_name, new_name, merge) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + before_insert + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + before_rename + (self, old_name, new_name, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + cant_change + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_for_active_boms + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_if_linked_document_exists + (self, key) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_if_sle_exists + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_item_tax + (self) +
+Check whether Tax Rate is not entered twice for same Tax Type
++ + + + + +
+ + + copy_specification_from_item_group + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + fill_customer_code + (self) +
+Append all the customer codes and insert into "customer_code" field of item table
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_context + (self, context) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_route + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + make_thumbnail + (self) +
+Make a thumbnail of website_image
+ + + + + +
+ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + recalculate_bin_qty + (self, new_name) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_attribute_context + (self, context) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_disabled_attributes + (self, context) +
+Disable selection options of attribute combinations that do not result in a variant
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_last_purchase_rate + (self, new_name) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_opening_stock + (self) +
+set opening stock
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_variant_context + (self, context) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_item_desc + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_item_price + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_template_item + (self) +
+Set Show in Website for Template Item if True for its Variant
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_template_tables + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_attributes + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_barcode + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_conversion_factor + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_fixed_asset + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_has_variants + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_item_type + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_name_with_item_group + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_uom + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_variant_attributes + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_warehouse_for_reorder + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_website_image + (self) +
+Validate if the website image is a public file
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.item.item._msgprint + (msg, verbose) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.item.item.check_stock_uom_with_bin + (item, stock_uom) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.item.item.get_last_purchase_details + (item_code, doc_name=None, conversion_rate=1.0) +
+returns last purchase details in stock uom
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.item.item.get_timeline_data + (doctype, name) +
+returns timeline data based on stock ledger entry
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.item.item.invalidate_cache_for_item + (doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.item.item.validate_cancelled_item + (item_code, docstatus=None, verbose=1) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.item.item.validate_end_of_life + (item_code, end_of_life=None, disabled=None, verbose=1) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.item.item.validate_is_stock_item + (item_code, is_stock_item=None, verbose=1) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Asset + + + + + +
- + + +Batch + + + + + +
- + + +Bin + + + + + +
- + + +BOM + + + + + +
- + + +BOM Explosion Item + + + + + +
- + + +BOM Item + + + + + +
- + + +BOM Scrap Item + + + + + +
- + + +BOM Website Item + + + + + +
- + + +Delivery Note Item + + + + + +
- + + +Homepage Featured Product + + + + + +
- + + +Installation Note Item + + + + + +
- + + +Item + + + + + +
- + + +Item Price + + + + + +
- + + +Landed Cost Item + + + + + +
- + + +Maintenance Schedule Detail + + + + + +
- + + +Maintenance Schedule Item + + + + + +
- + + +Maintenance Visit Purpose + + + + + +
- + + +Material Request Item + + + + + +
- + + +Opportunity Item + + + + + +
- + + +Packed Item + + + + + +
- + + +Packing Slip Item + + + + + +
- + + +Pricing Rule + + + + + +
- + + +Product Bundle + + + + + +
- + + +Product Bundle Item + + + + + +
- + + +Production Order + + + + + +
- + + +Production Order Item + + + + + +
- + + +Production Plan Item + + + + + +
- + + +Production Planning Tool + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Order Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt Item + + + + + +
- + + +Quality Inspection + + + + + +
- + + +Quotation Item + + + + + +
- + + +Request for Quotation Item + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Order Item + + + + + +
- + + +Serial No + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Entry Detail + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Ledger Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Reconciliation Item + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier Quotation Item + + + + + +
- + + +Warranty Claim + + + + +
Item Attribute
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabItem Attribute
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +attribute_name |
+ + Data | ++ Attribute Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +numeric_values |
+ + Check | ++ Numeric Values + + | ++ |
| 3 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +from_range |
+ + Float | ++ From Range + + | ++ |
| 5 | +increment |
+ + Float | ++ Increment + + | ++ |
| 6 | +column_break_8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +to_range |
+ + Float | ++ To Range + + | ++ |
| 8 | +section_break_5 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +item_attribute_values |
+ + Table | ++ Item Attribute Values + + | ++ + + + +Item Attribute Value + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.stock.doctype.item_attribute.item_attribute
+ + + + + + + +Class ItemAttribute
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + __setup__ + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_duplication + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_exising_items + (self) +
+Validate that if there are existing items with attributes, they are valid
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_numeric + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + +
Class ItemAttributeIncrementError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Item Variant + + + + + +
- + + +Item Variant Attribute + + + + +
Item Attribute Value
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabItem Attribute Value
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +attribute_value |
+ + Data | ++ Attribute Value + + | ++ |
| 2 | +abbr |
+ + Data | +
+ Abbreviation
+ + This will be appended to the Item Code of the variant. For example, if your abbreviation is "SM", and the item code is "T-SHIRT", the item code of the variant will be "T-SHIRT-SM" + |
+ + |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Item Attribute + + + +
Item Customer Detail
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabItem Customer Detail
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +customer_name |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 2 | +ref_code |
+ + Data | ++ Ref Code + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Item + + + +
Item Price
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabItem Price
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +price_list_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Price List + + | +
+ fa fa-tags+ |
+
| 2 | +price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 3 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +buying |
+ + Check | ++ Buying + + | ++ |
| 5 | +selling |
+ + Check | ++ Selling + + | ++ |
| 6 | +item_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-tag+ |
+
| 7 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 8 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 9 | +price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 10 | +col_br_1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 12 | +item_description |
+ + Text | ++ Item Description + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.stock.doctype.item_price.item_price
+ + + + + + + +Class ItemPrice
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + check_duplicate_item + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_item_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_price_list_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_item + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_price_list + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + +
Class ItemPriceDuplicateItem
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/stock/item_quality_inspection_parameter.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/stock/item_quality_inspection_parameter.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..754067b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/stock/item_quality_inspection_parameter.html @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + +
Item Quality Inspection Parameter
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabItem Quality Inspection Parameter
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +specification |
+ + Data | ++ Parameter + + | ++ |
| 2 | +value |
+ + Data | ++ Acceptance Criteria + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Item + + + +
Item Reorder
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabItem Reorder
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +warehouse_group |
+ + Link | ++ Check in (group) + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 2 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Request for + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 3 | +warehouse_reorder_level |
+ + Float | ++ Re-order Level + + | ++ |
| 4 | +warehouse_reorder_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Re-order Qty + + | ++ |
| 5 | +material_request_type |
+ + Select | ++ Material Request Type + + | +
+ Purchase +Transfer +Material Issue +Manufacture+ |
+
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Item + + + +
Item Supplier
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabItem Supplier
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 2 | +supplier_part_no |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Part Number + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Item + + + +
Item Tax
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabItem Tax
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +tax_type |
+ + Link | ++ Tax + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 2 | +tax_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Tax Rate + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Item + + + +
Item Variant
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabItem Variant
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_attribute |
+ + Link | ++ Item Attribute + + | ++ + + + +Item Attribute + + + + | +
| 2 | +item_attribute_value |
+ + Data | ++ Item Attribute Value + + | ++ |
Item Variant Attribute
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabItem Variant Attribute
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +attribute |
+ + Link | ++ Attribute + + | ++ + + + +Item Attribute + + + + | +
| 2 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +attribute_value |
+ + Data | ++ Attribute Value + + | ++ |
| 4 | +numeric_values |
+ + Check | ++ Numeric Values + + | ++ |
| 5 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +from_range |
+ + Float | ++ From Range + + | ++ |
| 7 | +increment |
+ + Float | ++ Increment + + | ++ |
| 8 | +column_break_8 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +to_range |
+ + Float | ++ To Range + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Item + + + +
Item Website Specification
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabItem Website Specification
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +label |
+ + Data | ++ Label + + | ++ |
| 2 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Item + + + +
- + + +Item Group + + + +
Landed Cost Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabLanded Cost Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 3 | +receipt_document_type |
+ + Select | ++ Receipt Document Type + + | +
+ Purchase Invoice +Purchase Receipt+ |
+
| 4 | +receipt_document |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Receipt Document + + | +
+ receipt_document_type+ |
+
| 5 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty + + | ++ |
| 7 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 8 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 9 | +applicable_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Applicable Charges + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 10 | +purchase_receipt_item |
+ + Data | ++ Purchase Receipt Item + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Landed Cost Voucher + + + +
Landed Cost Purchase Receipt
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabLanded Cost Purchase Receipt
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +receipt_document_type |
+ + Select | ++ Receipt Document Type + + | +
+ +Purchase Invoice +Purchase Receipt+ |
+
| 2 | +receipt_document |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Receipt Document + + | +
+ receipt_document_type+ |
+
| 3 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 4 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 6 | +grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Landed Cost Voucher + + + +
Landed Cost Taxes and Charges
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabLanded Cost Taxes and Charges
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 2 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Landed Cost Voucher + + + +
- + + +Stock Entry + + + +
Landed Cost Voucher
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabLanded Cost Voucher
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ LCV+ |
+
| 2 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 3 | +purchase_receipts |
+ + Table | ++ Purchase Receipts + + | ++ + + + +Landed Cost Purchase Receipt + + + + | +
| 4 | +purchase_receipt_items |
+ + Section Break | ++ Purchase Receipt Items + + | ++ |
| 5 | +get_items_from_purchase_receipts |
+ + Button | ++ Get Items From Purchase Receipts + + | ++ |
| 6 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Purchase Receipt Items + + | ++ + + + +Landed Cost Item + + + + | +
| 7 | +sec_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Additional Charges + + | ++ |
| 8 | +taxes |
+ + Table | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Landed Cost Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
| 9 | +section_break_9 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 11 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +distribute_charges_based_on |
+ + Select | ++ Distribute Charges Based On + + | +
+ +Qty +Amount+ |
+
| 13 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Landed Cost Voucher + + + + | +
| 14 | +sec_break2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +landed_cost_help |
+ + HTML | ++ Landed Cost Help + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.stock.doctype.landed_cost_voucher.landed_cost_voucher
+ + + + + + + +Class LandedCostVoucher
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + check_mandatory + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_items_from_purchase_receipts + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_total_taxes_and_charges + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_landed_cost + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_rate_in_serial_no + (self, receipt_document) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_applicable_charges_for_item + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_purchase_receipts + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Landed Cost Voucher + + + + +
Manufacturer
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabManufacturer
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +short_name |
+ + Data | +
+ Short Name
+ + Limited to 12 characters + |
+ + |
| 2 | +full_name |
+ + Data | ++ Full Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +website |
+ + Data | ++ Website + + | ++ |
| 4 | +data_6 |
+ + Link | ++ Country + + | ++ + + + +Country + + + + | +
| 5 | +logo |
+ + Attach Image | ++ Logo + + | ++ |
| 6 | +notes |
+ + Small Text | ++ Notes + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.stock.doctype.manufacturer.manufacturer
+ + + + + + + +Class Manufacturer
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Item + + + + +
Material Request
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabMaterial Request
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +type_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-pushpin+ |
+
| 2 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 3 | +material_request_type |
+ + Select | ++ Type + + | +
+ Purchase +Material Transfer +Material Issue +Manufacture+ |
+
| 4 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ MREQ-+ |
+
| 6 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Material Request + + + + | +
| 7 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 8 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 9 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Material Request Item + + + + | +
| 10 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ fa fa-file-text+ |
+
| 11 | +requested_by |
+ + Data | ++ Requested For + + | ++ |
| 12 | +transaction_date |
+ + Date | ++ Transaction Date + + | ++ |
| 13 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +Submitted +Stopped +Cancelled +Pending +Partially Ordered +Ordered +Issued +Transferred+ |
+
| 15 | +per_ordered |
+ + Percent | ++ % Ordered + + | ++ |
| 16 | +printing_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Printing Details + + | ++ |
| 17 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 18 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 19 | +terms_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | +
+ fa fa-legal+ |
+
| 20 | +tc_name |
+ + Link | ++ Terms + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 21 | +terms |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Terms and Conditions Content + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request
+ + + + + + + +Class MaterialRequest
+ +Inherits from erpnext.controllers.buying_controller.BuyingController + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + before_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + before_save + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + before_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_if_already_pulled + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_modified_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_title + (self) +
+Set title as comma separated list of items
++ + + + + +
+ + + status_can_change + (self, status) +
+ validates that `status` is acceptable for the present controller status
+ and throws an Exception if otherwise.
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_completed_qty + (self, mr_items=None, update_modified=True) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_requested_qty + (self, mr_item_rows=None) +
+update requested qty (before ordered_qty is updated)
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_status + (self, status) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_qty_against_so + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_schedule_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.get_material_requests_based_on_supplier + (supplier) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.make_purchase_order
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.make_purchase_order + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.make_purchase_order_based_on_supplier
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.make_purchase_order_based_on_supplier + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.make_request_for_quotation
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.make_request_for_quotation + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.make_stock_entry
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.make_stock_entry + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.make_supplier_quotation
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.make_supplier_quotation + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.raise_production_orders
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.raise_production_orders + (material_request) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.set_missing_values + (source, target_doc) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.update_completed_and_requested_qty + (stock_entry, method) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.material_request.material_request.update_item + (obj, target, source_parent) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Material Request + + + + + +
- + + +Production Order + + + + + +
- + + +Production Plan Item + + + + + +
- + + +Production Plan Material Request + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Order Item + + + + + +
- + + +Request for Quotation Item + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Entry Detail + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier Quotation Item + + + + +
Material Request Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabMaterial Request Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 5 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 6 | +column_break_6 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +image |
+ + Attach Image | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 8 | +quantity_and_warehouse |
+ + Section Break | ++ Quantity and Warehouse + + | ++ |
| 9 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Quantity + + | ++ |
| 10 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 11 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ For Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 12 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +schedule_date |
+ + Date | ++ Required Date + + | ++ |
| 14 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | ++ |
| 15 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 16 | +brand |
+ + Link | ++ Brand + + | ++ + + + +Brand + + + + | +
| 17 | +lead_time_date |
+ + Date | ++ Lead Time Date + + | ++ |
| 18 | +sales_order |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Order + + | ++ + + + +Sales Order + + + + | +
| 19 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 20 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 21 | +min_order_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Min Order Qty + + | ++ |
| 22 | +projected_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Projected Qty + + | ++ |
| 23 | +actual_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Actual Qty + + | ++ |
| 24 | +ordered_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Completed Qty + + | ++ |
| 25 | +page_break |
+ + Check | ++ Page Break + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Material Request + + + +
Packed Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPacked Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +parent_item |
+ + Link | ++ Parent Item + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 3 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +column_break_5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 6 | +section_break_6 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ From Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 8 | +target_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ To Warehouse (Optional) + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 9 | +column_break_9 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty + + | ++ |
| 11 | +section_break_9 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +serial_no |
+ + Text | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
| 13 | +column_break_11 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +batch_no |
+ + Link | ++ Batch No + + | ++ + + + +Batch + + + + | +
| 15 | +section_break_13 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 16 | +actual_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Actual Qty + + | ++ |
| 17 | +projected_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Projected Qty + + | ++ |
| 18 | +column_break_16 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 20 | +page_break |
+ + Check | ++ Page Break + + | ++ |
| 21 | +prevdoc_doctype |
+ + Data | ++ Prevdoc DocType + + | ++ |
| 22 | +parent_detail_docname |
+ + Data | ++ Parent Detail docname + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Delivery Note + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + +
- + + +Sales Order + + + +
Packing Slip
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPacking Slip
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +packing_slip_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +delivery_note |
+ + Link | +
+ Delivery Note
+ + Indicates that the package is a part of this delivery (Only Draft) + |
+ + + + + +Delivery Note + + + + | +
| 4 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ PS-+ |
+
| 6 | +section_break0 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +from_case_no |
+ + Data | +
+ From Package No.
+ + Identification of the package for the delivery (for print) + |
+ + |
| 9 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +to_case_no |
+ + Data | +
+ To Package No.
+ + If more than one package of the same type (for print) + |
+ + |
| 11 | +package_item_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +get_items |
+ + Button | ++ Get Items + + | ++ |
| 13 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Packing Slip Item + + + + | +
| 14 | +package_weight_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Package Weight Details + + | ++ |
| 15 | +net_weight_pkg |
+ + Float | +
+ Net Weight
+ + The net weight of this package. (calculated automatically as sum of net weight of items) + |
+ + |
| 16 | +net_weight_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Net Weight UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 17 | +column_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +gross_weight_pkg |
+ + Float | +
+ Gross Weight
+ + The gross weight of the package. Usually net weight + packaging material weight. (for print) + |
+ + |
| 19 | +gross_weight_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Gross Weight UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 20 | +letter_head_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ |
| 21 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 22 | +misc_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Packing Slip + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.stock.doctype.packing_slip.packing_slip
+ + + + + + + +Class PackingSlip
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + get_details_for_packing + (self) +
+ Returns
+ * 'Delivery Note Items' query result as a list of dict
+ * Item Quantity dict of current packing slip doc
+ * No. of Cases of this packing slip
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_recommended_case_no + (self) +
+ Returns the next case no. for a new packing slip for a delivery
+ note
++ + + + + +
+ + + recommend_new_qty + (self, item, ps_item_qty, no_of_cases) +
+ Recommend a new quantity and raise a validation exception
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_item_details + (self) +
+ Fill empty columns in Packing Slip Item
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+ * Validate existence of submitted Delivery Note
+ * Case nos do not overlap
+ * Check if packed qty doesn't exceed actual qty of delivery note
+
+ It is necessary to validate case nos before checking quantity
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_case_nos + (self) +
+ Validate if case nos overlap. If they do, recommend next case no.
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_delivery_note + (self) +
+ Validates if delivery note has status as draft
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_items_mandatory + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_qty + (self) +
+Check packed qty across packing slips and delivery note
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.packing_slip.packing_slip.item_details + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Packing Slip + + + + +
Packing Slip Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPacking Slip Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +batch_no |
+ + Link | ++ Batch No + + | ++ + + + +Batch + + + + | +
| 5 | +desc_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 6 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 7 | +quantity_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Quantity + + | ++ |
| 8 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Quantity + + | ++ |
| 9 | +net_weight |
+ + Float | ++ Net Weight + + | ++ |
| 10 | +column_break_10 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 12 | +weight_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Weight UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 13 | +page_break |
+ + Check | ++ Page Break + + | ++ |
| 14 | +dn_detail |
+ + Data | ++ DN Detail + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Packing Slip + + + +
Price List
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPrice List
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +enabled |
+ + Check | ++ Enabled + + | ++ |
| 2 | +sb_1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +price_list_name |
+ + Data | ++ Price List Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 5 | +buying |
+ + Check | ++ Buying + + | ++ |
| 6 | +selling |
+ + Check | ++ Selling + + | ++ |
| 7 | +column_break_3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +countries |
+ + Table | ++ Applicable for Countries + + | ++ + + + +Price List Country + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.stock.doctype.price_list.price_list
+ + + + + + + +Class PriceList
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_default_if_missing + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_item_price + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +BOM + + + + + +
- + + +Buying Settings + + + + + +
- + + +Customer + + + + + +
- + + +Customer Group + + + + + +
- + + +Delivery Note + + + + + +
- + + +Item Price + + + + + +
- + + +POS Profile + + + + + +
- + + +Pricing Rule + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Order + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt + + + + + +
- + + +Quotation + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Order + + + + + +
- + + +Selling Settings + + + + + +
- + + +Shopping Cart Settings + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier Quotation + + + + +
Price List Country
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPrice List Country
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +country |
+ + Link | ++ Country + + | ++ + + + +Country + + + + | +
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Price List + + + +
Purchase Receipt
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPurchase Receipt
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +supplier_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-user+ |
+
| 2 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 4 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ PREC- +PREC-RET-+ |
+
| 5 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 6 | +supplier_name |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Name + + | ++ |
| 7 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Date + + | ++ |
| 9 | +posting_time |
+ + Time | +
+ Posting Time
+ + Time at which materials were received + |
+ + |
| 10 | +set_posting_time |
+ + Check | ++ Edit Posting Date and Time + + | ++ |
| 11 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 12 | +is_return |
+ + Check | ++ Is Return + + | ++ |
| 13 | +return_against |
+ + Link | ++ Return Against Purchase Receipt + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Receipt + + + + | +
| 14 | +section_addresses |
+ + Section Break | ++ Address and Contact + + | ++ |
| 15 | +supplier_address |
+ + Link | ++ Select Supplier Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 16 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 17 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 18 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 19 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Small Text | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 20 | +contact_email |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact Email + + | ++ |
| 21 | +col_break_address |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 22 | +shipping_address |
+ + Link | ++ Select Shipping Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 23 | +shipping_address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Shipping Address + + | ++ |
| 24 | +currency_and_price_list |
+ + Section Break | ++ Currency and Price List + + | +
+ fa fa-tag+ |
+
| 25 | +currency |
+ + Link | ++ Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 26 | +conversion_rate |
+ + Float | +
+ Exchange Rate
+ + Rate at which supplier's currency is converted to company's base currency + |
+ + |
| 27 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +buying_price_list |
+ + Link | ++ Price List + + | ++ + + + +Price List + + + + | +
| 29 | +price_list_currency |
+ + Link | ++ Price List Currency + + | ++ + + + +Currency + + + + | +
| 30 | +plc_conversion_rate |
+ + Float | ++ Price List Exchange Rate + + | ++ |
| 31 | +ignore_pricing_rule |
+ + Check | ++ Ignore Pricing Rule + + | ++ |
| 32 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-shopping-cart+ |
+
| 33 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Receipt Item + + + + | +
| 34 | +get_current_stock |
+ + Button | ++ Get current stock + + | +
+ get_current_stock+ |
+
| 35 | +section_break0 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 36 | +base_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 37 | +base_net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 38 | +column_break_27 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 39 | +total |
+ + Currency | ++ Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 40 | +net_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 41 | +taxes_section |
+ + Section Break | +
+
+ + Add / Edit Taxes and Charges + |
+
+ fa fa-money+ |
+
| 42 | +taxes_and_charges |
+ + Link | ++ Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges Template + + + + | +
| 43 | +taxes |
+ + Table | ++ Purchase Taxes and Charges + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
| 44 | +sec_tax_breakup |
+ + Section Break | ++ Tax Breakup + + | ++ |
| 45 | +other_charges_calculation |
+ + Text | ++ Taxes and Charges Calculation + + | ++ |
| 46 | +totals |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ fa fa-money+ |
+
| 47 | +base_taxes_and_charges_added |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Added (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 48 | +base_taxes_and_charges_deducted |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Deducted (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 49 | +base_total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 50 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 51 | +taxes_and_charges_added |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Added + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 52 | +taxes_and_charges_deducted |
+ + Currency | ++ Taxes and Charges Deducted + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 53 | +total_taxes_and_charges |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Taxes and Charges + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 54 | +section_break_42 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Additional Discount + + | ++ |
| 55 | +apply_discount_on |
+ + Select | ++ Apply Additional Discount On + + | +
+ +Grand Total +Net Total+ |
+
| 56 | +base_discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 57 | +column_break_44 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 58 | +additional_discount_percentage |
+ + Float | ++ Additional Discount Percentage + + | ++ |
| 59 | +discount_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Discount Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 60 | +section_break_46 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 61 | +base_grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 62 | +base_in_words |
+ + Data | ++ In Words (Company Currency) + + | ++ |
| 63 | +base_rounded_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Rounded Total (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 64 | +column_break_50 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 65 | +grand_total |
+ + Currency | ++ Grand Total + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 66 | +in_words |
+ + Data | ++ In Words + + | ++ |
| 67 | +terms_section_break |
+ + Section Break | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | +
+ fa fa-legal+ |
+
| 68 | +tc_name |
+ + Link | ++ Terms + + | ++ + + + +Terms and Conditions + + + + | +
| 69 | +terms |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Terms and Conditions + + | ++ |
| 70 | +raw_material_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Raw Materials Supplied + + | +
+ fa fa-table+ |
+
| 71 | +is_subcontracted |
+ + Select | ++ Raw Materials Supplied + + | +
+ No +Yes+ |
+
| 72 | +supplier_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 73 | +supplied_items |
+ + Table | ++ Supplied Items + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Receipt Item Supplied + + + + | +
| 74 | +bill_no |
+ + Data | ++ Bill No + + | ++ |
| 75 | +bill_date |
+ + Date | ++ Bill Date + + | ++ |
| 76 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ fa fa-file-text+ |
+
| 77 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Draft +To Bill +Completed +Cancelled +Closed+ |
+
| 78 | +rejected_warehouse |
+ + Link | +
+ Rejected Warehouse
+ + Warehouse where you are maintaining stock of rejected items + |
+ + + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 79 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Receipt + + + + | +
| 80 | +range |
+ + Data | ++ Range + + | ++ |
| 81 | +column_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 82 | +per_billed |
+ + Percent | ++ % Amount Billed + + | ++ |
| 83 | +printing_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Printing Settings + + | ++ |
| 84 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 85 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 86 | +language |
+ + Data | ++ Print Language + + | ++ |
| 87 | +other_details |
+ + HTML | ++ Other Details + + | ++ |
| 88 | +instructions |
+ + Small Text | ++ Instructions + + | ++ |
| 89 | +remarks |
+ + Small Text | ++ Remarks + + | ++ |
| 90 | +transporter_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Transporter Details + + | +
+ fa fa-truck+ |
+
| 91 | +transporter_name |
+ + Data | ++ Transporter Name + + | ++ |
| 92 | +column_break5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 93 | +lr_no |
+ + Data | ++ Vehicle Number + + | ++ |
| 94 | +lr_date |
+ + Date | ++ Vehicle Date + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.stock.doctype.purchase_receipt.purchase_receipt
+ + + + + + + +Class PurchaseReceipt
+ +Inherits from erpnext.controllers.buying_controller.BuyingController + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_for_closed_status + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_next_docstatus + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_already_received_qty + (self, po, po_detail) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_current_stock + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_gl_entries + (self, warehouse_account=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_po_qty_and_warehouse + (self, po_detail) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + po_required + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_billing_status + (self, update_modified=True) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_status + (self, status) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_with_previous_doc + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.purchase_receipt.purchase_receipt.get_invoiced_qty_map + (purchase_receipt) +
+returns a map: {prdetail: invoicedqty}
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.purchase_receipt.purchase_receipt.make_purchase_invoice
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.purchase_receipt.purchase_receipt.make_purchase_invoice + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.purchase_receipt.purchase_receipt.make_purchase_return
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.purchase_receipt.purchase_receipt.make_purchase_return + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.purchase_receipt.purchase_receipt.update_billed_amount_based_on_po + (po_detail, update_modified=True) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.purchase_receipt.purchase_receipt.update_purchase_receipt_status
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.purchase_receipt.purchase_receipt.update_purchase_receipt_status + (docname, status) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Purchase Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Entry + + + + +
Purchase Receipt Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabPurchase Receipt Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +barcode |
+ + Data | ++ Barcode + + | ++ |
| 2 | +section_break_2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 4 | +column_break_2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 6 | +section_break_4 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 7 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 8 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 10 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 11 | +received_and_accepted |
+ + Section Break | ++ Received and Accepted + + | ++ |
| 12 | +received_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Recd Quantity + + | ++ |
| 13 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Accepted Quantity + + | ++ |
| 14 | +rejected_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Rejected Quantity + + | ++ |
| 15 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 16 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 17 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 18 | +conversion_factor |
+ + Float | ++ Conversion Factor + + | ++ |
| 19 | +rate_and_amount |
+ + Section Break | ++ Rate and Amount + + | ++ |
| 20 | +price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 21 | +discount_percentage |
+ + Percent | ++ Discount on Price List Rate (%) + + | ++ |
| 22 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +base_price_list_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Price List Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 24 | +sec_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 26 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 27 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +base_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 29 | +base_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 30 | +pricing_rule |
+ + Link | ++ Pricing Rule + + | ++ + + + +Pricing Rule + + + + | +
| 31 | +section_break_29 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 32 | +net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 33 | +net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount + + | +
+ currency+ |
+
| 34 | +column_break_32 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 35 | +base_net_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Rate (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 36 | +base_net_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Net Amount (Company Currency) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 37 | +warehouse_and_reference |
+ + Section Break | ++ Warehouse and Reference + + | ++ |
| 38 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Accepted Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 39 | +rejected_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Rejected Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 40 | +quality_inspection |
+ + Link | ++ Quality Inspection + + | ++ + + + +Quality Inspection + + + + | +
| 41 | +column_break_40 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 42 | +purchase_order |
+ + Link | ++ Purchase Order + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Order + + + + | +
| 43 | +schedule_date |
+ + Date | ++ Required By + + | ++ |
| 44 | +stock_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty as per Stock UOM + + | ++ |
| 45 | +section_break_45 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 46 | +serial_no |
+ + Small Text | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
| 47 | +batch_no |
+ + Link | ++ Batch No + + | ++ + + + +Batch + + + + | +
| 48 | +column_break_48 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 49 | +rejected_serial_no |
+ + Small Text | ++ Rejected Serial No + + | ++ |
| 50 | +section_break_50 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 51 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 52 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 53 | +purchase_order_item |
+ + Data | ++ Purchase Order Item + + | ++ |
| 54 | +col_break5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 55 | +allow_zero_valuation_rate |
+ + Check | ++ Allow Zero Valuation Rate + + | ++ |
| 56 | +bom |
+ + Link | ++ BOM + + | ++ + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 57 | +billed_amt |
+ + Currency | ++ Billed Amt + + | ++ |
| 58 | +landed_cost_voucher_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Landed Cost Voucher Amount + + | ++ |
| 59 | +brand |
+ + Link | ++ Brand + + | ++ + + + +Brand + + + + | +
| 60 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 61 | +rm_supp_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Raw Materials Supplied Cost + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 62 | +item_tax_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Item Tax Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 63 | +valuation_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Valuation Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 64 | +item_tax_rate |
+ + Code | +
+ Item Tax Rate
+ + Tax detail table fetched from item master as a string and stored in this field. +Used for Taxes and Charges + |
+ + |
| 65 | +page_break |
+ + Check | ++ Page Break + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Purchase Receipt + + + +
Quality Inspection
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabQuality Inspection
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ QI-+ |
+
| 2 | +report_date |
+ + Date | ++ Report Date + + | ++ |
| 3 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +inspection_type |
+ + Select | ++ Inspection Type + + | +
+ +Incoming +Outgoing +In Process+ |
+
| 5 | +reference_type |
+ + Select | ++ Reference Type + + | +
+ +Purchase Receipt +Purchase Invoice +Delivery Note +Sales Invoice+ |
+
| 6 | +reference_name |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Reference Name + + | +
+ reference_type+ |
+
| 7 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 9 | +item_serial_no |
+ + Link | ++ Item Serial No + + | ++ + + + +Serial No + + + + | +
| 10 | +batch_no |
+ + Link | ++ Batch No + + | ++ + + + +Batch + + + + | +
| 11 | +sample_size |
+ + Float | ++ Sample Size + + | ++ |
| 12 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 14 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 15 | +section_break_14 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 16 | +inspected_by |
+ + Link | ++ Inspected By + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
| 17 | +verified_by |
+ + Data | ++ Verified By + + | ++ |
| 18 | +column_break_17 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +remarks |
+ + Text | ++ Remarks + + | ++ |
| 20 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Quality Inspection + + + + | +
| 21 | +specification_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 22 | +get_specification_details |
+ + Button | ++ Get Specification Details + + | +
+ get_item_specification_details+ |
+
| 23 | +readings |
+ + Table | ++ Readings + + | ++ + + + +Quality Inspection Reading + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.stock.doctype.quality_inspection.quality_inspection
+ + + + + + + +Class QualityInspection
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + get_item_specification_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.quality_inspection.quality_inspection.item_query + (doctype, txt, searchfield, start, page_len, filters) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Delivery Note Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt Item + + + + + +
- + + +Quality Inspection + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice Item + + + + +
Quality Inspection Reading
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabQuality Inspection Reading
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +specification |
+ + Data | ++ Parameter + + | ++ |
| 2 | +value |
+ + Data | ++ Acceptance Criteria + + | ++ |
| 3 | +reading_1 |
+ + Data | ++ Reading 1 + + | ++ |
| 4 | +reading_2 |
+ + Data | ++ Reading 2 + + | ++ |
| 5 | +reading_3 |
+ + Data | ++ Reading 3 + + | ++ |
| 6 | +reading_4 |
+ + Data | ++ Reading 4 + + | ++ |
| 7 | +reading_5 |
+ + Data | ++ Reading 5 + + | ++ |
| 8 | +reading_6 |
+ + Data | ++ Reading 6 + + | ++ |
| 9 | +reading_7 |
+ + Data | ++ Reading 7 + + | ++ |
| 10 | +reading_8 |
+ + Data | ++ Reading 8 + + | ++ |
| 11 | +reading_9 |
+ + Data | ++ Reading 9 + + | ++ |
| 12 | +reading_10 |
+ + Data | ++ Reading 10 + + | ++ |
| 13 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Accepted +Rejected+ |
+
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Quality Inspection + + + +
Serial No
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSerial No
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +details |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +serial_no |
+ + Data | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
| 4 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 5 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | +
+ Warehouse
+ + Warehouse can only be changed via Stock Entry / Delivery Note / Purchase Receipt + |
+ + + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 6 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 8 | +description |
+ + Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 9 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 10 | +brand |
+ + Link | ++ Brand + + | ++ + + + +Brand + + + + | +
| 11 | +purchase_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Purchase / Manufacture Details + + | ++ |
| 12 | +column_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +purchase_document_type |
+ + Link | ++ Creation Document Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 14 | +purchase_document_no |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Creation Document No + + | +
+ purchase_document_type+ |
+
| 15 | +purchase_date |
+ + Date | ++ Creation Date + + | ++ |
| 16 | +purchase_time |
+ + Time | ++ Creation Time + + | ++ |
| 17 | +purchase_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Incoming Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 18 | +column_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 19 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 20 | +supplier_name |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Name + + | ++ |
| 21 | +delivery_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Delivery Details + + | ++ |
| 22 | +delivery_document_type |
+ + Link | ++ Delivery Document Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 23 | +delivery_document_no |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Delivery Document No + + | +
+ delivery_document_type+ |
+
| 24 | +delivery_date |
+ + Date | ++ Delivery Date + + | ++ |
| 25 | +delivery_time |
+ + Time | ++ Delivery Time + + | ++ |
| 26 | +is_cancelled |
+ + Select | ++ Is Cancelled + + | +
+ +Yes +No+ |
+
| 27 | +column_break5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 28 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 29 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ |
| 30 | +invoice_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Invoice Details + + | ++ |
| 31 | +sales_invoice |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Invoice + + | ++ + + + +Sales Invoice + + + + | +
| 32 | +warranty_amc_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Warranty / AMC Details + + | ++ |
| 33 | +column_break6 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 34 | +maintenance_status |
+ + Select | ++ Maintenance Status + + | +
+ +Under Warranty +Out of Warranty +Under AMC +Out of AMC+ |
+
| 35 | +warranty_period |
+ + Int | ++ Warranty Period (Days) + + | ++ |
| 36 | +column_break7 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 37 | +warranty_expiry_date |
+ + Date | ++ Warranty Expiry Date + + | ++ |
| 38 | +amc_expiry_date |
+ + Date | ++ AMC Expiry Date + + | ++ |
| 39 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | ++ |
| 40 | +serial_no_details |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Serial No Details + + | ++ |
| 41 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.stock.doctype.serial_no.serial_no
+ + + + + + + +Class SerialNo
+ +Inherits from erpnext.controllers.stock_controller.StockController + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + after_rename + (self, old, new, merge=False) +
+rename serial_no text fields
++ + + + + +
+ + + before_rename + (self, old, new, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_last_sle + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_stock_ledger_entries + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_stock_ledger_entry + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_maintenance_status + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_purchase_details + (self, purchase_sle) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_sales_details + (self, delivery_sle) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_item + (self) +
+ Validate whether serial no is required for this item
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_warehouse + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + +
Class SerialNoCannotCannotChangeError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class SerialNoCannotCreateDirectError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class SerialNoDuplicateError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class SerialNoItemError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class SerialNoNotExistsError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class SerialNoNotRequiredError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class SerialNoQtyError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class SerialNoRequiredError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class SerialNoWarehouseError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.serial_no.serial_no.allow_serial_nos_with_different_item + (sle_serial_no, sle) +
+ Allows same serial nos for raw materials and finished goods
+ in Manufacture / Repack type Stock Entry
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.serial_no.serial_no.get_delivery_note_serial_no + (item_code, qty, delivery_note) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.serial_no.serial_no.get_item_details + (item_code) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.serial_no.serial_no.get_serial_nos + (serial_no) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.serial_no.serial_no.make_serial_no + (serial_no, sle) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.serial_no.serial_no.process_serial_no + (sle) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.serial_no.serial_no.update_maintenance_status + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.serial_no.serial_no.update_serial_nos + (sle, item_det) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.serial_no.serial_no.update_serial_nos_after_submit + (controller, parentfield) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.serial_no.serial_no.validate_serial_no + (sle, item_det) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Quality Inspection + + + + + +
- + + +Warranty Claim + + + + +
Stock Entry
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabStock Entry
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +items_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 2 | +title |
+ + Data | ++ Title + + | ++ |
| 3 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ STE-+ |
+
| 4 | +purpose |
+ + Select | ++ Purpose + + | +
+ Material Issue +Material Receipt +Material Transfer +Material Transfer for Manufacture +Manufacture +Repack +Subcontract+ |
+
| 5 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 6 | +production_order |
+ + Link | ++ Production Order + + | ++ + + + +Production Order + + + + | +
| 7 | +purchase_order |
+ + Link | ++ Purchase Order + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Order + + + + | +
| 8 | +delivery_note_no |
+ + Link | ++ Delivery Note No + + | ++ + + + +Delivery Note + + + + | +
| 9 | +sales_invoice_no |
+ + Link | ++ Sales Invoice No + + | ++ + + + +Sales Invoice + + + + | +
| 10 | +purchase_receipt_no |
+ + Link | ++ Purchase Receipt No + + | ++ + + + +Purchase Receipt + + + + | +
| 11 | +from_bom |
+ + Check | ++ From BOM + + | ++ |
| 12 | +col2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 14 | +posting_time |
+ + Time | ++ Posting Time + + | ++ |
| 15 | +set_posting_time |
+ + Check | ++ Edit Posting Date and Time + + | ++ |
| 16 | +sb1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 17 | +bom_no |
+ + Link | ++ BOM No + + | ++ + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 18 | +fg_completed_qty |
+ + Float | +
+ For Quantity
+ + As per Stock UOM + |
+ + |
| 19 | +cb1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 20 | +use_multi_level_bom |
+ + Check | +
+ Use Multi-Level BOM
+ + Including items for sub assemblies + |
+ + |
| 21 | +get_items |
+ + Button | ++ Get Items + + | ++ |
| 22 | +section_break_12 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +from_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Default Source Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 24 | +cb0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 25 | +to_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Default Target Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 26 | +sb0 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 27 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Stock Entry Detail + + + + | +
| 28 | +get_stock_and_rate |
+ + Button | ++ Update Rate and Availability + + | +
+ get_stock_and_rate+ |
+
| 29 | +section_break_19 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 30 | +total_incoming_value |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Incoming Value + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 31 | +column_break_22 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 32 | +total_outgoing_value |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Outgoing Value + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 33 | +value_difference |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Value Difference (Out - In) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 34 | +additional_costs_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Additional Costs + + | ++ |
| 35 | +additional_costs |
+ + Table | ++ Additional Costs + + | ++ + + + +Landed Cost Taxes and Charges + + + + | +
| 36 | +total_additional_costs |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Additional Costs + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 37 | +contact_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Customer or Supplier Details + + | ++ |
| 38 | +supplier |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier + + | ++ + + + +Supplier + + + + | +
| 39 | +supplier_name |
+ + Data | ++ Supplier Name + + | ++ |
| 40 | +supplier_address |
+ + Link | ++ Supplier Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 41 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 42 | +column_break_39 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 43 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 44 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ |
| 45 | +customer_address |
+ + Small Text | ++ Customer Address + + | ++ |
| 46 | +printing_settings |
+ + Section Break | ++ Printing Settings + + | ++ |
| 47 | +select_print_heading |
+ + Link | ++ Print Heading + + | ++ + + + +Print Heading + + + + | +
| 48 | +letter_head |
+ + Link | ++ Letter Head + + | ++ + + + +Letter Head + + + + | +
| 49 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | ++ |
| 50 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 51 | +remarks |
+ + Text | ++ Remarks + + | ++ |
| 52 | +col5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 53 | +total_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Total Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 54 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Stock Entry + + + + | +
| 55 | +credit_note |
+ + Link | ++ Credit Note + + | ++ + + + +Journal Entry + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_entry.stock_entry
+ + + + + + + +Class DuplicateEntryForProductionOrderError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class IncorrectValuationRateError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class OperationsNotCompleteError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class StockEntry
+ +Inherits from erpnext.controllers.stock_controller.StockController + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + add_to_stock_entry_detail + (self, item_dict, bom_no=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + calculate_rate_and_amount + (self, force=False, update_finished_item_rate=True) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_duplicate_entry_for_production_order + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_if_operations_completed + (self) +
+Check if Time Sheets are completed against before manufacturing to capture operating costs.
++ + + + + +
+ + + distribute_additional_costs + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_bom_raw_materials + (self, qty) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_bom_scrap_material + (self, qty) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_gl_entries + (self, warehouse_account) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_item_details + (self, args=None, for_update=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_pending_raw_materials + (self) +
+ issue (item quantity) that is pending to issue or desire to transfer,
+ whichever is less
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_pro_order_required_items + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_stock_and_rate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_transfered_raw_materials + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + load_items_from_bom + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + onload + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_actual_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_basic_rate + (self, force=False, update_finished_item_rate=True) +
+get stock and incoming rate on posting date
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_basic_rate_for_finished_goods + (self, raw_material_cost, scrap_material_cost) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_production_order_details + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_serial_nos + (self, production_order) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_total_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_total_incoming_outgoing_value + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_transfer_qty + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_production_order + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_stock_ledger + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_valuation_rate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_batch + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_bom + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_finished_goods + (self) +
+validation: finished good quantity should be same as manufacturing quantity
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_item + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_production_order + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_purchase_order + (self) +
+Throw exception if more raw material is transferred against Purchase Order than in + the raw materials supplied table
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_purpose + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_warehouse + (self) +
+perform various (sometimes conditional) validations on warehouse
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_with_material_request + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_entry.stock_entry.get_additional_costs + (production_order=None, bom_no=None, fg_qty=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_entry.stock_entry.get_operating_cost_per_unit + (production_order=None, bom_no=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_entry.stock_entry.get_production_order_details
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_entry.stock_entry.get_production_order_details + (production_order) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_entry.stock_entry.get_uom_details
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_entry.stock_entry.get_uom_details + (item_code, uom, qty) +
+Returns dict {"conversion_factor": [value], "transfer_qty": qty * [value]}
Parameters:
+ +-
+
args- dict withitem_code,uomandqty
+
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_entry.stock_entry.get_warehouse_details
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_entry.stock_entry.get_warehouse_details + (args) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Journal Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Entry + + + + +
Stock Entry Detail
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabStock Entry Detail
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +barcode |
+ + Data | ++ Barcode + + | ++ |
| 2 | +section_break_2 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 3 | +s_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Source Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 4 | +col_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +t_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Target Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 6 | +sec_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 8 | +col_break2 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 10 | +section_break_8 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 11 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 12 | +column_break_10 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +image |
+ + Attach | ++ Image + + | ++ |
| 14 | +image_view |
+ + Image | ++ Image View + + | +
+ image+ |
+
| 15 | +quantity_and_rate |
+ + Section Break | ++ Quantity and Rate + + | ++ |
| 16 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty + + | ++ |
| 17 | +basic_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Basic Rate (as per Stock UOM) + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 18 | +basic_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Basic Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 19 | +additional_cost |
+ + Currency | ++ Additional Cost + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 20 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 21 | +valuation_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Valuation Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 22 | +col_break3 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 24 | +conversion_factor |
+ + Float | ++ Conversion Factor + + | ++ |
| 25 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 26 | +transfer_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Qty as per Stock UOM + + | ++ |
| 27 | +serial_no_batch |
+ + Section Break | ++ Serial No / Batch + + | ++ |
| 28 | +serial_no |
+ + Small Text | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
| 29 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 30 | +batch_no |
+ + Link | ++ Batch No + + | ++ + + + +Batch + + + + | +
| 31 | +accounting |
+ + Section Break | ++ Accounting + + | ++ |
| 32 | +expense_account |
+ + Link | ++ Difference Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 33 | +col_break5 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 34 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 35 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | ++ |
| 36 | +allow_zero_valuation_rate |
+ + Check | ++ Allow Zero Valuation Rate + + | ++ |
| 37 | +actual_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Actual Qty (at source/target) + + | ++ |
| 38 | +bom_no |
+ + Link | +
+ BOM No
+ + BOM No. for a Finished Good Item + |
+ + + + + +BOM + + + + | +
| 39 | +col_break6 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 40 | +material_request |
+ + Link | +
+ Material Request
+ + Material Request used to make this Stock Entry + |
+ + + + + +Material Request + + + + | +
| 41 | +material_request_item |
+ + Link | ++ Material Request Item + + | ++ + + + +Material Request Item + + + + | +
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Stock Entry + + + +
Stock Ledger Entry
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabStock Ledger Entry
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 2 | +serial_no |
+ + Text | ++ Serial No + + | ++ |
| 3 | +batch_no |
+ + Data | ++ Batch No + + | ++ |
| 4 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 5 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 6 | +posting_time |
+ + Time | ++ Posting Time + + | ++ |
| 7 | +voucher_type |
+ + Link | ++ Voucher Type + + | ++ + + + +DocType + + + + | +
| 8 | +voucher_no |
+ + Dynamic Link | ++ Voucher No + + | +
+ voucher_type+ |
+
| 9 | +voucher_detail_no |
+ + Data | ++ Voucher Detail No + + | ++ |
| 10 | +actual_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Actual Quantity + + | ++ |
| 11 | +incoming_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Incoming Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 12 | +outgoing_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Outgoing Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 13 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 14 | +qty_after_transaction |
+ + Float | ++ Actual Qty After Transaction + + | ++ |
| 15 | +valuation_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Valuation Rate + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 16 | +stock_value |
+ + Currency | ++ Stock Value + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 17 | +stock_value_difference |
+ + Currency | ++ Stock Value Difference + + | +
+ Company:company:default_currency+ |
+
| 18 | +stock_queue |
+ + Text | ++ Stock Queue (FIFO) + + | ++ |
| 19 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 20 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 21 | +fiscal_year |
+ + Data | ++ Fiscal Year + + | ++ |
| 22 | +is_cancelled |
+ + Select | ++ Is Cancelled + + | +
+ +No +Yes+ |
+
+
Controller
+erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_ledger_entry.stock_ledger_entry
+ + + + + + + +Class StockFreezeError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class StockLedgerEntry
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + actual_amt_check + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + block_transactions_against_group_warehouse + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_stock_frozen_date + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + scrub_posting_time + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_and_set_fiscal_year + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_batch + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_item + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_mandatory + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_ledger_entry.stock_ledger_entry.on_doctype_update + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/stock/stock_reconciliation.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/stock/stock_reconciliation.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d5ba2321 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/stock/stock_reconciliation.html @@ -0,0 +1,612 @@ + + + + + + + +
Stock Reconciliation
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabStock Reconciliation
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ SR/+ |
+
| 2 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 3 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Stock Reconciliation + + + + | +
| 4 | +col1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +posting_date |
+ + Date | ++ Posting Date + + | ++ |
| 6 | +posting_time |
+ + Time | ++ Posting Time + + | ++ |
| 7 | +set_posting_time |
+ + Check | ++ Edit Posting Date and Time + + | ++ |
| 8 | +sb9 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +items |
+ + Table | ++ Items + + | ++ + + + +Stock Reconciliation Item + + + + | +
| 10 | +section_break_9 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 11 | +expense_account |
+ + Link | ++ Difference Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 12 | +cost_center |
+ + Link | ++ Cost Center + + | ++ + + + +Cost Center + + + + | +
| 13 | +reconciliation_json |
+ + Long Text | ++ Reconciliation JSON + + | ++ |
| 14 | +column_break_13 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +difference_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Difference Amount + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_reconciliation.stock_reconciliation
+ + + + + + + +Class EmptyStockReconciliationItemsError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class OpeningEntryAccountError
+ +Inherits from frappe.exceptions.ValidationError + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + +
Class StockReconciliation
+ +Inherits from erpnext.controllers.stock_controller.StockController + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + __init__ + (self, arg1, arg2=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + delete_and_repost_sle + (self) +
+Delete Stock Ledger Entries related to this voucher
+ and repost future Stock Ledger Entries
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_gl_entries + (self, warehouse_account=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_items_for + (self, warehouse) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + insert_entries + (self, row) +
+Insert Stock Ledger Entries
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + remove_items_with_no_change + (self) +
+Remove items if qty or rate is not changed
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_total_qty_and_amount + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + submit + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_stock_ledger + (self) +
+find difference between current and expected entries
+ and create stock ledger entries based on the difference
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_data + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_expense_account + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate_item + (self, item_code, row_num) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_reconciliation.stock_reconciliation.get_items
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_reconciliation.stock_reconciliation.get_items + (warehouse, posting_date, posting_time) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_reconciliation.stock_reconciliation.get_stock_balance_for
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_reconciliation.stock_reconciliation.get_stock_balance_for + (item_code, warehouse, posting_date, posting_time) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Stock Reconciliation + + + + +
Stock Reconciliation Item
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabStock Reconciliation Item
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +barcode |
+ + Data | ++ Barcode + + | ++ |
| 2 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 3 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 4 | +warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 5 | +column_break_6 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +qty |
+ + Float | ++ Quantity + + | ++ |
| 7 | +valuation_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Valuation Rate + + | ++ |
| 8 | +amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount + + | ++ |
| 9 | +section_break_3 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Before reconciliation + + | ++ |
| 10 | +current_qty |
+ + Float | ++ Current Qty + + | ++ |
| 11 | +column_break_9 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +current_valuation_rate |
+ + Currency | ++ Current Valuation Rate + + | ++ |
| 13 | +current_amount |
+ + Currency | ++ Current Amount + + | ++ |
| 14 | +section_break_14 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 15 | +quantity_difference |
+ + Read Only | ++ Quantity Difference + + | ++ |
| 16 | +column_break_16 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 17 | +amount_difference |
+ + Currency | ++ Amount Difference + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Stock Reconciliation + + + +
Stock Settings
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+Settings
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +item_naming_by |
+ + Select | ++ Item Naming By + + | +
+ Item Code +Naming Series+ |
+
| 2 | +item_group |
+ + Link | ++ Default Item Group + + | ++ + + + +Item Group + + + + | +
| 3 | +stock_uom |
+ + Link | ++ Default Stock UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 4 | +default_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Default Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 5 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +valuation_method |
+ + Select | ++ Default Valuation Method + + | +
+ FIFO +Moving Average+ |
+
| 7 | +tolerance |
+ + Float | +
+ Limit Percent
+ + Percentage you are allowed to receive or deliver more against the quantity ordered. For example: If you have ordered 100 units. and your Allowance is 10% then you are allowed to receive 110 units. + |
+ + |
| 8 | +show_barcode_field |
+ + Check | ++ Show Barcode Field + + | ++ |
| 9 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 10 | +auto_insert_price_list_rate_if_missing |
+ + Check | ++ Auto insert Price List rate if missing + + | ++ |
| 11 | +allow_negative_stock |
+ + Check | ++ Allow Negative Stock + + | ++ |
| 12 | +column_break_10 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +automatically_set_serial_nos_based_on_fifo |
+ + Check | ++ Automatically Set Serial Nos based on FIFO + + | ++ |
| 14 | +auto_material_request |
+ + Section Break | ++ Auto Material Request + + | ++ |
| 15 | +auto_indent |
+ + Check | ++ Raise Material Request when stock reaches re-order level + + | ++ |
| 16 | +reorder_email_notify |
+ + Check | ++ Notify by Email on creation of automatic Material Request + + | ++ |
| 17 | +freeze_stock_entries |
+ + Section Break | ++ Freeze Stock Entries + + | ++ |
| 18 | +stock_frozen_upto |
+ + Date | ++ Stock Frozen Upto + + | ++ |
| 19 | +stock_frozen_upto_days |
+ + Int | ++ Freeze Stocks Older Than [Days] + + | ++ |
| 20 | +stock_auth_role |
+ + Link | ++ Role Allowed to edit frozen stock + + | ++ + + + +Role + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.stock.doctype.stock_settings.stock_settings
+ + + + + + + +Class StockSettings
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + cant_change_valuation_method + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/stock/uom_conversion_detail.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/stock/uom_conversion_detail.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e7e5459c --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/stock/uom_conversion_detail.html @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + +
UOM Conversion Detail
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+Child Table
+
+
+ Table Name: tabUOM Conversion Detail
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +uom |
+ + Link | ++ UOM + + | ++ + + + +UOM + + + + | +
| 2 | +conversion_factor |
+ + Float | ++ Conversion Factor + + | ++ |
Child Table Of
+-
+
+
- + + +Item + + + +
Warehouse
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabWarehouse
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +warehouse_detail |
+ + Section Break | ++ Warehouse Detail + + | ++ |
| 2 | +warehouse_name |
+ + Data | ++ Warehouse Name + + | ++ |
| 3 | +is_group |
+ + Check | ++ Is Group + + | ++ |
| 4 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 5 | +disabled |
+ + Check | ++ Disabled + + | ++ |
| 6 | +column_break_4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 7 | +account |
+ + Link | ++ Account + + | ++ + + + +Account + + + + | +
| 8 | +warehouse_contact_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Warehouse Contact Info + + | ++ |
| 9 | +email_id |
+ + Data | ++ Email Address + + | ++ |
| 10 | +phone_no |
+ + Data | ++ Phone No + + | +
+ Phone+ |
+
| 11 | +mobile_no |
+ + Data | ++ Mobile No + + | +
+ Phone+ |
+
| 12 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 13 | +address_line_1 |
+ + Data | ++ Address Line 1 + + | ++ |
| 14 | +address_line_2 |
+ + Data | ++ Address Line 2 + + | ++ |
| 15 | +city |
+ + Data | ++ City + + | ++ |
| 16 | +state |
+ + Data | ++ State + + | ++ |
| 17 | +pin |
+ + Data | ++ PIN + + | ++ |
| 18 | +tree_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Tree Details + + | ++ |
| 19 | +parent_warehouse |
+ + Link | ++ Parent Warehouse + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
| 20 | +lft |
+ + Int | ++ lft + + | ++ |
| 21 | +rgt |
+ + Int | ++ rgt + + | ++ |
| 22 | +old_parent |
+ + Link | ++ Old Parent + + | ++ + + + +Warehouse + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.stock.doctype.warehouse.warehouse
+ + + + + + + +Class Warehouse
+ +Inherits from frappe.utils.nestedset.NestedSet + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + after_rename + (self, old_name, new_name, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + autoname + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + before_rename + (self, old_name, new_name, merge=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_if_child_exists + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + check_if_sle_exists + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + convert_to_group + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + convert_to_group_or_ledger + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + convert_to_ledger + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + get_new_warehouse_name_without_abbr + (self, name) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_trash + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + onload + (self) +
+load account name for General Ledger Report
++ + + + + +
+ + + recalculate_bin_qty + (self, new_name) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_nsm_model + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.warehouse.warehouse.add_node
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.warehouse.warehouse.add_node + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.warehouse.warehouse.convert_to_group_or_ledger
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.warehouse.warehouse.convert_to_group_or_ledger + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.stock.doctype.warehouse.warehouse.get_children
+
+ + + erpnext.stock.doctype.warehouse.warehouse.get_children + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Asset + + + + + +
- + + +Asset Movement + + + + + +
- + + +Bin + + + + + +
- + + +BOM Explosion Item + + + + + +
- + + +BOM Item + + + + + +
- + + +Delivery Note + + + + + +
- + + +Delivery Note Item + + + + + +
- + + +Item + + + + + +
- + + +Item Reorder + + + + + +
- + + +Manufacturing Settings + + + + + +
- + + +Material Request Item + + + + + +
- + + +Packed Item + + + + + +
- + + +POS Profile + + + + + +
- + + +Production Order + + + + + +
- + + +Production Order Item + + + + + +
- + + +Production Plan Item + + + + + +
- + + +Production Planning Tool + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Invoice + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Order Item + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt + + + + + +
- + + +Purchase Receipt Item + + + + + +
- + + +Quotation Item + + + + + +
- + + +Request for Quotation Item + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Invoice Item + + + + + +
- + + +Sales Order Item + + + + + +
- + + +Serial No + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Entry Detail + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Ledger Entry + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Reconciliation Item + + + + + +
- + + +Stock Settings + + + + + +
- + + +Supplier Quotation Item + + + + + +
- + + +Warehouse + + + + +
Module support
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+DocTypes for support
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/support/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/support/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/support/issue.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/support/issue.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..81cd563d --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/support/issue.html @@ -0,0 +1,615 @@ + + + + + + + +Issue
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabIssue
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +subject_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Subject + + | +
+ fa fa-flag+ |
+
| 2 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ ISS-+ |
+
| 3 | +subject |
+ + Data | ++ Subject + + | ++ |
| 4 | +mins_to_first_response |
+ + Float | ++ Mins to First Response + + | ++ |
| 5 | +cb00 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 6 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ Open +Replied +Hold +Closed+ |
+
| 7 | +raised_by |
+ + Data | ++ Raised By (Email) + + | +
+ |
+
| 8 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 9 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Details + + | ++ |
| 10 | +description |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 11 | +column_break_9 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 12 | +resolution_date |
+ + Datetime | ++ Resolution Date + + | ++ |
| 13 | +first_responded_on |
+ + Datetime | ++ First Responded On + + | ++ |
| 14 | +additional_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Contact + + | +
+ fa fa-pushpin+ |
+
| 15 | +lead |
+ + Link | ++ Lead + + | ++ + + + +Lead + + + + | +
| 16 | +contact |
+ + Link | ++ Contact + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 17 | +column_break_16 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 18 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ |
| 19 | +project |
+ + Link | ++ Project + + | ++ + + + +Project + + + + | +
| 20 | +section_break_19 |
+ + Section Break | ++ Resolution + + | ++ |
| 21 | +resolution_details |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Resolution Details + + | ++ |
| 22 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 23 | +opening_date |
+ + Date | ++ Opening Date + + | ++ |
| 24 | +opening_time |
+ + Time | ++ Opening Time + + | ++ |
| 25 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 26 | +content_type |
+ + Data | ++ Content Type + + | ++ |
| 27 | +attachment |
+ + Attach | ++ Attachment + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.support.doctype.issue.issue
+ + + + + + + +Class Issue
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + set_lead_contact + (self, email_id) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + update_status + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.support.doctype.issue.issue.auto_close_tickets + () +
+auto close the replied support tickets after 7 days
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.support.doctype.issue.issue.get_issue_list + (doctype, txt, filters, limit_start, limit_page_length=20, order_by=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.support.doctype.issue.issue.get_list_context + (context=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + +
+ + + erpnext.support.doctype.issue.issue.has_website_permission + (doc, ptype, user, verbose=False) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.support.doctype.issue.issue.set_multiple_status
+
+ + + erpnext.support.doctype.issue.issue.set_multiple_status + (names, status) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.support.doctype.issue.issue.set_status
+
+ + + erpnext.support.doctype.issue.issue.set_status + (name, status) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/support/support_settings.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/support/support_settings.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..a536fb13 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/support/support_settings.html @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + +
Support Settings
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +close_issue_after_days |
+ + Int | +
+ Close Issue After Days
+ + Auto close Issue after 7 days + |
+ + |
+
Controller
+erpnext.support.doctype.support_settings.support_settings
+ + + + + + + +Class SupportSettings
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/support/warranty_claim.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/support/warranty_claim.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..c5f0b721 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/support/warranty_claim.html @@ -0,0 +1,734 @@ + + + + + + + +
Warranty Claim
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabWarranty Claim
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +naming_series |
+ + Select | ++ Series + + | +
+ CI-+ |
+
| 2 | +status |
+ + Select | ++ Status + + | +
+ +Open +Closed +Work In Progress +Cancelled+ |
+
| 3 | +complaint_date |
+ + Date | ++ Issue Date + + | ++ |
| 4 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 5 | +serial_no |
+ + Link | ++ Serial No + + | ++ + + + +Serial No + + + + | +
| 6 | +customer |
+ + Link | ++ Customer + + | ++ + + + +Customer + + + + | +
| 7 | +section_break_7 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 8 | +complaint |
+ + Text Editor | ++ Issue + + | ++ |
| 9 | +issue_details |
+ + Section Break | ++ Item and Warranty Details + + | +
+ fa fa-ticket+ |
+
| 10 | +item_code |
+ + Link | ++ Item Code + + | ++ + + + +Item + + + + | +
| 11 | +item_name |
+ + Data | ++ Item Name + + | ++ |
| 12 | +description |
+ + Small Text | ++ Description + + | ++ |
| 13 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 14 | +warranty_amc_status |
+ + Select | ++ Warranty / AMC Status + + | +
+ +Under Warranty +Out of Warranty +Under AMC +Out of AMC+ |
+
| 15 | +warranty_expiry_date |
+ + Date | ++ Warranty Expiry Date + + | ++ |
| 16 | +amc_expiry_date |
+ + Date | ++ AMC Expiry Date + + | ++ |
| 17 | +resolution_section |
+ + Section Break | ++ Resolution + + | +
+ fa fa-thumbs-up+ |
+
| 18 | +resolution_date |
+ + Datetime | ++ Resolution Date + + | ++ |
| 19 | +resolved_by |
+ + Link | ++ Resolved By + + | ++ + + + +User + + + + | +
| 20 | +resolution_details |
+ + Text | ++ Resolution Details + + | ++ |
| 21 | +contact_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ Customer Details + + | +
+ fa fa-bullhorn+ |
+
| 22 | +customer_name |
+ + Data | ++ Customer Name + + | ++ |
| 23 | +contact_person |
+ + Link | ++ Contact Person + + | ++ + + + +Contact + + + + | +
| 24 | +contact_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Contact + + | ++ |
| 25 | +contact_mobile |
+ + Data | ++ Mobile No + + | ++ |
| 26 | +contact_email |
+ + Data | ++ Contact Email + + | ++ |
| 27 | +territory |
+ + Link | ++ Territory + + | ++ + + + +Territory + + + + | +
| 28 | +customer_group |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Group + + | ++ + + + +Customer Group + + + + | +
| 29 | +col_break4 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 30 | +customer_address |
+ + Link | ++ Customer Address + + | ++ + + + +Address + + + + | +
| 31 | +address_display |
+ + Small Text | ++ Address + + | ++ |
| 32 | +service_address |
+ + Small Text | +
+ Service Address
+ + If different than customer address + |
+ + |
| 33 | +more_info |
+ + Section Break | ++ More Information + + | +
+ fa fa-file-text+ |
+
| 34 | +company |
+ + Link | ++ Company + + | ++ + + + +Company + + + + | +
| 35 | +col_break6 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 36 | +complaint_raised_by |
+ + Data | ++ Raised By + + | ++ |
| 37 | +from_company |
+ + Data | ++ From Company + + | ++ |
| 38 | +amended_from |
+ + Link | ++ Amended From + + | ++ + + + +Warranty Claim + + + + | +
+
Controller
+erpnext.support.doctype.warranty_claim.warranty_claim
+ + + + + + + +Class WarrantyClaim
+ +Inherits from erpnext.utilities.transaction_base.TransactionBase + +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + + + + +
+
+ + +
+ + + + get_feed + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_cancel + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + on_update + (self) +
+No docs
++ + + + + +
+ + + validate + (self) +
+No docs
++ + +
+ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.support.doctype.warranty_claim.warranty_claim.make_maintenance_visit
+
+ + + erpnext.support.doctype.warranty_claim.warranty_claim.make_maintenance_visit + (source_name, target_doc=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Linked In:
+-
+
+
+
- + + +Warranty Claim + + + + +
Module utilities
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+DocTypes for utilities
+ +{index} + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/utilities/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/utilities/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/utilities/rename_tool.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/utilities/rename_tool.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..19f0bc9f --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/utilities/rename_tool.html @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ + + + + + + + +Rename Tool
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+Single
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +select_doctype |
+ + Select | +
+ Select DocType
+ + Type of document to rename. + |
+ + |
| 2 | +file_to_rename |
+ + Attach | +
+ File to Rename
+ + Attach .csv file with two columns, one for the old name and one for the new name + |
+ + |
| 3 | +rename_log |
+ + HTML | ++ Rename Log + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.utilities.doctype.rename_tool.rename_tool
+ + + + + + + +Class RenameTool
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.utilities.doctype.rename_tool.rename_tool.get_doctypes
+
+ + + erpnext.utilities.doctype.rename_tool.rename_tool.get_doctypes + () +
+No docs
++ + + + + + +
Public API
+ /api/method/erpnext.utilities.doctype.rename_tool.rename_tool.upload
+
+ + + erpnext.utilities.doctype.rename_tool.rename_tool.upload + (select_doctype=None, rows=None) +
+No docs
++ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/current/models/utilities/sms_log.html b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/utilities/sms_log.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..7d14a9a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/current/models/utilities/sms_log.html @@ -0,0 +1,199 @@ + + + + + + + +
SMS Log
+
+
+
+ Version 8.5.4
+
+
+ Source
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ Table Name: tabSMS Log
Fields
+ +| Sr | +Fieldname | +Type | +Label | +Options | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | +sender_name |
+ + Data | ++ Sender Name + + | ++ |
| 2 | +sent_on |
+ + Date | ++ Sent On + + | ++ |
| 3 | +column_break0 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 4 | +message |
+ + Small Text | ++ Message + + | ++ |
| 5 | +sec_break1 |
+ + Section Break | ++ + + | +
+ Simple+ |
+
| 6 | +no_of_requested_sms |
+ + Int | ++ No of Requested SMS + + | ++ |
| 7 | +requested_numbers |
+ + Code | ++ Requested Numbers + + | ++ |
| 8 | +column_break1 |
+ + Column Break | ++ + + | ++ |
| 9 | +no_of_sent_sms |
+ + Int | ++ No of Sent SMS + + | ++ |
| 10 | +sent_to |
+ + Code | ++ Sent To + + | ++ |
+
Controller
+erpnext.utilities.doctype.sms_log.sms_log
+ + + + + + + +Class SMSLog
+ +Inherits from frappe.model.document.Document + +
+
+
+
+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/index.html b/foundation/www/docs/index.html new file mode 100644 index 00000000..b91f2c1d --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/index.html @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + +
ERP Made Simple
+ + +ERPNext User Guides and API References
+ + + +ERPNext is a fully featured ERP system designed for Small and Medium Sized +business. ERPNext covers a wide range of features including Accounting, CRM, +Inventory management, Selling, Purchasing, Manufacturing, Projects, HR & +Payroll, Website, E-Commerce and much more.
+ +ERPNext is based on the Frappe Framework is highly customizable and extendable. +You can create Custom Form, Fields, Scripts and can also create your own Apps +to extend ERPNext functionality.
+ +ERPNext is Open Source under the GNU General Public Licence v3 and has been +listed as one of the Best Open Source Softwares in the world by many online +blogs.
+ +Getting Started
+ +To install ERPNext on a server, you will need to install Frappe Bench.
+ +You can also start a free 30 day trial at https://erpnext.com
+ + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/__init__.py new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/index.md new file mode 100644 index 00000000..0d34620c --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ + +# User Manual and Videos + +Learn ERPNext by watching the user manual or training videos. + +1. [User Manual]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual) +1. [Help Videos]({{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn) diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f5c0c058 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +manual +videos diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/__init__.py new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/Beispiel/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/Beispiel/__init__.py new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/Beispiel/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/Beispiel/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/Beispiel/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/Beispiel/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/Beispiel/index.md new file mode 100644 index 00000000..f9a245f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/Beispiel/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ + +Hier steht die Übersetzung +Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/__init__.py new file mode 100644 index 00000000..e69de29b diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/_sidebar.json new file mode 100644 index 00000000..88f5aab5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/_sidebar.json @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +[ + { + "route": "/docs", + "title": "Docs Home" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/user", + "title": "User Guide" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/api", + "title": "Server API" + }, + { + "route": "/docs/current/models", + "title": "Models (Reference)" + }, + { + "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs", + "title": "Improve Docs" + } +] \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/contact.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/contact.md new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d966052a --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/contact.md @@ -0,0 +1,21 @@ + +# Kontakt +Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH + +Kontakte und Adressen werden in ERPNext separat abgespeichert, so dass Sie mehrere verschiedene Kontakte oder Adressen den Kunden und Lieferanten zuordnen können. + +Um einen neuen Kontakt zu erstellen, gehe Sie zu + +> CRM > Dokumente > Kontakt > Neu + +
+
+Alternativ können Sie einen Kontakt oder eine Adresse auch direkt aus dem Kundendatensatz erstellen. Klicken Sie hierzu auf "Neuer Kontakt" oder "Neue Adresse".
+
+
+
+> Tipp: Wenn Sie in einer beliebigen Transaktion einen Kunden auswählen, wird ein Kontakt und eine Adresse vorselektiert. Das sind dann der Standardkontakt und die Standardadresse.
+
+Wenn Sie mehrere verschiedene Kontakte und Adressen aus einer Tabelle importieren wollen, nutzen Sie bitte das Datenimport-Werkzeug.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/customer.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/customer.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..efa97729
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/customer.md
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+
+# Kunde
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Ein Kunde, manchmal auch als Auftraggeber, Käufer oder Besteller bezeichnet, ist diejenige Person, die von einem Verkäufer für eine monetäre Gegenleistung Waren, Dienstleistungen, Produkte oder Ideen bekommt. Ein Kunde kann von einem Hersteller oder Lieferanten auch aufgrund einer anderen (nicht monetären) Vergütung waren oder Dienstleistungen erhalten.
+
+Sie können Ihre Kunden entweder direkt erstellen über
+
+> CRM > Dokumente > Kunde > Neu
+
+
+
+oder einen Upload über ein Datenimportwerkzeug durchführen.
+
+> Anmerkung: Kunden werden von Kontakten und Adressen getrennt verwaltet. Ein Kunde kann mehrere verschiedene Kontakte und Adressen haben.
+
+### Kontakte und Adressen
+
+Kontakte und Adressen werden in ERPNext getrennt gespeichert, damit Sie mehrere verschiedene Kontakte oder Adressen mit Kunden und Lieferanten verknüpfen können.
+
+Lesen Sie hierzu auch [Kontakt]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/CRM/contact.html).
+
+### Einbindung in Konten
+
+In ERPNext gibt es für jeden Kunden und für jede Firma einen eigenen Kontodatensatz.
+
+Wenn Sie einen neuen Kunden anlegen, erstellt ERPNext automatisch im Kundendatensatz unter den Forderungskonten der Firma ein Kontenblatt für den Kunden.
+
+> Hinweis für Fortgeschrittene: Wenn Sie die Kontengruppe, unter der das Kundenkonto erstellt wurde, ändern wollen, können Sie das in den Firmenstammdaten einstellen.
+
+Wenn Sie in einer anderen Firma ein Konto erstellen wollen, ändern Sie einfach die Einstellung der Firma und speichern Sie den Kunden erneut.
+
+### Kundeneinstellungen
+
+Sie können eine Preisliste mit einem Kunden verknüpfen (wählen Sie hierzu "Standardpreisliste"), so dass die Preisliste automatisch aufgerufen wird, wenn Sie den Kunden auswählen.
+
+Sie können die Zieltage so einstellen, dass diese Einstellung automatisch in Ausgangsrechnungen an diesen Kunden verwendet wird. Zieltage können als festeingestellte Tage definiert werden oder als letzter Tag des nächsten Monats basierend auf dem Rechnungsdatum.
+
+Sie können einstellen, wieviel Ziel Sie für einen Kunden durch hinzufügen der "Kreditlinie" erlauben wollen. Sie können auch ein allgemeines Ziel-Limit in den Unternehmensstammdaten einstellen.
+
+### Kundenklassifizierung
+
+ERPNext erlaubt es Ihnen Ihre Kunden in Kundengruppen zu gruppieren und sie in Regionen aufzuteilen. Das Gruppieren hilft Ihnen bei der genaueren Auswertung Ihrer Daten und bei der Identifizierung welche Kunden gewinnbringend sind und welche nicht. Die Regionalisierung hilft Ihnen dabei, Ziele für genau diese Regionen festzulegen. Sie können auch Vertriebspersonen als Ansprechpartner für einen Kunden festlegen.
+
+### Vertriebspartner
+
+Ein Vertriebspartner ist ein Drittparteien-Großhändler, -händler, -kommissionär, -partner oder -wiederverkäufer, der die Produkte des Unternehmens für eine Provision verkauft. Diese Option ist dann sinnvoll, wenn Sie unter Zuhilfenahme eines Vertriebspartners an den Endkunden verkaufen.
+
+Wenn Sie an Ihren Vertriebspartner verkaufen, und dieser dann wiederum an den Endkunden, müssen Sie für den Vertriebspartner einen Kunden erstellen.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c8d51f4b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# CRM
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+ERPNext hilft Ihnen dabei Geschäftschancen aus Gelegenheiten und Kunden nachzuvollziehen und Angebote und Auftragsbestätigungen an Kunden zu senden.
+
+Das CRM-Modul stellt die Möglichkeit zur Verfügung, Gelegenheiten, Chancen und Kunden zu verwalten.
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c5648c6f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
+lead
+customer
+opportunity
+contact
+newsletter
+setup
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/lead.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/lead.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..48e8c7e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/lead.md
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+# Lead / Interessent
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Um den Kunden durch die Tür zu bekommen, könnten Sie alle oder zumindest einige der folgenden Dinge tun:
+
+* Ihre Produkte in Katalogen auflisten.
+* Eine aktuelle und durchsuchbare Webseite unterhalten.
+* Leute auf Handelsveranstaltungen treffen.
+* Ihre Ware oder Ihre Dienstleistung bewerben.
+
+Wenn Sie kundtun, dass Sie hier sind und etwas Wertvolles anzubieten haben, dann werden die Leute zu Ihnen kommen und die Produkte in Augenschein nehmen. Das sind Ihre Leads / Ihre potenziellen Interessenten.
+
+Sie werden Leads genannt, weil sie zu einem Kauf führen könnten. Vertriebsleute bearbeiten Leads normalerweise, indem sie telefonieren, eine Beziehung zum Kunden aufbauen und Informationen über Ihre Produkte und Dienstleistungen versenden. Es ist wichtig, diese Konversationen mitzuprotokollieren um andere Personen in die Lage zu versetzen, diesen Kontakt nach zu verfolgen. Die andere Person ist dann in der Lage sich die Historie dieses bestimmten Leads nahe zu bringen.
+
+Um einen Lead zu generieren, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> CRM > Dokumente > Lead > Neu
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/newsletter.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/newsletter.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..752d0287
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/newsletter.md
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+
+# Newsletter
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Ein Newsletter ist ein Bericht in Kurzform, der über die letzten Aktivitäten einer Organisation informiert. Er wird normalerweise an die Mitglieder der Organisation versandt, sowie an potenzielle Kunden und Leads.
+
+In ERPNext können sie diese Benutzerschnittstelle nutzen um eine große Zahl von Interessenten mit Informationen zu versorgen. Der Prozess eine Massen-E-Mail an ein Zielpublikum zusenden ist sehr einfach.
+
+Wählen Sie die Liste der Empfänger aus, an die Sie die E-Mail senden wollen. Tragen Sie Ihren Inhalt in das Nachrichtenfeld ein und versenden Sie den Newsletter. Wenn Sie die E-Mail vorher testen wollen, um zu sehen, wie sie für den Empfänger aussieht, können Sie die Testfunktion nutzen. Speichern Sie das Dokument vor dem Test. Eine Test-E-Mail wird dann an Ihr E-Mail-Konto gesendet. Sie können die E-Mail an alle vorgesehenen Empfänger senden, wenn Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Senden" klicken.
+
+
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/opportunity.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/opportunity.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1a3526b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/opportunity.md
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+
+# Opportunity
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Wenn Sie wissen, dass ein Lead auf der Suche nach neuen Produkten oder Dienstleistungen ist, dann bezeichnet man das als Opportunity.
+
+Sie können eine Opportunity erstellen über:
+
+> CRM > Dokumente > Opportunity > Neu
+
+Alternativ können Sie einen offenen Lead öffnen und auf die Schaltfläche "Opportunity ertstellen" cklicken.
+
+### Abbildung 1: Opportunity erstellen
+
+
+
+### Abbildung 2: Opportunity aus einem offenen Lead heraus erstellen
+
+
+
+Eine Opportunity kann auch aus einem bereits vorhandenen Kunden heraus entstehen. Sie können mehrere verschiedene Opportunities zum gleichen Lead erstellen. In einer Opportunity können Sie abgesehen von der Kommunikation auch die Artikel mit vermerken, nach denen der Lead oder Kontakt sucht.
+
+> Ein Tipp aus der Erfahrung heraus: Leads und Opportunities werden oft als Ihre "Vertriebspipeline" bezeichnet. Sie brauchen diese Option um vorhersehen zu können wieviel Geschäft in der Zukunft generiert werden kann. Es ist also immer eine gute Idee diese Daten festzuhalten um Ihre Resourcen an die Nachfrage anzupassen.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/campaign.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/campaign.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ae69f018
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/campaign.md
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+# Kampagne
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Eine Kampagne ist eine groß angelegte Umsetzung einer Vertriebsstrategie um ein Produkt oder eine Dienstleistung zu bewerben. Dies erfolgt in einem Marktsegment in einer bestimmten geographischen Region um bestimmte Ziele zu erreichen.
+
+
+
+Sie können in einer Kampagne [Leads]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/CRM/lead.html), [Opportunities]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/CRM/opportunity.html) und [Angebote]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/selling/quotation.html) nachverfolgen.
+
+### Leads zu einer Kampagne nachverfolgen
+
+* Um einen Lead zu einer Kampagne nach zu verfolgen, wählen Sie "Leads anzeigen" aus.
+
+
+
+* Sie sollten jetzt eine gefilterte Übersicht aller Leads erhalten, die zu dieser Kampagne gehören.
+* Sie können auch einen neuen Lead erstellen indem Sie auf "Neu" klicken.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/customer-group.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/customer-group.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6ddf49b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/customer-group.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+# Kundengruppe
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Kundengruppen versetzen Sie in die Lage Ihre Kunden zu organisieren. Sie können auch Rabatte auf der Basis von Kundengruppen berechnen. Außerdem können Sie Trendanalysen für jede Gruppe erstellen. Typischerweise werden Kunden nach Marktsegmenten gruppiert (das basiert normalerweise auf Ihrer Domäne).
+
+
+
+> Tipp: Wenn Sie der Meinung sind, dass hier zu viel Aufwand getrieben wird, dann können Sie es bei einer Standard-Kundengruppe belassen. Aber der gesamte Aufwand wird sich dann auszahlen, wenn Sie die ersten Berichte erhalten. Ein Beispiel eines Berichts ist unten abgebildet.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3b7c573d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
+# Einrichtung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9db83cf7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+campaign
+customer-group
+sales-person
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/sales-person.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/sales-person.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..770747d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/CRM/setup/sales-person.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+# Vertriebsmitarbeiter
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Vertriebsmitarbeiter verhalten sich wie Regionen. Sie können ein Organigramm der Vertriebsmitarbeiter erstellen, in dem individuell das Vertriebsziel des Vertriebsmitarbeiters vermerkt werden kann. Genauso wie in der Region muss das Ziel einer Artikelgruppe zugeordnet werden.
+
+
+
+### Vertriebspersonen in Transaktionen
+
+Sie können einen Vertriebsmitarbeiter wie im Kundenauftrag, dem Lieferschein und der Ausgangsrechnung in Kunden- und Verkaufstransaktionen nutzen. Klicken Sie hier, um mehr darüber zu erfahren, wie Vertriebsmitarbeiter in den Transaktionen eines Verkaufszyklus verwendet werden.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/accounting-entries.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/accounting-entries.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c26043ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/accounting-entries.md
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+
+# Buchungen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Das Konzept der Buchführung erklärt sich über unten angeführtes Beispiel: Wir nehmen die Firma "Tealaden" als Beispiel und sehen uns an, wie Buchungen für die Geschäftstätigkeiten erstellt werden.
+
+* Max Mustermann (Inhaber des Teeladens) investiert 25.000 Euro um die Geschäftstätigkeit zu beginnen.
+
+
+
+**Analyse:** Max Mustermann investiert 25.000 Euro in das Unternehmen in der Hoffnung Gewinne zu erhalten. In anderen Worten schuldet die Firma 25.000 Euro an Max Mustermann, die in der Zukunft zurück gezahlt werden müssen. Deshalb ist das Konto Max Mustermann ein Verbindlichkeitenkonto und wird im Haben gebucht. Aufgrund der Investition steigen die Barmittel der Firma, "Kasse" ist ein Vermögenswert des Unternehmens und wird im Soll gebucht.
+
+* Die Firma benötigt sofort Geschäftsausstattung (Kocher, Teekannen, Tassen, etc.) und Rohmaterial (Tee, Zucker, Milch, etc.). Max Mustermann beschliesst im nächstgelegenen Gemischtwarenladen "Superbasar", mit dem er freundschaftlich verbunden ist, einzukaufen, und erhält dort Kredit. Die Geschäftsausstattung hat einen Wert von 2.800 Euro und das Rohmaterial von 2.200 Euro. Er zahlt 2.000 Euro von den insgesamt 5.000 Euro.
+
+
+
+**Analyse:** Die Geschäftsausstattung ist Anlagevermögen der Firma (weil sie eine lange Lebensdauer hat) und das Rohmaterial ist Umlaufvermögen (weil es für das Tagesgeschäft verwendet wird). Aus diesem Grund wurden die Konten "Geschäftsausstattung" und "Warenbestand" im Soll gebucht und im Bestand erhöht. Max Mustermann zahlt 2.000 Euro, deshalb reduziert sich das Konto "Kasse" um diesen Betrag, weil der Geschäftsvorfall im Haben gebucht wird. Weil Max Mustermann Kredit erhält, und vereinbart wurde, dass 3.000 Euro später an "Superbasar" gezahlt werden, werden 3.000 Euro im Soll auf das Verbindlichkeitenkonto "Superbasar" gebucht.
+
+* Max Mustermann (, der sich um die Buchungen kümmert,) beschliesst zum Ende jeden Tages die Verkäufe zu buchen, so dass er täglich die Verkäufe analysieren kann. Am Ende des allerersten Tages hat der Teeladen 325 Tassen Tee verkauft, was einen Umsatz von 1.575 Euro ergibt. Der Inhaber verbucht hocherfreut die Umsätze seines ersten Tages.
+
+
+
+**Analyse:** Der Ertrag wird auf dem Konto "Teeverkäufe" im Haben verbucht und der selbe Betrag wird auf dem Konto "Kasse" im Soll verbucht. Nehmen wir an, dass es 800 Euro kostet 325 Tassen Tea zuzubereiten. Deshalb reduziert sich das Konto "Waren" im Haben um 800 Euro und der Aufwand wird auf dem Konto "Warenaufwand" in selber Höhe im Soll gebucht.
+
+* Am Ende des Monats zahlt die Firma die Miete für den Laden in Höhe von 5.000 Euro und das Gehalt für einen Mitarbeiter, der vom ersten Tag an mitarbeitet, in Höhe von 8.000 Euro.
+
+### Verbuchen des Gewinns
+
+Im Laufe des Monats kauft die Firma weiteres Rohmaterial für die Geschäftstätigkeit ein. Nach einem Monat bucht Max Mustermann den Gewinn um die Bilanz und die Gewinn- und Verlustrechnung auszugleichen. Den Gewinn erhält Max Mustermann und nicht die Firma, da es sich für die Firma um eine Verbindlichkeit handelt (sie muss ihn an Max Mustermann zahlen). Wenn die Bilanz nicht ausgeglichen ist, d. h. Aktive und Passive nicht gleich sind, dann wurde der Gewinn noch nicht verbucht. Um den Gewinn zu buchen, muss der folgende Buchungssatz erstellt werden:
+
+
+
+Erklärung: Die Nettoumsätze und Aufwände der Firme belaufen sich auf 40.000 bzw. 20.000 Euro. Die Firma hat also einen Gewinn von 20.000 Euro erwirtschaftet. Bei der Verbuchung des Gewinns wird dieser auf dem Konto GuV im Soll gebucht und die Gegenbuchung auf dem Konto "Eigenkapital" im Haben. Der Saldo des Kassenkontos der Firma beträgt 44.000 Euro und es ist Rohmaterial im Wert von 1.000 Euro übrig.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/accounting-reports.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/accounting-reports.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..36e983cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/accounting-reports.md
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+
+# Buchungsbericht
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Hier sehen Sie einige der wichtigsten Berichte aus dem Rechnungswesen:
+
+### Hauptbuch
+
+Das Hauptbuch basiert auf der Tabelle der Hauptbucheinträge und kann nach einem Konto und einem Zeitraum gefiltert werden. Das hilft Ihnen dabei einen Überblick über alle Buchungen zu erhalten, die zu einem Konto in einem bestimmten Zeitraum getätigt wurden.
+
+
+
+### Probebilanz
+
+Eine Probebilanz ist eine Liste von Kontoständen aller Konten (Bücher und Gruppen) zu einem bestimmten Datum. Für jedes Konto wird folgendes angezeigt:
+
+* Eröffnungstand
+* Summe Soll
+* Summe Haben
+* Schlußstand
+
+
+
+Die Summe aller Schlußstände in einer Probebilanz muss 0 sein.
+
+### Offene Forderungen und Verbindlichkeiten
+
+Diese Berichte helfen Ihnen dabei, die offenen Posten bei Rechnungen von Kunden und Lieferanten nachzuverfolgen. In diesem Bericht sehen Sie die offenen Beträge nach Zeiträumen geordnet, d. h. 0-30 Tage, 30-60 Tage und so weiter.
+
+
+
+### Auflistung der Verkäufe und Einkäufe
+
+In diesem Bericht wird jedes Steuerkonto in Spalten dargestellt. Für jede Rechnung und jeden Rechnungsposten erhalten Sie den Betrag und die individuelle Steuer, die gezahlt wurde, basierend auf der Tabelle der Steuern und Abgaben.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a032611e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+
+# Buchung von Vorkasse
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Eine Zahlung, die vom Kunden vor dem Versand des Produktes geleistet wird wird als Zahlung im Voraus bezeichnet. Für Bestellungen mit hohem Auftragswert erwarten Lieferanten normalerweise eine Anzahlung.
+
+**Beispiel:** Nehmen wir an, dass die Kundin Jane Do ein Doppelbett für 10.000 Euro bestellt. Sie wird nach einer Anzahlung gefragt bevor das Möbelhaus die Arbeit an der Bestellung beginnt. Sie zahlt 5.000 Euro in bar an.
+
+Gegen Sie zu Rechnungswesen und öffnen Sie einen neuen Buchungssatz um die Buchung zur Vorkasse zu erstellen.
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Dokumente > Journalbuchung > Neu
+
+Gegen Sie als Belegart "Barbeleg" an. Das kann bei unterschiedlichen Kunden unterschiedlich sein. Wenn jemand mit Scheck zahlt, dann ist die Belegart "Bankbeleg". Wählen Sie nun das Kundenkonto aus und erstellen Sie die entsprechenden Einträge für Soll und Haben.
+
+Da der Kunde 5.000 Euro bar angezahlt hat, wird dieser Betrag als Habenbuchung zum Kunden verbucht. Um dem eine Sollbuchung gegenüberzustellen (wir erinnern uns an die doppelte Buchführung) geben Sie zum Bankkonto der Firma 5.000 Euro als Soll ein. Klicken Sie das Feld "Ist Anzahlung" in der Zeile an.
+
+#### Abbildung 1: Journalbuchung bei Vorkasse
+
+
+
+### Doppelte Buchführung
+
+Bei der doppelten Buchführung hat jede Transaktion einen positiven oder negativen Gegenpart: Soll und Haben. Für jede Transaktion gibt es eine [Sollbuchung](http://www.e-conomic.co.uk/accountingsystem/glossary/debit) auf einem Konto und eine [Habenbuchung](http://www.e-conomic.co.uk/accountingsystem/glossary/credit) auf einem anderen Kont. Das heißt, dass jede Transaktion zu zwei Konten erfolgt. Ein Konto wird belastet, weil sich ein Betrag erhöht, und eines wird entlastet, weil sich der Betrag vermindert.
+
+#### Abbildung 2: Transaktion und Ausgleichsbuchung
+
+
+
+Speichern und übertragen Sie den Buchungssatz. Wenn das Dokument nicht gespeichert wird, dann wird es in anderen Buchungsdokumenten nicht übernommen.
+
+Wenn Sie für denselben Kunden eine neue Ausgangsrechnung erstellen, berücksichtigen Sie die Anzahlung auf dem Rechnungsformular.
+
+Um die Ausgangsrechnung mit einem Buchungssatz zu verknüpfen, der die Buchung zur Anzahlung beinhaltet, klicken Sie auf "Erhaltene Anzahlungen aufrufen". Weisen Sie den Betrag der Anzahlung in der Tabelle der Anzahlungen zu. Die Buchung wird entsprechend angepasst.
+
+#### Abbildung 3: Anzahlung erhalten
+
+
+
+Speichern und übertragen Sie die Ausgangsrechnung
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/budgeting.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/budgeting.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6e5beb47
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/budgeting.md
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+
+# Budgetierung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+ERPNext hilft Ihnen dabei Budgets in Ihren Kostenstellen zu erstellen und zu verwalten. Das ist zum Beispiel dann nützlich, wenn Sie Online-Umsätze tätigen. Sie haben Werbebudgets für Suchmaschinen und Sie möchten dass ERPNext Sie davon abhält oder warnt mehr auszugeben, als im Budget vorgesehen ist.
+
+Budgets sind auch gut für Planungsangelegenheiten. Wenn Sie Ihre Planungen für das nächste Geschäftsjahr erstellen, dann planen Sie normalerweise einen Umsatz nachdem sich die Aufwendungen richten. Das Aufstellen eines Budgets stellt sicher, dass Ihre Aufwendungen zu keinem Zeitpunkt aus dem Ruder laufen.
+
+Sie können Budget in der Kostenstelle erstellen. Wenn Sie saisonale Schwankungen haben, können Sie Ihr Budget auch entsprechend aufteilen.
+
+Um ein Budget zuzuweisen, gehen Sie zu Rechnungswesen > Einstellungen > Übersicht der Kostenstellen und klicken Sie auf die Darstellung der Kostenstellen. Wählen Sie eine Kostenstelle aus und klicken Sie auf "Öffnen".
+
+#### Schritt 1: Klicken Sie auf "Öffnen
+
+
+
+#### Schritt 2: Monatliche Verteilung eingeben
+
+
+
+
+Wenn Sie die Verteilungs-ID leer lassen, kalkuliert ERPNext auf einer jährlichen Basis und bricht auf die Monate herunter.
+
+#### Schritt 3: Fügen Sie eine neue Zeile hinzu und wählen Sie das Budget-Konto
+
+
+
+
+### Anlegen einer neuen Verteilungs-ID
+
+ERPNext erlaubt es Ihnen einige Aktionen für Budgets einzustellen. Das legt fest, ob bei Überschreiten des Budgets gestoppt, gewarnte oder ignoriert werden soll.
+
+
+
+Das kann über die Firmenstammdaten eingestellt werden.
+
+
+
+Auch dann, wenn Sie für überschrittene Budgets "ignorieren" auswählen, bekommen Sie eine Fülle von Informationen über den Bericht zur Abweichung zwischen Budget und Istwert. Dieser Bericht zeigt Ihnen auf monatlicher Basis die tatsächlichen Ausgaben verglichen mit den budgetierten Ausgaben.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/chart-of-accounts.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/chart-of-accounts.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f667630f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/chart-of-accounts.md
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+
+# Kontenplan
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Der Kontenplan bildet die Blaupause Ihres Unternehmens. Die Rahmenstruktur Ihres Kontenplans basiert auf einem System der doppelten Buchführung, die auf der ganzen Welt zum Standard der finanziellen Bewertung eines Unternehmens geworden ist.
+
+Der Kontenplan hilft Ihnen bei der Beantwortung folgender Fragen:
+
+* Was ist Ihre Organisation wert?
+* Wieviele Schulden haben Sie?
+* Wieviel Gewinn erwirtschaften Sie (und in diesem Zuge auch, wieviele Steuern zahlen Sie?)
+* Wieviel Umsatz generieren Sie?
+* Wie setzen sich Ihre Ausgaben zusammen?
+
+Als Manager werden Sie zu schätzen wissen, wenn Sie beurteilen können wie Ihr Geschäft läuft.
+
+> Tipp: Wenn Sie eine Bilanz nicht lesen können (es hat lange gedauert bis wir das konnten), dann ist jetzt eine gute Gelegenheit es zu erlernen. Es wird die Mühe wert sein. Sie können auch die Hilfe Ihres Buchhalters in Anspruch nehmen, wenn Sie Ihren Kontenplan einrichten möchten.
+
+Sie können in ERPNext leicht die finanzielle Lage Ihres Unternehmens einsehen. Ein Beispiel für eine Finanzanalyse sehen Sie unten abgebildet.
+
+
+
+Um Ihren Kontenplan in ERPNext zu bearbeiten gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Einstellungen > Kontenplan
+
+Im Kontenplan erhalten Sie eine Baumstruktur der Konten(bezeichnungen) und Kontengruppen, die ein Unternehmen benötigt um seine Buchungsvorgänge vornehmen zu können. ERPNext richtet für jede neu angelegte Firma einen einfachen Kontenrahmen ein, aber Sie müssen noch Anpassungen vornehmen, damit Ihren Anforderungen und gesetzlichen Bestimmungen Genüge geleistet wird. Der Kontenplan gibt für jede Firma an, wie Buchungssätze klassifiziert werden, meistens aufgrund gesetzlicher Vorschriften (Steuern und Einhaltung staatlicher Regelungen).
+
+Lassen Sie uns die Hauptgruppen des Kontenplans besser verstehen lernen.
+
+
+
+### Bilanzkonten
+
+Die Bilanz beinhaltet Vermögenswerte (Mittelverwendung) und Verbindlichkeiten (Mittelherkunft), die den Nettowert Ihres Unternehmens zu einem bestimmten Zeitpunkt angeben. Wenn Sie eine Finanzperiode beginnen oder beenden dann ist die Gesamtsumme aller Vermögenswerte gleich den Verbindlichkeiten.
+
+> Buchhaltung: Wenn Sie in Bezug auf Buchhaltung Anfänger sind, wundern Sie sich vielleicht, wie das Vermögen gleich den Verbindlichkeiten sein kann? Das würde ja heißen, dass das Unternehmen selbst nichts besitzt. Das ist auch richtig. Alle Investitionen, die im Unternehmen getätigt werden, um Vermögen anzuschaffen (wie Land, Möbel, Maschinen) werden von den Inhabern getätigt und sind für das Unternehmen eine Verbindlichkeit. Wenn das Unternehmen schliessen möchte, müssen alle Vermögenswerte verkauft werden und die Verbindlichkeiten den Inhabern zurückgezahlt werden (einschliesslich der Gewinne), es bleibt nichts übrig.
+
+So repräsentieren in dieser Sichtweise alle Konten ein Vermögen des Unternehmens, wie Bank, Grundstücke, Geschäftsausstattung, oder eine Verbindlichkeit (Kapital welches das Unternehmen anderen schuldet), wie Eigenkapital und diverse Verbindlichkeiten.
+
+Zwei besondere Konten, die in diesem Zuge angesprochen werden sollten, sind die Forderungen (Geld, welches Sie noch von Ihren Kunden bekommen) und die Verbindlichkeiten (aus Lieferungen und Leistungen) (Geld, welches Sie noch an Ihre Lieferanten zahlen müssen), jeweils dem Vermögen und den Verbindlichkeiten zugeordnet.
+
+### Gewinn- und Verlustkonten
+
+Gewinn und Verlust ist die Gruppe von Ertrags- und Aufwandskonten, die Ihre Buchungstransaktionen eines Zeitraums repräsentieren.
+
+Entgegen den Bilanzkonten, repräsentieren Gewinn und Verlustkonnten (GuV) keine Nettowerte (Vermögen), sondern die Menge an Geld, welche im Zuge von Geschäften mit Kunden in einem Zeitraum ausgegeben oder verdient wird. Deshalb sind sie auch zu Beginn und zum Ende eines Geschäftsjahres gleich 0.
+
+In ERPNext ist es einfach eine graphische Auswertung von Gewinn und Verlust zu erstellen. Im Folgenden ist ein Beispiel einer GuV-Analyse abgebildet:
+
+
+
+(Am ersten Tag eines Jahres haben Sie noch keinen Gewinn oder Verlust gemacht, aber Sie haben bereits Vermögen, deshalb haben Bestandskonten zum Anfang oder Ende eines Zeitraums einen Wert.)
+
+### Gruppen und Hauptbücher
+
+Es gibt in ERPNext zwei Hauptgruppen von Konten: Gruppen und Bücher. Gruppen können Untergruppen und Bücher haben, wohingegen Bücher die Knoten Ihres Plans sind und nicht weiter unterteilt werden können.
+
+Buchungstransaktionen können nur zu Kontobüchern erstellt werden (nicht zu Gruppen).
+
+> Info: Der Begriff "Hauptbuch" bezeichnet eine Aufzeichnung, in der Buchungen verzeichnet sind. Normalerweise gibt es für jedes Konto (wie z. B. einem Kunden oder Lieferanten) nur ein Buch.
+
+> Anmerkung: Ein Kontenbuch wird manchmal auch als Kontokopf bezeichnet.
+
+
+
+### Andere Kontentypen
+
+Wenn sie in ERPNext ein neues Konto anlegen, können Sie dazu auch Informationen mit angeben, und zwar deshalb, weil es eine Hilfe sein kann, in einem bestimmte Szenario, ein bestimmtes Konto, wie Bankkonto ein Steuerkonto, auszuwählen. Das hat auf den Kontenrahmen selbst keine Auswirkung.
+
+### Konten erstellen und bearbeiten
+
+Um ein neues Konto zu erstellen, gehen Sie Ihren Kontenplan durch und klicken Sie auf die Kontengruppe unter der Sie das neue Konto erstellen wollen. Auf der rechten Seite finden Sie die Option ein neues Konto zu "öffnen" oder ein Unterkonto zu erstellen.
+
+
+
+Die Option zum Erstellen erscheint nur dann, wenn Sie auf ein Konto vom Typ Gruppe (Ordner) klicken.
+
+ERPNext legt eine Standardkontenstruktur an, wenn eine Firma angelegt wird. Es liegt aber an Ihnen, Konten zu bearbeiten, hinzuzufügen oder zu löschen.
+
+Typischerweise werden Sie vielleicht Konten hierfür anlegen wollen:
+
+* Aufwandskonten (Reisen, Gehälter, Telefon) unter Aufwände
+* Steuern (Mehrwertsteuer, Verkaufssteuer je nach Ihrem Land) unter kurzfristige Verbindlichkeiten
+* Verkaufsarten (z. B. Produktverkäufe, Dienstleistungsverkäufe) unter Erträge
+* Vermögenstypen (Gebäude, Maschinen, Geschäftsausstattung) unter Anlagevermögen
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/credit-limit.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/credit-limit.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9d64ea02
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/credit-limit.md
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+
+# Kreditlimit
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Ein Kreditlimit ist der maximale Betrag von Kredit, die ein Finanzinstitut oder ein Verleiher einem Schuldner für eine bestimmte Kreditlinie überlässt. Aus der Sicht einer Organisation ist es der maximale Kreditbetrag der einem Kunden für eingekaufte Waren gewährt wird.
+
+Um das Kreditlimit einzustellen, gehen Sie zur Kundenvorlage
+
+> Vertrieb > Dokument > Kunde
+
+### Abbildung 1: Kreditlinie
+
+
+
+Gehen Sie zum Abschnitt "Kreditlimit" und geben Sie den Betrag in das Feld "Kreditlimit" ein.
+
+Für den Fall, dass dem Kunden aus gutem Willen mehr Kredit eingeräumt werden soll, kann der Kredit-Controller eine Bestellung übertragen auch wenn das Kreditlimit überschritten ist.
+
+Um einer beliebigen anderen Roll zu erlauben, Transaktionen von Käufern, deren Kreditlimit ausgeschöpft ist, zu übertragen, gehen Sie zu den Rechnungswesen-Einstellungen und erstellen Sie hier Änderungen.
+
+Im Feld Kredit-Controller wählen Sie die Rolle aus, die dazu autorisiert sein soll, Bestellungen zu genehmigen, oder das Kreditlimit eines Kunden anzuheben.
+
+### Abbildung 2: Kredit-Controller
+
+
+
+Speichern Sie die Änderungen
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e64a9024
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+
+# Rechnungswesen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Am Ende eines jeden Vertriebs- und Beschaffungsvorgangs stehen die Abrechnung und die Bezahlung. Möglicherweise haben Sie einen Buchhalter in Ihrem Team, oder Sie machen die Buchhaltung selbst, oder sie haben die Buchhaltung fremdvergeben. In allen diesen Fällen ist die Finanzbuchhaltung der Kern jeden Systems wie einem ERP.
+
+In ERPNext bestehen Ihre Arbeitsgänge aus drei Haupttätigkeiten:
+
+* Ausgangsrechnung: Die Rechnungen, die Sie Ihren Kunden über die Produkte oder Dienstleistungen, die Sei anbieten, senden.
+* Eingangsrechnung: Rechnungen, die Sie von Ihren Lieferanten für deren Produkte oder Dienstleistungen erhalten.
+* Journalbuchungen / Buchungssätze: Für Buchungen wie Zahlung, Gutschrift und andere.
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..323764e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+journal-entry
+sales-invoice
+purchase-invoice
+chart-of-accounts
+making-payments
+advance-payment-entry
+credit-limit
+opening-entry
+accounting-reports
+accounting-entries
+budgeting
+opening-accounts
+item-wise-tax
+point-of-sale-pos-invoice
+multi-currency-accounting
+tools
+setup
+articles
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/item-wise-tax.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/item-wise-tax.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d86690b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/item-wise-tax.md
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+
+# Artikelbezogene Steuer
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Wenn Sie über die Einstellung "Steuern und andere Abgaben" Steuern auswählen, werden diese in Transaktionen auf alle Artikel angewendet. Wenn jedoch unterschiedliche Steuern auf bestimmte Artikel in Transaktionen angewendet werden sollen, sollten Sie die Stammdaten für Ihre Artikel und Steuern wie folgt einstellen.
+
+#### Schritt 1: Geben Sie im Artikelstamm die Steuer an, die angewendet werden soll.
+
+Die Artikelstammdaten beinhalten eine Tabelle, in der Sie Steuern, die angewendet werden sollen, auflisten können.
+
+
+
+Der im Artikelstamm angegebene Steuersatz hat gegenüber dem Steuersatz, der in Transaktionen angegeben wird, Vorrang.
+
+Beispiel: Wenn Sie einen Umsatzsteuersatz von 10% für den Artikel ABC verwenden wollen, aber im Kundenauftrag/der Ausgangsrechnung ein Umsatzsteuersatz von 12% für den Artikel ABC angegeben ist, dann wird der Steuersatz von 10% verwendet, so wie es in den Artikelstammdaten hinterlegt ist.
+
+#### Schritt 2: Steuern und andere Abgaben einrichten
+
+In den Stammdaten für Steuern und andere Abgaben sollten Sie alle auf Artikel anwendbaren Steuern auswählen.
+
+Beispiel: Wenn Sie Artikel mit 5% Umsatzsteuer haben, bei anderen eine Dienstleistungssteuer anfällt und bei wieder anderen eine Luxussteuer, dann sollten Ihre Steuerstammdaten auch alle drei Steuern enthalten.
+
+
+
+#### Schritt 3: Steuersatz in den Stammdaten für Steuern und Abgaben auf 0 einstellen
+
+In den Stammdaten für Steuern und andere Abgaben wird der Steuersatz mit 0% eingepflegt. Das heißt, dass der Steuersatz, der auf Artikel angewendet wird, aus den entsprechenden Artikelstammdaten gezogen wird. Für alle anderen Artikel wird ein Steuersatz von 0% verwendet, das heißt es werden keine weiteren Steuern verwendet.
+
+Basierend auf den obigen Einstellungen werden Steuern also wie in den Artikelstammdaten angegeben angewendet. Probieren Sie beispielsweise Folgendes aus:
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/journal-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/journal-entry.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6ffb069f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/journal-entry.md
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+
+# Journalbuchung / Buchungssatz
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Außer der **Ausgangsrechnung** und der **Eingangsrechnung** werden alle Buchungsvorgänge als **Journalbuchung / Buchungssatz** erstellt. Ein **Buchungssatz** ist ein Standard-Geschäftsvorfall aus dem Rechnungswesen, der sich auf mehrere verschiedene Konten auswirkt und bei dem die Summen von Soll und Haben gleich groß sind.
+
+Um einen neuen Buchungssatz zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Dokumente > Journalbuchung > Neu
+
+
+
+In einem Buchungssatz müssen Sie folgendes tun:
+
+* Die Belegart über das DropDown-Menü auswählen.
+* Zeilen für die einzelnen Buchungen hinzufügen. In jeder Zeile müssen Sie folgendes Angeben:
+ * Das Konto, das betroffen ist.
+ * Die Beträge für Soll und Haben.
+ * Die Kostenstelle (wenn es sich um einen Ertrag oder einen Aufwand handelt)
+ * Den Gegenbeleg: Verknüpfen Sie hier mit einem Beleg, oder einer Rechnung, wenn es sich um den "offenen" Betrag dieser Rechnung handelt.
+ * Ist Anzahlung: Wählen Sie hier "Ja" wenn Sie diese Option in einer Rechnung auswählen können möchten. Oder geben Sie andere Informationen an, wenn es sich um "Bankzahlung" oder "auf Rechnung" handelt.
+
+#### Differenz
+
+Das "Differenz"-Feld zeigt den Unterschied zwischen den Soll- und Habenbeträgen. Dieser Wert sollte "0" sein bevor der Buchungssatz übertragen wird. Wenn dieser Wert nicht "0" ist, dann können Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Differenzbuchung erstellen" klicken, um eine neue Zeile mit dem benötigten Betrag, der benötigt wird, die Differenz auf "0" zu stellen, einzufügen.
+
+---
+
+### Standardbuchungen
+
+Schauen wir uns einige Standardbuchungssätze an, die über Journalbelege erstellt werden können.
+
+#### Aufwände (nicht aufgeschlüsselt)
+
+Oftmals ist es nicht notwendig einen Aufwand genau aufzuschlüsseln, sondern er kann bei Zahlung direkt auf ein Aufwandskonto gebucht werden. Beispiele hierfür sind eine Reisekostenabrechnung oder eine Telefonrechnung. Sie können Aufwände für Telefon direkt verbuchen anstatt mit dem Konto Ihres Telekommunikationsanbieters und die Zahlung auf dem Bankkonto belasten.
+
+* Soll: Aufwandskonto (wie Telefon)
+* Haben: Bank oder Kasse
+
+#### Zweifelhafte Forderungen und Abschreibungen
+
+Wenn Sie eine Rechnung als uneinbringbar abschreiben wollen, können Sie einen Journalbeleg ähnlich einem Zahlungsbeleg erstellen, nur dass Sie nicht Ihre Bank belasten, sondern das Aufwandskonto "Uneinbringbare Forderungen".
+
+* Soll: Abschreibungen auf uneinbringbare Forderungen
+* Haben: Kunde
+
+> Anmerkung: Beachten Sie, dass es spezielle landesspezifische Regeln für das Abschreiben uneinbringbarer Forderungen gibt.
+
+#### Abschreibungen aufgrund von Wertminderungen
+
+Eine Abschreibung tritt dann auf, wenn Sie einen bestimmten Wert Ihres Vermögens als Aufwand abschreiben. Beispielsweise einen Computer, den Sie auf fünf Jahre nutzen. Sie können seinen Wert über die Periode verteilen und am Ende jeden Jahres einen Buchungssatz erstellen, der seinen Wert um einen bestimmten Prozentsatz vermindert.
+
+* Soll: Abschreibung (Aufwand)
+* Haben: Vermögenskonto (das Konto auf das Sie den Vermögenswert, denn Sie abschreiben, gebucht haben)
+
+> Anmerkung: Beachten Sie, dass es spezielle landesspezifische Regeln dafür gibt, in welcher Höhe bestimmte Arten von Vermögensgegenständen abgeschrieben werden können.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/making-payments.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/making-payments.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..70a0b95b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/making-payments.md
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+
+# Zahlungen durchführen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Zahlungen zu Ausgangs- oder Eingangsrechnungen können über die Schaltfläche "Zahlungsbuchung erstellen" zu übertragenen Rechnungen erfasst werden.
+
+ 1. Aktualisieren Sie das Bankkonto (Sie können hier auch ein Standardkonto in den Unternehmensstammdaten einstellen).
+ 1. Aktualiseren Sie das Veröffentlichungsdatum.
+ 1. Geben Sie Schecknummer und Scheckdatum ein.
+ 1. Speichern und Übertragen Sie.
+
+
+
+Zahlungen können auch unabhängig von Rechnungen erstellt werden, indem Sie einen neuen Journalbeleg erstellen und die Zahlungsart auswählen.
+
+### Eingehende Zahlungen
+
+Für Zahlungen von Kunden gilt:
+
+* Soll: Bank oder Kasse
+* Haben: Kundenkonto
+
+> Anmerkung: Vergessen Sie nicht "Zu Ausgangsrechnung" und "Ist Anzahlung" zu markieren, wenn es zutrifft.
+
+### Ausgehende Zahlungen
+
+Für Zahlungen an Lieferanten gilt:
+
+* Soll: Lieferant
+* Haben: Bank oder Kasse
+
+### Beispiel eines Buchungssatzes für eine Zahlung
+
+
+
+---
+
+### Eine Zahlung per Scheck abgleichen
+
+Wenn Sie Zahlungen per Scheck erhalten oder leisten, geben die Kontoauszüge Ihrer Bank nicht exakt die Daten Ihrer Buchung wieder, weil die Bank normalerweise einige Zeit braucht diese Zahlungen einzulösen. Das gleiche trifft zu, wenn Sie Ihrem Lieferanten einen Scheck zusenden und es einige Tage braucht, bis er vom Lieferanten angenommen und eingereicht wird. In ERPNext können Sie Kontoauszüge der Bank und Ihre Buchungssätze über das Werkzeug zum Kontenabgleich in Einklang bringen.
+
+Dafür gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Werkzeuge > Kontenabgleich
+
+Wählen Sie Ihr Bankkonto aus und geben Sie das Datum Ihres Kontoauszuges ein. Sie bekommen alle Buchungen vom Typ Bankbeleg. Aktualisieren Sie in jeder Buchung über die Spalte ganz rechts das "Einlösungsdatum" und klicken Sie auf "Aktualisieren".
+
+So können Sie Ihre Kontoauszüge und Ihre Systembuchungen angleichen.
+
+---
+
+### Offene Zahlungen verwalten
+
+Ausgenommen von Endkundenverkäufen sind in den meisten Fällen die Rechnungslegung und die Zahlung voneinander getrennte Aktivitäten. Es gibt verschiedene Kombinationsmöglichkeiten, wie Zahlungen getätigt werden können. Diese Kombinationen finden sowohl bei Verkäufen als auch bei Einkäufen Anwendung.
+
+* Zahlungen können im Voraus erfolgen (100% Anzahlung).
+* Sie können nach dem Versand erfolgen. Entweder zum Zeitpunkt der Lieferung oder innerhalb von ein paar Tagen.
+* Es kann eine Teilzahlung im Voraus erfolgen und eine Restzahlung nach der Auslieferung.
+* Zahlungen können zusammen für mehrere Rechnungen erfolgen.
+* Anzahlungen können zusammen für mehrere Rechnungen erfolgen (und können dann auf die Rechnungen aufgeteilt werden).
+
+ERPNext erlaubt es Ihnen alle diese Szenarien zu verwalten. Alle Buchungen des Hauptbuches können zu Ausgangsrechnungen, Eingangsrechnungen und Journalbelegen erfolgen.
+
+Der gesamte offene Betrag einer Rechnung ist die Summe aller Buchungen, die zu dieser Rechnung erstellt wurden (oder mit ihr verknüpft sind). Auf diese Weise können Sie in Buchungssätzen Zahlungen kombinieren oder aufteilen um alle Szenarien abzudecken.
+
+### Zahlungen mit Rechnungen abgleichen
+
+In komplexen Szenarien, besonders im Geschäftsfeld Investitionsgüter, gibt es manchmal keinen direkten Bezug zwischen Zahlungen und Rechnungen. Sie schicken an Ihre Kunden Rechnungen und Kunden senden Ihnen Zahlungsblöcke oder Zahlungen, die auf einem Zeitplan basieren, der nicht mit Ihren Rechnungen verknüpft ist.
+
+In solchen Fällen können Sie das Werkzeug zum Zahlungsabgleich verwenden.
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Werkzeuge > Zahlungsabgleichs-Werkzeug
+
+In diesem Werkzeug können Sie ein Konto auswählen (z. B. das Konto Ihres Kunden) und auf "Zahlungsbuchungen ermitteln" klicken und das System wählt alle offenen Journalbuchungen und Ausgangsrechnungen dieses Kunden aus.
+
+Um Zahlungen und Rechnungen zu abzugleichen, wählen Sie Rechnungen und Journalbelege aus und klicken Sie auf "Abgleichen".
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7263e2cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.md
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+
+# Buchungen in unterschiedlichen Währungen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+In ERPNext können Sie Buchungen in unterschiedlichen Währungen erstellen. Beispiel: Wenn Sie ein Bankkonto in einer Fremdwährung haben, dann können Sie Transaktionen in dieser Währung durchführen und das System zeigt Ihnen den Kontostand der Bank nur in dieser speziellen Währung an.
+
+### Einrichtung
+
+Um mit Buchungen in unterschiedlichen Währungen zu beginnen, müssen Sie die Buchungswährung im Datensatz des Kontos einstellen. Sie können bei der Anlage eine Währung aus dem Kontenplan auswählen.
+
+
+
+Sie können die Währung auch zuordnen oder bearbeiten, indem Sie den jeweiligen Datensatz für bereits angelegte Konten öffnen.
+
+
+
+Für Kunden/Lieferanten können Sie die Buchungswährung auch im Gruppendatensatz einstellen. Wenn sich die Buchungswährung der Gruppe von der Firmenwährung unterscheidet, müssen Sie die Standardkonten für Forderungen und Verbindlichkeiten auf diese Währung einstellen.
+
+
+
+Wenn Sie die Buchungswährung für einen Artikel oder eine Gruppe eingestellt haben, können Sie Buchungen zu ihnen erstellen. Wenn sich die Buchungswährung der Gruppe von der Firmenwährung unterscheidet, dann beschränkt das System beim Erstellen von Transaktionen für diese Gruppe Buchungen auf diese Währung. Wenn die Buchungswährung die selbe wie die Firmenwährung ist, können Sie Transaktionen für diese Guppe in jeder beliebigen Währung erstellen. Aber die Hauptbuch-Buchungen werden immer in der Buchungswährung der Gruppe vorliegen. In jedem Fall ist die Wärung des Verbindlichkeitenkontos immer gleich der Buchungswährung der Gruppe.
+
+Sie können die Buchungswährung im Datensatz für die Gruppe/das Konto verändern, solange bis Sie Transaktionen für sie erstellen. Nach dem Buchen erlaubt es das System nicht die Buchungswährung für einen Konto- oder Gruppendatensatz zu ändern.
+
+Wenn Sie mehrere Firmen verwalten muss die Buchungswährung der Gruppe für alle Firmen gleich sein.
+
+### Transaktionen
+
+#### Ausgangsrechnung
+
+In einer Ausgangsrechnung muss die Währung der Transaktion gleich der Buchungswährung des Kunden sein, wenn die Buchungswährung des Kunden anders als die Firmenwährung ist. Andernfalls können sie in der Rechnung jede beliebige Währung auswählen. Bei der Auswahl des Kunden zieht das System das Verbindlichkeitenkonto aus dem Kunden/aus der Firma. Die Währung des Verbindlichkeitenkontos muss die selbe sein wie die Buchungswährung des Kunden.
+
+Nun wird im POS der gezahlte Betrag in der Transaktionswährung eingegeben, im Gegensatz zur vorherigen Firmenwährung. Auch der Ausbuchungsbetrag wird in der Transaktionswährung eingegeben.
+
+Der ausstehende Betrag und Anzahlungsbeträge werden immer in der Währung des Kundenkontos kalkuliert und angezeigt.
+
+
+
+#### Eingangsrechnung
+
+In ähnlicher Art und Weise werden in Eingangsrechnungen Buchungen basierend auf der Buchungswährung des Lieferanten durchgeführt. Der ausstehende Betrag und Anzahlungen werden ebenfalls in der Buchungswährung des Lieferanten angezeigt. Abschreibungsbeträge werden nun in der Transaktionswährung eingegeben.
+
+#### Buchungssatz
+
+In einer Journalbuchung können Sie Transaktionen in unterschiedlichen Währungen erstellen. Es gibt ein Auswahlfeld "Unterschiedliche Währungen" um Buchungen in mehreren Währungen zu aktivieren. Wenn die Option "Unterschiedliche Währungen" ausgewählt wurde, können Sie Konten mit unterschiedlichen Währungen auswählen.
+
+
+
+In der Kontenübersicht zeigt das System den Abschnitt Währung an und holt sich die Kontenwährung und den Wechselkurs automatisch, wenn Sie ein Konto mit ausländischer Währung auswählen. Sie können den Wechselkurs später manuell ändern/anpassen.
+
+In einem einzelnen Buchungssatz können Sie nur Konten mit einer alternativen Währung auswählen, abweichend von Konten in der Firmenwährung. Die Beträge für Soll und Haben sollten in der Kontenwährung eingegeben werden, das System berechnet und zeigt dann den Betrag für Soll und Haben automatisch in der Firmenwährung.
+
+
+
+#### Beispiel 1: Zahlungsbuchung eines Kunden in alternativer Währung
+
+Nehmen wir an, dass die Standardwährung einer Firma Indische Rupien ist, und die Buchungswährung des Kunden US-Dollar. Der Kunde zahlt den vollen Rechnungsbetrag zu einer offenen Rechnung in Höhe von 100 US-Dollar. Der Wechselkurs (US-Dollar in Indische Rupien) in der Ausgangsrechnung war mit 60 angegeben.
+
+Der Wechselkurs in der Zahlungsbuchung sollte immer der selbe wie auf der Rechnung (60) sein, auch dann, wenn der Wechselkurs am Tag der Zahlung 62 beträgt. Dem Bankkonto wird der Betrag mit einem Wechselkurs von 62 gut geschrieben. Deshalb wird ein Wechelkursgewinn bzw. -verlust basierend auf dem Unterschied im Wechselkurs gebucht.
+
+
+
+#### Beispiel 2: Überweisung zwischen Banken (US-Dollar -> Indische Rupien)
+
+Nehmen wir an, dass die Standardwährung der Firma Indische Rupien ist. Sie haben ein Paypal-Konto in der Währung US-Dollar. Sie erhalten auf das Paypal-Konto Zahlungen und wir gehen davon aus, dass Paypal einmal in der Woche Beträge auf Ihr Bankkonto, mit der Währung Indische Rupien, überweist.
+
+Das Paypal-Konto wird an einem anderen Datum mit einem anderen Wechselkurs belastet, als die Gutschrift auf das Bankkonto erfolgt. Aus diesem Grund gibt es normalerweise einen Wechselkursgewinn oder -verlust zur Überweisungsbuchung. In der Überweisungsbuchung stellt das System den Wechselkurs basierend auf dem durchschnittlichen Wechselkurs für eingehende Zahlungen des Paypal-Kontos ein. Sie müssen den Wechelkursgewinn oder -verlust basierend auf dem durchschnittlichen Wechselkurs und dem Wechselkurs am Überweisungstag berechnen und eingeben.
+
+Nehmen wir an, dass das Paypal-Konto folgende Beträge, die noch nicht auf Ihr anderes Bankkonto überwiesen wurden, in einer Woche als Gutschrift erhalten hat.
+
+| Datum | +Konto | +Soll (USD) | +Wechselkurs | +
| 02.09.2015 | +Paypal | +100 | +60 | +
| 02.09.2015 | +Paypal | +100 | +61 | +
| 02.09.2015 | +Paypal | +100 | +64 | +
+
+### Berichte
+
+#### Hauptbuch
+
+Im Hauptbuch zeigt das System den Betrag einer Gutschrift/Lastschrift in beiden Währungen an, wenn nach Konto gefiltert wurde, und wenn die Kontenwährung unterschiedlich zur Firmenwährung ist.
+
+
+
+#### Forderungs- und Verbindlichkeitenkonten
+
+Im Bericht zu den Konten Forderungen und Verbindlichkeiten zeigt das System alle Beträge in der Währung der Gruppe/in der Kontenwährung an.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/opening-accounts.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/opening-accounts.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8cfd83f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/opening-accounts.md
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+
+# Eröffnungskonto
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Jetzt, da Sie den größten Teil der Einrichtung hinter sich haben, wird es Zeit tiefer einzusteigen!
+
+Es gibt zwei wichtige Gruppen von Daten, die Sie eingeben müssen, bevor Sie Ihre Tätigkeiten beginnen.
+
+* Die Stände in der Eröffnungsbilanz
+* Die Anfangsbestände im Lager
+
+Um Ihre Konten und Lagerbestände richtig eröffnen zu können, brauchen Sie belastbare Daten. Stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie Ihre Daten entsprechend vorbereitet haben.
+
+### Konten eröffnen
+
+Wir gehen davon aus, dass Sie mit der Buchhaltung in einem neuen Geschäftsjahr beginnen, Sie können aber auch mittendrin starten. Um Ihre Konten einzurichten, brauchen Sie Folgendes für den Tag an dem Sie die Buchhaltung über ERPNext starten.
+
+* Eröffnungsstände der Kapitalkonten - wie Kapital von Anteilseignern (oder das des Inhabers), Darlehen, Stände von Bankkonten
+* Liste der offenen Rechnungen aus Verkäufen und Einkäufen (Forderungen und Verbindlichkeiten)
+* Entsprechende Belege
+
+Sie können Konten basierend auf Belegarten auswählen. In so einem Szenario sollte Ihre Bilanz ausgeglichen sein.
+
+
+
+Beachten Sie bitte auch, dass das System abstürzt, wenn es mehr als 300 Bücher gibt. Um so eine Situation zu vermeiden, können Sie Konten über temporäre Konten eröffnen.
+
+### Temporäre Konten
+
+Eine schöne Möglichkeit die Eröffnung zu vereinfachen bietet sich über die Verwendung von temporären Konten, nur für die Eröffnung. Die Kontenstände dieser Konten werden alle 0, wenn alle alten Rechnungen und die Eröffnungsstände von Bank, Schulden etc. eingegeben wurden. Im Standard-Kontenrahmen wird ein temporäres Eröffnungskonto unter den Vermögenswerten erstellt.
+
+### Die Eröffnungsbuchung
+
+In ERPNext werden Eröffnungskonten eingerichtet, indem bestimmte Buchungssätze übertragen werden.
+
+Hinweis: Stellen Sie sicher, dass im Abschnitt "Weitere Informationen" "Ist Eröffnung" auf "Ja" eingestellt ist.
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Journalbuchung > Neu
+
+Vervollständigen Sie die Buchungssätze auf der Soll- und Haben-Seite.
+
+
+
+Um einen Eröffnungsstand einzupflegen, erstellen Sie einen Buchungssatz für ein Konto oder eine Gruppe von Konten.
+
+Beispiel: Wenn Sie die Kontenstände von drei Bankkonten einpflegen möchten, dann erstellen Sie Buchungssätze der folgenden Art und Weise:
+
+
+
+Um einen Ausgleich herzustellen, wird ein temporäres Konto für Vermögen und Verbindlichkeiten verwendet. Wenn Sie einen Anfangsbestand in einem Verbindlichkeitenkonto einpflegen, können Sie zum Ausgleich ein temporäres Vermögenskonto verwenden.
+
+Auf diese Art und Weise können Sie den Anfangsbestand auf Vermögens- und Verbindlichkeitenkonten erstellen.
+
+Sie können zwei Eröffnungsbuchungssätze erstellen:
+
+* Für alle Vermögenswerte (außer Forderungen): Dieser Buchungssatz beinhaltet alle Ihre Vermögenswerte außer den Summen, die Sie noch von Ihren Kunden als offene Forderungen zu Ihren Ausgangsrechnungen erhalten. Sie müssen Ihre Forderungen einpflegen, indem Sie zu jeder Rechnung eine individuelle Buchung erstellen (weil Ihnen das System dabei hilft, die Rechnungen, die noch bezahlt werden müssen, nachzuverfolgen). Sie können die Summe all dieser Forderungen auf der Habenseite zu einem **temporären Eröffnungskonto** buchen.
+* Für alle Verbindlichkeiten: In ähnlicher Art und Weise müssen Sie einen Buchungssatz für die Anfangsstände Ihrer Verbindlichkeiten (mit Ausnahme der Rechnungen, die Sie noch zahlen müssen) zu einem **temporären Eröffnungskonto** erstellen.
+* Mit dieser Methode können Sie Eröffnungsstände für spezielle Bilanzkonten einpflegen aber nicht für alle.
+* Eine Eröffnungsbuchung ist nur für Bilanzkonten möglich, nicht aber für Aufwands- oder Ertragskonten.
+
+Wenn Sie die Buchungen erstellt haben, schaut der Bericht zur Probebilanz in etwa wie folgt aus:
+
+
+
+
+### Offene Rechnungen
+
+Nachdem Sie Ihre Eröffnungsbuchungen erstellt haben, müssen Sie alle Ausgangs- und Eingangsrechnungen, die noch offen sind, eingeben.
+
+Da Sie die Erträge und Aufwendungen zu diesen Rechnungen bereits in der vorherigen Periode gebucht haben, wählen Sie in den Ertrags- und Aufwandskonten das **temporäre Eröffnungskonto** als Gegenkonto aus.
+
+> Hinweis: Stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie jede Rechnung mit "Ist Eröffnungsbuchung" markiert haben.
+
+Wenn es Ihnen egal ist, welche Artikel in diesen Rechnungen enthalten sind, dann erstellen Sie einfach einen Platzhalter-Artikel in der Rechnung. Die Artikelnummer ist in der Rechnung nicht zwingend erforderlich, also sollte das kein Problem sein.
+
+Wenn Sie alle Ihre Rechnungen eingegeben haben, hat Ihr Eröffnungskonto einen Stand von 0.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/opening-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/opening-entry.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e7c4d10d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/opening-entry.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Eröffnungsbuchung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Wenn Sie eine neue Firma erstellen, dann können Sie das ERPNext-Modul Rechnungswesen starten, indem Sie in den Kontenplan gehen.
+
+Wenn Sie aber von einem reinen Buchhaltungsprogramm wie Tally oder einer FoxPro-basieren Software migrieren, dann lesen Sie unter [Eröffnungsbilanz]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/accounts/opening-accounts.html) nach.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/point-of-sales-invoice.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/point-of-sales-invoice.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e1640897
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/point-of-sales-invoice.md
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+
+# POS-Rechnung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Der Point of Sale (POS) ist der Ort, wo ein Endkundengeschäft durchgeführt wird. Es handelt sich um den Ort, an dem ein Kunde im Austausch für Waren oder Dienstleistungen eine Zahlung an den Händler leistet. Für Endkundengeschäfte laufen die Lieferung von Waren, die Anbahnung des Verkaufs und die Zahlung alle am selben Ort ab, der im allgemeinen als "Point of Sale" bezeichnet wird.
+
+Sie können eine Ausgangsrechnung des Typs POS erstellen, indem Sie "Ist POS" ankreuzen. Wenn Sie diese Option markieren, dann werden Sie bemerken, dass einige Felder verborgen werden und neue erscheinen.
+
+> Tipp: Im Einzelhandel werden Sie wahrscheinlich nicht für jeden Kunden einen eigenen Datensatz anlegen. Sie können einen allgemeinen Kunden, den Sie als "Laufkunden" bezeichnen, erstellen und alle Ihre Transaktionen zu diesem Kundendatensatz erstellen.
+
+#### POS einrichten
+
+In ERPNext können über den POS alle Verkaufs- und Einkaufstransaktionen, wie Ausgangsrechnung, Angebot, Kundenauftrag, Lieferantenauftrag, usw. bearbeitet werden. Über folgende zwei Schritte richten Sie den POS ein:
+
+1. Aktivieren Sie die POS-Ansicht über Einstellungen > Anpassen > Funktionseinstellungen
+2. Erstellen Sie einen Datensatz für die [POS-Einstellungen]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/setting-up/pos-setting.html)
+
+#### Auf die POS-Ansicht umschalten
+
+Öffnen Sie eine beliebige Verkaufs- oder Einkaufstransaktion. Klicken Sie auf das Computersymbol .
+
+#### Die verschiedenen Abschnitte des POS
+
+* Lagerbestand aktualisieren: Wenn diese Option angekreuzt ist, werden im Lagerbuch Buchungen erstellt, wenn Sie eine Ausgangsrechnung übertragen. Somit brauchen Sie keinen separaten Lieferschein.
+* Aktualisieren Sie in Ihrer Artikelliste die Lagerinformationen wie Lager (standardmäßig gespeichert), Seriennummer und Chargennummer, sofern sie zutreffen.
+* Aktualisieren Sie die Zahlungsdetails wie das Bankkonto/die Kasse, den bezahlten Betrag etc.
+* Wenn Sie einen bestimmten Betrag ausbuchen, zum Beispiel dann, wenn Sie zu viel gezahltes Geld erhalten, weil der Wechselkurs nicht genau umgerechnet wurde, dann markieren Sie das Feld "Offenen Betrag ausbuchen" und schließen Sie das Konto.
+
+### Einen Artikel hinzufügen
+
+An der Kasse muss der Verkäufer die Artikel, die der Kunde kauft, auswählen. In der POS-Schnittstelle können Sie einen Artikel auf zwei Arten auswählen. Zum einen, indem Sie auf das Bild des Artikels klicken, zum zweiten über den Barcode oder die Seriennummer.
+
+**Artikel auswählen:** Um ein Produkt auszuwählen, klicken Sie auf das Bild des Artikels und legen Sie es in den Einkaufswagen. Ein Einkaufswagen ist ein Ort, der zur Vorbereitung der Zahlung durch den Kunden dient, indem Produktinformationen eingegeben, Steuern angepasst und Rabatte gewährt werden können.
+
+**Barcode/Seriennummer:** Ein Barcode/eine Seriennummer ist eine optionale maschinenlesbare Möglichkeit Daten zu einem Objekt einzulesen, mit dem er/sie verbunden ist. Geben Sie wie auf dem Bild unten angegeben den Barcode/die Seriennummer in das Feld ein und warten Sie einen kurzen Moment, dann wird der Artikel automatisch zum Einkaufswagen hinzugefügt.
+
+
+
+> Tipp: Um die Menge eines Artikels zu ändern, geben Sie die gewünschte Menge im Feld "Menge" ein. Das wird hauptsächliche dann verwendet, wenn ein Artikel in größeren Mengen gekauft wird.
+
+Wenn die Liste Ihrer Produkte sehr lang ist, verwenden Sie das Suchfeld und geben Sie dort den Produktnamen ein.
+
+### Einen Artikel entfernen
+
+Es gibt zwei Möglichkeiten einen Artikel zu entfernen:
+
+* Wählen Sie einen Artikel aus, indem Sie auf die Zeile des Artikels im Einkaufswagen klicken. Klicken Sie dann auf die Schaltfläche "Löschen".
+* Geben Sie für jeden Artikel, den Sie löschen möchten, als Menge "0" ein.
+
+Wenn Sie mehrere verschiedene Artikel auf einmal entfernen möchten, wählen Sie mehrere Zeilen aus und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Löschen".
+
+> Die Schaltfläche "Löschen" erscheint nur, wenn Artikel ausgewählt wurden.
+
+
+
+### Zahlung durchführen
+
+Wenn alle Artikel mit Mengenangabe im Einkaufswagen hinzugefügt wurden, können Sie die Zahlung durchführen. Der Zahlungsprozess untergliedert sich in drei Schritte:
+
+1. Klicken Sie auf "Zahlung durchführen" um das Zahlungsfenster zu öffnen.
+2. Wählen Sie die Zahlungsart aus.
+3. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Zahlen" um das Dokument abzuspeichern.
+
+
+
+Übertragen Sie das Dokument um den Datensatz abzuschliessen. Nachdem das Dokument übertragen wurde, können Sie es entweder ausdrucken oder per E-Mail versenden.
+
+#### Buchungssätze (Hauptbuch) für einen POS
+
+Soll:
+
+* Kunde (Gesamtsumme)
+* Bank / Kasse (Zahlung)
+
+Haben:
+
+* Ertrag (Nettosumme abzüglich Steuern für jeden Artikel)
+* Steuern (Verbindlichkeiten gegenüber dem Finanzamt)
+* Kunde (Zahlung)
+* Abschreibung/Ausbuchung (optional)
+
+Um sich nach dem Übertragen die Buchungen anzusehen, klicken Sie auf Kontobuch ansehen.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/purchase-invoice.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/purchase-invoice.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5d11bfad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/purchase-invoice.md
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+
+# Eingangsrechnung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Die Eingangsrechnung ist das exakte Gegenteil zur Ausgangsrechnung. Es ist die Rechnung, die Ihnen Ihr Lieferant für gelieferte Produkte oder Dienstleistungen schickt. Hier schlüsseln Sie die Aufwände für die Lieferung auf. Eine Eingangsrechnung zu erstellen ist der Erstellung einer Ausgangsrechnung sehr ähnlich.
+
+Um eine neue Eingangsrechnung zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Dokumente > Eingangsrechnung > Neu
+
+oder klicken Sie in einem Lieferantenauftrag oder einem Kaufbeleg auf "Eingangsrechnung erstellen".
+
+
+
+Das Konzept des Veröffentlichungsdatums ist das gleiche wie bei der Ausgangsrechnung. Rechnungsnummer und Rechnungsdatum helfen Ihnen dabei nachzuvollziehen, unter welchen Daten die Rechnung bei Ihrem Lieferanten ausgewiesen ist.
+
+### Einfluß auf die Buchführung
+
+Wie in der Ausgangsrechnung müssen Sie einen Aufwand oder ein Vermögenskonto für jede Zeile Ihrer Postenliste angeben. Dies hilft Ihnen dabei nachzuvollziehen, ob es sich bei dem Posten um einen Vermögenswert oder einen Aufwand handelt. Weiterhin müssen Sie auch eine Kostenstelle eingeben. Das kann auch über die Artikelstammdaten eingestellt werden.
+
+Die Eingangsrechnung wirkt sich wie folgt auf die Konten aus:
+
+Buchungen in doppelter Buchführung für einen typischen Einkaufsvorgang:
+
+**Soll:** Aufwand oder Vermögenswert (Nettosumme ohne Steuern)
+
+**Soll:** Steuern (Mehrwertsteuer als Vermögen oder Aufwand)
+
+**Haben:** Lieferant
+
+Um die Buchungen nach dem Übertragen einer Eingangsrechnung einzusehen, klicken Sie auf "Hauptbuch".
+
+---
+
+### Handelt es sich bei dem Einkauf um einen Aufwand oder um einen Vermögenswert?
+
+Wenn der Artikel sofort nach dem Kauf verbraucht wird oder es sich um eine Dienstleistung handelt, dann handelt es sich um einen Aufwand. Beispiel: Eine Telefonrechnung oder eine Reisekostenabrechnung sind Aufwände - sie wurden schon verbraucht.
+
+Bei Bestandsartikeln, die einen Wert haben, handelt es sich bei diesen Einkäufen noch nicht um Aufwände, weil sie weiterhin einen Wert haben, wenn Sie im Lager verbleiben. Sie sind Vermögenswerte. Wenn es sich um Rohmaterial (welches in einem Prozess verarbeitet wird) handelt, dann werden Sie genau in dem Moment Aufwände, wenn Sie im Prozess verbraucht werden. Wenn sie an einen Kunden verkauft werden, dann werden sie zum Aufwand, wenn Sie an den Kunden versandt werden.
+
+### Vorsteuerabzug
+
+In vielen Ländern verlangt das Steuersystem, dass Sie Steuern abführen, wenn Sie Ihren Lieferanten bezahlen. Diese Steuern beziehen sich wahrscheinlich auf einen Standardsteuersatz. Bei dieser Vorgehensweise, typischerweise dann, wenn ein Lieferant eine bestimmte Zahlungsschwelle überschreitet, und wenn das Produkt besteuerbar ist, müssen Sie möglicherweise einige Steuern abführen (, die Sie im Namen Ihres Lieferanten an den Staat zahlen).
+
+Um das tun zu können, müssen Sie unter "Steuerverbindlichkeiten" oder ähnlichem ein neues Steuerkonto erstellen und dieses Konto mit dem prozentualen Anteil des Abzuges für jede Transaktion belasten.
+
+Für weiterführende Hilfe kontaktieren Sie bitte Ihren Buchhalter.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/sales-invoice.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/sales-invoice.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4a42b750
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/sales-invoice.md
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+
+# Ausgangsrechung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Eine Ausgangsrechnung ist eine Rechnung, die Sie an Ihren Kunden senden, und aufgrund derer der Kunde eine Zahlung leistet. Die Ausgangsrechnung ist ein Buchungsvorgang. Beim Übertragen einer Ausgangsrechnung aktualisiert das System das Forderungskonto und bucht einen Ertrag gegen das Kundenkonto.
+
+Sie können eine Ausgangsrechnung direkt erstellen über:
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Dokumente > Ausgangsrechnung > Neu
+
+oder indem Sie in der rechten Ecke des Lieferscheins auf "Rechnung erstellen" klicken.
+
+
+
+### Auswirkung auf die Buchhaltung
+
+Alle Verkäufe müssen gegen ein Ertragskonto gebucht werden. Das bezieht sich auf ein Konto aus dem Abschnitt "Erträge" in Ihrem Kontenplan. Es hat sich als sinnvoll heraus gestellt, Erträge nach Ertragstyp (wie Erträge aus Produktverkäufen und Erträge aus Dienstleistungen) einzuteilen. Das Ertragskonto muss für jede Zeile der Postenliste angegeben werden.
+
+> Tipp: Um Ertragskonten für Artikel voreinzustellen, können Sie unter dem Artikel oder der Artikelgruppe entsprechende Angaben eintragen.
+
+Das andere Konto, das betroffen ist, ist das Konto des Kunden. Dieses wird automatisch über "Lastschrift für" im Kopfabschnitt angegeben.
+
+Sie müssen auch die Kostenstelle angeben, auf die Ihr Ertrag gebucht wird. Erinnern Sie sich daran, dass Kostenstellen etwas über die Profitabilität verschiedener Geschäftsbereiche aussagen. Sie können in den Artikelstammdaten auch eine Standardkostenstelle eintragen.
+
+### Buchungen in der doppelten Buchführung für einen typischen Verkaufsvorfall
+
+So verbuchen Sie einen Verkauf aufgeschlüsselt:
+
+**Soll:** Kunde (Gesamtsumme)
+
+**Haben:** Ertrag (Nettosumme, abzüglich Steuern für jeden Artikel)
+
+**Haben:** Steuern (Verbindlichkeiten gegenüber dem Staat)
+
+> Um die Buchungen zu Ihrer Ausgangsrechnung nach dem Übertragen sehen zu können, klicken Sie auf Rechnungswesen > Hauptberichte > Hauptbuch.
+
+### Termine
+
+Veröffentlichungsdatum: Das Datum zu dem sich die Ausgangsrechnung auf Ihre Bilanz auswirkt, d. h. auf das Hauptbuch. Das wirkt sich auf alle Ihre Bilanzen in dieser Abrechnungsperiode aus.
+
+Fälligkeitsdatum: Das Datum zu dem die Zahlung fällig ist (wenn Sie auf Rechnung verkauft haben). Das kann automatisch über die Kundenstammdaten vorgegeben werden.
+
+### Wiederkehrende Rechnungen
+
+Wenn Sie einen Vertrag mit einem Kunden haben, bei dem Sie dem Kunden monatlich, vierteljährlich, halbjährlich oder jährlich eine Rechnung stellen, dann können Sie das Feld "Wiederkehrende Rechnung" anklicken. Hier können Sie eingeben in welchen Abständen die Rechnungen erstellt werden sollen, und die Gesamtlaufzeit des Vertrages.
+
+ERPNext erstellt dann automatisch neue Rechnungen und verschickt Sie an die angegebenen E-Mail-Adressen.
+
+---
+
+### Proforma-Rechnung
+
+Wenn Sie einem Kunden eine Rechnung ausstellen wollen, damit dieser eine Anzahlung leisten kann, d. h. Sie haben Zahlung im Voraus vereinbart, dann sollten Sie ein Angebot erstellen und dieses als "Proforma-Rechnung" (oder ähnlich) bezeichnen, indem Sie die Funktion "Druckkopf" nutzen.
+
+"Proforma" bezieht sich auf eine Formsache. Warum sollte man das tun? Wenn Sie eine Ausgangsrechnung buchen, dann erscheint diese bei den Forderungen und den Erträgen. Das ist genau dann nicht optimal, wenn nicht sicher ist, ob Ihr Kunden die Anzahlung auch wirklich leistet. Wenn Ihr Kunden aber dennoch eine "Rechnung" will, dann geben Sie ihm ein Angebot (in ERPNext) das als "Proforma-Rechnung" bezeichnet wird. Auf diese Weise ist jeder glücklich.
+
+Das ist ein weithin gebräuchliches Verfahren. Wir bei Frappe machen das genauso.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/account-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/account-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7024f431
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/account-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+# Konteneinstellungen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+
+
+* Konten gesperrt bis: Sperren Sie Konten-Transaktionen bis zu einem bestimmten Datum. Niemand bis auf die angegebene Rolle kann dann Buchungen zu diesem Konto erstellen oder verändern.
+
+* Rolle darf Konten sperren und gesperrte Buchungen bearbeiten: Benutzer mit dieser Rolle dürfen Konten sperren und Buchungen zu gesperrten Konten erstellen bzw. verändern.
+
+* Kredit-Controller: Rolle, die Transaktionen übertragen darf, die das eingestellte Kreditlimit übersteigen.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/cost-center.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/cost-center.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3b953c54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/cost-center.md
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+
+# Kostenstellenplan
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Ihr Kontenplan ist hauptsächlich darauf ausgelegt, Berichte für den Staat und Steuerbehörden zu erstellen. Die meisten Unternehmen haben viele verschiedene Aktivitäten wie unterschiedliche Produktlinien, Marktsegmente, Geschäftsfelder, usw., die sich einen gemeinsamen Überbau teilen. Sie sollten idealerweise ihre eigene Struktur haben, zu berichten, ob sie gewinnbringend arbeiten oder nicht. Aus diesem Grund, gibt es eine alternative Struktur, die Kostenstellenplan genannt wird.
+
+### Kostenstelle
+
+Sie können eine Baumstruktur von Kostenstellen erstellen, um Ihr Unternehmen besser abzubilden. Jede Ertrags-/jede Aufwandsbuchung wird zusätzlich mit einer Kostenstelle markiert.
+
+Beispiel: Sie haben zwei Arten von Verkäufen
+
+* Verkäufe an Laufkunden
+* Onlineverkäufe
+
+Für Ihre Laufkunden haben Sie keine Versandkosten, für Ihre Onlinekunden keine Miete für Geschäftsräume. Wenn Sie für beide getrennt die Profitabilität ausweisen möchten, sollten Sie für beide Kostenstellen einrichten und alle Verkäufe entweder als "Laufkundengeschäft" oder "Onlinegeschäft" markieren. Machen Sie das bei allen Aufwendungen ebenso.
+
+Wenn Sie dann Ihre Analyse durchführen, haben Sie ein besseres Verständnis dafür, welches Ihrer Geschäfte besser läuft. Da ERPNext eine Option hat, mehrere verschiedene Firmen zu verwalten, können Sie für jede Firma eine Kostenstelle anlegen und getrennt verwalten.
+
+### Kostenstellenplan
+
+Um Ihren Kostenstellenplan einzurichten, gehen Sie zu:
+
+>Rechnungswesen > Einstellungen > Kostenstellenplan
+
+
+
+Kostenstellen helfen Ihnen bei der Erstellung von Budgets für Geschäftstätigkeiten.
+
+### Budgetierung
+
+ERPNext hilft Ihnen dabei, Budgets für Ihre Kostenstellen zu erstellen und zu verwalten. Dies ist dann nützlich, wenn Sie zum Beispiel Onlineverkäufe durchführen. Sie haben ein Budget für Werbung in Suchmaschinen und Sie möchten, dass ERPNext Sie warnt oder davon abhält, mehr auszugeben, als im Budget festgehalten wurde.
+
+Budgets sind auch ein großartiges Hilfsmittel für Planungsvorhaben. Wenn Sie die Planung für das nächste Geschäftsjahr erstellen, stellen Sie typischerweise ein Ziel auf, nach dem sich Ihre Aufwendungen richten. Ein Budget einzurichten stellt nun sicher, dass Ihre Aufwendungen nicht aus dem Ruder laufen, zu keinem Zeitpunkt, so wie Sie es geplant haben.
+
+Sie könne ein Budget in der Kostenstelle einrichten. Wenn Sie saisonale Verkäufe haben, können Sie auch eine Budgetverteilung festlegen, nach der sich das Budget richtet.
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Einstellungen > Budgetverteilung > Neu
+
+
+
+### Budgetaktionen
+
+ERPNext erlaubt es Ihnen:
+
+* Einen Vorgang aufzuhalten
+* Eine Warung zu senden
+* Einen Vorgang zu ignorieren
+
+wen Sie ein Budget übersteigen.
+
+Das wird in den Firmenstammdaten festgelegt.
+
+Auch dann, wenn Sie Ausgaben, die ein Budget übersteigen, ignorieren, werden Sie mit ausreichend Informationen über den "Budget-Abweichungsbericht" versorgt.
+
+> Anmerkung: Wenn Sie ein Budget erstellen, muss dieses in der Kostenstelle für jedes Konto eingestellt werden. Beispiel: Wenn Sie eine Kostenstelle "Onlineverkäufe" haben, können Sie das Werbebudget dadurch einschränken, dass Sie eine entsprechende Zeile anfügen und den Betrag genau angeben.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f1e0220f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+
+# Geschäftsjahr
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Ein Geschäftsjahr wird auch als Finanzjahr oder Budgetjahr bezeichnet. Es wird verwendet um Finanzaussagen für ein Geschäft oder eine Organisation zu treffen. Das Geschäftsjahr kann gleich dem Kalenderjahr sein, muss aber nicht. Aus steuerrechtlichen Gründen können sich Firmen für Steuerzahlungen nach dem Kalenderjahr oder nach dem Geschäftsjahr entscheiden. In den meisten Rechtssystemen schreiben Finanzgesetze solche Berichte alle 12 Monate vor. Es ist jedoch nicht zwingend erforderlich, dass es sich dabei um ein Kalenderjahr (also vom 1. Januar bis 31. Dezember) handelt.
+
+Ein Geschäftsjahr startet normalerweise zu Beginn eines Quartals, wie zum Beispiel am 1. April, 1. Juli oder 1. Oktober. Jedoch geht bei den meisten Firmen das Geschäftsjahr mit dem Kalenderjahr einher und startet am 1. Januar. In den meisten Fällen ist es der einfachere und leichtere Weg. Für einige Organisationen ist es vorteilhaft das Geschäftsjahr zu einem anderen Zeitpunkt zu starten. So können beispielsweise Geschäfte, die saisonal arbeiten zum 1. Juli oder 1. Oktober starten. Ein Geschäft, welches im Herbst den größten Gewinn erwirtschaftet und die größten Ausgaben im Frühling hat, könnte sich auch für den 1. Okober entscheiden. Auf diese Weise weis es wie hoch der Gewinn für das Jahr sein wird und kann seine Ausgaben so anpassen, dass das Gewinnziel erreicht wird.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8f28da92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
+# Einstellungen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f59526c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+fiscal-year
+cost-center
+accounts-settings
+tax-rule
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/tax-rule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/tax-rule.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..dbd103ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/tax-rule.md
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+
+# Steuerregeln
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Sie können festlegen, welche [Steuervorlage]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html) auf eine Verkaufs-/Einkaufstransaktion angewendet wird, wenn Sie die Funktion Steuerregel verwenden.
+
+
+
+Sie können Steuerregeln für Umsatz- und für Vorsteuern erstellen. Wenn Sie eine Transaktion durchführen, wählt das System Steuervorlagen basierend auf den definierten Steuerregeln aus und wendet sie an. Das System filtert Steuerregeln nach der Anzahl der maximal zutreffenden Bedingungen.
+
+Betrachten wir ein Szenario um Steuerregeln besser zu verstehen.
+
+Angenommen wird haben zwei Steuerregeln wie unten abgebildet erstellt.
+
+
+
+
+
+In unserem Beispiel gilt Regel 1 für Indien und Regel 2 für Großbritannien.
+
+Wenn wir nun annehmen, dass wir einen Kundenauftrag für einen Kunden erstellen wollen, dessen Standard-Abrechnungsland Indien ist, dann sollte das System Regel 1 anwenden. Für den Fall, dass das Abrechnungsland des Kunden Großbritannien ist, wird Regel 2 ausgewählt.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8cb2a7ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+
+# Kontenabgleich
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+### Kontoauszug
+
+Ein Kontenabgleich ist ein Prozess, welcher den Unterschied zwischen dem Kontostand, der auf dem Kontoauszug einer Organisation wie von der Bank angegeben erscheint, und dem zugehörigen Betrag, wie er in den eigenen Buchhaltungsuntertalgen der Organisation zu einem bestimmten Zeitpunkt erscheint, aufklärt.
+
+Solche Unterschiede können zum Beispiel dann auftauchen, wenn ein Scheck oder eine Menge an Schecks, die von der Organisation ausgeschrieben wurden, nicht bei der Bank eingereicht wurden, wenn eine Banküberweisung, wie zum Beispiel eine Gutschrift, oder eine Bankgebühr noch nicht in den Buchhaltungsdaten der Organisation erfasst wurden, oder wenn die Bank oder die Organisation selbst einen Fehler gemacht haben.
+
+Der Kontoauszug erscheint in ERPNext in der Form eines Berichtes.
+
+#### Abbilung 1: Kontoauszug
+
+
+
+Wenn Sie den Bericht erhalten, überprüfen Sie bitte, ob das Feld "Abwicklungsdatum" wie bei der Bank angegeben mit dem Kontoauszug übereinstimmt. Wenn die Beträge übereinstimmen, dann werden die Abwicklungsdaten abgeglichen. Wenn die Beträge nicht übereinstimmen, dann überprüfen Sie bitte die Abwicklungsdaten und die Journalbuchungen/Buchungssätze.
+
+Um Abwicklungsbuchungen hinzuzufügen, gehen Sie zu Rechnungswesen > Werkzeuge > Kontenabgleich.
+
+### Werkzeug zum Kontenabgleich
+
+Das Werkzeug zum Kontenabgleich in ERPNext hilft Ihnen dabei Abwicklungsdaten zu den Kontoauszügen hinzuzufügen. Um eine Scheckzahlung abzugleichen gehen Sie zum Punkt "Rechnungswesen" und klicken Sie auf "Kontenabgleich".
+
+**Schritt 1:** Wählen Sie das Bankkonto aus, zu dem Sie abgleichen wollen. Zum Beispiel: Deutsche Bank, Sparkasse, Volksbank usw.
+
+**Schritt 2:** Wählen Sie den Zeitraum aus, zu dem Sie abgleichen wollen.
+
+**Schritt 3:** Klicken Sie auf "Abgeglichene Buchungen mit einbeziehen".
+
+Jetzt werden alle Buchungen im angegebenen Zeitraum in der Tabelle darunter angezeigt.
+
+**Schritt 4:** Klicken Sie auf den Journalbeleg in der Tabelle und aktualisieren Sie das Abwicklungsdatum.
+
+#### Abbildung 2: Werkzeug zum Kontenabgleich
+
+
+
+**Schritt 5:** Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Abwicklungsdatum aktualisieren"
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d9c3cb9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
+# Werkzeuge
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bbfd88cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+bank-reconciliation
+payment-reconciliation
+period-closing-voucher
+payment-tool
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..86b26fcf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+
+# Zahlungsabgleich
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Ein Abgleich ist ein Buchhaltungsprozess, der dazu verwendet wird zwei Datensätze zu vergleichen und sicher zu stellen, dass die Zahlen übereinstimmen und ihre Richtigkeit haben. Es handelt sich hierbei um den Schlüsselprozess, der verwendet wird um zu ermitteln, ob das Geld, was von einem Konto abfliesst, mit dem Betrag übereinstimmt, der ausgegeben wird. Dies stellt sicher, dass die beiden Werte zum Ende eines Aufzeichnungszeitraums ausgegelichen sind. Beim Zahlungsabgleich, werden die Rechnungen mit den Bankzahlungen abgeglichen. Sie können hierzu das Werkzeug zum Zahlungsabgleich verwenden, wenn Sie viele Zahlungen haben, die nicht mit den zugehörigen Rechnungen abgeglichen wurden.
+
+Um das Werkzeug zum Zahlungsabgleich zu verwenden, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Werkzeuge > Zahlungsabgleich
+
+
+
+**Schritt 1:** Wählen Sie das Konto aus, zu dem die Zahlungen abgeglichen werden sollen.
+
+**Schritt 2:** Geben Sie die Belegart an, ob es sich um eine Eingangsrechnung, eine Ausgangsrechnung oder um eine Journalbuchung (einen Eigenbeleg) handelt.
+
+**Schritt 3:** Wählen Sie die Belegnummer aus und klicken Sie auf "Nicht zugeordnete Buchungen aufrufen"
+
+* Alle Zahlungsbuchungen werden in die darunter angezeigte Tabelle übernommen.
+
+**Schritt 4:** Klicken Sie auf die Buchungszeile um einen bestimmten Betrag auszuwählen.
+
+**Schritt 5:** Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Abgleichen".
+
+* Sie erhalten die Nachricht "Betrag erfolgreich zugewiesen".
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/payment-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/payment-tool.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..76fa3283
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/payment-tool.md
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+
+# Zahlungswerkzeug
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+### Zahlungswerkzeug
+
+Die Funktion Zahlungswerkzeug erlaubt es Personal, das kein Buchhalter ist, Journalbuchungen zu erstellen, indem zutreffende Felder in Journalbuchungen mit Konten- und Zahlungsdetails gefüllt werden.
+
+Um zum Zahlungswerkzeug zu gelangen, gehen Sie zu
+
+> Buchführung > Werkzeuge > Zahlungswerkzeug
+
+1\. Wählen Sie den Firmennamen aus.
+
+2\. Wählen Sie den Gruppentyp (Kunde oder Lieferant) und den Namen des Kunden oder Lieferanten aus, zu dem es einen Zahlungsvorgang gibt.
+
+3\. Benutzen Sie das Feld "Erhalten oder bezahlt" um anzugeben, ob Sie eine Zahlung empfangen oder geleistet haben.
+
+4\. Wählen Sie die Zahlungsart und das Konto aus.
+
+5\. Geben Sie Referenznummer und -datum der Zahlung ein, z. B. die Schecknummer und das Ausstellungsdatum des Schecks, wenn die Zahlung per Scheck vorgenommen wurde.
+
+6\. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Offene Posten aufrufen" um alle möglichen Belege, Rechnungen und Bestellungen aufzurufen, zu denen ein Zahlungsvorgang erstellt werden kann. Dies erscheint im Abschnitt "Zu Beleg".
+
+* **Hinweis**: Für den Fall, dass der Benutzer an einen Kunden zahlt oder von einem Lieferanten eine Zahlung erhält, fügen Sie manuell Anmerkungen hinzu, die sich auf zutreffende Rechnungen oder Aufträge beziehen.
+
+
+
+7\. Sobald die Daten angezogen wurden, klicken Sie auf die detaillierte Buchung und geben Sie den Zahlungsbetrag zur Rechnung/Bestellung/zum Beleg ein.
+
+
+
+8\. Klicken Sie auf "Buchungssatz erstellen" um einen neuen Buchungssatz mit den entsprechenden Einzelheiten zu erstellen.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/period-closing-voucher.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/period-closing-voucher.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..52b80262
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/accounts/tools/period-closing-voucher.md
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+
+# Periodenabschlussbeleg
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Zum Ende eines jeden Jahres (oder evtl. auch vierteljährlich oder monatlich) und nachdem Sie die Bücher geprüft haben, können Sie Ihre Kontenbücher abschliessen. Das heißt, dass Sie die besonderen Abschlussbuchungen durchführen können, z. B.:
+
+* Abschreibungen
+* Wertveränderungen des Anlagevermögens
+* Rückstellungen für Steuern und Verbindlichkeiten
+* Aktualisieren von uneinbringbaren Forderungen
+
+usw. und Sie können Ihren Gewinn oder Verlust verbuchen.
+
+Wenn Sie das tun, muss der Kontostand Ihres GuV-Kontos 0 werden. Sie starten ein neues Geschäftsjahr (oder eine Periode) mit einer ausgeglichenen Bilanz und einem jungfräulichen GuV-Konto.
+
+Sie sollten nach den Sonderbuchungen zum aktuellen Geschäftsjahr über Journalbuchungen in ERPNext alle Ihre Ertrags- und Aufwandskonten auf 0 setzen, indem Sie hierhin gehen:
+
+> Buchhaltung > Werkzeuge > Periodenabschlussbeleg
+
+Das **Buchungsdatum** ist das Datum, zu dem die Buchung ausgeführt wird. Wenn Ihr Geschäftsjahr am 31. Dezember endet, dann sollten Sie dieses Datum als Buchungsdatum im Periodenabschlussbeleg auswählen.
+
+Das **Transaktionsdatum** ist das Datum, zu dem der Periodenabschlussbeleg erstellt wird.
+
+Das **abzuschließende Geschäftsjahr** ist das Jahr, für das Sie Ihre Finanzbuchhaltung abschliessen.
+
+
+
+Dieser Beleg überträgt den Gewinn oder Verlust (über die GuV ermittelt) in die Schlußbilanz. Sie sollten ein Konto vom Typ Verbindlichkeiten, wie Gewinnrücklagen oder Überschuss, oder vom Typ Kapital als Schlußkonto auswählen.
+
+Der Periodenabschlussbeleg erstellt Buchungen im Hauptbuch, bei denen alle Ertrags- und Aufwandskonten auf 0 gesetzt werden, und überträgt den Gewinn oder Verlust in die Schlußbilanz.
+
+Wenn Sie Buchungen zu einem abgeschlossenen Geschäftsjahr erstellen, besonders dann, wenn für dieses Geschäftsjahr schon ein Periodenabschlussbeleg erstellt wurde, sollten Sie einen neuen Periodenabschlussbeleg erstellen. Der spätere Beleg überträgt dann nur den offenen Differenzbetrag aus der GuV in die Schlußbilanz.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2e2f59ed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+# Einkauf
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Wenn Ihr Geschäft mit physichen Waren zu tun hat, ist der Einkauf eine zentrale Aktivität. Ihre Lieferanten sind genauso wichtig wie Ihre Kunden und sie müssen mit so viel Informationen versorgt werden wie möglich.
+
+In den richtigen Mengen einzukaufen, kann sich auf Ihren Cash Flow und Ihre Profitabilität auswirken.
+
+ERPNext beinhaltet einen Satz an Transaktionen, die Ihren Einkaufprozess so effektiv und störungsfrei machen, wie nur möglich.
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a12bb064
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+supplier
+supplier-quotation
+purchase-order
+setup
+articles
+purchase-taxes
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/purchase-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/purchase-order.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b148da71
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/purchase-order.md
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+
+# Lieferantenauftrag
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Ein Lieferantenauftrag verhält sich analog zu einem Kundenauftrag. Normalerweise handelt es sich um einen bindenden Vertrag mit Ihrem Lieferanten bei dem Sie versichern eine Anzahl von Artikeln zu den entsprechenden Bedingungen zu kaufen.
+
+Ein Lieferantenauftrag kann automatisch aus einer Materialanfrage oder einem Lieferantenangebot erstellt werden.
+
+### Flußdiagramm der Lieferantenbestellung
+
+
+
+In ERPNext können Sie einen Lieferantenauftrag auch direkt erstellen über:
+
+> Einkauf > Dokumente > Lieferantenauftrag > Neuer Lieferantenauftrag
+
+### Einen Lieferantenauftrag erstellen
+
+
+
+Einen Lieferantenauftrag einzugeben ist sehr ähnlich zu einer Lieferantenanfrage. Zusätzlich müssen Sie Folgendes eingeben:
+
+* Lieferant
+* Für jeden Artikel das Datum, an dem Sie ihn brauchen: Wenn Sie eine Teillieferung erwarten, weis Ihr Lieferant, welche Menge an welchem Datum geliefert werden muss. Das hilft Ihnen dabei eine Überversorgung zu vermeiden. Weiterhin hilft es Ihnen nachzuvollsziehen, wie gut sich Ihr Lieferant an Termine hält.
+
+### Steuern
+
+Wenn Ihnen Ihr Lieferant zusätzliche Steuern oder Abgaben wie Versandgebühren und Versicherung in Rechnung stellt, können Sie das hier eingeben. Das hilft Ihnen dabei die Kosten angemessen mitzuverfolgen. Außerdem müssen Sie Abgaben, die sich auf den Wert des Produktes auswirken, in der Steuertabelle mit berücksichtigen. Sie können für Ihre Steuern auch Vorlagen verwenden. Für weitergehende Informationen wie man Steuern einstellt lesen Sie bitte unter "Vorlage für Einkaufssteuern und Gebühren" nach.
+
+### Mehrwertsteuern (MwSt)
+
+Oft entspricht die Steuer, die Sie für Artikel dem Lieferanten zahlen, derselben Steuer die Ihre Kunden an Sie entrichten. In vielen Regionen ist das, was Sie als Steuer an den Staat abführen, nur die Differenz zwischen dem, was Sie von Ihren Kunden als Steuer bekommen, und dem was Sie als Steuer an Ihren Lieferanten zahlen. Das nennt man Mehrwertsteuer (MwSt).
+
+Beispiel: Sie kaufen Artikel im Wert X ein und verkaufen Sie für 1,3x X. Somit zahlt Ihr Kunde 1,3x den Betrag, den Sie an Ihren Lieferanten zahlen. Da Sie ja für X bereits Steuer über Ihren Lieferanten gezahlt haben, müssen Sie nurmehr die Differenz von 0,3x X an den Staat abführen.
+
+Das kann in ERPNext sehr einfach mitprotokolliert werden, das jede Steuerbezeichnung auch ein Konto ist. Im Idealfall müssen Sie für jede Mehrwertsteuerart zwei Konten erstellen, eines für Einnahmen und eines für Ausgaben, Vorsteuer (Forderung) und Umsatzsteuer (Verbindlichkeit), oder etwas ähnliches. Nehmen Sie hierzu mit Ihrem Steuerberater Kontakt auf, wenn Sie weiterführende Hilfe benötigen, oder erstellen Sie eine Anfrage im Forum.
+
+### Umrechnung von Einkaufsmaßeinheit in Lagermaßeinheit
+
+Sie können Ihre Maßeinheit in der Lieferantenbestellung abändern, wenn es so vom Lager gefordert wird.
+
+Beispiel: Wenn Sie Ihr Rohmaterial in großen Mengen in Großverpackungen eingekauft haben, aber in kleinteiliger Form einlagern wollen (z. B. Kisten und Einzelteile). Das können Sie einstellen, während Sie Ihre Lieferantenbestellung erstellen.
+
+**Schritt 1:*** Im Artikelformular Lagermaßeinheit auf Stück einstellen.
+
+> Anmerkung: Die Maßeinheit im Artikelformular ist die Lagermaßeinheit.
+
+**Schritt 2:** In der Lieferantenbestellung stellen Sie die Maßeinheit als Boxen ein (wenn das Material in Kisten angeliefert wird).
+
+**Schritt 3:** Im Bereich Lager und Referenz wird die Maßeinheit als Stückzahl (aus dem Artikelformular) angezogen.
+
+### Abbildung 3: Umrechung von Einkaufsmaßeinheit in Lagermaßeinheit
+
+
+
+**Schritt 4:** Geben Sie den Umrechnungsfaktor von einer in die andere Maßeinheit an. Beispiel: 100, wenn eine Kiste 100 Stück umfasst.
+
+**Schritt 5:** Die Lagermenge wird dementsprechend angepasst.
+
+**Schritt 6:** Speichern und übertragen Sie das Formular.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/buying-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/buying-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9f90c655
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/buying-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+
+# Einstellungen zum Einkauf
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Hier können Sie Werte einstellen, die in den Transaktionen des Moduls Einkauf zugrunde gelegt werden.
+
+
+
+Lassen Sie uns die verschiedenen Optionen durckgehen.
+
+### 1. Bezeichnung des Lieferanten nach
+
+Wenn ein Lieferant abgespeichert wird, erstellt das System eine eindeutige Kennung bzw. einen eindeutigen Namen für diesen Lieferanten, auf den in verschiedenen Einkaufstransaktionen Bezug genommen wird.
+
+Wenn nicht anders eingestellt, verwendet ERPNext den Lieferantennamen als eindeutige Kennung. Wenn Sie Lieferanten nach Namen wir SUPP-00001, SUP-00002 unterscheiden wollen, oder nach Serien eines bestimmten Musters, stellen Sie die Benahmung der Lieferanten auf "Nummernkreis" ein.
+
+Sie können den Nummernkreis selbst definieren oder einstellen:
+
+> Einstellungen > Einstellungen > Nummernkreis
+
+[Klicken Sie hier, wenn Sie mehr über Nummernkreise wissen möchten]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/naming-series.html)
+
+### 2. Standard-Lieferantentyp
+
+Stellen Sie hier ein, was der Standartwert für den Lieferantentyp ist, wenn ein neuer Lieferant angelegt wird.
+
+### 3. Standard-Einkaufspreisliste
+
+Geben Sie an, was der Standardwert für die Einkaufspreisliste ist, wenn eine neue Einkaufstransaktion erstellt wird.
+
+### 4. Selben Preis während des gesamten Einkaufszyklus beibeihalten
+
+Wenn diese Option aktiviert ist, wird Sie ERPNext unterbrechen, wenn Sie den Artikelpreis in einer Lieferantenbestellung oder in einem auf einer Lieferantenbestellung basierenden Kaufbeleg ändern wollen, d. h. das System behält den selben Preis während des gesamten Einkaufszyklus bei. Wenn Sie den Artikelpreis unbedingt ändern müssen, sollten Sie diese Option deaktivieren.
+
+### 5. Lieferantenbestellung benötigt
+
+Wenn diese Option auf "JA" eingestellt ist, hält Sie ERPNext davon ab, eine Eingangsrechnung oder einen Kaufbeleg zu erstellen ohne vorher einen Lieferantenauftrag erstellt zu haben.
+
+### 6. Kaufbeleg benötigt
+
+Wenn diese Option aUf "JA" eingestellt ist, hält Sie ERPNext davon ab, eine Eingangsrechnung zu erstelln, ohne vorher einen Kaufbeleg erstellt zu haben.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3b7c573d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
+# Einrichtung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3c4b019a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+buying-settings
+supplier-type
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/supplier-type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/supplier-type.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..642bb9df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/setup/supplier-type.md
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+
+# Lieferantentyp
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Ein Lieferant kann von einem Vertragspartner oder Unterauftragnehmer, der normalerweise Waren veredelt, unterschieden werden. Ein Lieferant wird auch als Anbieter beszeichnet. Es gibt unterschiedliche Typen von Lieferanten, je nach Art der Waren und Produkte.
+
+ERPNext ermöglicht es Ihnen Ihre eigenen Kategorien an Lieferanten anzulegen. Diese Kategorien bezeichnet man als Lieferantentyp. Beispiel: Wenn Ihre Lieferanten hauptsächlich Pharmaunternehmen sind und FMCG-Distributoren, können Sie einen neuen Typ erstellen und ihn dementsprechend bezeichnen.
+
+Aufbauend darauf, was die Lieferanten anbieten, werden Sie in verschiedene Kategorien, genannt Lieferantentypen, unterteilt. Es kann unterschiedliche Arten an Lieferanten geben. Sie können Ihre eigenen Kategorien von Lieferantentypen erstellen.
+
+> Einkauf > Einstellungen > Lieferantentyp > Neuer Lieferantentyp
+
+
+
+Sie können Ihre Lieferanten aus einem breiten Angebot verfügbarer Typen in ERPNext klassifizieren. Wählen Sie aus einem Satz vorgegebener Optionen wie Großhändler, Elekktro, Hardware, Regional, Pharma, Rohstoffe, Dienstleistungen, etc. aus.
+
+Wenn Sie Ihre Lieferanten in verschiedene Typen unterteilen, erleichtert Ihnen das die Buchhaltung und die Rechnungslegung.
+
+Geben Sie Ihre neue Lieferantenkategorie ein und speichern Sie.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/supplier-quotation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/supplier-quotation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9c3d4e80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/supplier-quotation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+
+# Lieferantenangebot
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Ein Lieferantenangebot ist eine formale Aussage, ein Versprechen eines potenziellen Lieferanten die Waren oder Dienstleistungen zu liefern, die von einem Käufer zu einem spezifizierten Preis und innerhalb eines bestimmten Zeitraumes benötigt werden. Ein Angebot kann weiterhin Verkaufs- und Zahlungsbedingungen und Garantien enthalten. Die Annahme eines Angebotes durch einen Käufer begründet einen bindenden Vertrag zwischen beiden Parteien.
+
+Sie können ein Lieferantenangebot aus einer Materialanfrage heraus erstellen.
+
+### Flußdiagramm zum Lieferantenangebot
+
+
+
+Sie können ein Lieferantenangebot auch direkt erstellen über:
+
+> Einkauf > Dokumente > Lieferantenangebot > Neues Lieferantenangebot
+
+### Ein Lieferantenangebot erstellen
+
+
+
+Wenn Sie mehrere verschiedene Lieferanten, die Ihnen den selben Artikel liefern, haben, dann senden Sie normalerweise eine Nachricht (Lieferantenanfrage) an verschiedene Lieferanten. In vielen Fällen, besonders dann, wenn Sie den Einkauf zentralisiert haben, werden Sie alle diese Angebote aufzeichnen wollen, so dass
+
+* Sie in der Zukunft einfach Preise vergleichen können.
+* Sie nachvollziehen können, ob allen Lieferanten die Gelegenheit gegeben wurde, ein Angebot abzugeben.
+
+Für die meisten kleinen Geschäfte sind Lieferantenangebote nicht notwendig. Stellen Sie immer die Kosten der Informationsbeschaffung dem Wert des Auftrags gegenüber. Sie sollten das nur für hochpreisige Artikel tun.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/supplier.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/supplier.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4556c440
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/buying/supplier.md
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+
+# Lieferant
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Lieferanten sind Firmen oder Einzelpersonen die Sie mit Produkten oder Dienstleistungen versorgen. Sie werden in ERPNext auf die selbe Art und Weise behandelt wie Kunden.
+
+So können Sie einen neuen Lieferanten erstellen:
+
+> Einkauf > Dokumente > Lieferant > Neu
+
+
+
+### Kontakte und Adressen
+
+Kontakte und Adressen werden in ERPNext getrennt gespeichert, so dass sie mehrere verschiedene Kontakte oder Adressen mit Kunden oder Lieferanten verknüpfen können. Um einen Kontakt oder eine Adresse hinzuzufügen, klicken Sie auf Kontakt > Neu oder Adresse > Neu.
+
+> Tipp: Wenn Sie in einer beliebigen Transaktion einen Lieferanten auswählen, werden ein Kontakt und eine Adresse vorselektiert. Das sind der Standardkontakt und die Standardadresse. Stellen Sie also sicher, dass Sie Ihre Voreinstellungen richtig treffen!
+
+### Einbindung in Konten
+
+In ERPNext gibt es für jeden Lieferanten, für jede Firma einen eigenen Kontodatensatz.
+
+Wenn Sie einen neuen Lieferanten erstellen, legt ERPNext automatisch unter "Verbindlichkeiten" in den Firmendaten im Bereich Lieferanten ein Kontenblatt für den Lieferanten an.
+
+> Tipp für Fortgeschrittene: Wenn Sie die Kontengruppe, unter der das Lieferantenkonto angelegt wird, ändern möchten, können Sie das in den Unternehmensstammdaten einstellen.
+
+Wenn Sie in einer anderen Firma ein Konto erstellen möchten, ändern Sie einfach den Eintrag für Firma und speichern Sie den Lieferanten erneut ab.
+
+> Tipp: Sie können Lieferanten auf über das Datenimport-Werkzeug importieren.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/customer-orders-invoices-and-shipping.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/customer-orders-invoices-and-shipping.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9e51382a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/customer-orders-invoices-and-shipping.md
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+# Kundenaufträge, Rechnungen und Versandstatus
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Das Webportal von ERPNext gibt Ihren Kunden einen schnellen Zugriff auf Ihre Aufträge, Rechnungen und Sendungen.
+Kunden können den Status Ihrer Bestellungen, Rechnungen und des Versandes nachprüfen, indem sie sich auf der Webseite einloggen.
+
+
+
+Sobald eine Bestellung aufgegeben wurde, entweder über den Einkaufswagen oder aus ERPNext heraus, kann Ihr Kunde die Bestellung ansehen und den Abrechnungs- und Versandstatus nachverfolgen. Wenn die Rechnung und die Zahlung zu einer Bestellung übertragen wurden, kann der Kunde auch hier den aktuellen Stand auf einen Blick nachvollziehen.
+
+
+
+### Rechnung mit Status "gezahlt"
+
+
+
+### Rechnung mit Status "abgerechnet"
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..218cc4b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+
+# Kundenportal
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Das Kundenportal wurde so entworfen, dass Kunden einen einfachen Zugriff auf für sie relevanten Informationen haben.
+
+Dieses Portal erlaubt es Kunden sich anzumelden und zutreffende Informationen herauszufinden, die sie betreffen. Sie können z. B. die Historie der Kommunikation durch E-Mails nachverfolgen oder den Status Ihrer Bestellung herausfinden.
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a029f6b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+customer-orders-invoices-and-shipping-status
+portal-login
+sign-up
+issues
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/issues.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/issues.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9b6f6b3a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/issues.md
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+# Fälle
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Kunden können über das Kundenportal sehr einfach Fälle eröffnen. Eine einfaches und intuitive Schnittstelle ermöglichst es dem Kunden ihre Probleme und Anliegen zu schildern. Sie können weiterhin den kompletten Kommunikationsvorgang nachverfolgen.
+
+### Ticketliste leeren
+
+
+### Neuer Fall
+
+
+
+### Fall öffnen
+
+
+
+### Fall beantworten
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/portal-login.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/portal-login.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..79d28eb3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/portal-login.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Einloggen ins Portal
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Um sich in ein Kundenkonto einzuloggen, muss der Kunde seine Email-ID und das Passwort angeben, welche ihm von ERPNext während des Registrierungsprozesses zugesendet wurden.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/sign-up.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/sign-up.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..509d13c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customer-portal/sign-up.md
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+
+# Registrieren
+
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Kunden müssen sich über die Webseite als Kunden registrieren.
+
+### Schritt 1: Klicken Sie auf das Registrieren-Symbol
+
+
+
+### Schritt 3: Geben Sie Ihren Kundennamen und Ihre ID ein
+
+
+
+Wenn der Registrierungsprozess abgeschlossen ist, wird dem Kunden eine E-Mail mit dem Passwort zugeschickt.
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-doctype.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-doctype.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..52029090
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-doctype.md
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+
+# Benutzerdefinierter DocType
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Ein DocType oder Dokumententyp wird dazu verwendet Formulare in ERPNext einzufügen. Formulare wie Kundenauftrag, Ausgangsrechnung und Fertigungsauftrag werden im Hintergrund als DocType verarbeitet. Nehmen wir an, dass wir für ein Buch einen benutzerdefinierten DocType erstellen.
+
+Ein benutzerspezifischer DocType erlaubt es Ihnen nach Ihren Bedürfnissen benutzerspezifische Formulare in ERPNext einzufügen.
+
+Um einen neuen DocType zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Einstellungen > Anpassen > Doctype > Neu
+
+### Einzelheiten zum DocType
+
+1. Modul: Wählen Sie das Modul aus, in dem dieser DocType verwendet wird.
+2. Dokumententyp: Geben Sie an, ob dieser DocType Hauptdaten befördern oder Transaktionen nachverfolgen soll. Der DocType für das Buch wird als Vorlage hinzugefügt.
+3. Ist Untertabelle: Wenn dieser DocType als Tabelle in einen anderen DocType eingefügt wird, wie die Artikeltabelle in den DocType Kundenauftrag, dann sollten Sie auch "Ist Untertabelle" ankreuzen. Ansonsten nicht.
+4. Ist einzeln: Wenn diese Option aktiviert ist, wird dieser DocType zu einem einzeln verwendeten Formular, wie die Vertriebseinstellungen, die nicht von Benutzern reproduziert werden können.
+5. Benutzerdefiniert?: Dieses Feld ist standardmäßig aktiviert, wenn ein benutzerdefinierter DocType hinzugefügt wird.
+
+
+
+### Felder
+
+In der Tabelle Felder können Sie die Felder (Eigenschaften) des DocTypes (Artikel) hinzufügen.
+
+Felder sind viel mehr als Datenbankspalten; sie können sein:
+
+1. Spalten in der Datenbank
+2. Wichtig für das Layout (Bereiche, Spaltentrennung)
+3. Untertabellen (Feld vom Typ Tabelle)
+4. HTML
+5. Aktionen (Schaltflächen)
+6. Anhänge oder Bilder
+
+
+
+Wenn Sie Felder hinzufügen, müssen Sie den **Typ** angeben. Für eine Bereichs- oder Spaltentrennung ist die **Bezeichnung** optional. Der **Name** (Feldname) ist der Name der Spalte in der Datenbank.
+
+Sie können auch weitere Einstellungen des Feldes eingeben, so z. B. ob es zwingend erforderlich ist, schreibgeschützt, usw.
+
+### Benennung
+
+In diesem Abschnitt können Sie Kriterien definieren nach denen Dokumente dieses DocTypes benannt werden. Es gibt viele verschiedene Kriterien nach denen ein Dokument benannt werden kann, wie z. B. dem Wert in diesem spezifischen Feld, oder die Benamungsserie, oder der Wert der vom Benutzer an der Eingabeaufforderung eingegeben wird, die angezeit wird, wenn ein Dokument abgespeichert wird. Im folgenden Beispiel benennen wir auf Grundlage des Wertes im Feld **book_name**.
+
+
+
+### Berechtigung
+
+In dieser Tabelle können Sie Rollen und Berechtigungs-Rollen für diese für die betreffenden DocTypes auswählen.
+
+
+
+### DocTypes abspeichern
+
+Wenn Sie einen DocType abspeichern, erscheint ein Popup-Fenster über welches Sie den Namen des DocTypes eingeben können.
+
+
+
+### Der DocType im System
+
+Um den DocType zu aktivieren, öffnen Sie das Modul, welches Sie für den DocType definiert haben. Da wird den DocType "Books" im Modul Personalwesen erstellt haben, gehen Sie hierhin um Zugriff zu erhalten:
+
+> Personalwesen > Dokumente > Buch
+
+
+
+### Buchvorlage
+
+Wenn Sie die Felder ausfüllen, schaut das ganze dann so aus.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-field.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-field.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a6e23f38
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-field.md
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+
+# Benutzerdefiniertes Feld
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Die Funktion "Benutzerdefiniertes Feld" erlaubt es Ihnen Felder in bestehenden Vorlagen und Transaktionen nach Ihren Wünschen zu gestalten. Wenn Sie ein benutzerdefiniertes Feld einfügen, können Sie seine Eigenschaften angeben:
+
+* Feldname
+* Feldtyp
+* Erforderlich/nicht erforderlich
+* Einfügen nach Feld
+
+Um ein benutzerdefiniertes Feld hinzuzufügen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Einstellungen > Anpassen > Benutzerdefiniertes Feld > Neu
+
+Sie können ein neues benutzerdefiniertes Feld auch über das [Werkzeug zum Anpassen von Feldern]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/customize-form) einfügen.
+
+In einem benutzerdefinierten Formular finden Sie für jedes Feld die Plus(+)-Option. Wenn Sie auf dieses Symbol klicken, wird eine neue Zeile oberhalb dieses Feldes eingefügt. Sie können die Einstellungen für Ihr Feld in der neu eingefügten leeren Zeile eingeben.
+
+
+
+Im Folgenden sind die Schritte aufgeführt, wie man ein benutzerdefiniertes Feld in ein bestehendes Formular einfügt.
+
+### Neues benutzerdefiniertes Feld in Formular / Zeile in einem benutzerdefinierten Formular
+
+Wie bereits oben angesprochen, können Sie ein benutzerdefiniertes Feld über das Formular zum benutzerdefinierten Feld oder über ein benutzerdefiniertes Formular einfügen.
+
+### Dokument/Formular auswählen
+
+Wählen Sie die Transaktion oder die Vorlage, in die sie ein benutzerdefiniertes Feld einfügen wollen. Nehmen wir an, dass Sie ein benutzerdefiniertes Verknüpfungsfeld in ein Angebotsformular einfügen wollen; das Dokument soll "Angebot" heißen.
+
+
+
+### Feldbezeichnung einstellen
+
+Die Bezeichnung des benutzerdefinierten Feldes wird basierend auf seinem Namen eingestellt. Wenn Sie ein benutzerdefiniertes Feld mit einem bestimmten Namen erstellen wollen, aber mit einer sich davon unterscheidenden Bezeichnung, dann sollten Sie erst die Bezeichnung angeben, da Sie den Feldnamen noch einstellen wollen. Nach dem Speichern des benutzerdefinierten Feldes können Sie die Feldbezeichnung wieder ändern.
+
+
+
+### Einstellen, nach welchem Element eingefügt werden soll ("Einfügen nach")
+
+Diese Auswahl enthält alle bereits existierenden Felder des ausgewählten Formulars/des DocTypes. Ihr benutzerdefiniertes Feld wird nach dem Feld eingefügt, das Sie unter "Einfügen nach" auswählen.
+
+
+
+### Feldtyp auswählen
+
+Klicken Sie hier um weitere Informationen über Feldtypen, die Sie bei einem benutzerdefinierten Feld auswählen können, zu erhalten.
+
+
+
+### Optionen einstellen
+
+Wenn Sie ein Verknüpfungsfeld erstellen,dann wird der Name des DocType, mit dem dieses Feld verknüpft werden soll, in das Feld "Optionen" eingefügt. Klicken Sie [hier]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/creating-custom-link-field) um weitere Informationen darüber zu erhalten, wie man benutzerdefinierte Verknüpfungsfelder erstellt.
+
+
+
+Wenn der Feldtyp als Auswahlfeld (Drop Down-Feld) angegeben ist, dann sollten alle möglichen Ergebnisse für dieses Feld im Optionen-Feld aufgelistet werden. Die möglichen Ergebnisse sollten alle in einer eigenen Zeile stehen.
+
+Bei anderen Feldtypen, wie Daten, Datum, Währung usw. lassen Sie das Optionen-Feld leer.
+
+### Weitere Eigenschaften
+
+Sie können weitere Eigenschaften auswählen wie:
+
+1. Ist Pflichtfeld: Ist das Feld zwingend erforderlich oder nicht?
+2. Beim Drucken verbergen: Soll dieses Feld beim Ausdruck sichtbar sein oder nicht?
+3. Feldbeschreibung: Hier steht eine kurze Beschreibung des Feldes die gleich unter dem Feld erscheint.
+4. Standardwert: Der Wert in diesem Feld wird automatisch aktualisiert.
+5. Schreibgeschützt: Wenn diese Option aktiviert ist, kann das benutzerdefinierte Feld nicht geändert werden.
+6. Beim Übertragen zulassen: Wenn diese Option ausgewählt wird, ist es erlaubt den Wert des Feldes zu ändern, wenn er in einer Transaktion übertragen wird.
+
+
+
+### Benutzerdefiniertes Feld löschen
+
+Wenn er die Berechtigung hat, kann ein Benutzer ein benutzerdefiniertes Feld löschen. Zum Beisiel dann, wenn es standardmäßig gelöscht wird, weil ein anderes benutzerdefiniertes Feld mit gleichem Namen hinzugefügt wurde. Dann sollten Sie das neue Feld automatisch dort angeordnet sehen, wo das alte Feld gelöscht wurde.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/custom-button.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/custom-button.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..40979cbd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/custom-button.md
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+
+# Eine benutzerdefinierte Schaltfläche hinzufügen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+ frappe.ui.form.on("Event", "refresh", function(frm) {
+ frm.add_custom_button(__("Do Something"), function() {
+ // When this button is clicked, do this
+
+ var subject = frm.doc.subject;
+ var event_type = frm.doc.event_type;
+
+ // do something with these values, like an ajax request
+ // or call a server side frappe function using frappe.call
+ $.ajax({
+ url: "http://example.com/just-do-it",
+ data: {
+ "subject": subject,
+ "event_type": event_type
+ }
+
+ // read more about $.ajax syntax at http://api.jquery.com/jquery.ajax/
+
+ });
+ });
+ });
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/custom-script-fetch-values-from-master.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/custom-script-fetch-values-from-master.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7b2bae1c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/custom-script-fetch-values-from-master.md
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+
+# Benutzerdefiniertes Skript holt sich Werte aus der Formularvorlage
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Um einen Wert oder eine Verknüpfung auf eine Auswahl zu holen, verwenden Sie die Methode add_fetch.
+
+> add_fetch(link_fieldname, source_fieldname, target_fieldname)
+
+### Beispiel
+
+Sie erstellen ein benutzerdefiniertes Feld **VAT ID** (vat_id) unter **Kunde** und **Ausgangsrechnung** und Sie möchten sicher stellen, dass dieser Wert immer aktualisiert wird, wenn Sie einen Kunden oder eine Ausgangsrechnung aufrufen.
+
+Fügen Sie also im Skript Ausgangsrechnung Kunde Folgendes hinzu:
+
+> cur_frm.add_fetch('customer','vat_id','vat_id')
+
+* * *
+
+Sehen Sie hierzu auch: [Wie man ein benutzerdefiniertes Skript erstellt]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/).
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/date-validation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/date-validation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4ca8cf31
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/date-validation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+
+# Datenvalidierung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+ frappe.ui.form.on("Event", "validate", function(frm) {
+ if (frm.doc.from_date < get_today()) {
+ frappe.msgprint(__("You can not select past date in From Date"));
+ frappe.throw(__("past date selected"))
+ }
+ });
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/generate-code-based-on-custom-logic.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/generate-code-based-on-custom-logic.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..80af885f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/generate-code-based-on-custom-logic.md
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+
+# Kode auf Basis von Custom Logic erstellen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Fügen Sie diesen Kode so in einem benutzerdefinierten Skript eines Artikels hinzu, dass der neue Artikelkode generiert wird, bevor der neue Artikel abgespeichert wird.
+
+(Vielen Dank an Aditya Duggal)
+
+ cur_frm.cscript.custom_validate = function(doc) {
+ // clear item_code (name is from item_code)
+ doc.item_code = "";
+
+ // first 2 characters based on item_group
+ switch(doc.item_group) {
+ case "Test A":
+ doc.item_code = "TA";
+ break;
+ case "Test B":
+ doc.item_code = "TB";
+ break;
+ default:
+ doc.item_code = "XX";
+ }
+
+ // add next 2 characters based on brand
+ switch(doc.brand) {
+ case "Brand A":
+ doc.item_code += "BA";
+ break;
+ case "Brand B":
+ doc.item_code += "BB";
+ break;
+ default:
+ doc.item_code += "BX";
+ }
+ }
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..94a00897
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+# Beispiele für benutzerdefinierte Skripte
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Wie erstellt man ein benutzerdefiniertes Skript?
+
+Sie erstellen ein benutzerdefiniertes Skript wie folgt (Sie müssen dafür Systemadministrator sein!):
+
+1. Gehen Sie zu: Einstellungen > Benutzerdefiniertes Skript > Neu
+2. Wählen Sie den DocType, in dem Sie ein benutzerdefiniertes Skript hinzufügen möchten, aus.
+
+* * *
+
+### Anmerkungen
+
+1. Auf benutzerdefinierte Skripte für Server kann nur der Administrator zugreifen.
+2. Benutzerdefinierte Skripte für Clients werden in Javascript geschrieben, die für Server in Python.
+3. Zum Testen gehen Sie auf Werkzeuge > Cache leeren und laden Sie die Seite neu, wenn Sie ein benutzerdefiniertes Skript aktualisieren.
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2b497555
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+custom-script-fetch-values-from-master
+date-validation
+generate-item-code-based-on-custom-logic
+make-read-only-after-saving
+restrict-cancel-rights
+restrict-purpose-of-stock-entry
+restrict-user-based-on-child-record
+sales-invoice-id-based-on-sales-order-id
+update-date-field-based-on-value-in-other-date-field
+custom-button
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/make-read-only-after-saving.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/make-read-only-after-saving.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..96993177
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/make-read-only-after-saving.md
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+
+# Nach dem Speichern "Schreibschutz" einstellen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Verwenden Sie die Methode cur_frm.set_df_property um die Anzeige Ihres Feldes zu aktualiseren.
+
+In diesem Skript verwenden wir auch die Eigenschaft __islocal des Dokuments um zu prüfen ob das Dokument wenigstens einmal abgespeichert wurde oder nie. Wenn __islocal gleich 1 ist, dann wurde das Dokument noch nie gespeichert.
+
+ frappe.ui.form.on("MyDocType", "refresh", function(frm) {
+ // use the __islocal value of doc, to check if the doc is saved or not
+ frm.set_df_property("myfield", "read_only", frm.doc.__islocal ? 0 : 1);
+ }
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-cancel-rights.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-cancel-rights.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c2f8b8ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-cancel-rights.md
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+
+# Abbruchrechte einschränken
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Fügen Sie dem Ereignis custom_before_cancel eine Steuerungsfunktion hinzu:
+
+ cur_frm.cscript.custom_before_cancel = function(doc) {
+ if (frappe.user_roles.indexOf("Accounts User")!=-1 && frappe.user_roles.indexOf("Accounts Manager")==-1
+ && user_roles.indexOf("System Manager")==-1) {
+ if (flt(doc.grand_total) > 10000) {
+ frappe.msgprint("You can not cancel this transaction, because grand total \
+ is greater than 10000");
+ frappe.validated = false;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-purpose-of-stock-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-purpose-of-stock-entry.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..154c30fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-purpose-of-stock-entry.md
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+
+# Anliegen der Lagerbuchung einschränken
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+ frappe.ui.form.on("Material Request", "validate", function(frm) {
+ if(user=="user1@example.com" && frm.doc.purpose!="Material Receipt") {
+ frappe.msgprint("You are only allowed Material Receipt");
+ frappe.throw(__("Not allowed"));
+ }
+ }
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-user-based-on-child-record.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-user-based-on-child-record.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8aca94ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-user-based-on-child-record.md
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+
+# Benutzer auf Grundlage eines Unterdatensatzes einschränken
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+ // restrict certain warehouse to Material Manager
+ cur_frm.cscript.custom_validate = function(doc) {
+ if(frappe.user_roles.indexOf("Material Manager")==-1) {
+ var restricted_in_source = frappe.model.get_list("Stock Entry Detail",
+ {parent:cur_frm.doc.name, s_warehouse:"Restricted"});
+
+ var restricted_in_target = frappe.model.get_list("Stock Entry Detail",
+ {parent:cur_frm.doc.name, t_warehouse:"Restricted"});
+
+ if(restricted_in_source.length || restricted_in_target.length) {
+ frappe.msgprint(__("Only Material Manager can make entry in Restricted Warehouse"));
+ frappe.validated = false;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/sales-invoice-id-based-on-sales-order-id.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/sales-invoice-id-based-on-sales-order-id.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8d3b1ff3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/sales-invoice-id-based-on-sales-order-id.md
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+
+# ID der Ausgangsrechnung auf Grundlage der ID des Kundenauftrags
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Das unten abgebildete Skript erlaubt es Ihnen die Benamungsserien der Ausgangsrechnungen und der zugehörigen Eingangsrechnungen gleich zu schalten. Die Ausgangsrechnung verwendet das Präfix M- aber die Nummer kopiert den Namen (die Nummer) des Kundenauftrags.
+
+Beispiel: Wenn der Kundenauftrag die ID SO-12345 hat, dann bekommt die zugehörige Ausgangsrechnung die ID M-12345.
+
+ frappe.ui.form.on("Sales Invoice", "refresh", function(frm){
+ var sales_order = frm.doc.items[0].sales_order.replace("M", "M-");
+ if (!frm.doc.__islocal && sales_order && frm.doc.name!==sales_order){
+ frappe.call({
+ method: 'frappe.model.rename_doc.rename_doc',
+ args: {
+ doctype: frm.doctype,
+ old: frm.docname,
+ "new": sales_order,
+ "merge": false
+ },
+ });
+ }
+ });
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/update-field-based-on-value-in-other-date-field.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/update-field-based-on-value-in-other-date-field.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ff6c8ec0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/update-field-based-on-value-in-other-date-field.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+# Datenfeld basierend auf dem Wert in einem anderen Datenfeld aktualisieren
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Das unten abgebildete Skript trägt automatisch einen Wert in das Feld Datum ein, das auf einem Wert in einem anderen Skript basiert.
+
+Beispiel: Das Produktionsdatum muss sich zwei Tage vor dem Lieferdatum befinden. Wenn Sie das Feld zum Produktionsdatum haben, wobei es sich um ein Feld vom Typ Datum handelt, dann können Sie mit dem unten abgebildeten Skript das Datum in diesem Feld automatisch aktualisieren, zwei Tage vor dem Lieferdatum.
+
+ cur_frm.cscript.custom_delivery_date = function(doc, cdt, cd){
+ cur_frm.set_value("production_due_date", frappe.datetime.add_days(doc.delivery_date, -2));
+ }
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c65f0cbd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+# Benutzerdefinierte Skripte
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Wenn Sie Formate von ERPNext-Formularen ändern wollen, können Sie das über benutzerdefinierte Skripte tun. Beispiel: Wenn Sie die zum Lead-Formular nach dem Abspeichern die Schaltfläche "Übertragen" hinzufügen möchten, können Sie das machen, indem Sie sich ein eigenes Skript erstellen.
+
+> Einstellungen > Anpassen > Benutzerdefiniertes Skript
+
+
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bd3178ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+custom-script-examples
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/customize-form.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/customize-form.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ff045f53
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/customize-form.md
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+
+# Formular anpassen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Bevor wir uns an das Anpassungswerkzeug heran wagen, klicken Sie [hier](https://kb.frappe.io/kb/customization/form-architecture) um den Aufbau von Formularen in ERPNext zu verstehen. Das soll Ihnen dabei helfen das Anpassungswerkzeug effektiver zu nutzen.
+
+Das Werkzeug "Formular anpassen" versetzt Sie in die Lage die Einstellungen eines Standardfeldes an Ihre Bedürfnisse anzupassen. Nehmen wir an, dass wir das Feld "Projektname" als zwingend erforderlich im Kundenaufrag kennzeichnen wollen. Im Folgenden finden Sie die Schritte, die dazu notwendig sind.
+
+### Schritt 1: Zum benutzerdefinierten Formular gehen
+
+Sie können zum benutzerdefinierten Formular folgendermaßen gelangen:
+
+> Einstellungen > Anpassen > Benutzerdefiniertes Formular.
+
+Der Systemmanager findet die Option "Benutzerdefiniertes Formular" auch in der Liste Kundenauftrag (bzw. jedes andere Formular für diesen Sachverhalt).
+
+
+
+### Schritt 2: Wählen Sie den DocType/das Dokument
+
+Wählen Sie jetzt den DocType/das Dokument aus, welcher/s das anzupassende Feld enthält.
+
+
+
+### Schritt 3: Bearbeiten Sie die Eigenschaften
+
+Wenn Sie den DocType/das Dokument ausgewählt haben, werden alle Felder als Zeilen in der Tabelle des benutzerdefinierten Formulars aktualisiert. Scrollen sie bis zu dem Feld, das Sie bearbeiten wollen, in diesem Fall "Projektname".
+
+Wenn Sie auf die Zeile "Projektname" klicken, werden Felder mit verschiedenen Eigenschaften für dieses Feld angezeigt. Um die Eigenschaft "Ist zwingend erforderlich" für ein Feld anzupassen gibt es ein Feld "Zwingend erfoderlich". Wenn Sie dieses Feld markieren, wird das Feld "Projektname" im Angebotsformular als zwingend erforderlich eingestellt.
+
+
+
+Genauso können Sie folgende Eigenschaften eines Feldes anpassen.
+
+* Ändern von Feldtypen (Beispiel: Wenn Sie die Anzahl der Dezimalstellen erhöhen wollen, können Sie einige Felder von Float auf Währung umstellen).
+* Ändern von Bezeichnungen, um sie an Ihre Branchen und Ihre Sprache anzupassen.
+* Bestimmte Felder als zwingend erfoderlich einstellen.
+* Bestimmte Felder verbergen.
+* Ändern des Erscheinungsbildes (Anordnung von Feldern). Um das zu tun, wählen Sie ein Feld im Gitter aus und klicken Sie auf "Up" oder "Down" in der Werkzeugleiste des Gitters.
+* Hinzufügen / Ändern von "Auswahl"-Optionen (Beispiel: Sie können bei Leads weitere Quellen hinzufügen).
+
+### Schritt 4: Aktualisieren
+
+
+
+Bevor Sie das Formular "Kundenauftrag" testen, sollten Sie den Cache leeren und den Inhalt des Browserfensters aktualiseren, um die Änderungen wirksam werden zu lassen.
+
+Bei einem benutzerdefinierten Formular können Sie auch Anhänge erlauben, die maximal zulässige Anzahl von Anhängen festlegen und das Stanard-Druckformat einstellen.
+
+> Anmerkung: Obwohl wir Ihnen möglichst viele Möglichkeiten einräumen wollen, Ihr ERP-System an die Erfordernisse Ihres Geschäftes anzupassen, empfehlen wir Ihnen, keine "wilden" Änderungen an den Formularen vorzunehmen. Die Änderungen können sich nämlich auf bestimmte Operationen auswirken und Ihre Formulare beschädigen. Machen Sie kleine Änderungen und prüfen Sie die Auswirkungen bevor Sie fortfahren.
+
+Im Folgenden erhalten Sie eine Auflistung der Eigenschaften, die Sie für ein bestimmtes Feld eines benutzerdefinierten Formulars anpassen können.
+
+
+| Feldeigenschaft | +Verwendungszweck | +
| Beim Drucken verbergen | +Verbirgt das Feld beim Standarddruck | +
| Verborgen | +Verbirgt das Feld im Formular zur Datenerfassung. | +
| Zwingend erforderlich | +Stellt das Feld als zwingend erforderlich ein. | +
| Feldtyp | +Klicken Sie hier um mehr über Feldtypen zu erfahren. | +
| Optionen | +Hier können Sie Auswahlmöglichkeiten eines DropDown-Feldes auflisten. Für ein Verknüpfungsfeld kann auch der zutreffende DocType mit angegeben werden. | +
| Beim Übertragen erlauben | +Wenn Sie diesen Punkt aktivieren, kann der Benutzer den Wert des Feldes auch in einem übertragenen Formular aktualisieren. | +
| Standard | +Der hier angegebene Wert wird beim Erstellen eines neuen Datensatzes angezogen. | +
| Beschreibung | +Enthält Erläuterungen zum Feld zum besseren Verständis. | +
| Bezeichnung | +Das ist der Feldname, wie er im Formular angezeigt wird. | +
+
+### Fest eingestellte und bearbeitbare Bezeichnungen
+
+Wenn Ihre Bezeichnung als Standard-Bezeichnung generiert wurde, kann sie vom Benutzer durch klicken auf den Kopf des Dokuments bearbeitet werden.
+
+
+
+Wenn Sie eine fest eingestellte Bezeichnung haben wollen, können Sie dies als Regel unter **Optionen** einstellen. Auf diese Weise wird die Bezeichnung jedesmal automatisch aktualisiert, wenn das Dokument aktualisiert wird.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..01b27124
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.md
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+
+# Module und Funktionalitäten verbergen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+### Nicht benutzte Funktionen verbergen
+
+Wie Sie aus dieser Anleitung ersehen können, beinhaltet ERPNext viele verschiedene Funktionen, die Sie evtl. gar nicht benötigen. Wir haben beobachtet, dass Nutzer im Durchschnitt ca. 20% der Funktionen verwenden, jedoch unterschiedliche 20%. Um Felder, die sich auf Funktionen beziehen, die Sie aber nicht benötigen, zu verbergen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Einstellungen > Werkzeuge > Funktionen verbergen/einblenden
+
+
+
+Aktivieren/Deaktivieren Sie die Funktionen, die Sie verwenden möchten bzw. nicht verwenden wollen und laden Sie Ihre Seite neu, damit die Änderungen übernommen werden.
+
+* * *
+
+### Modulsymbole verbergen
+
+Um Module (Symbole) auf der Homepage zu verbergen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Einstellungen > Werkzeuge > Moduleinstellungen
+
+
+
+> Anmerkung: Module werden automatisch für Benutzer verborgen, die keine Berechtigungen für Dokumente dieses Moduls haben. Beispiel: Wenn ein Benutzer keine Berechtigungen für Lieferantenauftrag, Materialanfrage und Lieferant hat, dann wird das Modul "Einkauf" automatisch verborgen.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3e008d89
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+
+# ERPNext anpassen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+ERPNext bietet viele Werkzeuge um das System kundenspezifisch anzupassen.
+
+Sie können Formulare vereinfachen, indem Sie Funktionalitäten, die Sie nicht benötigen, über die Einstellmöglichkeit "Funktionalitäten ausschalten und Module einrichten" verstecken. Zudem können Sie benutzerdefinierte Felder hinzufügen, die Einstellungen des Formulars ändern (wie dem Drop-Down-Menü weitere Optionen hinzufügen oder Felder über das Werkzeug "Formularansicht anpassen" verbergen) und über HTML-Vorlagen eigene Druckformate erstellen. Außerdem können Sie mehrere verschiedene Briefköpfe für Ihre Ausdrucke erstellen.
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bf6d52e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+custom-field
+custom-doctype
+custom-scripts
+customize-form
+document-title
+hiding-modules-and-features
+print-format
+custom-scripts
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/print-format.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/print-format.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f67ddee2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/customize-erpnext/print-format.md
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+
+# Druckformat
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Druckformate sind die Erscheinungsbilder der Ausdrucke, wenn Sie eine E-Mail oder eine Transaktion wie eine Ausgangsrechnung drucken. Es gibt zwei Arten von Druckformaten:
+
+* Das automatisch generierte "Standard"-Druckformat: Diese Art der Formatierung folgt den Vorgaben von ERPNext.
+* Das auf dem Dokument "Druckformat" basierende Format: Hier gibt es HTML-Vorlagen, die mit Daten gefüllt werden.
+
+ERPNext bringt eine bestimmte Menge von vordefinierten Vorlagen in drei Stilarten mit: Modern, Classic und Standard.
+
+Sie können die Vorlagen verändern und eigene erstellen. Die ERPNext-Vorlagen zu bearbeiten, ist nicht erlaubt, weil Sie bei einem Update auf eine neuere Programmversion überschrieben werden können.
+
+Um Ihre eigenen Versionen zu erstellen, öffnen Sie eine bereits vorhandene Vorlage über:
+
+> Einstellungen > Druck > Druckformate
+
+
+
+Wählen Sie den Typ des Druckformats, welches Sie bearbeiten wollen, und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Kopieren" in der rechten Spalte. Es öffnet sich ein neues Druckformat mit der Einstellung NEIN für "für "Ist Standard" und Sie kännen das Druckformat bearbeiten.
+
+Ein Druckformat zu bearbeiten ist eine langwierige Angelegenheit und Sie müssen etwas Grundwissen über HTML, CSS und Python mitbringen, um dies verstehen zu können. Wenn Sie Hilfe benötigen, erstellen Sie bitte im Forum eine Anfrage.
+
+Printformate werden auf der Serverseite über die [Programmiersprache Jinja Templating](http://jinja.pocoo.org/docs/templates/) erstellt. Alle Formulare haben Zugriff auf doc object, das Informationen über das Dokument enthält, welches formatiert wird. Sie können über das Frappe-Modul auch auf oft verwendete Hilfswerkzeuge zugreifen.
+
+Zum Bearbeiten des Erscheinungsbildes bietet sich das [Bootstrap CSS Framework](http://getbootstrap.com/) an und Sie können die volle Bandbreite dieses Werkzeuges nutzen.
+
+> Anmerkung: Vorgedrucktes Briefpapier zu verwenden ist normalerweise keine gute Idee, weil Ihre Ausdrucke unfertig (inkonsistent) aussehen, wenn Sie per E-mail verschickt werden.
+
+### Referenzen
+
+1. [Programmiersprache Jinja Templating: Referenz](http://jinja.pocoo.org/docs/templates/)
+2. [Bootstrap CSS Framework](http://getbootstrap.com/)
+
+### Druckeinstellungen
+
+Um Ihre Druck- und PDF-Einstellungen zu bearbeiten/zu aktualisieren, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Einstellungen > Druck und Branding > Druckeinstellungen
+
+
+
+### Beispiel
+
+ {% raw %}{{ doc.select_print_heading or "Invoice" }}
+
+
+ Customer Name
+ {{ doc.customer_name }}
+
+
+ Date
+ {{ doc.get_formatted("invoice_date") }}
+ | Sr | +Item Name | +Description | +Qty | +Rate | +Amount | +
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| {{ row.idx }} | +
+ {{ row.item_name }}
+ {% if row.item_code != row.item_name -%}
+ Item Code: {{ row.item_code}} + {%- endif %} + |
+
+ {{ row.description }} |
+ {{ row.qty }} {{ row.uom or row.stock_uom }} | +{{ + row.get_formatted("rate", doc) }} | +{{ + row.get_formatted("amount", doc) }} | +
+
+Wenn Sie eine Vorlage ausgewählt haben, erscheint der restliche Teil des Formulars.
+
+#### Schritt 2: Geben Sie die Daten des Mitarbeiters ein
+
+
+
+Wenn die Bewertungsvorlage fertig ist, können Sie für jeden Zeitraum Bewertungen aufzeichnen, über die Sie die Leistung nachverfolgen können. Sie können für jeden Paramter bis zu 5 Punkte vergeben und das System berechnet die Gesamtbeurteilung des Mitarbeiters.
+
+Um die Bewertung abzuschliessen, stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie es "übertragen" haben.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/attendance.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/attendance.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b53c81ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/attendance.md
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+
+# Anwesenheit
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Ein Anwesenheitsdatensatz der wiedergibt, dass ein Mitarbeiter zu einem bestimmten Termin anwesend war, kann manuell erstellt werden über:
+
+> Personalwesen > Dokumente > Anwesenheit > Neu
+
+
+
+Sie können einen monatlichen Report über Ihre Anwesenheiten erhalten, indem Sie zum "Monatlichen Anwesenheitsbericht" gehen.
+
+Sie können auch ganz einfach Anwesenheiten über das [Werkzeug zum Hochladen von Anwesenheiten]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.html) hochladen.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/employee.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/employee.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a3f72a31
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/employee.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+# Mitarbeiter
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Es gibt viele Felder, die Sie in einem Mitarbeiterdatensatz hinzufügen können.
+
+Um einen neuen Mitarbeiter zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Personalwesen > Dokumente > Mitarbeiter > Neu
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/expense-claim.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/expense-claim.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..053bbea6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/expense-claim.md
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+
+# Aufwandsabrechnung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Eine Aufwandsabrechnung wird dann erstellt, wenn ein Mitarbeiter Ausgaben für die Firma über seinen eigenen Geldbeutel tätigt. Beispiel: Wenn Sie einen Kunden zum Essen einladen, können Sie über das Formular zur Aufwandsabrechnung eine Erstattung beantragen.
+
+Um eine neue Aufwandsabrechnung zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Personalwesen > Dokumente > Aufwandsabrechnung > Neu
+
+
+
+Geben Sie die Mitarbeiter-ID, das Datum und die Auflistung der Ausgaben, die Sie zurückerstattet haben möchten, ein und "übertragen" Sie den Datensatz.
+
+### Ausgaben genehmigen
+
+Die Person, die die Kostenerstattung beantragt, muss auch die ID des Benutzers, der diese Ausgaben genehmigen soll, angeben und sie muss dem Ausgabengenehmiger die Anfrage über die Schaltfläche "Zuweisen zu" zuweisen, damit dieser eine Benachrichtigung über die Anfrage erhält.
+
+Wenn der Genehmiger das Formular erhält, kann er oder sie die genehmigten Beträge aktualisieren und auf die Schaltfläche "Genehmigen" klicken. Um den Antrag abzulehnen, kann er auch die Schaltfläche "Ablehnen" klicken.
+
+Im Bereich "Kommentar" können Kommentare angelegt werden. Diese können Erklärungen enthalten, warum ein Antrag genehmigt oder abgelehnt wurde.
+
+### Verbuchung der Ausgaben und der Kostenerstattung
+
+Die genehmigte Aufwandsabrechnung muss in eine Journalbuchung umgewandelt werden und die Zahlung muss durchgeführt werden. Anmerkung: Dieser Betrag sollte nicht mit der Gehaltsabrechnung vermischt werden, da er sonst für den Mitarbeiter steuerpflichtig wird.
+
+### Verknüpfungen zu Aufgaben und Projekten
+
+* Um eine Aufwandsabrechnung mit einer Aufgabe oder einem Projekt zu verknüpfen, geben Sie die Aufgabe oder das Projekt an, während Sie eine Aufwandsabrechnung erstellen.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/human-resources-reports.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/human-resources-reports.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..98e2d93e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/human-resources-reports.md
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+
+# Standardberichte
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+### Mitarbeiter-Urlaubskonto
+
+Der Bericht zur Mitarbeiter-Urlaubsauswertung zeigt Mitarbeiter und deren Urlaubsverteilung nach den unterschiedlichen Urlaubstypen an. Der Bericht richtet sich nach der Anzahl des genehmigten Urlaubs.
+
+
+
+### Mitarbeiter-Geburtstag
+
+Dieser Bericht zeigt die Geburtstage der Mitarbeiter an.
+
+
+
+### Mitarbeiterinformationen
+
+Dieser Bericht wichtige Informationen über Mitarbeiter in den Mitarbeiterdatensätzen.
+
+
+
+### Übersicht monatliche Gehälter
+
+Dieser Bericht zeigt die Nettozahlungen der Mitarbeiter und deren einzelne Bestandteile im Überblick.
+
+
+
+### Monatliche Anwesenheitsliste
+
+Dieser Bericht zeit die monatlichen Anwesenheiten ausgewählter Mitarbeiter im Überblick.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cde418df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+
+# Personalwesen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Das Modul Personalwesen (HR) beinhaltet die Prozesse die mit der Verwaltung eines Teams von Mitarbeitern verknüpft sind. Die wichtigste Anwendung hierbei ist die Lohnbuchhaltung um Gehaltsabrechungen zu erstellen. Die meisten Länder haben ein sehr komplexes Steuersystem, welches Vorgaben dahingehend macht, welche Ausgaben die Firma in Bezug auf die Mitarbeiter tätigen darf. Es gibt ein Bündel an Regeln für die Firma wie Steuern und Sozialabgaben über die Gehaltsabrechnung des Mitarbeiters abgezogen werden. ERPNext ermöglicht es Ihnen alle Arten von Steuern zu erfassen und zu kalkulieren.
+
+ERPNext beinhaltet weiterhin eine vollstände Mitarbeiterdatenbank inklusive der Kontaktinformationen, Details zur Gehaltsabrechnung, Anwesenheit, Mitarbeiterbewertung und den Bewerbungsunterlagen.
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..caa32929
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+employee
+leave-application
+expense-claim
+attendance
+salary-and-payroll
+appraisal
+job-applicant
+job-opening
+offer-letter
+tools
+human-resources-reports
+setup
+holiday-list
+human-resource-setup
+articles
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/job-applicant.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/job-applicant.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ce372e0e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/job-applicant.md
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+
+# Bewerber
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Sie können eine Liste von Bewerbern auf [offene Stellen]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/human-resources/job-opening.html) verwalten.
+
+Um einen neuen Bewerber anzulegen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Personalwesen > Dokumente > Bewerber > Neu
+
+
+
+### Verknüpfung mit einem E-Mail-Konto
+
+Sie können die Bewerbersuche mit einem E-Mail-Konto verknüpfen. Wenn wir annehmen, dass Sie die Bewerbersuche mit der E-Mail-Adresse job@example.com verknüpfen, dann wird das System zu jeder E-Mail, die eingeht, einen Bewerber mit der entsprechenden E-Mail-Adresse anlegen.
+
+* Um ein E-Mail-Konto mit der Bewerbersuche zu verknüpfen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Einstellungen > E-Mail > E-Mail-Konto > Neu
+
+* Geben Sie die E-Mail-ID und das Passwort ein und aktivieren Sie "Eingehend aktivieren".
+* Unter "Anhängen an" geben Sie "Bewerber" an.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/job-opening.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/job-opening.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5982319a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/job-opening.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+# Offene Stellen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Sie können einen Datensatz zu den offenen Stellen in Ihrem Unternehmen über den Menüpunkt "Offene Stellen" erstellen.
+
+Um eine neue Offene Stelle anzulegen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Personalwesen > Dokumente > Offene Stellen > Neu
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/leave-application.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/leave-application.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..852c324f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/leave-application.md
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+# Urlaubsantrag
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Wenn Ihre Firma ein formales System hat, wo Mitarbeiter einen Antrag für Ihren Urlaub einreichen müssen, um sich für einen bezahlten Urlaub zu qualifizieren, können Sie einen Urlaubsantrag erstellen um die Genehmigung und die Nutzung des Urlaubs nachzuverfolgen. Sie müssen den Mitarbeiter, den Urlaubstyp und den Zeitraum, für den Urlaub genommen werden soll, angeben.
+
+> Personalwesen > Dokumente > Urlaubsantrag > Neu
+
+
+
+### Urlaubsbewilliger einstellen
+
+* Ein Urlaubsgenehmiger ist ein Benutzer der Urlaubsanträge eines Mitarbeiters bewilligen kann.
+* Sie müssen eine Liste von Urlaubsbewilligern für einen Mitarbeiter in den Mitarbeiterstammdaten angeben.
+
+
+
+> Tipp: Wenn Sie möchten, dass alle Benutzer ihre Urlaubsanträge selbst erstellen, können Sie in den Einstellungen zur Urlaubsgenehmigung Ihre Mitarbeiter-IDs als so einstellen, dass sie für die Regel zutreffend sind. Für weiterführende Informationen kesen Sie hierzu die Diskussion zum Thema [Einstellungen zu Genehmigungen]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.html).
+
+Um einem Mitarbeiter Urlaub zuzuteilen, kreuzen Sie [Urlaubszuteilung]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/leave-allocation.html) an.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/offer-letter.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/offer-letter.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2c41116c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/offer-letter.md
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+
+# Angebotsschreiben
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Ein Bewerber erhält ein Angebotsschreiben nach dem Vorstellungsgespräch und der Auswahl. Es gibt das angebotene Gehaltspaket, die Stellenbezeichnung, den Rang, die Bezeichnung der Abteilung und die vereinbarten Urlaubstage wieder.
+
+Ein ERPNext können Sie einen Datensatz zu den Angebotsschreiben, die Sie an Bewerber versenden, erstellen. Um ein neues Angebotsschreiben zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Personalwesen > Dokumente > Angebotsschreiben > Neu
+
+
+
+> Anmerkung: Angebotsschreiben kann nur zu einem [Bewerber]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/human-resources/job-applicant.html) erstellt werden.
+
+Es gibt ein vordefiniertes Druckformat zum Angebotsschreiben.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/salary-and-payroll.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/salary-and-payroll.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e50ac0ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/salary-and-payroll.md
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+
+# Gehalt und Gehaltsabrechung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Ein Gehalt ist ein fester Geldbetrag oder eine Ersatzvergütung die vom Arbeitsgeber für die Arbeitsleistung des Arbeitnehmers an diesen gezahlt wird.
+
+Die Gehaltsabrechnung ist der zugrundeliegende Datensatz zum Verwaltungsakt von Gehältern, Löhnen, Boni, Nettoauszahlungen und Abzügen für einen Mitarbeiter.
+
+Um in ERPNext eine Gehaltsabrechnung durchzuführen
+
+1. Erstellen Sie Gehaltsstrukturen für alle Arbeitnehmer.
+2. Erstellen Sie über den Prozess Gehaltsabrechnung Gehaltsabrechnungen.
+3. Buchen Sie das Gehalt in Ihren Konten.
+
+### Gehaltsstruktur
+
+Die Gehaltsstruktur gibt an, wie Gehälter auf Basis von Einkommen und Abzügen errechnet werden.
+
+Gehaltsstrukturen werden verwendet um Organisationen zu helfen
+
+1. Gehaltslevel zu erhalten, die am Markt wettbewerbsfähig sind.
+2. Ein ausgeglichenes Verhältnis zwischen den Entlohnungen intern anfallender Jobs zu erreichen.
+3. Unterschiede in den Ebenen von Verwantwortung, Begabungen und Leistungen zu erkennen und entsprechend zu vergüten und Gehaltserhöhungen zu verwalten.
+
+Eine Gehaltsstruktur kann folgende Komponenten enthalten:
+
+* **Basisgehalt:** Das ist das steuerbare Basiseinkommen.
+* **Spezielle Zulagen:** Normalerweise kleiner als das Basiseinkommen
+* **Urlaubsgeld:** Betrag den der Arbeitgeber dem Arbeitnehmer für einen Urlaub zahlt
+* **Abfindung:** Bestimmter Betrag, der dem Arbeitnehmer vom Arbeitgeber gezahlt wird, wenn der Mitarbeiter das Unternehmen verlässt oder in Rente geht.
+* **Rentenversicherung:** Betrag für zukünftige Rentenzahlungen und andere Leistunge, die unter die Rentenversicherung fallen.
+* **Krankenversicherung**
+* **Pflegeversicherung**
+* **Arbeitslosenversicherung**
+* **Solidaritätszuschlag**
+* **Steuern**
+* **Boni**: Steuerbare Beträge, die dem Arbeitnehmer aufgrund guter individueller Leistungen gezahlt werden.
+* **Mietzulage**
+* **Aktienoptionen für Mitarbeiter**
+
+Um eine neue Gehaltsstruktur zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Personalwesen > Einstellungen > Gehaltsstruktur > Neu
+
+#### Abbildung 1: Gehaltsstruktur
+
+
+
+### In der Gehaltsstruktur
+
+* Wählen Sie einen Arbeitnehmer.
+* Geben Sie das Startdatum an, ab dem die Gehaltsstruktur gültig ist (Anmerkung: Es kann während eines bestimmten Zeitraums immer nur eine Gehaltsstruktur für einen Arbeitnehmer aktiv sein.)
+* In der Tabelle Einkommen und Abzüge werden alle von Ihnen definierten Einkommens- und Abzugsarten automatisch eingetragen. Geben Sie für Einkommen und Abzüge Beträge ein und speichern Sie die Gehaltsstruktur.
+
+### Unbezahlter Urlaub
+
+Unbezahlter Urlaub entsteht dann, wenn ein Mitarbeiter keinen normalen Urlaub mehr hat oder ohne Genehmigung über einen Urlaubsantrag abwesend ist. Wenn Sie möchten, dass ERPNext automatisch unbezahlten Urlaub abzieht, müssen Sie in der Vorlage "Einkommens- und Abzugsart" "Unbezahlten Urlaub anwenden" anklicken. Der Betrag der dem Gehalt gekürzt wird ergibt sich aus dem Verhältnis zwischen den Tagen des unbezahlten Urlaubs und den Gesamtarbeitstagen des Monats (basierend auf der Urlaubstabelle).
+
+Wenn Sie nicht möchten, dass ERPNext unbezahlten Urlaub verwaltet, klicken Sie die Option in keiner Einkommens und Abzugsart an.
+
+* * *
+
+### Gehaltszettel erstellen
+
+Wenn die Gehaltsstruktur einmal angelegt ist, können Sie eine Gehaltsabrechnung aus demselben Formular heraus erstellen, oder Sie können für den Monat eine Gehaltsabrechnung erstellen über den Punkt "Gehaltsabrechnung bearbeiten".
+
+Um eine Gehaltsabrechnung über die Gehaltsstruktur zu erstellen, klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Gehaltsabrechnung erstellen".
+
+#### Abbildung 2: Gehaltsabrechnung
+
+
+
+Sie können auch Gehaltsabrechnungen für mehrere verschiedene Mitarbeiter über "Gehaltsabrechnung bearbeiten" anlegen.
+
+> Personalwesen > Werkzeuge > Gehaltsabrechnung bearbeiten
+
+#### Abbildung 3: Gehaltsabrechnung durchführen
+
+
+
+Beim Bearbeiten einer Gehaltsabrechnung
+
+1. Wählen Sie die Firma, für die Sie Gehaltsabrechnungen erstellen wollen.
+2. Wählen Sie den ensprechenden Monat und das Jahr.
+3. Klicken Sie auf "Gehaltsabrechnung erstellen". Hierdurch werden für jeden aktiven Mitarbeiter für den gewählten Monat Datensätze für die Gehaltsabrechnung angelegt. Wenn die Gehaltsabrechnungen einmal angelegt sind, erstellt das System keine weiteren Gehaltsabrechnungen. Alle Aktualisierungen werden im Bereich "Aktivitätsprotokoll" angezeigt.
+4. Wenn alle Gehaltsabrechnungen erstellt wurden, können Sie prüfen, ob Sie richtig sind, und sie bearbeiten, wenn Sie unbezahlten Urlaub abziehen wollen.
+5. Wenn Sie das geprüft haben, können Sie sie alle gemeinsam "übertragen" indem Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Gehaltsabrechnung übertragen" klicken. Wenn Sie möchten, dass Sie automatisch per E-Mail an einen Mitarbeiter verschickt werden, stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie die Option "E-Mail absenden" angeklickt haben.
+
+### Gehälter in Konten buchen
+
+Der letzte Schritt ist, die Gehälter mit Ihren Konten zu verbuchen.
+
+Gehälter unterliegen im Geschäftsablauf normalerweise sehr strengen Datenschutzregeln. In den meisten Fällen gibt die Firma eine einzige Zahlung an die Bank, die alle Gehälter beinhaltet, und die Bank verteilt dann die Gehälter an die einzelnen Konten der Mitarbeiter. Bei dieser Vorgehensweise gibt es nur eine einzige Zahlungsbuchung im Hauptbuch der Firma niemand mit Zugriff auf die Konten des Unternehmens hat auf die individuellen Gehaltsdaten Zugriff.
+
+Die Buchung zur Gehaltsabrechnung ist eine Journalbuchung welche das Bankkonto des Unternehmens belastet und den Gesamtbetrag aller Gehälter dem Gehaltskonto gutschreibt.
+
+Um einen Beleg über die Gehaltszahlung aus dem Punkt "Gehaltsabrechnung bearbeiten" heraus zu erstellen, klicken Sie auf "Bankbeleg erstellen" und es wird eine neue Journalbuchung mit den Gesamtbeträgen der Gehälter erstellt.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/branch.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/branch.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f0762f45
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/branch.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Filiale
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Filialen Ihres Unternehmens
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/deduction-type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/deduction-type.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4ad6614f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/deduction-type.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+# Abzugsart
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Sie können zu Steuern oder anderen Abzügen vom Gehalt Datensätze erstellen und diese als Abzug beschreiben.
+
+Um eine neue Abzugsart anzulegen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Personalwesen > Einstellungen > Abzugsart > Neu
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/department.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/department.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..49d6d1e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/department.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Abteilung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Abteilungen Ihres Unternehmens
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/designation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/designation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..66bb7cbb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/designation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Bezeichnung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Stellenbezeichnungen in Ihrem Unternehmen
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/earning-type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/earning-type.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c18e88fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/earning-type.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+# Einkommensart
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Sie können zu den Bestandteilen der Gehaltsabrechnung Datensätze erstellen und sie als Einkommensart beschreiben.
+
+Um eine neue Eikommensart zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Personalwesen > Einstellungen > Einkommensart > Neu
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cae4e842
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Art der Beschäftigung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Verschiedene Beschäftigungsverträge, die Sie mit Ihren Mitarbeitern abgeschlossen haben.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/holyday-list.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/holyday-list.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..daa0dcd9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/holyday-list.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Urlaubsübersicht
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Sie können Urlaub für ein bestimmtes Jahr über die Urlaubsübersicht planen.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d9169ca5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Einstellungen zum Modul Personalwesen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Globale Einstellungen zu Dokumenten des Personalwesens
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8f28da92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
+# Einstellungen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..550236a2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+hr-settings
+employment-type
+branch
+department
+designation
+earning-type
+deduction-type
+leave-allocation
+leave-type
+holiday-list
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/leave-allocation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/leave-allocation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8efb6dc6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/leave-allocation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+
+# Urlaubszuordnung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Hilft Ihnen Urlaub bestimmten Mitarbeitern zuzuteilen
+
+
+
+Um mehreren verschhiedenen Mitarbeitern Urlaub zuzuteilen, nutzen Sie das [Urlaubszuordnungs-Werkzeug]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/leave-allocation-tool.html).
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/leave-type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/leave-type.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fb45c4a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/setup/leave-type.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+# Urlaubstyp
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Geben Sie den Urlaubstyp an, der Mitarbeitern zugeordnet werden kann.
+
+
+
+* "Maximale zulässige Urlaubstage" gibt die Maximalanzahl von Tagen dieses Urlaubstyps an, die zusammen genommen werden können.
+* "Ist unbezahlter Urlaub" gibt an, dass es sich um unbezahlten Urlaub handelt.
+* "Negativen Saldo zulassen" gibt an, dass das System negative Beträge handhaben darf.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..adff8e99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+
+# Werkzeuge
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..658a9bf8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+upload-attendance
+leave-allocation-tool
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/leave-allocation-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/leave-allocation-tool.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..866c84e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/leave-allocation-tool.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Urlaubszuordnungs-Werkzeug
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Das Urlaubszuordnungs-Werkzeug hilft Ihnen dabei eine bestimmte Menge an Urlaub einem Mitarbeiter zuzuteilen.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..dd6231c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+# Anwesenheit hochladen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Dieses Werkzeug hilft Ihnen dabei eine Menge von Anwesenheiten aus einer CSV-Datei hochzuladen.
+
+Um eine Anwesenheit hochzuladen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Personalwesen > Werkzeuge > Anwesenheit hochladen
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3e7d1397
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
+# Benutzerhandbuch (Deutsch)
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+### Inhalt
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..97a8cd89
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+introduction
+setting-up
+accounts
+stock
+CRM
+selling
+buying
+manufacturing
+projects
+support
+human-resources
+customer-portal
+website
+using-erpnext
+customize-erpnext
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/concepts-and-terms.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/concepts-and-terms.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b06fff72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/concepts-and-terms.md
@@ -0,0 +1,314 @@
+
+# Konzepte und Begriffe
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Machen Sie sich mit der Terminologie, die verwendet wird, und mit einigen Grundbegriffen von ERPNext vertraut, bevor Sie mit der Einführung beginnen.
+
+* * *
+
+### Grundbegriffe
+
+#### Firma
+Bezeichnung für die Firmendatensätze, die unter ERPNext verwendet werden. In ein und derselben Installation können Sie mehrere Firmendatensätze anlegen, die alle unterschiedliche juristische Personen darstellen. Die Buchführung wird für jede Firma unterschiedlich sein, aber sie teilen sich die Datensätze zu Kunden, Lieferanten und Artikeln.
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Einstellungen > Firma
+
+#### Kunde
+Bezeichnung eines Kunden. Ein Kunde kann eine Einzelperson oder eine Organisation sein. Sie können für jeden Kunden mehrere verschiedene Kontakte und Adressen erstellen.
+
+> Vertrieb > Dokumente > Kunde
+
+#### Lieferant
+Bezeichnung eines Lieferanten von Waren oder Dienstleistungen. Ihr Telekommunikationsanbieter ist ein Lieferant, genauso wie Ihr Lieferant für Rohmaterial. Auch in diesem Fall kann der Lieferant eine Einzelperson oder eine Organisation sein und mehrere verschiedene Kontakte und Adressen haben.
+
+> Einkauf > Dokumente > Lieferant
+
+#### Artikel
+Ein Produkt, ein Unterprodukt oder eine Dienstleistung, welche(s) entweder eingekauft, verkauft oder hergestellt wird, und eindeutig identifizierbar ist.
+
+> Lagerbestand > Dokumente > Artikel
+
+#### Konto
+Ein Konto ist der Oberbegriff, unter dem Finanztransaktionen und Unternehmensvorgänge ausgeführt werden. Beispiel: "Reisekosten" ist ein Konto, Der Kunde "Zoe", der Lieferant "Mae" sind Konten. ERPNext erstellt automatisch Konten für Kunden und Lieferanten.
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Dokumente > Kontenplan
+
+#### Adresse
+Eine Adresse bezeichnet Einzelheiten zum Sitz eines Kunden oder Lieferanten. Dies können unterschiedliche Orte sein, wie z. B. Hauptbüro, Fertigung, Lager, Ladengeschäft etc.
+
+> Vertrieb > Dokumente > Adresse
+
+#### Kontakt
+Ein individueller Kontakt gehört zu einem Kunden oder Lieferanten oder ist gar unabhängig. Ein Kontakt beinhaltet einen Namen und Kontaktdetails wie die E-Mail-Adresse und die Telefonnummer.
+
+> Vertrieb > Dokumente > Kontakt
+
+#### Kommunikation
+Eine Auflistung der gesamten Kommunikation mit einem Kontakt oder Lead. Alle E-Mails, die vom System versendet werden, werden dieser Liste hinzugefügt.
+
+> Support > Dokumente > Kommunikation
+
+#### Preisliste
+Eine Preisliste ist ein Ort an dem verschiedene Preismodelle gespeichert werden können. Es handelt sich um eine Bezeichnung, die sie für einen Satz von Artikelpreisen, die als definierte Liste abgespeichert werden, vergeben.
+
+> Vertrieb > Einstellungen > Preisliste
+
+> Einkauf > Einstellungen > Preisliste
+
+* * *
+
+### Buchführung
+
+#### Geschäftsjahr
+Bezeichnet ein Geschäfts- oder Buchungsjahr. Sie können mehrere verschiedene Geschäftsjahre zur selben Zeit laufen lassen. Jedes Geschäftsjahr hat ein Startdatum und ein Enddatum und Transaktionen können nur zu dieser Periode erfasst werden. Wenn Sie ein Geschäftsjahr schliessen, werden die Schlußstände der Konten als Eröffnungsbuchungen ins nächste Jahr übertragen.
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Einstellungen > Geschäftsjahr
+
+#### Kostenstelle
+Eine Kostenstelle entspricht einem Konto. Im Unterschied dazu gibt ihr Aufbau die Geschäftstätigkeit Ihres Unternehmens noch etwas besser wieder als ein Konto. Beispiel: Sie können in Ihrem Kontenplan Ihre Aufwände nach Typ aufteilen (z. B. Reisen, Marketing). Im Kostenstellenplan können Sie Aufwände nach Produktlinien oder Geschäftseinheiten (z. B. Onlinevertrieb, Einzelhandel, etc.) unterscheiden.
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Einstellungen > Kostenstellenplan
+
+#### Journalbuchung (Buchungssatz)
+Ein Dokument, welches Buchungen des Hauptbuchs beinhaltet und bei dem die Summe von Soll und Haben dieser Buchungen gleich groß ist. Sie können in ERPNext über Journalbuchungen Zahlungen, Rücksendungen, etc. verbuchen.
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Dokumente > Journalbuchung
+
+#### Ausgangsrechnung
+Eine Rechnung über die Lieferung von Artikeln (Waren oder Dienstleistungen) an den Kunden.
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Dokumente > Ausgangsrechnung
+
+#### Eingangsrechnung
+Eine Rechnung von einem Lieferanten über die Lieferung bestellter Artikel (Waren oder Dienstleistungen)
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Dokumente > Eingangsrechnung
+
+#### Währung
+ERPNext erlaubt es Ihnen, Transaktionen in verschiedenen Währungen zu buchen. Es gibt aber nur eine Währung für Ihre Bilanz. Wenn Sie Ihre Rechnungen mit Zahlungen in unterschiedlichen Währungen eingeben, wird der Betrag gemäß dem angegebenen Umrechnungsfaktor in die Standardwährung umgerechnet.
+
+> Einstellungen > Rechnungswesen > Währung
+
+* * *
+
+### Vertrieb
+
+#### Kundengruppe
+Eine Einteilung von Kunden, normalerweise basierend auf einem Marktsegment.
+
+> Vertrieb > Einstellungen > Kundengruppe
+
+#### Lead
+Eine Person, die in der Zukunft ein Geschäftspartner werden könnte. Aus einem Lead können Opportunities entstehen (und daraus Verkäufe).
+
+> CRM > Dokumente > Lead
+
+#### Opportunity
+Ein potenzieller Verkauf
+
+> CRM > Dokumente > Opportunity
+
+#### Kundenauftrag
+Eine Mitteilung eines Kunden, mit der er die Lieferbedingungen und den Preis eines Artikels (Produkt oder Dienstleistung) akzeptiert. Auf der Basis eines Kundenauftrages werden Lieferungen, Fertigungsaufträge und Ausgangsrechnungen erstellt.
+
+> Vertrieb > Dokumente > Kundenauftrag
+
+#### Region
+Ein geographisches Gebiet für eine Vertriebstätigkeit. Für Regionen können Sie Ziele vereinbaren und jeder Verkauf ist einer Region zugeordnet.
+
+> Vertrieb > Einstellungen > Region
+
+#### Vertriebspartner
+Eine Drittpartei, ein Händler, ein Partnerunternehmen oder ein Handelsvertreter, welche die Produkte des Unternehmens vertreiben, normalerweise auf Provisionsbasis.
+
+> Vertrieb > Einstellungen > Vertriebspartner
+
+#### Vertriebsmitarbeiter
+Eine Person, die mit einem Kunden Gespräche führt und Geschäfte abschliesst. Sie können für Vertriebsmitarbeiter Ziele definieren und die Vertriebsmitarbeiter bei Transaktionen mit angeben.
+
+> Vertrieb > Einstellungen > Vertriebsmitarbeiter
+
+* * *
+
+### Einkauf
+
+#### Lieferantenauftrag
+Ein Vertrag, der mit einem Lieferanten geschlossen wird, um bestimmte Artikel zu vereinbarten Kosten in der richtigen Menge zum richtigen Zeitpunkt und zu den vereinbarten Bedingungen zu liefern.
+
+> Einkauf > Dokumente > Lieferantenauftrag
+
+#### Materialanfrage
+Eine von einem Systembenutzer oder automatisch von ERPNext (basierend auf einem Mindestbestand oder einer geplanten Menge im Fertigungsplan) generierte Anfrage, um eine Menge an Artikeln zu beschaffen.
+
+> Einkauf > Dokumente > Materialanfrage
+
+* * *
+
+### Lager(bestand)
+
+#### Lager
+Ein logisches Lager zu dem Lagerbuchungen erstellt werden.
+
+> Lagerbestand > Dokumente > Lager
+
+#### Lagerbuchung
+Materialübertrag von einem Lager, in ein Lager oder zwischen mehreren Lagern.
+
+> Lagerbestand > Dokumente > Lagerbuchung
+
+#### Lieferschein
+Eine Liste von Artikeln mit Mengenangaben für die Auslieferung an den Kunden. Ein Lieferschein reduziert die Lagermenge eines Artikels auf dem Lager, von dem er versendet wird. Ein Lieferschein wird normalerweise zu einem Kundenauftrag erstellt.
+
+> Lagerbestand > Dokumente > Lieferschein
+
+#### Kaufbeleg
+Eine Notiz, die angibt, dass eine bestimmte Menge von Artikeln von einem Lieferanten erhalten wurde, meistens in Verbindung mit einem Lieferantenauftrag.
+
+> Lagerbestand > Dokumente > Kaufbeleg
+
+#### Seriennummer
+Eine einmalig vergebene Nummer, die einem bestimmten einzelnen Artikel zugeordnet wird.
+
+> Lagerbestand > Dokumente > Seriennummer
+
+#### Charge(nnummer)
+Eine Nummer, die einer Menge von einzelnen Artikeln, die beispielsweise als zusammenhängende Gruppe eingekauft oder produziert werden, zugeordnet wird.
+
+> Lagerbestand > Dokumente > Charge
+
+#### Lagerbuch
+Eine Tabelle, in der alle Materialbewegungen von einem Lager in ein anderes erfasst werden. Das ist die Tabelle, die aktualisiert wird, wenn eine Lagerbuchung, ein Lieferschein, ein Kaufbeleg oder eine Ausgangsrechnung (POS) erstellt werden.
+
+#### Lagerabgleich
+Lageraktualisierung mehrerer verschiedener Artikel über eine Tabellendatei (CSV).
+
+> Lagerbestand > Werkzeuge > Bestandsabgleich
+
+#### Qualitätsprüfung
+Ein Erfassungsbogen, auf dem bestimmte (qualitative) Parameter eines Artikels zur Zeit des Erhalts vom Lieferanten oder zum Zeitpunkt der Lieferung an den Kunden festgehalten werden.
+
+> Lagerbestand > Werkzeuge > Qualitätsprüfung
+
+#### Artikelgruppe
+Eine Einteilung von Artikeln.
+
+> Lagerbestand > Einstellungen > Artikelgruppenstruktur
+
+* * *
+
+### Personalwesen
+
+#### Mitarbeiter
+Datensatz einer Person, die in der Vergangenheit oder Gegenwart im Unternehmen gearbeitet hat oder arbeitet.
+
+> Personalwesen > Dokumente > Mitarbeiter
+
+#### Urlaubsantrag
+Ein Datensatz eines genehmigten oder abgelehnten Urlaubsantrages.
+
+> Personalwesen > Dokumente > Urlaubsantrag
+
+#### Urlaubstyp
+Eine Urlaubsart (z. B. Erkrankung, Mutterschaft, usw.)
+
+> Personalwesen > Einstellungen > Urlaubstyp
+
+#### Gehaltsabrechnung erstellen
+Ein Werkzeug, welches Ihnen dabei hilft, mehrere verschiedene Gehaltsabrechnungen für Mitarbeiter zu erstellen.
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Werkzeuge > Gehaltsabrechung bearbeiten
+
+#### Gehaltsabrechnung
+Ein Datensatz über das monatliche Gehalt, das an einen Mitarbeiter ausgezahlt wird.
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Dokumente > Gehaltsabrechnung
+
+#### Gehaltsstruktur
+Eine Vorlage, in der alle Komponenten des Gehalts (Verdienstes) eines Mitarbeiters, sowie Steuern und andere soziale Abgaben enthalten sind.
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Einstellungen > Gehaltsstruktur
+
+#### Beurteilung
+Ein Datensatz über die Leistungsfähigkeit eines Mitarbeiters zu einem bestimmten Zeitraum basierend auf bestimmten Parametern.
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Dokumente > Bewertung
+
+#### Bewertungsvorlage
+Eine Vorlage, die alle unterschiedlichen Parameter der Leistungsfähigkeit eines Mitarbeiters und deren Gewichtung für eine bestimmte Rolle erfasst.
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Einstellungen > Bewertungsvorlage
+
+#### Anwesenheit
+Ein Datensatz der die Anwesenheit oder Abwesenheit eines Mitarbeiters an einem bestimmten Tag widerspiegelt.
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Dokumente > Anwesenheit
+
+* * *
+
+### Fertigung
+
+#### Stücklisten
+Eine Liste aller Arbeitsgänge und Artikel und deren Mengen, die benötigt wird, um einen neuen Artikel zu fertigen. Eine Stückliste wird verwendet um Einkäufe zu planen und die Produktkalkulation durchzuführen.
+
+> Fertigung > Dokumente > Stückliste
+
+#### Arbeitsplatz
+Ein Ort, an dem ein Arbeitsgang der Stückliste durchgeführt wird. Der Arbeitsplatz wird auch verwendet um die direkten Kosten eines Produktes zu kalkulieren.
+
+> Fertigung > Dokumente > Arbeitsplatz
+
+#### Fertigungsauftrag
+Ein Dokument, welches die Fertigung (Herstellung) eines bestimmten Produktes in einer bestimmten Menge anstösst.
+
+> Fertigung > Dokumente > Fertigungsauftrag
+
+#### Werkzeug zur Fertigungsplanung
+Ein Werkzeug zur automatisierten Erstellung von Fertigungsaufträgen und Materialanfragen basierend auf offenen Kundenaufträgen in einem vorgegebenen Zeitraum.
+
+> Fertigung > Werkzeuge > Werkzeug zur Fertigungsplanung
+
+* * *
+
+### Webseite
+
+#### Blogeintrag
+Ein kleiner Text der im Abschnitt "Blog" der Webseite erscheint, erstellt über das Webseitenmodul von ERPNext. "Blog" ist eine Kurzform von "web log".
+
+> Webseite > Dokumente > Blogeintrag
+
+#### Webseite
+Eine Webseite mit einer eindeutigen URL (Webadresse), erstellt über ERPNext.
+
+> Webseite > Dokumente > Webseite
+
+* * *
+
+### Einstellungen / Anpassung
+
+#### Benutzerdefiniertes Feld
+Ein vom Benutzer definiertes Feld auf einem Formular/in einer Tabelle.
+
+> Einstellungen > Anpassen > Benutzerdefiniertes Feld
+
+#### Allgemeine Einstellungen
+In diesem Abschnitt stellen Sie grundlegende Voreinstellungen für verschiedene Parameter des Systems ein.
+
+> Einstellungen > Einstellungen > Allgemeine Einstellungen
+
+#### Druckkopf
+Eine Kopfzeile, die bei einer Transaktion für den Druck eingestellt werden kann. Beispiel: Sie wollen ein Angebot mit der Überschrift "Angebot" oder "Proforma Rechnung" ausdrucken.
+
+> Einstellungen > Druck > Druckkopf
+
+#### Allgemeine Geschäftsbedingungen
+Hier befindet sich der Text Ihrer Vertragsbedingungen.
+
+> Einstellungen > Druck > Allgemeine Geschäftsbedingungen
+
+#### Standardmaßeinheit
+Hier wird festgelegt, in welcher Einheit ein Artikel gemessen wird. Z. B. kg, Stück, Paar, Pakete usw.
+
+> Lagerbestand > Einstellungen > Maßeinheit
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b0710925
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+
+# Brauche ich ein ERP-System?
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+ERPNext ist ein modernes Werkzeug, welches nicht nur den Bereich Rechnungswesen abdeckt, sondern auch alle anderen Geschäftsprozesse, auf einer einzigen integrierten Plattform. Es bietet viele Vorteile gegenüber traditionellen Anwendungen zum Rechnungswesen wie auch zu ERP-Anwendungen.
+
+### Vorteile gegenüber einer traditionellen Buchhaltungssoftware
+* Sie können weit mehr tun, als nur zu buchen! Sie können das Lager verwalten, Rechnungen schreiben, Angebote erstellen, Leads nachverfolgen, Gehaltsabrechnungen erstellen und vieles mehr.
+* Bearbeiten Sie sicher alle Ihre Daten an einem einzigen Ort. Suchen Sie nicht langwierig nach Informationen in Tabellen und auf verschiedenen Rechnern, wenn Sie sie brauchen. Verwalten Sie jeden und alles am selben Ort. Alle Nutzer greifen auf die selben aktuellen Daten zu.
+* Machen Sie Schluß mit doppelter Arbeit. Geben Sie die selbe Information nicht doppelt in Ihr Textverarbeitungsprogramm und Ihre Buchhaltungssoftware ein. Alle diese Schritte sind in einer einzigen Software vereint.
+* Verfolgen Sie Dinge nach. Greifen Sie in ein und derselben Software auf die gesamte Historie eines Kunden oder eines Geschäftsvorganges zu.
+
+### Vorteile gegenüber großen ERP-Systemen
+* $$$ - Geld sparen.
+* **Leichtere Konfiguration:** Große ERP-Systeme sind fast immer schwer einzurichten und stellen Ihnen unzählige Fragen, bevor Sie etwas Sinnvolles tun können.
+* **Leichter zu nutzen:** Eine moderne Webschnittstelle sorgt dafür, dass die Nutzer Ihres Systems zufrieden sind, und sich auf bekanntem Territorium bewegen.
+* **Freie Software:** Diese Software ist frei und Sie kann installiert werden, wo immer Sie wollen.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3899c22f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+
+# Einführung in ERPNext
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Es gibt viele Möglichkeiten für den Einstieg in ERPNext.
+
+### 1\. Schauen Sie sich das Demoprogramm an
+
+Wenn Sie die Benutzerschnittstelle ausprobieren wollen und wissen wollen, wie sich die Software **anfühlt**, schauen Sie sich einfach die Demo an:
+
+* https://demo.erpnext.com
+
+### 2\. Richten Sie sich ein kostenloses Konto bei ERPNext.com ein
+
+ERPNext.com wird von der Organisation (Frappe), die ERPNext veröffentlicht, verwaltet. Sie können sich ein eigenes Konto anlegen, indem Sie sich auf der [Internetseite registrieren](https://erpnext.com).
+
+Sie können Sich außerdem auch dazu entscheiden, Ihre Software auf ERPNext.com zu speichern, wenn Sie einen Hostingvertrag abschliessen. Das ist eine Möglichkeit, wie Sie die Organisation, die ERPNext entwickelt und verbessert, unterstützen können. In diesem Fall bekommen Sie zusätzlich direkten Support bei Hostingfragen.
+
+### 3\. Laden Sie sich eine virtuelle Maschine herunter
+
+Um Ärgernisse bei der Installation von Instanzen zu vermeiden, ist ERPNext als Virtual Image verfügbar (ein volles Betriebssystem mit einer installierten ERPNext-Version). Sie können dieses Image auf **jeder** Plattform, inklusive Windows, verwenden.
+
+[Klicken Sie hier um eine Anleitung zu erhalten, wie sie das Virtual Image verwenden.](https://erpnext.com/download)
+
+### 4\. Installieren Sie ERPNext auf Ihrem Unix/Linux/Mac-Rechner
+
+Wenn Sie sich mit der Installation von Anwendungen auf *nix-Plattformen auskennen, lesen Sie die Anweisungen zur Installation des [Frappe Bench](https://github.com/frappe/bench).
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/implementation-strategy.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/implementation-strategy.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..71da3c7f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/implementation-strategy.md
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+
+# Strategie zur Einführung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Bevor Sie damit beginnen, Ihre Arbeiten über ERPNext abzuwickeln, müssen Sie sich zuerst mit dem System und den benutzten Begriffen vertraut machen. Aus diesem Grund empfehlen wir Ihnen, die Einführung in zwei Phasen durchzuführen:
+
+- Eine **Testphase**, in der Sie Probedatensätze erstellen, die Ihr Tagesgeschäft repräsentieren.
+- Eine **Livephase**, in der Sie damit beginnen im Tagesgeschäft mit dem System zu arbeiten.
+
+### Testphase
+
+* Lesen Sie das Handbuch.
+* Legen Sie ein kostenloses Konto auf [https://erpnext.com](https://erpnext.com) an. (Das ist der einfachste Weg um zu experimentieren.)
+* Legen Sie Ihre ersten Kunden, Lieferanten und Artikel an. Erstellen Sie weitere, um sich mit diesen Verfahren vertraut zu machen.
+* Legen Sie Kundengruppen, Artikelgruppen, Lager und Lieferantengruppen an, damit Sie Ihre Artikel klassifizieren können.
+* Durchlaufen Sie einen Standard-Vertriebszyklus: Lead -> Opportunity -> Angebot -> Kundenauftrag -> Lieferschein -> Ausgangsrechnung -> Zahlung (Journalbuchung/Buchungssatz)
+* Durchlaufen Sie einen Standard-Einkaufszyklus: Materialanfrage -> Lieferantenauftrag -> Eingangsrechnung -> Zahlung (Journalbuchung/Buchungssatz)
+* Durchlaufen Sie einen Fertigungszyklus (wenn anwendbar): Stückliste -> Planungswerkzeug zur Fertigung -> Fertigungsauftrag -> Materialausgabe
+* Bilden Sie ein Szenario aus dem echten Leben im System nach.
+* Erstellen Sie benutzerdefinierte Felder, Druckformate etc. nach Erfordernis.
+
+### Livephase
+
+Wenn Sie sich mit ERPNext vertraut gemacht haben, beginnen Sie mit dem Eingeben der echten Daten!
+
+* Säubern Sie Ihr Testkonto oder legen Sie besser noch eine frische Installation an.
+* Wenn Sie nur Ihre Transaktionen, nicht aber Ihre Stammdaten wie Artikel, Kunde, Lieferant, Stückliste, etc. löschen wollen, brauchen Sie nur auf die Firma klicken, für die Sie diese Transaktionen erstellt haben, und mit einer frischen Stückliste starten. Um eine Firma zu löschen, öffnen Sie den Datensatz zur Firma über Einstellungen > Vorlagen > Firma und löschen Sie die Firma indem Sie die **"Löschen"-Schaltfläche** am unteren Ende anklicken.
+* Sie können auch auf [https://erpnext.com](https://erpnext.com) ein neues Konto erstellen, und die Dreißig-Tage-Probezeit nutzen. [Finden Sie hier mehr zum Thema Einsatz von ERPNext heraus](/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext).
+* Richten Sie Kundengruppen, Artikelgruppen, Lager und Stücklisten für alle Module ein.
+* Importieren Sie Kunden, Lieferanten, Artikel, Kontakte und Adressen mit Hilfe des Datenimportwerkzeuges.
+* Importieren Sie den Anfangsbestand des Lagers über das Werkzeug zum Lagerabgleich.
+* Erstellen Sie Eröffnungsbuchungen über Journalbuchungen/Buchungssätze und geben Sie offene Ausgangs- und Eingangsrechnungen ein.
+* Wenn Sie Hilfe benötigen, [können Sie sich Supportdienstleistungen kaufen](https://erpnext.com/pricing), oder [im Benutzerforum nachlesen](https://discuss.erpnext.com).
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..dbf3d6de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+
+# Einführung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+### Was ist ein ERP-System und warum soll ich mich damit beschäftigen?
+
+(Wenn Sie schon davon überzeugt sind, dass Sie für Ihre Organisation eine Software benötigen, die alle Unternehmensprozesse abbilden kann, dann können Sie diese Seite überspringen.)
+
+Wenn Sie ein kleines Geschäft mit ein paar wenigen Mitarbeitern betreiben, dann wissen Sie wie schwer es ist, die Dynamik des Geschäftslebens zu beherrschen. Sie verwenden wahrscheinlich schon eine Buchhaltungssoftware und evtl. weitere Programme um z. B. Ihr Lager oder den Vertrieb (CRM) zu verwalten.
+
+Ein ERP-System vereinigt all dieses in einer einzigen Software.
+
+Kleine Unternehmen unterscheiden sich nicht gravierend von großen. Sie haben mit den selben komplexen Zusammenhängen wie bei einem großen Unternehmen zu tun, kombiniert mit vielen anderen Zwängen. Kleine Unternehmen müssen mit Kunden kommunizieren, die Buchhaltung abwickeln, Steuern zahlen, Gehaltsabrechnungen erstellen, Zeitabläufe koordinieren, Qualität abliefern, Fragen beantworten und jeden zufrieden stellen, genau wie bei großen Unternehmen.
+
+Große Unternehmen haben den Vorteil auf fortgeschrittene Datenverarbeitungssysteme zugreifen zu können, um Ihre Prozesse effektiv zu verwalten. Kleine Unternehmen auf der anderen Seite kämpfen normalerweise mit der Organisation. Oft verwenden Sie einen Mix aus verschiedenen Softwareanwendungen wie Tabellenkalkulationen, Buchhaltungssoftware, einem CRM-System usw. Das Problem dabei ist, dass nicht jeder mit dem selben System arbeitet. Ein ERP-System ändert dies grundlegend.
+
+### Was ist ERPNext?
+
+ERPNext versetzt Sie in die Lage, all Ihre Informationen und Geschäftsvorfälle in einer einzigen Anwendung zu verwalten und diese dazu zu verwenden, Arbeitsschritte abzubilden und Entscheidungen auf der Grundlage vorhandener Daten zu treffen.
+
+ERPNext hilft Ihnen unter anderem dabei:
+
+* Alle Rechnungen und Zahlungen nachzuverfolgen.
+* Zu wissen, welche Menge welchen Produktes am Lager verfügbar ist.
+* Offene Kundenanfragen zu identifizieren.
+* Gehaltsabrechnungen zu erstellen.
+* Aufgaben zu verteilen und sie nachzuverfolgen.
+* Eine Datenbank aller Kunden, Lieferanten und Kontakte zu erstellen.
+* Angebote zu erstellen.
+* Erinnerungen zu Wartungsplänen zu erhalten.
+* Eine eigene Webseite zu veröffentlichen.
+
+Und vieles vieles mehr.
+
+#### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..535fcfec
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+do-i-need-an-erp
+open-source
+getting-started-with-erpnext
+the-champion
+implementation-strategy
+key-workflows
+concepts-and-terms
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/key-workflows.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/key-workflows.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..44f7d8d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/key-workflows.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+# Flußdiagramm der Transaktionen in ERPNext
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Dieses Diagramm stellt dar, wie ERPNext die Informationen und Vorgänge in Ihrem Unternehmen über Schlüsselfunktionen nachverfolgt. Dieses Diagramm gibt nicht alle Funktionalitäten von ERPNext wieder.
+
+
+
+
+
+_Anmerkung: Nicht alle Schritte sind zwingend erforderlich. ERPNext erlaubt es Ihnen nach eigenem Gutdünken Schritte auszulassen, wenn Sie den Prozess vereinfachen wollen._
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/open-source.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/open-source.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1b9a7122
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/open-source.md
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+
+# Freie Software
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Der Quellcode von ERPNext ist Open Source. Er ist für alle offen: Zum Verstehen, zum Erweitern und zum Verbessern. Und er ist kostenlos!
+
+Vorteile einer freien Software sind:
+
+1. Sie können Ihren Servicedienstleister jederzeit wechseln.
+2. Sie können Ihre Anwendung dort installieren, wo Sie wollen, einschließlich auf Ihrem eigenen Server, um den vollständigen Besitz Ihrer Daten und den Datenschutz sicher zu stellen.
+3. Sie können Teil einer Community sein, die Sie unterstützt, wenn Sie Hilfe benötigen. Sie sind nicht abhängig von Ihrem Servicedienstleister.
+4. Sie können von einem Produkt profitieren, welches von einer breiten Masse an Menschen, die hunderte von Fällen und Vorschlägen diskutiert haben, um das Produkt zu verbessern, benutzt und verbessert wird, und das wird immer so bleiben.
+
+
+---
+
+### Quellcode zu ERPNext
+
+Der Speicherort des ERPNext-Quellcodes befindet sich auf GitHub. Sie finden ihn hier:
+
+- [https://github.com/frappe/erpnext](https://github.com/frappe/erpnext)
+
+### Alternativen
+
+Es gibt viele andere freie ERP-Systeme. Einige bekannte sind:
+
+1. Odoo+2. OpenBravo +3. Apache OfBiz +4. xTuple +5. Compiere (mit Abarten) + +{next} diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/the-champion.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/the-champion.md new file mode 100644 index 00000000..28fd9a9d --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/introduction/the-champion.md @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ + +# Der Champion +Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH + +
+
+Wir haben uns in den letzten Jahren dutzende von ERP-Umsetzungen angesehen, und wir haben erkannt, dass eine erfolgreiche Umsetzung viel mit schwer greifbaren Dingen und persönlichen Einstellungen zu tun hat.
+
+**ERPs sind nicht zwingend erforderlich.**
+
+Stellen wir einen Vergleich an
+
+Der menschliche Körper scheint weder heute noch morgen Training zu benötigen, aber auf lange Sicht sollten Sie doch in die Gänge kommen, wenn Sie Ihren Körper und Ihre Gesundheit erhalten möchten.
+
+In der gleichen Art und Weise verbessert ein ERP-System die Gesundheit Ihrer Organisation über einen langen Zeitraum, indem es diese fit und effizient hält. Je länger Sie warten, Dinge in Ordnung zu bringen, umso mehr Zeit verlieren Sie, und um so näher kommen Sie einer größeren Katastrophe.
+
+Wenn Sie also damit beginnen, ein ERP-System einzuführen, dann richten Sie Ihren Blick auf die langfristigen Vorteile. Wie das tägliche Training, ist es auf kurze Sicht anstrengend, bewirkt auf lange Sicht aber Wunder, wenn Sie auf Kurs bleiben.
+
+* * *
+
+## Der Champion
+
+ERP bedeutet organisationsweiten Wandel und eine Einführung geht nicht ohne Mühen ab. Jede Veränderung benötigt einen Champion und es ist die Aufgabe des Champions das gesamte Team durch die Einführungsphase zu führen und es anzutreiben. Der Champion muss belastbar sein, falls etwas schief geht.
+
+In vielen Organisationen, die wir analysiert haben, ist der Champion oft der Inhaber oder der Chef. Manchmal ist der Champion auch ein Außenstehender, der für genau dieses Vorhaben angeworben wird.
+
+In allen Fällen müssen Sie zuerst Ihren Champion identifizieren.
+
+Wahrscheinlich sind **Sie** es!
+
+Fangen wir an!
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/bill-of-materials.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/bill-of-materials.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..64321bdd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/bill-of-materials.md
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+
+# Stückliste
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Das Herz des Fertigungssystems bildet die Stückliste. Die **Stückliste** ist eine Auflistung aller Materialien (egal ob gekauft oder selbst hergestellt) und Arbeitsgänge die in das fertige Erzeugnis oder Untererzeugnis einfliessen. In ERPNext kann eine Komponente ihre eigene Stückliste haben, und formt somit eine mehrstufige Baumstruktur.
+
+Um passende Einkaufsanfragen zu erstellen, müssen Sie Ihre Stücklisten immer auf dem aktuellen Stand halten. Um eine neue Stückliste anzulegen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+>Fertigung > Dokumente > Stückliste > Neue Stückliste
+
+
+
+Um Arbeitsgänge hinzuzufügen, wählen Sie "Mit Arbeitsgängen". Die Übersicht der Arbeitsgänge erscheint.
+
+
+
+* Wählen Sie den Artikel für den Sie eine Stückliste erstellen wollen.
+* Fügen Sie die Arbeitsgänge, die Sie durchlaufen müssen, um diesen Artikel zu fertigen, in der Tabelle der Arbeitsgänge hinzu. Für jeden Arbeitsgang werden Sie nach einem Arbeitsplatz gefragt. Wenn nötig, müssen Sie neue Arbeitsplätze anlegen.
+* Arbeitsplätze sind nur für die Produktkostenkalkulation und die Terminplanung der Arbeitsgänge des Fertigungsauftrags definiert, nicht für das Fertigungslager.
+* Der Bestand an Erzeugnissen wird über das Lager nachverfolgt, nicht über die Arbeitsplätze.
+
+### Kostenkalkulation einer Stückliste
+
+* Der Bereich Kostenkalkulation der Stückliste gibt einen ungefähren Wert der Produktionskosten eines Artikels wieder
+* Fügen Sie die Liste der Artikel, die Sie für jeden Arbeitsgang benötigen, mit der entsprechenden Menge hinzu. Bei dem Artikel kann es sich um einen Zukaufartikel oder um eine Unterfertigung mit eigener Stückliste handeln. Wenn der Artikel in der Zeile ein gefertigter Artikel ist und mehrere verschiedene Stücklisten hat, wählen Sie die passende Stückliste aus. Sie können auch festlegen, ob ein Teil des Artikels zu Ausschuss wird.
+
+
+
+* Diese Kosten können über die Schaltfläche "Kosten aktualisieren" aktualisiert werden.
+
+
+
+### Benötigtes Material (aufgelöst)
+
+Diese Tabelle listet alles Material auf, welches benötigt wird um den Artikel zu fertigen. Sie zieht weiterhin Unterbaugruppen mit Menge an.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..24e76be4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Fertigung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Das Modul Fertigung in ERPNext hilft Ihnen, mehrstufige Stücklisten Ihrer Artikel zu verwalten. Es unterstützt Sie bei der Kostenkalkulation, der Produktionsplanung, beim Erstellen von Produktionsaufträgen für Ihre Fertigungsabteilungen und bei der Planung der Lagerbestände über die Erstellung von Materialbedarfen über Ihre Stückliste (auch Materialbedarfsplanung genannt).
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3b932a52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+introduction
+bill-of-materials
+production-order
+workstation
+operation
+subcontracting
+tools
+setup
+articles
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/introduction.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/introduction.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1b7d7e1a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/introduction.md
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+
+# Einführung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+### Arten der Produktionsplanung
+
+In der Hauptsache gibt es drei Arten von Produktionsplanungssystemen
+
+* **Lagerfertigung:** In diesen Systemen wird die Fertigung aufgrund einer Vorhersage geplant und die Artikel werden dann an Großhändler und Kunden verkauft. Alle sich schnell drehenden Waren, die in Ladengeschäften verkauf werden, wie z. B. Seife, abgepacktes Wasser und Elektronikartikel wie Mobiletelefone etc. werden als Lagerware produziert.
+* **Auftragsfertigung:** Bei diesem System findet die Fertigung erst nach einer festen Bestellung des Kunden statt.
+* **Projektfertigung:** In diesem Fall ist jeder Verkauf ein separates Projekt und muss für die Erfordernisse des Kunden entwickelt und entworfen werden. Häufige Beispiele hierfür sind jedwede Kundengeschäfte im Bereich Möbel, Werkzeugmaschinen, Spezialmaschinen, Metallherstellung etc.
+
+Die meisten kleinen und mittleren Fertigungsaktivitäten basieren auf einer Auftragsfertigung oder auf einer Projektfertigung, und genauso verhält es sich auch in ERPNext.
+
+Für Systeme auf Basis der Projektfertigung, sollte das Fertigungsmodul zusammen mit dem Projektmodul verwendet werden.
+
+Fertigung und Vorräte
+
+Sie können unfertige Erzeugnisse über das Lager Unfertige Erzeugnisse nachvollziehen.
+
+ERPNext unterstützt Sie dabei Materialüberträge nachzuvollziehen, indem Lagerbuchungen aus Ihren Fertigungsaufträgen unter Zuhilfenahme Ihrer Stücklisten erstellt werden.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/operation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/operation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..00486d32
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/operation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+
+# Arbeitsgang
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+### Arbeitsgang
+
+Hier wird eine Liste aller Arbeitsgänge der Fertigung verwaltet, inklusive deren Beschreibung und des Standardarbeitsplatzes für jeden Arbeitsgang.
+
+Sie können einen Arbeitsgang anlegen über:
+
+> Fertigung > Dokumente > Arbeitsgang > Neu
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/production-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/production-order.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..49767eba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/production-order.md
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+
+# Fertigungsauftrag
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Der Fertigungsauftrag (auch als Arbeitsauftrag bezeichnet) ist ein Dokument welches vom Produktionsplaner als Startsignal in die Fertigung gegeben wird, um eine bestimmte Anzahl eines bestimmten Artikels zu produzieren. Der Fertigungsauftrag unterstützt Sie auch dabei den Materialbedarf (Lagerbuchung) für diesen Artikel aus der **Stückliste** zu generieren.
+
+Der **Fertigungsauftrag** wird aus dem **Werkzeug zur Fertigungsplanung** generiert, basierend auf den Kundenaufträgen. Sie können weiterhin direkt einen Fertigungsauftrag erstellen über:
+
+> Fertigung > Dokumente > Fertigungsauftrag > Neu
+
+
+
+### Einen Fertigungsauftrag erstellen
+
+* Wählen Sie den Artikel aus, der gefertigt werden soll.
+* Die Standard-Stückliste für diesen Artikel wird aus dem System gezogen. Sie können die Stückliste auch ändern.
+* Wenn die ausgewählte Stückliste auch Arbeitsgänge mit berücksichtigt, sollte das System alle Arbeitsgänge aus der Stückliste übernehmen.
+* Geben Sie das geplante Startdatum an (ein geschätztes Datum zu dem die Produktion beginnen soll).
+* Wählen Sie das Lager aus. Das Fertigungslager ist der Ort zu dem die Artikel gelangen, wenn Sie mit der Herstellung beginnen, und das Eingangslager ist der Ort, wo fertige Erzeugnisse lagern, bevor sie versandt werden.
+
+> Anmerkung: Sie können einen Fertigungsauftrag abspeichern ohne ein Lager auszuwählen. Lager sind jedoch zwingend erforderlich um einen Fertigungsauftrag zu übertragen.
+
+### Arbeitsplätze neu zuordnen/Dauer von Arbeitsgängen
+
+* Als Voreinstellung zieht das System Arbeitsplätze und die Dauer von Arbeitsgängen aus der gewählten Stückliste.
+
+
+
+* Wenn Sie den Arbeitsplatz für einen bestimmten Arbeitsgang im Fertigungsauftrag neu zuordnen möchten, können Sie das tun, bevor Sie den Fertigungsauftrag übertragen.
+
+
+
+* Wählen Sie den betreffenden Arbeitsgang aus und ändern Sie seinen Arbeitsplatz.
+* Sie können auch die Dauer des Arbeitsgangs ändern.
+
+### Kapazitätsplanung im Fertigungsauftrag
+
+* Wenn ein Fertigungsauftrag basierend auf dem geplanten Startdatum und der Verfügbarkeit des Arbeitsplatzes übertragen wird, plant das System alle Arbeitsgänge für den Fertigungsauftrag ein (wenn der Fertigungsauftrag selbst Arbeitsgänge enthält).
+
+### Material der Fertigung übergeben
+
+* Wenn Sie Ihren Fertigungsauftrags übertragen haben, müssen Sie das Rohmaterial übertragen um den Fertigungsprozess zu starten.
+* Das erstellt eine Lagerbuchung mit allen Artikeln, die benötigt werden, um diesen Fertigungsauftrag abzuschliessen. Die Artikel werden an das Fertigungslager übertragen (dieser Prozess fügt basierend auf Ihren Einstellungen Unterbaugruppen mit Stückliste als EINEN Artikel hinzu oder löst die Unterpunkte auf).
+* Klicken Sie auf "Material der Fertigung übergeben".
+
+
+
+* Geben Sie die Menge des Materials an, das übertragen werden soll.
+
+
+
+* Übertragen Sie die Lagerbuchung.
+
+
+
+* Das an die Fertigung übertragene Material wird basierend auf der Lagerbuchung im Fertigungsauftrag aktualisiert.
+
+
+
+### Zeitprotokoll erstellen
+
+* Der Fortschritt des Fertigungsauftrages kann über ein [Zeitprotokoll]
mitprotokolliert werden.
+* Zeitprotokolle werden zu den Arbeitsgängen des Fertigungsauftrages erstellt.
+* Vorlagen für Zeitprotokolle werden für die eingeplanten Arbeitsgänge zum Zeitpunkt des Übertragens des Fertigungsauftrages erstellt.
+* Um weitere Zeitprotokolle zu einem Arbeitsgang zu erstellen, wählen Sie "Zeitprotokoll erstellen" im betreffenden Arbeitsgang aus.
+
+
+
+### Fertige Erzeugnisse aktualisieren
+
+* Wenn Sie den Fertigungsauftrag fertiggestellt haben, müssen Sie die Fertigen Erzeugnisse aktualisieren.
+* Das erstellt eine Lagerbuchung, welche alle Unterartikel vom Fertigungslager abzieht und dem Lager "Fertige Erzeugnisse" gutschreibt.
+* Klicken Sie auf "Fertige Erzeugnisse aktualisieren".
+
+
+
+* Geben Sie die Menge des übertragenen Materials an.
+
+
+
+>Tipp: Sie können einen Fertigungsauftrag auch teilweise fertig stellen, indem Sie über eine Lagerbuchung das Lager Fertige Erzeugnisse aktualisieren.
+
+### Einen Fertigungsauftrag anhalten
+
+* Wenn Sie einen Fertigungsauftrag anhalten, wird sein Status auf "Angehalten" gesetzt, mit der Folge, dass alle Herstellungsprozesse für diesen Fertigungsauftrag eingestellt werden.
+* Um den Fertigungsauftrag anzuhalten klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Anhalten".
+
+1. Wenn Sie den Fertigungsauftrag übertragen, reserviert das System für jeden Arbeitsgang des Fertigungsauftrags in Serie gemäß dem geplanten Startdatum basierend auf der Verfügbarkeit des Arbeitsplatzes ein Zeitfenster. Die Verfügbarkeit des Arbeitsplatzes hängt von den Arbeitszeiten des Arbeitsplatzes und der Urlaubsliste ab und davon, ob ein anderer Arbeitsgang des Fertigungsauftrages in diesem Zeitfenster eingeplant wurde. Sie können in den Fertigungseinstellungen die Anzahl der Tage angeben, in denen das System versucht den Arbeitsgang einzuplanen. Standardmäßig ist dieser Wert auf 30 Tage eingestellt. Wenn der Arbeitsgang über das verfügbare Zeitfenster hinaus Zeit benötigt, fragt Sie das System, ob der Arbeitsgang pausieren soll. Wenn das System die Terminplanung erstellen konnte, legt es Zeitprotokolle an und speichert sie. Sie können diese verändern und später übertragen.
+2. Sie können außerdem zusätzliche Zeitprotokolle für einen Arbeitsgang erstellen. Hierzu wählen Sie den betreffenden Arbeitsgang aus und klicken Sie auf "Zeitprotokoll erstellen".
+3. Rohmaterial übertragen: Dieser Schritt erstellt eine Lagerbuchung mit allen Artikeln, die benötigt werden, um dem Fertigungsauftrag abzuschliessen, und dem Fertigungslager hinzugefügt werden müssen (Unterartikel werden entweder als EIN Artikel mit Stücklister ODER in aufgelöster Form gemäß Ihren Einstellungen hinzugefügt).
+4. Fertigerzeugnisse aktualisieren: Dieser Schritt erstellt eine Lagerbuchung, welche alle Unterartikel vom Fertigungslager abzieht und dem Lager Fertige Erzeugnisse hinzufügt.
+5. Um die zum Fertigungsauftrag erstellten Zeitprotokolle anzusehen, klicken Sie auf "Zeitprotokolle anzeigen".
+
+
+
+* Sie können auch einen angehaltenen Fertigungsauftrag wieder weiter laufen lassen.
+
+> Anmerkung: Um einen Fertigungsauftrag zu einem Artikel zu erstellen müssen Sie auf dem Artikelformular das Feld "Fertigungsauftrag zulassen" ankreuzen.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/setup/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/setup/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/setup/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/setup/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6caa04ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Einrichtung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Globale Einstellungen für den Fertigungsprozess
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6f47a7cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+manufacturing-settings
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8cec04a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+
+# Fertigungseinstellungen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Die Fertigungseinstellungen finden Sie unter
+
+> Fertigung > Einstellungen > Fertigungseinstellungen
+
+
+
+Überstunden zulassen: Hier können Sie angeben, ob an Arbeitsplätzen Überstunden erlaubt sind (wichtig zur Planung von Arbeitsgängen außerhalb der Betriebsstunden).
+
+Fertigung im Urlaub zulassen: Hier können Sie angeben, ob das System an Urlaubstagen Arbeitsgänge einplanen darf.
+
+Kapazitätsplanung für (Tage): Hier können Sie die Anzahl der Tage angeben, für die die Kapazität geplant werden soll.
+
+Zeit zwischen den Arbeitsgängen (in Minuten): Hier können Sie die Pause zwischen den Arbeitsschritten der Fertigung definieren.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/subcontracting.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/subcontracting.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c5edf4dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/subcontracting.md
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+
+# Fremdvergabe
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Fremdvergabe ist eine Art Arbeitsvertrag bei dem bestimmte Arbeiten an andere Unternehmen ausgelagert werden. Das ermöglicht es mehr als eine Phase eines Projektes zum selben Zeitpunkt abzuarbeiten, was oftmals zu einer schnelleren Fertigstellung führt. Fremdvergabe von Arbeiten wird in vielen Industriebranchen praktiziert. So vergeben z. B. Hersteller, die eine Vielzahl von Produkten aus anspruchsvollen Bestandteilen erstellen, Unteraufträge zur Herstellung von Komponenten und verarbeiten diese dann in Ihren Fabrikationsanlagen.
+
+Wenn Sie bei Ihrer Tätigkeit bestimmte Prozesse an eine Drittpartei, bei der Sie Rohmateriel einkaufen, unterbeauftragen. können Sie das über die Option "Fremdvergabe" in ERPNext nachverfolgen.
+
+### Fremdvergabe einstellen
+
+1. Erstellen Sie getrennte Artikel für unbearbeitete und bearbeitet Produkte. Beispiel: Wenn Sie Ihrem Lieferanten unlackierte Artikel X übergeben und Ihnen der Lieferant lackierte Produkte X zurückliefert, dann erstellen Sie zwei Artikel: "X unlackiert" und "X".
+2. Erstellen Sie ein Lager für den Lieferanten, damit Sie die übergebenen Artikel nachverfolgen können (möglicherweise geben Sie ja Artikel im Wert einer Monatslieferung außer Haus).
+3. Stellen Sie für den bearbeiteten Artikel und der Artikelvorlage den Punkt "Ist Fremdvergabe" auf JA ein.
+
+
+
+
+**Schritt 1:** Erstellen Sie für den bearbeiteten Artikel eine Stückliste, die den unbearbeiteten Artikel als Unterartikel enthält. Beispiel: Wenn Sie einen Stift herstellen, wird der bearbeitete Stift mit der Stückliste benannt, wbei der Tintentank, der Knopf und andere Artikel, die in die Fertigung eingehen als Unterartikel verwaltet werden.
+
+**Schritt 2:** Erstellen Sie für den bearbeiteten Artikel eine Kundenbestellung. Wenn Sie abspeichern, werden unter "Rohmaterial geliefert" alle unbearbeiteten Artikel aufgrund Ihrer Stückliste aktualisert.
+
+**Schritt 3:** Erstellen Sie eine Lagerbuchung um die Rohmaterialartikel an Ihren Lieferanten zu liefern.
+
+**Schritt 4:** Sie erhalten Ihre Artikel vom Lieferanten über den Kaufbeleg zurück. Stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie den Punkt "Verbrauchte Menge" in der Tabelle Rohmaterial ankreuzen, damit der korrekte Lagerbestand auf Seiten des Lieferanten verwaltet wird.
+
+> Anmerkung 1: Stellen Sie sicher, dass der Preis des verarbeiteten Artikels der Preis der Bearbeitung ist (ohne den Preis des Rohmaterials).
+
+> Anmerkung 2: ERPNext fügt zur Bewertung automatisch den Wert des Rohmaterials hinzu, wenn die fertigen Erzeugnisse in Ihrem Lager ankommen.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/bom-replace-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/bom-replace-tool.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b5a553ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/bom-replace-tool.md
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+
+# Stücklisten-Austauschwerkzeug
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Das Stücklisten-Austauschwerkzeug ist ein Werkzeug zum Austauschen von Stücklisten bei Unterartikeln, die bereits in der Stückliste eines Fertigerzeugnisses aktualisiert wurden.
+
+Um das Stücklisten-Austauschwerkzeug zu verwenden, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Fertigung > Werkzeuge > Stücklisten-Austauschwerkzeug
+
+Stellen wir uns folgendes Szenario vor, um den Sachverhalt besser zu verstehen:
+
+Wenn eine Firma Computer herstellt, besteht die Stückliste des fertigen Erzeugnisses in etwa so aus:
+
+1. Bildschirm
+2. Tastatur
+3. Maus
+4. Zentraleinheit
+
+Von den oben aufgelisteten Artikeln wird die Zentraleinheit separat zusammengebaut. Somit wird eine eigenständige Stückliste für die Zentraleinheit ersellt. Im folgenden werden die Artikel der Stückliste der Zentraleinheit angegeben:
+
+1. 250 GByte Festplatte
+2. Hauptplatine
+3. Prozessor
+4. SMTP
+5. DVD-Laufwerk
+
+Wenn zur Stückliste der Zentraleinheit weitere Artikel hinzugefügt werden sollen, oder enthaltene Artikel bearbeitet werden sollen, sollte eine neue Stückliste erstellt werden.
+
+1. _350 GByte Festplatte_
+2. Hauptplatine
+3. Prozessor
+4. SMTP
+5. DVD-Laufwerk
+
+Um die Stückliste, bei der die Zentraleinheit als Rohmaterial enthalten ist, in der Stückliste des fertigen Produktes zu aktualisieren, können Sie das Stücklisten-Austauschwerkzeug verwenden.
+
+
+
+In diesem Werkzeug wählen Sie die aktuelle und die neue Stückliste aus. Wenn Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Austauschen" klicken, wird in der Stückliste des fertigen Produktes (Computer) die aktuelle Stückliste der Zentraleinheit durch die neue Stückliste ersetzt.
+
+#### Arbeitet das Stücklisten-Austauschwerkzeug auch dann, wenn ein fertiges Produkt in der Stückliste ausgetauscht werden soll?
+
+Nein. Hierzu sollten Sie die aktuelle Stückliste abbrechen und ändern, oder eine neue Stückliste für das fertige Erzeugnis anlegen.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d9c3cb9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
+# Werkzeuge
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1f798d06
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+production-planning-tool
+bom-replace-tool
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/production-planning-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/production-planning-tool.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7d661a11
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/tools/production-planning-tool.md
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+
+# Werkzeug zur Fertigungsplanung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Das Werkzeug zur Fertigungsplanung unterstützt Sie dabei die Fertigung zu planen und Artikel für eine Periode einzukaufen (normalerweise eine Woche oder ein Monat).
+
+Die Liste der Artikel kann über die offenen Kundenaufträge im System erstellt werden. Folgendes wird angelegt:
+
+* Fertigungsaufträge für jeden Artikel.
+* Materialanforderung für Artikel deren vorhergesagte Menge wahrscheinlich unter 0 fällt.
+
+Um das Werkzeug zur Fertigungsplanung zu nutzen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Fertigung > Werkzeuge > Werkzeug zur Fertigungsplanung
+
+
+
+### Schritt 1: Auswahl und Kundenauftrag
+
+* Wählen Sie einen Kundenauftrag für die Materialanforderung über die Filterfunktion (Zeit, Artikel und Kunde) aus.
+* Klicken Sie auf "Kundenaufträge aufrufen" um eine Übersicht zu erhalten.
+
+
+
+### Schritt 2: Artikel aus Kundenaufträgen abrufen
+
+Sie können Artikel hinzufügen, entfernen oder die Menge dieser Artikel verändern.
+
+
+
+### Schritt 3: Fertigungsaufträge erstellen
+
+
+
+### Schritt 4: Materialanfragen erstellen
+
+Erstellen Sie für Artikel mit prognostiziertem Engpass Materialanfragen.
+
+
+
+Das Werkzeug zur Fertigungsplanung wird auf zwei Ebenend verwendet:
+
+* Auswahl von offenen Kundenaufträge einer Periode auf Basis des erwarteten Lieferdatums.
+* Auswahl von Artikeln aus diesen Kundenaufträgen.
+
+Das Werkzeug erstellt eine Aktualisierung, wenn Sie bereits einen Kundenauftrag für einen bestimmten Artikel zu einem Kundenauftrag erstellt haben ("geplante Menge").
+
+Sie könnenjederzeit die Artikelliste bearbeiten und die zur Fertigung geplante Menge erhöhen bzw. vermindern.
+
+> Anmerkung: Wie ändern Sie einen Fertigungsplan? Des Ergebnis des Werkzeuges zur Produktionsplanung ist der Fertigungsauftrag. Sobald Ihre Aufträge erstellt wurden, können Sie sie ändern, indem Sie die Fertigungsaufträge ändern.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/workstation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/workstation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..22c27236
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/manufacturing/workstation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+
+# Arbeitsplatz
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+### Arbeitsplatz
+
+Hier werden Informationen über den Ort, an dem Arbeitsgänge ausgeführt werden, gespeichert. Auch Daten zu den Kosten des Arbeitsganges können hier hinterlegt werden. Zudem können die Arbeitszeiten des Arbeitsplatzes und die Urlaubsliste hinterlegt werden.
+
+Sie können einen Arbeitsplatz erstellen über:
+
+> Fertigung > Dokumente > Arbeitsplatz > Neu
+
+
+
+Geben Sie unter "Arbeitszeit" die Betriebszeiten des Arbeitsplatzes an. Sie können die Betriebszeiten auch mit Hilfe von Schichten angeben. Wenn Sie einen Fertigungauftrag einplanen, prüft das System die Verfügbarkeit des Arbeitsplatzes basierend auf den angegebenen Betrieszeiten.
+
+> Anmerkung: Sie können Überstunden für einen Arbeitsplatz über die [Fertigungseinstellungen]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.html) aktivieren.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/activity-cost.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/activity-cost.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a2878dad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/activity-cost.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
+# Aktivitätskosten
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Die Aktivitätskosten erfassen den Stundensatz und die Kosten eines Mitarbeiters zu einer Aktivitätsart. Dieser Betrag wird beim Erstellen von Zeitprotokollen vom System angezogen. Er wird für die Aufwandsabrechnung des Projektes verwendet.
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/activity-type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/activity-type.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..58ab386b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/activity-type.md
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+
+# Aktivitätsart
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Unter dem Punkt "Aktivitätsart" wird eine Liste verschiedener Typen von Aktivitäten erstellt zu denen Zeitprotokolle erstellt werden können.
+
+
+
+Standardmäßig sind die folgenden Aktivitätsarten angelegt:
+
+* Planung
+* Forschung
+* Angebotserstellung
+* Ausführende Arbeiten
+* Kommunikation
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d86669ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+# Projekte
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+ERPNext unterstützt Sie dabei Ihre Projekte abzuwickeln, indem es diese in Aufgaben aufteilt und diese unterschiedlichen Personen zuteilt.
+
+Zudem können Einkauf und Vertrieb zu Projekten nachverfolgt werden und das hilft dem Unternehmen dabei das Budget eines Projektes, die Liefersituation und die Profitabilität unter Kontrolle zu halten.
+
+Projekte können dazu verwendet werden, interne Aufgabenstellungen, Fertigungsaufträge und Dienstleistungen abzuwickeln. Für Dienstleistungen können auch Zeitübersichten erstellt werden, die bei Kunden abgerechnet werden können, wenn die Abrechnung aufgrund von Zeitabrechnung vereinbart wurde.
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c3bdd71e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+tasks
+project
+time-log
+time-log-batch
+activity-type
+activity-cost
+articles
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/project.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/project.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..04e03407
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/project.md
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+
+# Projekt
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Das Projektmanagement in ERPNext ist aufgabengesteuert. Sie können ein Projekt erstellen und ihm mehrere unterschiedliche Aufgaben zuweisen.
+
+
+
+### Aufgaben verwalten
+
+Ein Projekt kann in mehrere verschiedene Aufgaben aufgeteilt werden.
+Eine Aufgabe kann über das Projektdokument selbst erstellt werden oder über die Schaltfläche [Aufgabe]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/projects/tasks.html).
+
+
+
+* Um eine Aufgabe, die zu einem Projekt erstellt wurde, anzusehen, klicken Sie auf "Aufgabe",
+
+
+
+
+
+* Sie können Aufgaben auch über das Projektdokument selbst ansehen.
+
+
+
+### Zeitmanagement
+
+ERPNext verwendet [Zeitprotokolle]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/projects/time-log.html) um den Fortschritt eines Projektes nachzuverfolgen. Sie können Zeitprotokolle zu jeder Aufgabe erstellen. Das aktuelle Start- und Enddatum wird dann zusammen mit der Kostenberechnung basierend auf dem Zeitprotokoll aktualisiert.
+
+* Um ein Zeitprotokoll zu einem Projekt anzusehen, klicken Sie auf "Zeitprotokolle"
+
+
+
+
+
+* Sie können ein Zeitprotokoll auch direkt erstellen und mit dem Projekt verknüpfen.
+
+
+
+### Aufwände verwalten
+
+Sie können [Aufwandsabrechnungen]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/human-resources/expense-claim.html) mit Projektaufgaben verbuchen. Das System aktualisiert die Gesamtsumme der Aufwände im Abschnitt Kostenabrechnung.
+
+* Um die Aufwandsabrechnungen zu einem Projekt anzusehen, klicken Sie auf "Aufwandsabrechnung".
+
+
+
+* Sie könne Aufwandsabrechnungen auch direkt erstellen und mit einem Projekt verknüpfen.
+
+
+
+* Der Gesamtbetrag der mit einem Projekt verbuchten Aufwandsabrechnungen wird unter "Gesammtsumme der Aufwandsabrechnungen" im Abschnitt "Kostenabrechnung" angezeigt.
+
+
+
+### Kostenstelle
+
+Sie können zu einem Projekt eine [Kostenstelle]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/accounts/setup/cost-center.html) erstellen oder Sie können eine existierende Kostenstelle verwenden um alle Aufwände die zu einem Projekt entstehen mitzuverfolgen.
+
+
+
+### Projektkostenabrechnung
+
+Der Abschnitt Projektkostenabrechnung hilft Ihnen dabei, die Zeit und die AUfwände die in einem Projekt anfallen, nachzuverfolgen.
+
+
+
+* Der Abschnitt Kostenabrechnung wird basierend auf den Zeitprotokollen aktualisiert.
+* Die Bruttospanne ist die Differenz zwischen dem Betrag der gesamten Kosten und dem Gesamtbetrag der Rechnung.
+
+### Abrechnung
+
+Sie können einen [Kundenauftrag]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/selling/sales-order.html) zu einem Projekt erstellen bzw. ihn mit dem Projekt verknüpfen. Wenn er einmal verlinkt ist, können Sie das Vertriebsmodul dazu nutzen, dass Projekt mit Ihrem Kunden abzurechnen.
+
+
+
+### Gantt-Diagramm
+
+Ein Gantt-Diagramm illustriert einen Projektplan, ERPNext erstellt Ihnen eine illustrierte Übersicht aller terminierten Aufgaben eines Projektes als Gantt-Diagramm.
+
+* Um ein Gantt-Diagramm zu einem Projekt anzusehen, gehen Sie zu diesem Projekt und klicken Sie auf "Gantt-Diagramm".
+
+
+
+
+
+[next]
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/tasks.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/tasks.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3d1af7f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/tasks.md
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+
+# Aufgaben
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Ein Projekt wird in Aufgaben unterteilt. In ERPNext können Sie auch Abhängigkeiten zwischen Aufgaben erstellen.
+
+
+
+### Status der Aufgabe
+
+Ein Aufgabe kann folgende Stati haben: "Offen", "In Arbeit", "Wartet auf Überprüfung", "Geschlossen" und "Abgebrochen".
+
+
+
+* Standardmäßig sollte jede neu erstellte Aufgabe den Status "Offen" haben.
+* Wenn ein Zeitprotokoll für eine Aufgabe erstellt wird, sollte ihr Status "In Arbeit" sein.
+
+### Abhängige Aufgaben
+
+Sie können eine Liste von abhängigen Aufgaben im Bereich "Hängt ab von" erstellen.
+
+
+
+* Sie können eine übergeordnete Aufgabe nicht abschliessen bis alle abhängigen Aufgaben abgeschlossen sind.
+* Wenn sich die abhängige Aufgabe verzögert und sich mit dem voraussichtlichen Startdatum der übergeordneten Aufgabe überlappt, überarbeitet das System die übergeordnete Aufgabe.
+
+### Zeitmanagement
+
+ERPNext verwendet [Zeitprotokolle]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/projects/time-log.html) um den Fortschritt einer Aufgabe mitzuprotokollieren. Sie können mehrere unterschiedliche Zeitprotokolle zu jeder Aufgabe erstellen. Das aktuelle Start- und Enddatum kann dann zusammen mit der auf dem Zeitprotokoll basierenden Kostenberechnung aktualisiert werden.
+
+* Um ein zu einer Aufgabe erstelltes Zeitprotokoll anzuschauen, klicken Sie auf "Zeitprotokolle".
+
+
+
+
+
+* Sie können ein Zeitprotokoll auch direkt erstellen und mit einer Aufgabe verknüpfen.
+
+
+
+### Ausgabenmanagement
+
+Sie können [Aufwandsabrechnungen]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/human-resources/expense-claim.html) mit einer Aufgabe verbuchen. Das System aktualisiert den Gesamtbetrag der Aufwandsabrechnungen im Abschnitt Kostenberechnung.
+
+* Um eine Aufwandsabrechnung, die zu einer Aufgabe erstellt wurde, anzuschauen, klicken Sie auf "Aufwandsabrechnung".
+
+
+
+* Sie können eine Aufwandsabrechnung auch direkt erstellen und sie mit einer Aufgabe verknüpfen.
+
+
+
+* Der Gesamtbetrag der Aufwandsabrechnungen zu einer Aufgabe wird unter "Gesamtbetrag der Aufwandsabrechnungen" im Abschnitt Kostenabrechnung angezeigt.
+
+
+
+{next}
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/time-log-batch.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/time-log-batch.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..56f524c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/time-log-batch.md
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+
+# Zeitprotokollstapel
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Sie können Zeitprotokolle abrechnen, indem Sie sie zusammenbündeln. Das gibt Ihnen die Flexibiliät die Abrechnung an den Kunden so zu handhaben wie sie es wollen. Um einen neuen Zeitprotokollstapel zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+>Projekte > Dokumente > Zeitprotokollstapel > Neuer Zeitprotokollstapel
+
+ODER
+
+Öffnen Sie einfach Ihre Übersicht der Zeitprotokolle und kreuzen Sie die Artikel an, die Sie dem Zeitprotokollstapel hinzufügen möchten. Klicken Sie dann auf die Schaltfläche "Zeitprotokollstapel erstellen" und diese Zeitprotokolle werden ausgewählt.
+
+
+
+### Ausgangsrechnungen erstellen
+
+* Sobald Sie einen Zeitprotokollstapel übertragen haben, sollte die Schaltfläche "Rechnung erstellen" erscheinen.
+
+
+
+* Klicken Sie auf diese Schaltfläche und erstellen Sie eine Ausgangsrechnung zu einem Zeitprotokollstapel.
+
+
+
+* Wenn Sie die Ausgangsrechnung "übertragen", wird die Nummer der Ausgangsrechnung in den Zeitprotokollen und im Zeitprotokollstapel aktualisiert und ihr Status wird auf "abgerechnet" geändert.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/time-log.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/time-log.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fb2c8948
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/projects/time-log.md
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+
+# Zeitprotokoll
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Über Zeitprotokoll kann Arbeitszeit aufgezeichnet werden. Man kann sie nutzen um folgendes mitzuprotokollieren:
+
+* Arbeit, die mit dem Kunden abgerechnet werden kann
+* Arbeitsgänge des Fertigungsauftrags
+* Aufgaben
+* Projekte
+* Interne Referenzen
+
+
+
+### Zeitprotokolle erstellen
+
+1\. Um ein neues Zeitprotokoll zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Projekte > Dokumente > Zeitprotokoll > Neue
+
+2\. Sie können ein neues Zeitprotokll auch über den Kalender erstellen.
+
+Um Zeitprotokolle über den Kalender zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu "Zeitprotokoll" und wählen Sie "Kalender" aus.
+
+
+
+* Um ein Zeitprotokoll für mehrere Tage zu erstellen, klicken Sie und ziehen Sie den Mauszeiger über die Tage.
+
+
+
+* Sie können Zeitprotokolle auch aus der Wochen- oder Tagesansicht des Kalender heraus erstellen.
+
+
+
+* Zeitprotokolle für Fertigungsprozesse müssen aus dem Fertigungsauftrag heraus erstellt werden.
+* Um mehrere Zeitprotokolle zu Arbeitsgängen zu erstellen wählen Sie den entsprechenden Arbeitsgang und klicken Sie auf "Zeitprotokoll erstellen".
+
+### Abrechnung über Zeitprotokolle
+
+* Wenn Sie ein Zeitprotokoll abrechnen wollen, müssem Sie die Option "Abrechenbar" anklicken.
+* Im Abschnitt Kostenberechnung erstellt das System den Rechungsbetrag über die [Aktivitätskosten]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/projects/activity-cost.html) basierend auf dem angegebenen Mitarbeiter und der angegebenen Aktivitätsart.
+* Das System kalkuliert dann den Rechnungsbetrag basierend auf den im Zeitprotokoll angegebenen Stunden.
+* Wenn "Abrechenbar" nicht markiert wurde, zeigt das System beim "Rechnungsbetrag" 0 an.
+
+
+
+* Nach dem Übertragen des Zeitprotokolls müssen Sie einen [Zeitprotokollstapel]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/projects/time-log-batch.html) erstellen um mit der Abrechnung fortfahren zu können.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d8f9fae5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Vertrieb
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Vertrieb beschreibt die Kommunikation, die mit dem Kunden vor und während des Verkaufsvorgangs auftritt. Sie können die gesamt Kommunikation entweder selbst abwickeln oder Sie haben ein kleines Team an Vertriebsmitarbeitern. ERPNext hilft Ihnen dabei die Kommunikation, die zu einem Verkauf führt, mitzuprotokollieren, indem alle Dokumente in einer organisierten und durchsuchbaren Art und Weise verwaltet werden.
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3f414d12
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+quotation
+sales-order
+setup
+articles
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/quotation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/quotation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..84925e35
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/quotation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+
+# Angebot
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Während eines Verkaufsvorgangs wird der Kunde ein schriftliches Angebot über die Produkte oder Dienstleistungen, die Sie anbieten möchten, anfragen, inklusive der Preise und anderen Vertragsbedingungen. Dies bezeichnet man als Vorschlag, Kostenvoranschlag, Pro Forma-Rechnung oder Angebot.
+
+Um ein neues Angebot zu erstellen gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Vertrieb > Dokumente > Angebot > Neues Angebot
+
+### Erstellen eines Angebotes aus einer Opportunity heraus
+
+Sie können auch ein Angebot aus einer Opportunity heraus erstellen.
+
+
+
+Oder Sie erstellen ein neues Angebot und übernehmen Details aus der Opportunity.
+
+
+
+Ein Angebot enthält Informationen über:
+
+* Den Empfänger des Angebots
+* Die Artikel und Mengen, die Sie anbieten
+* Die Preise, zu denen Sie anbieten (Siehe auch unten)
+* Die anfallenden Steuern
+* Andere Abgaben (wie Versandkosten, Versicherung), wenn sie zutreffen
+* Vertragsdauer
+* Die Lieferzeit
+* Andere Vereinbarungen
+
+> Tipp: Bilder schauen auf Angeboten toll aus. Um Bilder zu Ihren Angeboten hinzu zu fügen, binden Sie das entsprechende Bild in der Artikelvorlage ein.
+
+### Preise
+
+Die Preise, die sie abgeben, hängen von zwei Dingen ab:
+
+* Die Preisliste: Wenn Sie mehrere verschiedene Preislisten haben, können Sie eine Preisliste auswählen oder sie mit dem Kunden markieren (so dass sie automatisch vorselektiert wird). Ihre Artikelpreise werden automatisch über die Preisliste aktualisert. Für weitere Informationen bitte bei [Preisliste]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/setting-up/price-lists.html) weiterlesen.
+* Die Währung: Wenn Sie einem Kunden in einer anderen Währung anbieten, müssen Sie die Umrechnungsfaktoren aktualisieren um ERPNext in die Lage zu versetzen die Information in Ihrer Standardwährung zu speichern. Das hilft Ihnen dabei den Wert Ihres Angebots in der Standardwährung zu analysieren.
+
+### Steuern
+
+Um Steuern zu Ihrem Angebot hinzu zu fügen, können Sie entweder eine Steuervorlage oder eine Verkaufssteuern- und Gebühren-Vorlage auswählen oder die Steuern selbst hinzufügen. Um Steuern im Einzelnen zu verstehen, lesen Sie bitte [Steuern]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html).
+
+Sie können Steuern auf die gleiche Art hinzufügen wie die Vorlage Verkaufssteuern und Gebühren.
+
+### Vertragsbedingungen
+
+Im Idealfall beinhaltet jedes Angebot einen Satz an Vertragsbedingungen. Normalerweise ist es eine gute Idee eine Vorlage der eigenen Allgemeinen Geschäftsbediungen zu erstellen, damit Sie einen Standardsatz an Vertragsbedingungen haben. Das können Sie wie folgt tun:
+
+> Vertrieb > Einstellungen > Vorlage für Allgemeine Geschäftsbedingungen
+
+Was sollten die Vertragsbedingungen beinhalten?
+
+* Die Gültigkeit des Angebotes
+* Die Zahlungsbedingungen (Vorkasse, auf Rechnung, Anzahlung etc.)
+* Optionen und Aufpreise
+* Sicherheitswarnungen und Gebrauchshinweise
+* Garantie, sofern vorhanden
+* Reklamationsvorschriften
+* Lieferbedingungen, wenn zutreffend
+* Vorgehensweise bei Beanstandungen, Schadensersatz, Haftung etc.
+* Adresse und Ansprechpartner Ihrer Firma
+
+### Übertraung
+
+Ein Angebot ist eine "übertragbare" Transaktion. Sobald Sie das Angebot an Ihren Kunden oder Lead senden, müssen Sie den Stand einfrieren, damit keine Änderungen durchgeführt werden können. Lesen Sie hierzu auch die Informationen zu den Dokumentenphasen.
+
+> Tipp: Angebote können auch als "Pro Forma-Rechnung" oder Vorschlag bezeichnet werden. Wählen Sie die passende Bezeichnung im Feld "Briefkopf drucken" in der Sektion "Druckeinstellungen" aus. Um neue Überschriften zu erstellen gehen Sie zu
+> Einstellungen > Druck > Briefkopf drucken
+
+### Rabatt
+
+Wenn Sie Ihre Vertriebstransaktionen wie z. B. ein Angebot (oder eine Kundenbestellung) erstellen, dann haben Sie wahrscheinlich schon gemerkt, dass es eine Spalte "Rabatt" gibt. Auf der linken Seite befindet sich der Preislisten-Preis auf der rechten Seite der Grundpreis. Sie können einen Rabatt hinzufügen um den Grundpreis zu aktualisieren. Um mehr über Rabatte zu erfahren lesen Sie bitte den Abschnitt [Rabatt](http://erpnext.org/discount).
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/sales-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/sales-order.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..107760cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/sales-order.md
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+
+# Kundenauftrag
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Der Kundenauftrag bestätigt Ihren Verkauf und stößt Einkauf (**Materialanfrage**), Versand (**Lieferschein**), Abrechnung (**Ausgangsrechnung**) und Fertigung (**Produktionsplan**) an.
+
+Ein Kundenauftrag ist normalerweise ein bindender Vertrag mit Ihrem Kunden.
+
+Wenn Ihr Kunde das Angebot annimmt, können Sie das Angebot in einen Kundenauftrag umwandeln.
+
+### Flußdiagramm des Kundenauftrags
+
+
+
+Um einen neuen Kundenauftrag zu erstellen gehen Sie zu: > Vertrieb > Kundenauftrag > Neuer Kundenauftrag
+
+### Einen Kundenauftrag aus einem Angebot erstellen
+
+Sie können einen Kundenauftrag auch aus einem übertragenen Angebot heraus erstellen.
+
+
+
+Oder Sie erstellen einen neuen Kundenauftrag und entnehmen die Details aus dem Angebot.
+
+
+
+Die meisten Informationen im Kundenauftrag sind dieselben wie im Angebot. Einige Dinge möchte der Kundenauftrag aber aktualisiert haben.
+
+* Voraussichtlicher Liefertermin
+* Kundenbestellnummer: Wenn Ihnen Ihr Kunde einen Kundenauftrag geschickt hat, können Sie dessen Nummer als Refernz für die Zukunft (Abrechnung) erfassen.
+
+### Packliste
+
+Die Tabelle "Packliste" wird automatisch aktualisiert, wenn Sie den Kundenauftrag abspeichern. Wenn einer der Artikel in Ihrer Tabelle ein Produkt-Bundle (Paket) ist, dann enthält die Packliste eine aufgelöste Übersicht Ihrer Artikel.
+
+### Reservierung und Lager
+
+Wenn Ihr Kundenauftrag Artikel enthält, für die das Lager nachverfolgt wird ("Ist Lagerartikel" ist mit JA markiert), dann fragt sie ERPNext nach einem Reservierungslager. Wenn Sie ein Standard-Lager für den Artikel eingestellt haben, wird dieses automatisch verwendet.
+
+Die "reservierte" Menge hilft Ihnen dabei, die Menge abzuschätzen, die Sie basierend auf all Ihren Verpflichtungen einkaufen müssen.
+
+### Vertriebsteam
+
+**Vertriebspartner:** Wenn ein Verkauf über einen Vertriebspartner gebucht wurde, können Sie die Einzelheiten des Vertriebspartners mit der Provision und anderen gesammelten Informationen aktualisieren.
+
+**Vertriebsperson:** ERPNext erlaubt es Ihnen verschiedene Vertriebspersonen zu markieren, die an diesem Geschäft mitgearbeitet haben. Sie können auch den Anteil an der Zielerreichung auf die Vertriebspersonen aufteilen und nachverfolgen wieviele Prämien sie mit diesem Geschäft verdient haben.
+
+### Wiederkehrende Kundenaufträge
+
+Wenn Sie mit einem Kunden einen Serienkontrakt vereinbart haben, bei dem Sie einen monatlichen, vierteljährlichen, halbjährlichen oder jährlichen Kundenauftrag generieren müssen, können Sie hierfür "In wiederkehrende Bestellung umwandeln" aktivieren.
+
+Hier können Sie folgende Details eingeben: Wie häufig Sie eine Bestellung generieren wollen im Feld "Wiederholungstyp", an welchem Tag des Monats die Bestellung generiert werden soll im Feld "Wiederholen an Tag des Monats" und das Datum an dem die wiederkehrenden Bestellungen eingestellt werden sollen im Feld "Enddatum".
+
+**Wiederholungstyp:** Hier können Sie die Häufigkeit in der Sie eine Bestellung generieren wollen eingeben.
+
+**Wiederholen an Tag des Monats:** Sie können angeben, an welchem Tag des Monats die Bestellung generiert werden soll.
+
+**Enddatum:** Das Datum an dem die wiederkehrenden Bestellungen eingestellt werden sollen.
+
+Wenn Sie den Kundenauftrag aktualisieren, wird eine wiederkehrende ID generiert, die für alle wiederkehrenden Bestellungen dieses speziellen Kundenauftrag gleich ist.
+
+ERPNext erstellt automatisch eine neue Bestellung und versendet eine E-Mail-Mitteilung an die E-Mail-Konten, die Sie im Feld "Benachrichtigungs-E-Mail-Adresse" eingestellt haben.
+
+
+
+### Die nächsten Schritte
+
+In dem Moment, in dem Sie Ihren Kundenauftrag "übertragen" haben, können Sie nun verschiedene Aktionen im Unternehmen anstossen:
+
+* Um den Beschaffungsvorgang einzuleiten klicken Sie auf "Materialanforderung"
+* Um den Versand einzuleiten klicken Sie auf "Auslieferung"
+* Um eine Rechnung zu erstellen klicken Sie auf "Rechnung"
+* Um den Prozess anzuhalten, klicken Sie auf "Anhalten"
+
+### Übertragung
+
+Der Kundenauftrag ist eine "übertragbare" Transaktion. Sehen Sie hierzu auch die Dokumentenphasen. Sie können abhängige Schritte (wie einen Lieferschein zu erstellen) erst dann durchführen, wenn Sie den Kundenauftrag übertragen haben.
+
+### Kundenauftrag mit Wartungsauftrag
+
+Wenn der Bestelltyp des Kundenauftrags "Wartung" ist, folgen Sie bitte unten dargestellten Schritten:
+
+* **Schritt 1:** Geben Sie die Währung, die Preisliste und die Artikeldetails ein.
+* **Schritt 2:** Berücksichtigen Sie Steuern und andere Informationen.
+* **Schritt 3:** Speichern und übertragen Sie das Formular.
+* **Schritt 4:** Wenn das Formular übertragen wurde, zeigt die Aktionsschaltfläche drei Auswahlmöglichkeiten: 1) Wartungsbesuch 2) Wartungsplan 3) Rechnung
+
+> **Anmerkung 1:** Wenn Sie auf die Aktionsschaltfläche klicken und "Wartungsbesuch" auswählen können Sie das Besuchsformular direkt ausfüllen. Die Details werden automatisch aus dem Kundenauftrag übernommen.
+
+> **Anmerkung 2:** Wenn Sie auf die Aktionsschaltfläche klicken und "Wartungsplan" auswählen, können Sie die Details zum Wartungsplan eintragen. Die Details werden autmomatisch aus dem Kundenauftrag übernommen.
+
+> **Anmerkung 3:** Wenn Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Rechnung" klicken, können Sie eine Rechnung für die Wartungsarbeiten erstellen. Die Details werden automatisch aus dem Kundenauftrag übernommen.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cd9ea8c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+
+# Einrichtung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Dieser Abschnitt enthält Informationen darüber, wie Kundengruppen, Vertriebspartner, Vertriebsmitarbeiter und Allgemeine Geschäftsbedingungen angelegt werden.
+
+Es gibt Anleitungen, wie die Vertriebseinstellungen eingegeben werden, um Standardfelder zu aktivieren.
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..22a335b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+selling-settings
+sales-partner
+shipping-rule
+product-bundle
+item-price
+sales-person-target-allocation
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/product-bundle.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/product-bundle.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5e77cdb6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/product-bundle.md
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+
+# Produkt-Bundle
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Der Begriff "Produkt-Bundle" ist gleichbedeutend mit der Stückliste des Vertriebs. Es handelt sich dabei um eine Vorlage, in der Sie Artikel zusammenstellen können, die zusammengepackt werden und als ein Artikel verkauft werden. Beispiel: Wenn ein Laptop geliefert wird, müssen Sie sicher stellen, dass das Ladekabel, die Maus und die Tragetasche mitgeliefert werden und der Lagerbestand dieser Artikel dementsprechend bearbeitet wird. Um dieses Szenario abzubilden, können Sie für den Hauptartikel, z. B. den Laptop, die Option "Produkt-Bundle"einstellen, und die zu liefernden Artikel wie Laptop + Ladekabel + anderes Zubehör als Unterartikel auflisten.
+
+Im Folgenden sind die Schritte dargestellt, wie die Vorlage zum Produkt-Bundle eingestellt wird, und wie sie in Vertriebsaktionen genutzt wird.
+
+### Ein neues Produkt-Bundle erstellen
+
+Um ein neues Produkt-Bundle zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Vertrieb > Einstellungen > Produkt-Bundle > Neu
+
+
+
+### Hauptartikel auswählen
+
+In der Vorlage des Produkt-Bundles gibt es zwei Abschnitte. Produkt-Bundle-Artikel (Hauptartikel) und Paketartikel.
+
+Für den Produkt-Bundle-Artikel wählen sie einen übergeordneten Artikel aus. Der übergeordnete Artikel darf **kein Lagerartikel** sein, da nicht er über das Lager verwaltet wird, sondern nur die Paketartikel. Wenn Sie den übergeordneten Artikel im Lager verwalten wollen, dann müssen Sie eine reguläre Stückliste erstellen und ihn über eine Lagertransaktion zusammen packen lassen.
+
+### Unterartikel auswählen
+
+Im Abschnitt Paketartikel listen Sie alle Unterartikel auf, die über das Lager verwaltet werden und an den Kunden geliefert werden.
+
+### Produkt-Bundle in Vertriebstransaktionen
+
+Wenn Vertriebstransaktionen erstellt werden, wie z. B. Ausgangsrechnung, Kundenauftrag und Lieferschein, dann wird der übergeordnete Artikel aus der Hauptartikelliste ausgewählt.
+
+
+
+Beim Auswählen des übergeordneten Artikels aus der Hauptartikelliste werden die Unterartikel aus der Tabelle "Packliste" der Transaktion angezogen. Wenn der Unterartikel ein serialisierter Artikel ist, können Sie seine Seriennummer direkt in der Packlistentabelle angeben. Wenn die Transaktion versendet wird, reduziert das System den Lagerbestand der Unterartikel auf dem Lager der in der Packlistentabelle angegeben ist.
+
+####Produkt-Bundles nutzen um Angebote abzubilden
+
+Diese Einsatzmöglichkeit von Produkt-Bundles wurde entdeckt, als ein Kunde, der mit Nahrungsmitteln handelte, nach einer Funktion fragte, Angebote wie "Kaufe eins und bekomme eines frei dazu" abzubilden. Um das umzusetzen, legte er einen Nicht-Lager-Artikel an, der als übergeordneter Artikel verwendet wurde. In der Beschreibung des Artikels gab er die Einzelheiten zu diesem Angebot und ein Bild an. Der Verkaufsartikel wurde dann als Packartikel ausgewählt, wobei die Menge 2 war. Somit zog das System immer dann, wenn ein Artikel über dieses Angebot verkauft wurde, eine Menge von 2 im Lager ab.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/sales-partner.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/sales-partner.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9dfeeae1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/sales-partner.md
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+
+# Vertriebspartner
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Menschen, die Sie dabei unterstützen Geschäfte abzuschliessen, werden als Vertriebspartner bezeichnet. Vertriebspartner können durch unterschiedliche Namen in ERPNext repräsentiert werden. Sie können Sie als Channelpartner, Distributor, Händler, Agent, Einzelhändler, Umsetzungspartner, Wiederverkäufer, usw. bezeichnen.
+
+Für jeden Vertriebspartner, können Sie eine Provision definieren und anbieten. Wenn in Transaktionen ein Vertriebspartner ausgewählt wurde, dann wird die Provison über die Netto-Gesamtsumme des Kundenauftrags oder des Lieferscheins berechnet.
+
+Sie können personenbezogene Verkaufsprovisionen über die Berichte im Vertriebsmodul nachvollziehen.
+
+Um einen Vertriebspartner anzulegen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Vertrieb > Einstellungen > Vertriebspartner
+
+Vertriebspartner werden mit einem vom Benutzer vergebenen Namen abgespeichert.
+
+
+
+Sie können die Adressen und Kontaktdaten von Vertriebsmitarbeitern erfassen und sie basierend auf Menge und Betrag jeder Artikelgruppe zuweisen.
+
+### Vertriebspartner auf Ihrer Webseite anzeigen
+
+Um die Namen Ihrer Partner auf Ihrer Webseite anzuzeigen, aktivieren Sie "Auf der Webseite anzeigen". Wenn Sie diese Option anklicken, erscheint ein Feld, über das Sie das Logo Ihres Partners und eine kurze Beschreibung eingeben können.
+
+
+
+Um eine Übersicht Ihrer Partner zu erhalten, gehen Sie zu:
+
+https://example.erpnext.com/Partners
+
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/selling-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/selling-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1dbdb06a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/selling-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+
+# Vertriebseinstellungen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+In den Vertriebseinstellungen können Sie Eigenheiten angeben, die bei Ihren Vertriebstransaktionen mit berücksichtigt werden. Im Folgenden sprechen wir jeden einzelnen Punkt an.
+
+
+
+### 1\. Benennung der Kunden nach
+
+Wenn ein Kunde abgespeichert wird, generiert das System eine einzigartige ID für diesen Kunden. Wenn Sie diese Kunden-ID verwenden, können Sie einen Kunden in einer anderen Transaktion auswählen.
+
+Als Standardeinstellung wird der Kunde mit dem Kundennamen abgespeichert. When Sie möchten, dass der Kunde unter Verwendung eines Nummernkreises abgespeichert wird, sollten Sie "Benennung der Kunden nach" auf "Nummernkreis" einstellen.
+
+Hier ein Beispiel für Kunden-IDs, die über einen Nummernkreis abgespeichert werden: `CUST00001, CUST00002, CUST00003 ...` und so weiter.
+
+Sie können den Nummernkreis für die Kundenbenennung wie folgt einstellen:
+
+> Einstellungen > Einstellungen > Nummernkreis
+
+### 2\. Benennung der Kampagnen nach
+
+Genauso wie für den Kunden, können Sie für die Kampagnenstammdaten einstellen, wie eine ID generiert wird. Standardmäßig wird eine Kampagne mit dem Kampagnennamen abgespeichert, wie es vom System während der Erstellung angeboten wird.
+
+### 3\. Standardkundengruppe
+
+Die Kundengruppe in diesem Feld wird automatisch aktualisiert, wenn Sie ein Neukundenformular öffnen. Wenn Sie das Angebot für einen Lead in eine Kundenbestellung umwandeln, versucht das System im Hintergrund den Lead in einen Kunden umzuwandeln. Während im Hintergrund der Kunde erstellt wird, müssen für das System die Kundengruppe und die Region in den Verkaufseinstellungen angegeben werden. Wenn das System keine Einträge findet, wird eine Nachricht zur Bestätigung ausgegeben. Um dies zu verhindern, sollten Sie entweder einen Lead manuell in einen Kunden umwandeln und die Kundengruppe und die Region manuell angeben während der Kunde erstellt wird, oder eine Standardkundengruppe und eine Region in den Vertriebseinstellungen hinterlegen. Dann wird der Lead automatisch in einen Kunden umgewandelt, wenn Sie ein Angebot in eine Kundenbestellung umwandeln.
+
+### 4\. Standardregion
+Die Region, die in diesem Feld angegeben wird, wird automatisch im Feld "Region" im Kundenstamm eingetragen.
+Wie in der Kundengruppe, wird die Region auch angefragt, wenn das System im Hintergrund versucht einen Kunden anzulegen.
+
+### 5\. Standardpreisliste
+Die Preisliste, die in diesem Feld eingetragen wird, wird automatisch in das Preislistenfeld bei Vertriebstransaktionen übernommen.
+
+### 6\. Kundenauftrag erforderlich
+Wenn Sie möchten, dass die Anlage eines Kundenauftrages zwingend erforderlich ist, bevor eine Ausgangsrechnung erstellt wird, dann sollten Sie im Feld "Kundenauftrag benötigt" JA auswählen. Standardmäßig ist der Wert auf NEIN voreingestellt.
+
+### 7\. Lieferschein erforderlich
+Wenn Sie möchten, dass die Anlage eines Lieferscheins zwingend erforderlich ist, bevor eine Ausgangsrechnung erstellt wird, dann sollten Sie im Feld "Lieferschein benötigt" JA auswählen. Standardmäßig ist der Wert auf NEIN voreingestellt.
+
+### 8\. Gleiche Preise während des gesamten Verkaufszyklus beibehalten
+Das System geht standardmäßig davon aus, dass der Preis während des gesamten Vertriebszyklus (Kundenbestellung - Lieferschein - Ausgangsrechnung) gleich bleibt. Wenn Sie bemerken, dass sich der Preis währen des Zyklus ändern könnte, und Sie die Einstellung des gleichbleibenden Preises umgehen müssen, sollten Sie dieses Feld deaktivieren und speichern.
+
+### 9\. Benutzer erlauben, die Preisliste zu Transaktionen zu bearbeiten
+Die Artikeltabelle einer Vertriebstransaktion hat ein Feld, das als Preislisten-Preis bezeichnet wird. Dieses Feld kann standardmäßig in keiner Vertriebstransaktion bearbeitet werden. Damit wird sicher gestellt, dass der Preis für alle Artikel aus dem Datensatz für den Artikelpreis erstellt wird, und der Benutzer keine Möglichkeit hat, hier einzuwirken.
+Wenn Sie einem Benutzer ermöglichen müssen, den Artikelpreis, der aus der Preisliste gezogen wird, zu ändern, sollten Sie dieses Feld deaktivieren.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/shipping-rule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/shipping-rule.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4622eba0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/selling/setup/shipping-rule.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Versandregel
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Wenn Sie eine Versandregel verwenden, können Sie die Kosten der Lieferung des Produktes an einen Kunden festlegen. Sie können für den gleichen Artikel für verschiedene Regionen verschiedene Versandregeln definieren.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/authorization-rule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/authorization-rule.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..051f2be4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/authorization-rule.md
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+
+# Autorisierungsregeln
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Mit Hilfe des Werkzeugs "Autorisierungsregeln" können Sie Regeln für Genehmigungen bestimmen, die an Bedingungen geknüpft sind.
+
+Wenn eine Ihrer Vertriebs- oder Einkaufstransaktionen von höherem Wert oder mit höherem Rabatt eine Genehmigung durch eine Führungskraft benötigt, können Sie dafür eine Autorisierungsregel einrichten.
+
+Um eine neue Autorisierungsregel zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Einstellungen > Anpassen > Autorisierungsregel
+
+Lassen Sie uns ein Beispiel für eine Autorisierungsregel betrachten, um den Sachverhalt besser zu verstehen.
+
+Nehmen wir an dass ein Vertriebsmitarbeiter Kundenbestellungen nur dann genehmigen lassen muss, wenn der Gesamtwert 10.000 Euro übersteigt. Wenn die Kundenbestellung 10.000 Euro nicht übersteigt, dann kann auch ein Vertriebsmitarbeiter diese Transaktion übertragen. Das bedeutet, dass die Berechtigung des Vertriebsmitarbeiters zum Übertragen auf Kundenaufträge mit einer Maximalsumme von 10.000 Euro beschränkt wird.
+
+#### Schritt 1
+
+Öffnen Sie eine neue Autorisierungsregel.
+
+#### Schritt 2
+
+Wählen Sie die Firma und die Transaktion aus, für die diese Autorisierungsregel angewendet werden soll. Diese Funktionalität ist nur für beschränkte Transaktionen verfügbar.
+
+#### Schritt 3
+
+Wählen Sie einen Wert für "Basiert auf" aus. Eine Autorisierungsregel wird auf Grundlage eines Wertes in diesem Feld angewendet.
+
+#### Schritt 4
+
+Wählen Sie eine Rolle, auf die die Autorisierungsregel angewendet werden soll. Für unser angenommenes Beispiel wird die Rolle "Nutzer Vertrieb" über "Anwenden auf (Rolle)" als Rolle ausgewählt. Um noch etwas genauer zu werden, können Sie auch über "Anwenden auf (Benutzer)" einen bestimmten Benutzer auswählen, wenn Sie eine Regel speziell auf einen Mitarbeiter anwenden wollen, und nicht auf alle Mitarbeiter aus dem Vertrieb. Es ist auch in Ordnung, keinen Benutzer aus dem Vertrieb anzugeben, weil es nicht zwingend erforderlich ist.
+
+#### Schritt 5
+
+Wählen Sie die Rolle des Genehmigers aus. Das könnte z. B. die Rolle des Vertriebsleiters sein, die Kundenaufträge über 10.000 Euro übertragen darf. Sie können auch hier einen bestimmten Vertriebsleiter auswählen, und dann die Regel so gestalten, dass Sie nur auf diesen Benutzer anwendbar ist. Einen genehmigenden Benutzer anzugeben ist nicht zwingend erfoderlich.
+
+#### Schritt 6
+
+Geben Sie "Autorisierter Wert" ein. Im Beispiel stellen wir das auf 10.000 Euro ein.
+
+
+
+Wenn ein Benutzer aus dem Vertrieb versucht eine Kundenbestellung mit einem Wert über 10.000 Euro zu übertragen, dann bekommt er eine Fehlermeldung.
+
+>Wenn Sie den Vertriebsmitarbeiter generall davon ausschliessen wollen, Kundenaufträge zu übertragen, dann sollten Sie keine Autorisierungsregel erstellen, sondern die Berechtigung zum Übertragen über den Rollenberchtigungs-Manager für die Rolle Vertriebsmitarbeiter entfernen.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/bar-code.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/bar-code.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..74d67380
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/bar-code.md
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+
+# Barcode
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Ein Barcode ist ein maschinenlesbarer Code und besteht aus Nummern und Mustern von parallelen Linien mit unterschiedlicher Breite, die auf eine Ware aufgedruckt werden. Barcodes werden speziell zur Lagerverwaltung verwendet.
+
+Wenn Sie einen Artikel bei einem beliebigen Geschäft kaufen, dann werden Sie einen Aufkleber mit dünnen Linien erkennen, versehen mit einer Kombination von verschiedenen Zahlen. Dieser Aufkleber wird dann vom Kassierer eingescannt und die Beschreibung und der Preis werden automatisch übernommen. Diese Anordnung von Linien und Zahlen bezeichnet man als Barcode.
+
+Ein Barcode-Lesegerät liest die Nummer des Aufklebers eines Artikels ein. Um mit ERPNext Barcodes zu nutzen, verbinden Sie den Barcodeleser mit Ihrer Hardware. Gehen Sie dann zu den ERPNext-Einstellungen und aktivieren Sie "Barcode" indem Sie zu den Werkzeugen gehen und auf die Funktion "verbergen / anzeigen" klicken. Kreuzen Sie dann das Feld "Artikel-Barcode" an.
+
+> Einstellungen > Anpassen > Funktionen einstellen > Artikelbarcode
+
+### Abbildung 1: Markieren Sie das Feld "Artikelbarcode"
+
+
+
+Wenn Sie einen Barcode einlesen wollen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Rechnungswesen > Dokumente > Eingangsrechnung
+
+Klicken Sie unter dem Artikel auf "Neue Zeile einfügen". Die Artikelzeile erweitert sich um neue Felder anzuzeigen. Positionieren Sie Ihre Schreibmarke im Barcodefeld und beginnen Sie mit dem Einlesen. Der Barcode wird im entsprechenden Feld aktualisiert. Nachdem der Barcode eingelesen wurd, holt das System automatisch alle Artikeldetails aus dem System.
+
+Aktivieren Sie der Einfachheit halber die POS-Ansicht in ERPNext. Der Aktivierungsprozess ist der selbe wie bei der Barcodeaktivierung. Gehen Sie in die Einstellungen und klicken Sie auf "Funktionen einstellen". Aktivieren Sie dann das Feld "Ist POS".
+
+Gehen Sie dann zu "Rechnungswesen" und klicken Sie auf Ausgangsrechnung. Aktivieren Sie das Feld "Ist POS".
+
+### Abbildung 2: Aktivieren Sie das Feld "Ist POS"
+
+
+
+Gehen Sie zu "Artikel" und klicken Sie auf "Neue Zeile einfügen".
+
+Die Schreibmarke wird automatisch im Barcodefeld positioniert. So können Sie sofort den Barcode einlesen und mit Ihren Arbeiten fortfahren.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/company-setup.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/company-setup.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cbced9b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/company-setup.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Einstellungen zur Firma
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Geben Sie Ihre Firmendaten ein um die Einstellungen zur Firma zu vervollständigen. Geben Sie die Art der Geschäftstätigkeit im Feld "Domäne" an. Sie können hier Fertigung, Einzelhandel, Großhandel und Dienstleistungen auswählen, abhängig von der Natur Ihrer Geschäftsaktivitäten. Wenn Sie mehr als eine Firma verwalten, können Sie das auch hier einstellen.
+
+> Einstellungen > Rechnungswesen > Firma > Neu
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/bulk-rename.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/bulk-rename.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..67a57964
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/bulk-rename.md
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+
+# Massenweises Umbenennen von Datensätzen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Sie können in ERPNext (sofern es erlaubt ist) ein Dokument umbenennen, indem Sie im Dokument zu **Menü > Umbenennen** gehen.
+
+Alternativ können Sie auch folgenden Weg wählen, wenn Sie eine größere Menge von Datensätzen umbenennen wollen:
+
+Einstellungen > Daten > Werkzeug zum Massen-Umbenennen
+
+Dieses Werkzeug ermöglicht es Ihnen, gleichzeitig mehrere Datensätze umzubenennen.
+
+#### Beispiel
+
+Um mehrere Datensätze umzubenennen, laden Sie eine CSV-Datei mit den alten Namen in der ersten Spalte und den neuen Namen in der zweiten Spalte hoch indem Sie auf "Hochladen" klicken.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/data-import-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/data-import-tool.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ccaa611e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/data-import-tool.md
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+
+# Werkzeug zum Datenimport
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Das Werkzeug zum Datenimport ist ein großartiger Weg um große Mengen an Daten, speziell Stammdaten, in das System hochzuladen oder zu bearbeiten.
+
+Um das Werkzeug zum Datenimport zu öffnen, gehen Sie entweder zu den Einstellungen oder zur Transaktion, für die Sie importieren wollen. Wenn der Datenimport erlaubt ist, sehen Sie eine Importschaltfläche:
+
+
+
+Das Werkzeug hat zwei Abschnitte, einen um eine Vorlage herunter zu laden, und einen zweiten um Daten hoch zu laden.
+
+(Anmerkung: Für den Import sind nur die DocTypes zugelassen, deren Dokumenttyp "Stammdaten" ist, oder bei denen die Einstellung "Import erlauben" aktiviert ist.)
+
+### 1. Herunterladen der Vorlage
+
+Daten werden in ERPNext in Tabellen gespeichert, sehr ähnlich einer Tabellenkalkulation mit Spalten und Zeilen voller Daten. Jede Instanz in ERPNext kann mehrere verschiedene mit Ihr verbundene Untertabellen haben. Die Untertabellen sind mit Ihren übergeordneten Tabellen verknüpft und werden dort eingesetzt, wo es für eine Eigenschaft mehrere verschiedene Werte gibt. So kann z. B. ein Artikel mehrere verschiedene Preise haben, eine Rechnung hat mehrere verschiedene Artikel usw.
+
+
+
+* Klicken Sie auf die Tabelle, die Sie herunter laden wollen, oder auf "Alle Tabellen".
+* Für Massenbearbeitung klicken Sie auf "Mit Daten herunterladen".
+
+### 2. Füllen Sie die Vorlage aus
+
+Öffnen Sie die Vorlage nach dem Herunterladen in einer Tabellenkalkulationsanwendung und fügen Sie die Daten unterhalb der Spaltenköpfe ein.
+
+
+
+Exportieren Sie dann Ihre Vorlage oder speichern Sie sie im CSV-Format (**Comma Separated Values**).
+
+
+
+### 3. Hochladen der CSV-Datei
+
+Fügen Sie abschliessend die CSV-Datei im Abschnitt Import hinzu. Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Hochladen und Importieren".
+
+
+
+#### Anmerkungen
+
+1. Stellen Sie sicher, dass Sie als Verschlüsselung UTF-8 verwenden, wenn Ihre Anwendung das zulässt.
+2. Lassen Sie die Spalte ID für einen neuen Datensatz leer.
+
+### 4. Hochladen aller Tabellen (übergeordnete und Untertabellen)
+
+Wenn Sie alle Tabellen auswählen, dann erhalten Sie Spalten für alle Tabellen in einer Zeile gertrennt durch ~ Spalten.
+
+Wenn Sie mehrere verschiedene Unterzeilen haben, dann müssen Sie einen neuen Hauptartikel in einer neuen Zeile eintragen. Sehen Sie hierzu das Beispiel unten:
+
+
+ Main Table ~ Child Table
+ Spalte 1 Spalte 2 Spalte 3 ~ Spalte 1 Spalte 2 Spalte 3
+ v11 v12 v13 c11 c12 c13
+ c14 c15 c17
+ v21 v22 v23 c21 c22 c23
+
+
+Um zu sehen, wie das gemacht wird, geben Sie manuell über Formulare einige Datensätze ein und exportieren Sie "Alle Tabellen" über "Mit Daten herunterladen".
+
+### 5. Überschreiben
+
+ERPNext ermöglicht es Ihnen auch alle oder bestimmte Spalten zu überschreiben. Wenn Sie bestimmte Spalten aktualisieren möchten, können Sie die Vorlage mit Daten herunter laden. Vergessen Sie nicht die Box "Überschreiben" zu markieren, bevor sie hochladen.
+
+Anmerkung: Wenn Sie "Überschreiben" auswählen, werden alle Unterdatensätze eines übergeordneten Elements gelöscht.
+
+### 6. Einschränkungen beim Hochladen
+
+ERPNext begrenzt die Menge an Daten, die Sie in einer Datei hochladen können. Die Menge kann sich je nach Datentyp unterscheiden. Normalerweise kann man problemlos ungefähr 1.000 Zeilen einer Tabelle in einem Vorgang hochladen. Wenn das System den Vorgang nicht akzeptiert, sehen Sie eine Fehlermeldung.
+
+Warum das alles? Wenn Sie zuviele Daten hochladen, kann das System abstürzen, im Besonderen dann, wenn andere Benutzer parallel arbeiten. Daher begrenzt ERPNext die Anzahl von Schreibvorgängen, die Sie mit einer Eingabe verarbeiten können.
+
+---
+
+#### Wie fügen Sie Dateien an?
+
+Wenn Sie ein Formular öffnen, dann sehen Sie in der Seitenleiste rechts einen Abschnitt zum Anfügen von Dateien. Klicken Sie auf "Hinzufügen" und wählen Sie die Datei aus, die Sie anfügen möchten. Klicken Sie auf "Hochladen" und die Sache ist erledigt.
+
+### Was ist eine CSV-Datei?
+Eine CSV (Durch Kommas getrennte Werte)-Datei ist ein Datensatz, den Sie in ERPNext hochladen können um verschiedene Daten zu aktualisieren. Jedes gebräuchliche Tabellenkalkulationsprogramm wie MS-Excel oder OpenOffice Spreadsheet kann im CSV-Format abspeichern.
+Wenn Sie Microsoft Excel benutzen und nicht-englische Zeichen verwenden, dann sollten Sie Ihre Datei UTF-8-kodiert abspeichern. Bei älteren Versionen von Excel gibt es keinen eindeutigen Weg als UTF-8 zu speichern. Deshalb können Sie die Datei auch ganz einfach als CSV abspeichern, dann mit Notepad öffnen und als UTF-8 abspeichern. (Microsoft Excel kann das leider nicht.)
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b29d7dd5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Datenmanagement
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Mithilfe des Werkzeuges zum Datenimport und -export können Sie Massenimporte und -exporte aus und nach Tabellenkalkulationsdateien (**.csv**) durchführen. Dieses Werkzeug ist sehr hilfreich zu Beginn des Einrichtungsprozesses um Daten aus anderen Systemen zu übernehmen.
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..428f3f2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/data/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+
+data-import-tool
+bulk-rename
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-account.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-account.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d099c1d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-account.md
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+
+# E-Mail-Konto
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Sie können in ERPNext viele verschiedene E-Mail-Konten für eingehende und ausgehende E-Mails verwalten. Es muss mindestens ein Standard-Konto für ausgehende E-Mails und eines für eingehende E-Mails geben. Wenn Sie sich in der ERPNext-Cloud befinden, dann werden die Einstellungen für ausgehende E-Mails von uns getroffen.
+
+**Anmerkung, wenn Sie das System selbst einrichten:** Für ausgehende E-Mails sollten Sie Ihren eigenen SMTP-Server einrichten oder sich bei einem SMTP Relay Service wie mandrill.com oder sendgrid.com, der den Versand einer größeren Menge von Transaktions-E-Mails erlaubt, registrieren. Standard-E-Mail-Services wie GMail beschränken Sie auf eine Höchstgrenze an E-Mails pro Tag.
+
+### Standard-E-Mail-Konten
+
+ERPNext erstellt standardmäßig Vorlagen für einige E-Mail-Konten. Nicht alle sind aktiviert. Um sie zu aktivieren, müssen Sie Ihre Konteneinstellungen bearbeiten.
+
+Es gibt zwei Arten von E-Mail-Konten, ausgehend und eingehend. E-Mail-Konten für ausgehende E-Mails verwenden einen SMTP-Service, eingehende E-Mails verwenden einen POP-Service. Die meisten E-Mail-Anbieter wie GMail, Outlook oder Yahoo bieten diese Seriveleistungen an.
+
+
+
+### Konten zu ausgehenden E-Mails
+
+Alle E-Mails, die vom System aus versendet werden, sei es von einem Benutzer zu einem Kontakt oder als Transaktion oder als Benachrichtung, werden aus einem Konto für ausgehende E-Mails heraus versendet.
+
+Um ein Konto für ausgehende E-Mails einzurichten, markieren Sie die Option **Ausgehend aktivieren** und geben Sie die Einstellungen zum SMTP-Server an. Wenn Sie einen bekannten E-Mail-Service nutzen, wird das vom System für Sie voreingestellt.
+
+
+
+### Konten zu eingehenden E-Mails
+
+Um ein Konto für eingehende E-Mails einzurichten, markieren Sie die Option **Eingehend aktivieren** und geben Sie die Einstellungen zum POP3-Server an. Wenn Sie einen bekannten E-Mail-Service nutzen, wird das vom System für Sie voreingestellt.
+
+
+
+### Wie ERPNext Antworten handhabt
+
+Wenn Sie aus ERPNext heraus eine E-Mail an einen Kontakt wie z. B. einen Kunden versenden, dann ist der Absender gleich dem Benutzer, der die E-Mail versendet. In den Einstellungen zu **Antworten an** steht die E-Mail-ID des Standardkontos für den Posteingang (z. B. replies@yourcompany.com). ERPNext entnimmt diese E-Mails automatisch aus dem Posteingang und hängt Sie an die betreffende Kommunikation an.
+
+### Benachrichtigung über unbeantwortete Nachrichten
+
+Wenn Sie möchten, dass ERPNext Sie benachrichtigt, wenn eine E-Mail für eine bestimmte Zeit unbeantwortet bleibt, dann können Sie die Option **Benachrichtigen, wenn unbeantwortet** markieren. Hier können Sie die Anzahl der Minuten einstellen, die das System warten soll, bevor eine Benachrichtigung gesendet wird, und den Empfänger.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-alerts.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-alerts.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2968be1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-alerts.md
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+
+# E-Mail-Benachrichtigung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Sie können verschiedene E-Mail-Benachrichtigungen in Ihrem System einstellen, um Sie an wichtige Aktivitäten zu erinnern, beispielsweise an:
+
+1. das Enddatum einer Aufgabe.
+2. einen vom Kunden erwarteten Liefertermin eines Kundenauftrages.
+3. einen vom Lieferanten erwarteten Zahlungstermin.
+4. eine Erinnerung zum Nachfassen.
+5. Wenn der Wert einer Bestellung einen bestimmten Betrag überschreitet.
+6. Wenn ein Vertrag ausläuft.
+7. Wenn eine Aufgabe abgeschlossen ist oder Ihren Status ändert.
+
+Hierfür müssen Sie eine E-Mail-Erinnerung einstellen.
+
+> Einstellungen > E-Mail > E-Mail-Benachrichtigung
+
+### Einen Alarm einstellen
+
+Um eine E-Mail-Erinnerung einzustellen, gehen Sie wie folgt vor:
+
+1. Wählen Sie das Dokument aus, welches Sie beobachten wollen.
+2. Geben Sie an, welche Ereignisse Sie beobachten wollen. Ereignisse sind:
+ 1. Neu: Wenn ein Dokument des gewählten Typs erstellt wird.
+ 2. Speichern / Übertragen / Stornieren: Wenn ein Dokument des gewählten Typs gespeichert, übertragen oder storniert wird.
+ 3. Änderung des Wertes: Wenn sich ein bestimmter Wert ändert.
+ 4. Tage vor / Tage nach: Stellen Sie eine Benachrichtigung einige Tage vor oder nach einem **Referenzdatum** ein. Um die Anzahl der Tage einzugeben, geben Sie einen Wert in **Tage vor oder nach** ein. Das kann sehr nützlich sein, wenn es sich um Fälligkeitstermine handelt oder es um das Nachverfolgen von Leads oder Angeboten geht.
+3. Stellen Sie, wenn Sie möchten, Zusatzbedingungen ein.
+4. Geben Sie die Empfänger der Erinnerung an. Der Empfänger kann sowohl über ein Feld des Dokumentes als auch über eine feste Liste ausgewählt werden.
+5. Verfassen Sie die Nachricht.
+
+---
+
+#### Beispiel
+1. [Kriterien definieren](
)
+2. [Empfänger und Nachrichtentext eingeben](
)
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-digest.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-digest.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..82b2a9a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-digest.md
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+
+# Täglicher E-Mail-Bericht
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+E-Mail-Berichte erlauben es Ihnen regelmäßig Aktualisierungen zu Ihren Verkäufen, Ausgaben oder anderen wichtigen Zahlen direkt in Ihren Posteingang zu erhalten.
+
+E-Mail-Berichte sind für Führungskräfte eine tolle Sache, um wichtige Kennzahlen wie "Gebuchte Verkäufe" oder "Eingezogene Beträge" oder "Erstellte Rechnungen" zu beobachten.
+
+Um einen E-Mail-Bericht einzurichten, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Einstellungen > E-Mail > Täglicher E-Mail-Bericht
+
+### Beispiel
+
+Stellen Sie ein, wie oft Sie eine Benachrichtigung erhalten wollen, markieren Sie alle Artikel, über die Sie in Ihrer wöchentlichen Aktualisierung benachrichtig werden wollen und wählen Sie die Benutzer-IDs aus, an die die Zusammenfassung gesendet werden soll.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b55bbb87
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# E-Mail
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+E-Mail ist das Herzstück elektronischer Kommunikation und in ERPNext stark eingebunden. Sie können viele verschiedene E-Mail-Konten erstellen, automatisch Transaktionen wie einen Lead oder einen Fall aus eingehenden E-Mails erstellen und Dokumente an Ihre Kontakte über ERPNext versenden. Sie können auch eine tägliche E-Mail-Übersicht einrichten, ebenso wie E-Mail-Erinnerungen.
+
+#### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8038ca17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+
+email-account
+email-alerts
+email-digest
+sending-email
+setting-up-email
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/sending-email.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/sending-email.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bad94a3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/sending-email.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+
+# E-Mails über ein beliebiges Dokument versenden
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+In ERPNext können sie jedes beliebige Dokument per E-Mail versenden (als PDF-Anhang) indem Sie in einem beliebigen geöffneten Dokument auf `Menü > E-Mail` gehen.
+
+
+
+**Anmerkung:** Es müssen Konten zum [E-Mail-Versand]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/setting-up/email/email-account.html) eingerichtet sein.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b5761db8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+
+# Einstellungen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Ein ERP-System einzustellen ist so, als ob Sie mit Ihrer Geschäftstätigkeit noch einmal von vorne beginnen würden, jedoch in einer virtuellen Welt. Glücklicherweise ist es nicht so schwer wie im realen Geschäftsbetrieb und Sie können vorher einen Testlauf durchführen!
+
+Die Einrichtung verlangt vom Einrichter einen Schritt zurück zu gehen und Zeit aufzuwenden, um Einstellungen richtig zu treffen. Es handelt sich hierbei normalerweise nicht um ein paar Stunden, nicht um eine Arbeit, die man nebenher durchführen kann.
+
+#### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a607ca23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+setup-wizard
+users-and-permissions
+settings
+data
+email
+print
+setting-up-taxes
+pos-setting
+price-lists
+authorization-rule
+sms-setting
+stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item
+territory
+third-party-backups
+workflows
+bar-code
+company-setup
+setting-company-sales-goal
+calculate-incentive-for-sales-team
+articles
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/pos-setting.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/pos-setting.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ce2730c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/pos-setting.md
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+
+# Einstellungen zum Verkaufsort (Point of Sale)
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+POS stellt fortgeschrittene Funktionen wie "Bestandsmanagement", "CRM", "Finanzen" und "Lager", etc. bereit, die alle mit in die POS-Software eingebaut sind. Vor dem modernen POS wurden alle diese Funktionen einzeln ausgeführt und eine manuelle Umschlüsselung von Informationen war nötig, was zu Eingabefehlern führen konnte.
+
+Wenn Sie im Endkundengeschäft tätig sind, möchten Sie, dass Ihr POS so schnell und effizient wie möglich ist. Um dies umzusetzen können Sie für einen Benutzer POS-Einstellungen treffen über:
+
+> Konten > Einstellungen > Einstellungen zum POS
+
+Setzen Sie die Standardeinstellungen wie definiert.
+
+
+
+> Wichtig: Wenn Sie einen bestimmten Benutzer angeben, werden die POS-Einstellungen nur auf diesen Benutzer angewendet. Wenn diese Optin leer bleibt, werden die Einstellungen auf alle Benutzer angewendet. Um mehr über POS zu erfahren, gehen Sie zu POS.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/price-lists.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/price-lists.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..32ff4800
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/price-lists.md
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+
+# Preisliste
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+ERPNext lässt es zu, viele verschiedene Verkaufs- und Einkaufspreise für einen Artikel zu verwalten, indem eine Preisliste verwendet wird. "Preisliste" ist hierbei die Bezeichnung, die Sie einer Menge von Artikelpreisen geben können.
+
+Warum sollten Sie Preislisten verwenden? Sie haben für verschiedene Regionen (wegen der Versandkosten), für verschiedene Länder oder verschiedene Währungen etc. unterschiedliche Preise.
+
+Ein Artikel kann aufgrund des Kunden, der Währung, der Region, den Versandkosten etc. unterschiedliche Preise haben, die als unterschiedliche Sätze abgespeichert werden können. In ERPNext müssen Sie diese Listen jeweils getrennt abspeichern. Die Einkaufspreisliste unterscheidet sich von der Verkaufspreisliste und beide werden getrennt gespeichert.
+
+Sie können eine neue Preisliste erstellen über:
+
+> Vertrieb/Einkauf/Lagerbestand > Einstellungen > Preisliste > Neu
+
+
+
+* Diese Preislisten werden verwendet, wenn der Datensatz zum Artikelpreis erstellt wird, um den Verkaufs- oder Einkaufspreis eines Artikels nachvollziehen zu können. Klicken Sie hier, wenn Sie mehr über Artikelpreise erfahren wollen.
+* Um eine bestimmte Preisliste zu deaktivieren, deaktivieren Sie das Feld "Aktiviert" im der Preisliste. Die deaktivierte Preisliste ist dann in der Auswahl nicht mehr in Verkaufs- oder Einkaufstransaktionen verfügbar.
+* Standardmäßig werden eine Einkaufs- und eine Vertriebspreisliste erstellt.
+
+Um eine spezielle Preisliste auszuschalten, demarkieren Sie das Feld "Eingeschaltet". Eine ausgeschaltete Preisliste ist in der Auswahl bei Verkaufs- und Einkaufstrtransaktionen nicht verfügbar.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/address-template.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/address-template.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8604340a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/address-template.md
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+
+# Adressvorlagen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Jede Region hat Ihre eigene Art und Weise, wie eine Adresse aussieht. Um mehrere verschiedene Adressformate für Ihre Dokumente (wie Angebot, Lieferantenauftrag, etc.) zu verwalten, können Sie landesspezifische **Adressvorlagen** erstellen.
+
+> Einstellungen > Druck > Adressvorlage
+
+Wenn Sie das System einrichten, wird eine Standard-Adressvorlage erstellt. Sie können diese sowohl bearbeiten als auch aktualisieren um eine neue Vorlage zu erstellen.
+
+Eine Vorlage ist die Standardvorlage und wird für alle Länder verwendet, für die keine eigene Vorlage gilt.
+
+#### Vorlage
+
+Das Programm zum Erstellen von Vorlagen basiert auf HTML und [Jinja Templating](http://jinja.pocoo.org/docs/templates/) und alle Felder (auch die benutzerdefinierten) sind verfügbar um eine Vorlage zu erstellen.
+
+Hier sehen Sie die Standardvorlage:
+
+ {% raw %}{{ address_line1 }}+ {% if address_line2 %}{{ address_line2 }}
{% endif -%} + {{ city }}
+ {% if state %}{{ state }}
{% endif -%} + {% if pincode %}PIN: {{ pincode }}
{% endif -%} + {{ country }}
+ {% if phone %}Phone: {{ phone }}
{% endif -%} + {% if fax %}Fax: {{ fax }}
{% endif -%} + {% if email_id %}Email: {{ email_id }}
{% endif -%}{% endraw %} + + +### Beispiel + +
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..724c2bd6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Druck und Branding
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Dokumente, die Sie an Ihre Kunden versenden, transportieren Ihr Firmendesign und müssen an Ihre Bedürfnisse angepasst werden. ERPNext gibt Ihnen viele Möglichkeiten an die Hand, damit Sie Ihr Firmendesign in Ihren Dokumenten abbilden können.
+
+#### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0ddb2170
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+print-settings
+print-format-builder
+print-headings
+letter-head
+address-template
+terms-and-conditions
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/letter-head.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/letter-head.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5eee079f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/letter-head.md
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+
+# Briefköpfe
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Sie können in ERPNext viele verschiedene Briefköpfe verwalten. In einem Briefkopf können Sie:
+
+* Ein Bild mit Ihrem Logo, Ihrem Firmensymbol oder anderen Informationen, die Sie auf dem Briefkopf haben möchten, erstellen.
+* Das Bild an den Datensatz Ihres Briefkopfes anhängen, indem Sie auf das Bildsymbol klicken um automatisch den HTML-Kode zu generieren, den Sie für dem Briefkopf benötigen.
+* Wenn Sie möchten, dass dies der Standardbriefkopf wird, klicken Sie auf "Ist Standard".
+
+Ihr Briefkopf erscheint nun auf allen Ausdrucken und E-Mails.
+
+Sie können Briefköpfe erstellen/verwalten über:
+
+> Einstellungen > Druck > Briefkopf > Neu
+
+#### Beispiel
+
+
+
+So sieht der Briefkopf eines Ausdruckes aus:
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/print-format-builder.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/print-format-builder.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..618395e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/print-format-builder.md
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+
+# Hilfsprogramm zum Erstellen von Druckformaten
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Das Hilfsprogramm zum Erstellen von Druckformaten hilft Ihnen dabei, schnell ein einfaches benutzerdefiniertes Druckformat zu erstellen, indem Sie per Drag & Drop Daten- und Textfelder (Standardtext oder HTML) anordnen.
+
+Sie können ein neues Druckformat entweder so erstellen:
+
+> Einstellungen > Druck > Hilfsprogramm zum Erstellen von Druckformaten
+
+Oder Sie öffnen das Dokument, für das Sie ein Druckformat erstellen wollen. Klicken Sie auf das Druckersymbol oder gehen Sie auf Menü > Drucken und klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche **Bearbeiten**. Anmerkung: Sie müssen Berechtigungen als System-Manager haben um das zu tun.
+
+### Schritt 1: Erstellen Sie ein neues Format
+
+
+
+### Schritt 2: Ein neues Feld hinzufügen
+
+Um ein Feld hinzuzufügen, nehmen Sie es auf der linken Seitenleiste mit der Maus auf und fügen Sie es Ihrem Layout hinzu. Sie können das Layout bearbeiten, indem Sie auf das Symbol für Einstellungen klicken.
+
+
+
+### Schritt 3: Ein Feld entfernen
+
+Um ein Feld zu entfernen, legen Sie es einfach zurück in die Seitenleiste.
+
+
+
+### Schritt 4
+
+Sie können benutzerdefinierten Text als HTML in Ihr Druckformat übernehmen. Fügen Sie einfach ein Feld vom Typ **benutzerdefiniertes HTML** (dunkel hinterlegt) Ihrem Design hinzu und schieben Sie es an die richtige Stelle, dorthin wo Sie es haben wollen.
+
+Klicken Sie dann auf **HTML bearbeiten** um den Inhalt zu bearbeiten.
+
+
+
+Um Ihr Format abzuspeichern klicken Sie einfach auf die Schaltfläche **Speichern**.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/print-headings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/print-headings.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7177751f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/print-headings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+
+# Druckköpfe
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Druckköpfe bezeichnen die "Überschriften" Ihrer Ausgangsrechnungen, Lieferantenangebote etc. Sie können eine Liste an Bezeichnungen für geschäftliche Korrespondenzen erstellen.
+
+Sie können Druckköpfe erstellen über:
+
+> Einstellungen > Druck > Druckkopf > Neu
+
+#### Abbildung 1: Druckköpfe abspeichern
+
+
+
+Hier ist ein Beispiel abgebildet, wie man einen Druckkopf auswechselt:
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/print-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/print-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8ec6d4b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/print-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+# Druckeinstellungen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Über die Druckeinstellungen können Sie Ihre Standarddruckeinstellungen wie Papiergröße, Standardgröße für Text, Ausgabe als PDF oder als HTLM, etc. einstellen.
+
+Um die Druckeinstellungen zu bearbeiten, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Einstellungen > Druck > Druckeinstellungen
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3c635681
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.md
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+
+# Allgemeine Geschäftsbedingungen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Die Allgemeinen Geschäftsbedingungen sind sowohl allgemeingültige als auch spezielle Vereinbarungen, Bestimmungen, Anforderungen, Regeln, Spezifikationen und Standards, denen eine Firma folgt. Diese Spezifikationen sind ein Bestandteil der Vereinbarungen und Verträge, die die Firma mit Kunden, Lieferanten und Partnern abschliesst.
+
+### 1\. Neue Allgemeine Geschäftsbedingungen erstellen
+
+Um die Vorlage für die Allgemeinen Geschäftsbedingungen zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Vertrieb > Einstellungen > Vorlage für Allgemeine Geschäftsbedingungen > Neu
+
+
+
+### 2\. Bearbeitung in HTML
+
+Der Inhalt der Allgemeinen Geschäftsbedingungen kann nach Ihren Vorstellungen formatiert werden und es können bei Bedarf auch Bilder eingefügt werden. Für diejenigen, die sich in HTML auskennen, findet Sich auch eine Möglichkeit den Inhalt der Allgemeinen Geschäftsbedingungen in HTML zu formatieren.
+
+
+
+Dies erlaubt es Ihnen auch die Vorlage für die Allgemeinen Geschäftsbedingungen als Fußzeile zu verwenden, was sonst in ERPNext nicht als dedizierte Funktionalität zur Verfügung steht. Da die Inhalte der Allgemeinen Geschäftsbedingungen im Druckformat immer zuletzt erscheinen, sollten die Einzelheiten zur Fußzeile am Ende des Inhaltes eingefügt werden.
+
+### 3\. Auswahl in der Transaktion
+
+In Transaktionen finden Sie den Abschnitt Allgemeine Geschäftsbedingungen, wo Sie nach einer Vorlage für die Allgemeinen Geschäftsbedingungen suchen und diese auswählen können.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e6d4ff7e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.md
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+
+# Steuern einrichten
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Eine der hauptsächlichen Antriebskräfte für die zwingende Verwendung des Buchhaltungswerkzeuges ist die Kalkulation von Steuern. Egal ob Sie Geld verdienen oder nicht, Ihre Regierung tut es (und hilft damit Ihrem Land sicher und wohlhabend zu sein). Und wenn Sie Ihre Steuern nicht richtig berechnen, dann ist sie sehr unglücklich. Gut, lassen wir die Philosophie mal beiseite. ERPNext ermöglicht es Ihnen konfigurierbare Steuervorlagen zu erstellen, die Sie bei Ihren Ver- und Einkäufen verwenden können.
+
+### Steuerkonten
+
+Steuerkonten, die Sie in der Steuervorlage verwenden möchten, müssen Sie im Kontenplan als "Steuer" markieren.
+
+### Artikelsteuer
+
+Wenn einige Ihrer Artikel einer anderen Besteuerung unterliegen als andere, geben Sie diese in der Artikelsteuer-Tabelle an. Auch dann, wenn Sie Ihre Verkaufs- und Einkaufssteuern als Standardsteuersätze hinterlegt haben, verwendet das System für Kalkulationen den Artikelsteuersatz. Die Artikelsteuer hat Vorrang gegenüber anderen Verkaufs- oder Einkaufssteuern. Wenn Sie jedoch die Standard-Verkaufs- und Einkaufssteuern verwenden wollen, geben Sie bitte keine Artikelsteuer in den Artikelstammdaten an. Dann entscheidet sich das System für die Verkaufs- und Einkaufssteuersätze, die Sie als Standardsätze festgelegt haben.
+
+Die Tabelle zu den Artikelsteuern ist ein Abschnitt in den Artikelstammdaten.
+
+
+
+* **Inklusive oder Exklusive Steuer:** ERPNext erlaubt es Ihnen Artikelpreise inklusive Steuer einzugeben.
+
+
+
+* **Ausnahme von der Regel:** Die Einstellungen zur Artikelsteuer werden nur dann benötigt, wenn sich der Steuersatz eines bestimmten Artikels von demjenigen, den Sie im Standard-Steuerkonto definiert haben, unterscheidet.
+* **Die Artikelsteuer kann überschrieben werden:** Sie können den Artikelsteuersatz überschreiben oder ändern, wenn Sie in der Artikelsteuertabelle zu den Artikelstammdaten gehen.
+
+### Vorlage für Verkaufssteuern und -abgaben
+
+Normalerweise müssen Sie die von Ihren Kunden an Sie gezahlten Steuern sammeln und an den Staat abführen. Manchmal kann es vorkommen, dass Sie mehrere unterschiedliche Steuern an verschiedene Staatsorgane abführen müssen, wie z. B. an Gemeinden, Bund, Länder oder europäische Organisationen.
+
+ERPNext ermittelt Steuern über Vorlagen. Andere Arten von Abgaben, die für Ihre Rechnungen Relevanz haben (wie Versandgebühren, Versicherung, etc.) können genauso wie Steuern eingestellt werden.
+
+Wählen Sie eine Vorlage und passen Sie diese gemäß Ihren Wünschen an.
+
+Um eine neue Vorlage zu einer Verkaufssteuer z. B. mit dem Namen Vorlage für Verkaufssteuern und -abgaben zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Einstellungen > Rechnungswesen > Vorlage für Verkaufssteuern und -abgaben
+
+
+
+Wenn Sie eine neue Vorlage erstellen, müssen Sie für jeden Steuertyp eine neue Zeile einfügen.
+
+Der Steuersatz, den Sie hier definieren, wird zum Standardsteuersatz für alle Artikel. Wenn es Artikel mit davon abweichenden Steuersätzen gibt, müssen Sie in den Stammdaten über die Tabelle Artikelsteuer hinzugefügt werden.
+
+In jeder Zeile müssen Sie folgendes angeben:
+
+* Typ der Kalulation:
+
+ * Auf Nettosumme: Hier wird auf Basis der Nettogesamtsumme (Gesamtbetrag ohne Steuern) kalkuliert.
+ * Auf vorherige Zeilensumme/vorherigen Zeilenbetrag: Sie können Steuern auf Basis der vorherigen Zeilensumme/des vorherigen Zeilenbetrags ermitteln. Wenn Sie diese Option auswählen, wird die Steuer als Prozenzsatz der vorherigen Zeilensumme/des vorherigen Zeilenbetrags (in der Steuertabelle) angewandt. "Vorheriger Zeilenbetrag" meint hierbei einen bestimmten Steuerbetrag. Und "Vorherige Zeilensumme" bezeichnet die Nettosumme zuzüglich der zutreffenden Steuern in dieser Zeile. Geben Sie über das Feld "Zeile eingeben" die Zeilennummer an auf die die aktuell ausgewählte Steuer angewendet werden soll. Wenn Sie die Steuer auf die dritte Zeile anwenden wollengeben Sie im Eingabefeld "3" ein.
+
+ * Geben Sie in die Spalte "Satz" den aktuellen Wert für den Steuersatz ein.
+
+* Kontenbezeichnung: Die Bezeichnung des Kontos, unter dem diee Steuer verbucht werden soll.
+* Kostenstelle: Wenn es sich bei der Steuer/Abgabe um einen Ertrag handelt (wie z. B. die Versandgebühren) muss sie zu einer Kostenstelle gebucht werden.
+* Beschreibung: Beschreibung der Steuer (wird in Rechnungen und Angeboten angedruckt)
+* Satz: Steuersatz
+* Betrag: Steuerbetrag
+* Gesamtsumme: Gesamtsumme bis zu diesem Punkt.
+* Zeile eingeben: Wenn die Kalkulation auf Basis "vorherige Zeilensumme" erfolgt, können Sie die Zeilennummer auswählen, die für die Kalkulation zugrunde gelegt wird (Standardeinstellung ist hier die vorhergehende Zeile).
+* Ist diese Steuer im Basissatz enthalten?: Wenn Sie diese Option ankreuzen heißt das, dass diese Steuer nicht am Ende der Artikeltabelle angezeigt wird, aber Ihrer Hauptartikeltabelle miteinbezogen wird. Dies ist dann nützlich, wenn Sie Ihrem Kunden einen runden Preis geben wollen (inklusive aller Steuern).
+
+Wenn Sie Ihre Vorlage eingerichtet haben, können Sie diese in Ihren Verkaufstransaktionen auswählen.
+
+### Vorlage für Einkaufssteuern und -abgaben
+
+Die Vorlage für Einkaufssteuern und -abgaben ist ähnlich der Vorlage für Verkaufssteuern und -abgaben.
+
+Diese Steuervorlage verwenden Sie für Lieferantenaufträge und Eingangsrechnungen. Wenn Sie mit Mehrwertsteuern (MwSt) zu tun haben, bei denen Sie dem Staat die Differenz zwischen Ihren Eingangs- und Ausgangssteuern zahlen, können Sie das selbe Konto wie für Verkaufssteuern verwenden.
+
+Die Spalten in dieser Tabelle sind denen in der Vorlage für Verkaufssteuern und -abgaben ähnlich mit folgendem Unterschied.
+
+Steuern oder Gebühren berücksichtigen für: In diesem Abschnitt können Sie angeben, ob die Steuer/Abgabe nur für die Bewertung (kein Teil der Gesamtsumme) oder nur für die Gesamtsumme (fügt dem Artikel keinen Wert hinzu) oder für beides wichtig ist.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/global-defaults.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/global-defaults.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d3d3b31c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/global-defaults.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+# Allgemeine Einstellungen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Sie können Standardwerte für Ihre Dokumente über die globalen Voreinstellungen setzen
+
+> Einstellungen > Einstellungen > Allgemeine Einstellungen
+
+Immer dann, wenn ein neues Dokument erstellt wird, werden diese Werte als Standardeinstellungen verwendet.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..84324c41
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Einstellungen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Unter Einstellungen > Einstellungen finden Sie Möglichkeiten, wie Sie Systemeinstellungen wie Voreinstellungen, Nummern- und Währungsformate, globale Timeouts für Verbindungen usw. einstellen können.
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e33aedce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+system-settings
+module-settings
+naming-series
+global-defaults
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/module-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/module-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cb91d8c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/module-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+
+# Module anzeigen / ausblenden
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Sie können global bestimmte Desktop-Module an- und ausschalten über:
+
+> Einstellungen > Einstellungen > Module anzeigen / ausblenden
+
+Beispiel: Wenn Sie im Dienstleistungsbereich arbeiten, möchten Sie evtl. das Fertigungsmodul ausblenden. Dies können Sie über **Module anzeigen / ausblenden** tun.
+
+### Beispiel
+
+Markieren oder demarkieren Sie die Elemente die angezeigt / ausgeblendet werden sollen.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/naming-series.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/naming-series.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..016e4639
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/naming-series.md
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+
+# Nummernkreis
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+### 1. Einleitung
+
+Datensätze werden ganz allgemein nach "Stammdaten" oder "Transaktionen" eingeteilt. Ein Stammdatensatz ist ein Datensatz der einen "Namen" hat, z. B. von einem Kunden, einem Artikel, einem Lieferanten, einem Mitarbeiter, etc. Eine Transaktion hat demgegenüber eine "Nummer". Beispiele für Transaktionen sind Ausgangsrechnung, Angebot usw. Sie erstellen Transaktionen zu einer Anzahl von Stammdatensätzen.
+
+ERPNext erlaubt es Ihnen, Ihren Transaktionen Präfixe voranzustellen, wobei jedes Präfix einen eigenen Nummernkreis darstellt. So hat z. B. der Nummernkreis INV12 die Nummern INV120001, INV120002 usw.
+
+Sie können für all Ihre Transaktionen viele verschiedene Nummernkreise verwenden. Gewöhnlicherweise wird für jedes Geschäftsjahr ein eigener Nummernkreis verwendet. In Ausgangsrechnungen können Sie z. B. folgende verwenden:
+
+* INV120001
+* INV120002
+* INV-A-120002
+
+usw. Sie können auch für jeden Kundentyp oder für jedes Ihrer Einzelhandelsgeschäfte einen eigenen Nummernkreis verwenden.
+
+### 2. Verwalten von Nummernkreisen für Dokumente
+
+Um einen Nummernkreis einzustellen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Einstellungen > Daten > Nummernkreis
+
+In diesem Formular,
+
+1. Wählen Sie die Transaktion aus, für die Sie den Nummernkreis einstellen wollen. Das System wird den aktuellen Nummernkreis in der Textbox aktualisieren.
+2. Passen Sie den Nummernkreis nach Ihren Wünschen mit eindeutigen Präfixen an. Jedes Präfix muss in einer neuen Zeile stehen.
+3. Das erste Präfix wird zum Standard-Präfix. Wenn Sie möchten, dass ein Benutzer explizit einen Nummernkreis statt der Standardeinstellung auswählt, markieren Sie die Option "Benutzer muss immer auswählen".
+
+Sie können auch den Startpunkt eines Nummernkreises auswählen, indem Sie den Namen und den Startpunkt des Nummernkreises im Abschnitt "Seriennummer aktualisieren" angeben.
+
+### 3. Beispiel
+
+Sehen Sie hier, wie der Nummernkreis eingestellt wird.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/system-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/system-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..56a0c36d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/settings/system-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+# Systemeinstellungen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Sie können ERPNext so lokalisieren, dass bestimmte Zeitzonen-, Datums-, Zahlen- und Währungsformate benutzt werden, und außerdem den globalen Auslauf von Sitzungen über die Systemeinstellungen festlegen.
+
+Um die Systemeinstellungen zu öffnen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Einstellungen > Einstellungen > Systemeinstellungen
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..07c84d6a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Einstellungsassistent
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Der Einstellungsassistent hilft Ihnen dabei, Ihr ERPNext schnell einzustellen, indem er Sie dabei unterstützt, eine Firma, Artikel, Kunden und Lieferanten anzulegen, und zudem eine erste Webseite mit diesen Daten zu erstellen.
+
+Im Folgenden sehen Sie eine kurze Übersicht der Schritte:
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..67a2c65b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+
+step-1-language
+step-2-currency-and-timezone
+step-3-user-details
+step-4-company-details
+step-5-letterhead-and-logo
+step-6-add-users
+step-7-tax-details
+step-8-customer-names
+step-9-suppliers
+step-10-item
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-1-language.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-1-language.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..17305c5b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-1-language.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+# Sprache
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Wählen Sie Ihre Sprache. ERPNext gibt es in mehr als 20 Sprachen.
+
+
+
+---
+
+Übersetzungen erhalten Sie über die ERPNext-Community. Wenn Sie teilnehmen möchten, [sehen Sie sich bitte das Übersetzungs-Portal an](https://translate.erpnext.com).
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-10-item.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-10-item.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..63e00bf3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-10-item.md
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+
+# Schritt 10: Artikelbezeichnungen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+In diesem letzten Schritt geben Sie bitte die Bezeichnungen der Artikel ein, die Sie kaufen oder verkaufen.
+
+
+
+---
+
+### Standardwährung
+
+Für die meisten Länder werden die Währung und die Zeitzone automatisch eingestellt.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-3-user-details.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-3-user-details.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e78fec80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-3-user-details.md
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+
+# Benutzerdetails
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Geben Sie Details zum Benutzerprofil, wie Name, Benutzer-ID und das bevorzugte Passwort ein.
+
+
+
+
+> Anmerkung: Die Zeichenfolge bis zum "?" ist die URL des SMS-Gateways.
+
+Beispiel:
+
+http://instant.smses.com/web2sms.php?username=abcd&password;=abcd&to;=9900XXXXXX&sender;=DEMO&message;=THIS+IS+A+TEST+SMS
+
+Die oben angegebene URL verschickt SMS über das Konto "abcd" an Mobilnummern "9900XXXXXX" mit der Sender-ID "DEMO" und der Textnachricht "THIS IS A TEST SMS".
+
+Beachten Sie, dass einige Parameter in der URL statisch sind. Sie bekommen von Ihrem SMS-Anbieter statische Werte wie Benutzername, Passwort usw. Diese statischen Werte sollten in die Tabelle der statischen Parameter eingetragen werden.
+
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d5ad9d25
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.md
@@ -0,0 +1,137 @@
+
+# Bestandsabgleich bei nichtserialisierten Artikeln
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Bestandsabgleich ist der Prozess über den der Lagerbestand gezählt und bewertet wird. Er wird normalerweise zum Ende des Geschäftsjahres durchgeführt um den Gesamtwert des Lagers für die Abschlussbuchung zu ermitteln. In diesem Prozess werden die tatsächlichen Lagerbestände geprüft und im System aufgezeichnet. Der tatsächliche Lagerbestand und der Lagerbestand im System sollten übereinstimmen oder zumindest ähnlich sein. Wenn sie das nicht sind, können Sie das Werkzeug zum Bestandsabgleich verwenden, um den Lagerbestand und den Wert mit den tatsächlichen Begebenheiten in Einklang zu bringen.
+
+#### Unterschied zwischen serialisierten und nicht-serialisierten Artikeln
+
+Eine Seriennummer ist eine eindeutige Nummer oder Gruppe von Nummern und Zeichen zur Identifizierung eines individuellen Artikels. Serialisierte Artikel sind gewöhnlicherweise Artikel mit hohem Wert, für die es Garantien und Servicevereinbarungen gibt. Die meisten Artikel aus den Bereichen Maschinen, Geräte und hochwertige Elektronik (Computer, Drucker, usw.) haben Seriennummern.
+
+Nicht serialisierte Artikel sind normalerweise Schnelldreher und von geringem Wert und brauchen aus diesem Grund keine Nachverfolgbarkeit für jedes Stück. Artikel wie Schrauben, Putztücher, Verbrauchsmaterialien und ortsgebundene Produkte können in die nichtserialisierten Artikel eingeordnet werden.
+
+> Die Option Bestandsabgleich ist nur bei nichtserialisierten Artikeln verfügbar. Für serialisierte und Chargen-Artikel sollten Sie im Formular "Lagerbuchung" eine Materialentnahmebuchung erstellen.
+
+### Eröffnungsbestände
+
+Sie können einen Eröffnungsbestand über den Bestandsabgleich ins System hochladen. Der Bestandsabgleich aktualisiert Ihren Lagerbestand für einen vorgegebenen Artikel zu einem vorgegebenen Datum auf einem vorgegebenen Lager in der vorgegebenen Menge.
+
+Um einen Lagerabgleich durchzuführen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Lagerbestand > Werkzeuge > Bestandsableich > Neu
+
+#### Schritt 1: Vorlage herunterladen
+
+Sie sollten sich an eine spezielle Vorlage eines Tabellenblattes halten um den Bestand und den Wert eines Artikels zu importieren. Öffnen Sie ein neues Formular zum Bestandsabgleich um die Optionen für den Download zu sehen.
+
+
+
+#### Schritt 2: Geben Sie Daten in die CSV-Datei ein.
+
+
+
+Das CSV-Format beachtet Groß- und Kleinschreibung. Verändern Sie nicht die Kopfbezeichnungen, die in der Vorlage vordefiniert wurden. In den Spalten "Artikelnummer" und "Lager" geben Sie bitte die richtige Artikelnummer und das Lager ein, so wie es in ERPNext bezeichnet wird. Für die Menge geben Sie den Lagerbestand, den Sie für diesen Artikel erfassen wollen, in einem bestimmten Lager ein. Wenn Sie die Menge oder den wertmäßigen Betrag eines Artikels nicht ändern wollen, dann lassen Sie den Eintrag leer.
+Anmerkung: Geben Sie keine "0" ein, wenn sie die Menge oder den wertmäßigen Betrag nicht ändern wollen. Sonst kalkuliert das System eine Menge von "0". Lassen Sie also das Feld leer!
+
+#### Schritt 3: Laden Sie die Datei hoch und geben Sie in das Formular "Bestandsableich" Werte ein.
+
+
+
+##### Buchungsdatum
+
+Das Buchungsdatum ist das Datum zu dem sich der hochgeladene Lagerbestand im Report wiederspiegeln soll. Die Auswahl der Option "Buchungsdatum" ermöglicht es Ihnen auch rückwirkende Bestandsabgleiche durchzuführen.
+
+##### Konto für Bestandsveränderungen
+
+Wenn Sie einen Bestandsabgleich durchführen um einen **Eröffnungsbestand** zu übertragen, dann sollten Sie ein Bilanzkonto auswählen. Standardmäßig wird ein **temporäres Eröffnungskonto** im Kontenplan erstellt, welches hier verwendet werden kann.
+
+Wenn Sie einen Bestandsabgleich durchführen um den **Lagerbestand oder den Wert eines Artikels zu korrigieren**, können Sie jedes beliebige Aufwandskonto auswählen, auf das Sie den Differenzbetrag (, den Sie aus der Differenz der Werte des Artikels erhalten,) buchen wollen. Wenn das Aufwandskonto als Konto für Bestandsveränderungen ausgewählt wird, müssen Sie auch eine Kostenstelle angeben, da diese bei Ertrags- und Aufwandskonten zwingend erforderlich ist.
+
+Wenn Sie sich die abgespeicherten Bestandsabgleichdaten noch einmal angesehen haben, übertragen Sie den Bestandsabgleich. Nach der erfolgreichen Übertragung, werden die Daten im System aktualisiert. Um die übertragenen Daten zu überprüfen gehen Sie zum Lager und schauen Sie sich den Bericht zum Lagerbestand an.
+
+Notiz: Wenn Sie die bewerteten Beträge eines Artikels eingeben, können Sie zum Lagerbestand gehen und auf den Bericht zu den Artikelpreisen klicken, wenn Sie die Bewertungsbeträge der einzelnen Artikel herausfinden wollen. Der Bericht zeigt Ihnen alle Typen von Beträgen.
+
+#### Schritt 4: Überprüfen Sie die Daten zum Bestandsabgleich
+
+
+
+### Bericht zum Lagerbuch
+
+
+
+
+##### So arbeitet der Bestandsabgleich
+
+Ein Bestandsabgleich zu einem bestimmten Termin bedeutet die gesperrte Menge eines Artikels an einem bestimmten Abgleichsdatum abzugleichen, und sollte deshalb nicht im Nachhinein noch von Lagerbuchungen beeinträchtigt werden.
+
+Beispiel:
+
+Artikelnummer: ABC001, Lager: Mumbai. Nehmen wir an, dass der Lagerbestand zum 10. Januar 100 Stück beträgt. Zum 12. Januar wird ein Bestandsabgleich durchgeführt um den Bestand auf 150 Stück anzuheben. Das Lagerbuch sieht dann wie folgt aus:
+
+
+ | Buchungsdatum + | +Menge + | +Bestandsmenge + | +Belegart + | +
| 10.01.2014 | +100 | +100 | +Kaufbeleg | +
| 12.01.2014 | +50 | +150 | +Bestandsabgleich | +
| Buchungsdatum | +Menge | +Bestandsmenge | +Belegart | +
| 05.01.2014 | +20 | +20 | +Kaufbeleg | +
| 10.01.2014 | +100 | +120 | +Kaufbeleg | +
| 12.01.2014 | +150 | +Bestandsabgleich |
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/adding-users.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/adding-users.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e4c21481
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/adding-users.md
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+
+# Benutzer hinzufügen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Benutzer können vom System-Manager hinzugefügt werden. Wenn Sie ein System-Manager sind, können Sie Benutzer hinzufügen über
+
+Es gibt zwei Hauptarten von Benutzern: Webbenutzer und Systembenutzer. Systembenutzer sind Leute, die ERPNext im Unternehmen verwenden. Webbenutzer sind Kunden oder Lieferanten (Portalbenutzer).
+
+Für einen Benutzer können viele Informationen eingegeben werden. Im Sinne der Anwenderfreundlichkeit ist die Menge an Informationen, die für Webbenutzer eingegeben werden können, gering: Der Vorname und die Email-Adresse. Wichtig ist, dass Sie erkennen, dass die Email-Adresse der eindeutige Schlüssel (ID) dafür ist, einen Benutzer zu identifizieren.
+
+> Einstellungen > Benutzer > Benutzer
+
+### 1. Übersicht der Benutzer
+
+
+
+
+Um einen neuen Benutzer hinzuzufügen, klicken Sie auf "Neu".
+
+### 2. Benutzerdetails hinzufügen
+
+Fügen Sie Details zum Benutzer hinzu, z. B. Vorname, Nachname, E-Mail-Adresse, usw.
+
+Die E-Mail-Adresse des Benutzers wird zur Benutzer-ID.
+
+Nach dem Hinzufügen dieser Details bitte den Benutzer abspeichern.
+
+### 3. Rollen einstellen
+
+Nach dem Speichern sehen Sie eine Liste der Rollen und daneben jeweils eine Schaltfläche zum Anklicken. Markieren Sie alle Rollen, von denen Sie möchten, dass sie der Benutzer bekommt, und speichern Sie das Dokument ab. Um zu sehen, welche Berechtigungen die einzelnen Rollen haben, klicken Sie auf den Rollennamen.
+
+
+
+### 4. Zugriff auf Module einstellen
+
+Benutzer haben Zugriff auf alle Module, für die sie aufgrund Ihrer Rollen Berechtigungen haben. Wenn Sie bestimmte Module für den Zugriff sperren möchten, entfernen Sie die Markierung in der Liste.
+
+
+
+### 5. Sicherheitseinstellungen
+
+Wenn Sie dem Benutzer nur zu bestimmten Bürozeiten oder an Wochenenden Zugriff auf das System gewähren möchten, stellen Sie das unter den Sicherheitseinstellungen ein.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d3233714
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+# Benutzer und Berechtigungen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+In ERPNext können Sie mehrere verschiedene Benutzer anlegen und ihnen unterschiedliche Rollen zuweisen. Es gibt einige Benutzer, die nur auf den öffentlichen Teil von ERPNext (d. h. die Webseite) zugreifen können. Diese Benutzer werden "Webseiten-Benutzer" genannt.
+
+ERPNext verwirklicht Berechtigungskontrolle auf den Ebenen von Benutzer und Rolle. Jedem Benutzer können über das System mehrere verschiedene Rollen und Berechtigungen zugeordnet werden.
+
+Die wichtigste Rolle ist der "System-Manager". Jeder Benutzer, der diese Rolle hat, kann weitere Benutzer hinzufügen und Benutzern Rollen zuteilen.
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b00f32ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+adding-users
+role-based-permissions
+user-permissions
+sharing
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6ca01b03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions.md
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+
+# Rollenbasierte Berechtigungen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+ERPNext arbeitet mit einem rollenbasierten Berechtigungssystem. Das heißt, dass Sie Benutzern Rollen zuordnen können und Rollen Berechtigungen erteilen können. Die Struktur der Berechtigungen erlaubt es Ihnen weiterhin verschiedene Berechtigungsregeln für unterschiedliche Felder zu definieren, wobei das **Konzept der Berechtigungsebenen** für Felder verwendet wird. Wenn einem Kunden einmal Rollen zugeordnet worden sind, haben Sie darüber die Möglichkeit, den Zugriff eines Benutzers auf bestimmte Dokumente zu beschränken.
+
+Wenn Sie das tun wollen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Einstellungen > Berechtigungen > Rollenberechtigungen-Manager
+
+
+
+Berechtigungen werden angewandt auf einer Kombination von:
+
+* **Rollen:** Wie wir schon angesprochen haben, werden Benutzern Rollen zugeordnet, und auf diese wiederum werden Berechtigungsregeln angewandt.
+
+_Beispiele für Rollen sind der "Kontenmanager", der "Mitarbeiter" und der "Nutzer Personalabteilung"._
+
+* **Dokumenttypen:** Jeder Dokumententyp, jede Vorlage und jede Transaktion hat eine eigene Liste von rollenbasierten Berechtigungen.
+
+_Beispiele für Dokumententypen sind: "Ausgangsrechnung", "Urlaubsantrag", "Lagerbuchung", usw._
+
+* **Berechtigungs"ebenen":** Sie können in jedem Dokument Felder nach "Ebenen" gruppieren. Jede Gruppierung von Feldern wird mit einer eindeutigen Nummer (0, 1, 2, 3, usw.) versehen. Auf jede Feldgruppierung kann ein eigenständiger Satz von Berechtigungsregeln angewandt werden. Standardmäßig haben alle Felder die Ebene 0.
+
+_Die Berechtigungsebene verbindet die Gruppierung der Felder der Ebene X mit einer Berechtigungsregel der Ebene X._
+
+* **Dokumentenphasen:** Berechtigungen werden zu jeder Phase eines Dokumentes angewandt, wie z. B. Erstellung, Speicherung, Übetragung, Stornierung und Änderung. Eine Rolle kann die Berechtigung haben zu drucken, per E-Mail zu versenden, Daten zu importieren oder zu exportieren, auf Berichte zuzugreifen oder Benutzerberechtigungen zu definieren.
+
+* **Benutzerberechtigungen anwenden:** Dieser Schalter entscheidet, ob für eine Rolle in einer bestimmten Dokumentenphase Benutzerberechtigungen gültig sind.
+
+Wenn dieser Punkt aktiviert ist, kann ein Benutzer mit dieser Rolle nur auf bestimmte Dokumente dieses Dokumententyps zugreifen. Dieser spezielle Dokumentenzugriff wird über die Liste der Benutzerberechtigungen definiert. Zusätzlich werden Benutzerberechtigungen, die für andere Dokumententypen definiert wurden, ebenfalls angewandt, wenn Sie mit dem aktuellen Dokumententyp über Verknüpfungsfelder verbunden sind.
+
+Um Benutzerberechtigungen zu setzen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Einstellungen > Berechtigungen > [Benutzerrechte-Manager]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.html)
+
+
+
+---
+
+**Um eine neue Regel hinzuzufügen**, klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Benutzereinschränkung hinzufügen". Es öffnet sich ein Popup-Fenster und bittet Sie eine Rolle und eine Berechtigungsebene auszuwählen. Wenn Sie diese Auswahl treffen und auf "Hinzufügen" klicken, wird in der Tabelle der Regeln eine neue Zeile eingefügt.
+
+---
+
+Der Urlaubsantrag ist ein gutes **Beispiel**, welches alle Bereiche des Berechtigungssystems abdeckt.
+
+
+
+1\. **Er sollte von einem "Mitarbeiter" erstellt werden.** Aus diesem Grund sollte die Rolle "Mitarbeiter" Berechtigungen zum Lesen, Schreiben und Erstellen haben.
+
+
+
+2\. **Ein Mitarbeiter sollte nur auf seine/Ihre eigenen Urlaubsanträge zugreifen können.** Daher sollte der Punkt "Benutzerberechtigungen anwenden" für die Rolle "Mitarbeiter" aktiviert sein und es sollte ein Datensatz "Benutzerberechtigung" für jede Kombination von Benutzer und Mitarbeiter erstellt werden. (Dieser Aufwand reduziert sich für den Dokumententyp, indem über das Programm Datensätze für Benutzerberechtigungen erstellt werden.)
+
+
+
+3\. **Der Personalmanager sollte alle Urlaubsanträge sehen können.** Erstellen Sie für den Personalmanager eine Berechtigungsregel auf der Ebene 0 mit Lese-Rechten. Die Option "Benutzerberechtigungen anwenden" sollte deaktiviert sein.
+
+
+
+4\. **Der Urlaubsgenehmiger sollte die ihn betreffenden Urlaubsanträge lesen und aktualisieren können.** Der Urlaubsgenehmiger erhält Lese- und Schreibzugriff auf Ebene 0, und die Option "Benutzerberechtigungen anwenden" wird aktiviert. Zutreffende Mitarbeiter-Dokumente sollten in den Benutzerberechtigungen des Urlaubsgenehmigers aufgelistet sein. (Dieser Aufwand reduziert sich für Urlaubsgenehmiger, die in Mitarbeiterdokumenten aufgeführt werden, indem über das Programm Datensätze für Benutzerberechtigungen erstellt werden.)
+
+
+
+5\. **Ein Urlaubsantrag sollte nur von einem Mitarbeiter der Personalverwaltung oder einem Urlaubsgenehmiger bestätigt oder abgelehnt werden können.** Das Statusfeld des Urlaubsantrags wird auf Ebene 1 gesetzt. Mitarbeiter der Personalverwaltung und Urlaubsgenehmiger bekommen Lese- und Schreibrechte für Ebene 1, während allen anderen Leserechte für Ebene 1 gegeben werden.
+
+
+
+6\. **Der Mitarbeiter der Personalverwaltung sollte die Möglichkeit haben Urlaubsanträge an seine Untergebenen zu delegieren.** Er erhält die Erlaubis Benutzerberechtigungen einzustellen. Ein Nutzer mit der Rolle "Benutzer Personalverwaltung" wäre dann also in der Lage Benutzer-Berechtigungen und Urlaubsanträge für andere Benutzer zu definieren.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/sharing.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/sharing.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..95170340
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/sharing.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+
+# Teilen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Zusätzlich zu Benutzer- und Rollenberechtigungen können Sie ein Dokument auch mit einem anderen Benutzer "teilen", wenn Sie die Berechtigungen zum teilen haben.
+
+Um ein Dokument zu teilen, öffnen Sie das Dokument, klicken Sie auf das "+"-Symbol im Abschnitt "Freigegeben für" und wählen Sie den Benutzer aus.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a628655f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.md
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+
+# Benutzer-Berechtigungen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Verwenden Sie den Benutzerberechtigungen-Manager um den Zugriff eines Benutzers auf eine Menge von Dokumenten einzuschränken.
+
+Rollenbasierte Berechtigungen definieren den Rahmen an Dokumententypen, innerhalb derer sich ein Benutzer mit einer Anzahl von Rollen bewegen darf. Sie können jedoch noch feinere Einstellungen treffen, wenn Sie für einen Benutzer Benutzerberechtigungen definieren. Wenn Sie bestimmte Dokumente in der Liste der Benutzerberechtigungen eintragen, dann können Sie den Zugriff dieses Benutzers auf bestimmte Dokumente eines bestimmten DocTypes begrenzen, unter der Bedingung, dass die Option "Benutzerberechtigungen anwenden" im Rollenberechtigungs-Manager aktiviert ist.
+
+Beginnen Sie wie folgt:
+
+> Einstellungen > Berechtigungen > Benutzerrechte-Manager
+
+
+Abbildung: Übersicht aus dem Benutzerberechtigungs-Manager die aufzeigt, wie Benutzer nur auf bestimmte Firmen zugreifen können
+
+#### Beispiel
+
+Der Benutzer "aromn@example.com" hat die Rolle "Nutzer Vertrieb" und wir möchten die Zugriffsrechte des Benutzers so einschränken, dass er nur auf Datensätze einer bestimmten Firma, nämlich der Wind Power LLC, zugreifen kann.
+
+1\. Wir fügen eine Benutzerberechtigungs-Zeile für die Firma hinzu.
+
+Abbildung: Hinzufügen einer Zeile "Benutzer-Berechtigung" für die Kombination aus dem Benutzer "aromn@example.com" und der Firma Wind Power LLC
+
+2\. Die Rolle "Alle" hat nur Leseberechtigungen für die Firma, "Benutzer-Berechtigungen anwenden" ist aktiviert.
+
+Abbildung: Leseberechtigung mit aktivierter Option "Benutzer-Berechtigungen anwenden" für den DocType Firma
+
+3\. Die oben abgebildete Kombination der zwei Regeln führt dazu, dass der Benutzer "aromn@example.com" für die Firma Wind Power LLC nur Leserechte hat.
+
+Abbildung: Der Zugriff wird auf die Firma Wind Power LLC beschränkt
+
+4\. Wir möchten nun diese Benutzer-Berechtigung für "Firma" auf andere Dokumente wie "Angebot", "Kundenauftrag" etc. übertragen. Diese Formulare haben **Verknüpfungsfelder zu "Firma"**. Als Ergebnis werden Benutzer-Berechtigungen von "Firma" auch auf diese Dokumente übertragen, was dazu führt, dass der Benutzer "aromn@example.com" auf diese Dokumente zugreifen kann, wenn Sie mit Wind Power LLC verbunden sind.
+
+Abbildung: Benutzer mit der Rolle "Nutzer Vertrieb" können, basierend auf Ihren Benutzer-Berechtigungen, Angebote lesen, schreiben, erstellen, übertragen und stornieren, wenn "Benutzer-Berechtigungen anwenden" aktiviert ist.
+
+Abbildung: Die Auflistung der Angebote enthält nur Ergebnisse für die Firma Wind Power LLC für den Benutzer "aromn@example.com"
+
+5\. Benutzer-Berechtigungen werden automatisch auf Basis von verknüpften Feldern angewandt, genauso wie wir es bei den Angeboten gesehen haben. Aber: Das Lead-Formular hat vier Verknüpfungsfelder: "Region", "Firma", "Eigentümer des Leads" und "Nächster Kontakt durch". Nehmen wir an, Sie möchten dass die Leads den Zugriff des Benutzers basierend auf Ihrer Region einschränken, obwohl Sie für die DocTypes "Benutzer", "Region" und "Firma" Benutzer-Berechtigungen angelegt haben. Dann gehen Sie wir folgt vor: Aktivieren Sie die Option "Benutzer-Berechtigungen ignorieren" für die Verknüpfungsfelder "Firma", "Eigentümer des Leads" und "Nächster Kontakt durch".
+
+Abbildung: Der Vertriebsmitarbeiter kann Leads lesen, schreiben und erstellen, eingeschränkt durch Benutzer-Berechtigungen.
+
+Abbildung: Markieren Sie "Benutzer-Berechtigungen ignorieren" für die Felder "Firma", "Lead-Inhaber" und "Nächster Kontakt durch" über Setup > Anpassen > Formular anpassen > Lead.
+
+Abbildung: Aufgrund der obigen Kombination kann der Benutzer "aromn@example.com" nur auf Leads der Region "United States" zugreifen.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/workflows.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/workflows.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..dab34f6e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/setting-up/workflows.md
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+
+# Workflows
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Um es mehreren unterschiedlichen Personen zu erlauben viele verschiedene Anfragen zu übertragen, die dann von unterschiedlichen Benutzern genehmigt werden müssen, folgt ERPNext den Bedingungen eines Workflows. ERPNext protokolliert die unterschiedlichen Berechtigungen vor dem Übertragen mit.
+
+Unten Sehen Sie ein Beispiel eines Worklflows.
+
+Wenn ein Benutzer einen Urlaub beantragt, dann wird seine Anfrage an die Personalabteilung weiter geleitet. Die Personalabteilung, repräsentiert durch einen Mitarbeiter der Personalabteilung, wird diese Anfrage dann entweder genehmigen oder ablehnen. Wenn dieser Prozess abgeschlossen ist, dann bekommt der Vorgesetzte des Benutzers (der Urlaubsgenehmiger) eine Mitteilung, dass die Personalabteilung den Antrag genehmigt oder abgelehnt hat. Der Vorgesetzte, der die genehmigende Instanz ist, wird dann den Antrag entweder genehmigen oder ablehnen. Dementsprechend bekommt der Benutzer dann eine Genehmigung oder eine Ablehnung.
+
+
+
+Um einen Workflow und Übergangsregeln zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Einstellungen > Workflow > Workflow > Neu
+
+#### Schritt 1: Geben Sie die unterschiedlichen Zustände des Prozesses Urlaubsantrag ein.
+
+
+
+#### Schritt 2: Geben Sie die Übergangsregeln ein.
+
+
+
+Hinweise:
+
+> Hinweis 1: Wenn Sie einen Workflow erstellen überschreiben Sie grundlegend den Kode, der für dieses Dokument erstellt wurde. Dementsprechend arbeitet das Dokument dann nach Ihrem Workflow und nicht mehr auf dem voreingestellten Kode. Deshalb gibt es wahrscheinlich keine Schaltfläche zum Übertragen, wenn Sie diese nicht im Workflow definiert haben.
+
+> Hinweis 2: Der Dokumentenstatus für "Gespeichert" ist "0", für "Übertragen" "1" und für "Storniert" "2".
+
+> Hinweis 3: Ein Dokument kann nicht storniert werden bis es übertragen wurde.
+
+> Hinweis 4: Wenn Sie die Möglichkeit haben wollen zu stornieren, dann müssen Sie einen Workflow-Übergang erstellen, der Ihnen nach dem Übertragen das Stornieren anbietet.
+
+#### Beispiel eines Urlaubsantrags-Prozesses
+
+Gehen Sie in das Modul Personalwesen und klicken Sie auf Urlaubsantrag. Beantragen Sie einen Urlaub.
+
+Wenn ein Urlaubsantrag übertragen wird, steht der Status in der Ecke der rechten Seite auf "Beantragt".
+
+
+
+Wenn sich ein Mitarbeiter der Personalabteilung anmeldet, dann kann er den Antrag genehmigen oder ablehnen. Wenn eine Genehmigung erfolgt, wechselt der Status in der rechten Ecke zu "Genehmigt". Es wird jedoch ein blaues Informationssymbol angezeigt, welches aussagt, dass der Urlaubsantrag noch anhängig ist.
+
+
+
+Wenn der Urlaubsgenehmiger die Seite mit den Urlaubsanträgen öffnet, kann er den Status von "Genehmigt" auf "Abgelehnt" ändern.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a479b223
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+
+# Bewertung des Lagerbestandes
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Der Wert des verfügbaren Lagerbestandes wird im Kontenplan des Unternehmens als Vermögenswert behandelt. Abhängig von der Art der Artikel wird hier zwischen Anlagevermögen und Umlaufvermögen unterschieden. Um eine Bilanz vorzubereiten, sollten Sie die Buchungen für diese Vermögen erstellen. Es gibt generell zwei unterschiedliche Methoden den Lagerbestand zu bewerten:
+
+### Ständige Inventur
+
+Bei diesem Prozess bucht das System jede Lagertransaktion um Lagerbestand und Buchbestand zu synchronisieren. Das ist die Standardeinstellung in ERPNext für neue Konten.
+
+Wenn Sie Artikel kaufen und erhalten, werden diese Artikel als Vermögen des Unternehmens gebucht (Warenbestand/Anlagevermögen). Wenn Sie diese Artikel wieder verkaufen und ausliefern, werden Kosten (Selbstkosten) in Höhe der Bezugskosten der Artikel verbucht. Nach jeder Lagertransaktion werden Buchungen im Hauptbuch erstellt. Dies hat zum Ergebnis, dass der Wert im Lagerbuch immer gleich dem Wert in der Bilanz bleibt. Das verbessert die Aussagekraft der Bilanz und der Gewinn- und Verlustrechnung.
+
+Um Buchungen für bestimmte Lagertransaktionen zu überprüfen, bitte unter [Beispiele]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.html) nachlesen.
+
+#### Vorteile
+
+Das System der laufenden Inventur macht es Ihnen leichter eine exakte Aussage über Vermögen und Kosten zu erhalten. Die Lagerbilanz wird ständig mit den relevanten Kontoständen abgeglichen, somit müssen keine manuellen Buchungen mehr für jede Periode erstellt werden, um die Salden auszugleichen.
+
+Für den Fall, dass neue zurückdatierte Transaktionen erstellt werden oder Stornierungen von bereits angelegten Transaktionen statt finden, werden für alle Artikel dieser Transaktion alle Buchungen im Lagerbuch und Hauptbuch, die danach liegen, neu berechnet. Auf dieselbe Vorgehensweise wird zurück gegriffen, wenn Kosten zum übertragenen Kaufbeleg hinzugefügt werden, nachgereicht über das Hilfsprogramm für Einstandskosten.
+
+> Anmerkung: Die ständige Inventur hängt vollständig von der Artikelbewertung ab. Deshalb müssen Sie bei der Eingabe der Werte vorsichtiger vorgehen, wenn Sie gleichzeitig annehmende Lagertransaktionen wie Kaufbeleg, Materialschein oder Fertigung/Umpacken erstellen.
+
+---
+
+### Stichtagsinventur
+
+Bei dieser Methode werden periodisch manuelle Buchungen erstellt, um die Lagerbilanz und die relevanten Kontenstände abzugleichen. Das System erstellt die Buchungen für Vermögen zum Zeitpunkt des Materialeinkaufs oder -verkaufs nicht automatisch.
+
+Während einer Buchungsperiode werden Kosten in ihrem Buchhaltungssystem gebucht, wenn Sie Artikel kaufen und erhalten. Einen Teil dieser Artikel verkaufen und liefern Sie dann aus.
+
+Am Ende einer Buchungsperiode muss dann der Gesamtwert der verkauften Artikel als Unternehmensvermögen (oft als Warenbestand) gebucht werden.
+
+Die Differenz aus dem Wert der Waren, die noch nicht verkauft wurden, und dem Warenbestand zum Ende der letzten Periode kann positiv oder negativ sein und wird dem Vermögen (Warenbestand/Anlagevermögen) hinzugefügt. Wenn es sich um einen negativen Betrag handelt, erfolgt die Buchung spiegelverkehrt.
+
+Dieser Gesamtprozess wird als Stichtagsinventur bezeichnet.
+
+Wenn Sie als bereits existierender Benutzer die Stichtagsinventur nutzen aber zur Ständigen Inventur wechseln möchten, müssen Sie der Migrationsanleitung folgen. Für weitere Details lesen Sie [Migration aus der Stichtagsinventur]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.html).
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..21624e52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+perpetual-inventory
+migrate-to-perpetual-inventory
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1d8fda56
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.md
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+
+# Zur Ständigen Inventur wechseln
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Bestehende Benutzer müssen sich an folgende Schritte halten um das neue System der Ständigen Inventur zu aktivieren. Da die Ständige Inventur immer auf einer Synchronisation zwischen Lager und Kontostand aufbaut, ist es nicht möglich diese Option in einer bestehenden Lagereinstellung zu übernehmen. Sie müssen einen komplett neuen Satz von Lagern erstellen, jedes davon verbunden mit dem betreffenden Konto.
+
+Schritte:
+
+
+ * Heben Sie die Salden der Konten, die Sie zur Pflege des verfügbaren Lagerwertes verwenden, (Warenbestände/Anlagevermögen) durch eine Journalbuchung auf.
+
+ * Da bereits angelegte Lager mit Lagertransaktionen verbunden sind, es aber keine verknüpften Buchungssätze gibt, können diese Lager nicht in einer ständigen Inventur genutzt werden. Sie müssen für zukünftige Lagertransaktionen neue Lager anlegen, die dann mit den zutreffenden Konten verknüpft sind. Wählen Sie bei der Erstellung neuer Lager eine Artikelgruppe unter der das Unterkonto für das Lager erstellt wird.
+
+ * Erstellen Sie folgende Standardkonten für jede Firma:
+
+ * Ware erhalten aber noch nicht abgerechnet
+ * Lagerabgleichskonto
+ * Aufwendungen in Bewertung enthalten
+ * Kostenstelle
+
+ * Aktivieren Sie die Ständige Inventur
+
+> Einstellungen > Rechnungswesen > Konteneinstellungen > Eine Buchung für jede Lagerbewegung erstellen
+
+
+
+* Erstellen Sie Lagerbuchungen (Materialübertrag) um verfügbare Lagerbestände von einem existierenden Lager auf ein neues Lager zu übertragen. Sobald im neuen Lager der Lagerbestand verfügbar wird, sollten Sie für zukünftige Transaktionen nur noch das neue Lager verwenden.
+
+Das System wird für bereits existierende Lagertransaktionen keine Buchungssätze erstellen, wenn sie vor der Aktivierung der Ständigen Inventur übertragen wurden, da die alten Lager nicht mit Konten verknüpft werden. Wenn Sie eine neue Transaktion mit einem alten Lager erstellen oder eine existierende Transaktion ändern, gibt es keine korrespondierenden Buchungssätze. Sie müssen Lager und Kontostände manuell über das Journal synchronisieren.
+
+> Anmerkung: Wenn Sie bereits das alte System der Ständigen Inventur nutzen, wird dieses automatisch deaktiviert. Sie müssen den Schritten oben folgen um es wieder zu aktivieren.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d995319a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.md
@@ -0,0 +1,348 @@
+
+# Ständige Inventur
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+In der Ständigen Inventur erstellt das System Buchungen für jede Lagertransaktion, so dass das Lager und der Kontostand immer synchron bleiben. Der Kontostand wird für jedes Lager mit der zutreffenden Kontobezeichnung verbucht. Wenn das Lager gespeichert wird, erstellt das System automatisch eine Kontobezeichnung mit dem selben Namen wie das Lager. Da für jedes Lager ein Kontostand verwaltet wird, sollten Sie Lager auf Basis der in ihnen eingelagerten Artikel (Umlaufvermögen/Anlagevermögen) erstellen.
+
+Wenn Artikel in einem bestimmten Lager ankommen, erhöht sich der Stand des Vermögenskontos (das mit dem Lager verknüpft ist). Analog dazu wird ein Aufwand verbucht, wenn Sie Waren ausliefern, und der Stand des Vermögenskontos nimmt ab, basierend auf der Bewertung der entsprechenden Artikel.
+
+### Aktivierung
+
+1. Richten Sie die folgenden Standard-Konten für jede Firma ein:
+ * Lagerwaren erhalten aber noch nicht abgerechnet
+ * Lagerabgleichskonto
+ * In der Bewertung enthaltene Kosten
+ * Kostenstelle
+2. In der Ständigen Inventur verwaltet das System für jedes Lager einen eigenen Kontostand unter einer eigenen Kontobezeichnung. Um diese Kontobezeichnung zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu "Konto erstellen unter" in den Lagerstammdaten.
+3. Aktivieren Sie die Ständige Inventur.
+
+> Einstellungen > Rechnungswesen > Kontoeinstellungen > Eine Buchung für jede Lagerbewegung erstellen
+
+---
+
+### Beispiel
+
+Wir nehmen folgenden Kontenplan und folgende Lagereinstellungen für Ihre Firma an:
+
+Kontenplan
+
+ * Vermögen (Soll)
+ * Umlaufvermögen
+ * Forderungen
+ * Jane Doe
+ * Lagervermögenswerte
+ * In Verkaufsstellen
+ * Fertigerzeugnisse
+ * In der Fertigung
+ * Steuervermögenswerte
+ * Umsatzsteuer (Vorsteuer)
+ * Anlagevermögen
+ * Anlagevermögen im Lager
+ * Verbindlichkeiten (Haben)
+ * Kurzfristige Verbindlichkeiten
+ * Verbindlichkeiten aus Lieferungen und Leistungen
+ * East Wind Inc.
+ * Lagerverbindlichkeiten
+ * Lagerware erhalten aber noch nicht abgerechnet
+ * Steuerverbindlichkeiten
+ * Dienstleistungssteuer
+ * Erträge (Haben)
+ * Direkte Erträge
+ * Verkäufe
+ * Aufwendungen (Soll)
+ * Direkte Aufwendungen
+ * Lageraufwendungen
+ * Selbstkosten
+ * In der Bewertung enthaltene Kosten
+ * Bestandsveränderungen
+ * Versandgebühren
+ * Zoll
+
+#### Kontenkonfiguration des Lagers
+
+* In Verkaufsstellen
+* In der Fertigung
+* Fertigerzeugnisse
+* Anlagevermögen im Lager
+
+#### Kaufbeleg
+
+Nehmen wir an, Sie haben 10 Stück des Artikels "RM0001" zu 200€ und 5 Stück des Artikels "Tisch" zu **100€** vom Lieferanten "Arcu Vel Quam Fabricators" eingekauft. Im Folgenden finden Sie die Details des Kaufbelegs:
+
+**Supplier:** Arcu Vel Quam Fabricators
+
+**Artikel:**
+
+| Artikel | +Lager | +Menge | +Preis | +Gesamtmenge | +Wertansatz | +
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | +In Verkaufsstellen | +10 | +200 | +2000 | +2200 | +
| Tisch | +Anlagevermögen im Lager | +5 | +100 | +500 | +550 | +
Steuern: +
+| Konto | +Betrag | +Kategorie | +
|---|---|---|
| Versandgebühren | +100 | +Gesamtsumme und Bewertung | +
| MwSt | +120 | +Gesamtsumme | +
| Zoll | +150 | +Bewertung | +
Lagerbuch +
+ +
+
+**Hauptbuch:**
+
+
+
+Um ein System der doppelten Buchhaltung zu erhalten, werden dadurch, dass sich der Kontensaldo durch den Kaufbeleg erhöht, die Konten "In Verkaufsstellen" und "Anlagevermögen im Lager" belastet und das temporäre Konto "Lagerware erhalten aber noch nicht abgerechnet" entlastet. Zum selben Zeitpunkt wird eine negative Aufwendung auf das Konto "In der Bewertung enthaltene Kosten" verbucht, um die Bewertung hinzuzufügen und um eine doppelte Aufwandsverbuchung zu vermeiden.
+
+---
+
+### Eingangsrechnung
+
+Wenn eine Rechnung des Lieferanten für den oben angesprochenen Kaufbeleg eintrifft, wird hierzu eine Eingangsrechnung erstellt. Die Buchungen im Hauptbuch sind folgende:
+
+#### Hauptbuch
+
+
+
+Hier wird das Konto "Lagerware erhalten aber noch nicht bewertet" belastet und hebt den Effekt des Kaufbeleges auf.
+
+* * *
+
+### Lieferschein
+
+Nehmen wir an, dass Sie eine Kundenbestellung von "Utah Automation Services" über 5 Stück des Artikels "RM0001" zu 300€ haben. Im Folgenden sehen Sie die Details des Lieferscheins.
+
+**Kunde:** Utah Automation Services
+
+**Artikel:**
+
+| Artikel | +Lager | +Menge | +Preis | +Summe | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | +In Verkaufsstellen | +5 | +300 | +1500 | +
Steuern: +
+| Konto | +Menge | +
|---|---|
| Dienstleistungssteuer | +150 | +
| MwSt | +100 | +
+
+**Hauptbuch**
+
+
+
+Da der Artikel aus dem Lager "In Verkaufsstellen" geliefert wird, wird das Konto "In Verkaufsstellen" entlastet und ein Betrag in gleicher Höhe dem Aufwandskonto "Selbstkosten" belastet. Der belastete/entlastete Betrag ist gleich dem Gesamtwert (Einkaufskosten) des Verkaufsartikels. Und der Wert wird gemäß der bevorzugten Bewertungsmethode (FIFO/Gleitender Durchschnitt) oder den tatsächlichen Kosten eines serialisierten Artikels kalkuliert.
+
+
+ In diesem Beispiel gehen wir davon aus, dass wir als Berwertungsmethode FIFO verwenden.
+ Bewertungpreis = Einkaufpreis + In der Bewertung enthaltene Abgaben/Gebühren
+ = 200 + (250 * (2000 / 2500) / 10)
+ = 220
+ Gesamtsumme der Bewertung = 220 * 5
+ = 1100
+
+
+* * *
+
+### Ausgangsrechnung mit Lageraktualisierung
+
+Nehmen wir an, dass Sie zur obigen Bestellung keinen Lieferschein erstellt haben sondern direkt eine Ausgangsrechnung mit der Option "Lager aktualisieren" erstellt haben. Die Details der Ausgangsrechnung sind die gleichen wie bei obigem Lieferschein.
+
+**Lagerbuch**
+
+
+
+**Hauptbuch**
+
+
+
+Hier werden, im Gegensatz zu den normalen Buchungen für Rechnungen, die Konten "In Verkaufsstellen" und "Selbstkosten" basierend auf der Bewertung beeinflusst.
+
+* * *
+
+### Lagerbuchung (Materialschein)
+
+**Artikel:**
+
+| Artikel/th> + | Eingangslager | +Menge | +Preis | +Summe | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | +In den Verkaufsstellen | +50 | +220 | +11000 | +
+
+**Hauptbuch**
+
+
+
+* * *
+
+### Lagerbuchung (Materialanfrage)
+
+**Artikel:**
+
+| Artikel | +Ausgangslager | +Menge | +Preis | +Summe | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | +In den Verkaufsstellen | +10 | +220 | +2200 | +
+
+**Hauptbuch**
+
+
+
+* * *
+
+### Lagerbuchung (Materialübertrag)
+
+**Artikel:**
+
+| Artikel | +Ausgangslager | +Eingangslager | +Menge | +Preis | +Summe | +
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | +In den Verkaufsstellen | +Fertigung | +10 | +220 | +2200 | +
+
+**Hauptbuch**
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/article-coding.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/article-coding.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..44f59c61
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/article-coding.md
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+
+# Artikelkodierung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Wenn Sie bereits einer ausgewachsenen Geschäftstätigkeit mit einer Anzahl an physischen Produkten nachgehen, haben Sie Ihre Artikel vielleicht schon kodifiziert. Wenn nicht, haben Sie die Wahl. Wir empfehlen Ihnen, Artikel zu kodieren, wenn Sie viele Produkte mit langen oder komplizierten Namen haben. Für den Fall, dass sie wenige Produkte mit kurzen Namen haben, übernimmt man vorzugsweise den Artikelnamen für den Artikelcode.
+
+Die Artikelkodierung war schon immer ein schwieriges Thema und es wurden hierzu schon Kriege geführt (kein Scherz!). Unserer Erfahrung nach ist das Arbeiten ohne Kodierung ein Alptraum, wenn Sie Artikel haben, die eine bestimmte Größe überschreiten.
+
+#### Vorteile
+
+* Standartisierter Weg, wie Dinge bezeichnet werden.
+* Geringere Wahrscheinlichkeit doppelter Einträge.
+* Eindeutige Bezeichnung.
+* Schnelle Möglichkeit einen ähnlichen Artikel zu finden.
+* Artikelnamen werden immer länger, wenn weitere Typen eingeführt werden. Codes sind kürzer.
+
+#### Nachteile
+
+* Sie müssen sich die Codes merken!
+* Für neue Teammitglieder schwerer nachzuvollziehen.
+* Sie müssen immer wieder neue Codes erstellen.
+
+#### Beispiel
+
+Sie sollten Sich eine einfache Anleitung / einen "Spickzettel" zurecht legen, um Ihre Artikel zu kodieren, anstatt sie einfach der Reihe nach zu numerieren. Jeder Buchstabe sollte eine Bedeutung haben. Hier ist ein Beispiel:
+
+Wenn Ihre Geschäftstätigkeit Holzmöbel umfasst, könnten Sie wie folgt kodieren:
+
+Artikel-Kodierungs-Übersicht (BEISPIEL)
+
+Die letzten Stellen können der Reihe nach vergeben sein. Wenn Sie sich also den Code "WM304" ansehen, dann wissen Sie, dass es sich um Holzleisten mit einer Länge unter 10cm handelt.
+
+#### Standardisierung
+
+Wenn mehr als eine Person Artikel benennt, kann sich die Art und Weise, wie bezeichnet wird, von Person zu Person unterscheiden. Manchmal vergisst sogar die gleiche Person wie sie einen Artikel bezeichnet hat und erstellt aus diesem Grund einen doppelten Eintrag, z. B. "Holzstück 3mm" und "3mm-Holzstück".
+
+#### Rationalisierung
+
+In der Praxis hat es sich als sinnvoll erwiesen, eine möglichst kleine Anzahl von Artikelvarianten zu haben, so dass möglichst wenig Lagerbestand existiert, die Lagerverwaltung einfacher ist, usw. Wenn Sie ein neues Produkt planen und Sie wissen wollen, ob Sie Rohmateriel oder ein Bauteil schon in anderen Produkten verwenden, helfen Ihnen die Artikelcodes dabei dies schnell herauszufinden.
+
+Wir glauben, dass Ihnen diese kleine Investition dabei helfen wird, Rationalisierungseffekte zu erzielen, wenn Ihre Geschäftstätigkeit zunimmt. Dennoch ist es natürlich in Ordnung, wenn Sie bei wenig Artikeln nicht kodieren.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/article-variants.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/article-variants.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..62722228
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/article-variants.md
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+
+
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+## 4.6.2 Artikelvarianten
+
+Eine Artikelvariante ist eine Version eines Artikels, die sich zum Beispiel durch eine andere Größe oder eine andere Farbe vom eigentlichen Artikel unterscheidet. Ohne Varianten müssten Sie die kleinen, mittleren und großen Versionen eines T-Shirts jeweils als eigenständigen Artikel anlegen. Artikelvarianten versetzen Sie in die Lage, kleine, mittlere und große Versionen des T-Shirts als Abwandlungen des selben Artikels zu verwalten.
+
+Um Artikelvarianten in ERPNext zu verwalten, erstellen Sie einen Artikel und aktivieren in den Artikeldaten den Punkt "Hat Varianten".
+
+Ab diesem Zeitpunkt wird der Artikel dann als "Vorlage" bezeichnet.
+
+Wenn Sie "Hat Varianten" auswählen, erscheint eine Tabelle. Hier spezifizieren Sie die Variantenattribute des Artikels. Für den Fall, dass das Attribut einen numerischen Wert hat, können Sie den Bereich und die Schrittweite angeben.
+
+> Hinweis: Sie können keine Transaktionen zu Vorlagen erstellen.
+
+Um aus einer Vorlage Artikelvarianten zu erstellen, klicken Sie auf "Varianten erstellen".
+
+Um mehr über Voreinstellungen zu Attributen zu erfahren, lesen Sie im Abschnitt "Artikelattribute" nach.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6b4b8b2a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+
+# Artikel
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Ein Artikel ist ein Produkt oder eine Dienstleistung Ihres Unternehmens. Die Bezeichnung Artikel ist genauso anwendbar auf Ihre Kernprodukte wie auch auf Ihr Rohmaterial. Es kann ein Produkt oder eine Dienstleistung sein, welche Sie von Lieferanten kaufen/an Kunden verkaufen. ERPNext versetzt sie in die Lage alle Arten von Artikeln wie Rohmaterial, Unterbeauftragungen, Fertigprodukte, Artikelvarianten und Dienstleistungsartikel zu verwalten.
+ERPNext ist auf die artikelbezogene Verwaltung Ihrer Ver- und Einkäufe optimiert. Wenn Sie sich im Bereich Dienstleistungen befinden, können Sie für jede Dienstleistung, die Sie anbieten, einen eigenen Artikel erstellen. Die Artikelstammdaten zu vervollständigen ist für eine erfolgreiche Einführung von ERPNext ausschlaggebend.
+
+### Artikeleigenschaften
+
+* **Artikelname:** Artikelname ist der tatsächliche Name Ihres Artikels oder Ihrer Dienstleistung.
+* **Artikelcode:** Der Artikelcode ist eine Kurzform um Ihren Artikel zu beschreiben. Wenn Sie sehr wenig Artikel haben, ist es ratsam den Artikelnamen und den Artikelcode gleich zu halten. Das hilft neuen Nutzern dabei, Artikeldetails in allen Transaktionen zu erkennen und einzugeben. Für den Fall, dass Sie sehr viele Artikel mit langen Namen haben, und die Anzahl in die Hunderte geht, ist es ratsam, zu kodieren. Um die Benamung der Artikelcodes zu verstehen, lesen Sie bitte den Bereich "Artikel-Kodierung".
+* **Artikelgruppe:** Artikelgruppe wird verwendet um einen Artikel nach verschiedenen Kriterien zu kategorisieren, wie zum Beispiel Produkte, Rohmaterial, Dienstleistungen, Unterbeauftragungen, Verbrauchsgüter oder alle Artikelgruppen. Erstellen Sie Ihre Standard-Artikelgruppen-Liste unter Lagerbestand > Einstellungen > Artikelgruppenstruktur und stellen Sie diese Option vorein, während Sie die Details zu Ihren neuen Artikeln unter Artikelgruppe eingeben.
+* **Standardmaßeinheit:** Das ist die Standardmaßeinheit, die in Verbindung mit Ihrem Produkt verwendet wird. Hierbei kann es sich um Stückzahl, kg, Meter, usw. handeln. Sie können alle Standardmaßeinheiten, die Ihr Produkt benötigt, unter Einstellungen > Lagerbestand > Einstellungen > Maßeinheit ablegen. Für das Eingeben von neuen Artikeln kann eine Voreinstellung getroffen werden, indem man % drückt um eine Popup-Liste der Standardmaßeinheiten zu erhalten.
+* **Marke:** Wenn Sie mehr als eine Marke haben, speichern Sie diese bitte unter Lagerbestand > Einstellungen > Marke und stellen Sie diese vorein, während Sie neue Artikel erstellen.
+* **Variante:** Eine Artikelvariante ist eine Abwandlung eines Artikels. Um mehr über die Verwaltung von Varianten zu erfahren, lesen Sie bitte "Artikelvarianten".
+
+### Ein Bild hochladen
+Um für Ihr Icon ein Bild hochzuladen, das in allen Transaktionen erscheint, speichern Sie bitte das teilweise ausgefüllte Formular. Nur dann, wenn die Datei abgespeichert wurde, ist die "Hochladen"-Schaltfläche über dem Bildsymbol verwendbar. Klicken Sie auf dieses Symbol und laden Sie das Bild hoch.
+
+### Lagerbestand: Lager- und Bestandseinstellungen
+
+In ERPNext können Sie verschiedene Typen von Lagern einstellen um Ihre unterschiedlichen Artikel zu lagern. Die Auswahl kann aufgrund der Artikeltypen getroffen werden. Das kann ein Artikel des Anlagevermögens sein, ein Lagerartikel oder auch ein Fertigungsartikel.
+
+* **Lagerartikel:** Wenn Sie Lagerartikel dieses Typs in Ihrem Lagerbestand verwalten, erzeugt ERPNext für jede Transaktion dieses Artikels eine Buchung im Lagerhauptbuch.
+* **Standardlager:** Das ist das Lager, welches automatisch bei Ihren Transaktionen ausgewählt wird.
+* **Erlaubter Prozentsatz:** Das ist der Prozentsatz der angibt, wieviel Sie bei einem Artikel überberechnen oder überliefern dürfen. Wenn er nicht vorgegeben ist, wird er aus den globalen Einstellungen übernommen.
+* **Bewertungsmethode:** Es gibt zwei Möglichkeiten den Lagerbestand zu bewerten. FIFO (first in - first out) und Gleitender Durchschnitt. Um dieses Thema besser zu verstehen, lesen Sie bitte "Artikelbewertung, FIFO und Gleitender Durchschnitt".
+
+### Serialisierter und chargenbezogener Lagerbestand
+
+Die Nummerierungen helfen dabei einzelne Artikel oder Chargen individuell nachzuverfolgen. Ebenso können Garantieleistungen und Rückläufe nachverfolgt werden. Für den Fall, dass ein bestimmter Artikel von einem Lieferanten zurück gerufen wird, hilft die Nummer dabei, einzelne Artikel nachzuverfolgen. Das Nummerierungssystem verwaltet weiterhin das Verfalldatum. Bitte beachten Sie, dass Sie Ihre Artikel nicht serialisieren müssen, wenn Sie die Artikel zu Tausenden verkaufen, und sie sehr klein sind, wie z. B. Stifte oder Radiergummis. In der ERPNext-Software müssen Sie die Seriennummer bei bestimmten Buchungen mit angeben. Um Seriennummern zu erstellen, müssen Sie die Seriennummern per Hand in Ihren Buchungen eintragen. Wenn es sich nicht um ein großes und haltbares Verbrauchsgut handelt, es keine Garantie hat und die Möglichkeit eines Rückrufs äußerst gering ist, sollten Sie eine Seriennummerierung vermeiden.
+
+> Wichtig: Sobald Sie einen Artikel als serialisiert oder als Charge oder beides markiert haben, können Sie das nicht mehr ändern, nachdem Sie eine Buchung erstellt haben.
+
+### Diskussion zu serialisiertem Lagerbestand
+
+### Automatische Nachbestellung
+
+* **Meldebestand** bezeichnet eine definierte Menge an Artikeln im Lager, bei der nachbestellt wird.
+* **Nachbestellmenge** bezeichnet die Menge an Artikeln die bestellt werden muss, um einen bestimmtem Lagerbestand zu erreichen.
+* **Mindestbestellmenge** ist die kleinstmögliche Menge, für die eine Materialanfrage / eine Einkaufsbestellung ausgelöst werden kann.
+
+### Artikelsteuer
+
+Diese Einstellungen werden nur dann benötigt, wenn ein bestimmter Artikel einer anderen Besteuerung unterliegt als derjenigen, die im Standard-Steuerkonto hinterlegt ist. Beispiel: Wenn Sie ein Steuerkonto "Umsatzsteuer 19%" haben, und der Artikel, um den es sich dreht, von der Steuer ausgenommen ist, dann wählen Sie "Umsatzsteuer 19%" in der ersten Spalte und stellen als Steuersatz in der zweiten Spalte "0" ein.
+
+Lesen Sie im Abschnitt "Steuern einstellen" weiter, wenn Sie mehr Informationen wünschen.
+
+## Prüfkriterien
+
+* **Kontrolle erforderlich:** Wenn für einen Artikel eine Wareneingangskontrolle (zum Zeitpunkt der Anlieferung durch den Lieferanten) zwingend erforderlich ist, aktivieren Sie "Ja" bei den Einstellungen für "Prüfung erforderlich". Das Sytem stellt sicher, dass eine Qualitätskontrolle vorbereitet und durchgeführt wird bevor ein Kaufbeleg übertragen wird.
+* **Kontrollkriterien:** Wenn eine Qualitätsprüfung für den Artikel vorbereitet wird, dann wird die Vorlage für die Kriterien automatisch in der Tabelle Qualitätskontrolle aktualisiert. Beispiele für Kriterien sind: Gewicht, Länge, Oberfläche usw.
+
+## Einkaufsdetails
+* **Lieferzeit in Tagen:** Die Lieferzeit in Tagen bezeichnet die Anzahl der Tage die benötigt werden bis der Artikel das Lager erreicht.
+* **Standard-Aufwandskonto:** Dies ist das Konto auf dem die Kosten für den Artikel verzeichnet werden.
+* **Standard-Einkaufskostenstelle:** Sie wird verwendet um die Kosten für den Artikel nachzuverfolgen.
+
+## Verkausdetails
+* **Standard-Ertragskonto:** Das hier gewählte Ertragskonto wird automatisch mit der Ausgangsrechung für diesen Artikel verknüpft.
+* **Standard-Vertriebskostenstelle:** Die hier gewählte Kostenstelle wird automatisch mit der Ausgangsrechnung für diesen Artikel verknüpft.
+
+## Fertigung und Webseite
+
+Lesen Sie in den Abschnitten "Fertigung" und "Webseite" nach, um weitere Informationen zu diesen Themen zu erhalten.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f2fbce0c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/articles/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+
+allow-over-delivery-billing-against-sales-order-upto-certain-limit
+auto-creation-of-material-request
+creating-depreciation-for-item
+is-stock-item-field-frozen-in-item-master
+manage-rejected-finished-goods-items
+managing-assets
+managing-batch-wise-inventory
+managing-fractions-in-uom
+opening-stock-balance-entry-for-the-serialized-and-batch-item
+repack-entry
+serial-no-naming
+stock-entry-purpose
+stock-level-report
+track-items-using-barcode
+using-batch-feature-in-stock-entry
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/batch.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/batch.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..39206748
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/batch.md
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+
+# Charge
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Die Funktion Chargenverwaltung in ERPNext versetzt Sie in die Lage, verschiedene Einheiten eines Artikels zu gruppieren und ihnen eine einzigartige Nummer, die man Chargennummer nennt, zuzuweisen.
+
+Die Vorgehensweise, das Lager chargenbasiert zu verwalten, wird hauptsächlich in der pharmazeutischen Industrie angewandt. Medikamenten wird hier chargenbasiert eine eindeutige ID zugewiesen. Das hilft dabei, das Verfallsdatum der in einer bestimmten Charge produzierten Mengen aktuell zu halten und nachzuvollziehen.
+
+> Anmerkung: Um einen Artikel als Chargenartikel zu kennzeichnen, muss in den Artikelstammdaten das Feld "Hat Chargennummer" markiert werden.
+
+Bei jeder für einen Chargenartikel generierten Lagertransaktion (Kaufbeleg, Lieferschein, POS-Rechnung) sollten Sie die Chargennummer des Artikels mit angeben. Um eine neue Chargennummer für einen Artikel zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Lagerbestand > Dokumente > Charge > Neu
+
+Die Chargenstammdaten werden vor der Ausfertigung des Kaufbelegs erstellt. Somit erstellen Sie immer dann, wenn für einen Chargenartikel ein Kaufbeleg oder ein Produktionsauftrag ausgegeben werden, zuerst die Chargennummer des Artikels und wählen diese dann im Kaufbeleg oder im Produktionsauftrag aus.
+
+
+
+> Anmerkung: Bei Lagertransaktionen werden die Chargen-IDs basierend auf dem Code, dem Lager, dem Verfallsdatum der Charge (verglichen mit dem Veröffentlichungsdatum der Transaktion) und der aktuellen Menge im Lager gefiltert.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/delivery-note.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/delivery-note.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f9452722
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/delivery-note.md
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+
+# Lieferschein
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Ein Lieferschein wird dann erstellt, wenn ein Versand vom Lager der Firma statt findet.
+
+Normalerweise wird eine Kopie des Lieferscheins der Sendung beigelegt. Der Lieferschein beinhaltet die Auflistung der Artikel, die versendet werden, und aktualisiert den Lagerbestand.
+
+Die Buchung zum Lieferschein ist derjenigen zum Kaufbeleg sehr ähnlich. Sie können einen neuen Lieferschein erstellen über:
+
+> Lagerbestand > Dokumente > Lieferschein > Neu
+
+oder aber über eine "übertragene" Kundenbestellung (die noch nicht versandt wurde) indem Sie auf "Lieferschein erstellen" klicken.
+
+
+
+Sie können die Details auch aus einer noch nicht gelieferten Kundenbestellung "herausziehen".
+
+Sie werden bemerken, dass alle Informationen über nicht gelieferte Artikel und andere Details aus der Kundenbestellung übernommen werden.
+
+### Pakete oder Artikel mit Produkt-Bundles versenden
+
+Wenn Sie Artikel, die ein [Produkt-Bundle]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/selling/setup/product-bundle.html), ERPNext will automatically beinhalten, versenden, erstellt Ihnen ERPNext automatisch eine Tabelle "Packliste" basierend auf den Unterartikeln dieses Artikels.
+
+Wenn Ihre Artikel serialisiert sind, dann müssen Sie für Artikel vom Typ Produkt-Bundle die Seriennummer in der Tabelle "Packliste" aktualisieren.
+
+### Artikel für Containerversand verpacken
+
+Wenn Sie per Containerversand oder nach Gewicht versenden, können Sie die Packliste verwenden um Ihren Lieferschein in kleinere Einheiten aufzuteilen. Um eine Packliste zu erstellen gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Lagerbestand > Werkzeuge > Packzettel > Neu
+
+Sie können für Ihren Lieferschein mehrere Packlisten erstellen und ERPNext stellt sicher dass die Mengenangaben in der Packliste nicht die Mengen im Lieferschein übersteigen.
+
+---
+
+### Frage: Wie druckt man ohne die Angabe der Stückzahl/Menge aus?
+
+Wenn Sie Ihre Lieferscheine ohne Mengenangabe ausdrucken wollen (das ist dann sinnvoll, wenn Sie Artikel mit hohem Wert versenden), kreuzen Sie "Ohne Mengenangabe ausdrucken" im Bereich "Weitere Informationen" an.
+
+### Frage: Was passiert, wenn der Lieferschein "übertragen" wurde?
+
+Für jeden Artikel wird eine Buchung im Lagerhauptbuch erstellt und der Lagerbestand wird aktualisiert. Ebenfalls wird die Ausstehende Menge im Kundenauftrag (sofern zutreffend) aktualisiert.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2266c8dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+
+# Lager
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Die meisten kleinen Unternehmen, die mit physischen Waren handeln, investieren einen großen Teil ihres Kapitals in Lagerbestände.
+
+### Materialfluß
+
+Es gibt drei Haupttypen von Buchungen:
+
+* Kaufbeleg: Artikel die das Unternehmen von Lieferanten aufgrund einer Einkaufsbestellung erhält.
+* Lagerbuchung: Artikel, die von einem Lager in ein anderes Lager übertragen werden.
+* Lieferschein: Artikel, die an Kunden versandt wurden.
+
+### Wie verfolgt ERPNext Lagerbewegungen und Lagerstände?
+
+Das Lager abzubilden bedeutet nicht nur, Mengen zu addieren und subtrahieren. Schwierigkeiten treten dann auf, wenn:
+
+* Zurückdatierte (vergangene) Buchungen getätigt/geändert werden: Dies wirkt sich auf zukünftige Lagerstände aus und könnte zu negativen Beständen führen.
+* Das Lager basierend auf der FIFO(Firts-in-first-out)-Methode bewertet werden soll: ERPNext benötigt eine Reihenfolge aller Transaktionen, um den exakten Wert Ihrer Artikel ermitteln zu können.
+* Lagerberichte zu einem beliebigen Zeitpunkt in der Vergangenheit benötigt werden: Wenn Sie für Artikel X zu einem Zeitpunkt Y die Menge/den Wert in ihrem Lager nachvollziehen müssen.
+
+Um dies umzusetzen, sammelt ERPNext alle Bestandstransaktionen in einer Tabelle, die als Lagerhauptbuch bezeichnet wird. Alle Kaufbelege, Lagerbuchungen und Lieferscheine aktualisieren diese Tabelle.
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b89abe10
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+material-request
+stock-entry
+delivery-note
+purchase-receipt
+installation-note
+item
+warehouse
+serial-no
+batch
+projected-quantity
+accounting-of-inventory-stock
+tools
+setup
+sales-return
+purchase-return
+articles
+opening-stock
+stock-how-to
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/installation-note.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/installation-note.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a54e5c97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/installation-note.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
+# Installationshinweis
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Sie können einen Installationshinweis dazu benutzen, die Installation eines Artikels mit Seriennummer aufzuzeichnen.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/material-request.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/material-request.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2c9e9c00
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/material-request.md
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+
+# Materialanfrage
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Eine Materialanfrage ist ein einfaches Dokument, welches einen Bedarf an Artikeln (Produkte oder Dienstleistungen) für einen bestimmten Zweck erfasst.
+
+
+
+Um eine Materialanfrage manuell zu erstellen, gehen Sie bitte zu:
+
+> Lagerbestand > Dokumente > Materialanfrage > Neu
+
+### Materialanfrage erstellen
+
+
+
+Eine Materialanfrage kann auf folgende Arten erstellt werden:
+
+* Automatisch aus einem Kundenauftrag heraus.
+* Automatisch, wenn die projizierte Menge eines Artikels in den Lagern einen bestimmten Bestand erreicht.
+* Automatisch aus einer Stückliste heraus, wenn Sie das Modul "Produktionsplanung" benutzen, um Ihre Fertigungsaktivitäten zu planen.
+* Wenn Ihre Artikel Bestandsposten sind, müssen Sie überdies das Lager angeben, auf welches diese Artikel geliefert werden sollen. Das hilft dabei die [projizierte Menge]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/stock/projected-quantity.html) für diesen Artikel im Auge zu behalten.
+
+Es gibt folgende Typen von Materialanfragen:
+
+* Einkauf - Wenn das angefragte Material eingekauft werden muss.
+* Materialtransfer - Wenn das angefragte Material von einem Lager auf ein anderes Lager übertragen werden muss.
+* Materialausgabe - Wenn das angefragte Material ausgegeben werden soll.
+
+> Info: Eine Materialanfrage ist nicht zwingend erforderlich. Sie ist ideal, wenn Sie ihren Einkauf zentralisiert haben, damit Sie diese Anfragen von verschiedenen Niederlassungen sammeln können.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/projected-quantity.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/projected-quantity.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..20e0d31a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/projected-quantity.md
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+
+# Projizierte Menge
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Die projizierte Menge ist der Lagerbestand der für einen bestimmten Artikel vorhergesagt wird, basierend auf dem aktuellen Lagerbestand und anderen Bedarfen. Es handelt sich dabei um den Bruttobestand und berücksichtig Angebot und Nachfrage aus der Vergangenheit, die mit in den Planungsprozess einbezogen werden.
+
+Der projizierte Lagerbestand wird vom Planungssystem verwendet um den Nachbestellpunkt darzustellen und die Nachbestellmenge festzulegen. Die projizierte Menge wird vom Planungssystem verwendet um Sicherheitsbestände zu markieren. Diese Stände werden aufrechterhalten um unerwartete Nachfragemengen abfedern zu können.
+
+Eine strikte Kontrolle des projizierten Lagerbestandes ist entscheidend um Engpässe vorherzusagen und die richtige Bestellmenge kalkulieren zu können.
+
+
+
+> Projizierte Menge = Momentan vorhandene Menge + Geplante Menge + Angefragte Menge + Bestellte Menge - Reservierte Menge
+
+* **Momentan vorhande Menge:** Menge die im Lager verfügbar ist.
+* **Geplante Menge:** Menge für die ein Fertigungsauftrag ausgegeben wurde, der aber noch auf die Fertigung wartet.
+* **Angefragte Menge:** Menge die vom Einkauf angefragt, aber noch nicht bestellt wurde.
+* **Bestellte Menge:** Bei Lieferanten bestellte Menge, die aber noch nicht im Lager eingetroffen ist.
+* **Reservierte Menge:** Von Kunden bestellte Menge, die noch nicht ausgeliefert wurde.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/purchase-receipt.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/purchase-receipt.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..842d5781
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/purchase-receipt.md
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+
+# Kaufbeleg
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Kaufbelege werden erstellt, wenn Sie Material von einem Lieferanten annehmen, normalerweise aufgrund einer Einkaufsbestellung.
+
+Sie können Kaufbelege auch direkt annehmen (Setzen Sie hierfür "Kaufbeleg notwendig" in den Einkaufs-Einstellungen auf "Nein").
+
+Sie können einen Kaufbeleg direkt erstellen über:
+
+> Lagerbestand > Dokumente > Kaufbeleg > Neu
+
+oder aus einer "übertragenen" Einkaufsbestellung heraus, in dem Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Kaufbeleg erstellen" klicken.
+
+
+
+### Ausschuss
+
+Im Kaufbeleg wird erwartet, dass Sie eingeben ob das gesamte erhaltene Material eine annehmbare Qualität aufweist (für den Fall, dass eine Wareneingangsprüfung statt findet). Wenn Sie Beanstandungen haben, müssen Sie die Spalte "Menge Ausschuss" in der Tabelle der Artikel aktualisieren.
+
+Wenn Sie aussortieren, müssen Sie ein Ausschusslager angeben, mit dem Sie angeben, wo Sie die aussortierten Artikel lagern.
+
+### Qualitätsprüfung
+
+Wenn für bestimmte Artikel eine Qualitätsprüfungen zwingend erforderlich sind (wenn Sie das z. B. so in den Artikelstammdaten angegeben haben), müssen Sie die Spalte Qualitätsprüfungsnummer (QA Nr) aktualisieren. Das System erlaubt Ihnen ein "Übertragen" des Kaufbelegs nur dann, wenn Sie die Qualitätsprüfungsnummer aktualisieren.
+
+### Umwandlung von Standardmaßeinheiten
+
+Wenn die Standardmaßeinheit der Einkaufsbestellung für einen Artikel nicht gleich derjenigen des Lagers ist, müssen Sie den Standardmaßeinheit-Umrechnungsfaktor angeben.
+
+### Währungsumrechnung
+
+Da sich der eingegangene Artikel auf den Wert des Lagerbestandes auswirkt, ist es wichtig den Wert des Artikels in Ihre Basiswährung umzurechnen, wenn Sie ihn in einer anderen Währung bestellt haben. Sie müssen (sofern zutreffend) einen Währungsumrechnungsfaktor eingeben.
+
+### Steuern und Bewertung
+
+Einige Ihrer Steuern und Gebühren können sich auf den Wert Ihres Artikels auswirken. Zum Beispiel: Eine Steuer wird möglicherweise nicht zum Wert Ihres Artikels hinzugerechnet, weil Sie beim Verkauf des Artikels die Steuer aufrechnen müssen. Aus diesem Grund sollten Sie sicher stellen, dass in der Tabelle "Steuern und Gebühren" alle Steuern für eine angemessene Bewertung korrekt eingetragen sind
+
+### Seriennummern und Chargen
+
+Wenn Ihr Artiel serialisiert ist oder als Charge verwaltet wird, müssen Sie die Seriennummer und die Charge in der Artikeltabelle eingeben. Sie dürfen verschiedene Seriennummern in eine Zeile eingeben (jede in ein gesondertes Feld) und Sie müssen dieselbe Anzahl an Seriennummern eingeben wie es Artikel gibt. Ebenfalls müssen Sie die Chargennummer jeweils in ein gesondertes Feld eingeben.
+
+---
+
+### Was passiert, wenn der Kaufbeleg "übertragen" wurde?
+
+Für jeden Artikel wird eine Buchung im Lagerhauptbuch vorgenommen. Diese fügt dem Lager die akzeptierte Menge des Artikels zu. Wenn Sie Ausschuss haben, wird für jeden Ausschuss eine Buchung im Lagerhauptbuch erstellt. Die "Offene Menge" wird in der Einkaufsbestellung verzeichnet.
+
+---
+
+### Wie erhöht man den Wert eines Artikels nach Verbuchung des Kaufbelegs?
+
+Manchmal weis man bestimmte Aufwendungen, die den Wert eines eingekauften Artikels erhöhen, erst nach einiger Zeit. Ein häufiges Beispiel ist folgendes: Wenn Sie Artikel importieren wissen Sie den Zollbetrag erst dann, wenn Ihnen der Abwicklungs-Agent eine Rechnung schickt. Wenn Sie diese Kosten den gekauften Artikeln hinzufügen wollen, müssem Sie den Einstandskosten-Assistenten benutzen. Warum Einstandskosten? Weil sie die Gebühren beinhalten, die Sie bezahlt haben, wenn die Ware in Ihren Besitz gelangt.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/purchase-return.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/purchase-return.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..76b9b51c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/purchase-return.md
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+
+# Lieferantenreklamation
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+In ERPNext gibt es eine Option für Produkte, die zurück zum Lieferanten geschickt werden müssen. Die Gründe dafür können vielfältig sein, z. B. defekte Waren, nicht ausreichende Qualität, der Käufer braucht die Ware nicht (mehr), usw.
+
+Sie können eine Lieferantenreklamation erstellen indem Sie ganz einfach einen Kaufbeleg mit negativer Menge erstellen.
+
+Öffnen Sie hierzu zuerst die ursprüngliche Eingangsrechnung zu der der Lieferant die Artikel geliefert hat.
+
+
+
+Klicken Sie dann auf "Lieferantenreklamation erstellen", dies öffnet einen neuen Kaufbeleg bei dem "Ist Reklamation" markiert ist, und bei dem die Artikel mit negativer Menge aufgeführt sind.
+
+
+
+Bei der Ausgabe eines Reklamations-Kaufbelegs vermindert das System die Menge des Artikels auf dem entsprechenden Lager. Um einen korrekten Lagerwert zu erhalten, verändert sich der Lagersaldo entsprechend dem Einkaufspreis des zurückgesendeten Artikels.
+
+
+
+Wenn die Ständige Inventur aktiviert wurde, verbucht das System weiterhin Buchungssätze zum Lagerkonto um den Lagersaldo mit dem Lagerbestand des Lagerbuchs zu synchronisieren.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/sales-return.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/sales-return.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bfba6f02
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/sales-return.md
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+
+# Kundenreklamationen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Dass verkaufte Produkte zurück gesendet werden ist in der Wirtschaft üblich. Gründe für die Rücksendung durch den Kunden sind Qualitätsmängel, verspätete Lieferung oder auch anderes.
+
+In ERPNext können Sie eine Kundenreklamation erstellen, indem Sie ganz einfach einen Lieferschein/eine Ausgangsrechnung mit negativer Menge erstellen.
+
+Öffnen Sie dazu zuerst den Lieferschein/die Ausgangsrechnung zu dem/der der Kunde einen Artikel zurück sendet.
+
+
+
+Klicken Sie dann auf "Kundenreklamation erstellen", das öffnet einen neuen Lieferschein, bei dem "Ist Reklamation" aktiviert ist, und die Artikel und Steuern mit negativem Betrag angezeigt werden.
+Sie können die Reklamation auch über die Originalausgangsrechnung erstellen. Um Material mit einer Gutschrift zurück zu geben, markieren Sie die Option "Lager aktualisieren" in der Reklamationsrechnung.
+
+
+
+Bei der Ausgabe eines Rücksendelieferscheins / einer Reklamationsrechnung erhöht das System den Lagerbestand im entsprechenden Lager. Um den richtigen Lagerwert zu erhalten erhöht sich der Lagerbestand um den Wert des ursprünglichen Einkaufspreises des zurückgeschickten Artikels.
+
+
+
+Für den Fall einer Reklamationsrechnung erhält das Kundenkonto eine Gutschrift und die damit verknüpften Konten für Erträge und Steuern werden belastet.
+Wenn die ständige Inventur aktiviert ist, erstellt das System auch Buchungen für das Lagerkonto um den Kontostand des Lagers mit dem Lagerbuch zu synchronisieren.
+
+
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/serial-no.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/serial-no.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3ad1c4d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/serial-no.md
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+
+# Seriennummer
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Wie bereits im Abschnitt **Artikel** besprochen, wird ein Datensatz **Seriennummer** (S/N) für jede Menge eines Artikels vorgehalten, wenn ein **Artikel serialisiert** wird. Diese Information ist hilfreich um den Standort der Seriennummer nachzuvollziehen, wenn es um Garantiethemen geht und um Informationen zur Lebensdauer (Verfallsdatum).
+
+**Seriennummern** sind auch dann nützlich, wenn es darum geht, das Anlagevermögen zu verwalten. Zudem können **Wartungspläne** unter Zuhilfenahme von Seriennummern erstellt werden um Wartungsarbeiten für Anlagen zu planen und zu terminieren (sofern sie Wartung benötigen).
+
+Sie können auch nachvollziehen von welchem **Lieferanten** Sie eine bestimmte **Seriennummer** gekauft haben und welchem **Kunden** Sie diese verkauft haben. Der Status der **Seriennummer** verrät Ihnen den aktuellen Lagerbestands-Status.
+
+Wenn Ihr Artikel serialisiert ist, müssen Sie die Seriennummern in der entsprechenden Spalte eintragen, jede in eine neue Zeile. Sie können einzelne Einheiten von serialisierten Artikeln über die Seriennummern verwalten.
+
+### Seriennummern und Lagerbestand
+
+Der Lagerbestand eines Artikels kann nur dann beeinflusst werden, wenn die Seriennummer mit Hilfe einer Lagertransaktion (Lagerbuchung, Kaufbeleg, Lieferschein, Ausgangsrechnung) übertragen wird. Wenn eine neue Seriennummer direkt erstellt wird, kann der Lagerort nicht eingestellt werden.
+
+
+
+* Der Status wird aufgrund der Lagerbuchung eingestellt.
+* Nur Seriennummern mit dem Status "Verfügbar" können geliefert werden.
+* Seriennummern können automatisch aus einer Lagerbuchung oder aus einem Kaufbeleg heraus erstellt werden. Wenn Sie "Seriennummer" in der Spalte "Seriennummer" aktivieren, werden diese Seriennummern automatisch erstellt.
+* Wenn in den Artikelstammdaten "Hat Seriennummer" aktiviert wird, können Sie die Spalte "Seriennummer" in der Lagerbuchung/im Kaufbeleg leer lassen und die Seriennummern werden automatisch aus dieser Serie heraus erstellt.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3b7c573d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
+# Einrichtung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b21c4f92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+stock-settings
+item-group
+item-attribute
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/item-attribute.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/item-attribute.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..95504014
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/item-attribute.md
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+
+# Artikelattribute
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Sie können Attribute und Attributwerte für Ihre Artikelvarianten hier auswählen.
+
+
+
+### Nicht-numerische Attribute
+
+* Für nicht-numerische Attribute definieren Sie Attributwerte und deren Abkürzungen in der Tabelle Attributwerte.
+
+
+
+### Numerische Attribute
+
+* Wenn Ihr Attribut numerisch ist, wählen Sie numerische Werte.
+* Geben Sie den Bereich an und die Schrittweite.
+
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/item-group.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/item-group.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5626c2aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/item-group.md
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+# Artikelgruppe
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Die Artikelgruppe ist die Klassifikationskategorie. Ordnen Sie ein Produkt abhängig von seiner Art in einen entsprechenden Bereich ein. Wenn das Produkt dienstleistungsorientiert ist, ordnen Sie es unter dem Hauptpunkt Dienstleistung ein. Wenn das Produkt als Rohmaterial verwendet wird, müssen Sie es in der Kategorie Rohmaterial einordnen. Für den Fall, dass es sich bei dem Produkt um reine Handelsware handelt, können Sie es im Bereich Handelsware einordnen.
+
+
+
+### Eine Artikelgruppe erstellen
+
+* Wählen Sie eine Artikelgruppe aus unter der Sie eine Artikelgruppe erstellen wollen.
+* Klicken Sie auf "Unterpunkt hinzufügen".
+
+
+
+### Eine Artikelgruppe löschen
+* Wählen Sie die zu löschende Artikelgruppe aus.
+* Klicken Sie auf "Löschen"
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/stock-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/stock-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5bd75c60
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/setup/stock-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Lagereinstellungen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Sie können Standardeinstellungen für Ihre mit dem Lager verbundenen Transaktionen hier voreinstellen.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/stock-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/stock-entry.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..659ebb21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/stock-entry.md
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+
+# Lagerbuchung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Eine Lagerbuchung ist ein einfaches Dokument, welches Sie Lagerbewegungen aus einem Lager heraus, in ein Lager hinein oder zwischen Lagern aufzeichnen lässt.
+
+Wenn Sie eine Lagerbuchung erstellen möchten, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Lagerbestand > Dokumente > Lagerbuchung > Neu
+
+
+
+Lagerbuchungen können aus folgenden Gründen erstellt werden:
+
+* Materialentnahme - Wenn das Material ausgegeben wird (ausgehendes Material).
+* Materialannahme - Wenn das Material angenommen wird (eingehendes Material).
+* Materialübertrag - Wenn das Material von einem Lager in ein anders Lager übertragen wird.
+* Materialübertrag für Herstellung - Wann das Material in den Fertigungsprozess übertragen wird.
+* Herstellung - Wenn das Material von einem Fertigungs-/Produktionsarbeitsgang empfangen wird.
+* Umpacken - Wenn der/die Originalartikel zu einem neuen Artikel verpackt wird/werden.
+* Zulieferer - Wenn das Material aufgrund einer Untervergabe ausgegeben wird.
+
+In einer Lagerbuchung müssen Sie die Artikelliste mit all Ihren Transaktionen aktualisieren. Für jede Zeile müssen Sie ein Ausgangslager oder ein Eingangslager oder beides eingeben (wenn Sie eine Bewegung erfassen).
+
+#### Zusätzliche Kosten
+
+Wenn die Lagerbuchung eine Eingangsbuchung ist, d. h. wenn ein beliebiger Artikel an einem Ziellager angenommen wird, können Sie zusätzliche Kosten erfassen (wie Versandgebühren, Zollgebühren, Betriebskosten, usw.), die mit dem Prozess verbunden sind. Die Zusatzkosten werden berücksichtigt, um den Wert des Artikels zu kalkulieren.
+
+Um Zusatzkosten hinzuzufügen, geben Sie die Beschreibung und den Betrag der Kosten in die Tabelle Zusatzkosten ein.
+
+
+
+Die hinzugefügten Zusatzkosten werden basierend auf dem Grundwert der Artikel proportional auf die erhaltenen Artikel verteilt. Dann werden die verteilten Zusatzkosten zum Grundpreis hinzugerechnet, um den Wert neu zu berechnen.
+
+
+
+Wenn die laufende Inventur aktiviert ist, werden Zusatzkosten auf das Konto "Aufwendungen im Wert beinhaltet" gebucht.
+
+
+> Hinweis: Um den Lagerbestand über eine Tabellenkalkulation zu aktualisieren, bitte unter Lagerabgleich nachlesen.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d9c3cb9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
+# Werkzeuge
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3aca9b75
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+packing-slip
+quality-inspection
+landed-cost-voucher
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/landed-cost-voucher.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/landed-cost-voucher.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d6c590b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/landed-cost-voucher.md
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+
+# Einstandskostenbeleg
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Die Einstandskosten sind der Gesamtbetrag aller Kosten eines Produktes bis es die Tür des Käufers erreicht. Die Einstandskosten umfassen die Originalkosten des Produktes, alle Versandkosten, Zölle, Steuern, Versicherung und Gebühren für Währungsumrechung usw. Es kann sein, dass nicht in jeder Sendung alle diese Komponenten anwendbar sind, aber die zutreffenden Komponenten müssen als Teil der Einstandskosten berücksichtigt werden.
+
+> Um Einstandskosten besser verstehen zu können, lassen Sie uns ein Beispiel aus dem täglichen Leben begutachten. Sie müssen eine neue Waschmaschine für Ihre Wohnung kaufen. Bevor Sie den tatsächlichen Kauf tätigen sehen Sie sich normalerweise ein wenig um, um den besten Preis heraus zu finden. In diesem Prozess haben Sie sicherlich schon oft ein besseres Angebot von einem Geschäft gefunden, das aber weit weg ist. Deshalb sollten Sie also auch die Versandkosten berücksichtigen, wenn Sie bei diesem Geschäft kaufen. Die Gesamtkosten inklusive der Transportkosten könnten höher liegen als der Preis, den Sie im nahegelegenen Laden erhalten. In diesem Fall werden Sie sich wahrscheinlich für den nähesten Laden entscheiden, da die Einstandskosten des Artikels im nahegelegenen Geschäft günstiger sind.
+
+In ähnlicher Art und Weise, ist es sehr wichtig Einstandskosten eines Artikels/Produkts zu identifizieren, weil es dabei hilft den Verkaufspreis dieses Artikels zu bestimmen und sich auf die Profitabilität des Unternehmens auswirkt. Folglich sollten alle zutreffenden Einstandskosten in der Artikelbewertung mit einfliessen.
+
+In Bezugnahme auf die [Third-Party Logistikstudie](http://www.3plstudy.com/) gaben nur 45% der Befragten an, dass Sie die Einstandskosten intensiv nutzen. Der Hauptgrund, warum die Einstandskosten nicht berücksichtigt werden, sind, dass die notwendigen Daten nicht verfügbar sind (49%), es an passenden Werkzeugen fehlt (48%), nicht ausreichend Zeit zur Verfügung steht (31%) und dass nicht klar ist, wie die Einstandskosten behandelt werden sollen (27%).
+
+### Einstandskosten über den Kaufbeleg
+
+In ERPNext können Sie die mit den Einstandskosten verbundenen Abgaben über die Tabelle "Steuern und Abgaben" hinzufügen, wenn Sie einen Kaufbeleg erstellen. Dabei sollten Sie zum Hinzufügen dieser Abgaben die Einstellung "Gesamtsumme und Wert" oder "Bewertung" verwenden. Abgaben, die demselben Lieferanten gezahlt werden müssen, bei dem Sie eingekauft haben, sollten mit "Gesamtsumme und Bewertung" markiert werden. Im anderen Fall, wenn Abgaben an eine 3. Partei zu zahlen sind, sollten Sie mit "Bewertung" markiert werden. Bei der Ausgabe des Kaufbelegs kalkuliert das System die Einstandskosten aller Artikel und berücksichtigt dabei diese Abgabe, und die Einstandskosten werden bei der Berechnung der Artikelwerte berücksichtigt (basierend auf der FIFO-Methode bzw. der Methode des Gleitenden Durchschnitts).
+
+In der Realität aber kann es sein, dass wir beim Erstellen des Kaufbelegs nicht alle für die Einstandskosten anzuwendenden Abgaben kennen. Der Transporteur kann die Rechnung nach einem Monat senden, aber man kann nicht bis dahin mit dem Buchen des Kaufbeleges warten. Unternehmen, die ihre Produkte/Teile importieren, zahlen einen großen Betrag an Zöllen. Und normalerweise bekommen Sie Rechnungen vom Zollamt erst nach einiger Zeit. In diesen Fällen werden Einstandskostenbelege sympathisch, weil sie Ihnen erlauben diese zusätzlichen Abgaben an einem späteren Zeitpunkt hinzuzufügen und die Einstandskosten der gekauften Artikel zu aktualisieren.
+
+### Einstandskostenbeleg
+
+Sie können die Einstandskosten an jedem zukünftigen Zeitpunkt über einen Einstandskostenbeleg aktualisieren.
+
+> Lagerbestand > Werkzeuge > Beleg über Einstandskosten
+
+Im Dokument können Sie verschiedene Kaufbelege auswählen und alle Artikel daraus abrufen. Dann sollten Sie zutreffende Abgaben aus der Tabelle "Steuern und Abgaben" hinzufügen. Die hinzugefügten Abgaben werden proportional auf die Artikel aufgeteilt, basierend auf ihrem Wert.
+
+
+
+### Was passiert bei der Ausgabe?
+
+1. Bei der Ausgabe des Einstandskostenbelegs werden die zutreffenden Einstandskosten in der Artikelliste des Kaufbelegs aktualisiert.
+2. Die Bewertung der Artikel wird basierend auf den neuen Einstandskosten neu berechnet.
+3. Wenn Sie die Ständige Inventur nutzen, verbucht das System Buchungen im Hauptbuch um den Lagerbestand zu korrigieren. Es belastet (erhöht) das Konto des zugehörigen Lagers und entlastet (erniedrigt) das Konto "Ausgaben in Bewertung eingerechnet". Wenn Artikel schon geliefert wurden, wurden die Selbstkosten zur alten Bewertung verbucht. Daher werden Hauptbuch-Buchungen erneut für alle zukünftigen ausgehenden Buchungen verbundener Artikel erstellt um den Selbstkosten-Betrag zu korrigieren.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/packing-slip.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/packing-slip.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..41b65093
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/packing-slip.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Packzettel
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Ein Packzettel ist ein Dokument, welches die Artikel einer Sendung auflistet. Normalerweise wird er den gelieferten Waren beigelegt. Beim Versand eines Produktes wird ein Entwurf für einen Lieferschein erstellt. Sie können aus diesem Lieferschein (Entwurf) einen Packzettel erstellen.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/quality-inspection.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/quality-inspection.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c0f00986
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/quality-inspection.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+
+# Qualitätsprüfung
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+In ERPNext können Sie eingehende und ausgehende Produkte für eine Qualitätsprüfung markieren. Um diese Funktion in ERPNext zu aktivieren, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Lagerbestand > Werkzeuge > Qualitätsprüfung > Neu
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/uom-replacement-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/uom-replacement-tool.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d02b85fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/tools/uom-replacement-tool.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Werkzeug zum Austausch der Lagermaßeinheit
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Dieses Werkzeug hilft Ihnen dabei die Maßeinheit eines existierenden Artikels auszutauschen.
+
+Sie müssen einen Artikel auswählen, das System holt sich dabei die Maßeinheit dieses Artikels. Dann können Sie die neue Maßeinheit für diesen Artikel auswählen und den Umrechnungsfaktor definieren.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/warehouse.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/warehouse.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b4067951
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/stock/warehouse.md
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+
+# Lager
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Ein Lager ist ein geschäftlich genutztes Gebäude zum Lagern von Waren. Lager werden von Herstellern, Importeuren, Exporteuren, Großhändlern, Transporteuren, vom Zoll, usw. genutzt. Es handelt sich normalerweise um große, flache Gebäude in Industriegebieten von Städten und Ortschaften. Meistens verfügen sie über Ladestationen um Waren auf LKWs zu verladen und sie aus LKWs zu entladen.
+
+Um zum Bereich "Lager" zu gelangen, klicken Sie auf "Lagerbestand" und gehen Sie unter "Dokumente" auf "Lager". Sie können auch über das Modul "Einstellungen" gehen und auf "Lagerbestand" und "Lager-Einstellungen" klicken.
+
+> Lagerbestand > Einstellungen > Lager > Neu
+
+
+
+In ERPNext muss jedes Lager einer festen Firma zugeordnet sein, um einen unternehmensbezogenen Lagerbestand zu erhalten. Die Lager werden mit den ihnen zugeordneten Firmenkürzeln abgespeichert. Dies erleichtert es auf einen Blick herauszufinden, welches Lager zu welcher Firma gehört.
+
+Sie können für diese Lager Benutzereinschränkungen mit einstellen. Wenn Sie nicht möchten, dass ein bestimmter Benutzer mit einem bestimmten Lager arbeiten kann, können Sie diesen Benutzer vom Zugriff auf das Lager ausschliessen.
+
+### Lager verschmelzen
+
+Bei der täglichen Arbeit kommt es vor, dass fälschlicherweise doppelte Einträge erstellt werden, was zu doppelten Lagern führt. Doppelte Datensätze können zu einem einzigen Lagerort verschmolzen werden. Wählen Sie hierzu aus der Kopfmenüleiste des Systems das Menü "Datei" aus. Wählen Sie "Umbenennen" und geben Sie das richtige Lager ein, drücken Sie danach die Schaltfläche "Verschmelzen". Das System ersetzt in allen Transaktionen alle falschen Lagereinträge durch das richtige Lager. Weiterhin wird die verfügbare Menge (tatsächliche Menge, reservierte Menge, bestellte Menge, usw.) aller Artikel im doppelt vorhandenen Lager auf das richtige Lager übertragen. Löschen Sie nach dem Abschluß der Verschmelzung das doppelte Lager.
+
+> Hinweis: ERPNext berechnet den Lagerbestand für jede mögliche Kombination aus Artikel und Lager. Aus diesem Grund können Sie sich für jeden beliebigen Artikel den Lagerbestand in einem bestimmten Lager zu einem bestimmten Datum anzeigen lassen.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7b52f842
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+
+# Support
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Guter Kundensupport und Wartung sind das Herzstück jeden erfolgreichen kleineren Geschäftes. ERPNext stellt Ihnen Werkzeuge zur Verfügung um alle eingehenden Anfragen und Sorgen Ihrer Kunden so zu erfassen, dass Sie schnell reagieren können. Die Datenbank Ihrer eingehenden Anfragen wird Ihnen auch dabei helfen festzustellen, wo die größten Möglichkeiten für Verbesserungen bestehen.
+
+In diesem Modul können Sie eingehende Supportanfragen über Supporttickets abwickeln. Sie können somit auch Kundenanfragen zu bestimmten Seriennummern im Auge behalten und diese basierend auf der Garantie und anderen Informationen beantworten. Weiterhin können Sie Wartungspläne für Seriennummern erstellen und Wartungsbesuche bei Ihren Kunden aufzeichnen.
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..eaff69e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+issue
+warranty-claim
+maintenance-visit
+maintenance-schedule
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/issue.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/issue.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8a44a824
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/issue.md
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+
+# Fall
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Bei einem Fall handelt es ich um eine eingehende Nachricht vom Kunden, normalerweise per Email oder aus der Kontaktschnittstelle Ihrer Webseite (Um das Supportticket vollständig in Ihre Emails einzubinden, lesen Sie bitte bei "Email-Einstellungen" nach).
+
+> Tipp: Eine eigens eingerichtete Email-Adresse für Supportanfragen ist eine gute Möglichkeit um per Email eingehende Anfragen zu handhaben. Beispiel: Sie können Supportanfragen über support@erpnext.com an ERPNext senden und es werden automatisch im Frappe-System Einträge erstellt.
+
+> Support > Dokumente > Anfrage > Neu
+
+
+
+### Gesprächsaufzeichnung
+
+Wenn eine neue E-Mail aus Ihrer Mailbox geöffnet wird, wird ein neuer Datensatz für die Anfrage erstellt und eine automatische Antwort an den Absender verschickt, in der die Nummer des Supporttickets enthalten ist. Der Absender kann dann zusätzliche Informationen an diese Adresse schicken. Alle weiteren diese Fallnummer betreffenden E-Mails werden dann dieser Anfrage zugeordnet. Der Absender kann auch Anhänge mit versenden.
+
+Die Anfrage verwaltet alle E-Mails die für diesen Fall zurück gesendet und empfangen werden im System, so dass Sie nachvollziehen können, was zwischen dem Absender und der antwortenden Person besprochen wurde.
+
+### Status
+
+Wenn eine neue Anfrage erstellt wurde, ist ihr Status "offen", wenn geantwortet wurde, ändert sich der Status auf "wartet auf Antwort". Wenn der Absender wiederum zurückantwortet erscheint als Status wieder "offen".
+
+### Abschliessen
+
+Sie können den Fall einerseits manuell schliessen, indem Sie in der Werkzeugleiste auf "Ticket schliessen" klicken, oder wenn der Status "wartet auf Antwort ist. Anderenfalls schliesst der Fall automatisch, Wenn der Absender nicht innerhalb von 7 Tagen antwortet.
+
+### Zuordnung
+
+Sie können die Anfrage jemandem zuordnen, indem Sie die Einstellung für "Zugeordnet zu" in der rechten Seitenleiste verwenden. Dies erstellt für den eingestellten Benutzer eine neue ToDo-Aufgabe und schickt ihm eine Nachricht, in der er auf die neue Anfrage hingewiesen wird.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/maintenance-schedule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/maintenance-schedule.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1ae71a03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/maintenance-schedule.md
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+
+# Wartungsplan
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Alle Maschinen benötigen regalmäßige Wartung, im besonderen diejenigen, die viele bewegliche Teile beinhalten. Wenn Sie also mit der Wartung dieser Artikel Geschäfte machen oder selbst welche besitzen, stellt der Wartungsplan ein nützliches Hilfsmittel dar, um die entsprechenden Wartungsarbeiten zu planen.
+
+Wenn eine Kundenanfrage eine Wartung aufgrund eines Stillstandes verlangt, bezieht sich das auf eine vorbeugende Wartung.
+
+Um einen neuen Wartungsplan zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Support > Dokumente > Wartungsplan > Neu
+
+
+
+Im Wartungsplan gibt es zwei Abschnitte:
+
+Im ersten Abschnitt können Sie die Artikel auswählen, für die Sie diesen Plan erstellen wollen, weiterhin wie oft ein Wartungsbesuch erfolgen soll. Das kann optional auch aus dem Kundenauftrag gezogen werden. Nach der Auswahl der Artike sollten Sie den Datensatz abspeichern
+
+Der zweite Abschnitt beinhaltet die Wartungsaktivitäten des Plans. "Zeitplan erstellen" erstellt eine separate Zeile für jede Wartungsaktivität.
+
+Jeder Artikel im Wartungsplan ist einer Person zugeordnet.
+
+Sobald das Dokument übertragen wird, werden für jede Wartung Kalendereinträge für den Benutzer oder den Vertriebsmitarbeiter erstellt.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/maintenance-visit.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/maintenance-visit.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..52b9328f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/maintenance-visit.md
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+
+# Wartungsbesuch
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Ein Wartungsbesuch ist ein Datensatz über einen Besuch eines Technikers bei einem Kunden, in den meisten Fällen wegen einer Kundenanfrage. Sie können einen Wartungsbesuch wir folgt erstellen:
+
+> Support > Dokumente > Wartungsbesuch > Neu
+
+
+
+Der Wartungsbesuch inhält Informationen über:
+
+* Den Kunden
+* Den Artikel der geprüft/gewartet wurde
+* Einzelheiten der durchgeführten Arbeiten
+* Die Person, die die Arbeit ausgeführt hat
+* Die Rückmeldung des Kunden
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/warranty-claim.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/warranty-claim.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4dd64f48
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/support/warranty-claim.md
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+
+# Garantieantrag
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Wenn Sie **Artikel** verkaufen, die eine Garantie besitzen, oder wenn Sie einen erweiterten Servicevertrag wie den Jährlichen Wartungsvertrag (AMC) verkauft haben, kann Sie Ihr **Kunde** wegen eines entsprechenden Falles oder eines Ausfalles anrufen und Ihnen die Seriennummer dieses Artikels mitteilen.
+
+Um diesen Vorgang aufzuzeichnen, können Sie einen **Garantiefall** erstellen und den **Kunden** sowie die **Artikel- bzw. Seriennummer** hinzufügen. Das System zieht dann automatisch die Einzelheiten zur Seriennummer aus dem System und stellt fest, ob es sich um einen Garantiefall oder einen AMC handelt.
+
+Sie müssen auch eine Beschreibung des Falles des **Kunden** anfügen und den Fall der Person zuordnen, die das Problem lösen soll.
+
+Um einen neuen **Garantiefall** zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Support > Dokukumente > Garantieantrag > Neu
+
+
+
+Wenn für die Lösung des Problems ein Besuch beim Kunden notwendig ist, können Sie einen neuen Wartungsbesuch erstellen.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/assignment.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/assignment.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..64d33fd6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/assignment.md
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+
+# Zuweisungen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Die Option "Zuweisen zu" in ERPNext erlaubt es Ihnen ein bestimmtes Dokument einem Benutzer, der weiter an diesem Dokument arbeiten soll, zu zu weisen.
+
+Beispiel: Wenn ein Kundenauftrag vom Vertriebsmanager bestätigt/übertragen werden muss, kann der Benutzer, der zuerst mit dem Vorgang beschäftigt war, diesen Kundenauftrag dem Vertriebsmanager zuordnen. Wenn das Dokument dem Vertriebsmanager zugeordnet wird, wird es dessen Aufgabenübersicht hinzugefügt. In gleicher Art und Weise kann einem Konto der Fertigung oder der Verwaltung, über das ein Lieferschein und eine Ausgangsrechnung zu dieser Kundenbestellung erstellt werden müssen, ein Dokument zugeordnet werden.
+
+Einschränkende Berechtigungen können nicht über "Zuweisen zu" erstellt werden. Im Folgenden werden die Schritt dargestellt, wie Sie ein Dokument einem anderen Benutzer zuweisen.
+
+### Schritt 1: Klicken Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Zuweisen zu"
+
+Die Option "Zuweisen zu" befindet sich in der Fußzeile des Dokuments. Wenn Sie auf das Zuteilungs-Symbol in der Werkzeugleiste klicken, werden Sie schnell zur Fußzeile des selben Dokuments weiter geleitet.
+
+
+
+
+
+### Schritt 2: Zu einem Benutzer zuweisen
+
+Im Abschnitt "Zuweisen zu" können Sie einen Benutzer auswählen, dem das Dokument zugeordnet werden soll. Sie können ein Dokument gleichzeitig mehreren verschiedenen Menschen zuordnen.
+
+Bei der Zuordnung können Sie auch einen Kommentar für denjenigen hinterlassen, dem das Dokument zugeordnet wird.
+
+
+
+### Aufgabenliste des Empfängers
+
+Diese Transaktion erscheint in der Aufgabenliste des Empfängers.
+
+
+
+Zuordnung entfernen
+
+Ein Benutzer kann eine Zuordnung entfernen, indem im Dokument die Schaltfläche "Zuordnung abgeschlossen" angeklickt wird.
+
+
+
+Wenn die Zuordnung einmal als abgeschlossen markiert wurde, wird der Status des zugehörigen Eintrages in der Aufgabenliste auf "Abgeschlossen" gesetzt.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/calendar.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/calendar.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..00c4541c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/calendar.md
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+
+# Kalender
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Der Kalender ist ein Werkzeug, mit dem Sie Ereignisse erstellen und teilen können und auch automatisch aus dem System erstellte Ereignisse sehen können.
+
+Sie können die Kalenderansicht umschalten zwischen Monatsansicht, Wochenansicht und Tagesansicht.
+
+
+
+### Ereignisse im Kalender erstellen
+
+#### Ein Ereignis manuell erstellen
+
+Um ein Ereignis manuell zu erstellen, sollten Sie zuerst die Kalenderansicht festlegen. Wenn sich der Start- und Endzeitpunkt am selben Tag befinden, gehen Sie zuerst in die Tagesansicht.
+
+Diese Ansicht zeigt die 24 Stunden des Tages aufgeteilt in verschiedene Zeitfenster an. Klicken Sie für den Startzeitpunkt auf ein Zeitfenster und ziehen Sie den Rahmen auf bis Sie den Endzeitpunkt erreichen.
+
+
+
+Auf Grundlage der Auswahl des Zeitfensters werden Start- und Endzeitpunkt in die Ereignisvorlage übernommen. Sie können dann noch die Bezeichnung des Ereignisses angeben und speichern.
+
+#### Ereignis auf Grundlage eines Leads
+
+Im Leadformular finden Sie die Felder "Nächster Kontakt durch" und "Nächstes Kontaktdatum". Wenn Sie in diesen Feldern einen Termin und eine Kontaktperson eintragen, wird automatisch ein Ereignis erstellt.
+
+
+
+#### Geburtstag
+
+Auf Basis der in den Mitarbeiterstammdaten eingetragenen Geburtstage werden Geburtstagsereignisse erstellt.
+
+### Wiederkehrende Ereignisse
+
+Sie können Ereignisse als wiederkehrend in bestimmten Intervallen markieren, indem Sie "Dieses Ereignis wiederholen" aktivieren.
+
+
+
+### Erinnerungen an Ereignisse
+
+Es gibt zwei Arten, wie Sie eine Erinnerung zu einem Ereignis per E-Mail erhalten können.
+
+#### Erinnerung im Ereignis aktivieren
+
+Wenn Sie in der Ereignisvorlage den Punkt "E-Mail-Erinnerung am Morgen senden" anklicken, erhalten alle Teilnehmer an diesem Ereignis eine Benachrichtungs-E-Mail.
+
+
+
+#### Einen täglichen E-Mail-Bericht erstellen
+
+Wenn Sie für Kalenderereignisse Erinnerungen erhalten wollen, sollten Sie den täglichen E-Mail-Bericht für Kalenderereignisse einstellen.
+
+Der tägliche E-Mail-Bericht kann eingestellt werden über:
+
+> Einstellungen > E-Mail > Täglicher E-Mail-Bericht
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/collaborating-around-forms.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/collaborating-around-forms.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..196a6c0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/collaborating-around-forms.md
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+
+# Zusammenarbeit über Formulare
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+### Zugeordnet zu
+
+Sie können jedwede Transaktion aus dem System versenden, indem Sie auf die Schaltfläche "Zugeordnet zu" klicken. Im Menü "Kommunikation" wird ein Protokoll aller von Ihnen versendeter E-Mails gepflegt.
+
+
+
+### Kommentar
+
+Kommentare sind ein großartiger Weg Informationen über eine Transaktion, die aber nicht selbst Teil der Transaktion sind, hinzuzufügen, z. B. Hinfergrundinformationen usw. Kommentare können in der rechten Seitenleiste hinzugefügt werden.
+
+### Schlagworte
+
+Lesen Sie hier mehr über [Schlagworte]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/tags.html)
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9c39a83d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+
+# Werkzeuge zur Zusammenarbeit
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Wir leben in einer Ära, in der Menschen sehr bequem elektronisch kommunizieren, diskutieren, fragen, Arbeit verteilen und Rückmeldung bekommen können. Das Internet funktioniert auch großartig als Medium zur gemeinsamen Arbeit. Als wir dieses Konzept im ERP-System integriert haben, haben wir eine Handvoll Werkzeuge entworfen, mit denen Sie Transaktionen zuordnen, Ihre ToDos verwalten, einen Kalender teilen und pflegen, eine unternehmensweite Wissensdatenbank aktuell halten, Transaktionen verschlagworten und kommentieren und Ihre Bestellungen, Rechnungen und vieles mehr per E-Mail versenden können. Sie können über das Nachrichtenwerkzeug auch Mitteilungen an andere Benutzer senden.
+
+Diese Werkzeuge sind voll in das Produkt integriert, damit Sie effektiv Ihre Daten verwalten und mit Ihren Kollegen zusammenarbeiten können.
+
+### Themen
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..259835e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+to-do
+collaborating-around-forms
+messages
+notes
+calendar
+assignment
+tags
+articles
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/messages.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/messages.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7c62b145
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/messages.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+# Mitteilungen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Sie können mithilfe des Nachrichtenwerkzeuges Mitteilungen über das System versenden und empfangen. Wenn Sie einem Benutzer eine Mitteilung senden, und der Benutzer angemeldet ist, öffnet sich ein Mitteilungsfenster und der Zähler für ungelesene Mitteilungen in der Kopfleiste wird angepasst.
+
+
+
+Sie können Mitteilungen an alle Benutzer oder nur an bestimmte versenden.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/notes.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/notes.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..28a34afc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/notes.md
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+
+# Anmerkungen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+In diesem Bereich können Sie lange Anmerkungen abspeichern. Diese können z. B. eine Liste Ihrer Partner, häufig genutzte Passwörter, Geschäftsbedingungen oder andere Dokumente sein, die gemeinsam genutzt werden müssen.
+
+### Gehen Sie zu den Anmerkungen
+
+> Werkzeuge > Anmerkung > Neu
+
+### Einzelheiten der Anmerkungen
+
+Geben Sie Titel und Inhalt ein.
+
+
+
+## Berechtigungen für ausgewählte Benutzer setzen
+
+Damit alle auf eine Anmerkung zugreifen können, aktivieren Sie "Öffentlich" unter dem Abschnitt Verknüpfungen. Damit ein Benutzer auf eine bestimmte Anmerkung zugreifen kann, können diese in der Tabelle "Teilen mit" ausgewählt werden.
+
+
+
+Anmerkungen können intern auch als Wissensdatenbank genutzt werden. Sie können an die Anmerkungen auch Dateien anhängen und diese einer bestimmten Auswahl an Benutzern zugänglich machen.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/tags.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/tags.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2d925ca4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/tags.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Schlagworte
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Genauso wie Zuordnungen und Kommentare können Sie auch Ihre eigenen Schlagworte zu jeder Art von Transaktionen hinzufügen. Diese Schlagworte helfen Ihnen bei der Suche nach einem Dokument und klassifizieren dieses. ERPNext zeigt Ihnen die wichtigen Schlagworte in der Dokumentenliste an.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/to-do.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/to-do.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d0eb6d2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/using-erpnext/to-do.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+# Aufgaben
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+"Aufgaben" ist ein einfaches Werkzeug, welches alle Aktivitäten, die Ihnen [zugeordnet](https://erpnext.com/collaboration-tools/assignment) wurden, und die Sie zugeordnet haben, auflistet. Sie können zudem Ihre eigenen ToDos der Liste hinzufügen.
+
+
+
+Wenn eine Aufgabe abgeschlossen wurde, können Sie einfach die Zuweisung vom Dokument entfernen. Dabei wird die Aufgabe von der ToDo-Liste entfernt. Bei Aufgaben, die nicht über ein Dokument zugeordnet wurden, können Sie den Status über den ToDo-Datensatz selbst auf "abgeschlossen" setzen.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/blog-post.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/blog-post.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..46ae46d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/blog-post.md
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+
+# Blogeinträge
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Blogs sind eine großartige Möglichkeit die eigenen Gedanken zu Geschäftsaktivitäten mit anderen zu teilen und Ihre Kunden und Leser auf einem aktuellen Stand zu Ihren Vorhaben zu halten.
+
+Im Zeitalter des Internet hat das Schreiben einen hohen Stellenwert, weil Menschen, die Ihre Webseite besuchen, etwas über Sie und Ihre Produkte lesen wollen.
+
+Um einen neuen Blog zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Webseite > Blog-Eintrag > Neu
+
+
+
+Sie können einen Blog mit Hilfe des Markdown-Formats formatieren. Sie können auf Ihren Blog auch zugreifen, indem Sie zur Seite "blog.html" gehen.
+
+#### Ein Beispiel für einen Blog.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/blogger.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/blogger.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ec3476f2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/blogger.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Blogger
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Ein Blogger ist ein Benutzer, der Blog-Einträge erstellen kann. Sie können eine Kurzbiografie des Bloggers angeben und dazu einen Avatar.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7b78c649
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+
+# Webseite
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Webseiten sind Kernbestandteile eines jeden Geschäftslebens. Eine gute Webseite zu haben bedeutet normalerweise:
+
+* Viel Geld zu investieren.
+* Schwierigkeiten bei der Aktualisierung
+* Probleme bei der Interaktion
+
+Es sei denn Sie sind selbst Webentwickler.
+
+Wäre es nicht toll, wenn es einen Weg gäbe, Ihren Produktkatalog auf Ihrer Webseite automatisch aus dem ERP-System aktualiseren zu können?
+
+Wir haben uns genau das gleiche gedacht und haben deshalb eine kleine aber feine App zur Webseitenentwicklung gebaut, direkt in ERPNext! Wenn Sie das Webseitenmodul von ERPNext nutzen, können Sie:
+
+1. Webseiten erstellen
+2. Einen Blog schreiben
+3. Ihren Produktkatalog basierend auf den Artikelstammdaten erstellen
+
+In Kürze werden wir einen Einkaufswagen mit bereit stellen, so dass Ihre Kunden Bestellung aufgeben können und online zahlen können.
+
+Obwohl es keine Voraussetzung für eine gute Webseite ist, sollten Sie vielleicht doch ein bisschen Grundwissen zu HTML und CSS mitbringen, oder aber einen professionellen Service in Anspruch nehmen. Das gute daran ist, dass Sie selbst Inhalte, Blogs und Produkte hinzufügen und ändern können, sobald die Grundeinstellungen erledigt sind.
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..846011d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+web-page
+blog-post
+web-form
+blogger
+setup
+add-products-to-website
+shopping-cart
+articles
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cb6c281f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Einstellungen
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Einstellungen für Ihre Webseite können Sie im Menüpunkt "Einstellungen" treffen.
+
+### Themen
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e451bf3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+website-settings
+social-login-keys
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/social-login-keys.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/social-login-keys.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1e7607f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/social-login-keys.md
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+
+# Zugang zu sozialen Netzwerken
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Soziale Netwerke versetzen Benutzer in die Lage sich in ERPNext über Google, Facebook oder GitHub einzuloggen.
+
+### Soziale Netzwerke aktivieren
+
+Um zu verstehen, wie sie soziale Netzwerke für ERPNext aktivieren, sehen Sie sich bitte die folgenden Video-Tutorien an.
+
+* Für Facebook: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zC6Q6gIfiw8
+* Für Google: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=w_EAttrE9sw
+* Für GitHub: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bG71DxxkVjQ
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/website-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/website-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..af996aa2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/setup/website-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+
+# Einstellungen zur Webseite
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Die meisten der Einstellungen, die Ihre Webseite betreffen, können hier eingestellt werden.
+
+
+
+### Zielseite
+
+* Homepage: Sie können angeben, welche [Webseite]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de/website/web-page.html) die Startseite der Homepage ist.
+* Startseite ist "Products": Wenn diese Option markiert ist, ist die Standard-Artikelgruppe die Startseite der Webseite.
+* Titel-Präfix: Stellt den Browser-Titel ein.
+
+### Webseitenthema
+
+Wählen Sie das Thema für Ihre Webseite aus. Sie können auch neue Themen für Ihre Webseite erstellen.
+
+
+
+* Wählen "Neues Webseiten-Thema erstellen" wenn Sie das Standars-Thema der Webseite anpassen wollen.
+
+### Banner
+
+Hier können Sie ein Banner/Logo auf Ihrer Webseite hinzufügen. Hängen Sie das Bild an und klicken Sie auf "Banner aus Bild einrichten". Das System erstellt einen HTML-Kode unter Banner HTML.
+
+
+
+### Kopfleiste
+
+Hier können Sie die Menüeinträge in der Kopfleiste einstellen.
+
+
+
+* In ähnlicher Art und Weise können Sie auch die Verknüpfungen auf der Seitenleiste und in der Fußzeile einstellen.
+
+### Einbindungen und Sonstige Informationen
+
+Sie können Google Analytics und soziale Netzwerke in Ihre Webseite mit einbinden und Einträge auf der Webseite teilen.
+
+
+
+* Sie können ein öffentliches Anmelden auf Ihr ERPNext-Konto unterbinden indem Sie auf "Anmelden deaktivieren" klicken.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/web-form.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/web-form.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..639ac48b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/web-form.md
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+
+# Webformular
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Fügen Sie Formulare, die Daten in Ihren Tabellen hinzufügen und ändern können, zu Ihrer Webseite hinzu. Erlauben Sie Nutzern mehrere verschiedene Webformulare zu erstellen und zu ändern.
+
+Sie können Ihrer Webseite Formulare hinzufügen, z. B. Kontakt, Anfrage, Beschwerde usw. Aus diesen Formularen können Daten in Datensätze übernommen werden, wie z. B. Lead, Opportunity, Fall etc. Sie können dem Benutzer auch die Erlaubnis erteilen mehrere verschiedene Datensätze (wie z. B. Beschwerden) zu verwalten.
+
+* * *
+
+### Erstellung
+
+Um ein neues **Webformular** zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Webseite > Web-Formular > Neu
+
+1. Geben Sie die Bezeichnung und die URL des Web-Formulars an.
+2. Wählen Sie den DocType aus, in dem der Benutzer Datensätze speichern soll.
+3. Geben Sie an, ob sich der Benutzer einloggen muss, Daten ändern muss, mehrere verschiedene Datensätze verwalten soll, etc.
+4. Fügen Sie die Felder, die Sie in den Datensätzen haben wollen, hinzu.
+
+
+
+* * *
+
+### Ansicht
+
+Wenn Sie das Web-Formular erstellt haben, können Sie es unter der URL ansehen und ausprobieren!
+
+
+
+* * *
+
+### Ergebnisse
+
+Ihre Daten werden in den angegebenen Tabellen gespeichert.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/web-page.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/web-page.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..786398ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/de/website/web-page.md
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+
+# Webseite
+Beigetragen von CWT Connector & Wire Technology GmbH
+
+Über das Modul "Webseite" können feste Inhalte wie "Startseite", "Über uns", "Kontakt" und "Geschäftsbedingungen" erstellt werden.
+
+Um eine neue Webseite zu erstellen, gehen Sie zu:
+
+> Webseite > Webseite > Neu
+
+
+
+### Bezeichnung
+
+Das erste, was Sie angeben sollten, ist die Bezeichnung, der Titel Ihrer Webseite. Die Bezeichnung ist sehr wichtig für die Websuche. Wählen Sie also eine Bezeichnung, die Schlüsselwörter enthält, mit denen Sie Ihre Kundschaft adressieren können.
+
+### Inhalt
+
+Nach der Auswahl des Erscheinungsbildes können Sie Inhalt (Texte, Bilder) zu jeder Ihrer Inhaltsboxen hinzufügen. Sie können Inhalte im Markdown und im HTML-Format hinzufügen. Lesen Sie hierzu den Abschnitt über Markdownformatierung, wenn Sie weitere Informationen wünschen.
+
+### Seitenverknüpfung
+
+Die Verknüpfung zu Ihrer Seite besteht aus dem Wert des Feldes "Seitenname" + ".html". Beispiel: Wenn Ihr Seitenname contact-us ist, dann ist die Verknüpfung ihreseite.com/contact-us.html.
+
+### Bilder
+
+Sie können Bilder auf Ihrer Webseite darstellen und sie über einen HTML-Befehl oder im Markdown-Format anzeigen lassen. Die Verknüpfung zu Ihrem Bild lautet assets/manualerpnextcom/old_images/erpnext/filename
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/contact.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/contact.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ffd54682
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/contact.md
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+
+# Contact and Address
+
+Contacts do not need to be linked to another document, they can be stand alone. You can even create a contact with only a first name, not linked to any other document or party (Customer/Supplier).
+
+The Contact_ID is automatically created:
+
+1. If only a First Name is entered that First Name defines the ID , thus First name (only)
+2. If a First Name and a Party is linked the ID becomes “FirstName-Party”
+
+Contacts can, but do not have to be linked, to: User, Customer, Supplier, and Sales Partner. Since Customers and Addresses are not directly linked to a User, all links go via Contacts.
+
+A Contact can be linked to the (web) user. If that user is also a Customer, it is linked to the Customer by the Customer ID
+
+Contacts and Addresses in ERPNext are stored separately so that you can
+attach multiple Contacts or Addresses to Customers and Suppliers.
+
+To create a new Contact go to,
+
+> CRM > Contact > New
+
+
+
+Or you can add a Contact or Address directly from the Customer record, click on “New
+Contact” or “New Address”.
+
+
+
+> Tip: When you select a Customer in any transaction, one Contact and Address
+gets pre-selected. This is the “Default Contact or Address”.
+
+To Import multiple Contacts and Addresses from a spreadsheet, use the Data
+Import Tool.
+
+---
+
+### Address Titles
+
+The Address Title (Name of person or organization that this address belongs to) is a free format unlinked field. The ID is automatically created from the Address Title and Address Type. (AddressTitle-AddressType).
+
+### Address Linking
+
+Addresses can be entered individually (unlinked) or linked to customers, leads, suppliers or Sales Partners.
+
+Linking is done in the reference section where the links can be established.
+
+(Contributed by Robert Becht)
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/crm_reports.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/crm_reports.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bb21ca82
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/crm_reports.md
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+
+CRM module's reports helps users to get the information about the prospects. Using Following reports, user can analyze the data about prospect's history with a company and will helps user to build strong relationships with them.
+
+###Lead Details
+It has data about the leads and their contact and address details.
+
+
+###Sales Funnel
+By using the sales funnel report, and by quantifying the number of prospects at each stage of the process, you can get an idea of your potential customers.
+
+More than this, by looking at the way these numbers change over time, you can identify problems in the sales pipeline and take any corrective action at the early stage.
+
+For example, if you notice that very few communications with the prospects has taken place in a month which might indicate a decrease in the sales. From the next month, organization should make sure that more communications has to take place with the prospects.
+
+
+
+###Prospects Engaged But Not Converted
+Using this report, user gets the information about the leads who has shown interest in the business with you but due to some reason they were not converted into the customers.
+
+
+
+###Minutes to First Response for Opportunity
+Immediacy is so important – and so valued
+In this internet area, we all expect a quicker response time to any of our query. This report gives you the information about the first response time given to an opportunities or issues. Using this report, the organization can improve their first response time to the prospects which can help to the better sales in the future.
+
+
+
+###Customer Addresses And Contacts
+It has data about the customers and their contact and address details.
+
+
+###Inactive Customers
+This report shows the list of customers who has not purchased since long time.
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/customer.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/customer.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..18004917
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/customer.md
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+
+A customer, who is sometimes known as a client, buyer, or purchaser is the one
+who receives goods, services, products, or ideas, from a seller for a monetary
+consideration. A customer can also receive goods or services from a vendor or
+a supplier for other valuable considerations.
+
+A customer is uniquely identified by the Customer ID. Normally this ID is identical to the customer Full Name, but in case of duplicate Full Name, a Name-1 is created as ID.
+
+You can either directly create your Customers via
+
+> Selling > Customer
+
+
+
+or upload it via the [Data Import Tool]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/data-import-tool.html).
+
+A Customer can avail the features (operations) in the selling process. The general flow can be summarised as:
+
+
+
+> Note: Customers are separate from Contacts and Addresses. A Customer can
+have multiple Contacts and Addresses.
+
+### Contacts and Addresses
+
+[Contacts and Addresses]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/CRM/contact.html) in ERPNext are stored separately so that you can
+attach multiple Contacts or Addresses to Customers and Suppliers
+
+Thus we may have identical Customer Names that are uniquely identified by the ID. Since the email address is not part of the
+customer information, the linking of Customer and User is through Contacts.
+
+### Integration with Accounts
+
+In ERPNext, there is a separate Account record for each Customer, for each
+Company.
+
+When you create a new Customer, ERPNext will automatically create an Account
+Ledger for the Customer under “Accounts Receivable” in the Company set in the
+Customer record.
+
+> Advanced Tip: If you want to change the Account Group under which the
+Customer Account is created, you can set it in the Company master. If you want
+to create an Account in another Company, just change the Company value and
+“Save” the Customer again.
+
+By default, the system does not generate an account for every customer. All
+Customers can be booked in one account called Debtors. In order to manage a
+separate account for each customer, you have to first create the account under
+Accounts Receivable in the [Chart of Accounts]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/chart-of-accounts.html) and then add it on the customer's
+form accounts table.
+
+### Customer Settings
+
+You can link a Price List to a Customer (select “Default Price List”), so that
+when you select that Customer, the Price List will be automatically selected.
+
+You can set “Credit Days”, so that it is automatically set due date in the Sales
+Invoices made against this Customer. Credit Days can be defined as fixed days or last day of the next month based on invoice date.
+
+You can set how much credit you want to allow for a Customer by adding the
+“Credit Limit”. You can also set a global “Credit Limit” in the Company
+master. Classifying Customers
+
+ERPNext allows you to group your Customers using [Customer Group]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/customer-group.html)
+and also divide them into [Territories]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/territory.html)
+Grouping will help you get better analysis of your data and
+identify which Customers are profitable and which are not. Territories will
+help you set sales targets for the respective territories.
+You can also mention [Sales Person]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/sales-person.html) against a customer.
+
+### Sales Partner
+
+A Sales Partner is a third party distributor / dealer / commission agent /
+affiliate / reseller who sells the companies products, for a commission. This
+is useful if you make the end sale to the Customer, involving your Sales
+Partner.
+
+If you sell to your Sales Partner who in-turn sells it to the Customer, then
+you must make a Customer instead.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..817f4cb6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# CRM
+
+ERPNext helps you track business **Opportunities** from **Leads** and
+**Customers**, send them **Quotations** and make confirmed **Sales Orders**.
+
+The CRM Module helps maintain Leads, Oppurtunities and Customers.
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2fe3f4d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+lead
+customer
+opportunity
+contact
+newsletter
+crm_reports
+setup
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/lead.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/lead.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c5069e59
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/lead.md
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+
+To get the customer through the door, you may be doing all or any of the
+following:
+
+ * Listing your product on directories.
+ * Maintaining an updated and searchable website.
+ * Meeting people at trade events.
+ * Advertising your product or services.
+
+When you send out the word that you are around and have something valuable to
+offer, people will come in to check out your product. These are your Leads.
+
+They are called Leads because they may lead you to a sale. Sales people
+usually work on leads by calling them, building a relationship and sending
+information about their products or services. It is important to track all
+this conversation to enable another person who may have to follow-up on that
+contact. The new person is then able to know the history of that particular
+Lead.
+
+---
+
+Leads are the entities constituting a first contact. Leads can be created by a system users or by a web-user. When a lead is created minimal info (name,email) is entered and the lead is (default) linked to the active system user, the owner of the lead A user configurable drop list is used to classify Status of the lead (Open, Replied etc)
+
+To create a Lead, go to:
+
+> CRM > Lead > New Lead
+
+
+
+ERPNext gives you a lot of options you may want to store about your Leads. For
+example what is the source, how likely are they to give you business etc. If
+you have a healthy number of leads, this information will help you prioritize
+who you want to work with.
+
+> **Tip:** ERPNext makes it easy to follow-up on leads by updating the “Next
+Contact” details. This will add a new event in the Calendar for the User who
+has to contact the lead next.
+
+### Difference between Lead, Contact and Customer
+
+A Lead is a potential Customer, someone who can give you business. A Customer is an
+organization or individual who has given you business before (and has an Account
+in your system). A Contact is a person who belongs to the Customer.
+
+A Lead can be converted to a Customer by selecting “Customer” from the **Make**
+dropdown. Once the Customer is created, the Lead becomes “Converted” and any
+further Opportunities from the same source can be created against this
+Customer.
+
+
+
+---
+
+### Creation via Portal
+
+If a someone creates an account through the website interface is Lead is automatically created, status is Open and the Owner is the webuser.
+
+After registration the webform Addresses is called, where the web user can enter address information.The address is linked to the lead using the **Lead Name-Address Type** as ID.
+
+If using the Cart functionality, items are ordered the Lead is Converted and a Customer is created using the Web-User Name. Because a Customer can only be linked to a webuser using the (foreign) ID in Contact, such contact has to be created as well.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/newsletter.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/newsletter.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..85480b63
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/newsletter.md
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+
+A newsletter is a short written report that tells about the recent activities
+of an organization. It is generally sent to members of the organization,
+potential clients customers or potential leads.
+
+In ERPNext, you can use this UI to send any type of communication to a large
+number of audience. The process of sending bulk email to a target audience is
+very simple and easy.
+
+Select the list that you want to send the email to. Fill in your content in
+the message box, and send your newsletter.If you wish to test your email, to
+see how it looks to the recepient, you can use the test function. Save the
+document before testing. A test email will be sent to your Email Address. You can
+send the email to all the intended receipients by clicking on the send button.
+
+
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/opportunity.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/opportunity.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d1c06b9a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/opportunity.md
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+
+When you know a Lead is looking for some products or services to buy, you can
+track that as an Opportunity. Also opportunity document helps user to collect the requirement of a customer/lead.
+
+You can create an Opportunity from:
+
+> CRM > Opportunity > New Opportunity
+
+#### Figure 1: Create Opportunity
+
+
+
+You can also go to an “Open” Lead and select “Opportunity” from the **Make** dropdown.
+
+#### Figure 2: Create Opportunity from an open Lead
+
+
+
+#### Figure 3: Create Opportunity for Customer to Collect their Requirement
+
+
+
+An Opportunity can also come from an existing Customer. You can create
+multiple Opportunities against the same Lead. In Opportunity, apart from the
+Communication, you can also add the Items for which the Lead or Contact is
+looking for.
+
+#### Make Supplier Quotation
+In some businesses, users collect the rates from their supplier against the customer requirement and based on the supplier rates they prepare the quotation for the customer. With ERPNext, you can make a supplier quotation from the opportunity itself.
+
+
+
+> Best Practice: Leads and Opportunities are often referred as your “Sales
+Pipeline” this is what you need to track if you want to be able to predict how
+much business you are going to get in the future. Its always a good idea to be
+able to track what is coming in order to adjust your resources.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/campaign.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/campaign.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5acc1afc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/campaign.md
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+
+A Campaign is a full-scale implementation of a sales strategy to promote a
+product or a service. This is done in a market segment of a particular
+geographical area, to achieve specified objectives.
+
+
+
+You can track [Lead]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/CRM/lead.html), [Opportunity]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/CRM/opportunity.html), [Quotation]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/selling/quotation.html) against a campaign.
+
+###Track Leads against Campaign
+
+* To track a 'Lead' against a campaign select 'View Leads'.
+
+
+
+* You shall get a filtered list of all leads made against that campaign.
+* You can also create new leads by clicking 'New'
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/customer-group.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/customer-group.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b87b7d93
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/customer-group.md
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+
+Customer groups allow you to organize your customers. You can also have discounts based on customer groups.
+You can also get trend analysis for each
+group. Typically Customers are grouped by market segment (that is usually
+based on your domain).
+
+
+
+> Tip: If you think all this is too much effort, you can leave it at “Default
+Customer Group”. But all this effort, will pay off when you start getting
+reports. An example of a sample report is given below:
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..98f85084
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3d960aa4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+campaign
+customer-group
+sales-person
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/sales-person.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/sales-person.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..62066520
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/CRM/setup/sales-person.md
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+
+Sales Persons behave exactly like Territories. You can create an organization
+chart of Sales Persons where each Sales Person’s target can be set
+individually. Again as in Territory, the target has to be set against Item
+Group.
+
+
+
+####Sales Person in Transactions
+
+You can use this Sales Person in Customer and sales transactions like Sales Order, Delivery Note and Sales Invoice.
+Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/selling/articles/sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions) to learn more
+about how Sales Persons are used in the transactions of Sales Cycle.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/accounting-entries.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/accounting-entries.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ec509497
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/accounting-entries.md
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+
+The concept of accounting is explained with an example given below: We will
+take a "Tea Stall" as a company and see how to book accounting entries for the
+business.
+
+ * Mama (The Tea-stall owner) invests Rs 25000 to start the business.
+
+
+
+__Analysis:__ Mama invested 25000 in company, hoping to get some profit. In other
+words, company is liable to pay 25000 to Mama in the future. So, account
+"Mama" is a liability account and it is credited. Company's cash balance will
+be increased due to the investment, "Cash" is an asset to the company and it
+will debited.
+
+ * The company needs equipments (Stove, teapot, cups etc) and raw materials (tea, sugar, milk etc) immediately. He decides to buy from the nearest general store "Super Bazaar" who is a friend so that he gets some credit. Equipments cost him 2800 and raw materials worth of 2200. He pays 2000 out of total cost 5000.
+
+
+
+__Analysis:__ Equipments are "Fixed Assets" (because they have a long life) of the
+company and raw materials "Current Assets" (since they are used for day-to-day
+business), of the company. So, "Equipments" and "Stock in Hand" accounts have
+been debited to increase the value. He pays 2000, so "Cash" account will be
+reduced by that amount, hence credited and he is liable to pay 3000 to "Super
+Bazaar" later, so Super Bazaar will be credited by 3000.
+
+ * Mama (who takes care of all entries) decides to book sales at the end of the every day, so that he can analyze daily sales. At the end of the very first day, the tea stall sells 325 cups of tea, which gives net sales of Rs. 1575. The owner happily books his first day sales.
+
+
+
+__Analysis:__ Income has been booked in "Sales of Tea" account which has been
+credited to increase the value and the same amount will be debited to "Cash"
+account. Lets say, to make 325 cups of tea, it costs Rs. 800, so "Stock in
+Hand" will be reduced (Cr) by 800 and expense will be booked in "Cost of goods
+sold" account by same amount.
+
+At the end of the month, the company paid the rent amount of stall (5000) and
+salary of one employee (8000), who joined from the very first day.
+
+
+
+### Booking Profit
+
+As month progress, company purchased more raw materials for the business.
+After a month he books profit to balance the "Balance Sheet" and "Profit and
+Loss Statements" statements. Profit belongs to Mama and not the company hence
+its a liability for the company (it has to pay it to Mama). When the Balance
+Sheet is not balanced i.e. Debit is not equal to Credit, the profit has not
+yet been booked. To book profit, the following entry has to be made:
+
+
+
+Explanation: Company's net sales and expenses are 40000 and 20000
+respectively. So, company made a profit of 20000. To make the profit booking
+entry, "Profit or Loss" account has been debited and "Capital Account" has
+been credited. Company's net cash balance is 44000 and there is some raw
+materials available worth 1000 rupees.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/accounting-reports.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/accounting-reports.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a045c243
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/accounting-reports.md
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+
+Some of the major accounting reports are:
+
+### General Ledger
+
+General Ledger is based on the table GL Entry and can be filtered by Account
+and between a period. This will help you to get a full update for all entries
+done in that period for that Account.
+
+
+
+### Trial Balance
+
+Trial Balance is the list of Account balances for all your Accounts
+(“Ledger” and “Group”) on a particular date. For each Account it will give you
+the:
+
+ * Opening
+ * Debits
+ * Credits
+ * Closing
+
+
+
+The sum of all closing balances in a Trial Balance must be zero.
+
+### Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable (AP / AR)
+
+These reports help you to track the outstanding invoices sent to Customer and
+Suppliers. In this report, you will get your outstanding amounts period wise.
+i.e. between 0-30 days, 30-60 days and so on.
+
+
+
+### Sales and Purchase Register
+
+In this report, each tax Account is transposed in columns. For each Invoice and
+invoice Item, you will get the amount of individual tax that has been paid,
+based on the Taxes and Charges table.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f3563611
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+
+Payment done by the customer before accepting delivery of the product is an
+Advance Payment. For Orders of high value, the business houses expect to
+receive advance.
+
+
+__For Example:__ Consider a customer- Jane D'souza placing an order for a double
+bed costing $10000 She is asked to give some advance before the furniture
+house begins work on her order. She gives them $5000 in cash.
+
+Once Sales Order or Purchase Order is submitted, you will find option to create Advance Payment entry against it.
+
+To directly create Advance Payment Entry, Go to:
+
+> Accounts > Documents > Journal Entry > New Journal Entry
+
+Select a Voucher Type based on a mode in which advance payment is made.
+
+Since the customer has given $5000 as cash advance,it will be recorded as a
+credit entry against the customer. To balance it with the debit entry [as per the Double
+accounting system] enter $5000 as debit against the company's cash account. In
+the row "Is Advance" click 'Yes'.
+
+#### Figure 1 : Journal Entry -Advance Entry
+
+
+
+### Double Entry Accounting
+
+Double entry bookkeeping is a system of accounting in which every transaction
+has a corresponding positive and negative entry : debits and credits. Every
+transaction involves a [debit entry
+](http://www.e-conomic.co.uk/accountingsystem/glossary/debit)in one account
+and a [credit
+entry](http://www.e-conomic.co.uk/accountingsystem/glossary/credit) in another
+account. This means that every transaction must be recorded in two accounts;
+one account will be debited because it receives value and the other account
+will be credited because it has given value.
+
+
+#### Figure 2: Transaction and Difference Entry
+
+
+
+Save and submit the Journal Entry. If this document is not saved it will not be pulled in
+other accounting documents.
+
+When you make a new Sales Invoice for the same customer, mention the advance
+in the Sales Invoice Form.
+
+To link the Sales Invoice to the Journal Entry which mentions the advance
+payment entry, click on ‘Get Advances Received’. Allocate the amount of
+advance in the advances table. The accounting will be adjusted accordingly.
+
+#### Figure 3: Receive Advance
+
+
+
+Save and submit the Sales Invoice.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/adjust-withhold-amount-payment-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/adjust-withhold-amount-payment-entry.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e0966b49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/adjust-withhold-amount-payment-entry.md
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+
+#Adjust Withhold Amount in the Payment Entry
+
+###Question
+
+Let's assume that outstanding against a Sales Invoice is 20,000. When client makes payment, they will only pay 19,600. Rest 400 will be booked under Withhold account. How to manage this scenario in the Payment Entry.
+
+###Answer
+
+In the Payment Entry, you can mention Withhold Account in the Deductions or Loss table. Detailed steps below.
+
+####Step 1: Setup Withhold Account
+
+Create a Withhold Account in your Chart of Accounts master.
+
+`Accounts > Chart of Accounts'
+
+####Step 2: Payment Entry
+
+To create Payment Entry, go to unpaid Sales Invoice and create click on Make Payment button.
+
+#####Step 2.1: Enter Payment Amount
+
+Enter Payment Amount as 19,600.
+
+
+
+#####Step 2.2: Allocate Against Sales Invoice
+
+Against Sales Invoice, allocate 20,000 (explained in GIF below).
+
+#####Step 2.3: Add Deduction/Loss Account
+
+You can notice that there is a difference of 400 in the Payment Amount and the Amount Allocated against Sales Invoice. You can book this difference account under Withhold Account.
+
+
+
+ Following same steps, you can also manage difference availed due to Currency Exchange Gain/Loss.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/c-form.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/c-form.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c776b67f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/c-form.md
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+
+#C-Form
+
+C-Form functionality is only applicable for Indian customers.
+
+**What is C-Form?**
+
+C-Form is issued by the Customer. If Customer Issues C-Form, supplier applies discounted CST (central sales tax) in the invoice. C-Form is only applicable on the inter-state transactions.
+
+C-Form functionality in ERPNext allows Supplier to update C-Form No. as received from Customer in the submitted Sales Invoice. Also you can create report on Sales Invoice and track invoices for which C-Form has not yet been received from Customer.
+
+Following are step to manage C-Form related sales in ERPNext.
+
+####Set C-Form Applicability
+
+While creating Sales invoice for the customer, set C-Form applicability in Sales Invoice. In More Info section of Sales Invoice, set field called **Is C-Form Applicable** as **Yes**. Bydefault, this field will have No for a value.
+
+
+
+Updating this field as Yes will allow you to pull this Sales Invoice in the C-Form Tool, and update C-Form No. as received from the Customer.
+
+####Create C-Form Record
+
+After receiving C-Form from your Customer, you should update that C-Form no. in the Sales Invoice by creating C-Form record.
+
+Go to `Accounts > Setup > C-Form > New`
+
+Enter details like C-Form No, Received Date, State and Amount etc. Select Customer and pull related Sales Invoices under provided table.
+
+
+
+####Save & Submit C-Form
+
+After entering details, save and submit C-Form record. On save system will generate C-Form record and on submission update that C-Form No. in the Sales Invoice.
+
+
+
+C-Form serial no will be updated in related invoice under the field 'C-Form No'.
+
+
+
+####Tracking Pending Invoice for C-Form
+
+To track invoices for which C-Form has not yet been received from Customer, you can create custom report on Sales Invoice. In this report, you can filter invoices which doesn't have C-Form updated in them yet, and followup with the customer accordingly.
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/changing-parent-account.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/changing-parent-account.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0e58f309
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/changing-parent-account.md
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+
+#Changing Parent Account
+
+Chart of Account has hierarchical structure. Each account has a parent it is listed under.
+
+There are some accounts which are auto-created. For example, Account for Warehouse is auto-created when new Wareouse is added in the system. These accounts are added under pre-defined account ledger. Warehouse Account is always added under Stock Assets, under Current Assets.
+
+If you wish to place specific Account into another parent Account, you can achieve the same as below.
+
+####1. Go to Chart of Account
+
+`Accounts > Setup > Chart of Account`
+
+Click on Account for which Parent Account is to be changed.
+
+####2. Edit Account
+
+
+
+####3. Change Parent Account
+
+Search and select preferred Parent Account and save.
+
+
+
+Refresh system from Help menu to experience the change.
+
+
+
+ Note: Parent cannot be customized for the Root Accounts, like Asset, Liability, Income, Expense, Equity.
+
+#### Quick Help
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/difference-entry-button.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/difference-entry-button.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1c89ab6f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/difference-entry-button.md
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+
+#Difference Entry
+
+As per accounting standards, debit in a accounting entry must be equal to credit. If not, system does allow submission of accounting transaction, thereby stops ledger posting. In ERPNext, on saving accounting entry, system validates if debit and credit is tallying.
+
+
+
+To have entry balanced, you should one more row, select another account, and update different amount in it. Or you can add difference amount in one of the Account's row itself.
+
+On clicking 'Make Difference Entry' button, new Row will be added under Journal Entry Accounts table, with difference amount. You can edit that row to select appropriate Account.
+
+
+
+On selecting account under new row, debit and credit an entry will be tallying, and you should be able to submit Journal Entri correctly.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/fiscal-year-creation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/fiscal-year-creation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7c3eb9da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/fiscal-year-creation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+
+# Fiscal Year Creation
+
+New Fiscal Year should be created each year, at the end of the current fiscal year. Creation of new Fiscal Year before its begining has been automated in ERPNext.
+
+Three days prior to the end of the current Fiscal Year, system checks if new Fiscal Year for the incoming year is already created. If not, then system auto-creates new Fiscal Year.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/fiscal-year-error.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/fiscal-year-error.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..87be7df5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/fiscal-year-error.md
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+
+# Fixing Fiscal Year Error
+
+While creating any entry, system validates if dates (like Posting Date, Transaction Date etc.) belongs to Fiscal Year selected. If not, system through an error message saying:
+
+`Date ##-##-#### not in fiscal year`
+
+You are more likely to receive this error message if your Fiscal Year has changes, but new Fiscal Year still not set a default. To ensure new Fiscal Year is auto updated in the transactions, you should setup your master as instructed below.
+
+#### Create New Fiscal Year
+
+Only User with System Manager's Role Assigned has permission to create new Fiscal Year. To create new Fiscal Year, go to:
+
+`Accounts > Setup > Fiscal Year`
+
+Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.html) to learn more about Fiscal Year.
+
+#### Set Fiscal Year as Default
+
+After Fiscal Year is saved, you will find option to set that Fiscal year as Default.
+
+
+
+Default Fiscal Year will be updated in the Global Default setting as well. You can manually update Default Fiscal Year from:
+
+`Setup > Settings > Global Default`
+
+
+
+Save Global Default, and Reload your ERPNext account. Then, default Fiscal Year will be auto-updated in your transactions.
+
+Note: In transactions, you can manually select required Fiscal Year, from More Info section.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/freeze-accounting-entries.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/freeze-accounting-entries.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..36d70dd2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/freeze-accounting-entries.md
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+#Freeze Accounting Entries
+
+To freeze accounting entries upto a certain date, follow below given steps.
+
+#### Step 1: Go to:
+
+`Accounts > Setup > Accounts Settings`
+
+#### Step 2: Set Date
+
+Set date in the **Accounts Frozen Upto** field.
+
+
+
+Now, the system will not allow to make any accounting entries before set date. If at all someone tries creating entries, system will show error message as below.
+
+
+
+You can still allow user with certain role to create/edit entries within accounts frozen date. You can set that Role in the Account Settings itself.
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/how-to-freeze-accounting-ledger.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/how-to-freeze-accounting-ledger.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..54bd29b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/how-to-freeze-accounting-ledger.md
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+
+#How To Freeze Accounting Ledger?
+
+If you want to discontinue using specific Account, you can freeze it.
+
+>Account can be Frozen by the User having specific Role. This Role for set in the Account Settings, in the field "Role Allowed to Set Frozen Accounts & Edit Frozen Entries".
+
+Please check following steps to freeze an Account from the Chart of Accounts master.
+
+####Step 1: Chart of Accounts
+
+To edit an Account, go to Chart of Accounts:
+
+`Explore > Accounts > Chart of Accounts`
+
+
+
+Click on Account in which Frozen Date is to be updated.
+
+####Step 2: Set Account as Frozen
+
+In the Account form, you will find a field called **Frozen**. Set value in this field as 'Yes'
+
+
+
+####Step 3: Save
+
+After update Save an Account.
+
+On saving, this Account will be frozen and will not be selectable in any accounting transaction.
+
+ Note: In future, if you want to make an accounting transaction against this Account, then you can unfreeze this account by setting values in the Frozen field as 'No'.
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..be943bcc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..77474bd1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+tracking-project-profitability-using-cost-center
+changing-parent-account
+difference-entry-button
+fiscal-year-error
+freeze-accounting-entries
+how-to-freeze-accouting-ledger
+manage-foreign-exchange-difference
+managing-transactions-in-multiple-currency
+fiscal-year-creation
+post-dated-cheque-entry
+update-stock-option-in-sales-invoice
+what-is-the-differences-of-total-and-valuation-in-tax-and-charges
+withdrawing-salary-from-owners-equity-account
+adjust-withhold-amount-payment-entry
+c-form
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/manage-foreign-exchange-difference.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/manage-foreign-exchange-difference.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bff85890
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/manage-foreign-exchange-difference.md
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+
+# Manage Foreign Exchange Difference
+
+In ERPNext, you can create transactions in the foriegn currency as well. When creating transaction in the foreign currency, system updates current exchanage rate with respect to customer/supplier's currency and base currency on your Company. Since Exchange Rate is always flucuating, on might receive payment from the client on exchange rate different from one mentioned in the Sales/Purchase Invoice. Following is the intruction on how to manage different amount avail in payment entry due to exchange rate change.
+
+#### Add Expense Account
+
+To mange currency difference, create Account **Foreign Exchange Gain/Loss**. This account is generally created on the Expense side of P&L statement. However, you can place it under another group as per your accounting requirement.
+
+
+
+#### Book Payment Entry
+
+In the payment voucher, update invoice amount against Customer or Supplier account, then update actual payment amount against Bank/Cash account. Add new row and select Foreign Exchange Gain/Loss to update currency difference amount.
+
+In the below scenario, Sales Invoice was made EUR, at the exchange rate of 1.090. As per this rate, Sales Invoice amount in USD (base currency) was $1000.
+
+One receipt of payment, exchange rate changed. As per the new exchange rate, payment received in the base currency was $1080. This means gain of $80 due to change in exchange rate. Following is how Foreign Exchange Gain will be booked in this scenerio.
+
+
+
+In case you incur loss due to change foriegn exchnage rate, then different amount about be updated in the debit of Foreign Exchange Gain/Loss account. Also you can add another row to update another expenses like bank charges, remittance charges etc.
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/managing-transactions-in-multiple-currency.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/managing-transactions-in-multiple-currency.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6c6c9443
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/managing-transactions-in-multiple-currency.md
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+
+#Managing Transactions In Multiple Currency
+
+In ERPNext, transactions can be created in the base currency as well as in parties (customer or supplier) currency. If transaction is created in the parties currency, their currency symbol is updated in the print format as well.
+
+Let's consider a Sales Invoice, where your base currency is of a Company is USD and party currency is EUR.
+
+#### Step 1: New Sales Invoice
+
+`Accounts > Documents > Sales Invoice > New`
+
+#### Step 2: Select Party
+
+Select Customer from the Customer master. If default Currency is updated in the Customer master, same will be fetched in the Sales Invoice as well, as Customer Currency.
+
+#### Step 3: Exchange Rate
+
+Currency Exchange between base currency and customer currency will auto-fetch.
+
+
+
+#### Step 4: Update Details
+
+Update other details like Item, Taxes, Terms. In the Taxes and other Charges table, charges of type Actual should be updated in the Customer's currency.
+
+#### Step 4: Save and Submit
+
+Save Sales Invoice and then check Print Format. For all the Currency field (rate, amount, totals) Customer's Currency symbol will be updated as well.
+
+
+
+#### Currency Exchange Masters
+
+If you have come to terms with party to follow standard exchange rate throughout, you can capture it by creating Currency Exchange Rate master. To create new Currency Exchange Rate master, go to:
+
+`Accounts > Setup > Currency Exchange`
+
+ If system find Exchange Rate master for any currency, it is given preference over currency exchange rate.
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/post-dated-cheque-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/post-dated-cheque-entry.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..84cc3784
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/post-dated-cheque-entry.md
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+
+#Post Dated Cheque Entry
+
+Post Dated Cheque is a cheque dated on future date. Party generally give post dated cheque, as advance payment. This cheque would be cleared only when cheque date arrives.
+
+In ERPNext, create Payment Entry for post dated cheque.
+
+####New Payment Entry
+
+To open new journal voucher go to
+
+`Explore > Accounts > Payment Entry > New`
+
+#### Set Posting Date
+
+Assuming your Cheque Date is 31st December, 2016 (or any future date). As a result, this posting in your bank ledger will appear on Posting Date updated.
+
+
+
+Note: Payment Entry Reference Date should equal to or less than Posting Date.
+
+####Step 3: Save and Submit
+
+After entering required details, Save and Submit the Payment Entry.
+
+####Adjusting Post Dated Cheque Entry
+
+You can adjust Post Dated Payment Entry against an invoice via [Payment Reconciliation Tool]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.html).
+
+When cheque is cleared, i.e. on actual date on the cheque, you can update its Clearance Date via [Bank Reconciliation Tool]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.html).
+
+In the Chart of Accounts, you might find value of this Payment Entry already reflecting against bank Account. You should check **Bank Reconciliation Statement**, a report in the account module to know difference of bank balance as per system, and actual balance in the bank's statement.
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/tracking-project-profitability-using-cost-center.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/tracking-project-profitability-using-cost-center.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7f165b3c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/tracking-project-profitability-using-cost-center.md
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+
+#Tracking Project Profibitability using Cost Center
+
+To track expenses and profibility for a project, you can use Cost Centers. You should create separate Cost Center for each Project. This will allow you to.
+
+- Allocating budget on expense for Projects.
+- Tracking Profitability of Project.
+
+Let's check steps on how Project and Cost Center should be linked, and used in the sales and purchase transactions.
+
+### 1. Linking Project and Cost Center
+
+#### 1.1 Create Project
+
+To create new Project, go to:
+
+`Projects > Project > New`
+
+
+
+#### 1.2 Create Cost Center
+
+Since budgeting and costing for each Project will be managed separately, you should create separate Cost Center for each Project.
+
+To create new Cost Center, go to:
+
+`Accounts > Setup > Cost Center`
+
+[Click here to learn how to manage Cost Centers.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/cost-center.html)
+
+#### 1.3 Update Cost Center in the Project
+
+Update Cost Center in the Project master.
+
+
+
+In the sales and purchase transactions, if Project is selected, then Cost Center will fetched from the Project master.
+
+Let's check how this setting will affect your sales and purchase entries.
+
+### 2. Project and Cost Center in Sales & Purchase Transactions
+
+#### 2.1 Project in the Sales Transactions
+
+In the sales transactions (which are Sales Order, Delivery Note and Sales Invoice), Project will be selected in the More Info section. On selection of a Project, respective Cost Center will be updated for all the items in that transaction. Cost Center will be updated on in the transactions which has Cost Center field.
+
+
+
+#### 2.2 Project in the Purchase Transactions
+
+In the purchase transactions, Project is define for each line item. This is because you can create a consolidated purchase entry for various projects. On selection of Project, its default cost center will auto-fetch.
+
+As per perpetual inventory valuation system, expense for the purchased item will be booked when raw-materials are consumed. On consumption of goods, if you are creating Material Issue (stock) entry, then Expense Cost (says Cost of Goods Sold) and Project's Cost Center should be updated in that entry.
+
+
+
+### 3. Accounting Report for a Project
+
+#### 3.1 Projectwise Profitability
+
+Since Project's Cost Center is updated in both sales and purchase entries, you can check Project Profitability based on report on Cost Center.
+
+**Monthly Project Analysis**
+
+
+
+**Overall Profitability**
+
+
+
+#### 3.2 Projectwise Budgeting
+
+You can define budgets against the Cost Center associated with a Project. At any point of time, you can refer Budget Variance Report to analysis the expense vs budget against a cost center.
+
+To check Budget Variance report, go to:
+
+`Accounts > Budget and Cost Center > Budget Variance Report`
+
+[Click here to learn how to do budgeting from Cost Center]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/budgeting.html).
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/update-stock-option-in-sales-invoice.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/update-stock-option-in-sales-invoice.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9f7da0c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/update-stock-option-in-sales-invoice.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+#Delivery from Sales Invoice
+
+If you have items delivery and invoicing happening at the same time, you can create delivery from with Sales Invoice itself. Sales Invoice has field called **Update Stock**, just before Item table. If this field is checked, on submission of Sales Invoice, stock of Item will be deducted from selected Warehouse.
+
+
+
+On checking Update Stock, Sales Invoice Item will show relevant fields like Warehouse, Serial No., Batch No., Item valuation etc.
+
+On submission of Sales Invoice, with general ledger posting, stock ledger posting will happen as well.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/what-is-the-differences-of-total-and-valuation-in-tax-and-charges.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/what-is-the-differences-of-total-and-valuation-in-tax-and-charges.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f87d6bb3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/what-is-the-differences-of-total-and-valuation-in-tax-and-charges.md
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+
+#Purchase Tax or Charges Categories
+
+Consider Tax or Charge field in Purchase Taxes and Charges master has three values.
+
+- Total
+- Valuation
+- Total and Valuation
+
+
+
+Let's consider an example to understand an effect of each charge type. We purchase ten units of item, at the rate of 800. total purchase amount is 800. Purchased item has 4% VAT applied on it, and INR 100 was incurred in transportation.
+
+####Total:
+
+Tax or Charge categorized as **Total** will be included in the total of purchase transactions. But it will not have impact on the valuation of item purchased.
+
+If VAT 4% is applied on item, it will amount to INR 32 (at item's based rate is 800). Since VAT is the [consumption tax](https://frappe.io/blog/erpnext-features/managing-consumption-tax), its should be added value of Purchase Order/Invoice, since it will be included in payable towards supplier. But its should not be added to the value of Purchased item.
+
+When Purchase Invoice is submitted, general ledger posting will be done for tax/charge categorized as Total.
+
+####Valuation:
+
+Tax or charge categorized as **Valuation** will be added in the value of purchased item, but not in the total of that purchase transaction.
+
+Transportation charge of INR 100 should be categorized as valuation. With this, the value of purchased item will be increased from 800 to 900. Also, this charge will be not be added to the total of purchase transaction, because it your expense, and should not be reflected to the supplier.
+
+Check [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.html) to learn general posting done for expense categorized as Valuation.
+
+####Total and Valuation:
+
+Tax or Charge categorized as for **Total and Valuation** will be added in the valuation of item, as well as in the totals of purchase transactions.
+
+Let's assume that transportion is arranged by our supplier, but we need to pay transportation charges to them. In that case, for transportation charges, category selected should be Total and Valuation. With this, INR 100 transportation charge will be added to the actual purchase amount 800. Also, INR 100 will reflect in the total, as it will be payable for us towards supplier.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/withdrawing-salary-from-owners-equity-account.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/withdrawing-salary-from-owners-equity-account.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..60bf536b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/withdrawing-salary-from-owners-equity-account.md
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+#Withdrawing Salary from Owner's Equity Account
+
+### Question
+
+After meeting with my accountant here in the US, I was informed that with my company being a sole member, I should not pay myself a salary that would hit the direct expenses account but instead should take a "draw" that hits the balance sheet and not the expenses. Can you please advise how I should set this up in ERP Next please?
+
+### Answer
+
+1. Create an account for **Owner's Equity** under Liabilities if you already do not have. This account will be your investment in the business and the accumulated profits (or losses). It will have a "Credit" type balance.
+2. In an Version 5, Equity will be a new head (not under Liabilities). (In either case Assets = Owner's Equity + Liabilities, so your balance sheet will be okay [Learn more about owner's equity account](http://www.accountingcoach.com/blog/what-is-owners-equity)).
+3. Create an account for **Owner's Draws** under **Owner's Equity**.
+4. Note that the balance of **Owner's Draws** will always be negative since you are reducing money from your total equity / profits.
+
+### Example
+
+Example journal entry (using Journal Voucher in ERPNext) for a withdrawal of $1000 would be:
+
+1. Credit **Cash** $1000
+2. Debit **Owner's Draws** $1000
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/bank-guarantee.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/bank-guarantee.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9cc7f449
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/bank-guarantee.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+A Bank Guarantee is a guarantee from a lending institution such as a bank ensuring the liabilities of a debtor will be met. In other words, if the debtor fails to settle a debt, the bank covers it. A Bank Guarantee enables the customer, or debtor, to acquire goods, buy equipment or draw down loans, and thereby expand business activity.
+
+A client may ask you to provide a Bank Guarantee from a third party such as a bank. This guarantee is for a specified amount, which is usually a percentage of the total value of the contract. The Bank Guarantee is valid for a specified duration after which it expires and must be returned to you by the client.
+
+This document allows you to track Bank Guarantees given to clients. You can set Email Alerts as the Bank Guarantee expiry date approaches to remind yourself to get the Bank Guarantee back from your client.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/budgeting.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/budgeting.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..72d3b6d5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/budgeting.md
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+
+In ERPNext, you can set and manage Budgets against a specific Account. This is useful when, for example, you are doing online sales. You have a budget for search ads, and you want ERPNext to stop or warn you from over spending, based on that budget.
+
+Budgets are also great for planning purposes. When you are making plans for the next financial year, you would typically target a revenue based on which you would set your expenses. Setting a budget will ensure that your expenses do not get out of hand, at any point, as per your plans.
+
+In ERPNext, budget against an Account is defined via Cost Center. Following are the steps to define a Budget.
+
+###Cost Center
+
+To create new Cost Center, go to:
+
+> Accounts > Budget and Cost Center > Chart of Cost Center > Add New Cost Center
+
+
+
+###Budgeting
+
+####Step 1: Create a new Budget
+
+To define a Budget, go to:
+
+> Accounts > Budget and Cost Center > Budget > New
+
+####Step 2: Select Cost Center
+
+In the Budget form, select a Cost Center. Budgets can be defined against any Cost Center whether it is a Group / Leaf node in the Chart of Cost Centers.
+
+####Step 3: Select Account
+
+In the Budgets table, select Income / Expense account for which Budget is to be defined.
+
+
+
+####Step 4: Monthly Distribution
+
+If you have seasonal business, you can also define a Monthly Distribution record, to distribute the budget between months. If you don't set the monthly distribution, ERPNext will calculate the budget on yearly
+basis or in equal proportion for every month.
+
+
+
+####Step 5: Alert on Budget
+
+While setting budget, you can also define the actions when expenses will exceed the allocated budget for a period. You can set separate action for monthly and annual budgets. There are 3 types of actions: Stop, Warn and Ignore. If Stop, system will not allow to book expenses more than allocated budget. In Case of Warn, it will just warn the user that expenses has been exceeded from the allocated budget. And Ignore will do nothing.
+
+
+
+####Budget Variance Report
+
+At any point of time, user can check Budget Variance Report to analysis the expense vs budget against a cost center.
+
+To check Budget Variance report, go to:
+
+Accounts > Budget and Cost Center > Budget Variance Report
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/chart-of-accounts.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/chart-of-accounts.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bd96fa70
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/chart-of-accounts.md
@@ -0,0 +1,138 @@
+
+The Chart of Accounts forms the blueprint of your organization. The overall
+structure of your Chart of Accounts is based on a system of double entry
+accounting that has become a standard all over the world to quantify how a
+company is doing financially.
+
+The Chart of Accounts helps you to answer:
+
+ * What is your organisation worth?
+ * How much debt have you taken?
+ * How much profit are you making (and hence paying tax)?
+ * How much are you selling?
+ * What is your expense break-up
+
+You may note that as a business manager, it is very valuable to see how well
+your business is doing.
+
+> Tip: If you can’t read a Balance Sheet (It took me a long time to
+figure this out) it's a good opportunity to start learning about this. It will
+be worth the effort. You can also take the help of your accountant to setup
+your Chart of Accounts.
+
+Financial statements for your company are easily viewable in ERPNext. You can view financial statements
+such as Balance Sheet, Profit and Loss statement and Cash flow statement.
+
+An Example of various financial statement are given below:
+
+#### Cash Flow Report
+
+
+#### Profit and Loss Report
+
+
+#### Balance Sheet Report
+
+
+To edit your Chart of Accounts in ERPNext go to:
+
+> Accounts > Setup > Chart of Accounts
+
+Chart of Accounts is a tree view of the names of the Accounts (Ledgers and
+Groups) that a Company requires to manage its books of accounts. ERPNext sets
+up a simple chart of accounts for each Company you create, but you have to
+modify it according to your needs and legal requirements. For each company,
+Chart of Accounts signifies the way to classify the accounting entries, mostly
+based on statutory (tax, compliance to government regulations) requirements.
+
+Let us understand the main groups of the Chart of Accounts.
+
+
+
+### Balance Sheet Accounts
+
+The Balance Sheet has Application of Funds (/assets) and Sources of Funds
+(Liabilities) that signify the net-worth of your company at any given time.
+When you begin or end a financial period, all the Assets are equal to the
+Liabilities.
+
+> Accounting: If you are new to accounting, you might be wondering, how can
+Assets be equal to Liabilities? That would mean the company has nothing of its
+own. Thats right. All the “investment” made in the company to buy assets (like
+land, furniture, machines) is made by the owners and is a liability to the
+company. If the company would want to shut down, it would need to sell all the
+assets and pay back all the liabilities (including profits) to the owners,
+leaving itself with nothing.
+
+All the accounts under this represent an asset owned by the company like "Bank
+Account", "Land and Property", "Furniture" or a liability (funds that the
+company owes to others) like "Owners funds", "Debt" etc.
+
+Two special accounts to note here are Accounts Receivable (money you have to
+collect from your customers) and Accounts Payable (money you have to pay to
+your suppliers) under Assets and Liabilities respectively.
+
+### Profit and Loss Accounts
+
+Profit and Loss is the group of Income and Expense accounts that represent
+your accounting transactions over a period.
+
+Unlike Balance sheet accounts, Profit and Loss accounts (or PL accounts) do
+not represent net worth (/assets), but rather represent the amount of money
+spent and collected in servicing customers during the period. Hence at the
+beginning and end of your Fiscal Year, they become zero.
+
+In ERPNext it is easy to create a Profit and Loss analysis chart. An example
+of a Profit and Loss analysis chart is given below:
+
+
+
+(On the first day of the year you have not made any profit or loss, but you
+still have assets, hence balance sheet accounts never become zero at the
+beginning or end of a period)
+
+### Groups and Ledgers
+
+There are two main kinds of Accounts in ERPNext - Group and Ledger. Groups can
+have sub-groups and ledgers within them, whereas ledgers are the leaf nodes of
+your chart and cannot be further classified.
+
+Accounting Transactions can only be made against Ledger Accounts (not Groups)
+
+> Info: The term "Ledger" means a page in an accounting book where entries are
+made. There is usually one ledger for each account (like a Customer or a
+Supplier).
+
+> Note: An Account “Ledger” is also sometimes called as Account “Head”.
+
+
+
+### Other Account Types
+
+In ERPNext, you can also specify more information when you create a new
+Account, this is there to help you select that particular account in a
+scenario like Bank Account or a Tax Account and has no effect on the Chart
+itself.
+
+### Creating / Editing Accounts
+
+To create new Accounts, explore your Chart of Accounts and click on an Account
+group under which you want to create the new Account. On the right side, you
+will see an option to “Open” or “Add Child” a new Account.
+
+
+
+Option to create will only appear if you click on a Group (folder) type
+Account.
+
+ERPNext creates a standard structure for you when the Company is created but
+it is up to you to modify or add or remove accounts.
+
+Typically, you might want to create Accounts for
+
+ * Types of Expenses (travel, salaries, telephone etc) under Expenses.
+ * Taxes (VAT, Sales Tax etc based on your country) under Current Liabilities.
+ * Types of Sales (for example, Product Sales, Service Sales etc.) under Income.
+ * Types of Assets (building, machinery, furniture etc.) under Fixed Assets.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/credit-limit.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/credit-limit.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c3b3f467
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/credit-limit.md
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+
+
+
+A credit limit is the maximum amount of credit that a financial institution or
+other lender will extend to a debtor for a particular line of credit. From an
+organisation's perspective, it is the maximum amount of credit which a
+customer gets on goods purchased.
+
+To set credit limit go to Customer - Master
+
+> Selling > Document > Customer
+
+
+#### Figure 1: Credit Limit
+
+
+
+Go to the 'More Info section' and enter the amount in the field Credit Limit.
+
+In case a need arises to allow more credit to the customer as a good-will, the
+Credit Controller has access to submit order even if credit limit is crossed.
+
+To allow any other role to submit transactions by customers whose credit limit
+has expired, go to accounting settings and make changes.
+
+In the field Credit Controller, select the role who would be authorized to
+accept orders or raise credit limits of customers.
+
+#### Figure 2: Credit Controller
+
+
+
+Save the changes.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2fab61e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+
+At the end of sales and purchase cycle comes billing and payments. You may have
+an accountant in your team, or you may be doing accounting yourself, or you may
+have outsourced your accounting. In all the cases financial accounting forms the core of any business management system like an ERP.
+
+In ERPNext, your accounting operations consists of 3 main transactions:
+
+ * Sales Invoice: The bills that you raise to your Customers for the products or services you provide.
+ * Purchase Invoice: Bills that your Suppliers give you for their products or services.
+ * Journal Entries: For accounting entries, like payments, credit and other types.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6a0da3a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+chart-of-accounts
+opening-accounts
+sales-invoice
+point-of-sale-pos-invoice
+purchase-invoice
+payments
+journal-entry
+payment-entry
+multi-currency-accounting
+advance-payment-entry
+payment-request
+credit-limit
+bank-guarantee
+accounting-reports
+accounting-entries
+managing-fixed-assets
+budgeting
+item-wise-taxation
+recurring-orders-and-invoices
+pricing-rule
+tools
+setup
+articles
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/item-wise-taxation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/item-wise-taxation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..328440b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/item-wise-taxation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+
+In the sales and purchase transactions, you can apply taxes and other charges on the items. For the ease of applying taxes, you can fetch values from the [Sales Taxes and Charges master](/contents//setting-up/setting-up-taxes). Taxes and charges are applied equally on all the items. For example, if tax GST 16% is added in the tax table, then it will be applied on all the items. However, if you need to have different tax rate applied on some of the items, following is how you should setup Items and Sales Taxes and Other Charges master in your ERPNext account.
+
+Let's assume that we are creating a Sales Order. We have Sales Taxes and Charges master for GST 16%. Out of all the Sales Items, on one item, only 12% GST will be applied, while one more item is exempted from the tax.
+
+####Step 1: Mention Tax Applicable in the Item master
+
+Items on which differential tax rate is applied, you should mention tax rate for that item in the Item master itself. Item master has tax table where you can list taxes which will be applied on it.
+
+> Tax rate mentioned in the item master gets preference over tax rate entered in the transactions.
+
+Here is the example of Item on which 12% GST is applied only.
+
+
+
+For the item which is exempted from GST totally, mention 0% as tax rate in the Item master.
+
+
+
+####Step 2: Setup Taxes and Other Charges
+
+In Sales Taxes and Other Charges master, select GST 16% account and mention Tax Rate as 16. This tax rate will be applied on all the Items selected in the Sales Order, unless specific Tax Rate is defined in the Item master.
+
+
+
+If you want to have tax rate always applied from the Item master, then you should update Rate for the tax account as zero in the Taxes and Charges master.
+
+####Step 3: Tax Calculation in transaction
+
+In the Sales Order, we have selected many Items. For the items mentioned in blue, tax rate is applied based on tax rate mentioned in the taxes table. For the items highlited in red, tax rate has fetched for them from the respective item master.
+
+
+
+Please note that item's tax rate will be pulled from the item master only if you have update same tax account (GST 16% in this case) in both Item master and tax master.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/journal-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/journal-entry.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7065642b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/journal-entry.md
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+
+All types of accounting entries other than **Sales Invoice** and **Purchase
+Invoice** are made using the **Journal Entry**. A **Journal Entry**
+is a standard accounting transaction that affects
+multiple Accounts and the sum of debits is equal to the sum of credits.
+
+To create a Journal Entry go to:
+
+> Accounts > Documents > Journal Entry > New
+
+
+
+In a Journal Entry, you must select.
+
+ * Type of Voucher from the drop down.
+ * Add rows for the individual accounting entries. In each row, you must specify:
+ * The Account that will be affected
+ * The amount to Debit or Credit
+ * The Cost Center (if it is an Income or Expense)
+ * Against Voucher: Link it to a voucher or invoice if it affects the “outstanding” amount of that invoice.
+ * Is Advance: Select “Yes” if you want to make it selectable in an Invoice. Other information in case it is a Bank Payment or a bill.
+
+#### Difference
+
+The “Difference” field is the difference between the Debit and Credit amounts.
+This should be zero if the Journal Entry is to be “Submitted”. If this
+number is not zero, you can click on “Make Difference Entry” to add a new row
+with the amount required to make the total as zero.
+
+* * *
+
+## Common Entries
+
+A look at some of the common accounting entries that can be done via Journal
+Voucher.
+
+#### Expenses (non accruing)
+
+Many times it may not be necessary to accrue an expense, but it can be
+directly booked against an expense Account on payment. For example a travel
+allowance or a telephone bill. You can directly debit Telephone Expense
+(instead of your telephone company) and credit your Bank on payment.
+
+ * Debit: Expense Account (like Telephone expense)
+ * Credit: Bank or Cash Account
+
+#### Bad Debts or Write Offs
+
+If you are writing off an Invoice as a bad debt, you can create a Journal
+Voucher similar to a Payment, except instead of debiting your Bank, you can
+debit an Expense Account called Bad Debts.
+
+ * Debit: Bad Debts Written Off
+ * Credit: Customer
+
+> Note: There may be regulations in your country before you can write off bad
+debts.
+
+#### Depreciation
+
+Depreciation is when you write off certain value of your assets as an expense.
+For example if you have a computer that you will use for say 5 years, you can
+distribute its expense over the period and pass a Journal Entry at the end
+of each year reducing its value by a certain percentage.
+
+ * Debit: Depreciation (Expense)
+ * Credit: Asset (the Account under which you had booked the asset to be depreciated)
+
+> Note: There may be regulations in your country that define by how much
+amount you can depreciate a class of Assets.
+
+#### Credit Note
+
+"Credit Note" is made for a Customer against a Sales Invoice when the
+company needs to adjust a payment for returned goods. When a Credit Note
+is made, the seller can either make a payment to the customer or adjust
+the amount in another invoice.
+
+ * Debit: Sales Return Account
+ * Credit: Customer Account
+
+#### Debit Note
+
+"Debit Note" is made for a Supplier against a Purchase Invoice or accepted
+as a credit note from supplier when a company returns goods. When a Debit
+Note is made, the company can either receive a payment from the supplier or
+adjust the amount in another invoice.
+
+ * Debit: Supplier Account
+ * Credit: Purchase Return Account
+
+#### Excise Entry
+
+When a Company buys good from a Supplier, company pays excise duty
+on these goods to Supplier. And when a company sells these goods to Customers,
+it receives excise duty. Company will deduct payable excise duty and deposit balance
+in Govt. account.
+
+ * When a Company buys goods with Excise duty:
+ * Debit: Purchase Account
+ * Debit: Excise Duty Account
+ * Credit: Supplier Account
+
+ * When a Company sells goods with Excise duty:
+ * Debit: Customer Account
+ * Credit: Sales Account
+ * Credit: Excise Duty Account
+
+> Note: Applicable in India, might not be applicable for your Country.
+Please check your country regulations.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/managing-fixed-assets.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/managing-fixed-assets.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b140b902
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/managing-fixed-assets.md
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+
+In ERPNext, you can maintain fixed asset records like Computers, Furnitures, Cars, etc. and manage depreciations, sale or disposal of those assets.
+
+## Asset Category
+
+Based on the type of assets, create Asset Category. For example, all your desktops and laptops can be part of an Asset Category named "Computers". Here you can set default depreciation method, periodicity and depreciation related accounts, which will be applicable to all the assets under the category.
+
+
+
+> **Note:** You can also set default depreciation related Accounts and Cost Centers in Company master.
+
+## Asset
+
+Asset master is the heart of fixed asset management feature. All the transactions related to Asset like purchasing, sales, depreciation, scrapping will be managed from the Asset master.
+
+
+
+Explanation of the fields:
+
+1. Item Code: An Item for the Asset must be a non-stock item, with "Is Asset" field checked.
+
+ 
+
+2. Asset Category: The category of assets it belongs to.
+3. Is Existing Asset: Check if the asset is being carried forward from the previous Fiscal Year. The existing assets which are partially / fully depreciated can also be created/maintained for the future reference.
+4. Status: The options are - Draft, Submitted, Partially Depreciated, Fully Depreciated, Sold and Scrapped.
+5. Warehouse: Set the location of the asset.
+6. Gross Purchase Amount: The purchase cost of the asset.
+7. Expected Value After Useful Life: Useful Life is the time period over in which the company expects that the asset will be productive. After that period, either the asset is scrapped or sold. In case it is sold, mention the estimated value here. This value is also known as Salvage Value, Scrap Value or Residual Value.
+8. Opening Accumulated Depreciation: The accumulated depreciation amount which has already been booked for an existing asset.
+9. Current Value (After Depreciation): In case you are creating record of an existing asset which has already been partially/fully depreciated, mention the current value of the asset. In case of new asset, mention the purchase amount or leave it blank.
+10. Depreciation Method: There are two options: Straight Line and Double Declining Balance.
+ - Straight Line: This method spreads the cost of the fixed asset evenly over its useful life.
+ - Double Declining Method: An accelerated method of depreciation, it results in higher depreciation expense in the earlier years of ownership.
+10. Total Number of Depreciations: The total number of depreciations during the useful life. In case of existing assets which are partially depreciated, mention the number of pending depreciations.
+11. Number of Depreciations Booked: Enter the number of already booked depreciations for an existing asset.
+12. Frequency of Depreciation (Months): The number of months between two depreciations.
+13. Next Depreciation Date: Mention the next depreciation date, even if it is the first one. If the asset is an existing one and depreciation has already been completed, leave it blank.
+
+### Depreciations
+
+The system automatically creates a schedule for depreciation based on depreciation method and other related inputs in the Asset record.
+
+
+
+On the scheduled date, system creates depreciation entry by creating a Journal Entry and the same Journal Entry is updated in the depreciation table for reference. Next Depreciation Date and Current Value are also updated on submission of depreciation entry.
+
+
+
+In the depreciation entry, the "Accumulated Depreciation Account" is credited and "Depreciation Expense Account" is debited. The related accounts can be set in the Asset Category or Company.
+
+For better visibility, net value of the asset on different depreciation dates are shown in a line graph.
+
+
+
+
+## Purchase an Asset
+
+For purchasing a new asset, create and submit the asset record with all the depreciation settings. Then create a Purchase Invoice via "Make Purchase Invoice" button. On clicking the button, system will load a new Purchase Invoice form with pre-loaded items table. It will also set proper fixed asset account (defined in the Asset Category) in the Expense Account field. You need to select Supplier and other necessary details and submit the Purchase Invoice.
+
+
+
+On submission of the invoice, the "Fixed Asset Account" will be debited and payable account will be credited. It also updates purchase date, supplier and Purchase Invoice no. in the Asset master.
+
+
+## Sell an Asset
+
+To sell an asset, open the asset record and create a Sales Invoice by clicking on "Sell Asset". On submission of the Sales Invoice, following entries will take place:
+
+- "Receivable Account" (Debtors) will be debited by the sales amount.
+- "Fixed Asset Account" will be credited by the purchase amount of asset.
+- "Accumulated Depreciation Account" will be debited by the total depreciated amount till now.
+- "Gain/Loss Account on Asset Disposal" will be credited/debited based on gain/loss amount. The Gain/Loss account can be set in Company record.
+
+
+
+
+## Scrap an Asset
+
+You can scrap an asset anytime using the "Scrap Asset" button in the Asset record. The "Gain/Loss Account on Asset Disposal" mentioned in the Company is debited by the Current Value (After Depreciation) of the asset. After scrapping, you can also restore the asset using "Restore Asset" button.
+
+
+
+## Asset Movement
+
+The movement of the assets (from one warehouse to another) is also tracked via Asset Movement form.
+
+
+
+There is also a dedicated button "Transfer Asset" inside the Asset form to track the Asset Movement.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..048d1b92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.md
@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
+
+In ERPNext, you can make accounting entries in multiple currency. For example, if you have a bank account in foreign currency, you can make transactions in that currency and system will show bank balance in that specific currency only.
+
+## Setup
+
+To get started with multi-currency accounting, you need to assign accounting currency in Account record. You can define Currency from Chart of Accounts while creating Account.
+
+
+
+You can also assign / modify the currency by opening specific Account record for existing Accounts.
+
+
+
+For Customer / Supplier (Party), you can also define it's billing currency in the Party record. If the Party's accounting currency is different from Company Currency, you should mention Default Receivable / Payable Account in that currency.
+
+
+
+
+Once you defined Currency in the Account and selected relevant accounts in the Party record , you are ready to make transactions against them. If Party account currency is different from Company Currency, system will restrict to make transaction for that party with that currency only. If account currency is same as Company Currency, you can make transactions for that Party in any currency. But accounting entries (GL Entries) will always be in Party Account Currency.
+
+You can change accounting currency in Party / Account record, until making any transactions against them. After making accounting entries, system will not allow to change the currency for both Party / Account record.
+
+In case of multi-company setup, accounting currency of Party must be same for all the companies.
+
+## Transactions
+
+### Sales Invoice
+
+In Sales Invoice, transaction currency must be same as accounting currency of Customer if Customer's accounting currency is other than Company Currency. Otherwise, you can select any currency in Invoice. On selection of Customer, system will fetch Receivable account from Customer / Company. The currency of receivable account must be same as Customer's accounting currency.
+
+Now, in POS, Paid Amount will be entered in transaction currency, instead of earlier Company Currency. Write Off Amount will also be entered in transaction currency.
+
+Outstanding Amount and Advance Amount will always be calculated and shown in Customer's Account Currency.
+
+
+
+### Purchase Invoice
+
+Similarly, in Purchase Invoice, accounting entries will be made based on Supplier's accounting currency. Outstanding Amount and Advance Amount will also be shown in the supplier's accounting currency. Write Off Amount will now be entered in transaction currency.
+
+### Journal Entry
+
+In Journal Entry, you can make transactions in different currencies. There is a checkbox "Multi Currency", to enable multi-currency entries. If "Multi Currency" option selected, you will be able to select accounts with different currencies.
+
+
+
+
+In Accounts table, on selection of foreign currency account, system will show Currency section and fetch Account Currency and Exchange Rate automatically. You can change / modify the Exchange Rate later manually. Debit / Credit amount should be entered in Account Currency, system will calculate and show the Debit / Credit amount in Company Currency automatically.
+
+
+
+#### Example 1: Payment Entry Against Customer With Alternate Currency
+
+Suppose, default currency of the company is INR and customer's accounting currency is USD. Customer made full payment against an outstanding invoice of USD 100. Exchange Rate (USD -> INR) in Sales Invoice was 60.
+
+Exchange Rate in the payment entry should always be same as invoice (60), even if exchange rate on the payment date is 62. The bank account will be credited by the amount considering exchange rate as 62. Hence, Exchnage Gain / Loss will be booked based on exchange rate difference.
+
+
+
+#### Example 2: Inter-bank Transfer (USD -> INR)
+
+Suppose the default currency of the company is INR. You have a Paypal account for which Currency is USD. You receive payments in the paypal account and lets say, paypal transfers amount once in a week to your other bank account which is managed in INR.
+
+Paypal account gets debited on different date with different exchange rate, but on transfer date the exchange rate can be different. Hence, there is generally Exchange Loss / Gain on the transfer entry.
+In the bank transfer entry, system sets exchange rate of the credit account (Paypal) based on the average incoming exchange rate. This is to maintain Paypal balance properly in company currency. In case you modify the average exchange rate, you need to adjust the exchange rate manually in the future entries, so that balance in account currency and company currency are in sync.
+Then you should calculate and enter Exchange Loss / Gain based on the Paypal exchange rate and the exchange rate on the transfer date.
+
+Lets say, Paypal account debited by following amounts over the week, which has not been transferred to your other bank account.
+
+| Date | +Account | +Debit (USD) | +Exchange Rate | +
| 2015-09-02 | +Paypal | +100 | +60 | +
| 2015-09-02 | +Paypal | +100 | +61 | +
| 2015-09-02 | +Paypal | +100 | +64 | +
+
+
+## Reports
+
+### General Ledger
+
+In General Ledger, system shows debit / credit amount in both currency if filtered by an Account and Account Currency is different from Company Currency.
+
+
+
+### Accounts Receivable / Payable
+
+In Accounts Receivable / Payable report, system shows all the amounts in Party / Account Currency.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/opening-accounts.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/opening-accounts.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7c0afca7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/opening-accounts.md
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+
+#Updating Opening Balance in Accounts
+
+If you are a new company you can start using ERPNext accounting module by going to chart of accounts. However, if you are migrating from a legacy accounting system like Tally or a Fox Pro based software
+
+We recommend that you start using accounting in a new financial year, but you could start midway too. To setup your accounts, you will need the following for the “day” you start using accounting in ERPNext:
+
+* Opening capital accounts - like your shareholder’s (or owner’) capital, loans, bank balances on that day.
+
+* List of outstanding sales and purchase invoices (Payables and Receivables).
+
+If you were using another accounting software before, firstly you should close financial statements in that software. The closing balance of the accounts should be updated as an opening balance in the ERPNext. Before starting to update opening balance, ensure that your [Chart of Accounts]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/chart-of-accounts.html) has all the Accounts required.
+
+> Opening entry is only for Balance Sheet accounts and not for the Accounts in the Profit and Loss statement.
+
+ * For all assets (excluding Accounts Receivables): This entry will contain all your assets except the amounts you are expecting from your Customers against outstanding Sales Invoices. You will have to update your receivables by making an individual entry for each Invoice (this is because, the system will help you track the invoices which are yet to be paid). You can credit the sum of all these debits against the **Temporary Opening** account.
+
+ * For all liabilities: Similarly you need to pass a Journal Entry for your Opening Liabilities (except for the bills you have to pay) against **Temporary Opening** account.
+
+###Opening Entry
+
+####Step 1: New Journal Entry
+
+To open new Journal Entry, go to:
+
+`Explore > Accounts > Journal Entry`
+
+####Step 2: Entry Type
+
+If Entry Type is selected as Opening Entry, all the Balance Sheet Accounts will be auto-fetched in the Journal Entry.
+
+
+
+####Step 3: Posting Date
+
+Select Posting Date on which Accounts Opening Balance will be updated.
+
+####Step 4: Enter Debit/Credit Value
+
+For each Account, enter opening value in the Debit or Credit column. As per the double entry valuation system, Total Debit value in a entry must be equal to Total Credit value.
+
+
+
+####Step 5: Is Opening
+
+Set field `Is Opening` as `Yes`.
+
+
+
+####Step 6: Save and Submit
+
+After enter opening balance for each account, Save and Submit Journal Entry. To check if Opening Balance for an account is updated correctly, you can check Trial Balance report.
+
+###Selecting Accounts Manually
+
+If your Balance Sheet has many Accounts, then updating Account Opening balance from single Journal Entry can lead to performance issues. In such a scenario, you can multiple Journal Entries to update opening balance in all the Accounts.
+
+If you are updating account opening balance in few accounts at a time, you can use **Temporary Opening** account for balancing purpose. In the standard chart of accounts, a Temporary Opening Account is auto-created under Assets.
+
+
+
+In the Journal Entry, manually select an Account for which opening balance is to be updated. For each Account, enter opening balance value in the Debit or Credit column, based on it's Account Type (Asset or Liability).
+
+For example, if you want to update balance in bank accounts, create Journal Entry as following.
+
+
+
+Once all your invoices are entered, your **Temporary Opening** account will have a balance of zero!
+
+###Trial Balance
+
+After completing the accounting entries, the trial balance report will look like the one given below:
+
+
+
+###Stock Opening
+
+To track stock balance in the Chart of Account, an Account is created for each Warehouse.
+
+`Chart of Accounts > Assets > Current Asset > StocK Assets > (Warehouse Account)`
+
+
+
+To update stock opening balance, create [Stock Reconciliation entry]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/opening-stock.html). Based on the valuation of items's update in the Warehouse, balance will be updated in the Warehouse account.
+
+###Fixed Asset Opening
+
+Opening balance for the fixed asset account should be updated via Journal Entry. Assets which are not fully depreciated should be added in the [Asset master]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/managing-fixed-assets.html). For adding Assets in your possession, ensure to check **Is Existing Asset** field.
+
+### Outstanding Invoices
+
+After opening Journal Entries are made, you will need to enter each Sales Invoice and Purchase Invoice that is yet to be paid.
+
+Since you have already booked the income or expense on these invoices in the previous period, select **Temporary Opening** in the “Income” and “Expense” accounts.
+
+> Note: Make sure to set each invoice as “Is Opening”!
+
+If you don’t care what items are in that invoice, just make a dummy item entry in the Invoice. Item code in the Invoice is not necessary, so it should not be such a problem.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-entry.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d09380ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-entry.md
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+
+Payment Entry can be made against following transactions.
+
+ 1. Sales Invoice.
+ 2. Purchase Invoice.
+ 3. Sales Order (Advance Payment)
+ 4. Purchase Order (Advance Payment)
+
+####Step 1: Make Payment
+
+On submitting a document against which Payment Entry can be made, you will find Make Payment button.
+
+
+
+####Step 2: Mode of Payment
+
+In the Payment Entry, select Mode of Payment (eg: Bank, Cash, Wire Transfer). In the Mode of Payment master, default Account can be set. This default payment Account will fetch into Payment Entry.
+
+
+
+####Step 3: Payment Amount
+
+Enter actual payment amount received from the Customer or paid to the Supplier.
+
+
+
+####Step 4: Allocate Amount
+
+If creating Payment Entry for the Customer, Payment Amount will be allocated against Sales Invoice.
+
+
+
+On the same lines, when creating Payment Entry for a Supplier, Payment Amount will be allocated against Purchase Invoice.
+
+You Entry can be created directly from `Account > Payment Entry > New`. In the new entry, on selection of the Party (Customer/Supplier), all the outstanding Invoices and open Orders will be fetched for party. The Payment Amount will be auto-allocated, preferably against invoice.
+
+####Step 5: Deductions
+
+When making payment entry, there could be some difference in the actual payment amount and the invoice outstanding. This difference could be due to rounding error, or change in the currency exchange rate. You can set an Account here where this difference amount will be booked.
+
+
+
+####Step 6: Submit
+
+Save and Submit Payment Entry. On submission, outstanding will be updated in the Invoices.
+
+
+
+If payment entry was created against Sales Order or Purchase Order, field Advance Paid will be updated in them. when creating Payment invoice against those transactions, Payment Entry will auto-update in that Invoice, so that you can allocate invoice amount against advance payment entry.
+
+For incoming payment, accounts posting will be done as following.
+
+ * Debit: Bank or Cash Account
+ * Credit: Customer (Debtor)
+
+For outgoing payment:
+
+ * Debit: Supplier (Creditor)
+ * Credit: Bank or Cash Account
+
+###Multi Currency Payment Entry
+
+ERPNext allows you maintain accounts and invoicing in the [multiple currency]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/multi-currency-accounting.html). If invoice is made in the party currency, Currency Exchange Rate between companies base currency and party currency is also entered in the invoice. When creating Payment Entry against that invoice, you will again have to mention the Currency Exchange Rate at the time of payment.
+
+
+
+Since Currency Exchange Rate is fluctuating all the time, it can lead to difference in the payment amount against invoice total. This difference amount can be booked in the Currency Exchange Gain/Loss Amount.
+
+
+
+Payments can also be made independent of invoices by creating a new Payment Entry.
+
+###Internal Intransfer
+
+Following internal transfers can be managed from the Payment Entry.
+
+1. Bank - Cash
+2. Cash - Bank
+3. Cash - Cash
+4. Bank - Bank
+
+
+
+###Difference between Payment Entry and Journal Entry?
+
+ 1. Journal Entry requires understanding of which Account will get Debited or Credited. In the Payment Entry, it is managed in the backend, hence simpler for the User.
+ 2. Payment Entry is more efficient in managing payment in the foreign currency.
+ 3. Journal Entry can still be used for:
+ - Updating opening balance in an Accounts.
+ - Fixed Asset Depreciation entry.
+ - For adjusting Credit Note against Sales Invoice and Debit Note against Purchase Invoice, incase there is no payment happening at all.
+
+* * *
+
+## Managing Outstanding Payments
+
+In most cases, apart from retail sales, billing and payments are separate activities. There are several combinations in which these payments are done. These cases apply to both sales and purchases.
+
+ * They can be upfront (100% in advance).
+ * Post shipment. Either on delivery or within a few days of delivery.
+ * Part in advance and part on or post delivery.
+ * Payments can be made together for a bunch of invoices.
+ * Advances can be given together for a bunch of invoices (and can be split across invoices).
+
+ERPNext allows you to manage all these scenarios. All accounting entries (GL Entry) can be made against a Sales Invoice, Purchase Invoice or Payment Entry of advance payment (in special cases, an invoice can be made via a Sales Invoice too).
+
+The total outstanding amount against an invoice is the sum of all the accounting entries that are made “against” (or are linked to) that invoice. This way you can combine or split payments in Payment Entry to manage the
+scenarios.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-request.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-request.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ca8cda8a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-request.md
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+
+Payment Request is sent via Email and will contain a link to a Payment Gateway if setup. You can create payment request via Sales Order or Sales Invoice.
+
+- Create Payment Request via Sales Order
+
+
+- Create payment Request via Sales Invoice
+
+
+---
+
+Select appropriate Payment Gateway Account on Payment Request. Account head specified on payment gateway will
+considered to create journal entry.
+
+Note: Invoice/Order currency and Payment Gateway Account currency should be same.
+
+
+
+---
+
+##### Notify Customer
+You can notify customer from Payment Request with print format. If customer contact email is mentioned, it will automatically fetch email. If not so you can set Email Address on Payment Request.
+
+
+
+##### Request Mail
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payments.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payments.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..592875dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/payments.md
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+
+Payment can be made against following transactions.
+
+ 1. Sales Invoice.
+ 2. Purchase Invoice.
+ 3. Sales Order (Advance Payment)
+ 4. Purchase Order (Advance Payment)
+
+In ERPNext, there is two options through which user can capture the payment
+
+ 1. Payment Entry(Default).
+ 2. Journal Entry.
+
+## Payment Entry
+
+####Step 1: Make Payment
+
+On submitting a document against which Payment Entry can be made, you will find Make Payment button.
+
+
+
+####Step 2: Payment Entry
+
+
+
+For more details about payment entry [check here.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/payment-entry)
+
+## Journal Entry
+
+To make paymant using journal entry, check below steps
+
+####Step 1: Activate Payment via Journal Entry
+
+Goto Accounts Settings > checked Make Payment via Journal Entry
+
+
+
+####Step 2: Make Payment
+
+On submitting a document against which Journal Entry can be made, you will find Make Payment button.
+
+
+
+####Step 3: Journal Entry
+
+Save and submit the journal entry to record the payament against the invoice
+
+
+For more details about journal entry [check here.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/journal-entry)
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/point-of-sale-pos-invoice.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/point-of-sale-pos-invoice.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c8ec5d0d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/point-of-sale-pos-invoice.md
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+
+# Point of Sale Invoice
+
+For retail operations, the delivery of goods, accrual of sale and payment all happens in one event, that is usually called the “Point of Sale” (POS).
+
+
+
+###Offline POS
+
+In the retails business, invoicing needs to done very quickly, hence should less dependency. In the ERPNext, you can create POS Invoices, even when not connected to the internet.
+
+POS Invoices created in the offline mode will be saved locally in the browser. If internet connection is lost which creating POS Invoice, you will still be able can proceed forward. Once internet connection is available again, offline invoices will be synced, and pushed onto your ERPNext account. To learn more on how POS Invoices can be created when offline, [check here.](https://frappe.io/blog/blog/erpnext-features/offline-pos-in-erpnext-7)
+
+#### POS Profile
+
+In ERPNext all Sales and Purchase transactions, like Sales Invoice, Quotation, Sales Order, Purchase Order etc. can be edited via the POS. There two steps to Setup POS:
+
+1. Enable POS View via (Setup > Customize > Feature Setup)
+2. Create a [POS Setting]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/pos-setting.html) record
+
+#### Different sections of the POS
+
+ * Update Stock: If this is checked, Stock Ledger Entries will be made when you “Submit” this Sales Invoice thereby eliminating the need for a separate Delivery Note.
+ * In your Items table, update inventory information like Warehouse (saved as default), Serial Number, or Batch Number if applicable.
+ * Update Payment Details like your Bank / Cash Account, Paid amount etc.
+ * If you are writing off certain amount. For example when you receive extra cash as a result of not having exact denomination of change, check on ‘Write off Outstanding Amount’ and set the Account.
+
+
+### Customer
+
+In POS, user can select the existing customer during making an order or create the new customer. This features works in the offline mode also. User can also add the customer details like contact number, address details etc on the form. The customer which has been created from the POS will be synced when the internet connection is active.
+
+
+
+### Adding an Item
+
+At the billing counter, the retailer needs to select Items which the consumer buys. In the POS interface you can select an Item by two methods. One, is by clicking on the Item image and the other, is through the Barcode / Serial No.
+
+**Select Item** \- To select a product click on the Item image and add it into the cart. A cart is an area that prepares a customer for checkout by allowing to edit product information, adjust taxes and add discounts.
+
+**Barcode / Serial No** \- A Barcode / Serial No is an optical machine-readable representation of data relating to the object to which it is attached. Enter Barcode / Serial No in the box as shown in the image below and pause for a second, the item will be automatically added to the cart.
+
+
+
+> Tip: To change the quantity of an Item, enter your desired quantity in the
+quantity box. These are mostly used if the same Item is purchased in bulk.
+
+If your product list is very long use the Search field, type the product name
+in Search box.
+
+### Removing an Item from the Cart
+
+1. Select row in the cart and clik on delete button in the numeric keypad
+
+
+
+
+2. Set Qty as zero to remove Item from the POS invoice. There are two ways to remove an Item.
+
+ * If Item's Qty is 1, click on a minus sign to make it zero.
+
+ * Manually enter 0(zero) quantity.
+
+### Make Payment
+
+After all the Items and their quantities are added into the cart, you are
+ready to make the Payment. Payment process is divided into 3 steps -
+
+ 1. Click on “Make Payment” to get the Payment window.
+ 2. Select your “Mode of Payment”.
+ 3. Click on “Pay” button to Save the document.
+
+
+
+Submit the document to finalise the record. After the document is submitted,
+you can either print or email it directly to the customer.
+
+### Write off Amount
+
+Outstanding amount can be write off from the POS, user has to enter the amount under write off field on the payment screen.
+
+
+
+System books the write off amount into the ledger which has selected on the POS Profile.
+
+### Change Amount
+
+POS calculate the extra amount paid by the customer, which user can return from the cash account. User has to set the account for the change amount on the POS profile.
+
+
+
+### Offline Records
+All the records from the POS stores into the browser's local storegae and sync submitted records after every minute of the interval if system is connected to internet. User can view the offline records by clicking on Menu > View Offline Records
+
+
+
+#### Accounting entries (GL Entry) for a Point of Sale:
+
+Debits:
+
+ * Customer (grand total)
+ * Bank / Cash (payment)
+
+Credits:
+
+ * Income (net total, minus taxes for each Item)
+ * Taxes (liabilities to be paid to the government)
+ * Customer (payment)
+ * Write Off (optional)
+ * Account for Change Amount (optional)
+
+To see entries after “Submit”, click on “View Ledger”.
+
+### Email
+User can send email from the POS, after submission of an order, user has to click on menu > email
+
+After sync of an order, email sent to the customer with the print of the bill in the attachment
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/pricing-rule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/pricing-rule.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3d754082
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/pricing-rule.md
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+
+#Pricing Rule
+
+Pricing Rule is a master where you can define rules based on which discount is applied to specific Customer or Supplier.
+### Scenario:
+
+Following are the few cases which can be addressed using Pricing Rule.
+
+1. As per the promotional sale policy, if customer purchases more than 10 units of an item, he enjoys 20% discount.
+
+2. For Customer "XYZ", selling price for the specific Item should be updated as ###.
+
+3. Items categorized under specific Item Group has same selling or buying price.
+
+4. Customers balonging to specific Customer Group should get ### selling price, ot % of Discount on Items.
+
+5. Supplier's categorized under specific Supplier Type should have ### buying rate applied.
+
+To have %Discount and Price List Rate for an Item auto-applied, you should create Pricing Rules for it.
+
+Pricing Rule master has two sections:
+
+### 1. Applicability Section:
+
+In this section, conditions are set for the application of Pricing Rule. When transaction meets condition as specified in this section, Price or Discount as specified in the Pricing Rule will be applied. You can set condition on following values.
+
+####1.1 Applicable On:
+
+
+
+If you want Pricing Rule to be applied on all the items, select based on Item Group. For value, select **All Item Group** (parent Item Group).
+
+####1.2 Applicable For:
+
+Applicability option will updated based on our selection for Selling or Buying or both. You can set applicability on one of the following master.
+
+
+
+####1.3 Quantity:
+
+Specify minimum and maximum qty of an item when this Pricing Rule should be applicable.
+
+
+
+###2. Application:
+
+Using Price List Rule, you can ultimately define price or %discount to be applied on an item.
+
+
+
+####2.1 Price
+
+Price or Discount specified in the Pricing Rule will be applied only if above applicability rules are matched with values in the transaction. Price mentioned in Pricing Rule will be given priority over item's Price List rate.
+
+
+
+#### 2.2 Discount Percentage
+
+Discount Percentage can be applied for a specific Price List. To have it applied for all the Price List, %Discount field should be left blank.
+
+
+
+If %Discount is to be applied on all Price Lists, then leave Price List field blank.
+
+#### Validity
+
+Enter From and To date between which this Pricing Rule will be applicable. This will be useful if creating Pricing Rule for sales promotion exercise available for certain days.
+
+
+
+#### Priority
+
+If two or more Pricing Rules are found based on same conditions, Priority is applied. Priority is a number between 0 to 20 while default value is zero (blank). Higher number means it will take precedence if there are multiple Pricing Rules with same conditions.
+
+
+
+#### Disable
+
+Check to Disable Pricing Rule.
+
+
+
+### Add Margin
+
+Using pricing rule user can add margin on the sales transactions
+
+For example : User want to add 10% margin on the supplier price list at the time of sales
+
+####1. Make Price List
+
+Create price list for supllier and create item price against the price list.
+
+
+
+
+####2. Make Pricing Rule
+
+Create pricing rule for the item against which supplier rate has created
+
+
+
+####2. Make Invoice
+
+System apply the margin rate on the item price on selection of an item.
+
+
+
+For more details about pricing rule [Click Here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/selling/articles/adding-margin.html)
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/purchase-invoice.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/purchase-invoice.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..21d3d7a3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/purchase-invoice.md
@@ -0,0 +1,94 @@
+
+Purchase Invoice is the exact opposite of your Sales Invoice. It is the bill
+that your Supplier sends you for products or services delivered. Here you
+accrue expenses to your Supplier. Making a Purchase Invoice is very similar to
+making a Purchase Order.
+
+To make a new Purchase Invoice:
+> type "new purchase invoice" into the search bar then select "New Purchase
+Invoice" from the drop down
+
+or click on “Make Purchase Invoice” in Purchase Order or Purchase Receipt.
+
+You can also create a Purchase Invoice from:
+> Accounts > Billing > Purchase Invoice > New Purchase Invoice
+
+
+
+The concept of “Posting Date” is again same as Sales Invoice. “Bill No” and
+“Bill Date” helps to track the bill number as set by your Supplier for
+reference.
+
+#### Is Paid option
+The **Is Paid** checkbox should be checked if there is a part or full payment
+on the invoice at posting date.
+
+#### Update Stock
+The **Update Stock** checkbox should be checked if you want ERPNext to automatically
+ update your inventory. Consequently, there will be no need for a Delivery Note.
+
+#### Accounting Impact
+
+Like in Sales Invoice, you have to enter an Expense or an Asset account for
+each row in your Items table. This helps to indicate if the Item is an Asset
+or an Expense. You must also enter a Cost Center. These can also be set in the
+Item master.
+
+The Purchase Invoice will affect your accounts as follows:
+
+Accounting entries (GL Entry) for a typical double entry “purchase”:
+
+Debits:
+
+ * Expense or Asset (net totals, excluding taxes)
+ * Taxes (/assets if VAT-type or expense again).
+
+Credits:
+
+ * Supplier
+
+##### Accounting Treatment When **Is Paid** is checked
+If **Is Paid** is checked, ERPNext will also make the following
+accounting entries:
+
+Debits:
+
+ * Supplier
+
+Credits:
+ * Bank/Cash Account
+
+To see entries in your Purchase Invoice after you “Submit”, click on “View
+Ledger”.
+
+* * *
+
+#### Is purchase an “Expense” or an “Asset”?
+
+If the Item is consumed immediately on purchase, or if it is a service, then
+the purchase becomes an “Expense”. For example, a telephone bill or travel
+bill is an “Expense” - it is already consumed.
+
+For inventory Items, that have a value, these purchases are not yet “Expense”,
+because they still have a value while they remain in your stock. They are
+“Assets”. If they are raw-materials (used in a process), they will become
+“Expense” the moment they are consumed in the process. If they are to be sold
+to a Customer, they become “Expense” when you ship them to the Customer.
+
+* * *
+
+#### Deducting Taxes at Source
+
+In many countries, the law may require you to deduct taxes, while paying your
+suppliers. These taxes could be based on a standard rate. Under these type of
+schemes, typically if a Supplier crosses a certain threshold of payment, and
+if the type of product is taxable, you may have to deduct some tax (which you
+pay back to your government, on your Supplier’s behalf).
+
+To do this, you will have to make a new Tax Account under “Tax Liabilities” or
+similar and credit this Account by the percent you are bound to deduct for
+every transaction.
+
+For more help, please contact your Accountant!
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/recurring-orders-and-invoices.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/recurring-orders-and-invoices.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..524aa419
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/recurring-orders-and-invoices.md
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+
+#Recurring Orders and Invoices
+
+If you have a contract with a **Customer** where you bill the Customer on a monthly, quarterly, half-yearly or annual basis, you should use recurring feature in orders and invoices.
+
+#### Scenario:
+
+Subscription for your hosted ERPNext account requires yearly renewal. We use Sales Order for generating proforma invoices. To automate proforma invoicing for renewal, we set original Sales Order as recurring. Recurring proforma invoice is created automatically just before customer's account is about to expire, and requires renewal. This recurring Proforma Invoice is also emailed automatically to the customer.
+
+Feature of setting document as recurring is available in Sales Order, Sales Invoice, Purchase Order and Purchase Invoice.
+
+Option to set document as recurring will be visible only after submission. Recurring is last section in document. Check **Is Recurring** to set document as recurring.
+
+
+
+**From Date and To Date:** This defines contract period with the customer.
+
+**Repeat on the Day of Month:** If recurring type is set as Monthly, then it will be day of the month on which recurring invoice will be generated.
+
+**End Date:** Date after which auto-creation of recurring invoice will be stopped.
+
+**Notification Email Address:** Email Addresses (separated by comma) on which recurring invoice will be emailed when auto-generated.
+
+**Recurring ID:** Recurring ID will be original document id which will be linked to all corresponding recurring document. For example, original Sales Invoice's id will be updated into all recurring Sales Invoices.
+
+**Recurring Print Format:** Select a print format to define document view which should be emailed to customer.
+
+####Exception Handling:
+
+In a situation where recurring invoice is not created successfully, user with System Manager role is notified about it via email. Also the document on which recurring event failed, "Is Recurring" field is unchecked for it. This means system doesn't try creating recurring invoice for that document again.
+
+Failure in creation of recurring invoice could be due to multiple reasons like wrong Email Address mentioned in the Email Notification field in Recurring section etc.
+
+On receipt of notification, if cause of failure is fixed (like correcting Email Address) within 24 hours, then recurring invoice will be generated automatically. If issue is not fixed within the said time, then document should be created for that month/year manually.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/sales-invoice.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/sales-invoice.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9a752377
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/sales-invoice.md
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+
+A Sales Invoice is a bill that you send to your customers, against which the customer processes the payment. Sales Invoice is an accounting transaction. On submission of Sales Invoice, the system updates the receivable and books income against a Customer Account.
+
+You can create a Sales Invoice directly from
+
+> Accounts > Billing > Sales Invoice > New Sales Invoice
+
+or you can Make a new Sales Invoice after you submit the Delivery Note.
+
+
+
+#### Accounting Impact
+
+All Sales must be booked against an “Income Account”. This refers to an
+Account in the “Income” section of your Chart of Accounts. It is a good
+practice to classify your income by type (like product income, service income
+etc). The Income Account must be set for each row of the Items table.
+
+> Tip: To set default Income Accounts for Items, you can set it in the Item or
+Item Group.
+
+The other account that is affected is the Account of the Customer. That is
+automatically set from “Debit To” in the heading section.
+
+You must also mention the Cost Centers in which your Income must be booked.
+Remember that your Cost Centers tell you the profitability of the different
+lines of business or product. You can also set a default Cost Center in the
+Item master.
+
+#### Accounting entries (GL Entry) for a typical double entry “Sale”:
+
+When booking a sale (accrual):
+
+**Debit:** Customer (grand total) **Credit:** Income (net total, minus taxes for each Item) **Credit:** Taxes (liabilities to be paid to the government)
+
+> To see entries in your Sales Invoice after you “Submit”, click on “View
+Ledger”.
+
+#### Dates
+
+Posting Date: The date on which the Sales Invoice will affect your books of
+accounts i.e. your General Ledger. This will affect all your balances in that
+accounting period.
+
+Due Date: The date on which the payment is due (if you have sold on credit).
+This can be automatically set from the Customer master.
+
+#### Recurring Invoices
+
+If you have a contract with a Customer where you bill the Customer on a
+monthly, quarterly, half-yearly or annual basis, you can check the “Recurring
+Invoice” box. Here you can fill in the details of how frequently you want to
+bill this Invoice and the period for which the contract is valid.
+
+ERPNext will automatically create new Invoices and mail it to the Email Addresses
+you set.
+
+#### POS Invoices
+
+Consider a scenario where retail transaction is carried out. For e.g: A retail shop.
+If you check the **Is POS** checkbox, then all your **POS Profile** data is fetched
+into the Sales Invoice and you can easily make payments.
+Also, if you check the **Update Stock** the stock will also update automatically,
+without the need of a Delivery Note.
+
+
+
+#### Billing Timesheet with Project
+
+If you want to bill employees working on Projects on hourly basis (contract based),
+they can fill out Timesheets which consists their billing rate. When you make a new
+Sales Invoice, select the Project for which the billing is to be made, and the
+corresponding Timesheet entries for that Project will be fetched.
+
+
+
+* * *
+
+#### "Pro Forma" Invoice
+
+If you want to give an Invoice to a Customer to make a payment before you
+deliver, i.e. you operate on a payment first basis, you should create a
+Quotation and title it as a “Pro-forma Invoice” (or something similar) using
+the Print Heading feature.
+
+“Pro Forma” means for formality. Why do this? Because if you book a Sales
+Invoice it will show up in your “Accounts Receivable” and “Income”. This is
+not ideal as your Customer may or may not decide to pay up. But since your
+Customer wants an “Invoice”, you could give the Customer a Quotation (in
+ERPNext) titled as “Pro Forma Invoice”. This way everyone is happy.
+
+This is a fairly common practice. We follow this at Frappe too.
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/accounts-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/accounts-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0c94bee2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/accounts-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+
+
+
+
+* Accounts Frozen Upto: Freeze accounting transactions upto specified date, nobody can make / modify entry except specified role.
+
+* Role Allowed to Set Frozen Accounts & Edit Frozen Entries: Users with this role are allowed to set frozen accounts and create / modify accounting entries against frozen accounts.
+
+* Credit Controller: Role that is allowed to submit transactions that exceed credit limits set.
+
+* Make Payment via Journal Entry: If checked, from invoice, if user choose to make payment, this will open the journal entry instead of payment entry
+
+* Unlink Payment on Cancellation of Invoice: If checked, system will unlink the payment against the invoice. Otherwise, it will show the link error.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/cost-center.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/cost-center.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ec85a1cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/cost-center.md
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+
+Your Chart of Accounts is mainly designed to provide reports to the government
+and tax authorities. Most businesses have multiple activities like different
+product lines, market segments, areas of business, etc that share some common
+overheads. They should ideally have their own structure to report, whether they
+are profitable or not. For this purpose, there is an alternate structure,
+called the Chart of Cost Centers.
+
+### Cost Center
+
+You can create a tree of Cost Centers to represent your business better. Each
+Income / Expense entry is also tagged against a Cost Center.
+
+For example, if you have two types of sales:
+
+ * Walk-in Sales
+ * Online Sales
+
+You may not have shipping expenses for your walk-in customers, and no shop-
+rent for your online customers. If you want to get the profitability of each
+of these separately, you should create the two as Cost Centers and mark all
+sales as either "Walk-in" or "Online". Mark your all your purchases in the
+same way.
+
+Thus when you do your analysis you get a better understanding as to which side
+of your business is doing better. Since ERPNext has an option to add multiple
+Companies, you can create Cost Centers for each Company and manage it
+separately.
+
+Chart of Cost Centers
+
+To setup your Chart of Cost Centers go to:
+
+> Accounts > Setup > Chart of Cost Centers
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..abd5e778
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/fiscal-year.md
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+
+A fiscal year is also known as a financial year or a budget year. It is used
+for calculating financial statements in businesses and other organisations.
+The fiscal year may or may not be the same as a calendar year. For tax
+purposes, companies can choose to be calendar-year taxpayers or fiscal-year
+taxpayers. In many jurisdictions, regulatory laws regarding accounting and
+taxation require such reports once per twelve months. However, it is not
+mandatory that the period should be a calendar year (that is, 1 January to 31
+December).
+
+A fiscal year usually starts at the beginning of a quarter, such as April 1,
+July 1 or October 1. However, most companies' fiscal year also coincides with
+the calendar year, which starts January 1. For the most part, it is simpler
+and easier that way. For some organizations, there are advantages in starting
+the fiscal year at a different time. For example, businesses that are seasonal
+might start their fiscal year on July 1 or October 1. A business that has most
+of its income in the fall and most of its expenses in the spring might also
+choose to start its fiscal year on October 1. That way, they know what their
+income will be for that year, and can adjust their expenses to maintain their
+desired profit margins.
+
+To set the Fiscal Year as default, click on the 'Default' button.
+
+In case you have multiple companies sharing the same Fiscal Year, you can add
+it into the grid as shown below.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e7554cfa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..916f96cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+fiscal-year
+cost-center
+accounts-settings
+tax-rule
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/tax-rule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/tax-rule.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..626bc829
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/tax-rule.md
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+You can define which [Tax Template]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html) must be applied on a Sales / Purchase transaction using Tax Rule.
+
+
+
+You can define Tax Rules for Sales or Purchase Taxes.
+While making a Transaction the system will select and apply tax template based on the tax rule defined.
+The system selects Tax Rule with maximum matching Filters.
+
+Let us consider a senario to understand Tax Rule Better.
+
+Suppose we define 2 Tax Rules as below.
+
+
+
+
+
+Here Tax Rule 1 has Billing Country as India and Tax Rule 2 has Billing Country as United Kingdom
+
+Now supposed we try to create a Sales Order for a customer whose default Billing Country is India, system shall select Tax Rule 1.
+In case the customers Billing Country was United Kingdom, the system would have selected Tax Rule 2.
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3125e1a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/bank-reconciliation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+
+### Bank Reconciliation Statement
+
+If you are receiving payments or making payments via cheques, the bank statements will not accurately match the dates of your entry, this is because the bank usually takes time to “clear” these payments. Also you may have mailed a cheque to your Supplier and it may be a few days before it is received and deposited by the Supplier. In ERPNext you can synchronise your bank statements and your Journal Entries using the “Bank Reconciliation” tool.
+
+The Bank Reconciliation Report provide the difference between the bank balance shown in an organisation's bank statement, as provided by the ban against amount shown in the companies Chart of Accounts.
+
+####Bank Reconciliation Statement
+
+
+
+In the report, check whether the field 'Balance as per bank' matches the Bank Account Statement. If it is matching, it means that Clearance Date is correctly updated for all the bank entries. If there is a mismatch, Its because of bank entries for which Cleanrane Date is not yet updated.
+
+###Bank Reconciliation Tool
+
+To add clearance entries go to:
+
+`Accounts > Tools > Bank Reconciliation`
+
+Select your “Bank” Account and enter the dates of your statement. Here you
+will get all the “Bank Voucher” type entries. In each of the entry on the
+right most column, update the “Clearance Date” and click on “Update”.
+
+By doing this you will be able to sync your bank statements and entries into
+the system.
+
+__Step 1:__ Select the Bank Account against which you intend to reconcile. For
+example; HDFC Bank, ICICI Bank, or Citibank etc.
+
+__Step 2:__ Select the Date range that you wish to reconcile for.
+
+__Step 3:__ Click on 'Get Reconciled Entries'
+
+All the entries in the specified date range will be shown in a table below.
+
+__Step 4:__ Click on the JV from the table and update clearance date.
+
+
+
+__Step 5:__ Click on the button 'Update Clearance Date'.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e7554cfa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7f93166c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+bank-reconciliation
+payment-reconciliation
+period-closing-voucher
+payment-tool
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9fb04694
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/payment-reconciliation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+
+In complex scenarios, especially in the capital goods industry, sometimes there is no direct link between payments and invoices. You send invoices to your Customers and your Customer sends you block payments or payments based on some schedule that is not linked to your invoices.
+
+In such cases, you can use the Payment to Invoice Matching Tool.
+
+> Accounts > Tools > Payment Reconciliation
+
+In this tool, you can select an account (your Customer’s account) and click on “Pull Payment Entries” and it will select all un-linked Payment Entry and Sales Invoices from that Customer.
+
+To cancel off some payments and invoices, select the Invoices and Journal Vouchers and click on “Reconcile”.
+
+
+
+__Step 1:__ Select the Account against whom the payments need to be reconciled.
+
+__Step 2:__ Mention the Voucher Type, whether it is Purchase Invoice, Sales
+Invoice or Payment Entry.
+
+__Step 3:__ Select the Voucher Number and click on 'Get Unreconciled Entries'.
+
+* All the payment entries will be pulled into a table below.
+
+__Step 4:__ Click on the entry row to allocate a particular amount.
+
+__Step 5:__ Click on the button 'Reconcile'
+
+* You will get a message that says 'Amount allocated successfully'
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/payment-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/payment-tool.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cfd57fcf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/payment-tool.md
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+
+###Payment Tool
+The Payment Tool Feature allows non-accounting personnel to generate Journal Entries by populating relevant fields in the Journal Entry with account and payment details.
+
+To go to Payment Tool, click on Accounts > Tools > Payment Tool.
+
+1. Select the Company Name.
+2. Select the Party Type (Customer or Supplier) and the name of the customer or supplier against whom the payment has been made or received.
+3. Use the Received Or Paid field to specify 'Received' if payment is being received or 'Paid' if User is making the payment.
+4. Select the Mode of Payment and the Payment Account .
+5. Enter the Reference Number and Reference Date of the payment, for instance, the Cheque no. and Cheque date in case the payment is being made by cheque.
+6. Click on Get Outstanding Vouchers to fetch all the valid Vouchers, Invoices and Orders against which a payment can be made/received. These will appear in the Against Voucher section.
+ * __Note:__ In case User is paying a customer or receiving payment from a supplier, add the details regarding the relevant invoices and orders manually.
+
+
+
+7. Once details have been fetched, click on the detail entry and enter the payment amount made against that Invoice/Order/Voucher
+
+
+
+8. Click on 'Make Journal Entry' to generate a new Journal Entry with the relevant Party Details and Credit/Debit details filled in.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/period-closing-voucher.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/period-closing-voucher.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..eeb72ac2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/accounts/tools/period-closing-voucher.md
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+
+At the end of every year or (quarterly or maybe even monthly), after completing auditing, you can close your books of accounts. This means that you make all your special entries like:
+
+ * Depreciation
+ * Change in value of Assets
+ * Defer taxes and liabilities
+ * Update bad debts
+
+etc. and book your Profit or Loss.
+
+By doing this, your balance in your Income and Expense Accounts become zero. You start a new Fiscal Year (or period) with a balanced Balance Sheet and fresh Profit and Loss account.
+
+In ERPNext after making all the special entries via Journal Entry for the current fiscal year, you should set all your Income and Expense accounts to zero via:
+
+> Accounts > Tools > Period Closing Voucher
+
+**Posting Date** will be when this entry should be executed. If your Fiscal Year ends on 31st December, then that date should be selected as Posting Date in the Period Closing Voucher.
+
+**Transaction Date** will be Period Closing Voucher's creation date.
+
+**Closing Fiscal Year** will be an year for which you are closing your financial statement.
+
+
+
+This voucher will transfer Profit or Loss (availed from P&L statment) to Closing Account Head. You should select a liability account like Reserves and Surplus, or Capital Fund account as Closing Account.
+
+The Period Closing Voucher will make accounting entries (GL Entry) making all your Income and Expense Accounts zero and transferring Profit/Loss balance to the Closing Account.
+
+If accounting entries are made in a closing fiscal year, even after Period Closing Voucher was created for that Fiscal Year, you should create another Period Closing Voucher. Later voucher will only transfer the pending P&L balance into Closing Account Head.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..be943bcc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5ae36580
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+maintaining-suppliers-part-no-in-item
+purchasing-in-different-unit
+pull-items-in-purchase-order-based-on-supplier
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/maintaining-suppliers-part-no-in-item.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/maintaining-suppliers-part-no-in-item.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4d8fb1c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/maintaining-suppliers-part-no-in-item.md
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+
+#Maintaining Supplier's Item Code in the Item master
+
+For each item, code assigned might differ from the code your supplier has given to that same item. ERPNext allows you to track Supplier's Item Code in the item master. Also you can fetch Supplier's Item Code in your purchase transactions, so that they can easily recognize item referring to their Item Code.
+
+#### 1. Updating Supplier Item Code In Item
+
+In the Item master, under Supplier Details section, enter Item Code as given by the Supplier to this item.
+
+
+
+#### 2. Supplier's Item Code in Transactions
+
+Each purchase transaction has field in the Item table where Supplier's Item Code is fetched. This field is hidden in form as well as in the Standard print format. You can make it visible by changing property for this field from [Customize Form.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/customize-form.html)
+
+Supplier Item Code will only be fetched in the purchase transaction, if both Supplier and Item Code selected in purchase transaction is mapped with value mentioned in the Item master.
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/pull-items-in-purchase-order-based-on-supplier.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/pull-items-in-purchase-order-based-on-supplier.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..84311897
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/pull-items-in-purchase-order-based-on-supplier.md
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+
+#Pull Items in Purchase Order based on Supplier
+
+**Question:**
+
+Our Material Request has many items, each purchased from different suppliers. How to pull items from all open Material Request which are to be purchased from common Supplier?
+
+**Answer:**
+
+To pull items from Material Request for specific Supplier only, follow below given steps.
+
+####Step 1: Default Supplier
+
+Update Default Supplier in the Item master.
+
+
+
+####Step 2: New Purchase Order
+
+`Buying > Document > Purchase Order > New`
+
+####Step 3: Select for Supplier
+
+From the options available to pull data in the Purchase Order, click on `For Supplier`.
+
+
+
+####Step 4: Get Items
+
+Select Supplier name and click on `Get`.
+
+
+
+####Step 5: Edit Items
+
+All the items associated with a Material Request and having the default Supplier will be fetched in the Items Table. You can further edit items to enter rate, qty etc. Also items which are not to be ordered can be removed from Item table.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/purchasing-in-different-unit.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/purchasing-in-different-unit.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..94c0f0f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/articles/purchasing-in-different-unit.md
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+
+#Purchasing in Different Unit (UoM)
+
+Each item has stock unit of measument (UoM) associated to it. For example UoM of pen could be numbers (Nos) and sand could be stocked kgs. However, when we place an order with Supplier, UoM for an item could change. Like we can order 1 set/box of Pen, or one truck of sand to our Supplier. When creating purchase transacton, you can change Purchase UoM for an item.
+
+### Scenario:
+
+Item `Pen` is stocked in Nos, but purchased in Box. Hence we will make Purchase Order for Pen in Box.
+
+#### Step 1: Edit UoM in the Purchase Order
+
+In the Purchase Order, you will find two UoM fied.
+
+- UoM
+- Stock UoM
+
+In both the fields, default UoM of an item will be fetched by default. You should edit UoM field, and select Purchase UoM (Box in this case). Updating Purchase UoM is mainly for the reference of the supplier. In the print format, you will see item qty in the Purchase UoM.
+
+
+
+#### Step 2: Update UoM Conversion Factors
+
+In one Box, if you get 20 Nos. of Pen, UoM Conversion Factor would be 20.
+
+
+
+Based on the Qty and Conversion Factor, qty will be calculated in the Stock UoM of an item. If you purchase just one Box, then Qty in the stock UoM will be set as 20.
+
+
+
+### Stock Ledger Posting
+
+Irrespective of the Purchase UoM selected, stock ledger posting will be done in the Default UoM of an item. Hence you should ensure that conversion factor is entered correctly while purchasing item in different UoM.
+
+
+
+### Set Conversion Factor in Item
+
+In the Item master, under Purchase section, you can list all the possible purchase UoM of an item, with its UoM Conversion Factor.
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d7c2e8f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+
+# Buying
+
+If your business involves physical goods, buying is one of your core business
+activity. Your suppliers are as important as your customers and they must be
+provided with as much accurate information as possible.
+
+Buying in right amounts, in right quantities, can affect your cash flow and
+profitability.
+
+ERPNext contains a set of transactions that will make your buying process as
+efficient and seamless as possible.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..25c8797e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+supplier
+request-for-quotation
+supplier-quotation
+purchase-order
+setup
+articles
+purchase-taxes
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/purchase-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/purchase-order.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..737c9309
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/purchase-order.md
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+
+A Purchase Order is analogous to a Sales Order. It is usually a binding
+contract with your Supplier that you promise to buy a set of Items under the
+given conditions.
+
+A Purchase Order can be automatically created from a Material Request or
+Supplier Quotation.
+
+#### Purchase Order Flow Chart
+
+
+
+In ERPNext, you can also make a Purchase Order directly by going to:
+
+> Buying > Documents > Purchase Order > New Purchase Order
+
+#### Create Purchase Order
+
+
+
+Entering a Purchase Order is very similar to a Purchase Request, additionally
+you will have to set:
+
+ * Supplier.
+ * A “Required By” date on each Item: If you are expecting part delivery, your Supplier will know how much quantity to deliver at which date. This will help you from preventing over-supply. It will also help you to track how well your Supplier is doing on timeliness.
+
+### Taxes
+
+If your Supplier is going to charge you additional taxes or charge like a
+shipping or insurance charge, you can add it here. It will help you to
+accurately track your costs. Also, if some of these charges add to the value
+of the product you will have to mention them in the Taxes table. You can also
+use templates for your taxes. For more information on setting up your taxes
+see the Purchase Taxes and Charges Template.
+
+### Value Added Taxes (VAT)
+
+Many a times, the tax paid by you to a Supplier, for an Item, is the same tax
+which you collect from your Customer. In many regions, what you pay to your
+government is only the difference between what you collect from your Customer
+and what you pay to your Supplier. This is called Value Added Tax (VAT).
+
+#### Add Taxes in Purchase Order
+
+
+#### Show Tax break-up
+
+
+For example you buy Items worth X and sell them for 1.3X. So your Customer
+pays 1.3 times the tax you pay your Supplier. Since you have already paid tax
+to your Supplier for X, what you owe your government is only the tax on 0.3X.
+
+This is very easy to track in ERPNext since each tax head is also an Account.
+Ideally you must create two Accounts for each type of VAT you pay and collect,
+“Purchase VAT-X” (asset) and “Sales VAT-X” (liability), or something to that
+effect. Please contact your accountant if you need more help or post a query
+on our forums!
+
+
+
+#### Purchase UOM and Stock UOM Conversion
+
+You can change your UOM as per your stock requirements in the Purchase Order
+form.
+
+For example, If you have bought your raw material in large quantities with UOM
+-boxes, and wish to stock them in UOM- Nos; you can do so while making your
+Purchase Order.
+
+__Step 1:__ Store UOM as Nos in the Item form.
+
+Note: The UOM in the Item form is the stock UOM.
+
+__Step 2:__ In the Purchase Order mention UOM as Box. (Since material arrives in
+Boxes)
+
+__Step 3:__ In the Warehouse and Reference section, the UOM will be pulled in as
+Nos (from the Item form)
+
+#### Figure 3: Conversion of Purchase UOM to stock UOM
+
+
+
+
+__Step 4:__ Mention the UOM conversion factor. For example, (100);If one box has
+100 pieces.
+
+__Step 5:__ Notice that the stock quantity will be updated accordingly.
+
+__Step 6:__ Save and Submit the Form.
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/purchase-taxes.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/purchase-taxes.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9d042a98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/purchase-taxes.md
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+
+For Tax Accounts that you want to use in the tax templates, you must mention
+them as type “Tax” in your Chart of Accounts.
+
+Similar to your Sales Taxes and Charges Template is the Purchase Taxes and
+Charges Master. This is the tax template that you can use in your Purchase
+Orders and Purchase Invoices.
+
+> Buying > Setup > Purchase Taxes and Charges Template > New Purchase Taxes and Charges
+Master
+
+
+
+
+You can specify if the tax / charge is only for valuation (not a part of
+total) or only for total (does not add value to the item) or for both.
+
+If you select a particular tax as your Default tax, the system will apply this
+tax to all the purchase transactions by default.
+
+### Calculation Type
+
+This can be on Net Total (that is the sum of basic amount). On Previous Row
+Total / Amount (for cumulative taxes or charges). If you select this option,
+the tax will be applied as a percentage of the previous row (in the tax table)
+amount or total. Actual (as mentioned).
+
+ * **Account Head:** The Account ledger under which this tax will be booked.
+ * **Cost Center:** If the tax / charge is an income (like shipping) or expense it needs to be booked against a Cost Center.
+ * **Description:** Description of the tax (that will be printed in invoices / quotes).
+ * **Rate:** Tax rate.
+ * **Amount:** Tax amount.
+ * **Total:** Cumulative total to this point.
+ * **Enter Row:** If based on "Previous Row Total" you can select the row number which will be taken as a base for this calculation (default is the previous row).
+ * **Consider Tax or Charge for:** In this section you can specify if the tax / charge is only for valuation (not a part of total) or only for total (does not add value to the item) or for both.
+ * **Add or Deduct:** Whether you want to add or deduct the tax.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/request-for-quotation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/request-for-quotation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3fab652f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/request-for-quotation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+
+A Request for Quotation is a document that an organization submits to one or more suppliers eliciting quotation for items.
+
+In ERPNext, You can create request for quotation directly by going to:
+
+> Buying > Documents > Request for Quotation > New Request for Quotation
+
+
+
+After creation of request for quotation, there are two ways to generate supplier quotation from request for quotation.
+
+#### For User
+
+__Step 1:__ Open request for quotation and click on make supplier quotation.
+
+
+
+__Step 2:__ Select supplier and click on make supplier quotation.
+
+
+
+__Step 3:__ System will open the supplier quotation, user has to enter the rate and submit it.
+
+
+
+#### For Supplier
+
+__Step 1:__ User has to create contact or enter Email Address against the supplier on request for quotation.
+
+
+
+__Step 2:__ User has to click on send supplier emails button.
+
+
+
+* If supplier's user not available: system will create supplier's user and send details to the supplier, supplier will need to click on the link(Password Update) present in the email. After password update supplier can access his portal with the request for quotation form.
+
+
+
+* If supplier's user available: system will send request for quotation link to supplier, supplier has to login using his credentials to view request for quotation form on portal.
+
+
+
+__Step 3:__ Supplier has to enter amount and notes(payment terms) on the form and click on submit
+
+
+
+__Step 4:__ On submission, system will create supplier quotation(draft mode) against the supplier. User has to review the supplier quotation
+ and submit it.
+
+More details:-
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/buying-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/buying-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..83d582e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/buying-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+
+Buying Settings is where you can define properties which will be applied in the Buying module's transactions.
+
+
+
+Let us look at the various options that can be configured:
+
+### 1. Supplier Naming By
+
+When a Supplier is saved, system generates a unique identity or name for that Supplier which can be used to refer the Supplier in various Buying transactions.
+
+If not configured otherwise, ERPNext uses the Supplier's Name as the unique name. If you want to identify Suppliers using names like SUPP-00001, SUPP-00002, or such other patterned series, select the value of Supplier Naming By as "Naming Series".
+
+You can define or select the Naming Series pattern from:
+
+`Setup > Data > Naming Series`
+
+[Click here to know more about defining a Naming Series.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/naming-series.html)
+
+### 2. Default Supplier Type
+
+Configure what should be the value of Supplier Type when a new Supplier is created.
+
+### 3. Default Buying Price List
+
+Configure what should be the value of Buying Price List when a new Buying transaction is created.
+
+### 4. Maintain Same Rate Throughout Purchase Cycle
+
+If this is checked, ERPNext will stop you if you change the Item's price in a Purchase Invoice or Purchase Receipt created based on a Purchase Order, i.e. it will maintain the same price throughout the purchase cycle. If there is a requirement where you need the Item's price to change, you should uncheck this option.
+
+### 5. Purchase Order Required
+
+If this option is configured "Yes", ERPNext will prevent you from creating a Purchase Invoice or a Purchase Receipt without first creating a Purchase Order.
+
+### 6. Purchase Receipt Required
+
+If this option is configured "Yes", ERPNext will prevent you from creating a Purchase Invoice without first creating a Purchase Receipt.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..98f85084
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..980e2266
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+buying-settings
+supplier-type
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/supplier-type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/supplier-type.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..de0d4bad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/setup/supplier-type.md
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+
+A supplier may be distinguished from a contractor or subcontractor, who
+commonly adds specialized input to deliverables. A supplier is also known as a
+vendor. There are different types of suppliers based on their goods and
+products.
+
+ERPNext allows you to create your own categories of suppliers. These
+categories are known as Supplier Type. For Example, if your suppliers are
+mainly pharmaceutical companies and FMCG distributors, You can create a new
+Type for them and name them accordingly.
+
+Based on what the suppliers supply, they are classified into different
+categories called Supplier Type. There can be different types of suppliers.
+You can create your own category of Supplier Type.
+
+> Buying > Setup > Supplier Type > New Supplier Type
+
+
+
+You can classify your suppliers from a range of choice available in ERPNext.
+Choose from a set of given options like Distributor, Electrical,Hardware,
+Local, Pharmaceutical, Raw material, Services etc.
+
+Classifying your supplier into different types facilitates accounting and
+payments.
+
+Type your new supplier category and Save.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier-quotation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier-quotation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..72302c23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier-quotation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+
+A Supplier Quotation is a formal statement of promise by potential supplier to
+supply the goods or services required by a buyer, at specified prices, and
+within a specified period. A quotation may also contain terms of sale and
+payment, and warranties. Acceptance of quotation by the buyer constitutes an
+agreement binding on both parties.
+
+You can make a supplier quotation from a Material Request
+
+#### Supplier Quotation Flow-Chart
+
+
+
+You can also make a Supplier Quotation directly from:
+
+> Buying > Documents > Supplier Quotation > New Supplier Quotation
+
+#### Create Supplier Quotation
+
+
+
+If you have multiple Suppliers who supply you with the same Item, you
+usually send out a message (Request for Quote) to various Suppliers. In
+many cases, especially if you have centralized buying, you may want to record
+all the quotes so that
+
+ * You can easily compare prices in the future
+ * Audit whether all Suppliers were given the opportunity to quote.
+
+Supplier Quotations are not necessary for most small businesses. Always
+evaluate the cost of collecting information to the value it really provides!
+You could only do this for high value items.
+
+#### Taxes
+If your Supplier is going to charge you additional taxes or charge like a shipping or insurance charge, you can add it here. It will help you to accurately track your costs. Also, if some of these charges add to the value of the product you will have to mention them in the Taxes table. You can also use templates for your taxes. For more information on setting up your taxes see the Purchase Taxes and Charges Template.
+
+You can select relevant tax by going to "Taxes and Charges" section and adding an entry to the table as shown below,
+
+
+
+Besides, in case of multiple items you can keep track of taxes on each by clicking "Show tax break-up"
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..34856ebe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/buying/supplier.md
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+
+Suppliers are companies or individuals who provide you with products or services.
+
+You can create a new Supplier from:
+
+`Explore > Supplier > New Supplier`
+
+
+
+### Contacts and Addresses
+
+Contacts and Addresses in ERPNext are stored separately so that you can create multiple Contacts and Addresses for a Suppliers. Once Supplier is saved, you will find option to create Contact and Address for that Supplier.
+
+
+
+> Tip: When you select a Supplier in any transaction, Contact for which "Is Primary" field id checked, it will auto-fetch with the Supplier details.
+
+### Integration with Accounts
+
+For all the Supplier, "Creditor" account is set as default payable Account. When Purchase Invoice is created, payable towards the supplier is booked against "Creditors" account.
+
+If you want to customize payable account for the Supplier, you should first add a payable Account in the Chart of Account, and then select that Payable Account in the Supplier master.
+
+
+
+If you don't want to customize payable account, and proceed with default payable account "Creditor", then do not update any value in the Default Supplier Account's table.
+
+> Advanced Tip: Default Payable Account is set in the Company master. If you want to set another account as Account as default for payable instead of Creditors Account, go to Company master, and set that account as "Default Payable Account".
+
+You can add multiple companies in your ERPNext instance, and one Supplier can be used across multiple companies. In this case, you should define Companywise Payable Account for the Supplier in the "Default Payable Accounts" table.
+
+
+
+(Check from 2:20)
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/customer-orders-invoices-and-shipping-status.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/customer-orders-invoices-and-shipping-status.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0f319acf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/customer-orders-invoices-and-shipping-status.md
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+
+ERPNext Web Portal gives your customers quick access to their Orders, Invoices and Shipments Customers can check the status of their orders, invoices, and shipping status by logging on to the web.
+
+
+
+Once an order is raised, either using the Shopping Cart or from within ERPNext, your customer can view the order and keep an eye on the billing and shipment status. When the invoice and payment against these orders are submitted, the customer can see the updated status on the portal, at a glance.
+
+
+
+#### Outstanding Sales Invoice
+
+
+
+#### Paid Sales Invoice
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..61bc83bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+Customer Portal is designed to give easy accesibility to customers of a
+company.
+
+This portal allows customers to login and find out information relevant to them.They can trace communication history of their mails. They can also check order status by logging into the website.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a029f6b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+customer-orders-invoices-and-shipping-status
+portal-login
+sign-up
+issues
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/issues.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/issues.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..74b8748c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/issues.md
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+
+The customer portal makes it very easy for a customer to raise concerns. A
+simple and intuitive interface facilitates your customer to report their
+concerns as Issues. They can view the complete thread of their
+conversation.
+
+#### Empty Issue List
+
+
+
+#### New Issue
+
+
+
+#### Open Issue
+
+
+
+#### Reply on Issue
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/portal-login.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/portal-login.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d4a0f1c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/portal-login.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
+To login into the customer account, the customer has to use his Email Address and
+the password sent by ERPNext; generated through the sign-up process.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/sign-up.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/sign-up.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2f4b8ec2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customer-portal/sign-up.md
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+
+Your Customer and Suppliers can signup to your ERPNext account by following Signup option on the Login Page.
+
+#### Step 1: Signup
+
+On the Login Page, you will find option to Signup.
+
+
+
+#### Step 2: Enter Customer Name and ID
+
+
+
+After the sign up process, an email will be sent to the customers Email Address with the password details.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/allow-fields-to-be-changed-after-submit.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/allow-fields-to-be-changed-after-submit.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cf15087f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/allow-fields-to-be-changed-after-submit.md
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+
+#Editing Value in Submitted Document
+
+Once document is submitted, fields are frozen, and no editing is allowd. Still there are certain standard fields like Letter Head, Print Heading which can still be edited. For the custom field, if **Allow on Submit** property is checked, it will be editable even after document is submitted.
+
+ Standard fields cannot be set as Allow on Submit.
+
+#### Step 1: Go To
+
+`Setup > Customize > Customize Form`
+
+####Step 2: Select Form
+
+In Customize Form, select Document Type (Quotation, Sales Order, Purchase Invoice Item etc.)
+
+
+
+#### Step 3: Edit Field Property
+
+In the fields section, click on the Custom field and check the **Allow On Submit**.
+
+
+
+#### Step 3: Update Customize Form
+
+
+
+After updating Customize Form, you should reload your ERPNext account. Then check form, and field to confirm its editable in submitted form as well.
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/creating-custom-link-field.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/creating-custom-link-field.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..442220ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/creating-custom-link-field.md
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+
+#Creating Custom Link Fields
+
+Links field are the ones linked to another document type. For example, customer field is a link field in Sales Order. This field is linked to the Customer master.
+
+You can insert Custom Link Field by following steps below.
+
+
+####Step 1: Go to Customize Form
+
+`Setup > Customize > Customize Form`
+
+####Step 2: Select Form
+
+In Customize Form, select Document Type (Quotation, Sales Order, Purchase Invoice Item etc.). Once field are updated in table, open field before which you wish to insert Custom Field. Then click on "Insert Above" to insert new Custom Field.
+
+
+
+####Step 4: Custom Field Values
+
+To set field as Link, enter values as below.
+
+1. Label: Desired label that user wishes to display in the form.
+1. Type: Set as 'Link'
+1. Name: Desired name for the field
+1. Options: Enter the name of the Doctype to which the field is linked
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/customizing-sorting-order-in-the-list-view.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/customizing-sorting-order-in-the-list-view.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ecd1b775
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/customizing-sorting-order-in-the-list-view.md
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+
+#Customizing Sorting Order in the List View
+
+**Question:** I want records in my Item List sorted based on Desc Order of Item Code.
+
+**Answers:** Following are the steps to customize Sort Order for the Item master. These steps will be applicable for customizing Sort Order for the other documents as well.
+
+####Step 1: Go to Customize Form
+
+`Setup > Customize > Customize Form`
+
+####Step 2: Select Doctype
+
+Select document type for which Sort Order is to be customized.
+
+
+
+####Step 3: Update Sort Details
+
+In the Customize Form, you will find these fields.
+
+
+
+1. Sort Field: Select field based on which sorting will be done. It will be "Item_Code" field in scenario.
+2. Sort Order: Sort Order will be two possible options, **Asc** for ascending, and **Desc** for descending.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/deleting-custom-reports.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/deleting-custom-reports.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1c9c956b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/deleting-custom-reports.md
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+
+#Deleting Custom Reports
+
+ERPNext has several [types of reports]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/making-custom-reports-in-erpnext) which can be customize as per the companies/users requirement.
+
+If there is a report custom report which needs to be deleted, it can be achieved by following steps. Please note that its applicable only for the Custom Reports, and not for the standard reports.
+
+#### Step 1: Go to Report List
+
+In the Awesome Bar, type and select "Report List" for an option.
+
+
+
+####Selecting and Deleting Report
+
+The Report List will have all the standard and custom reports of your account. You can select Custom Report to be deleted from the list itself, and click on Delete icon.
+
+
+
+Or you can open that report, and delete it from File menu option.
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/disable-rounded-total.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/disable-rounded-total.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3a31a8c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/disable-rounded-total.md
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+
+#Disable Rounded Total
+
+All the sales transactions like Sales Order, Sales Invoice has Rounded Total in it. It calculated based on the value of Grand Total. Also Rounded Total is also visible in the Standard Print Formats.
+
+
+
+Follow steps given below to hide rounded total from Standard Print Formats, for all the sales transactions.
+
+#### Step 1: Global Settings
+
+`Setup > Settings > Global Settings`
+
+#### Step 2: Disable Rounded Total
+
+Check Disable Rounded Total, and Save Global Defaults.
+
+
+
+For system to take effect of this setting, you should clear cache and refresh your ERPNext account. Then your print formats shall not render value for the Rounded Total in the print formats.
+
+Note: This setting will only affect Standard print formats.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/field-types.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/field-types.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b6c5b558
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/field-types.md
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+
+#Field Types
+
+Following are the types of fields you can define while creating new ones, or while amend standard ones.
+
+- Attach:
+
+Attach field allows you browsing file from File Manager and attach in the transaction.
+
+- Button:
+
+It will be a Button, on clicking which you can execute some functions like Save, Submit etc.
+
+- Check:
+
+It will be a check box field.
+
+- Column Break
+
+Since ERPNext has multiple column layout, using Column Breaks, you can divide set of fields side-by-side.
+
+- Currency
+
+Currency field holds numeric value, like item price, amount etc. Currency field can have value upto six decimal places. Also you can have currency symbol being shown for the currency field.
+
+- Data
+
+Data field will be simple text field. It allows entering value upto 255 characters.
+
+- Date and Time
+
+This field will give you date and time picker. Current date and time (as provided by your computer) is set by default.
+
+- Dynamic Link
+
+Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/managing-dynamic-link-fields.html) to learn how Dynamic Link Field function.
+
+- Float
+
+Float field carries numeric value, upto six decimal place. Precision for the float field is set in
+
+`Setup > Settings > System`
+
+Setting will be applicable on all the float field.
+
+- Image
+
+Image field will render an image file selected in another attach field.
+
+For the Image field, under Option (in Doctype),field name should be provide where image file is attached. By referring to the value in that field, image will be reference in the Image field.
+
+- Int (Integer)
+
+Integer field holds numeric value, without decimal place.
+
+- Link
+
+Link field is connected to another master from where it fetches data. For example, in the Quotation master, Customer is a Link field.
+
+- Password
+
+Password field will have decode value in it.
+
+- Read Only
+
+Read Only field will carry data fetched from another form, but they themselves will be non-editable. You should set Read Only as field type if its source for value is predetermined.
+
+- Section Break
+
+Section Break is used to divide form into multiple sections.
+
+- Select
+
+Select will be a drop-down field. You can add muliple results in the Option field, separated by row.
+
+- Small Text
+
+Small Text field carries text content, has more character limit than the Data field.
+
+- Table
+
+Table will be (sort of) Link field which renders another docytpe within the current form. For example, Item table in the Sales Order is a Table field, which is linked to Sales Order Item doctype.
+
+- Text Editor
+
+Text Editor is text field. It has text-formatting options. In ERPNext, this field is generally used for defining Terms and Conditions.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/increase-max-attachments.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/increase-max-attachments.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6e0fe7ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/increase-max-attachments.md
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+
+#Increase Max Attachments
+
+In ERPNext, you can limit how many files can be attached to specific Document. Using Custmize Form, you can set **Max(imum) Attachments** which can be added to a particular documents.
+
+Let's assume we need to update Max Attachment for Quotation to five.
+
+#### Step 1: Setup
+
+`Setup > Customize > Customize Form`
+
+#### Step 2: Select Document Type
+
+
+
+#### Step 3: Set Limit
+
+Set Maximum Attachments as five.
+
+
+
+After update Max Attachments, Update Customization Form. Reload your ERPNext account and then check specific Quotation to confirm if Max Attachment limit is applied.
+
+Note: Maximum limit/size of an attachment is 1MB.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..be943bcc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f8a81a4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+allow-fields-to-be-changed-after-submit
+creating-custom-link-field
+customizing-sorting-order-in-the-list-view
+deleting-custom-reports
+disable-rounded-total
+field-types
+increase-max-attachments
+make-field-visible-in-print-format
+making-custom-reports-in-erpnext
+managing-dynamic-link-fields
+module-visibility
+perm-level-error-in-permission-manager
+search-record-by-specific-field
+set-language
+set-precision
+user-restriction
+maximum-numbers-of-fields-in-a-form
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/make-field-visible-in-print-format.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/make-field-visible-in-print-format.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ed6ebf9d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/make-field-visible-in-print-format.md
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+
+#Make Fields Visible In Print Format
+
+Each transaction has Standard Print Format. In the Standard format, only certain fields are displayed by default. If user needs field in the Standard format to be visible, it can be customized by using Customize Form tool.
+
+Let's assume in the Sales order, we need to make Shipping Address field visible in the standard print format.
+
+#### Step 1: Customize Form
+
+Go to:
+
+`Setup > Customize > Customize Form`
+
+#### Step 2: Document Type
+
+As per our scenario, Sales Order will be selected as Document Type.
+field-visible-2.gif
+
+
+#### Step 3: Uncheck Print Hide
+
+click to open field to be made visible in the Standard Print Format. Uncheck **Print Hide** field.
+
+
+
+#### Step 4: Update
+
+Update Customize Form to save changed. Reload your ERPNext account, and then check Print Format for confirmation.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/making-custom-reports-in-erpnext.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/making-custom-reports-in-erpnext.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e309341c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/making-custom-reports-in-erpnext.md
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+
+#Reports in ERPNext
+
+There are three kind of reports in ERPNext.
+
+###1. Report Builder
+
+Report Builder is an in-built report customization tool in ERPNext. This allows you to define specific fields of the form which shall be added in the report. Also you can set required filters, sorting and give preferred name to report.
+
+
+
+### 2. Query Report
+
+Query Report is written in SQL which pull values from account's database and fetch in the report. Though SQL queries can be written from front end, like HTML, its restricted in hosted users. Because it will allow users with no access to specific report to query data directly from the database.
+
+Check Purchase Order Item to be Received report in Stock module for example of Query report. Click [here](https://frappe.io/docs/user/en/guides/reports-and-printing/how-to-make-query-report.html) to learn how to create Query Report.
+
+### 3. Script Report
+
+Script Reports are written in Python and stored on server side. These are complex reports which involves logic and calculation. Since these reports are written on server side, customizing it from hosted account is not possible.
+
+Check Financial Analytics report in Accounts module for example of Script Report. Click [here](https://frappe.io/docs/user/en/guides/reports-and-printing/how-to-make-script-reports.html) to learn how to create Script Report.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/managing-dynamic-link-fields.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/managing-dynamic-link-fields.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e9e2a8c6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/managing-dynamic-link-fields.md
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+
+#Managing Dynamic Link Fields
+
+Dynamic Link field is one which can search and hold value of any document/doctype. Let's consider an example to learn how Dynamic Link field works.
+
+While creating Opportunity or Quotation, we have to explicitly define if it is for Lead or Customer. Based on our selection (Lead/Customer), another link field shows up where we can select actual Lead or Customer.
+
+If you set former field as Dynamic Link, where we select actual Lead or Customer, then the later field will be linked to master selected in the first field, i.e. Leads or Customers. Hence we need not insert separate link fields for Customer and Lead.
+
+Below are the steps to insert Custom Dynamic Field. For an instance, we will insert Dynamic Link Field in Journal Entry.
+
+#### Step 1: Insert Link Field for Doctype
+
+Firstly we will create a link field which will be linked to the Doctype.
+
+
+
+By **Doctype** mentioned in the Option field, we mean parent Doctype. So, just like Quotation is one Doctype, which has multiple Quotation under it. Same way, Doctype is also a Doctype which has Sales Order, Purchase Order and other doctypes created as Doctype records.
+
+-- Doctype+---- Sales Order
+---- Purchase Invoice
+---- Quotation
+---- Sales Invoice
+---- Employee
+---- Production Order
+.. and so on. + +So linking this field with parent Doctype will list all the Doctype records. + +
+
+#### Step 2: Insert Dynamic Link Field
+
+This custom field's type will be "Dynamic Link". In the Option field, name of Doctype link field will be mentioned.
+
+
+
+This field will allow selecting document id, based on value selected in the Doctype link field. For example, if we select Sales Order in the prior field, Dynamic Link field will list all the Sales Orders ids.
+
+
+
+
+**Customizing options in the Doctype Link field**
+
+By default, Docytpe link field will provide all the forms/doctypes for selection. If you wish this field to show certain specific doctypes in the search result, you will need to write Custom Script for it.
+
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/maximum-numbers-of-fields-in-a-form.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/maximum-numbers-of-fields-in-a-form.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b45aa4cf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/maximum-numbers-of-fields-in-a-form.md
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+
+Sometimes while creating custom fields, you might experienced an error message like below:
+
+> Row size too large. The maximum row size for the used table type, not counting BLOBs, is 65535. This includes storage overhead, check the manual. You have to change some columns to TEXT or BLOBs
+
+### What it actually means?
+
+In simple terms, it means that you have reached the limit of maximum numbers of fields for the specific form/doctype. So, what is the limit of maximum numbers of fields?
+
+In MySQL, there is a hard limit of 4096 columns per table, but the effective maximum may be less for a given table. The exact limit depends on several interacting factors.
+
+Every table (regardless of storage engine) has a maximum row size of 65,535 bytes. Storage engines may place additional constraints on this limit, reducing the effective maximum row size.
+
+The maximum row size constrains the number (and possibly size) of columns because the total length of all columns cannot exceed this size (65,535 bytes). For example, `utf8mb3` characters require up to 3 bytes per character, so for a `VARCHAR(140)` column, the server must allocate `140 × 3 = 420` bytes per value. Consequently, a table cannot contain more than `65,535 / 420 = 156` such columns.
+
+In Frappe frapework, `VARCHAR(140)` type columns are created based on "Data", "Link", "Select", "Dynamic Link", "Password" and "Read Only" fieldtypes. Hence, you can create approximately 156 such columns in the system.
+
+### Solutions:
+
+To add more fields in the system, you can do some changes.
+
+1. Convert some of the fields to "Text", "Small Text", "Text Editor" or "Code" type field. In MySQL, BLOB and TEXT columns count from one to four plus eight bytes each toward the row-size limit because their contents are stored separately from the rest of the row. So, converting to those fieldtypes will free up some spaces and will allow to add some more fields.
+2. Set smaller value in the "Length" property while creating fields, default value is 140. System sets length of `VARCHAR` based on this property and allocates size for that columns. Hence, smaller Length leads to add more fields.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/module-visibility.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/module-visibility.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..55e8b12d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/module-visibility.md
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+
+#Module Visibility
+
+If you have permission on specific module, but it is still not visible, following are the possibilities of issues you should look at. Let's consider a scenario that user is permission of Website module, but not able to access it.
+
+As step zero, ensure that you have "Website Manager" role assigned. It is a standard Role which grants permission on Website module. If permissions has been customized in your account, check Role Permission Manager to know which Role has permission on Website, and then check if same Role is assigned to User.
+
+If module is hidden in-spite of assignment of required Role, then you should check if Website is not disabled from All Application.
+
+
+
+If Website is checked in All Application, but still not visible for the User, check if is hidden by System Manager. In the Setup module, feature called Show/Hide Modules allows System Manager to hide specific module from all the Users.
+
+`Setup > Settings > Show / Hide Modules`
+
+Ensure Website module is checked. If you just enabled/activated it, update Show/Hide Module page, and then Reload tab of your ERPNext account. After reload, changes made in the Setup module will be applied and will be visible in the system.
+
+On the same lines, you can check for the visibility issue of other modules as well.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/perm-level-error-in-permission-manager.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/perm-level-error-in-permission-manager.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4783c530
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/perm-level-error-in-permission-manager.md
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+
+#Perm Level Error in Permission Manager
+
+While customizing rules in the [Permission Manager]({{docs_base_url}}/user/erpnext/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions), you might receive an error message saying:
+
+`For System Manager _(or other role)_ at level 2 _(or other level)_ in Customer _(or other document)_ in row 8: Permission at level 0 must be set before higher levels are set.`
+
+Error message indicates problem is in the existing permission setting for this document.
+
+For any role, before assigning permission at Perm Level 1 or 2 (and so on), permission at Perm Level 0 must be assigned. Error message says that System Manager has been assigned permission at Perm Level 1 and 2, but not at level 0. You should first correct the permission for System Manager's role by:
+
+- Assigning permission to System Manager at level 0.
+
+Or
+
+- By removing permission at level 1 and 2.
+
+After executing one of the above step, you should be able to successfully add new permissions rules in the Role Permission Manager.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/search-record-by-specific-field.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/search-record-by-specific-field.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..db442b5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/search-record-by-specific-field.md
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+
+#Search Record by Specific Field
+
+While creating any document (say Sales Invoice), you have to select other document id in it (say Serial No). For ease in selection, you can also make value of other field of that visible in the search result. Search By functionality enables to define field whos value will be visible in the search result.
+
+Let's assume that while creating Sales Invoice, you wish to see Serial No result, with respective Warehouse.
+
+#### Step 1: Customize Form
+
+`Setup > Customize > Customize Form`
+
+#### Step 2: Select Document
+
+`Document Type = Serial No.`
+
+#### Step 3: Search Field
+
+Update Warehouse field name in the Search By field.
+
+
+
+#### Searching in Another Record.
+
+While creating transaction, to get filtered result for Customer, you should firstly click on search magnifier.
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/set-language.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/set-language.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..44eceb0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/set-language.md
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+
+#Change the Language
+
+ERPNext is an multi-lingual application. It allows each user to select preferred lannguage. Following is how User can customize language in one's account.
+
+### 1. Setting Language in User's Account
+
+Following are the steps to set language in your ERPNext account.
+
+#### 1.1 Go to My Setting
+
+
+
+#### 1.2 Select Language
+
+
+
+
+
+#### 1.3 Save User
+
+On saving User after selecting language, your ERPNext account will be refresh automatically. Then you will see ERPNext translated in your selected language.
+
+Being a System Manager, you can set language in other user's master as well.
+
+### 2. Set Language Globally for an Account
+
+#### 2.1 Go to Setup
+
+`Setup > Settings > System Settings`
+
+#### Set Language
+
+
+
+#### Save
+
+Save System Settings, and refresh your EPRNext account. On refreshing, you should language in your ERPNext account changed as per your preference.
+
+
+
+Note: For now, we have translation available only for few languages. You can contribute to make translation better, and add new languages from [here](https://translate.erpnext.com).
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/set-precision.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/set-precision.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..69279a92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/set-precision.md
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+
+#Set Precision
+
+In ERPNext, default precision for `Float`, `Currency` and `Percent` field is three. It allows you to enter value having value upto three decimal places.
+
+You can also change/customize the precision settings globally or for a specific field.
+
+To change the precision globally, go to:
+
+`Setup > Settings > System Settings`.
+
+
+
+You can also set field specific precision. To do that go to `Setup > Customize > Customize Form` and select the DocType there. Then go to the specific field row and change precision. Precision field is only visible if field-type is one of the Float, Currency and Percent.
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/user-restriction.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/user-restriction.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f9018853
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/user-restriction.md
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+
+# Restricting based on Owner
+
+Following are the steps to restrict User to a document based on Owner/creator.
+
+#### Step 1: Role Permission Manager
+
+`Setup > Permissions > Role Permissions Manager`
+
+#### Step 2: Select Document Type
+
+Select Document Type for which you want to set user permission. After permissions are loaded for selected document, scroll to role for which you want to set restriction.
+
+
+
+#### Step 3: Apply User Permission
+
+For Role to be restricted (Sales User in this case), check "If Owner".
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-doctype.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-doctype.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0fd98555
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-doctype.md
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+
+DocType or a Document Type is a tool to insert form in ERPNext. The forms like Sales Order,
+Sales Invoices, Production Order are added as Doctype in the backend. Let's assume we are
+creating a Custom Doctype for a Book.
+
+Custom Doctype allows you to insert custom forms in ERPNext as per your requirement.
+
+To create a new **DocType**, go to:
+
+`Setup > Customize > Doctype > New`
+
+#### DocType Detail
+
+1. Module: Select module in which this Doctype should be placed.
+1. Document Type: Specify if this Doctype will be to carry master data, or to track transactions. Doctype
+for book will be added as Master.
+1. Is Child table: If this Doctype is to be inserted as table into another Doctype, like Item table
+in the Sales Order Doctype, then you should check Is Child Table. Else no.
+1. Is Single: If checked, this Doctype will become a single form, like Selling Setting, which user will
+not be able to re-produce.
+1. Custom?: This field will be checked by default when adding Custom Doctype.
+
+
+
+#### Fields
+
+In the Fields Table, you can add the fields (properties) of the DocType (Article).
+
+Fields are much more than database columns, they can be:
+
+1. Columns in the database
+1. For Layout (section / column breaks)
+1. Child tables (Table type field)
+1. HTML
+1. Actions (button)
+1. Attachments or Images
+
+
+
+When you add fields, you need to enter the **Type**. **Label** is optional for Section Break and Column Break. **Name** (`fieldname`) is the name of the database table column.
+
+You can also set other properties of the field like whether it is mandatory, read only etc.
+
+#### Naming
+
+In this section, you can define criteria based on which document for this doctype will be named. There are multiple criterion based on which document can be named, like naming based on the value in the specific field, or based on Naming Series, or based on value provided by the user in the prompt, which will be shown when saving document. In the following example, we are doing naming based on the value in the field **book_name**.
+
+
+
+#### Permission
+
+In this table, you should select roles and define permission roles for them for this Doctype.
+
+
+
+#### Save DocType
+
+On saving doctype, you will get pop-up to provide name for this Doctype.
+
+
+
+#### DocType in System
+
+To check this Doctype, open Module defined for this doctype. Since we have added Books doctype in the
+Human Resource module, to access this doctype, go to:
+
+`Human Resource > Document > Book`
+
+
+
+#### Book master
+
+Using the fields entered, following is the master one book.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-field.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-field.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..de227a6b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-field.md
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+
+Every form in the ERPNext has standard set of fields. If you need to capture some information, but there is no standard field available for it, you can insert Custom Field in a form as per your requirement.
+
+Following are the steps to insert Custom Field in the existing form.
+
+####Customize Form
+
+To add a Custom Field, go to:
+
+`Setup > Customize > Customize Form`
+
+####Select Document Type
+
+In the Customize Form, select Document Type in which you want to insert Custom Field. Let's assume we are inserting Custom Field in the Employee master.
+
+
+
+#### Insert Row for the Custom Field
+
+In Customize Form, open the field above which you want to insert a Custom Field. Click on Insert Above.
+
+
+
+####Set Field Label
+
+Custom Field's name will be set based on its Label. If you want to create Custom Field with specific name, but with different label, then you should first set Label as you want Field Name to be set. After Custom Field is saved, you can edit the Field Label again.
+
+
+
+####Select Field Type
+
+There are various types of Field like Data, Date, Link, Select, Text and so on. Select Field Type for the Custom Field.
+
+
+
+Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/field-types.html) to learn more about types of field you can set for your Custom Field.
+
+####Set Option
+
+Based on the Field Type, value will be entered in the Options field.
+
+If you are creating a Link field, then in the Options, enter Doctype name with which this field will be linked. Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/creating-custom-link-field.html) to learn more about creating custom link field.
+
+If field type is set as Select (drop down field), then all he possible result for this field should be listed in the Options field. Each possible result should be separate by row.
+
+
+
+For Data field, Option can be set to "Email" or "Phone" and the field will be validated accordingly.
+
+For other field types like Date, Currency, Option field will be left blank.
+
+####Set More Properties
+
+You can set properties as:
+
+1. Mandatory: If checked, entering data in the custom field will be mandatory.
+1. Print Hide: If checked, this field will be hidden from the Standard Print Format. To make field visible in the Standard Print Format, uncheck this field.
+1. Field Description: It will be short field description which will appear just below that field.
+1. Default Value: Value entered in this field will be auto-set in the Custom Field.
+1. Read Only: Checking this option will make custom field non-editable.
+1. Allow on Submit: Checking this option will allow editing value in the field when in submitted transaction.
+
+####Update Customize Form
+
+After inserting required details for the Custom Field, Update Customize Form. On update, Custom Field will be inserting in the form, Employee master in this case. Before checking Employee form, reload your ERPNext account. After reload, check Employee form to see Custom Field in a form.
+
+
+
+####Deleting Custom Field
+
+Given a permission, user will be able to delete Custom Fields. Incase Custom Field is deleted by mistake, if you add another Custom Field with same name. Then you shall see new field auto-mapped with old-deleted Custom Field.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/custom-button.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/custom-button.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bf173136
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/custom-button.md
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+
+# Add a Custom Button
+
+ frappe.ui.form.on("Event", "refresh", function(frm) {
+ frm.add_custom_button(__("Do Something"), function() {
+ // When this button is clicked, do this
+
+ var subject = frm.doc.subject;
+ var event_type = frm.doc.event_type;
+
+ // do something with these values, like an ajax request
+ // or call a server side frappe function using frappe.call
+ $.ajax({
+ url: "http://example.com/just-do-it",
+ data: {
+ "subject": subject,
+ "event_type": event_type
+ }
+
+ // read more about $.ajax syntax at http://api.jquery.com/jquery.ajax/
+
+ });
+ });
+ });
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/custom-script-fetch-values-from-master.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/custom-script-fetch-values-from-master.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7914e40b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/custom-script-fetch-values-from-master.md
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+
+To pull a value of a link on selection, use the `add_fetch` method.
+
+
+
+ add_fetch(link_fieldname, source_fieldname, target_fieldname)
+
+
+### Example
+
+You create Custom Field **VAT ID** (`vat_id`) in **Customer** and **Sales
+Invoice** and want to make sure this value gets updated every time you select
+a Customer in a Sales Invoice.
+
+Then in the Sales Invoice Custom Script, add this line:
+
+
+
+ cur_frm.add_fetch('customer','vat_id','vat_id')
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/date-validation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/date-validation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5f2d64d1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/date-validation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+
+# Date Validation
+
+
+ frappe.ui.form.on("Task", "validate", function(frm) {
+ if (frm.doc.from_date < get_today()) {
+ frappe.msgprint(__("You can not select past date in From Date"));
+ frappe.validated = false;
+ }
+ });
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/generate-item-code-based-on-custom-logic.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/generate-item-code-based-on-custom-logic.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..19e73103
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/generate-item-code-based-on-custom-logic.md
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+
+Add this in the Custom Script of **Item**, so that the new Item Code is
+generated just before the a new Item is saved.
+
+
+(Thanks to Aditya Duggal)
+
+
+
+ cur_frm.cscript.custom_validate = function(doc) {
+ // clear item_code (name is from item_code)
+ doc.item_code = "";
+
+ // first 2 characters based on item_group
+ switch(doc.item_group) {
+ case "Test A":
+ doc.item_code = "TA";
+ break;
+ case "Test B":
+ doc.item_code = "TB";
+ break;
+ default:
+ doc.item_code = "XX";
+ }
+
+ // add next 2 characters based on brand
+ switch(doc.brand) {
+ case "Brand A":
+ doc.item_code += "BA";
+ break;
+ case "Brand B":
+ doc.item_code += "BB";
+ break;
+ default:
+ doc.item_code += "BX";
+ }
+ }
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..dbb9d4b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+
+### How to Create a Custom Script
+
+Create a Custom Script (you must have System Manager role for this):
+
+ 1. Got to: Setup > Custom Script > New Custom Script
+ 2. Select the DocType in which you want to add the Custom Script
+
+* * *
+
+### Notes
+
+ 1. Server Custom Scripts are only available for the Administrator.
+ 2. Client Custom Scripts are in Javascript and Server Custom Scripts are in Python.
+ 3. For testing, make sure to go to Tools > Clear Cache and refresh after updating a Custom Script.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2b497555
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+custom-script-fetch-values-from-master
+date-validation
+generate-item-code-based-on-custom-logic
+make-read-only-after-saving
+restrict-cancel-rights
+restrict-purpose-of-stock-entry
+restrict-user-based-on-child-record
+sales-invoice-id-based-on-sales-order-id
+update-date-field-based-on-value-in-other-date-field
+custom-button
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/make-read-only-after-saving.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/make-read-only-after-saving.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..13a44e00
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/make-read-only-after-saving.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+Use the method `cur_frm.set_df_property` to update the field's display.
+
+In this script we also use the `__islocal` property of the doc to check if the
+document has been saved atleast once or is never saved. If `__islocal` is `1`,
+then the document has never been saved.
+
+ frappe.ui.form.on("MyDocType", "refresh", function(frm) {
+ // use the __islocal value of doc, to check if the doc is saved or not
+ frm.set_df_property("myfield", "read_only", frm.doc.__islocal ? 0 : 1);
+ }
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-cancel-rights.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-cancel-rights.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7c038b84
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-cancel-rights.md
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+
+Add a handler to `custom_before_cancel` event:
+
+
+
+ cur_frm.cscript.custom_before_cancel = function(doc) {
+ if (frappe.user_roles.indexOf("Accounts User")!=-1 && frappe.user_roles.indexOf("Accounts Manager")==-1
+ && user_roles.indexOf("System Manager")==-1) {
+ if (flt(doc.grand_total) > 10000) {
+ frappe.msgprint("You can not cancel this transaction, because grand total \
+ is greater than 10000");
+ frappe.validated = false;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-purpose-of-stock-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-purpose-of-stock-entry.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9dc413c1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-purpose-of-stock-entry.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+
+
+ frappe.ui.form.on("Material Request", "validate", function(frm) {
+ if(frappe.user=="user1@example.com" && frm.doc.purpose!="Material Receipt") {
+ frappe.msgprint("You are only allowed Material Receipt");
+ frappe.throw(__("Not allowed"));
+ }
+ }
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-user-based-on-child-record.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-user-based-on-child-record.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..76394a0f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/restrict-user-based-on-child-record.md
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+
+
+ // restrict certain warehouse to Material Manager
+ cur_frm.cscript.custom_validate = function(doc) {
+ if(frappe.user_roles.indexOf("Material Manager")==-1) {
+
+ var restricted_in_source = frappe.model.get_list("Stock Entry Detail",
+ {parent:cur_frm.doc.name, s_warehouse:"Restricted"});
+
+ var restricted_in_target = frappe.model.get_list("Stock Entry Detail",
+ {parent:cur_frm.doc.name, t_warehouse:"Restricted"})
+
+ if(restricted_in_source.length || restricted_in_target.length) {
+ frappe.msgprint(__("Only Material Manager can make entry in Restricted Warehouse"));
+ validated = false;
+ }
+ }
+ }
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/sales-invoice-id-based-on-sales-order-id.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/sales-invoice-id-based-on-sales-order-id.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..505475c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/sales-invoice-id-based-on-sales-order-id.md
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+
+Below script allows you to get naming series in Sales Invoice, same as of corresponding Sales Order.
+Invoice uses a prefix M- but the number duplicates the SO doc name (number).
+
+Example: If Sales Order id is SO-12345, then corresponding Sales Invoice id will be set as M-12345.
+
+ frappe.ui.form.on("Sales Invoice", "refresh", function(frm){
+ var sales_order = frm.doc.items[0].sales_order.replace("M", "M-");
+ if (!frm.doc.__islocal && sales_order && frm.doc.name!==sales_order){
+ frappe.call({
+ method: 'frappe.model.rename_doc.rename_doc',
+ args: {
+ doctype: frm.doctype,
+ old: frm.docname,
+ "new": sales_order,
+ "merge": false
+ },
+ });
+ }
+ });
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/update-date-field-based-on-value-in-other-date-field.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/update-date-field-based-on-value-in-other-date-field.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..167e314c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/custom-script-examples/update-date-field-based-on-value-in-other-date-field.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+Below script would auto-set value for the date field, based on the value in another date field.
+
+Example: Production Due Date must be set as two days before Delivery Date. If you have Production Due Date field already, with field type as Date, as per the below given script, date will be auto-updated in it, two days prior Deliver Date.
+
+ cur_frm.cscript.custom_delivery_date = function(doc, cdt, cd){
+ cur_frm.set_value("production_due_date", frappe.datetime.add_days(doc.delivery_date, -2));
+ }
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ff9ef598
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+
+If you wish to change any ERPNext form formats, you can do so by using Custom
+Scripts. For example, if you wish to add a submit button after saving, to a
+Lead form, you can do so by creating your own script.
+
+`Setup > Customization > Custom Script`
+
+
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0fd3d460
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-scripts/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+custom-script-examples
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/customize-form.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/customize-form.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..153c5bf0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/customize-form.md
@@ -0,0 +1,121 @@
+
+
+Before we venture to learn form customization tool, click [here](https://frappe.io/docs/user/en/tutorial/doctypes.html) to understand the architecture of forms in ERPNext. It shall help you in using Customize Form tool more efficiently.
+
+Customize Form is the tool which allows user to customize property of the standard fields, and insert [custom fields]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/custom-field.html) as per the requirement. Let's assume we need to set Project Name field as a mandatory field in the Sales Order form. Following are the steps which shall be followed to achieve this.
+
+####Step 1: Go to Customize Form
+
+Go to Customize Form from:
+
+`Setup >> Customize >> Customize Form`
+
+You can also reach the Customize Form tool from the List Views.
+
+
+
+####Step 2: Select Document Type
+
+If navigate from the list view, Document Type will be automatically set in the Customize Form.
+
+If you reach customize form from the Setup module, or from awesome bar, then you will have to manually select Document Type in which customization needs to be made.
+
+
+
+####Step 3: Edit Property
+
+On selecting Document Type, all the fields of the Document Type will updated as rows in the Customize Form.
+
+To customized Project field, click on the respective row, and check "Mandatory". With this, Project field will become mandatory in the Sales Order.
+
+
+
+Like setting setting field Mandatory, following are the other customization options in the Customize Form tool.
+
+* Change [Field Type]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/field-types.html).
+* Edit Field Labels to suit your industry/language.
+* Set field precision for the Currency field.
+* To hide field, check Hidden.
+* Customize Options for the Select field.
+
+####Step 4: Update
+
+To save your customizations, Update Customize Form.
+
+To have customizations take effect, reload your ERPNext account once.
+
+####Other Customizations
+
+From Customize Form, you can also do following customizations:
+
+* Max Attachment Limit: Define [maximum no. of files]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/increase-max-attachments.html) which can attached on a document.
+* Default Print Format: For one document type, you can have multiple print formats. In the Customize Form, you can also set default Print Format for a document.
+* Set [Title Field]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/document-title.html)
+* Sort Field and Sort Order: Define field based on which documents in the list view will be sorted.
+
+>Note: Though we want you to do everything you can to customize your ERP based on your business needs, we recommend that you do not make “wild” changes to the forms. This is because, these changes may affect certain operations and may mess up your forms. Make small changes and see its effect before doing some more.
+
+Following are the properties which you can customize for a specific field from Customize Form.
+
+
+| Field property | +Purpose | +
| Print hide | +Checking it will hide field from the Standard print format. | +
| Unique | +For a unique field, same value cannot repeat in another document. | +
| Hidden | +Checking it field will hide field in the data entry form. | +
| Mandatory | +Checking it will set field as mandatory. | +
| Field Type | +Click here to learn about of fields types. | +
| Options | +Possible result for a drop down fields can be listed here. Also for a link field, relevant Doctype can be provided. | +
| Allow on submit | +Checking it will let user update value in field even in submitted form. | +
| Default | +Value defined in default will be pulled on new record creation. | +
| Description | +Gives field description for users understanding. | +
| Label | +Label is the field name which appears in form. | +
+
+#### Fixed or Editable Titles
+
+If your title is generated as a default title, it can be edited by the user by clicking on the heading of the document.
+
+
+
+If you want a fixed title, you can set the rule in the **Options** property. In this way, the title will be automatically updated everytime the document is updated.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7b0b6316
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.md
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+
+# Hiding Module Icons
+
+To hide modules (icons) from the home page, go to:
+
+`Setup > Permissions > Show / Hide Modules`
+
+
+
+Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/module-visibility.html) to learn about other features from where icons from the desktop can be hidden.
+
+> Note: Modules are automatically hidden for users that have no permissions on the documents within that module. For example, if a User has no permissions on Purchase Order, Purchase Request, Supplier, the “Buying” module will automatically hidden for that User.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bec848db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+
+# Customize ERPNext
+
+ERPNext offers many tools to customize the system.
+
+You simplify the forms by hiding features you don’t need using Disable
+Features and Module Setup, add Custom Fields, change form properties, like
+adding more options to drop-downs or hiding fields using Customize Form View
+and make your own Print Formats by using HTML Templates. You can also create
+multiple Letter Heads for your Prints.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..36e2bf57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+custom-field
+customize-form
+custom-doctype
+document-title
+hiding-modules-and-features
+print-format
+custom-scripts
+articles
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/kanban-board.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/kanban-board.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3554a2b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/kanban-board.md
@@ -0,0 +1,43 @@
+
+#Kanban Board
+
+Kanban is a Japanese manufacturing system in which the supply of components is regulated through the use of an instruction card sent along the production line.
+
+In ERPNext Kanban board can be an alternative for the list views. It helps you in visualizing various documents (like Task, Projects, Quotatio etc.) based on some status on a virtual board. Also, you can easily update card status by dragging and dropping to required status column. Kanban Board helps to visualize, control and optimize workflow and collaborate in real-time with the entire team.
+
+###Create new Kanban Board
+
+To create a Kanban board in ERPNext click the Kanban dropdown on the sidebar, and select New Kanban Board.
+
+
+
+###Add new Card/Document
+
+To add Cards on Kanban Board click Add Tasks. You can Edit a card details by click on the card and it will take you to the Task Doctype where you can further add and edit card details.
+
+
+
+###Update Cards/Document Status
+
+Based on the Task status you can drag and drop the Cards in the respective column. For example if the task is work in progress you can move the card for the task from the status Open to Working.
+
+
+
+###Manage Columns
+
+To add more columns in the Kanban board click Add columns.
+
+
+
+To move columns based on the priority drag and drop the columns as per requirement.
+
+
+
+To set Colors to a Card click drop down menu on the card and assign color to it.
+
+
+
+You can also Archive and Restore the columns added in a Kanban board. To do so click Archive in drop down menu on the card. Once archived you can restore the column from the list of the archived columns in the Kanban board.
+
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/print-format.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/print-format.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..745553ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/print-format.md
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+
+Print Formats are the layouts that are generated when you want to Print or
+Email a transaction like a Sales Invoice. There are two types of Print
+Formats,
+
+ * The auto-generated “Standard” Print Format: This type of format follows the same layout as the form and is generated automatically by ERPNext.
+ * Based on the Print Format document. There are templates in HTML that will be rendered with data.
+
+ERPNext comes with a number of pre-defined templates in three styles: Modern,
+Classic and Standard.
+
+You can modify the templates or create your own. Editing
+ERPNext templates is not allowed because they may be over-written in an
+upcoming release.
+
+To create your own versions, open an existing template from:
+
+`Setup > Printing > Print Formats`
+
+
+
+Select the type of Print Format you want to edit and click on the “Copy”
+button on the right column. A new Print Format will open up with “Is Standard”
+set as “No” and you can edit the Print Format.
+
+Editing a Print Format is a long discussion and you will have to know a bit of
+HTML, CSS, Python to learn this. For help, please post on our forum.
+
+Print Formats are rendered on the server side using the [Jinja Templating Language](http://jinja.pocoo.org/docs/templates/). All forms have access to the doc object which contains information about the document that is being formatted. You can also access common utilities via the frappe module.
+
+For styling, the [Bootstrap CSS Framework](http://getbootstrap.com/) is provided and you can enjoy the full range of classes.
+
+> Note: Pre-printed stationary is usually not a good idea because your Prints
+will look incomplete (inconsistent) when you send them by mail.
+
+#### References
+
+1. [Jinja Templating Language: Reference](http://jinja.pocoo.org/docs/templates/)
+2. [Bootstrap CSS Framework](http://getbootstrap.com/)
+
+#### Print Settings
+
+To edit / update your print and PDF settings, go to:
+
+`Setup > Printing and Branding > Print Settings`
+
+
+
+#### Example
+
+ {% raw %}{{ doc.select_print_heading or "Invoice" }}
+
+
+ Customer Name
+ {{ doc.customer_name }}
+
+
+ Date
+ {{ doc.get_formatted("invoice_date") }}
+ | Sr | +Item Name | +Description | +Qty | +Rate | +Amount | +
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| {{ row.idx }} | +
+ {{ row.item_name }}
+ {% if row.item_code != row.item_name -%}
+ Item Code: {{ row.item_code}} + {%- endif %} + |
+
+ {{ row.description }} |
+ {{ row.qty }} {{ row.uom or row.stock_uom }} | +{{ + row.get_formatted("rate", doc) }} | +{{ + row.get_formatted("amount", doc) }} | +
+
+* Enter details like Insurance,Chassis,Vehicle Value,Location and Employee.
+
+ 
+
+* Enter Vehicle attributes like color,wheels,doors and last carbon check
+
+ 
+
+### Vehicle Log
+
+Vehicle Log is used to enter Odometer readings,Fuel Expenses and Service Expense details.
+
+To create a new Vehicle Log go to:
+
+ERPNext > Vehicle Log
+
+* Enter License Plate,Employee,Date,Odometer reading for a quick entry.
+
+ 
+
+* Enter Refuelling details,Service details if applicable.
+
+ 
+
+### Make Expense Claim
+
+* Click on Make Expense Claim button .This button appears only in case of Submitted Vehicle Logs.
+
+ 
+
+When you click on 'Make Expense Claim',
+
+ 1. The date,employee,expense total are copied over to the created Expense Claim.
+ 2. The sum of Fuel Expenses and Service Expenses is copied over to Expense Claim Amount.
+ 3. Employee can submit the Expense Claim for further processing.
+
+ 
+
+### Vehicle Expenses Report
+
+* To track and monitor Vehicle Expenses you can use the Vehicle Expenses report.This report gives a one stop view of all your vehicle expenses month wise.
+
+ 
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/fleet_management/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/fleet_management/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2da8e7bc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/fleet_management/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+Vehicle
+Vehicle Log
+Vehicle Expenses
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/appraisal.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/appraisal.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..133d47c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/appraisal.md
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+
+In ERPNext, you can manage Employee Appraisals by creating an Appraisal
+Template for each role with the parameters that define the performance by
+giving appropriate weightage to each parameter.
+
+> Human Resource > Appraisal > New
+
+#### Step 1: Select an Appraisal Template
+
+
+
+After you select the template, the remaining form appears.
+
+#### Step 2: Enter Employee Details
+
+
+
+Once the Appraisal Template is completed, you can create Appraisal records for
+each period where you track performance. You can give points out of 5 for each
+parameter and the system will calculate the overall performance of the
+Employee.
+
+To make the Appraisal final, make sure to “Submit” it.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/employees-loan-management.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/employees-loan-management.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a517f04b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/employees-loan-management.md
@@ -0,0 +1,56 @@
+
+Employees Loan Management
+ +Employee Loan is an sum of money paid by Employer to Employee based on certain terms and condition. There are multiple ways accounting for the Employee loan can be managed. Company could collect loan from an employee separately. Or they can choose to deduct loan installment from the employee's salary. + +Let's check below how accounting can be managed for Employee Loan in ERPNext. + +### 1. Setup Masters + +Create following Groups and Ledgers in Chart of Accounts if not there. + +#### 1.1 Employee Loan Account + +Create Group as 'Employees Loans' under Current Assets and create employee loan A/C (Ledger) under it. [Check this link for new account creation]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-tree-structure-masters) + + + +#### 1.2 Salaries Account + +Create Group as 'Salaries' under Current Liabilities and create employee salary loan A/C (Ledger) under it. + + + +#### 1.3 Interest Account + +Create Ledger as 'Interest on Loan' under Indirect Income. + +### 2. Book Loan Amount + +Once loan amount is finalized, make journal voucher to book loan payment entry. You should Credit Loan amount to Bank/Cash account and Debit Loan amount employee loan account. + + + +### 3. Book Loan Recovery and Interest + +#### 3.1 Loan Recovery Entry + +If your employee pays separately for his/her loan installment and loan interest, then create journal voucher. + + + +#### 3.2 Loan Adjustment in Salary + +And if you deduct loan installment and interest from employees salary, then book journal entry for the same. + + + +In the Salary Slip of an employee, then create two Deduction Types in Salary Structure. One as 'Loan Installment' and other one as 'Loan Interest'. So that you can update those values under this deduction heads. + +### 4. Loan Account Report + +After recovering loan and loan interest, General Ledger report will show the loan account details as follows. + + + + diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/index.md new file mode 100644 index 00000000..be943bcc --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ + +{index} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..3fbdc5bb --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +employees-loan-management +leave-calculation-in-salary-slip \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/leave-calculation-in-salary-slip.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/leave-calculation-in-salary-slip.md new file mode 100644 index 00000000..78b0dacd --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/articles/leave-calculation-in-salary-slip.md @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + +Leave Calculation In Salary Slip
+ +There are two types of leave which user can apply for. ++
+
-
+
- Paid Leave (Sick Leave, Privilege Leave, Casual Leave etc.) +
- Unpaid Leave
+
+
+
+
When Employee is out of paid leave, he create Leave Application for unpaid leave. The term used for unpaid leave in ERPNext is Leave Without Pay (LWP). These leaves does have impact on the Employee's Salary Slip. +
+
+
Just marking Absent in the Attendance record do not have impact on salary calculation of an Employee, as that absenteeism could be because of paid leave. Hence creating Leave Application should be created incase of absenteeism.
Let's consider
+a scenario to understand how leaves impact employees Salary Slip.
++
Masters: + +
+
+
-
+
- Setup Employee +
- Allocate him paid leaves +
- Create Salary Structure for that Employee. In the Earning and Deduction table, select which component of salary should be affected if Employee takes LWP. +
- Create Holiday List (if any), and link it with Employee master. +
When creating Salary Slip for an Employee, following is what you will see:
+
++
Working Days: Working Days in Salary Slip are calculated based on number of days selected above. If you don't wish to consider holiday in Working Days, then you should do following setting. +
+
+
Human Resource >> Setup >> HR Setting
+
+
Uncheck field "Include Holidays in Total No. of Working Days" +
+
Holidays are counted based on Holiday List attached to the Employee's master.+
Uncheck field "Include Holidays in Total No. of Working Days" +
+
Leave Without Pay: Leave Without Pay is updated based on Leave Application made for this Employee, in the month for which Salary Slip is created, and which has +Leave Type as "Leave Without Pay". +
+
Payment Days: Following is how Payment Days are calculated: +
+
Payment Days = Working Days - Leave Without Pay +
+
As indicated above, if you have LWP checked for components in the earning and deducted table, you will notice a reduction in Amount based on no. of LWP of an Employee for that month. +
+
+
+ + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/attendance.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/attendance.md new file mode 100644 index 00000000..d9e0155a --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/attendance.md @@ -0,0 +1,16 @@ + +An Attendance record stating that an Employee has been present on a particular +day can be created manually by: + +> Human Resources > Documents > Attendance > New Attendance + +
+
+You can get a monthly report of your Attendance data by going to the “Monthly
+Attendance Details” report.
+
+You can easily set attendance for Employees using the [Employee Attendance Tool]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/employee-attendance-tool.html)
+
+You can also bulk upload attendence using the [Upload Attendence Tool]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.html)
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/daily-work-summary.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/daily-work-summary.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..65239983
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/daily-work-summary.md
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+
+# Daily Work Summary
+
+Daily Work Summary is way to get a automated way to get a summary of work done by all employees in a company. Once you set it up, each active Employee of the Company gets an email asking them what did they work on during the day.
+
+Replies of all employees who choose to respond is collected and sent as a summary at midnight. Emails are only sent based on the Holiday List setup in the Company or Employee master.
+
+*Note:* You must have one active incoming email account setup for this to work.
+
+### How to Use
+
+Go to "Daily Work Summary Settings" via HR module or search bar and set the company for which you want to activate this feature.
+
+You can also choose to Customize the Message you send to your employees:
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee-loan-management.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee-loan-management.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..acad6252
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee-loan-management.md
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+
+# Employee Loan Management
+This module enables companies which provides employee loans to define and manage employee loans.
+Employees can request loans, which are then reviewed and approved. For the approved loans,
+repayment schedule for the entire loan cycle can be generated and automatic deduction from salary can also be set up.
+
+### Loan Type
+To create a new Loan Type go to:
+
+> Human Resources > Employee Loan Management > Loan Type > New Loan Type
+
+Configure Loan limit and Rate of interest.
+
+
+
+### Employee Loan Application
+
+Employee can apply for loan by going to:
+
+> Human Resources > Employee Loan Management > Employee Loan Application > New Employee Loan Application
+
+
+
+#### In the Employee Loan Application,
+
+ * Enter Employee details and Loan details
+ * Select the repayment method, and based on your selection enter Repayment Period in Months or repayment Amount
+
+On save, Employee can see Repayment Information and make changes if required before submitting.
+
+
+
+### Employee Loan
+
+Once the Loan is approved, Manager can create Employee Loan record for the Employee.
+
+> Human Resources > Employee Loan Management > Employee Loan > New Employee Loan
+
+
+
+#### In the Employee Loan,
+
+ * Enter Employee and Loan Application
+ * Check "Repay from Salary" if the loan repayment will be deducted from the salary
+ * Enter Disbursement Date and Account Info
+ * As soon as you hit save, the repayment schedule is generated.
+
+
+
+#### Loan repayment deduction from Salary
+
+To auto deduct the Loan repayment from Salary, check "Repay from Salary" in Employee Loan. It will appear as Loan repayment in Salary Slip.
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f93edeab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/employee.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+There are many fields you can add in your Employee records.
+
+To create new Employee go to:
+
+> Human Resources > Employee > New
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/expense-claim.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/expense-claim.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e1b702f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/expense-claim.md
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+
+Expense Claim is made when Employee’s make expenses out of their pocket on behalf of the company. For example, if they take a customer out for lunch, they can make a request for reimbursement via the Expense Claim form.
+
+To make a new Expense Claim, go to:
+
+> HR > Expense Claim > New Expense Claim
+
+
+
+Set the Employee ID, date and the list of expenses that are to be claimed and
+“Submit” the record.
+
+### Set Account for Employee
+Set employee's expense account on the employee form, system books an expense amount of an employee under this account.
+
+
+### Approving Expenses
+
+Approver for the Expense Claim is selected by an Employee himself. Users to whom `Expense Approver` role is assigned will shown in the Expense Claim Approver field.
+
+After saving Expense Claim, Employee should [Assign document to Approver]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/using-eprnext/assignment.html). On assignment, approving user will also receive email notification. To automate email notification, you can also setup [Email Alert]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-alerts.html).
+
+Expense Claim Approver can update the “Sanctioned Amounts” against Claimed Amount of an Employee. If submitting, Approval Status should be submitted to Approved or Rejected. If Approved, then Expense Claim gets submitted. If rejected, then Expen
+Comments can be added in the Comments section explaining why the claim was approved or rejected.
+
+### Booking the Expense
+
+On submission of Expense Claim, system books an expense against the expense account and the employee account
+
+
+User can view unpaid expense claim using report "Unclaimed Expense Claims"
+
+
+### Payment for Expense Claim
+
+To make payment against the expense claim, user has to click on Make > Bank Entry
+#### Expense Claim
+
+
+#### Payment Entry
+
+
+
+Note: This amount should not be clubbed with Salary because the amount will then be taxable to the Employee.
+
+### Linking with Task & Project
+
+* To Link Expense Claim with Task or Project specify the Task or the Project while making an Expense Claim
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/fleet-management.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/fleet-management.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7e55df83
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/fleet-management.md
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+
+Fleet Management section of Human Resources helps your Organization manage their fleet of vehicles and track their expenses.
+
+To use Fleet Management in ERPNext,
+
+ 1. Set Up a Vehicle.
+ 2. Enter Vehicle Logs regularly.
+ 3. Make Expense Claims for Vehicle Expenses.
+ 4. View Reports for Vehicle Expenses.
+
+### Vehicle Set Up
+
+The Vehicle Set Up allows you to define the different types of Vehicles in your Organization.It acts as the Vehicle Master for Fleet Management.
+
+To create a new Vehicle go to:
+
+Human Resources > Fleet Management > Vehicle
+
+* Enter License Plate, Make, Model, Odometer Value, Fuel Type and Fuel UOM for a quick entry.
+
+ 
+
+* Enter details like Insurance, Chassis, Vehicle Value, Location and Employee.
+
+ 
+
+* Enter Vehicle attributes like color, wheels, doors and last carbon check
+
+ 
+
+### Vehicle Log
+
+Vehicle Log is used to enter Odometer readings, Fuel Expenses and Service Expense details.
+
+To create a new Vehicle Log go to:
+
+Human Resources > Fleet Management > Vehicle Log
+
+* Enter License Plate, Employee, Date, Odometer reading for a quick entry.
+
+ 
+
+* Enter Refueling details, Service details if applicable.
+
+ 
+
+### Make Expense Claim
+
+* Click on Make Expense Claim button. This button appears only in case of Submitted Vehicle Logs.
+
+ 
+
+When you click on 'Make Expense Claim',
+
+ 1. The date,employee,expense total are copied over to the created Expense Claim.
+ 2. The sum of Fuel Expenses and Service Expenses is copied over to Expense Claim Amount.
+ 3. Employee can submit the Expense Claim for further processing.
+
+ 
+
+### Vehicle Expenses Report
+
+* To track and monitor Vehicle Expenses you can use the Vehicle Expenses report.This report gives a one stop view of all your vehicle expenses month wise.
+
+ 
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/holiday-list.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/holiday-list.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c119cca9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/holiday-list.md
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+
+#Holiday List
+
+Holiday List is a list which contains the dates of holidays.
+
+Most organisations have a standard Holiday-List for their employees. Some even have different holiday lists based on the different locations or departments.
+
+To add a new Holiday List, go to:
+
+`Human Resources (HR) > Leave and Holiday > Holiday List`
+
+Click on New to add new Holiday List.
+
+### New Holiday List
+
+Give a name to Holiday List. It can be based in Fiscal Year or location or department as application. Also select From and To Date for the Holiday List.
+
+
+
+You can quickly add Weekly Off in the Holiday List as following.
+
+
+
+After that, you can also add specific days (like festival holidays) manually.
+
+
+
+
+### Holiday List in Employee
+
+If you have created multiple Holiday List, then select specific Holiday List for an Employee in the respective master.
+
+
+
+When an Employee applies for the Leave, then days mentioned in the Holiday List will not be counted, as they are holiday already. For more configuration option in Holiday List, check `HR > HR Settings`.
+
+> Note 1: If you have specified a Holiday List in the Employment master, then that Holiday List will give priority the default Holiday List of the company.
+
+> Note 2: You can form as many holiday lists as you wish. For example, if you have a factory, you can have one list for the factory workers and another list for office staff. You can manage between lists by attaching their respective holiday list to their respective employment detail form.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/human-resource-setup.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/human-resource-setup.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2063932e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/human-resource-setup.md
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+
+The HR module has a setup process where you create the masters for all the
+major activities.
+
+### Organization Setup
+
+To setup your Employee master you must first create:
+
+ * Employment Type (like Permanent, Temp, Contractor, Intern etc).
+ * Branch (if there are multiple offices).
+ * Department (if any, like Accounting, Sales etc).
+ * Designation (CEO, Sales Manager etc).
+ * Grade (A, B, C etc, usually based on seniority).
+
+### Leave Setup
+
+To setup Leaves, create:
+
+ * Leave Type (like Sick Leave, Travel Leave etc)
+ * Holiday List (list of annual holidays for the year - these days will not be considered in Leave Applications).
+
+### Payroll (Salary) Setup
+
+In ERPNext, salaries have two types of components, earnings (basic salary,
+expenses paid by the company, like telephone bill, travel allowance etc) and
+deductions (amounts deducted for taxes, social security etc). To setup
+payroll, you must first setup all the different types of earnings and
+deductions. These are
+
+ * Earning Type
+ * Deduction Type
+
+These are just labels, we will see how to use them when we discuss the payroll
+section.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/human-resources-reports.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/human-resources-reports.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..33a4ae99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/human-resources-reports.md
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+
+# Human Resources Reports
+
+### Employee Leave Balance
+
+Employee Leave Balance Report shows employees and their respective balance leaves under various leave types. Report is generated as per the number of allowed leaves.
+
+
+
+### Employee Birthday
+
+Employee Birthday Report shows Birthdays of your employees.
+
+
+
+### Employee Information
+
+Employee Information Report shows Report View of important information recorded in Employee master.
+
+
+
+### Employee Holiday Attendance
+
+Employee Holiday Attendance shows the list of Employees who attended on Holidays.
+
+
+
+### Monthly Salary Register
+
+Monthly Salary Register shows net pay and its components of employee(s) at a glance.
+
+
+
+
+### Monthly Attendance Sheet
+
+Monthly Attendance Sheet shows monthly attendance of selected employee at a glance.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a5358943
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+
+The Human Resources (HR) Module covers the processes linked to managing a team
+of co-workers. Most important feature here is processing the payroll by using
+Process Payroll to generate Salary Slips. Most countries have complex tax
+rules stating which expenses the company can make on behalf of the Employees.
+There are a set of rules for the company to deduct taxes and social security
+from employee payroll. ERPNext allows to accomodate all types of taxes and
+their calculation.
+
+It also maintains a complete employee database including contact information,
+salary details, attendance, performance evaluation, and appraisal records.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..673efdb8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+employee
+leave
+expense-claim
+attendance
+salary-and-payroll
+appraisal
+job-applicant
+job-opening
+offer-letter
+training
+tools
+human-resources-reports
+setup
+holiday-list
+human-resource-setup
+daily-work-summary
+fleet-management
+employee-loan-management
+articles
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/job-applicant.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/job-applicant.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d4ee9609
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/job-applicant.md
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+
+You can mantain a list of People who have applied for a [Job Opening]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/human-resources/job-opening.html).
+
+To create a new Job Applicant go to
+
+> Human Resource > Job Applicant > New
+
+
+
+### Linking with an Email Account
+
+You can link Job Application with an Email account.
+Suppose you link Job Application with an email job@example.com
+system shall create a New Job Applicant against each email received on the mailbox.
+
+* To link Email Account with Job Applicant, go to
+
+> Setup > Email Account > New
+
+* Enter the Email Address and the password, and select 'Enable Incoming'
+
+* In 'Append To' select 'Job Applicant'
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/job-opening.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/job-opening.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3d4aca68
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/job-opening.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+
+You can make a record of the open vacancies in your company using Job Opening.
+
+To create a new Job Opening go to
+
+> Human Resource > Job Opening > New
+
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-application.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-application.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4ea0f00f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave-application.md
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+
+If your company has a formal system where Employees have to apply for leaves
+to be able to qualify as paid leaveas, you can create Leave Application to
+track approval and usage of leaves. You have to mention the Employee, Leave
+Type and the period for which the leave is taken.
+
+> Human Resources > Leave Application > New Leave Application
+
+
+
+###Setting Leave Approver
+
+* A leave approver is a user who can approve an leave application for an employee.
+
+* You need to mention a list of Leave Approvers against an Employee in the Employee Master.
+
+
+
+> Tip : If you want all users to create their own Leave Applications, you can set
+their “Employee ID” as a match rule in the Leave Application Permission
+settings. See the earlier discussion on [Setting Up Permissions]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.html)
+for more info.
+
+You assign Leaves aginast an Employee check [Leave Allocation]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave.html)
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3bc7a638
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/leave.md
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+
+#Overview
+This section enables you to manage leave schedule of your organization. It also explains the way employees can apply for leaves.
+Employees create leave request and manager (leave approver) approves or rejects the request. You can select from a number of leave types such as sick leave, casual leave, privilege leave and so on. You can also allocate leaves to your employees and generate reports to track leaves record.
+
+---
+
+#Leave Type
+
+> Human Resources > Setup > Leave Type > New Leave Type
+
+Leave Type refers to types of leave allotted to an employee by a company. An employee can select a particular Leave Type while requesting for a leave. You can create any number of Leave Types based on your company’s
+requirement.
+
+
+
+**Max Days Leave Allowed:** It refers to maximum number of days this particular Leave Type can be availed at a stretch. If an employee exceeds the maximum number of days under a particular Leave Type, his/her extended leave may be considered as ‘Leave Without Pay’ and this may affect his/her salary calculation.
+
+**Is Carry Forward:** If checked, the balance leave will be carried forwarded to the next allocation period.
+
+**Is Leave Without Pay:** This ensures that the Leave Type will be treated as leaves whithout pay and salary will get deducted for this Leave Type.
+
+**Allow Nagative Balance:** If checked, system will always allow to approve leave application for the Leave Type, even if there is no leave balance.
+
+**Include holidays within leaves as leaves:** Check this option if you wish to count holidays within leaves as a ‘leave’. Such holidays will be deducted from the total number of leaves.
+
+###Default Leave Types
+There are some pre-loaded Leave Types in the system, as below:
+
+- **Leave Without Pay:** You can avail these leaves for different purposes, such as, extended medical issues, educational purpose or unavoidable personal reason. Employee does not get paid for such leaves.
+- **Privilege leave:** These are like earned leaves which can be availed for the purpose of travel, family vacation and so on.
+- **Sick leave:** You can avail these leaves if you are unwell.
+- **Compensatory off:** These are compensatory leave allotted to employees for overtime work.
+- **Casual leave:** You can avail this leave to take care of urgent and unseen matters.
+
+---
+
+#Leave Allocation
+
+Leave Allocation enables you to allot a specific number of leaves to a particular employee. You can allocate a number of leaves to different types of leave. You also have the option to allocate leaves to your employees manually or via the Leave Allocation Tool.
+
+###Manual Allocation
+> Human Resources > Setup > Leave Allocation > New Leave Allocation
+
+To allocate leaves to an Employee, select the period and the number of leaves you want to allocate. You can also add unused leaves from previous allocation period.
+
+
+
+###Via Leave Allocation Tool
+> Human Resources > Tools > Leave Allocation Tool
+
+This tool enables you to allocate leaves for a category of employees, instead of individual ones. You can allocate leaves based on Employee Type, Branch, Department and Designation. Leave Allocation Tool is also known as Leave Control Panel.
+
+
+
+---
+
+#Leave Application
+> Human Resources > Documents > Leave Application > New Leave Application
+
+Leave Application section enables an employee to apply for leaves. Employee can select the type of leave and the Leave Approver who will authorize the Leave Application. User with "Leave Approver" role are considered as Leave approver. Leave Approvers can also be restricted/pre-defined in the Employee record. Based on selected dates and applicable Holiday List, total leave days is calculated automatically.
+
+**Basic Workflow:**
+
+- Employee applies for leave through Leave Application
+- Approver gets notification via email, "Follow via Email" should be checked for this.
+- Approver reviews Leave Application
+- Approver approves/rejects Leave Application
+- Employee gets notification on the status of his/her Leave Application
+
+
+
+
+**Notes:**
+
+- Leave Application period must be within a single Leave Allocation period. In case, you are applying for leave across leave allocation period, you have to create two Leave Application records.
+- Application period must be in the latest Allocation period.
+- Employee can't apply for leave on the dates which are added in the "Leave Block List".
+
+---
+
+#Leave Block List
+
+> Human Resources > Setup > Leave Block List > New Leave Block List
+
+Leave Block List is a list of dates in a year, on which employees can not apply for leave. You can define a list of users who can approve Leave Application on blocked days, in case of urgency. You can also define whether the list will applied on entire company or any specific departments.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/offer-letter.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/offer-letter.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..47b2bde1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/offer-letter.md
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+
+Offer Letter is given to candidate after Interview & selection which states the offered salary package,
+designation, grade, department working, no of days entitled for leave.
+
+In ERPNext you can make a record of the Offer Letters that you can given to candidates. To create a new offer Letter go to
+
+> Human Resource > Offer Letter > New
+
+
+
+> Note: An offer letter can be made only against a [Job Applicant]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/human-resources/job-applicant.html)
+
+There is a pre-designed print format to print you offer letter.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/salary-and-payroll.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/salary-and-payroll.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3e2cbbe2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/salary-and-payroll.md
@@ -0,0 +1,171 @@
+
+Salary is a fixed amount of money or compensation paid to an employee by an employer in return for the work performed .
+
+Payroll is the administration of financial records of employees' salaries, wages, bonuses, net pay, and deductions.
+
+To process Payroll in ERPNext,
+
+ 1. Create Salary Structures for all Employees.
+ 2. Generate Salary Slips via Process Payroll.
+ 3. Book the Salary in your Accounts.
+
+### Salary Structure
+
+The Salary Structure represents how Salaries are calculated based on Earnings
+and Deductions.
+
+Salary structures are used to help organizations:
+ 1. Maintain pay levels that are competitive with the external labor market,
+ 2. Maintain internal pay relationships among jobs,
+ 3. Recognize and reward differences in the level of responsibility, skill, and performance, and manage pay expenditures.
+
+The usual components of the salary structure (in India) include:
+
+__Basic Salary:__ It is the taxable base income and generally not more than 40% of CTC.
+
+__House Rent Allowance:__ The HRA constitutes 40 to 50% of the basic salary.
+
+__Special Allowances:__ Makes up for the remainder part of the salary, mostly smaller than the basic salary which is completely taxable.
+
+__Leave Travel Allowance:__ The non-taxable amount paid by the employer to the employee for vacation/trips with family within India.
+
+__Gratuity:__ It is basically a lump sum amount paid by the employer when the employee resigns from the organization or retires.
+
+__PF:__ Fund collected during emergency or old age. 12% of the basic salary is automatically deducted and goes to the employee provident fund.
+
+__Medical Allowance:__ The employer pays the employee for the medical expenditures incurred. It is tax-free up to Rs.15,000.
+
+__Bonus:__ Taxable part of the CTC, usually a once a year lump sum amount, given to the employee based on the individual’s as well as the organizational performance for the year.
+
+__Employee Stock Options:__ ESOPS are Free/discounted shares given by the company to the employees. This is done to primarily increase employee retention.
+
+To create a new Salary Structure go to:
+
+> Human Resources > Setup > Salary Structure > New Salary Structure
+
+#### Figure 1.1:Salary Structure
+
+
+
+### In the Salary Structure,
+
+ * Select the Employees and enter Base (which is base salary or CTC) and Variable (if applicable)
+ * Set the starting date from which this is valid (Note: There can only be one Salary Structure that can be “Active” for an Employee during any period)
+
+#### Figure 1.2:Salary Structure for Salary Slip based on Timesheet
+
+
+
+### Salary Slip Based on Timesheet
+
+Salary Slip based on Timesheet is applicable if you have timesheet based payroll system
+
+ * Check "Salary Slip Based on Timesheet"
+ * Select the salary component and enter Hour Rate (Note: This salary component gets added to earnings in Salary Slip)
+
+### Earnings and Deductions in Salary Structure
+
+In the “Earnings” and “Deductions” tables, you can calculate the values of Salary Components based on,
+
+ * Condition and Formula
+
+#### Figure 1.3:Condition and Formula
+
+
+
+ * Condition and Amount
+
+#### Figure 1.4:Condition and Amount
+
+
+
+ * Only Formula
+ * Only Amount
+
+#### Figure 1.5:Account Details
+
+
+
+ * Select Mode of Payment and Payment Account for the Salary Slips which will be generated using this Salary Structure
+
+Save the Salary Structure.
+
+In conditions and formulas,
+
+ * Use field "base" for using base salary of the Employee
+ * Use Salary Component abbreviations. For example: BS for Basic Salary
+ * Use field name for employee details. For example: Employment Type for employment_type
+
+### Leave Without Pay (LWP)
+
+Leave Without Pay (LWP) happens when an Employee runs out of allocated leaves
+or takes a leave without an approval (via Leave Application). If you want
+ERPNext to automatically deduct salary in case of LWP, then you must check on
+the “Apply LWP” column in the Earning Type and Deduction Type masters. The
+amount of pay cut is the proportion of LWP days divided by the total working
+days for the month (based on the Holiday List).
+
+If you don’t want ERPNext to manage LWP, just don’t click on LWP in any of the
+Earning Types and Deduction Types.
+
+
+* * *
+
+### Creating Salary Slips
+
+Once the Salary Structure is created, you can make a salary slip from the same
+form or you can process your payroll for the month using Process Payroll.
+
+To create a new Salary Slip go to:
+
+> Human Resources > Setup > Salary Slip > New Salary Slip
+
+#### Figure 2: Salary Slip
+
+
+
+You can also create salary slip for multiple employees using Process Payroll:
+
+> Human Resources > Process Payroll
+
+#### Figure 3: Process Payroll
+
+
+
+In Process Payroll,
+
+ 1. Select the Company for which you want to create the Salary Slips.
+ 2. Check "Salary Slip based on Timesheet" if you want to process timesheet based Salary Slips.
+ 3. Select the From Date and To Date or Fiscal year and month for which you want to create the Salary Slips.
+ 3. Select the Payment Account.
+ 3. Click on “Create Salary Slips”. This will create Salary Slip records for each active Employee for the time period selected. If the Salary Slips are created, the system will not create any more Salary Slips. All updates will be shown in the “Activity Log” section.
+ 4. Once all Salary Slips are created, you can check if they are created correctly or edit it if you want to deduct Leave Without Pay (LWP).
+ 5. After checking, you can “Submit” them all together by clicking on “Submit Salary Slips”. 1. If you want them to be automatically emailed to the Employee, make sure to check the “Send Email” box.
+
+### Booking Salaries in Accounts
+
+The final step is to book the Salaries in your Accounts.
+
+Salaries in businesses are usually dealt with extreme privacy. In most cases,
+the companies issues a single payment to the bank combining all salaries and
+the bank distributes the salaries to each employee’s salary account. This way
+there is only one payment entry in the company’s books of accounts and anyone
+with access to the company’s accounts will not have access to the individual
+salaries.
+
+The salary payment entry is a Journal Entry that debits the total of the
+earning type salary component and credits the total of deduction type salary
+component of all Employees to the default account set at Salary Component level
+for each component.
+
+To generate your salary payment voucher from Process Payroll, click on
+“Make Bank Entry”. It will ask to enter the Bank Transaction Reference Number and date.
+Click on "Make" and a new Journal Entry with the total salary components will be
+created.
+
+#### Figure 3.1: Make Bank Entry
+
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/branch.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/branch.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d2e1278b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/branch.md
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+
+Branches of your organization
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/deduction-type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/deduction-type.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d915e634
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/deduction-type.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+
+You can make a record of the tax and other salary deductions and describe it as Deduction Type
+
+To create a new Deduction Type
+
+> Human Resource > Setup > Deduction Type > New
+
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/department.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/department.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7bb97364
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/department.md
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+
+Departments in your organization
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/designation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/designation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0d6f7b4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/designation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+
+Designations in your organization
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/earning-type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/earning-type.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fd986323
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/earning-type.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+
+You can make a record of the Salary Components and describe it as Earning Type
+
+To create a new Earning Type
+
+> Human Resource > Setup > Earning Type > New
+
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0b0501b7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/employment-type.md
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+
+Various employment contracts you have with your employees.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a3ed99b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/hr-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# HR Settings
+
+GLobal settings for HR related documents
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..be943bcc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b8681864
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+hr-settings
+employment-type
+branch
+department
+designation
+earning-type
+deduction-type
+holiday-list
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/employee-attendance-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/employee-attendance-tool.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cbdc3ded
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/employee-attendance-tool.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+To go the attendance tool, go to:
+
+> Human Resources > Tools > Employee Attendance Tool
+
+This tool allows you to add attendance records for multiple employees quickly.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..be943bcc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e3333227
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+employee-attendance-tool
+upload-attendance
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7cd0e789
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/tools/upload-attendance.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+This tool helps you to upload bulk attendence from a csv file.
+
+To upload the attendance go to:
+
+> Human Resources > Upload Attendance
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/training.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/training.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..341cac98
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/human-resources/training.md
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+
+### Training Event
+
+Schedule seminars, workshops, conferences etc using Training Event. You can also invite your employees to attend the event using this feature.
+
+
+
+### Inviting Employees for Event
+
+You can invite your employees to attend the event. You can do so by selecting the employees to be invited in the employee table.
+By default the status of the employee will be 'Open'.
+The system shall notify the employee with status 'Open' by sending a email to the office email address of the employee as mentioned in the employee master if you have selected 'Send Email' checkbox.
+The status is changed to 'Invited' when an invitation email is sent to the employee by the system.
+When an Employee confirms his/her presence for the event you can change the status to 'Confirmed'.
+
+
+
+### Training Result
+
+After compleation of the training Employee Wise training results can be stored based on the Feedback received from the Trainer.
+
+
+
+
+### Trainig Feedback
+
+Collect feedback regarding the event from your Employees using Training Feedback.
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0cc26022
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+
+# User Manual (English)
+
+### Contents:
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fff4da7d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+introduction
+setting-up
+accounts
+stock
+CRM
+selling
+buying
+manufacturing
+projects
+support
+human-resources
+customer-portal
+website
+using-erpnext
+regional
+customize-erpnext
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/concepts-and-terms.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/concepts-and-terms.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d05114f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/concepts-and-terms.md
@@ -0,0 +1,430 @@
+
+Before you start implementation, lets get familiar with the terminology that
+is used and some basic concepts in ERPNext.
+
+* * *
+
+### Basic Concepts
+
+#### Company
+
+This represents the Company records for which ERPNext is setup. With this same
+setup, you can create multiple Company records, each representing a different
+legal entity. The accounting for each Company will be different, but they will
+share the Customer, Supplier and Item records.
+
+> Setup > Company
+
+#### Customer
+
+Represents a customer. A Customer can be an individual or an organization.
+You can create multiple Contacts and Addresses for each Customer.
+
+> Selling > Customer
+
+#### Supplier
+
+Represents a supplier of goods or services. Your telephone company is a
+Supplier, so is your raw materials Supplier. Again, a Supplier can be an
+individual or an organization and has multiple Contacts and Addresses.
+
+> Buying > Supplier
+
+#### Item
+
+A Product, sub-product or Service that is either bought, sold or manufactured
+and is uniquely identified.
+
+> Stock > Item
+
+#### Account
+
+An Account is a heading under which financial and business transactions are
+carried on. For example, “Travel Expense” is an account, “Customer Zoe”,
+“Supplier Mae” are accounts. ERPNext creates accounts for Customers and
+Suppliers automatically.
+
+> Accounts > Chart of Accounts
+
+#### Address
+
+An address represents location details of a Customer or Supplier. These can be
+of different locations such as Head Office, Factory, Warehouse, Shop etc.
+
+> Selling > Address
+
+#### Contact
+
+An individual Contact belongs to a Customer or Supplier or is just an
+independent. A Contact has a name and contact details like email and phone
+number.
+
+> Selling > Contact
+
+#### Communication
+
+A list of all Communication with a Contact or Lead. All emails sent from the
+system are added to the Communication table.
+
+> Support > Communication
+
+#### Price List
+
+A Price List is a place where different rate plans can be stored. It’s a name
+you give to a set of Item Prices stored under a particular List.
+
+> Selling > Price List
+
+
+> Buying > Price List
+
+* * *
+
+### Accounting
+
+#### Fiscal Year
+
+Represents a Financial Year or Accounting Year. You can operate multiple
+Fiscal Years at the same time. Each Fiscal Year has a start date and an end
+date and transactions can only be recorded in this period. When you “close” a
+fiscal year, it's balances are transferred as “opening” balances for the next
+fiscal year.
+
+> Setup > Company > Fiscal Year
+
+#### Cost Center
+
+A Cost Center is like an Account, but the only difference is that its
+structure represents your business more closely than Accounts.
+For example, in your Chart of Accounts, you can separate your expenses by its type
+(i.e., travel, marketing, etc.). In your Chart of Cost Centers, you can separate
+them by product line or business group (e.g., online sales, retail sales, etc.).
+
+> Accounts > Chart of Cost Centers
+
+#### Journal Entry
+
+A document that contains General Ledger (GL) entries and the sum of Debits and
+Credits of those entries is the same. In ERPNext you can update Payments,
+Returns, etc., using Journal Entries.
+
+> Accounts > Journal Entry
+
+#### Sales Invoice
+
+A bill sent to Customers for delivery of Items (goods or services).
+
+> Accounts > Sales Invoice
+
+#### Purchase Invoice
+
+A bill sent by a Supplier for delivery of Items (goods or services).
+
+> Accounts > Purchase Invoice
+
+#### Currency
+
+ERPNext allows you to book transactions in multiple currencies. There is only
+one currency for your book of accounts though. While posting your Invoices with
+payments in different currencies, the amount is converted to the default
+currency by the specified conversion rate.
+
+> Setup > Currency
+
+* * *
+
+### Selling
+
+#### Customer Group
+
+A classification of Customers, usually based on market segment.
+
+> Selling > Setup > Customer Group
+
+#### Lead
+
+A person who could be a future source of business. A Lead may generate
+Opportunities. (from: “may lead to a sale”).
+
+> CRM > Lead
+
+#### Opportunity
+
+A potential sale. (from: “opportunity for a business”).
+
+> CRM > Opportunity
+
+#### Quotation
+
+Customer's request to price an item or service.
+
+> Selling > Quotation
+
+#### Sales Order
+
+A note confirming the terms of delivery and price of an Item (product or
+service) by the Customer. Deliveries, Production Orders and Invoices are made
+on basis of Sales Orders.
+
+> Selling > Sales Order
+
+#### Territory
+
+A geographical area classification for sales management. You can set targets
+for Territories and each sale is linked to a Territory.
+
+> Selling > Setup > Territory
+
+#### Sales Partner
+
+A third party distributer / dealer / affiliate / commission agent who sells
+the company’s products usually for a commission.
+
+> Selling > Setup > Sales Partner
+
+#### Sales Person
+
+Someone who pitches to the Customer and closes deals. You can set targets for
+Sales Persons and tag them in transactions.
+
+> Selling > Setup > Sales Person
+
+* * *
+
+### Buying
+
+#### Purchase Order
+
+A contract given to a Supplier to deliver the specified Items at the specified
+cost, quantity, dates and other terms.
+
+> Buying > Purchase Order
+
+#### Material Request
+
+A request made by a system User, or automatically generated by ERPNext based
+on reorder level or projected quantity in Production Plan for purchasing a set
+of Items.
+
+> Buying > Material Request
+
+* * *
+
+### Stock (Inventory)
+
+#### Warehouse
+
+A logical Warehouse against which stock entries are made.
+
+> Stock > Warehouse
+
+#### Stock Entry
+
+Material transfer from a Warehouse, to a Warehouse or from one Warehouse to
+another.
+
+> Stock > Stock Entry
+
+#### Delivery Note
+
+A list of Items with quantities for shipment. A Delivery Note will reduce the
+stock of Items for the Warehouse from where you ship. A Delivery Note is
+usually made against a Sales Order.
+
+> Stock > Delivery Note
+
+#### Purchase Receipt
+
+A note stating that a particular set of Items were received from the Supplier,
+most likely against a Purchase Order.
+
+> Stock > Purchase Receipt
+
+#### Serial Number
+
+A unique number given to a particular unit of an Item.
+
+> Stock > Serial Number
+
+#### Batch
+
+A number given to a group of units of a particular Item that may be purchased
+or manufactured in a group.
+
+> Stock > Batch
+
+#### Stock Ledger Entry
+
+A unified table for all material movement from one warehouse to another. This
+is the table that is updated when a Stock Entry, Delivery Note, Purchase
+Receipt, and Sales Invoice (POS) is made.
+
+#### Stock Reconciliation
+
+Update Stock of multiple Items from a spreadsheet (CSV) file.
+
+> Stock > Stock Reconciliation
+
+#### Quality Inspection
+
+A note prepared to record certain parameters of an Item at the time of Receipt
+from Supplier, or Delivery to Customer.
+
+> Stock > Quality Inspection
+
+#### Item Group
+
+A classification of Item.
+
+> Stock > Setup > Item Group
+
+* * *
+
+### Human Resource Management
+
+#### Employee
+
+Record of a person who has been in present or past, in the employment of the
+company.
+
+> Human Resources > Employee
+
+#### Leave Application
+
+A record of an approved or rejected request for leave.
+
+> Human Resource > Leave Application
+
+#### Leave Type
+
+A type of leave (e.g., Sick Leave, Maternity Leave, etc.).
+
+> Human Resource > Leave and Attendance > Leave Type
+
+#### Process Payroll
+
+A tool that helps in creation of multiple Salary Slips for Employees.
+
+> Human Resource > Salary and Payroll > Process Payroll
+
+#### Salary Slip
+
+A record of the monthly salary given to an Employee.
+
+> Human Resource > Salary Slip
+
+#### Salary Structure
+
+A template identifying all the components of an Employees' salary (earnings),
+tax and other social security deductions.
+
+> Human Resource > Salary and Payroll > Salary Structure
+
+#### Appraisal
+
+A record of the performance of an Employee over a specified period based on
+certain parameters.
+
+> Human Resources > Appraisal
+
+#### Appraisal Template
+
+A template recording the different parameters of an Employees' performance and
+their weightage for a particular role.
+
+> Human Resources > Employee Setup > Appraisal Template
+
+#### Attendance
+
+A record indicating presence or absence of an Employee on a particular day.
+
+> Human Resources > Attendance
+
+* * *
+
+### Manufacturing
+
+#### Bill of Materials (BOM)
+
+A list of Operations and Items with their quantities, that are required to
+produce another Item. A Bill of Materials (BOM) is used to plan purchases and
+do product costing.
+
+> Manufacturing > BOM
+
+#### Workstation
+
+A place where a BOM operation takes place. It is useful to calculate the
+direct cost of the product.
+
+> Manufacturing > Workstation
+
+#### Production Order
+
+A document signaling production (manufacture) of a particular Item with
+specified quantities.
+
+> Manufacturing > Production Order
+
+#### Production Planning Tool
+
+A tool for automatic creation of Production Orders and Purchase Requests based
+on Open Sales Orders in a given period.
+
+> Manufacturing > Production Planning Tool
+
+* * *
+
+### Website
+
+#### Blog Post
+
+A short article that appears in the “Blog” section of the website generated
+from the ERPNext website module. Blog is a short form of “Web Log”.
+
+> Website > Blog Post
+
+#### Web Page
+
+A web page with a unique URL (web address) on the website generated from
+ERPNext.
+
+> Website > Web Page
+
+* * *
+
+### Setup / Customization
+
+#### Custom Field
+
+A user defined field on a form / table.
+
+> Setup > Customize ERPNext > Custom Field
+
+#### Global Defaults
+
+This is the section where you set default values for various parameters of the
+system.
+
+> Setup > Data > Global Defaults
+
+#### Print Heading
+
+A title that can be set on a transaction just for printing. For example, you
+want to print a Quotation with a title “Proposal” or “Pro forma Invoice”.
+
+> Setup > Branding and Printing > Print Headings
+
+#### Terms and Conditions
+
+Text of your terms of contract.
+
+> Selling > Setup > Terms and Conditions
+
+#### Unit of Measure (UOM)
+
+How quantity is measured for an Item. E.g., Kg, No., Pair, Packet, etc.
+
+> Stock > Setup > UOM
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..141f467e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+
+ERPNext is a modern tool that covers not only accounting but also all other
+business functions, on an integrated platform. It has many benefits over both
+traditional accounting as well as ERP applications.
+
+### Benefits over traditional accounting software:
+
+ * Do a lot more than just accounting! Manage inventory, billing, quotes, leads, payroll and a lot more.
+ * Keep all your data safe and in one place. Don’t keep hunting for data when you need it across spreadsheets and different computers. Manage everyone on the same page. All users get the same updated data.
+ * Stop repetitive work. Don’t enter the same information from your word processor to your accounting tool. It's all integrated.
+ * Keep track. Get the entire history of a customer or a deal in one place.
+
+### Benefits over big ERPs
+
+ * $$$ - Saves money.
+ * **Easier to configure:** Big ERPs are notoriously hard to setup and will ask you a zillion questions before you can do something meaningful.
+ * **Easier to use:** Modern web like user interface will keep your users happy and in familiar territory.
+ * **Open Source :** This software is always free and you can host it anywhere you like.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..32620c57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+
+
+
+# Getting Started with ERPNext
+
+There are many ways to get started with ERPNext.
+
+### 1\. See the Demo
+
+If you want to check out the user interface and **feel** the application, just
+see the demo at:
+
+ *
+
+_Note: Not all of the steps are mandatory. ERPNext allows you to freely skip
+steps if you want to simplify the process._
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/open-source.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/open-source.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c63b8a0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/open-source.md
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+
+The source code is an Open Source software. It is open for anyone to
+understand, extend or improve. And it is free!
+
+Advantages of an Open Source software are:
+
+ 1. You can choose to change your service provider anytime.
+ 2. You can host the application anywhere, including your own server to gain complete ownership and privacy of the data.
+ 3. You can access a community to support you, incase you need help. You are not dependant on your service provider.
+ 4. You can benefit from using a product that is critiqued and used by a wide range of people, who have reported hundreds of issues and suggestions to make this product better, and this will always continue.
+
+
+---
+
+### ERPNext Source Code
+
+ERPnext source repository is hosted at GitHub and can be found here
+
+- [https://github.com/frappe/erpnext](https://github.com/frappe/erpnext)
+
+
+---
+
+### Alternatives
+
+There are many Open Source ERPs you can consider. Popular ones are:
+
+ 1. Odoo
+ 2. OpenBravo
+ 3. Apache OfBiz
+ 4. xTuple
+ 5. Compiere (and forks)
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/the-champion.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/the-champion.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..eade82eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/introduction/the-champion.md
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+
+
+
+The Champion
+ +
+
+We have seen dozens of ERP implementations over the past few years and we
+realize that successful implementation is a lot about intangibles and
+attitude.
+
+**ERPs are not required.**
+
+Like exercise.
+
+The human body may seem like it does not require exercise today or even tomorrow,
+but in the long run, if you wish to maintain your body and its health, you
+should get on the treadmill.
+
+In the same way, ERPs improve the health of your organization over a long run
+by keeping it fit and efficient. The more you delay putting things in order,
+the more time you lose, and the closer you get to a major disaster.
+
+So when you start implementing an ERP, keep your sight on the long term
+benefits. Like exercise, its painful in the short run, but will do wonders if
+you stay on course.
+
+* * *
+
+## The Champion
+
+ERP means organization wide change and it does not happen without effort.
+Every change requires a champion and it is the duty of the champion to
+organize and energize the entire team towards implementation. The champion
+needs to be resilient incase something goes wrong .
+
+In many organizations we have seen, the champion is most often the owner or a
+senior manager. Occasionally, the champion is an outsider who is hired for a
+particular purpose.
+
+In either case, you must identify your champion first.
+
+Most likely it's **you!**
+
+Lets Begin!
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..be943bcc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bb78d397
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+nested-bom-structure
+production-planning-subassembly
+valuation-based-on-field-in-bom
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/nested-bom-structure.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/nested-bom-structure.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a48dffa0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/nested-bom-structure.md
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+
+#Nested BOM Structure
+
+**Question:** Our manufacturing process involves producing sub-assembly items before final product. How should we manage BOM master in this scenario?
+
+**Answer:** You should create BOM for item in the order of their production. BOM for the sub-assembly item should be created first. BOM for the Product Order item should be created last. Let's consider an example to understand this better.
+
+A computer assembler is creating a BOM for PC. They also manufacture Hard Disk and DVD Drive themselve. They should first create BOM for Hard Disk and DVD Drive. After that BOM for the PC should be created.
+
+BOM of PC will have all the raw-material items selected in it. Hard Disk and DVD Drive (sub-assemblies) will also be selected as raw-material items. For the sib-assembly items, respective BOM no. will be fetched as well.
+
+
+
+Following is how the structure of nested BOM will look:
+
+
+
+-Personal Computer (FG Item)
+---- Mother Board
+---- SMTP
+---- Accessories and wires
+----Hard Disk (sub-assembly)
+ ------- Item A
+ ------- Item B
+ ------- Item C
+----DVD Drive (sub-assembly)
+ ------- Item X
+ ------- Item Y
+ ------- Item Z + +
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/production-planning-subassembly.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/production-planning-subassembly.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..314cf5b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/production-planning-subassembly.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+#Production Planning & Subassembly
+
+if you need Production Planning Tool to consider raw-materials required for the manufacturing of sub-assembly items selected in the BOM, please check following instructions to achieve the same.
+
+Production Planning Tool has field called "Use Multi-Level BOM", checking which will consider raw-material of sub-assemblies as well in the material planning. If this field is not checked, then it will consider sub-assembly as an item, and won't consider raw-material required for the manufacturing of that sub-assembly.
+
++---- Mother Board
+---- SMTP
+---- Accessories and wires
+----Hard Disk (sub-assembly)
+ ------- Item A
+ ------- Item B
+ ------- Item C
+----DVD Drive (sub-assembly)
+ ------- Item X
+ ------- Item Y
+ ------- Item Z + +
+
+`Use Multi-Level BOM` field is also there in the Production Order and Stock Entry. If checked, raw-materials of sub-assembly item will be consumed in the manufacturing process, and not the sub-assembly item itself.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/valuation-based-on-field-in-bom.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/valuation-based-on-field-in-bom.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7dd17ee9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/articles/valuation-based-on-field-in-bom.md
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+
+#Valuation Based On in BOM
+
+**Question:** What are for various options in `Valuation Based On` in the Bill Of Materials (BOM)?
+
+**Answer:** There are 3 available options in the Valuation Based On field:
+
+
+
+**Valuation Rate:** Item valuation rate is defined based on it's purchase or manufacture value.
+
+For Purchase Item, it is defined based on charges entered in the Purchase Receipt. If you don't have any Purchase Receipt
+made for an item or a Stock Reconciliation, then there won't be any Valuation Rate for that item.
+
+**Price List Rate:** This option allows to pull item rates from [Price List.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-price.html)
+
+**Last Purchase Rate:** It will be the last Purchase (Order) Rate of an item.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/bill-of-materials.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/bill-of-materials.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e152f352
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/bill-of-materials.md
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+
+At the heart of the Manufacturing system is the **Bill of Materials** (BOM).
+The **BOM** is a list of all materials (either bought or made) and operations
+that go into a finished product or sub-Item. In ERPNext, the component could
+have its own BOM hence forming a tree of Items with multiple levels.
+
+To make accurate Purchase Requests, you must always maintain correct BOMs.
+To make a new BOM:
+
+> Manufacturing > Bill of Materials > New BOM
+
+
+
+* To add Operations select 'With Operation'. The Operations table shall appear.
+
+
+
+ * Select the Item for which you want to make the BOM.
+ * Add the operations that you have to go through to make that particular Item in the “Operations” table. For each operation, you will be asked to enter a Workstation. You must create new Workstations as and when necessary.
+ * Workstations are defined only for product costing and Production Order Operations scheduling purposes not inventory.
+ * Inventory is tracked in Warehouses not Workstations.
+
+###Costing of a BOM
+
+* The Costing section in BOM gives an approximate cost of producing the Item.
+
+* Add the list of Items you require for each operation, with its quantity. This Item could be a purchased Item or a sub-assembly with its own BOM. If the row Item is a manufactured Item and has multiple BOMs, select the appropriate BOM. You can also define if a part of the Item goes into scrap.
+
+
+
+* This cost can be updated on by using the 'Update Cost' button.
+
+
+
+* User can select the currency in the BOM
+* System calculates the costing based on the price list currency
+
+
+
+### Materials Required(exploded)
+
+This table lists down all the Material required for the Item to be Manufactured.
+It also fetches sub-assemblies along with the quantity.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a2e22e4f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+
+# Manufacturing
+
+The Manufacturing module in ERPNext helps you to maintain multi-level Bill of
+Materials (BOMs) for your Items.
+It helps in product costing, production planning, creating production orders for your manufacturing shop floors and
+planning inventory by getting your material requirement via BOMs (also called Material Requirements Planning MRP).
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3b932a52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+introduction
+bill-of-materials
+production-order
+workstation
+operation
+subcontracting
+tools
+setup
+articles
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/introduction.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/introduction.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a7636f17
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/introduction.md
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+
+
+
+### Types of Production Planning
+
+Broadly there are three types of Production Planning Systems
+
+ * __Make-to-Stock:__ In these systems, production is planned based on a forecast and the Items are then sold to distributors or customers. All fast moving consumer goods that are sold in retail shops like soaps, packaged water etc and electronics like phones etc are Made-to-Stock.
+ * __Make-to-Order:__ In these systems, manufacturing takes place after a firm order is placed by a customer.
+ * __Engineer-to-Order:__ In this case each sale is a separate project and has to be designed and engineered to the requirements of the customer. Common examples of this are any custom business like furniture, machine tools, speciality devices, metal fabrication etc.
+
+Most small and medium sized manufacturing businesses are based on a make-to-
+order or engineer-to-order system and so is ERPNext.
+
+For engineer-to-order systems, the Manufacturing module should be used along
+with the Projects module..
+
+#### Manufacturing and Inventory
+
+You can track work-in-progress by creating work-in-progress Warehouses.
+
+ERPNext will help you track material movement by automatically creating Stock
+Entries from your Production Orders by building from Bill of Materials.
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/operation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/operation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9b008ced
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/operation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+
+### Operation
+
+Stores a list of all Manufacturing Operations, its description and the Default Workstation for the Operation.
+
+You can also create a Operation by:
+
+> Manufacturing > Documents > Operation > New
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/production-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/production-order.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6088f5ad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/production-order.md
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+
+
+A Production Order (also known as a Work Order) is a document that is given to
+the manufacturing shop floor by the Production Planner as a signal to produce
+a certain quantity of a certain Item. The Production Order also helps to generate
+the material requirements (Stock Entry) for the Item to be produced from its
+**Bill of Materials**.
+
+The **Production Order** is generated from the **Production Planning
+Tool** based on Sales Orders. You can also create a direct Production Order
+by:
+
+> Manufacturing > Documents > Production Order > New
+
+
+
+### Creating Production Orders
+
+ * Select the Item to be produced.
+ * The default BOM for that item will be fetched by the system. You can also change BOM.
+ * Enter the Qty to manufacture.
+ * If the selected BOM has operartion mentioned in it, the system shall fetch all operations from BOM.
+ * Mention the Planned Start Date (an Estimated Date at which you want the Production to begin.)
+ * Select Warehouses:
+ * Source Warehouses: The warehouse where you store your raw materials. Each required item can have separate source warehouse. Group warehouse also can be selected as source warehouse. On submission of Production Order, the raw mateirals will be reserved in these warehouses for production usage.
+ * Work-in-Progress Warehouse: The warehouse where your Items will be transferred when you begin production. Group Warehouse can also be selected as Work-in-Progress warehouse.
+ * Target Warehouse: The warehouse where you store finished Items before they are shipped.
+ * Scrap Warehouse: Scrap Items will be stored in this warehouse.
+ * Required Items: All the required items (raw materials) will be fetched from BOM and populated in this table. Here you can also change the default source warehouse for any item. And during the production, you can track transferred raw materials from this table.
+
+> Note : You can save a Production Order without selecting the warehouses, but warehouses are mandatory for submitting a Production Order
+
+###Reassigning Workstation/Duration for Operations
+
+* By default the system fetchs workstation and duration for Production Order Operations from the selected BOM.
+
+
+
+* If you wish to reassign the workstation for a particular opeeration in the Production Order, you can do so before submitting the Production Order.
+
+
+
+* Select the respective operation, and change its workstation.
+* You can also change the Operating Time for that operation
+
+### Capacity Planning in Production Order
+
+* When a Production Order is submitted, based on the Planned Start Date and the availability of the workstations, system schedules all operations for the Production Order (if Production Order has operations specified).
+* Drafts of Time Logs are also created based on the scheduled operations.
+
+### Transfering Materials for Manufacturing
+
+* Once you have submitted your Production Order, you need to Transfer the Raw Materials to initiate the Manufacturing Process.
+* This will create a Stock Entry with all the Items required to complete this Production Order to be added to the WIP Warehouse. (this will add sub-Items with BOM as one Item or explode their children based on your setting above).
+
+* Click on 'Start'.
+
+
+
+* Mention the quantity of materials to be transfered.
+
+
+
+* Submit the Stock Entry
+
+
+
+* Material Transfered for Manufacturing will be updated in the Production Order based on the Stock Entry.
+
+
+
+#### Material Transfer through Stock Entry
+Use cases for this option are:
+* If material transfer is done in bulk and/or is not required to be tracked against a particular Production Order
+* If the responsibility for Material Transfer and Production Entry lies with two separate users
+
+If this is the case, you can select the Skip Material Transfer check box, which will allow you to make the “Manufacture” Stock Entry directly by clicking on the ‘Finish’ button.
+
+### Making Time Logs
+
+* Progress in the Production Order can be tracked using [Timesheet]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-production-order.html)
+* Timesheet's time slots are created against Production Order Operations.
+* Drafts of Timesheet are created based on the scheduled operations when an Production Order is Submitted.
+* To create more Timesheets against an operation click 'Make Timesheet' button.
+
+
+
+###Updating Finished Goods
+
+* Once you are done with the Production Order you need to update the Finished Goods.
+* This will create a Stock Entry that will deduct all the sub-Items from the WIP Warehouse and add them to the Finished Goods Warehouse.
+* Click on 'Finish'.
+
+
+
+* Mention the quantity of materials to be transfered.
+
+
+
+ > Tip : You can also partially complete a Production Order by updating the Finished Goods stock creating a Stock Entry.
+
+### Stopping a Production Order
+
+* When you stop a Production Order its status is changed to Stop indicating that all production process against that Production Order is to be ceased.
+* To stop the Production Order click on the 'Stop' Button
+
+ 1. On Submitting the Production Order, the system will reserve a slot for each of the Production Order Operations serially after the planned start date based on the workstation availability. The Workstation availability depends on the Workstation timings, holiday list and if some other Production Order Operation was scheduled in that slot. You can mention the number of days for the system to try scheduling the operations in the Manufacturing Settings. This is set to 30 Days by default. If the operation requires time exceeding the available slot, system shall ask you to break the operations. Once the scheduling is done system shall create Time Logs and save them. You can Modify them and submit them later.
+ 2. You can also create additional time logs against an Operation. For doing so select the respective operation and click on 'Make Time Log'
+ 3. Transfer Raw Material: This will create a Stock Entry with all the Items required to complete this Production Order to be added to the WIP Warehouse. (this will add sub-Items with BOM as one Item or explode their children based on your setting above).
+ 4. Update Finished Goods: This will create a Stock Entry that will deduct all the sub-Items from the WIP Warehouse and add them to the Finished Goods Warehouse.
+ 5. To check all Time Logs made against the Production Order click on 'Show Time Logs'
+
+
+
+* You can also re-start a stopped Production Order.
+
+> Note : In order to make a Production Order against an Item you must specify 'Yes' to "Allow Production Order" on the Item form.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e14f0725
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+
+Global settings for manufacturing Processes
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..68a2ad8c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+manufacturing-settings
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..28911606
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+
+#Manufacturing Settings
+
+Manufacturing Settings can be found at:
+
+`Manufacturing > Setup > Manufacturing Settings`
+
+
+
+####Disable Capacity Planning and Time Tracking
+
+As per Capacity Planning feature, when Production Order is created for an item, for each Operation, Time Log is created. Based on actual Operation Time, Time Logs is updated. This also provides total Operations Cost against Production Order.
+
+If you don't track actual operations time, and want to disable creation of Time Log based on Operations, you should check "Disable Capacity Planning and Time Tracking" in the Manufacturing Settings.
+
+####Allow Overtime
+
+In the Workstation master, actual working hours are defined (say 101m to 6pm). As per the Capacity Planning, Time Logs are created against Workstation, for tracking actual operations hour. It also considers working hours of a Workstation when scheduling job (via Time Log).
+
+
+
+As per the standard validation, if Operation cannot be completed within working hours of Workstation, then user is asked to divide an Operation into multiple and smaller Operations. However, if `Allow Overtime` field is checked, while creating Time Logs for Operation, working hours of Workstation will not be validated. In this case, Time Logs for Operation will be created beyond working hours of Workstation as well.
+
+####Allow Production on Holidays
+
+Holiday of a company can be recorded in the [Holiday List]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/human-resources/) master. While scheduling production job on workstation, system doesn't consider a day listed in the Holiday list. If you want production job to be scheduled on holidays as well, `Allow Production on Holidays` field should be checked.
+
+
+
+####Over Production Allowance Percentage
+
+While making Production Orders against a Sales Order, the system will only allow production item quantity to be lesser than or equal to the quantity in the Sales Order. In case you wish to allow Production Orders to be raised with greater quantity, you can mention the Over Production Allowance Percentage here.
+
+####Back-flush Raw Materials Based On
+
+When creating Manufacture Entry, raw-material items are back-flush based on BOM of production item. If you want raw-material items to be back-flushed based on Material Transfer entry made against that Production Order instead, then you should set Back-flush Raw Materials Based On "Material Transferred for Manufacture".
+
+
+
+####Capacity Planning For (Days)
+
+Define no. of days for which system will do production job allocation in advance.
+
+####Time Between Operations (in mins)
+
+Time gap between two production operations.
+
+####Default Work In Progress Warehouse
+
+This Warehouse will be auto-updated in the Work In Progress Warehouse field of Production Order.
+
+####Default Finished Goods Warehouse
+
+This Warehouse will be auto-updated in the Work In Progress Warehouse field of Production Order.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/subcontracting.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/subcontracting.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0f021f96
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/subcontracting.md
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+
+Subcontracting is a type of job contract that seeks to outsource certain types
+of work to other companies. It allows work on more than one phase of the
+project to be done at once, often leading to a quicker completion.
+Subcontracting is practiced by various industries. For example, manufacturers
+making a number of products from complex components subcontract certain
+components and package them at their facilities.
+
+If your business involves outsourcing certain processes to a third party
+Supplier, where you buy the raw material from, you can track this by using the
+sub-contracting feature of ERPNext.
+
+### Setup Sub-Contracting:
+
+ 1. Create separate Items for the unprocessed and the processed product. For example if you supply unpainted X to your Supplier and the Supplier returns you X, you can create two Items: “X-unpainted” and “X”.
+ 2. Create a Warehouse for your Supplier so that you can keep track of Items supplied. (you may supply a months worth of Items in one go).
+ 3. For the processed Item, in the Item master, set “Is Sub Contracted Item” to “Yes”.
+
+
+
+
+__Step 1:__ Make a Bill of Materials for the processed Item, with the unprocessed
+Items as sub-items. For example, If you are manufacturing a pen, the processed
+pen will be named under Bill of Materials(BOM), whereas, the refill, knob, and
+other items which go into the making of pen, will be categorized as sub-items.
+
+
+
+__Step 2:__ Make a Purchase Order for the processed Item. When you “Save”, in the “Raw Materials Supplied”, all your un-processed Items will be updated based on your Bill of Materials.
+
+
+
+__Step 3:__ Make a Stock Entry to deliver the raw material Items to your Supplier.
+
+
+
+__Step 4:__ Receive the Items from your Supplier via Purchase Receipt. Make sure to check the “Consumed Quantity” in the “Raw Materials” table so that the
+correct stock is maintained at the Supplier’s end.
+
+
+
+> Note 1: Make sure that the “Rate” of processed Item is the processing rate
+(excluding the raw material rate).
+
+> Note 2: ERPNext will automatically add the raw material rate for your
+valuation purpose when you receive the finished Item in your stock.
+
+### Video Help
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/bom-replace-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/bom-replace-tool.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bf273acb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/bom-replace-tool.md
@@ -0,0 +1,45 @@
+
+# BOM Replace Tool
+
+Replace BOM is the utility to replace BOM of sub-assembly item, which is already updated in the BOM of Finished Good item.
+
+To use the Production Planning Tool, go to:
+
+> Manufacturing > Tools > BOM Replace Tool
+
+Let's consider a scenario to understand this better.
+
+If company manufactures computers, Bill of Material of its finished item will constitute of:
+
+1. Monitor
+1. Key Board
+1. Mouse
+1. CPU
+
+Out of all the items above, CPU is asembled separately. Hence separate BOM will be created for the CPU. Following are the items from the BOM of CPU.
+
+1. 250 GB Hard Disk
+1. Mother Board
+1. Processor
+1. SMTP
+1. DVD player
+
+If we have more items to be added , or existing items to be edited in the BOM of CPU, then we should create new BOM for it.
+
+1. _350 GB Hard Disk_
+1. Mother Board
+1. Processor
+1. SMTP
+1. DVD player
+
+To update new BOM updated in the BOM of finished item, where CPU is selected as raw-material, you can use BOM Replace tool.
+
+
+
+In this tool, you should select Current BOM, and New BOM. On clicking Replace button, current BOM of CPU will be replaced with New BOM in the BOM of finished Item (Computer).
+
+**Will BOM Replace Tool work for replacing finsihed item in BOM?**
+
+No. You should Cancel and Amend current BOM, or create a new BOM for finished item.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..98f85084
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..aaf7cecc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+production-planning-tool
+bom-replace-tool
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/production-planning-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/production-planning-tool.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..503e4172
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/tools/production-planning-tool.md
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+
+Production Planning Tool helps you plan production and purchase of Items for a
+period (usually a week or a month).
+
+This list of Items can be generated from the open Sales Orders or pending Material Requests that can be Manufactured in the system
+and will generate:
+
+ * Production Orders for each Item.
+ * Purchase Requests for Items whose Projected Quantity is likely to fall below zero.
+
+To use the Production Planning Tool, go to:
+
+> Manufacturing > Tools > Production Planning Tool
+
+
+
+#### Step 1: Specify source to get Production Items
+
+* You can select Sales Order or Material Request according to where you want to source the items from
+* If you plan to add items manually, keep the "Get items from" field empty
+
+
+
+#### Step 2: Select and get Sales Order / Material Request
+
+* Use filters to get the Sales Order / Material Request
+* Click on Get Sales Order / Get Material Requests to generate a list.
+
+
+
+
+
+#### Step 3: Get Items
+
+* Get the items for the Sales Order / Material request list
+* You can add/remove or change quantity of these Items.
+
+
+
+#### Step 4: Create Production Orders
+
+
+
+
+
+#### Step 5: Create Material Request
+
+Create Material Request for Items with projected shortfall.
+
+
+
+
+
+The Production Planning Tool is used in two stages:
+
+ * Selection of open Sales Orders / pending Material Request for the period based on “Expected Delivery Date”.
+ * Selection of Items from those Sales Orders / Material Requests
+
+The tool will update if you have already created Production Orde rs for a
+particular Item against its Sales Order (“Planned Quantity”) or Material Request.
+
+You can always edit the Item list and increase / reduce quantities to plan
+your production.
+
+> Note: How do you change a Production Plan? The output of the Production
+Planning Tool is the Production Order. Once your orders are created, you can
+change them by amending the Production Orders.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/workstation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/workstation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..57468cff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/manufacturing/workstation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+
+### Workstation
+
+Workstation stores information regarding the place where the workstation operations is carried out.
+Data regarding the operation cost of the place can be stored here.
+We can also specify the workstation operation timings and a Holiday List.
+
+You can also create a Workstation by:
+
+> Manufacturing > Documents > Workstation > New
+
+
+
+In workstation specify the workstation working hours under the 'working hour' section.
+You can also specify the working hours based on shifts.
+While scheduling Production Order, system will check for the availability of the workstation based on the working hours specified.
+
+> Note : You can enable overtime for your workstation in [Manufacturing Settings]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/manufacturing/setup/manufacturing-settings.html)
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/activity-cost.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/activity-cost.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f7b041d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/activity-cost.md
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+
+Activity Cost records the per-hour billing rate and costing rate of an Employee against an Activity Type.
+This rate is pulled by the system while making Time Logs. It is used for Project Costing.
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/activity-type.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/activity-type.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cd7d8319
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/activity-type.md
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+
+Activity Type makes a list of the different types of activities against which a Time Log can be made.
+
+
+
+By default the following Activity Types are created.
+
+* Planning
+* Research
+* Proposal Writing
+* Execution
+* Communication
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..be943bcc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..56c193c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+project-costing
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/project-costing.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/project-costing.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..15226730
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/articles/project-costing.md
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+
+Project Costing
+ +Each project has multiple task associated with it. To track actual costing of a Project, primarily in terms of services, user has to create Time Log based on actual time spent on Project-Task. Following the steps on how you can track actual service cost against Project. + +#### Activity Type + +Activity Type is a master of service offered by your personnel. You can add new Activity type from: + +`Project > Activity Type > New` + +#### Activity Cost + +Activity Cost is a master where you can track billing and costing rate for each Employee, and for each Activity Type. + + + +#### Time Log + +Based on Actual Time spent on the Project-Task, Employee will create a time log. + + + +On selection of Activity Type in the Time Log, Billing and Costing Rate will fetched for that Employee from respective Activity Cost master. + + + +Multiplying these rates with total no. of Hours in the Time Log gives Costing Amount and Billing Amount for the specific Time Log. + +#### Costing in Project and Task + +Based on total Time Logs created for a specific Task, its costing will be updated in the respective Task master. + + + +Same way, Project master will have cost updated based on Time Log created against that Projects, and tasks associated with that Project. + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/index.md new file mode 100644 index 00000000..097ed3a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/index.md @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ + +ERPNext helps you manage your Projects by breaking them into Tasks and +allocating them to different people. + +Purchasing and selling can also be tracked against Projects and this can help +the company keep tabs on its budget, delivery and profitability for a Project. + +Projects can be used to manage internal projects, manufacturing jobs or +service jobs. For service jobs, Time Sheets can also be created that can be +used to bill Customers if billing is done on a Time & Money basis. + +### Topics + +{index} diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/index.txt new file mode 100644 index 00000000..2f450ac5 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/index.txt @@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ +tasks +project +time-log-batch +activity-type +activity-cost +articles +timesheet diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project.md new file mode 100644 index 00000000..077f58fe --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/project.md @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + +Project management in ERPNext is Task driven. You can create Project and assign multiple Tasks against it. + +
+
+You can also track % Completion of a Project using different methods.
+
+ 1. Task Completion
+ 2. Task Progress
+ 3. Task Weight
+
+
+
+Some examples of how the % Completion is calculated based on Tasks.
+
+
+
+
+
+### Managing tasks
+Project can be divided into multiple Tasks.
+Task can be created via Project document itself or can be created via [Task]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/projects/tasks.html)
+
+
+
+* To view Task made against a Project click on 'Tasks'
+
+
+
+
+
+* You can also view the Tasks from the Project document itself
+
+
+
+* To add Weights to Tasks you can follow the below steps
+
+
+
+
+
+### Managing time
+
+ERPNext uses [Time Log]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/projects/time-log.html) to track the progress of a Project.
+You can create Time Logs against each task.
+The Actual Start and End Time along with the costing shall then be updated based on the Time Log.
+
+* To view Time Log made against a Project click on 'Time Logs'
+
+
+
+
+
+* You can also create a Time Log directlly and link it to the Project.
+
+
+
+### Managing expenses
+
+You can book [Expense Claim]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/human-resources/expense-claim.html) against a project task.
+The system shall update the total amount from expense claims in the project costing section.
+
+* To view Expense Claims made against a Project click on 'Expense Claims'
+
+
+
+* You can also create a Expense Claims directlly and link it to the Project.
+
+
+
+* Total amount of Expense Claims booked against a project is shown under 'Total Expense Claim' in the Project Costing Section
+
+
+
+### Cost Center
+
+You can make a [Cost Center]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/setup/cost-center.html) against a Project or use an existing cost center to track all expenses made against that project.
+
+
+
+###Project Costing
+
+The Project Costing section helps you track the time and expenses incurred against the project.
+
+
+
+* The Costing Section is updated based on Time Logs made.
+
+* Gross Margin is the difference between Total Costing Amount and Total Billing Amount
+
+###Billing
+
+You can make/link a [Sales Order]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/selling/sales-order.html) against a project. Once linked you can use the standard sales module to bill your customer against the Project.
+
+
+
+###Gantt Chart
+
+A Gantt Chart illustrates a project schedule.
+ERPNext gives you a illustrated view of tasks scheduled against that project in Gantt Chart View.
+
+* To view gantt chart against a project, go to that project and click on 'Gantt Chart'
+
+
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/tasks.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/tasks.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0b65085a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/tasks.md
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+
+Project is divided into Tasks.
+In ERPNext, you can also create a Task independently.
+
+
+
+### Status of the Task
+
+A Task can have one of the following statuses - Open, Working, Pending Review, Closed, or Cancelled.
+
+
+
+* By default each new Task created has the status set to 'Open'.
+
+* If a Time Log is made against a task, its status will be set to 'Working'.
+
+### Dependent Task
+
+You can specify a list of dependent tasks under the 'Depends On' section.
+
+
+
+* You cannot close the parent task until all dependent tasks are closed.
+
+* If the dependent tasks are delayed and overlap with the expected Start Date of the Parent task, the system will reschedule the parent task.
+
+### Managing Time
+
+ERPNext uses [Time Log]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/projects/time-log.html) to track the progress of a Task.
+You can create multiple Time Logs against each task.
+The Actual Start and End Time along with the costing is updated based on the Time Log.
+
+* To view Time Log made against a Task click on 'Time Logs'
+
+
+
+
+
+* You can also create a Time Log directly and link it to the Task.
+
+
+
+### Managing Expenses
+
+You can book [Expense Claim]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/human-resources/expense-claim.html) against a task.
+The system shall update the total amount from expense claims in the costing section.
+
+* To view Expense Claims made against a Task click on 'Expense Claims'
+
+
+
+* You can also create a Expense Claims directly and link it to the Task.
+
+
+
+* Total amount of Expense Claims booked against a task is shown under 'Total Expense Claim' in the Task Costing Section
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/time-log-batch.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/time-log-batch.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f6f1cecb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/time-log-batch.md
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+
+You can bill Time Logs by batching them together. This gives you the flexiblity to manage your customer billing in the way you want. To create a new Time Sheet, go to
+
+> Projects > Time Sheet > New Time Sheet
+
+OR
+
+Just open your Time Log list and check the Items to you want to add to the Time Log. Then click on "Make Time Sheet" button and these Time Logs will be selected.
+
+
+
+###Making Sales Invoice
+
+* After submitting the Time Sheet, "Make Invoice" button shall appear.
+
+
+
+* Click on that button to raise a Sales Invoice against the Time Sheet.
+
+
+
+* When you "Submit" the Sales Invoice, the Sales Invoice number will get updated in the Time Logs and Time Sheet and their status will change to "Billed".
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8f944f72
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+Timesheet can be used for track actual hours worked. It can be used for multiple purposes like:
+
+* Billable work to Customers
+* Production Order Operations
+* Creating Salary Slip based on hours worked.
+* Tasks
+* Project
+* Internal References
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..47d5ea1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+salary-slip-from-timesheet
+sales-invoice-from-timesheet
+timesheet-against-production-order
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/salary-slip-from-timesheet.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/salary-slip-from-timesheet.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ce9c16c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/salary-slip-from-timesheet.md
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+
+#Salary Slip from Timesheet
+
+If salary / wages for your employees are calculated based on number of hours worked, you can use Timesheet to track actual hours worked, and for creating Salary Slip.
+
+####Employee creates Timesheet
+
+To track actual hours employee has worked for, create Timesheet for each Employee. We suggest you to create Timesheet based on a payment period. For example, if you paying employee on a weekly bases, create one Timesheet for an Employee for one week. However, you can create multiple Timesheets, and create one Salary Slip for the multiple Timesheets.
+
+
+
+####Salary Structure for the Employee
+
+In the Salary Structure of the Employee, check field "Salary Slip Based on Timesheet". On checking this field, you see fields Salary Component and Hour Rate. Amount for that Salary Component (say Basic) will be calculated based on:
+
+ Total Timesheet Hours * Hour Rate
+
+Amount directly for other Salary Components (eg: House Rent Allowance, Phone Allowance) can be define directly. When creating Salary Slip, Amount for these Salary Component will be fetched as it is.
+
+
+
+####Create Salary Slip from Timesheet
+
+To create Salary Slip against Timesheet, open Timesheet and click on "Salary Slip".
+
+
+
+In the Salary Slip, Timesheet ID will be updated. You can select more Timesheet to be paid via this Salary Slip. Based on the Timesheets selected, Total Working Hours will be calculated.
+
+
+
+Hour Rate will be fetched from the Salary Structure of an Employee. Based on Total Working Hours and Hour Rate, Amount will be calculated for the Salary Component is to be calculated based on actual hours worked.
+
+####Save and Submit Salary Slip
+
+On Submission of Salary Slip, Timesheet's status will be updated to "Payslip".
+
+
+
+
+
+Creating Salary Slip based on Timesheet will allow you to manage payment for the overtime.
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/sales-invoice-from-timesheet.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/sales-invoice-from-timesheet.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..728ec3e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/sales-invoice-from-timesheet.md
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+
+#Sales Invoice from Timesheet
+
+Customer can be invoiced based on total no. of hours your Employees has worked for that Customer. Timesheet can be used to track actual no. of hours Employee has worked. For example, in the IT services domain, clients are billed based on man-hour bases, where per hour billing cost is pre-determined.s
+
+###Timesheet
+
+####Step 1: Create new Timesheet
+
+To create new Timesheet, go to:
+
+`Project > Timesheet > New`
+
+#### Step 2: Select Employee
+
+In the Employee field, only ones having ative Salary Structure will be selectable. Further in the Salary Structure , is created for the E on the actual hours worked, Employee can create Timesheet. To be able to create Sales Invoice against this Timesheet, ensure `Billable` field is checked.
+
+-
+
- Employee created Timesheet for the overtime. +
- In the Salary Structure of an Employee, set Overtime as a Salary Component to be calculated based on hourly bases. +
- When creating Salary Structure for an Employee, pull Timesheet when overtime details are tracked. +
+
+#### Step 3:Activity Type
+
+Employee will have to select an Activity Type (like planning, site visit, repairing etc. ). Costing and Billing Rate for each Activity can be different for each Employee. These cost can be tracked in the Activity Cost. On selection of Activity Type, Activity Cost is fetched from that Employee. Based on total Activity Cost and total no. of hours, Total Billing Amount (to the Customer) is calculated.
+
+To learn more on how to setup Activity Type and Activity Cost, click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/projects/articles/project-costing).
+
+
+
+#### Step 4: Enter Actual Time
+
+In the Timesheet Details table, enter actual hours an Employee has worked for. One Timesheet can be used for multiple days as well.
+
+To be able to create Sales Invoice from the Time Sheet, ensure 'Is Billable' field is checked.
+
+
+
+Based on the actual hours worked and Activity Cost of an Employee, Total Billing Amount will be calculated for Timesheet.
+
+#### Step 5: Save and Submit
+
+After submitting Timesheet, you will find buttons to create Sales Invoice and Salary Slip against this Timesheet.
+
+
+
+###Create Sales Invoice from Timesheet
+
+#### Submitted Timesheet
+
+In the Timesheet, if "Is Billable" is checked, you will find option to create Sales Invoice against it.
+
+
+
+####Sales Invoice
+
+Sales Invoice has dedicated table for the Timesheet table where Timesheet details will be updated. You can select more Timesheets in this table.
+
+
+
+
+####Select Customer and Item
+
+Select Customer to be billed. Select an Item, and enter rate as the billing amount.
+
+####Save
+
+After enter all required details in the Sales Invoice, Save and Submit it.
+
+On submitting Sales Invoice, status of the Timesheets linked to the Sales Invoice will be updated as Billed.
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-production-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-production-order.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6ba2edf1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-production-order.md
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+
+#Timesheet based on Production Order
+
+Creating Timesheet for Production Order helps in capacity planning for the Workstations. Also it helps in tracking actual time consumed the Workstation for completing specific operation.
+
+When a Production Order is submitted, based on the Planned Start Date and the availability of the Workstations, system schedules all operations by creating Timesheet.
+
+
+
+Let's assume we are manufacturing a mobile phone. As per the Bill of Material, time required for the assembly of components could be one hour. However the actual time taken for it's completion could be more than planned. The actual time tracking provides actual operation cost, hence helps in determining accurate valuation of the manufacturing item.
+
+####Production Order
+
+As per the Bill of Materials of manufacturing item, following are the Operations and Workstation through which raw-material items are processed.
+
+
+
+On submission on Production Order, Timesheet will be created automatically.
+
+
+
+####Time Sheet created from Production Order
+
+In the Timesheet, unique row will be added for each Operation - Workstation. This allows operator/supervisor at the workstation to enter actual From Time and To Time taken for each Operation.
+
+
+
+After enter From Time and To Time for all the Operations, Total Hours will be calculated.
+
+
+
+With updating actual time, you can also enter "Completed Qty". If all the items are not processed in the same Timesheet, you can create another Timesheet from the Production Order.
+
+
+
+####Save and Submit Timesheet
+
+On the submission of Timesheet, Total Hours is calculated. Also, in the Production Order, for each Operation, actual Start and End Time is updated.
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-project.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-project.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d1ddcaee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/timesheet-against-project.md
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+
+#Timesheet against Project and Task
+
+Timesheets can be tracked against Project and Tasks so that you can get reports on how much time was spent on each Task or Project.
+
+
+
+####Billable Timesheet
+
+To bill Customer based on Timesheet, check "Is Billable" in the Timesheet created against Project and Task. To learn more about billing Customer from Timesheet, click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/projects/timesheet/sales-invoice-from-timesheet.html).
+
+User can also make invoice against timesheet by selecting the project on the invoice. System will fetch the records from the timesheet based on selected project, for mode detail check below video
+
+
+####Project Costing
+
+When creating Timesheet, Employee will have to select an Activity Type. For each Activity Type, you can create an Activity Cost master. In the Activity Cost, Billing Rate and Costing rate is defined for each Employee.
+
+In the Timesheet, costing will be done based on Activity Cost multiplied with number of hours. Based the Timesheet Cost, total costing will be doen for the Task and Project as well.
+
+To learn about setup of Activity Type and Activity Cost, click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/projects/articles/project-costing).
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2af22f80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+ERPNext aims to support local regulation for all the regions in the world. In most cases ERPNext is very flexible so you can easily add Custom Fields and make Custom Reports to support the regluation of your region.
+
+As of mid-2017, ERPNext aims to pre-set additional fields and forms required for companies to easily submit reports to the relevant authorities.
+
+This section is still under-development.
+
+### Regions
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-remimders.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-remimders.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6c106a5c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-remimders.md
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+# Sending GST Reminders
+
+You can send email reminders to your Customers and Suppliers so that they can directly add or update their GSTIN numbers
+
+To send GSTIN Reminders, you can either open the Customer / Supplier record or **GST Settings**
+
+
+
+Here you can click on the "Send GSTIN Update Reminders" button to send email reminders to all your customers
+
+### Updating GSTIN
+
+Your customers will receive an email asking them to update their GSTIN and that email will link them to a portal page:
+
+
+
+Here they can update their GSTIN and it will automatically be added to your customer GSTIN record.
+
+#### Sample GSTIN Reminder Email
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-setup.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-setup.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f46f5336
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/gst-setup.md
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+
+# GST Features in ERPNext
+
+### 1. Setting up GSTIN
+
+GST Law requires that you maintain the GSTIN number for all your suppliers and vendors. In ERPNext, GSTIN is linked to the **Address**
+
+
+
+**GST for your Company Address**
+
+You also need to set the Address for your own Company and your Company's GST Number
+
+Go to the Company master and add the GSTIN to your default address.
+
+
+
+**Include GSTIN number in the Address Template**
+
+Open Address Template record for India, add GSTIN number and State Code there if not exists.
+
+
+
+
+### 2. Setting up HSN Codes
+
+According to the GST Law, your itemised invoices must contain the HSN Code related to that Item. ERPNext comes pre-installed with all 12,000+ HSN Codes so that you can easily select the relevant HSN Code in your Item
+
+
+
+### 3. Making Tax Masters
+
+To setup Billing in GST, you need to create 3 Tax Accounts for the various GST reporting heads CGST - Central GST, SGST - State GST, IGST - Inter-state GST
+
+Go to your **Chart of Accounts**, under the Duties and Taxes head of your account, create 3 Accounts
+
+**Note:** Usually the rate in CGST and SGST is half of IGST. For example if most of your items are billed at 18%, then create IGST at 18%, CGST and SGST at 9% each.
+
+
+
+### 4. Make Tax Templates
+
+You will have have to make two tax templates for both your sales and purchase, one for in state sales and other for out of state sales.
+
+In your **In State GST** template, select 2 accounts, SGST and CGST
+
+
+
+In your **Out of State GST** template, select IGST
+
+### 5. Making GST Ready Invoices
+
+If you have setup the GSTIN of your Customers and Suppliers, and your tax template, you are ready to go for making GST Ready Invoices!
+
+For **Sales Invoice**,
+
+1. Select the correct Customer and Item and the address where the transaction will happen.
+2. Check if the GSTIN of your Company and Supplier have been correctly set.
+3. Check if the HSN Number has been set in the Item
+4. Select the the **In State GST** or **Out of State GST** template that you have created based on the type of transaction
+5. Save and Submit the Invoice
+
+
+
+### 6. Print GST Tax Invoice
+
+To print Tax Invoice as per GSTN guidelines, please select **GST Tax Invoice** print format. This print format includes company address, GSTIN numbers, HSN/SAC Code and item-wise tax breakup. And while printing select correct value of Invoice Copy field, to mention whether it is for the Customer, Supplier or Transporter.
+
+
+
+### Reports
+
+ERPNext comes with most of your reports you need to prepare your GST Returns. Go to Accounts > GST India head for the list.
+
+
+
+You can check the impact of your invoice in the **GST Sales Register** and **GST Itemised Sales Register**
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..67abf7bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+
+# Statutory Requirements for India
+
+As of 2017, India will fall under the new GST (Goods and Services Tax) regime and ERPNext makes it easy for users to track the details of its Supplier and Customers across Invoices and make the required reports.
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8d72c56f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/regional/india/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+gst-setup
+gst-reminders
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_criteria.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_criteria.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f899ebef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_criteria.md
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+
+#Assessment Criteria
+
+Assessment Criteria is the parameter based on which you assess the Student.
+
+
+
+After assessment is conducted for a Course, marks earned are entered based on the Assessment Criteria. For example, if assessment was conducted for science subject, then you can evaluate Student in Science on various criteria like Writing, Practicals, Presentation etc.
+
+Assessment Criteria is be used when scheduling Assessment Plan for Student Group and Course.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_group.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_group.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0247a068
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_group.md
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+
+#Assessment Group
+
+Assessment Group tree is a master where you can define the hierarchy for examination conducted in your education institute.
+
+For example, if you conduct two assessment in a academic year, then setup Assessment Group as following.
+
+
+
+On the same lines, you can also define multiple Assessment Group bases on assessment conducted in your institute.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_plan.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_plan.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d074842d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_plan.md
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+
+#Assessment Plan
+
+To schedule an assessment/examination for a Student Group, for specific Course, create Assessment Plan. In the Assessment Plan, you can also capture details like:
+
+1. Grading Scale based on which grades will be assigned to students.
+
+2. Schedule Date of Assessment
+
+3. Room where assessment will be conducted
+
+4. Examiner and Supervisor
+
+
+
+5. Assessment Criteria is list of criteria based which each student in will be evaluated and grades will be assigned.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_result.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_result.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1312874a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_result.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+#Assessment Result
+
+Assessment Result is a log of marks/grades earned by the student for specific Assessment. Assessment Result is created in the backend based on the marks entered in the [Assessment Result Tool]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/schools/assessment/assessment_result_tool.html).
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_result_tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_result_tool.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a127fc6f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/assessment_result_tool.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+#Assessment Result Tool
+
+Assessment Result Tool help you entering marks earned by the Students for specific course. In this tool, based on the Assessment Plan, all the Student will be fetched into Assessment Result Tool. Also, Columns for Assessment Criteria will be where marks earned can be entered for each Student.
+
+
+
+As you go on entering marks for a Student, and switch to next student, in the backend, Student Result record will be auto-created for that Student.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/grading_scale.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/grading_scale.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..788dad02
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/grading_scale.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+#Grading Scale
+
+In the Grading Scale, you can define various grades and threshold for them. Based on the score earned by an Student for an Assessment, Grade will be assigned.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..317b468f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+
+#Assessment
+
+Every education institute organizes assessment / examination to evaluates progress of their Students. In ERPNext, you can manage complete assessment processing for your ERPNext account.
+
+Following is the order in which you should setup masters in the Assessment module.
+
+1. Assessment Criteria
+2. Assessment Group
+3. Grading Scale
+
+Once you have also defined the Student Group and Courses, you can schedule an assessment / examination by creating Assessment Plan.
+
+Based on the performance of Student in the assessment, you can create Assessment Result for an Student. You can create Assessment Results in bulk using Assessment Result Tool. In this tool, on selection of Assessment Plan, all the students (for Student Group) will be fetched. You can quickly enter marks earned by each Student for each Assessment Criteria in a single row.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..61d744c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/Assessment/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+assessment_criteria
+assessment_group
+grading_scale
+assessment_plan
+assessment_result_tool
+assessment_result
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3f01a6b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Admission
+
+This section contains student admission related documents.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ec9e7681
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+student-applicant
+program-enrollment
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/program-enrollment.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/program-enrollment.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c7abc59a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/program-enrollment.md
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+
+This form allows you to enroll a student to a program. A student can be enrolled to multiple programs.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/student-applicant.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/student-applicant.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..975d5f92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/admission/student-applicant.md
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+
+# Student Applicant
+
+A Student Applicant record needs to be created when a student applies for a program at your institute.
+You can Approve or Reject a student applicant. By accepting a student applicant you can add them to the student master.
+
+
+
+### Application Status
+
+- By default when a student applicant is created in the system, the application status is set to 'Applied'
+
+- You can update the status to 'Approved' once you approve the applicant to join your institute.
+
+- Once the application status is set to 'Approved', the 'Enroll' button should show up.
+ You can create a student record against the student applicant and enroll them to a program by clicking on this button.
+
+- Once a student is created against the student applicant, the system shall set the application status to 'Admitted'
+ and will not allow you to change the application status unless the student record is deleted.
+
+### Student Enrollment
+
+
+Once you approve a Student Applicant you can enroll them to a program. When you click the 'Enroll' buttom,
+the system shall create a student against that applicant and redirect you to the [Program Enrollment form]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/schools/student/program-enrollment.html).
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fee-category.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fee-category.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1b5a55fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fee-category.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Fee Category
+
+List of all different type of fees collected.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fee-structure.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fee-structure.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0a008014
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fee-structure.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Fee Structure
+
+A Fee Structure is a template that can be used while making fee records.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fees.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fees.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5a5a215f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fees.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Fees
+
+Maintain a record of fees collected from students.
+The [Fee Structure]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/schools/fees/fee-structure.html) is fetched based on the selected Program and Academic Term.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..56c66ae7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+# Fees
+
+This section contains 'Fee' related documents.
+
+
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..265ac6a5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/fees/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+fees
+fee-structure
+fee-category
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6b3e5359
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
+
+The School Modules is designed to meet requirements of Schools, Colleges & Educational Institutes.
+
+
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b485fdcf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+student
+admission
+schedule
+fees
+setup
+assessment
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/course-schedule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/course-schedule.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1f7c865b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/course-schedule.md
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+
+# Course Schedule
+
+Course Schedule is the schedule of a session conducted by an Instructor for a particular Course.
+You can see the overall course schedule in the Calendar view.
+
+
+
+### Marking Attendance
+
+You can mark attendance for a Student Group against a Course Schedule.
+
+
+
+- To make attendance, expand the attendance section.
+- Check the students who were present for that session.
+- Click on 'Mark Attendance'. The system will create the Attendance records.
+
+###View Attendance
+
+Once you have marked Attendance against a Course Schedule the Attendance section in the Course Schedule shall be hidden.
+A View Attendance button shall appear. Click on that button to view all attendance records created against that Course Schedule.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/examination.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/examination.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2a9fcd4b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/examination.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Examination
+
+The Examination record can be used to track the exam schedule and the results of that exam.
+
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..100a764b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Schedule
+
+
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..704ad84b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+course-schedule
+student-attendance
+scheduling-tool
+examination
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/scheduling-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/scheduling-tool.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..12e82566
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/scheduling-tool.md
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+
+# Scheduling Tool
+
+This tool can be used to create 'Course Schedules'.
+
+
+
+### Creating Course Schedules
+
+- Select Student Group for which you need to create Course Schedules.
+- Select Course, Room and Instructor for Course Schedules.
+- Enter From Time and To Time for Course Schedule.
+- Enter Start Date and End Date of the Course (Course Schedules will be created within this date range)
+- Enter Day of the week on which you want to schedule the Course.
+- Click on the 'Schedule Course' button
+- The system will create Course Schedules if the Room and Instructor are available and there is no conflict for the selected Student Group with other Course Schedules.
+
+###Rescheduling
+
+- If you wish to reschedule Course Schedules created against a Course, follow the instructions for creating course schedules
+- Check the 'Reschedule' checkbox and then click 'Schedule Course' button.
+- System will delete existing Course Schedules for specified Course within the mentioned Course Start Date and Course End Date and crate new Course Schedules.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/student-attendance.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/student-attendance.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0a5db383
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/schedule/student-attendance.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Student Attendance
+
+Maintains attendance record of the student. Attendance Records can be created against Course Schedules.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/academic-term.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/academic-term.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..eff40118
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/academic-term.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
+# Academic Term
+
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/academic-year.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/academic-year.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..26b8737f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/academic-year.md
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+
+# Academic Year
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/course.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/course.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ec55c3b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/course.md
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+
+# Course
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2fe4956f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Setup
+
+
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fb9ba05d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+course
+program
+instructor
+room
+academic-term
+academic-year
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/instructor.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/instructor.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3ce280ab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/instructor.md
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+
+# Instructor
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/program.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/program.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f1f9d0fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/program.md
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+
+# Program
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/room.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/room.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..352355b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/setup/room.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
+# Room
+
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5c17d5c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Student
+
+This section contains student related documents.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9b31be4d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+student
+student-log
+student-batch
+student-group
+student-group-creation-tool
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-batch.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-batch.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a32d7b00
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-batch.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Student Batch
+
+Student batch is a collection of students from Student Groups.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-group-creation-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-group-creation-tool.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6d8be999
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-group-creation-tool.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
+This tool allows you to create student groups in bulk. You can specify multiple parameters to create them.
+
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-group.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-group.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..08627164
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-group.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Student Group
+
+A student group is a collection of students taking a same course. You can create Course Schedules and Examinations against a Student Group.
+A student group needs to be created for every course in a particular academic term and academic year.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-log.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-log.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5577e8d3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student-log.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Student Log
+
+You can make a note of student activities using student log.
+Logs can be categorised as 'General', 'Academic', 'Medical' or 'Achievement'
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..732a446f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/schools/student/student.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+
+# Student
+
+A Student is a person who has enrolled at your institute and you have accepted their application.
+The student doctype maintains personal details of the student.
+
+You can view everything related to a particular student on this page. Eg : Fees, Student Group, etc
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/Selling-in-different-UOM.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/Selling-in-different-UOM.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..087f32a5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/Selling-in-different-UOM.md
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+
+#Selling in Different Unit (UoM)
+
+A sell price unit of measure (UOM) is the UOM with which you price items. You can have multiple sell price UOMs for any inventory item. However, when Customer places, UoM for an item could change.
+
+For example an Item Pen is stocked in Nos, but sold in Box. Hence we will make Sales Order for Pen in Box.
+
+###Step 1: In the Item master, under Unit of Measure section, you can list all the possible UoM of an item, with its UoM Conversion Factor. Update UoM Conversion Factors
+In one Box, if you get 10 Nos. of Pen, UoM Conversion Factor would be 10.
+
+
+
+
+###Setp 2: In the Sale Order, you will find two UoM fields
+
+-UoM
+-Stock UoM
+
+In both the fields, default UoM of an item will be fetched by default. You should edit UoM field, and select Sale UoM (Box in this case). Updating Sales UoM is mainly for the reference of the Customer. In the print format, you will see item quantity in the Sales UoM.
+
+
+
+Based on the Qty and Conversion Factor, qty will be calculated in the Stock UoM of an item. If you sell just one Box, then Qty as per stock UoM will be set as 10.
+
+
+###Stock Ledger Posting
+
+Irrespective of the Sales UoM selected in the Sale Order, stock ledger posting will be done in the Default UoM of an item. Hence you should ensure that conversion factor is entered correctly while selling item in different UoM.
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/adding-margin.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/adding-margin.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e864e567
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/adding-margin.md
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+
+#Adding Margin
+
+User Can apply the margin on Quotation Item and Sales Order Item using following two options.
+1)Price Rule: With the help of this method user can apply the margin on Quotation and Sales Order based on condition. You can find the section margin on pricing rule where a user has to select the type of margin whether it is Percentage or Amount and Rate or Amount. The system will apply the margin on quotation item and sales order item if pricing rule is enabled.
+
+To setup Pricing Rule, go to:
+
+`Selling > Setup > Pricing Rule` or `Accounts > Setup > Pricing Rule`
+
+####Adding Margin in Pricing Rule
+
+
+
+Total Margin is calculated as follows:
+`Rate = Price List Rate + Margin Rate`
+
+So, In order to apply the Margin you need to add the Price List for the Item
+
+To add Price List, go to:
+
+`Selling > Setup > Item Price` or `Stock > Setup > Item Price`
+
+####Adding Item Price
+
+
+
+2) Apply margin direct on Item: If user wants to apply the margin without pricing rule, they can use this option. In Quotation Item and Sales Order Item, user can select the margin type and rate or amount. The system will calculate the margin and apply it on price list rate to calculate the rate of the product.
+
+To add margin directly on Quotation or Sales Order, go to:
+
+`Selling > Document > Quotation`
+
+add item and scroll down to section where you can find the Margin Type
+
+####Adding Margin in Quotation
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/applying-discount.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/applying-discount.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a86f49b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/applying-discount.md
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+
+#Applying Discount
+
+There are several ways Discount can be applied on an item in the sales transactions.
+
+#### 1. Discount on "Price List Rate" of an item
+
+You can find the Discount (%) field in the Item table. Discount (%) is applied on the Price List Rate to get the selling Rate of the Item.
+
+
+
+The feature of Discount (%) is available in all sales and purchase transactions.
+
+You can use Pricing Rule for auto-application of Discount (%). [Click here to learn how Pricing Rule functions.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/pricing-rule.html)
+
+#### 2. Discount on Net Total and Grand Total
+
+In the "Additional Discount" section, you can apply discount as amount or as percentage.
+
+
+
+##### Discount on Net Total
+
+If Discount Amount is applied on **Net Total**, then item's Net Rate and Net Amount is calculated as per the Discount Amount. Net Rate and Amount field will be visible only if Discount is applied using this feature.
+
+
+
+##### Discount on Grand Total
+
+If Discount Amount is applied based on the **Grand Total**, then with item's Net Rate, Net Amount as well as taxes are also re-calculated as per Discount Amount.
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/close-sales-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/close-sales-order.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5d86e5fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/close-sales-order.md
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+
+#Close Sales Order
+
+In the submitted Sales Orders, you will find **Stop** option. Stopping Sales Order will restrict user from creating Delivery Note and Sales Invoice against it.
+
+
+
+####Scenario
+
+An order is received for ten Wind Turbines. Sales Order is also created for ten units. Due to scarcity of stock, only seven units are delivered to the customer. Pending three units are to be delivered soon. Customer informs that they don't need to deliver pending item, as they have purchased it from other vendor.
+
+In this case, create Delivery Note and Sales Invoice will be created only for the seven units. And the Sales Order should be set as stopped.
+
+
+
+Once Sales Order is set as stopped, you will not have pending quantities (three in this case) reflecting in Pending to Deliver and Pending to Invoice reports. To make further transactions against Stopped Sales Order, you should first Unstop it.
+
+You will find same funtionality in the Purchase Order as well.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/drop-shipping.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/drop-shipping.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f379e991
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/drop-shipping.md
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+
+#Drop Ship
+
+**Drop shipping** is a supply chain management technique in which the retailer does not keep goods in stock. Instead they transfer customer orders and shipment details to either the manufacturer, another retailer, or a wholesaler, who then ships the goods directly to the customer
+
+In ERPNext, you can create a Drop Shipping by creating Purchase Order against Sales Order.
+
+> Selling > Documents > Sales Order > Purchase Order
+
+#### Setup on Item Master
+
+Set **_Delivered by Supplier (Drop Ship)_** and **_Default Supplier_** in Item Master.
+
+
+
+#### Setup on Sales Order
+If Drop Shipping has set on Item master, it will automatically set **Supplier delivers to Customer** and **Supplier** on Sales Order Item.
+
+You can setup Drop Shipping, on Sales Order Item. Under **Drop Ship** section, set **Supplier delivers to Customer** and select **Supplier** agaist which Purchase Order will get created.
+
+
+
+#### Create Purchase Order
+After submitting a Sales Order, create Puchase Order.
+
+
+
+From Sales Order, all items, having **Supplier delivers to Customer** checked or **Supplier**(matching with supplier selected on For Supplier popup) mentioned, will get mapped onto Purchase Order.
+
+It will automatically set Customer, Customer Address and Contact Person.
+
+After submitting Purchase Order, to update delivery status, use **Mark as Delivered** button on Purchase Order. It will update delivery percetage and delivered quantity on Sales Order.
+
+
+
+**_Close_**, is a new feature introduced on **Purchase Order** and **Sales Order**, to close or to mark fulfillment.
+
+
+
+###Drop Shipping Print Format
+You can notify, Suppliers by sending a email after submitting Purchase Order by attaching Drop Shipping print format.
+
+
+
+###Video Help on Drop Ship
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/erpnext-for-services-organization.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/erpnext-for-services-organization.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..71ccd3fc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/erpnext-for-services-organization.md
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+
+#ERPNext for Service Organization
+
+**Question:** ERPNext looks primarily designed for the traders and manufacturers. Is ERPNext used by companies offering servies?
+
+**Answer:**
+
+About 30% of ERPNext customers are companies into services. These are companies into software development, certification services, individual consultants and many more. Being into service business ourselves, we use ERPNext to manage our sales, accounting, support and HR operations. Check following video to learn how ERPNext uses ERPNext.
+
+
+
+###Master Setup
+
+The setup for a Service company differs primarily for Items. They don't maintain the Stock for Items and thus, don't have Warehouses.
+
+To create a Service (non-stock) Item, in the item master, uncheck "Maintain Stock" field.
+
+
+
+When creating Sales Order for the services, select Order Type as **Maintenance**. Sales Order of Maintenance Type needs lesser details compared to stock item's order like Delivery Note, item warehouse etc.
+
+Service company can still add stock items to mantain their fixed assets like computers, furniture and other office equipments.
+
+###Hiding Non-required Features
+
+Since many modules like Manufacturing and Stock will not be required for the services company, you can hide those modules from:
+
+`Setup > Permissions > Show/Hide Modules`
+
+Modules unchecked here will be hidden from all the User.
+
+####Feature Setup
+
+Within the form, there are many fields only needed for companies into trading and manufacturing businesses. These fields can be hidden for the service company. Feature Setup is a tool where you can enable/disable specific feature. If a feature is disabled, then fields relevant to that feature is hidden from all the forms. For example, if Serial No. feature is disabled, then Serial. No. field from Item as well as from all the sales and purchase transaction will be hidden.
+
+[To learn more about Feature Setup, click here.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/hiding-modules-and-features.html).
+
+####Permissions
+
+ERPNext is the permission controlled system. Users access system based on permissions assigned to them. So, if user is not assigned Role related to Stock and Manufacturing module, it will be hidden from that User. [Click here to learn more about permission management.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions.html).
+
+You can also refer to help video on User and Permissions setting in ERPNext.
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..be943bcc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5d516079
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+applying-discount
+drop-shipping
+erpnext-for-services-organization
+shipping-rule
+sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions
+close-sales-order
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0bc1fe3e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions.md
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+
+#Sales Persons in the Sales Transactions
+
+In ERPNext, Sales Person master is maintained in [tree structure]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-tree-structure-masters.html). Sales Person is selectable in all the sales transactions.
+
+Sales Persons can be updated in the Customer master as well. On selection of Customer in the transactions, Sales Persons as updated in the Customer will fetch into sales transaction.
+
+
+
+####Sales Person Contribution
+
+If more than one sales persons are working together on an order, then contribution (%) should be set for each Sales Person.
+
+
+
+On saving transaction, based on the Net Total and Contriution (%), `Contribution to Net Total` will be calculated for each Sales Person.
+
+Total % Contribution for all Sales Person must be 100%. If only one Sales Person is selected, then % Contribution will be 100.
+
+####Sales Person Transaction Report
+
+Check Sales Person's Transaction report from:
+
+`Selling > Standard Reports > Sales Personwise Transaction Summary`
+
+This report can be generated based on Sales Order, Delivery Note and Sales Invoice. It will give you total amount of sale made by an employe.
+
+
+
+####Sales Person wise Commission
+
+ERPNext only provide total amount of sale made by a Sales Person. If you offer commission to Sales Person, you should add Sales Person as Sales Partners in ERPNext. For Sales Partners, you can define Commission (%). On selected on Sales Partner in a sales transction, based on Net Total, Commission Amount is calculated as well. You can check Sales Partner's commission report from:
+
+`Accounts > Standard Reports > Sales Partners Commission`
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/shipping-rule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/shipping-rule.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c7ea46fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/shipping-rule.md
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+
+#Shipping Rule
+
+Shipping Rule master helps in defining a rule based on which shipping charge is applied on a sales transactions.
+
+Most of the companies (mainly retail) have shipping charge applied based on the invoice total. If invoice value is above certain value, then shipping charge applied are lesser. If invoice value is less, then shipping charges applied are bit more than high shipping charges applied on a high value invoice. You can setup Shipping Rule to address the requirement of varying shipping charge based on the Net Total of sales transaction.
+
+To setup Shipping Rule, go to:
+
+`Selling > Setup > Shipping Rule` or `Accounts > Setup > Shipping Rule`
+
+####Shipping Rule Conditions
+
+
+
+Referring above, you will notice that shipping charges are reducing as valye is increasing. This shipping charge will only be applied if transaction total falls under one of the above range.
+
+####Valid for Countries
+
+You can set Shipping Charges valid for all the countries, or specify specific Country. If specific countries mentioned, then Shipping Charges will be applied only if Customer's country matches Country mentioned in the Shipping Rule.
+
+
+
+####Shipping Account
+
+If shipping charges are applied based on Shipping Rule, then more values like Shipping Account, Cost Center will be needed as well to add row in the Taxes and Other Charges table of transaction. Hence these details are tracked as well in the Shipping Rule.
+
+
+
+####Shipping Rule Application
+
+Following is an example of how shipping charges is auto-applied on Sales Order based on Shipping Rule.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..dfe9a39d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+
+# Selling
+
+Selling is the communication that happens with the customer prior to and
+during the sale. You might be managing all the communication yourself or you
+may have a small team of sales people to handle this. ERPNext helps you track
+the communication leading up to the sale, by keeping all your documents in an
+organized and searchable manner.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3f414d12
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+quotation
+sales-order
+setup
+articles
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/quotation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/quotation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b0cb32e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/quotation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+
+During a sale, the customer may request for a written note about the products
+or services you are planning to offer, along with the prices and other terms
+of engagement. This is called a “Proposal” or an “Estimate” or a “Pro Forma
+Invoice”or a **Quotation**.
+
+A typical Selling flow looks like:
+
+
+
+To create a new Quotation navigate to:
+
+> Selling > Quotation > New Quotation
+
+###Creating Quotation from Opportunity
+
+You can also create a Quotation from an Opportunity.
+
+
+
+A Quotation contains details about:
+
+ * The recipient of the Quotation
+ * The Items and quantities you are offering.
+ * The rates at which they are offered.
+ * The taxes applicable.
+ * Other charges (like shipping, insurance) if applicable.
+ * The validity of contract.
+ * The time of delivery.
+ * Other conditions.
+
+> Tip: Images look great on Quotations. Make sure your items have an image attached.
+
+### Rates
+
+The rates you quote may depend on two things.
+
+ * The Price List: If you have multiple Price Lists, you can select a Price List or tag it to the Customer (so that it is auto-selected). Your Item prices will automatically be updated from the Price List. For details refer [Price List]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/price-lists.html)
+
+ * The Currency: If you are quoting to a Customer in a different currency, you will have to update the conversion rates to enable ERPNext to save the information in your standard Currency. This will help you to analyze the value of your Quotations in standard Currency.
+
+### Taxes
+
+To add taxes to your Quotation, you can select a **Sales Taxes and Charges Template** or add the taxes on your own.
+
+For e.g
+
+
+
+To understand taxes in detail visit [Taxes]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html).
+
+### Terms and Conditions
+
+Each Quotation must ideally contain a set of terms, of your contract. It is
+usually a good idea to make templates of your Terms and Conditions, so that
+you have a standard set of terms. You can do this by going to:
+
+> Selling > Terms and Conditions
+
+#### What should Terms and Conditions Contain?
+
+ * Validity of the offer.
+ * Payment Terms (In Advance, On Credit, part advance etc).
+ * What is extra (or payable by the Customer).
+ * Safety / usage warning.
+ * Warranty if any.
+ * Returns Policy.
+ * Terms of shipping, if applicable.
+ * Ways of addressing disputes, indemnity, liability, etc.
+ * Address and Contact of your Company.
+
+### Submission
+
+Quotation is a “Submittable” transaction. Since you send this Quotation to
+your Customer or Lead, you must freeze it so that changes are not made after
+you send the Quotation.
+
+> Tip: Quotations can also be titled as “Proforma Invoice” or “Proposal”.
+You can do this by selecting a **Print Heading** in the **Print Settings**
+section. To create new Print Headings go to Setup > Printing >
+Print Heading.
+
+### Discount
+
+While making your sales transactions like a Quotation (or Sales Order) you
+can also give discounts to your customers. In the Discount section, add
+the discount in percentage or fixed amount. Read [Discount](https://erpnext.org/docs/user/manual/en/selling/articles/applying-discount) for more explanation.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/sales-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/sales-order.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d8368b39
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/sales-order.md
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+
+# Sales Order
+
+The Sales Order confirms your sales and triggers purchase (**Material
+Request**) shipment (**Delivery Note**), billing (**Sales Invoice**) and
+manufacturing (**Production Plan**)
+
+A Sales Order is usually a binding Contract with your Customer.
+
+Once your customer confirms the Quotation you can convert your Quotation into
+a Sales Order.
+
+### Sales Order Flow-Chart
+
+
+
+To create a new Sales Order go to:
+
+> Selling > Sales Order > New Sales Order
+
+### Creating Sales Order from Quotation
+
+You can also create a Sales Order from a submitted Quotation.
+
+
+
+Or you can create a new Sales Order and pull details from an Quotation.
+
+
+
+Most of the information in your Sales Order is the same as the Quotation.
+There are a few amongst other things that a Sales Order will ask you to
+update.
+
+ * Enter delivery date agaist each item. If there are multiple items and if you enter delivery date in the first row, the date will be copied to other rows as well where it is blank.
+ * Customer Purchase Order number: If your customer has sent you a Purchase Order, you can update its number for future reference (in billing).
+
+### Packing List
+
+The “Packing List” table will be automatically updated when you “Save” the
+Sales Order. If any Items in your table are Product Bundle (packets), then the
+“Packing List” will contain the exploded (detailed) list of your Items.
+
+### Reservation and Warehouses
+
+If your Sales Order contains Items for which inventory is tracked (Is Stock
+Item is “Yes”) then, ERPNext will ask you for “Reservation Warehouse”. If you
+have set a default Warehouse for the Item, it will automatically set this
+Warehouse here.
+
+This “reserved” quantity will help you project what is the quantity you need
+to purchase based on all your commitments.
+
+### Taxes
+
+To add taxes to your Quotation, you can select a **Sales Taxes and Charges Template** or add the taxes on your own.
+
+For e.g
+
+
+
+To understand taxes in detail visit [Taxes]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html).
+
+### Sales Team
+
+**Sales Partner:** If this Sale was booked via a Sales Partner, you can update the Sales Partner’s details with commission and other info that you can aggregate.
+
+**Sales Persons:** ERPNext allows you to tag multiple Sales Persons who may have worked on this deal. You can also split the amount in targets of different Sales Persons and track how much incentives they earned on this deal.
+
+### Recurring Sales Orders
+
+If you have a recurring contract with a Customer where you are required to generate a Sales Order on a monthly, quarterly, half-yearly or annual basis, you can check the “Convert To Recurring Order” box.
+
+Here you can fill in the details like; of how frequently you want to generate an Order in the 'Recurring Type' field, specify the day of of the month on which the Order needs to be generated in the 'Repeat On Day Of Month' field and the date on which the recurring orders should stop in the 'End Date' field.
+
+**Recurring Type:** Here you can update how frequently you want to generate an Order.
+
+**Repeat On Day Of Month:** You can specify the day of of the month on which the Order needs to be generated.
+
+**End Date:** The date on which the recurring orders should stop can be specified here.
+
+On updating the Sales Order, a Recurring ID will be generated which will be same for all recurring orders generated from this particular Sales Order.
+
+ERPNext will automatically create new Order and mail a notification to the Email Addresses you set in the 'Notification Email Address'field.
+
+
+
+### Next Steps
+
+Once you “Submit” your Sales Order, you can now trigger different aspects of
+your organization:
+
+ * To begin purchase click on Make -> Purchase Request
+ * To make a shipment entry click on Make -> Delivery Note. You can also make Delivery Note for selected items based on delivery date.
+ * To bill, make Make -> Sales Invoice
+ * To stop further process on this Sales Order, click on “Stop”
+
+### Submission
+
+Sales Order is a “Submittable” transaction. See Document Stages. You will be
+able to execute dependent steps (like making a Delivery Note) only after
+“Submitting” this Sales Order.
+
+### Sales Order with Order type Maintenance
+
+When the 'Order Type' of the Sales Order is 'Maintenance' follow the steps
+given below:
+
+__Step 1:__ Enter Currency, Price list and Item details.
+
+__Step 2:__ Mention taxes and other information.
+
+__Step 3:__ Save and Submit the form
+
+__Step 4:__ Once the form is submitted, the Action button will provide three
+choices.i) Maintenance Visit ii) Maintenance Schedule iii) Invoice.
+
+
+
+> **Note 1:**
+By clicking on the Action button and selecting 'Maintenance Visit' you can directly fill the visit form. The Sales Order details will be fetched directly.
+
+> **Note 2:**
+By clicking on the Action button and selecting 'Maintenance Schedule' you can fill the schedule details. The Sales Order details will be fetched directly.
+
+> **Note 3:**
+By clicking on the Invoice button you can make an Invoice for your
+services . The sales orders details will be fetched directly.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f1d9ef44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+This section includes information on how to setup customer groups, sales partners, sales persons and terms and conditions.
+
+It has instructions on how to configure selling settings, in order to enable default fields.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..22a335b0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+selling-settings
+sales-partner
+shipping-rule
+product-bundle
+item-price
+sales-person-target-allocation
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/item-price.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/item-price.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f515ef57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/item-price.md
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+
+Item Price is the record in which you can log sellig and buying rate of an item.
+
+There are two ways to reach to new Item Price form.
+
+> Selling/Buying/Stock >> Setup >> Item Price >> New Item Price
+
+Or
+
+> Item >> Add/Edit Prices >> Click on "+" >> New Item Price
+
+Following are the steps to create new Item Price.
+
+Step 1: Select Price List
+
+You can create multiple Price List in ERPNext to track Selling and Buying Price List of an item separtely. Also if item's selling prices id changing based on territory, or due to other criteria, you can create multiple selling Price List for it.
+
++
+
+On selection of Price List, its currency and for selling or buying property will be fetched as well.
+
+To have Item Price fetching in the sales or purchase transaction, you should have Price List id selected in the transaction, just above Item table.
+
+Step 2: Select Item
+
+Select item for which Item Price record is to be created. On selection of Item Code, Item Name and Description will be fetched as well.
+
++
+
+Step 3: Enter Rate
+
+Enter selling/buying rate of an item in Price List currency.
+
++
+
+Step 4: Save Item Price
+
+To check all Item Price together, go to:
+
+Stock >> Main Report >> Itemwise Price List Rate
+
+You will find option to create new Item Price record (+) in this report as well.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/product-bundle.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/product-bundle.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..035aadfe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/product-bundle.md
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+
+#Product Bundle
+
+Product Bundle can be seen as something like a "Bill-of-Material" on the Sales side. It's a master where you can list existing items which are bundled together and sold as a set (or bundle). For instance, when you sell a laptop, you need to ensure that charger, mouse and laptop bag are delivered with it and stock levels of these items get affected.
+To address this scenario, you can set create a Product Bundle for the main item, i.e. laptop, and list deliverable items i.e. laptop + charger + mouse + laptop bag as so-called "Child Items".
+
+Following are the steps on how to setup Product Bundle master, and how is it used in the sales transactions.
+
+####Create new Product Bundle
+
+To create new Product Bundle, Go to:
+
+Selling > Setup > Product Bundle > New
+
+
+
+###Select Parent Item
+
+In Product Bundle master, there are two sections. The "Parent Item" and a List of items to be shipped (Child Items).
+
+The "Parent Item" must be a so called non-stock item. The "Parent Item" is to be seen more like a vessel or virtual item and not a physical product.
+To create a non-stock item you have to unmark "Maintain Stock" in the Item Form.
+This is non-stock item because there is no stock maintained for it but only for the "Child Items".
+If you want to maintain stock for the Parent Item, then you must create a regular Bill of Material (BOM)
+and package them using a Stock Entry Transactions.
+
+###Select Child Items
+
+In Package Item section, you will list all the child items for which we maintain stock and is delivered to customer.
+Remember: The "Parent Item" is just virtual, so your main product (a laptop in our example here) also has to be listed on the List of Child (or Package) Items
+
+###Product Bundle in the Sales Transactions
+
+When making Sales transactions (Sales Invoice, Sales Order, Delivery Note)
+the Parent Item will be selected in the main item table.
+
+
+
+On selection of a Parent Item in the main item table, its child items will be fetched in Packing List
+table of the transaction. If child item is the serialized item, you will be able to specify its Serial Mo.
+in packing List table itself. On submission of transaction, system will reduce the stock level of child items from
+warehouse specified in Packing List table.
+
+Use Product Bundle to Manage Schemes:
+
+This work-around in Product Bundle was discovered when a customer dealing into nutrition product asked for feature to manage schemes like "Buy One Get One Free". To manage the same, he created a non-stock item which was used as Parent Item. In description of item, he entered scheme details with items image indicating the offer. The saleable product was selected in Package Item where qty was two. Hence every time they sold one qty of Parent item under scheme, system deducted two quantities of product from Warehouse.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-partner.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-partner.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c3187a38
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-partner.md
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+
+People who assist you in getting business are termed as Sales Partners. Sales Partners can be represented by different names in ERPNext. You can call them Channel Partner, Distributor, Dealer, Agent, Retailer, Implementation Partner, Reseller etc.
+
+For each Sales Partner, you can define commission offer to them. When Sales Partner is selected in transactions, their commission is calculated over Net Total of Sales Order/Invoice or Delivery Note.
+
+You can track Sales Personwise commission in the report under Selling module.
+
+To create a sales partner go to:
+
+`Selling > Setup > Sales Partner`
+
+Sales Partners are saved with Sales Partner name provided by user.
+
++This work-around in Product Bundle was discovered when a customer dealing into nutrition product asked for feature to manage schemes like "Buy One Get One Free". To manage the same, he created a non-stock item which was used as Parent Item. In description of item, he entered scheme details with items image indicating the offer. The saleable product was selected in Package Item where qty was two. Hence every time they sold one qty of Parent item under scheme, system deducted two quantities of product from Warehouse.
+
+You can track their address and contact details and also allocate Sales Partner for each Item Group, based on Qty and Amount.
+
+### Including Sales Partners in Your Website
+
+To include the name of your Partner on your website, check the "Show in
+Website" box. When click on "Show in Website", you will see field where you can attach logo of partner's company and enter brief and introduction of partner.
+
+
+
+To see listing of partner, you should go to:
+
+https://example.erpnext.com/partners
+
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-person-target-allocation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-person-target-allocation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..624a2f2a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-person-target-allocation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+
+With management of Sales Person, ERPNext also allow you to assign target to Sales Persons based on Item Group and Territory. Based on target allocated and actual sales booked by Sales Person, you will get target variance report for the Sales Person.
+
+###1. Sales Person - Item Groupwise Target Allocation
+
+####1.1 Open Sales Person's Master
+
+To allocate target, you should open specific Sales Person master.
+
+`Selling > Setup > Sales Person > (Open Sales Person)`
+
+####1.2 Allocate Item Groupwise Target
+
+In the Sales Person master, you will find table called Sales Person Target.
+
+
+
+In this table, you should select Item Group, Fiscal Year, Target Qty and Amount.
+
+You can give target in amount or quantity, or in both. Item Group can also be left blank. In this case the system will calculate target based on all the Items.
+
+####1.3 Target Distribution
+
+If you wish to spread allocated target across months, then you should setup Monthly Distribution master, and select it in the Sales Person master. Considering our example, target for the month of December will be set as 5 qty (10% of total allocation).
+
+
+
+
+####Report - Sales Person Target Variance Item Groupwise
+
+To check this report, go to:
+
+`Selling > Standard Report > Sales Person Target Variance (Item Group-wise)'
+
+This report will provide you variance between target and actual performance of Sales Person. This report is based on Sales Order report.
+
+
+
+
+As per the report, allocated target to Sales Person for the month of December was 5 qty. However, Sales Order was made for this employee and Item Group for only 3 qty. Hence, variance of 2 qty is shown in the report.
+
+---
+
+###2. Sales Person - Territorywise Target Allocation
+
+To allocate target to Sales Person based on Territory, you can should select specific Sales Person in the Territory master. This Sales Person is entered just for the reference. Sales Person details are not updated in the variance report of Territorywise Target Allocation.
+
+####2.1 Go to Territory master
+
+`Selling > Setup > Territory > (Open specific Territory master)`
+
+In the Territory master, you will find field to select Territory Manager. This field is linked to "Sales Person" master.
+
+
+
+####2.2 Allocating Target
+
+Target Allocation in the Territory master is same as in Sales Person master. You can follow same steps as given above to specify target in the Territory master as well.
+
+####2.3 Target Distribution
+
+Using this Monthly Distribution document, you can divide target Qty or Amount across various months.
+
+####2.4 Report - Territory Target Variance Item Groupwise
+
+This report will provide you variance between target and actual performance of Sales in particular territory. This report is based on Sales Order report. Though Sales Person is defined in the Territory master, its details are not pulled in the report.
+
+
+
+---
+
+###3. Target Distribution
+
+Target Distribution document allows you to divide allocated target across multiple months. If your product and services is seasonal, you can distribute the sales target accordingly. For example, if you are into umbrella business, then target allocated in the monsoon seasion will be higher than in other months.
+
+To create new Monthly Distriibution, go to:
+
+`Accounts > Monthly Distributon`
+
+
+
+You can link Monthly Distribution while allocating targets in Sales Person as well as in Territory master.
+
+###See Also
+
+1. [Sales Person Target Allocation]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/selling/setup/sales-person-target-allocation)
+2. [Using Sales Person in transactions]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/selling/articles/sales-persons-in-the-sales-transactions)
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/selling-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/selling-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..91cee348
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/selling-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+
+Selling Setting is where you can define propertiese which will be applied in your selling transactions.
+Let's check into each property one by one.
+
+
+
+####1. Customer Naming By
+
+When customer is saved, system generated unique ID for that Customer. Using that Customer ID,
+you can select Customer in other transactions.
+
+Bydefault Customer will be saved with Customer Name. If you wish to save Customer using
+a naming series, you should set Customer Naming By as "Naming Series".
+
+Example of Customer Id's saved in Naming Series - `CUST00001,CUST00002, CUST00003...` and so on.
+
+You can set Naming Series for customer naming from:
+
+> Setup > Settings > Naming Series`
+
+####2. Campaign Naming By
+
+Just like for Customer, you can also configure as how ID will be generated for the Campaign master.
+Bydefault Campaign will be saved with Campaign Name provided while its creation.
+
+####3. Default Customer Group
+
+Customer Group in this field will be auto-updated when you open new Customer form.
+While converting Quotation created for Lead into Sales Order, system attempts to convert
+Lead into Customer in the backend. While creating Customer in the backend, system pickup
+Customer Group and Territory as defined in the Selling Setting. If system doesn't find
+any values, then following validation message will be raised.
+To resolve this, you should:
+Either manually convert Lead into Customer, and define Customer Group and Territory manually while
+creating Customer or define Default Customer Group and Territory in the Selling Setting.
+Then you should have Lead automatically converted into Customer when convert Quotation into Sales Order.
+
+####4. Default Territory
+
+Territory defined in this field will be auto-updated in the Territory field of Customer master.
+
+Just like Customer Group, Territory is also checked when system tries creating Customer in the backend.
+
+####5. Default Price List
+
+Price List set in this field will be auto-updated in the Price List field of Sales transactions.
+
+####6. Sales Order Required
+
+If you wish to make Sales Order creation mandatory before creation of Sales Invoice, then you should
+set Sales Order Required field as Yes. Bydefault, this will be "No" for a value.
+
+####7. Delivery Note Required
+
+To make Delivery Note creation as mandatory before Sales Invoice creation, you should set
+this field as "Yes". It will be "No" by default.
+
+####8. Maintain Same Rate Throughout Sales Cycle
+
+System bydefault validates that item price will be same throughout sales cycle
+(Sales Order - Delivery Note - Sales Invoice). If you could have item price changing within the cycle,
+and you need to bypass validation of same rate throughout cycle, then you should uncheck this field and save.
+
+####9. Allow User to Edit Price List Rate in Transaction
+
+Item table of the sale transactions has field called Price List Rate. This field be non-editale
+by default in all the sales transactions. This is to ensure that price of an item is fetched from
+Item Price record, and user is not able to edit it.
+
+If you need to enable user to edit Item Price, fetched from Price List of an item, you should uncheck this field.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/shipping-rule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/shipping-rule.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..01375093
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/selling/setup/shipping-rule.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
+Using Shipping Rule you can define the cost for delivering the product to the customer.
+You can define different shipping rules for the same item across different territories.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/change-password.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/change-password.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..77d59e2a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/change-password.md
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+
+#Change User Password
+
+Each ERPNext user can customize password for his/her ERPNext account. Also user with System Manager role will be able to reset password for himself as well as for other users. Following are the steps to go about changing your password.
+
+
+####Step 1: Go to My Setting
+
+
+
+####Step 2: Set New Password
+
+
+
+Enter the new password and save the form to save changes.
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/delete-a-company-and-all-related-transactions.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/delete-a-company-and-all-related-transactions.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..39f53297
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/delete-a-company-and-all-related-transactions.md
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+
+#Delete All Related Transactions for a Company
+
+Often, users setup all the master data and then create a few dummy records. Then they want to delete the dummy records and the company and start over again, keeping the other master data like Customers, Items, BOMs intact.
+
+Version 5 onwards, you can now delete all dummy transactions related to a company.
+
+To do that, open the company record.
+
+`Setup > Accounts > Company` or `Accounts > Setup > Company`
+
+In Company master, click on the **Delete Company Transactions** button right at the bottom of the form. Then you must re-type the company name to confirm if you are sure you want to continue with this.
+
+This action will wipe out all the data related to that company like Quotation, Invoices, Purchase Orders etc. So be careful
+
+
+
+**Note:** If you want to delete the company record itself, use the normal "Delete" button from Menu options. It will also delete Chart of Accounts, Chart of Cost Centers and Warehouse records for that company.
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/edit-submitted-document.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/edit-submitted-document.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..aa90d36d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/edit-submitted-document.md
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+
+#Edit Submitted Document
+
+To edit submitted document, you need to cancel it first. Followings are steps to edit submitted document.
+
+####Step 1: Cancel Submitted Document
+
+You will find Cancel button on upper right corner of submitted document.
+
+
+
+####Step 2: Amend the document
+
+On cancellation of submitted document, Amend button will be became visible.
+
+
+
+####Step 3: Save and Submit the document
+
+On clicking Amend button, same document will become editable again. After Making required changes, save and submit the document.
+
+
+
+Note: If your document linked with other documents, then you will need to cancel last document you made on top of this document.
+
+Example:If you have created Delivery Note and Sales Invoice against Sales Order, which you need to amend, then you should first Cancel Delivery Note and Sales Invoice made for that Sales Order. Then amend Sales Order, re-save and re-submit it.
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..be943bcc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e6a3b85a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+change-password
+delete-a-company-and-all-related-transactions
+edit-submitted-document
+integrating-erpnext-with-other-application
+manage-header-and-footer
+managing-multiple-companies
+managing-perm-level
+managing-tree-structure-masters
+naming-series-current-value
+overwriting-data-from-data-import-tool
+rename-user
+using-custom-domain-on-erpnext
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/integrating-erpnext-with-other-application.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/integrating-erpnext-with-other-application.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..68f7f681
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/integrating-erpnext-with-other-application.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+#Integrating ERPNext with other Applications
+
+For now, ERPNext has out-of-the-box integration available for some applications like Shopify, your SMS gateway and payment gateway. To integrate ERPNext with other application, you can use REST API of Frappe. Check following links to learn more about REST API of Frappe.
+
+[Frappe Rest API](https://frappe.io/docs/user/en/guides/integration/rest_api.html)
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/manage-header-and-footer.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/manage-header-and-footer.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fdb8bb35
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/manage-header-and-footer.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+#Manage Header And Footer
+
+Check following to learn how to setup Letter Head in ERPNext.
+
+[Managing Letter head]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-5-letterhead-and-logo.html)
+
+ERPNext doesn't have option to define standard Footer. As a work around, you can use Terms and Condition master for footer. Content of Terms and Condition is already the last to appear in the standard print formats on transactions. Check following link to learn how to manage Terms and Conditions in ERPNext.
+
+[Terms and Condition]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.html)
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-multiple-companies.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-multiple-companies.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c5d3d839
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-multiple-companies.md
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+
+#Managing Multiple Companies
+
+ERPNext allows you to create multiple companies in a single ERPNext instance.
+
+In one account has multiple companies, you will find option to select Company in each transactions. While most of the records (mostly transactions) will be separated based on Company, there are few masters like Item, Item Group, Customer Group, Territory etc. which are common among all the companies.
+
+If you have separate teams working on each company, you can restrict access of the User to the data of specific Company. Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/) to know how to set permission rules for giving restricted access to the User.
+
+Following are the steps to add new Company.
+
+####Go to Setup Module
+
+`Accounts > Setup > Company > New`
+
+####Enter Company Details
+
+Company will be saved with Company Name provided.
+
+
+
+Also, you can define other properties for new company like:
+
+* Country
+* Currency
+* Default Cash and Bank Account
+* Income/Expense Account
+* Company Registration Details
+
+Value will be auto-filled in most of these field to define company-wise defaults. You can edit/customize it as per your requirement.
+
+
+
+####Chart of Account for New Company
+
+A separate Chart of Account master will be set for each company in the ERPNext. This allows you managing Accounts/Ledger master separately for each company. Also it allows you avail financial statement and reports like Balance Sheet and Profit and Loss Statement separately for each company.
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-perm-level.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-perm-level.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f5cfab2f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-perm-level.md
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+
+#Managing Perm Level in Permission Manager
+
+In each document, you can group fields by "levels". Each group of field is denoted by a unique number (0, 1, 2, 3 etc.). A separate set of permission rules can be applied to each field group. By default all fields are of level 0.
+
+Perm Level for a field can be defined in the [Customize Form]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/customize-form.html).
+
+
+
+If you need to assign different permission of particular field to different users, you can achieve it via Perm Level. Let's consider an example for better understanding.
+
+Delivery Note is accessible to Stock Manager as well as Stock User. You don't wish Stock User to access Amount related field in Delivery Note, but other field should be visible just like it is visible Stock Manager.
+
+For the amount related fields, you should set Perm Level as (say) 2.
+
+For Stock Manager, they will have permission on fields on Delivery Note as Perm Level 2 whereas a Stock User will not have any permission on Perm Level 2 for Delivery Note.
+
+
+
+Considering the same scenario, if you want a Stock User to access a field at Perm Level 2, but not edit it, the Stock User will be assigned permission on Perm Level 2, but only for read, and not for write/edit.
+
+
+
+Perm Level (1, 2, 3) not need be in order. Perm Level is primarily for grouping number of fields together, and then assigning permission to Roles for that group. Hence, you can set any perm level for an item, and then do permission setting for it.
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-tree-structure-masters.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-tree-structure-masters.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..83611e14
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-tree-structure-masters.md
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+
+#Managing Tree Structure Masters
+
+Some of the masters in ERPNext are maintained in tree structure. Tree structured masters allow you to set Parent master, and Child masters under those Parents. Setting up this structure allows you creating intelligent report, and track growth at each level in the hierarchy.
+
+Following is the partial list of masters which are maintained in the tree structure.
+
+* Chart of Accounts
+
+* Chart of Cost Centers
+
+* Customer Group
+
+* Territory
+
+* Sales Person
+
+* Item Group
+
+Following are the steps to manage and create record in the tree structured master. Let's consider Territory master to understand managing tree masters.
+
+####Step 1 : Go to Master
+
+`Selling > Setup > Territory`
+
+####Step 2 : Parent Territory
+
+
+
+When click on Parent territory, you will see option to add child territory under it. All default Territory groups will be listed under Parent group called "All Territories". You can add further Parent or child Territory Groups under it.
+
+####Step 3: Add new Territory
+
+When click on Add Child, a dialog box will provide two fields.
+
+**Territory Group Name**
+
+Territory will be saved with Territory Name provided here.
+
+**Group Node**
+
+If Group Node selected as Yes, then this Territory will be created as Parent, which means you can further create sub-territories under it. If select No, then it will become child Territory which you will be able to select in another masters.
+
+Only child Territory Groups are selectable in another masters and transactions.
+
+
+
+Following is how Child Territories will be listed under a Parent Territory.
+
+
+
+Following this steps, you can manage other tree masters as well in ERPNext.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/naming-series-current-value.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/naming-series-current-value.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..259ca6a6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/naming-series-current-value.md
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+
+#Setting the Current Value for Naming Series
+
+Naming Series feature allows you to define prefix for naming of a documents. For example, if a Sales Order has prefix "SO", then the series will be generated as SO-00001, SO-00002... and so on. Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/naming-series.html) to learn how you can customize Number Series for a transaction/master in ERPNext.
+
+### 1. Setting the Current Value
+
+Naming Series feature also offers a tool where you can set Current Value for specific prefix. This is generally required if you have recently started using ERPNext, and have old transactions in the previous system, and you want the numbering series to start in from where it ended in the old system. Let's consider a scenario to learn this better.
+
+For example, you have 322 Sales Orders created in your old system with SO00322 as highest Sales Order Id. In ERPNext, you need the first Sales Order to pick up #323 when it is saved. To enable this, you should set Current Value for SO series in following steps.
+
+#### Go to Naming Series Tool
+
+`Setup > System > Naming Series`
+
+#### Update Series Section
+
+
+
+#### Select Prefix
+
+Considering our scenario, prefix for Sales Order will be "SO".
+
+
+
+#### Current Value
+
+If you have currently 12 Sales Orders created in your account, then current value updated will be 12. You can edit Current Value to 322, and then click on Update Series Number.
+
+
+
+With this setting, you will have numbering for the New Sales Orders starting with #323.
+
+### 2. Error Due Series Number
+
+If you receive a Duplicate Name error while saving a transaction, for example, while saving Item Price, you receive an error saying:
+
+`Duplicate name Item Price RFD/00016`
+
+This error message indicates that when you are saving Item Price, system is trying to allocate "RFD/00016" to that Item Price record. But it is finding that Item Price with this ID is already existing in your system.
+
+This error could arise because Current Value for Series/Prefix of Item Price is disturbed and not in sync with actual Current Value. While actual Current Value for Item Price could be 20 (or any number more than 16), someone has set Current Value for this series as 15.
+
+To confirm actual Current Value for particular Series, you should check report for document in question (Item Price in this case), and check for the Item Price ID with highest value.
+
+Let's assume we find that actual Current Value for Item price is 22, then you go Naming Series, and set Current Value for the Prefix/Series of Item Price to 22, and Update Series Number.
+
+These instructions is applicable for all the documents in ERPNext for which user can customize Series and its Current Value.
+
+Let's consider another scenario to learn this better. On assigning a document to another user, error message says:
+
+`Duplicate name ToDo TDI00014286`
+
+This indicate the Current Value for Series/Prefix of ToDo (TDI) has been disturbed. You should follow these steps to correct value for Current Value for TDI prefix.
+
+1. Check ToDo report for the highest ToDo id value.
+1. Setup >> Settings >> Naming Series
+1. Check section B of Update Series
+1. Select Prefix for ToDo "TDI"
+1. Ensure that highest number for ToDo is updated as Current Value in Naming Series. If not, correct Current Value, and click on "Update Series Numbering".
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/overwriting-data-from-data-import-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/overwriting-data-from-data-import-tool.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..25c00186
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/overwriting-data-from-data-import-tool.md
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+
+#Overwriting Data from Data Import Tool
+
+Data Import Tool allows importing documents (like customers, Suppliers, Orders, Invoices etc.) from spreadsheet file into ERPNext. The very same tool can also be used for overwrite values in the existing documents.
+
+Overwriting data from Data Import Tool works only for the saved transactions, and not for Submitted ones.
+
+Let's assume there are no. of items for which we need to overwrite Item Group. Following are the steps to go about overwriting Item Groups for existing Items.
+
+####Step 1: Download Template
+
+Template Used for overwriting data will be same as one used for importing new items. Hence, you should first download template from.
+
+`Setup > Data > Import/Export Data'
+
+Since items to be over-written will be already available in the system, while downloading template, click on "Download with data" to get all the existing items in the template.
+
+
+
+####Step 2: Prepare Data
+
+In the template, we can only keep rows of the items to be overwritten and delete the rest.
+
+Enter new value in the Item Group column for an item. Since Item Group is a master in itself, ensure Item Group entered in the spreadsheet file is already added in the Item Group master.
+
+
+
+Since we are overwriting only Item Group, only following columns will be mandatory.
+
+1. Column A (since it has main values of template)
+1. Name (Column B)
+1. Item Group
+
+Columns of other field which won't have any impact can be removed, even if they are mandatory. This is applicable only for overwriting, and not when importing new records.
+
+####Step 3: Browse Template
+
+After updating Item Groups in spreadheet, come back to Data Import Tool in ERPNext. Browse and select the File/template which has data to be overwritten.
+
+
+
+####Step 4: Upload
+
+On clicking Import, Item Group will be over-written.
+
+
+
+If validation of values fails, then it will indicate row no. of spreadsheet for which validation failed and needs correction. In that case, you should corrected value in that row of spreadsheet, and then import same file again. If validation fails even for one row, none of the records are imported/overwritten.
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/rename-user.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/rename-user.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..74e02d00
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/rename-user.md
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+
+#Rename User
+
+Renaming functionality allows you to edit id of specific record. User is saved with person's Email Address. Only User with System Manager's role will be able to rename User IDs.
+
+Following are the steps to rename user id.
+
+#### Step 1: Users
+
+`Setup > Users > User`
+
+Open User to be renamed.
+
+#### Step 2: Rename
+
+From Menu, select Rename.
+
+
+
+#### Step 3: Update
+
+Enter valid Email Address and click on Rename.
+
+
+
+After successful renaming, User will be able login using updated user id.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/using-custom-domain-on-erpnext.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/using-custom-domain-on-erpnext.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0bebdea2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/using-custom-domain-on-erpnext.md
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+
+
+
+If you have subscribed to any of the plans at [ERPNext](https://erpnext.com), you can have us serve your site on your custom domain (for example at http://example.com). This enables your website to be served on a custom domain.
+
+To enable this feature, you will first have to edit DNS settings of your domain as follows.
+
+- Make a CNAME record for a subdomain (www in most cases) to {youraccountname}.erpnext.com
+- If you want serve the website on a naked domain (ie. http://example.com), set a URL redirect to http://www.example.com and not a CNAME record. Making a CNAME record in this case can have unexpected consequences including you not being able to receive emails anymore.
+
+After you've setup the DNS records, you will have to raise a support ticket by sending an email to support@erpnext.com and we'll take it from there.
+
+**Note**: We do not support HTTPS on custom domains. HTTPS enables end to end encryption (from your browser to our server). Although not critical for the website but we strongly recommend against using the ERPNext app over an unencrypted protocol. To be safe always use the ERP at your erpext.com address.
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/authorization-rule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/authorization-rule.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7797c487
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/authorization-rule.md
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+
+Authorization Rule is a tool to define rule for conditional authorization.
+
+If you sales and purchase transactions of higher value or discount requires an authorization from senior manager, you can set authorization rule for it.
+
+To create new Authorization Rule, go to:
+
+> Setup > Customize > Authorization Rule
+
+Let's consider an example of Authorization Rule to learn better.
+
+Assume that Sales Manager needs to authorize Sales Orders, only if its Grand Total value exceeds 10000. If Sales Orer values is less than 10000, then even Sales User will be able to submit it. It means Submit permision of Sales User will be restricted only upto Sales Order of Grand Total less than 10000.
+
+**Step 1:**
+
+Open new Authorization Rule
+
+**Step 2:**
+
+Select Company and Transaction on which Authorization Rule will be applicable. This functionality is available for limited transactions only.
+
+**Step 3:**
+
+Select Based On. Authorization Rule will be applied based on value selected in this field.
+
+**Step 4:**
+
+Select Role on whom this Authorization Rule will be applicable. As per the example considered, Sales User will be selected as Application To (Role). To be more specific you can also select Applicable To User, if you wish to apply the rule for specific Sales User, and not all Sales User. Its okay to not select Sales User, as its not mandatory.
+
+**Step 5:**
+
+Select approvers Role. It will be Sales Manager role which if assigned to user, will be able to submit Sales Order above 10000. Also you can select specific Sales Manager, and then rule should be applicable for that User only. Selecting Approving User field is not mandatory.
+
+**Step 6:**
+
+Set Above Value. Given the exmaple, Above Value will be set as 10000.
+
+
+
+If Sales User tries submitting Sales Order of value higher than 10000, then he will get error message.
+
+>If you wish to restrict Sales User from submitting Sales Orders, then instead of creating Authorization Rule, you should remove submit previledge from Role Permission Manager for Sales User.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/bar-code.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/bar-code.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7636bd75
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/bar-code.md
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+
+A Barcode is a machine-readable code in the form of numbers and a pattern of
+parallel lines of varying widths, printed on a commodity and used especially
+for stock control.
+
+When you purchase an item from any store, you will notice a label with thin,
+black lines across it, along with a variation of different numbers. This label
+is then scanned by the cashier, and the item's description and price
+automatically comes up. This set of lines and numbers on the label are termed
+as bar-code.
+
+A bar-code machine scans the number from the label of an Item. To work with
+ERPNext and the bar-code mechanism, connect the bar-code machine to your
+operating hardware. Then go to ERPNext setup and activate bar-code by going to
+tools and clicking on 'hide / unhide features'. Under Materials, feature
+setup, check the box that says Item Barcode.
+
+> Setup > Customize > Hide/ Unhide Features > Item Barcode.
+
+#### Figure 1: Check the box 'Item Barcode'
+
+
+
+
+To start scanning with a bar-code, go to
+
+> Accounts > Sales Invoice
+
+Under Item, click on Add new row. The item row will expand to show new fields.
+Place your cursor on the bar-code field and begin scanning. The bar-code will
+be updated in the field. Once the bar-code is entered, all the Item details
+will be fetched automatically by the system.
+
+For more ease, activate the POS view in ERPnext. The activation process is
+same as the bar-code activation. Go to Setup and click on 'hide/unhide
+features'. Check the 'POS view' box.
+
+Then go to Accounts and click on Sales Invoice. Check the box 'Is POS'
+
+
+#### Figure 2: Check the box 'Is POS'
+
+
+
+
+Go to Item and click on Add new row.
+
+The cursor will automatically be placed in the bar-code field. Thus you can
+immediately scan the bar-code and proceed with your operations.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/calculate-incentive-for-sales-team.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/calculate-incentive-for-sales-team.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..35fe40d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/calculate-incentive-for-sales-team.md
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+
+Can be used in any Sales Transaction with **Sales Team** Table:
+
+
+
+ cur_frm.cscript.custom_validate = function(doc) {
+ // calculate incentives for each person on the deal
+ total_incentive = 0
+ $.each(wn.model.get("Sales Team", {parent:doc.name}), function(i, d) {
+
+ // calculate incentive
+ var incentive_percent = 2;
+ if(doc.grand_total > 400) incentive_percent = 4;
+
+ // actual incentive
+ d.incentives = flt(doc.grand_total) * incentive_percent / 100;
+ total_incentive += flt(d.incentives)
+ });
+
+ doc.total_incentive = total_incentive;
+ }
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/company-setup.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/company-setup.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..68bbc7ba
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/company-setup.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+
+Enter your company details to complete Company Setup. Mention the type of
+business, under Domain. You can enter manufacturing, retail, or services
+depending on the nature of your business activity. If you have more than one
+companies, create the setup under the Company Setup page.
+
+After clicking on Accounts and click on Company.
+
+> Accounts > Company > New Company
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/bulk-rename.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/bulk-rename.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bbf2ae6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/bulk-rename.md
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+
+# Bulk Renaming of Records
+
+You can rename a document in ERPNext (if it is allowed) by going to **Menu > Rename** in the document.
+
+Alternatively, if you want to rename a whole bunch of records, just go to:
+
+> Setup > Data > Rename Tool
+
+This tool will allow you to rename multiple records at the same time.
+
+### Example
+
+To rename multiple records, upload a **.csv** file with the old name in the first column and the new name in the second column and click on **Upload**.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/data-import-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/data-import-tool.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..54094479
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/data-import-tool.md
@@ -0,0 +1,124 @@
+
+The Data Import Tool is a great way to upload (or edit) bulk data, specially master data, into the system.
+
+To Open the data import tool, you either go to Setup or go to the Transaction you want to Import. If Data Import is allowed, you will see an Import Button:
+
+
+
+The tool has two sections, one to download a template and the second to upload
+the data.
+
+(Note: Only those DocTypes are allowed for Import whose Document Type is
+"Master" or Allow Import property is set.)
+
+### 1\. Downloading The Template
+
+Data in ERPNext is stored in tables, much like a spreadsheet with columns and
+rows of data. Each entity in ERPNext can have multiple child tables associated
+with it too. The child tables are linked to the parent tables and are
+implemented where there are multiple values for any property. For example an
+Item can have multiple prices, An Invoice has multiple Items and so on.
+
+ * Select Doctype for which template should be downloaded.
+ * Check fields to be included in the template.
+ * Click on "Download Blank Template".
+ * For bulk editing, you can click on "Download With Data".
+
+
+
+### 2\. Fill in the Template
+
+After downloading the template, open it in a spreadsheet application and fill
+in the data below the column headings.
+
+
+
+Then export your template or save it as a Excel or Comma Separated Values (CSV)
+file. To export the document in Excel tick the checkbox for Download in Excel File Format
+
+
+
+### Download in Excel
+
+
+
+### 3\. Upload the File ethier in .xlsx or .csv
+
+Finally attach the file in the section. Click on the "Upload". Once the upload is successfull click Import"
+button.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+#### Notes:
+
+1. Make sure that if your application allows, use encoding as UTF-8.
+1. Keep the ID column blank for new records.
+
+### 4. Uploading All Tables (Main + Child)
+
+If you select all tables, you will get columns belonging to all the tables in
+one row separated by `~` columns.
+
+If you have multiple child rows then you must start a new main item on a new
+row. See the example:
+
+
+ Main Table ~ Child Table
+ Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 ~ Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
+ v11 v12 v13 c11 c12 c13
+ c14 c15 c17
+ v21 v22 v23 c21 c22 c23
+
+> To see how its done, enter a few records manually using forms and export
+"All Tables" with "Download with Data"
+
+### 5. Overwriting
+
+ERPNext also allows you to overwrite all / certain columns. If you want to
+update certain columns, you can download the template with data. Remember to
+check on the “Overwrite” box before uploading.
+
+> Note: For child records, if you select Overwrite, it will delete all the
+child records of that parent.
+
+### 6. Upload Limitations
+
+ERPNext restricts the amount of data you can upload in one file. Though the
+number may vary based on the type of data. It is usually safe to upload around
+1000 rows of a table at one go. If the system will not accept, then you will
+see an error.
+
+Why is this? Uploading a lot of data can cause your system to crash, specially
+if there are other users doing things in parallel. Hence ERPNext restricts the
+number of “writes” you can process in one request.
+
+***
+
+#### How to Attach files?
+
+When you open a form, on the right sidebar, you will see a section to attach
+files. Click on “Add” and select the file you want to attach. Click on
+“Upload” and you are set.
+
+#### What is a CSV file?
+
+A CSV (Comma Separated Value) file is a data file that you can upload into
+ERPNext to update various data. Any spreadsheet file from popular spreadsheet
+applications like MS Excel or Open Office Spreadsheet can be saved as a CSV
+file.
+
+If you are using Microsoft Excel and using non-English characters, make sure
+to save your file encoded as UTF-8. For older versions of Excel, there is no
+clear way of saving as UTF-8. So save your file as a CSV, then open it in
+Notepad, and save as “UTF-8”. (Sorry blame Microsoft for this!)
+
+####Help Video on Importing Data in ERPNext from Spreadsheet file
+
+
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f9c74bbb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Data Management
+
+You can import, export bulk edit data from and to spreadsheet files (**.csv**) from the Data Import Export Tool. This tool will be very helpful initially to setup your data from other systems.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..998b5a21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/data/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+data-import-tool
+bulk-rename
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0348bf8b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/.md
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+
+Emails are the nervous system of business communication and ERPNext has been
+designed to make good use of this.
+
+## Sending Emails
+
+You can email any document from the system, by clicking on the “Email” button
+on the right sidebar. Before that you will need to set your outgoing email
+settings (SMTP server).
+
+All emails sent from the system are added to the Communication table.
+
+> **Info:** What is SMTP? There are two types of email services, sending and
+receiving emails. Sending is done via a protocol called SMTP (Simple Mail
+Transfer Protocol) and the server (computer) that sends your email to its
+destination is called SMTP Server.
+
+
+Bulk Emails, especially those that are sent without consent (spam), are considered as bad behavior. While it may be okay to send emails to those who have “opted-in” to receive mails, it is very difficult for the internet community to know what is spam and what is allowed. To overcome this problem, most email servers share a black and white list of email senders. If your emails have been marked as spam, you will be blacklisted. So be careful. Many times, it may be a good idea to send email via whitelisted services also known as SMTP relay services which are paid services.These
+services will block you from sending spam while ensuring that most of your email does not go in the spam folder. There are many such services available like SendGrid and SMTP.com.
+
+To setup your outgoing mails, go to
+
+> Setup > Outgoing Email Settings
+
+#### Figure 1: Set up outgoing mail server.
+
+
+
+Set your outgoing mail server settings here. These are the same settings you
+would use in your Outlook, Thunderbird, Apple Mail or other such email
+applications. If you are not sure, get in touch with your email service
+provider.
+
+> **Tip:** If you are using EPRNext hosted service, keep the first section
+blank. Emails will still be sent from your email id, but via our SMTP relay
+service.
+
+### Creating Issues from Incoming Emails
+
+A very useful email integration is to sync the incoming emails from support
+inbox into Issue, so that you can track, assign and monitor support
+issues.
+
+> **Case Study:** Here at ERPNext, we have regularly tracked incoming support
+issues via email at “support@erpnext.com”. At the time of writing we had
+answered more than 3000 tickets via this system.
+
+To setup your Support integration, go to:
+
+> Setup > Support Email Settings
+
+#### Figure 2: Setup support Integration
+
+
+
+To make ERPNext pull emails from your mail box, enter the POP3 settings. (POP3
+is a way of extracting emails from your mailbox. It should be fairly easy to
+find out what your POP3 settings are. If you have problems, contact your email
+service provider). If you want to setup an auto reply, check on the “Send
+Autoreply” box and whenever someone sends an email, an autoreply will be sent.
+Add a custom signature which you want to send with your replies.
+
+### Setting Auto-notification on Documents
+
+ERPNext allows you to automatically email documents on “Submission” to the
+contact mentioned in the document. To set this up, go to:
+
+> Setup > Tools > Enable / Disable Notifications.
+
+#### Figure 3: Set Auto Notification
+
+
+
+Check on the transactions you want to send via email directly on Submission
+and add a custom message if you want on these documents.
+
+### Email Digests
+
+Email Digests allow you to get regular updates about your sales, expenses and
+other critical numbers directly in your Inbox.
+
+Set your frequency, check all the items you want to receive in your weekly
+update and select the user ids whom you want to send the Digest to.
+
+Email Digests are a great way for top managers to keep track of the big
+numbers like “Sales Booked” or “Amount Collected” or “Invoices Raised” etc.
+
+To setup Email Digests, go to:
+
+> Setup > Email Digest > New Email Digest
+
+#### Figure 4: Set up Email Digest
+
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-account.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-account.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3d2643c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-account.md
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+
+# Email Accounts
+
+You can manage multiple incoming and outgoing Email Accounts in ERPNext. There has to be at-least one default outgoing account and one default incoming account. If you are on the ERPNext cloud, the default outgoing email is set by us.
+
+> **Note for self implementers:** For outgoing emails, you should setup your own SMTP server or sign up with an SMTP relay service like mandrill.com or sendgrid.com that allows a larger number of transactional emails to be sent. Regular email services like Gmail will restrict you to a limited number of emails per day.
+
+### Default Email Accounts
+
+ERPNext will create templates for a bunch of email accounts by default. Not all of them are enabled. To enable them, you must set your account details.
+
+There are 2 types of email accounts, outgoing and incoming. Outgoing email accounts use an SMTP service to send emails and emails are retrived from your inbox using a IMAP or POP service. Most email providers such as GMail, Outlook or Yahoo provide these services.
+
+
+
+### Outgoing Email Accounts
+
+All emails sent from the system, either by the user to a contact or notifications or transaction emails, will be sent from an Outgoing Email Account.
+
+To setup an outgoing Email Account, check on **Enable Outgoing** and set your SMTP server settings, if you are using a popular email service, these will be preset for you.
+
+
+
+### Incoming Email Accounts
+
+To setup an incoming Email Account, check on **Enable Incoming** and set your POP3 settings, if you are using a popular email service, these will be preset for you.
+
+
+
+### How ERPNext handles replies
+
+In ERPNext when you send an email to a contact like a customer, the sender will be the user who sent the email. In the **Reply-To** property, the Email Address will be of the default incoming account (like `replies@yourcompany.com`). ERPNext will automatically extract these emails from the incoming account and tag it to the relevant communication
+
+### Notification for unreplied messages
+
+If you would like ERPNext to notify you if an email is unreplied for a certain amount of time, then you can set **Notify if Unreplied**. Here you can set the number of minutes to wait before notifications are sent and whom the notifications must go to.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-alerts.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-alerts.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e1968f04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-alerts.md
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+
+# Email Alerts
+
+You can configure various email alerts in your system to remind you of important activities such as:
+
+1. Completion date of a Task.
+2. Expected Delivery Date of a Sales Order.
+3. Expected Payment Date.
+4. Reminder of followup.
+5. If an Order greater than a particular value is received or sent.
+6. Expiry notification for a Contract.
+7. Completion / Status change of a Task.
+
+For this, you need to setup an Email Alert.
+
+> Setup > Email > Email Alert
+
+### Setting Up An Alert
+
+To setup an Email Alert:
+
+1. Select which Document Type you want watch changes on
+2. Define what events you want to watch. Events are:
+ 1. New: When a new document of the selected type is made.
+ 2. Save / Submit / Cancel: When a document of the selected type is saved, submitted, cancelled.
+ 3. Value Change: When a particular value in the selected type changes.
+ 4. Days Before / Days After: Trigger this alert a few days before or after the **Reference Date.** To set the days, set **Days Before or After**. This can be useful in reminding you of upcoming due dates or reminding you to follow up on certain leads of quotations.
+3. Set additional conditions if you want.
+4. Set the recipients of this alert. The recipient could either be a field of the document or a list of fixed Email Addresses.
+5. Compose the message
+
+
+### Setting a Subject
+You can retrieve the data for a particular field by using `doc.[field_name]`. To use it in your subject / message, you have to surround it with `{% raw %}{{ }}{% endraw %}`. These are called [Jinja](http://jinja.pocoo.org/) tags. So, for example to get the name of a document, you use `{% raw %}{{ doc.name }}{% endraw %}`. The below example sends an email on saving a Task with the Subject, "TASK##### has been created"
+
+
+
+### Setting Conditions
+
+Email alerts allow you to set conditions according to the field data in your documents. For example, if you want to recieve an Email if a Lead has been saved as "Interested" as it's status, you put `doc.status == "Interested"` in the conditions textbox. You can also set more complex conditions by combining them.
+
+
+
+The above example will send an Email Alert when a Task is saved with the status "Open" and the Expected End Date for the Task is the date on or before the date on which it was saved on.
+
+
+### Setting a Message
+
+You can use both Jinja Tags (`{% raw %}{{ doc.[field_name] }}{% endraw %}`) and HTML tags in the message textbox.
+
+ {% raw %}Order Overdue
+ +Transaction {{ doc.name }} has exceeded Due Date. Please take necessary action.
+ + + {% if comments %} + Last comment: {{ comments[-1].comment }} by {{ comments[-1].by }} + {% endif %} + +Details
+ +-
+
- Customer: {{ doc.customer }} +
- Amount: {{ doc.total_amount }} +
+
+### Example
+
+1. Defining the Criteria
+
+
+1. Setting the Recipients and Message
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-digest.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-digest.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0820d8e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-digest.md
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+
+# Email Digest
+
+Email Digests allow you to get regular updates about your sales, expenses and other critical numbers directly in your Inbox.
+
+Email Digests are a great way for top managers to keep track of the big numbers like “Sales Booked” or “Amount Collected” or “Invoices Raised” etc.
+
+To set up Email Digest, go to:
+
+> Setup > Email > Email Digest
+
+## Example
+
+Set your frequency, check all the items you want to receive in your weekly update and select the user ids whom you want to send the Digest to.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-inbox.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-inbox.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8efd6368
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-inbox.md
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+
+# Email Inbox
+
+Business involves many transactional emails exchanges with parties like Customers and Suppliers, and within a company. Email Inbox feature allows you pull all your business emails into your ERPNext account. Accessing all the business emails with other transactions details makes ERPNext a single platform for accessing complete business information in one place.
+
+In ERPNext, you can configure Email Inbox for each System User. Following are the detailed steps to configure Email Inbox for a User.
+
+#### Step 1: Create User
+
+As mentioned above, you can configure Email Inbox for a System User only. Hence ensure that you have added yourself and your colleagues as a User and assigned them required permissions.
+
+To add new User, go to:
+
+`Setup > User > New User`
+
+
+
+#### Step 2: Create Email Domain
+
+To be able to send and receive emails into your ERPNext from other email service (like WebMail or Gmail), you should setup an Email Domain master. In this master, email gateway details like SMTP Address, Port No., IMAP/POP3 address details are captured. If you have ever configured a local email client (like Outlook), Email Domain master requires details to be fed in the similar way.
+
+To add new Email Domain, go to:
+
+`Setup > Emails > Email Domain > New`
+
+
+
+Once you have configured an Email Domain for your Email Service, it will be used for creating Email Accounts for all the Users in your ERPNext account.
+
+If you use one of the following Email Service, then you need not create Email Domain in your ERPNext account. In ERPNext, Email Domain for the following Services is available out-of-the-box and you can directly proceed to creating Email Account.
+
+
+#### Step 3: Email Account
+
+Create an Email Account based on the Email ID of the User. For each User who's email account is to be integrated with ERPNext, an Email Account master should be created for it.
+
+If you are creating an Email Account for your colleague who's Email Password is unknown to you, then check field "Awaiting Password". As per this setting, a User (for whom Email Account is created) will get a prompt to enter email password when accessing his/her ERPNext Account.
+
+-
+
- Gmail +
- Yahoo +
- Sparkpost +
- SendGrid +
- Outlook.com +
- Yandex.mail +
-
+
+
+In the Email Account, select Email Domain only if you are using Email Service other than Email Services listed above. Else, you can just select Email Service, leave Email Domain blank and proceed forward.
+
+
+
+>If you are creating an Email Account for Email Inbox of a User, then leave Append To field as blank.
+
+For more details on how to setup Email Account, [click here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-account.html").
+
+#### Step 4: Linking Email Account in User master
+
+Once an Email Account is created for an User, select that Email Account in the User. This will ensure that emails pulled from the said Email ID will accessible only to this User in your ERPNext account.
+
+
+
+## Email Inbox
+
+If you have correctly configured Email Inbox as instructed above, then on the login of a User, Email Inbox icon will be visible. This will navigate user to Email Inbox view within the ERPNext account. All the Emails received on that email will be fetch and listed in the Email Inbox view. User will be able to open emails and take various actions against it.
+
+
+
+#### Folders
+
+In ERPNext, you can link multiple Email Accounts with the single User. To switch to Inbox of different email account and access other folders like Sent Emails, Spam, Trash, check Email Inbox option in the left bar.
+
+
+
+#### Actions
+
+On the emails in your inbox, you can take various actions like Reply, Forward, Mark as Spam or Trash.
+
+
+
+#### Make Options
+
+The Email Inbox within ERPNext also allow you to quickly create ERPNext transaction based on email received. From an Email itself, you can a Issue, Lead or Opportunity based on the context of the email.
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-reports.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-reports.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..268ff65f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-reports.md
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+
+# Email Reports at Regular Intervals
+
+You can setup **Auto Email Report** to send reports at regular intervals. These must be saved reports of any type (Report Builder, Script or Query Report).
+
+You can find Auto Email Report at
+
+> Setup > Email > Auto Email Report
+
+Or just type "Auto Email Report" on the Search bar.
+
+### Example
+
+#### Step 1
+
+Select the Report, the user for which you want to create this report (permissions will apply for this user), the Email Addresses where you want this report emailed and the frequency of the report.
+
+
+
+#### Step 2
+
+If your report has filters, you will see a table with the filters
+
+Step 1. Select the Report, the user for which you want to create this report. Permissions will apply for this user
+
+
+
+Click on the table to edit the table
+
+
+
+#### Test
+
+You can also test the report by clicking on "Download" or "Send Now"
+
+Here is an example of the email you will receive for a report
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d45237d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Email
+
+Email is at the heart of electronic communication and ERPNext is deeply integrated with Email. You can create multiple email accounts, automatically create transactions like Lead, Issue from incoming emails, send documents to your contacts via ERPnext. You can also setup email digests and email alerts to send you reminders.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..778fc812
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+email-account
+email-inbox
+email-alerts
+email-digest
+email-reports
+sending-email
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/sending-email.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/sending-email.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2b1712df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/sending-email.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+# Sending Email from any Document
+
+In ERPNext you can send any document as email (with a PDF attachment) by clicking on `Menu > Email` from any open document.
+
+
+
+**Note:** You must have outgoing [email accounts]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/email/email-account.html) setup for this.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4318d1e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Feedback
+
+Customer/User Feedback for a Product or Services can be useful for business as it can be used to make decisions for improvements either in products or services.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..08160ccd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+setting-up-feedback
+submit-feedback
+resend-feedback-request
+manual-feedback-request
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/manual-feedback-request.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/manual-feedback-request.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d3035c38
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/manual-feedback-request.md
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+
+# Manual Feedback Request
+
+We can also send the feedback request to Customer/User without configuring the
+Feedback Trigger.
+
+To request a feedback manually go to respective document e.g. Sales Order, Issue etc.
+and click on Ask a Feedback option in Menu.
+
+
+
+Then, user can enter the feedback request details like email id, message and send the
+feedback request mail.
+
+
+
+Note. If Feedback Trigger is already configured for the document then system will fetch
+Feedback Request details (email id, message)
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/resend-feedback-request.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/resend-feedback-request.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..dfc3f7db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/resend-feedback-request.md
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+
+# Resend Feedback Request
+
+We can also Resend the Feedback Request to the Customer/User.
+
+
+
+To resend the Feedback Request we will need to navigate the Communication by clicking the `Details` link on Timeline Feedback.
+
+
+
+On Resend Button click a dialog with the Feedback Request message will appear user can either send the
+Feedback Request with same message or he/she can make the changes in the Feedback Request message.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/setting-up-feedback.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/setting-up-feedback.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..75e9fd23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/setting-up-feedback.md
@@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
+
+# Feedback Trigger
+
+You can set up the Feedback Trigger for various documents to get the Feedback from the user.
+
+For this, you will need to setup the Feedback Trigger,
+
+> Setup > Email > Feedback Trigger
+
+### Setting Up Feedback Trigger
+
+To Setup an Feedback:
+
+1. Select which Document Type you want to send feedback request mail.
+2. Select the Email Field, This field will be used to get the recipients email id.
+3. Set the Subject for feedback request mail.
+4. Set the conditions, if all the conditions are met only then the feedback request mail will be sent.
+5. Compose the message.
+
+### Setting a Subject
+You can retrieve the data for a particular field by using `doc.[field_name]`. To use it in your subject/message, you have to surround it with `{% raw %}{{ }}{% endraw %}`. These are called [Jinja](http://jinja.pocoo.org/) tags. So, for example, to get the name of a document, you use `{% raw %}{{ doc.name }}{% endraw %}`. The below example sends an feedback request whenever Issue is Closed with the Subject, "ISS-##### Issue is Resolved"
+
+
+
+### Setting Conditions
+
+Feedback Trigger allows you to set conditions according to the field data in your documents. The feedback request email will be sent on document save only if the all conditions are true For example if you want to trigger the feedback request mail to a customer if an Issue is has been saved as "Closed" as it's status, you put `doc.status == "Closed"` in the conditions textbox. You can also set more complex conditions by combining them.
+
+
+
+### Setting a Message
+
+You can use both Jinja Tags (`{% raw %}{{ doc.[field_name] }}{% endraw %}`) and HTML tags in the message textbox.
+
+ {% raw %}Your Support Ticket is Resolved
+ +Issue {{ doc.name }} Is resolved. Please check and confirm the same.
+Your Feedback is important for us. Please give us your Feedback for {{ doc.name }}
+Please visit the following url for feedback.
+ + {{ feedback_url }} + {% endraw %} + +--- + +### Example + +1. Setting up Feedback Trigger +
+
+1. Setting the Recipients and Message
+ 
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/submit-feedback.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/submit-feedback.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..083fa0ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/feedback/submit-feedback.md
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+
+# Submit Feedback
+
+Once feedback request mail is sent the user/customer. He/She can visit the URL to submit the feedback
+as well as rating for the document.
+
+
+
+Once Feedback is submitted the feedback details message and ratings will be recorded and will be shown on Document sidebar and timeline. Also once the Feedback is successfully submitted by the user the link shared to the user will be expired and can not be used to submit the Feedback again.
+
+On Document sidebar the latest feedback ratings will displayed.
+
+
+
+Also, The Feedback details such as Feedback message and ratings will be shown in the Document's Timeline along
+with Comment, Email.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..049651df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+
+# Setting Up
+
+Setting up an ERP system is like starting your business all over again,
+although in the virtual world. Thankfully it is not as hard as the real
+business and you get to do a trial too!
+
+Implementation requires the implementer to take a step back and set aside some
+time to do this right. This is usually not a couple-of-hours, after-work kind
+of a project.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..92378252
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+setup-wizard
+users-and-permissions
+settings
+data
+email
+print
+setting-up-taxes
+pos-setting
+price-lists
+authorization-rule
+sms-setting
+stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item
+territory
+third-party-backups
+workflows
+bar-code
+company-setup
+calculate-incentive-for-sales-team
+articles
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/dropbox-backup.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/dropbox-backup.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8ea3ab5a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/dropbox-backup.md
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+
+#Setting Up Dropbox Backups
+
+We always recommend customers to maintain backup of their data in ERPNext. The database backup is downloaded in the form of an SQL file. If needed, this SQL file of backup can be restored in the another ERPNext account as well.
+
+You can automate database backup download of your ERPNext account into your Dropbox account.
+
+To setup Dropbox Backup,
+`Explore > Integrations > Dropbox Settings`
+
+####Step 1: Set Frequency
+
+Set Frequency to download backup in your Dropbox account.
+
+
+
+####Step 2: Allow Dropbox Access
+
+After setting frequency and updating other details, click on `Allow Dropbox access`. On clicking this button, the Dropbox login page will open in the new tab. This might require you to allow pop-up for your ERPNext account.
+
+####Step 3: Login to Dropbox
+
+Login to your Dropbox account by entering login credentials.
+
+
+
+####Step 4: Allow
+
+On successful login, you will find a confirmation message as following. Click on "Allow" to let your ERPNext account have access to your Dropbox account.
+
+
+
+With this, a folder called "ERPNext" will be created in your Dropbox account, and database backup will start to auto-download in it.
+
+##Open Source Users
+
+####Step 1: Go to
+
+https://www.dropbox.com/developers/apps
+
+####Step 2:Create a new app
+
+
+
+####Step 3: Fill in details for the app
+
+
+
+-
+
+
+####Step 4: Setup Redirect URL in app
+
+
+
+####Step 5: Settings in Site Config
+
+After the app is created, note the app key and app secret on Dropbox Settings page or enter in `sites/{sitename}/site_config.json` as follows,
+
+
+
+
+####Step 5: Complete Backup
+
+Setup dropbox backups from the backup manager as shown in previous section.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2fb30362
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+
+
+Integration Services is platform to configure 3rd Party Services.
+
+###Services
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..da85ac42
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+paypal-integration
+razorpay-integration
+dropbox-backup
+ldap-integration
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/ldap-integration.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/ldap-integration.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fdd9cb33
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/ldap-integration.md
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+
+#Setting up LDAP
+
+Lightweight Directory Access Protocol is a centralised access controll system used by many small medium scale organisations.
+
+By settings up LDAP service, you able to login to ERPNext account by using LDAP credentials.
+
+To setup LDAP,
+`Explore > Integrations > LDAP Settings`
+
+#### Setup LDAP
+
+To enable ldap service, you need to configure parameters like LDAP Server Url, Organizational Unit, UID, Base Distinguished Name (DN) and Password for Base DN
+
+
+ {
+ "db_name": "demo",
+ "db_password": "DZ1Idd55xJ9qvkHvUH",
+ "dropbox_access_key": "ACCESSKEY",
+ "dropbox_secret_key": "SECRECTKEY"
+}
+
+
+
+
+
+After setting up LDAP parameters, on login screen, the system enables **Login Via LDAP** option.
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/paypal-integration.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/paypal-integration.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6c672fa1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/paypal-integration.md
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+
+#Setting up PayPal
+
+A payment gateway is an e-commerce application service provider service that authorizes credit card payments for e-businesses, online retailers, bricks and clicks, or traditional brick and mortar.
+
+A payment gateway facilitates the transfer of information between a payment portal (such as a website, mobile phone or interactive voice response service) and the Front End Processor or acquiring bank.
+
+To setup PayPal ,
+`Explore > Integrations > PayPal Settings`
+
+#### Setup PayPal
+
+To enable PayPal payment service, you need to configure parameters like API Username, API Password and Signature.
+
+
+
+You also can set test payment environment, by settings `Use Sandbox`
+
+On enabling service, the system will create Payment Gateway record and Account head in chart of accounts having account type as Bank.
+
+
+
+Also it will create Payment Gateway Account entry. Payment Gateway Account is configuration hub from this you can set account head from existing COA, default Payment Request email body template.
+
+
+
+After enabling service and configuring Payment Gateway Account your system is able to accept online payments.
+
+####Supporting transaction currencies
+AUD, BRL, CAD, CZK, DKK, EUR, HKD, HUF, ILS, JPY, MYR, MXN, TWD, NZD, NOK, PHP, PLN, GBP, RUB, SGD, SEK, CHF, THB, TRY, USD
+
+##Get PayPal credentials
+
+#### Paypal Sanbox API Signature
+ - Login to paypal developer account, PayPal Developer Account
+ - From **Accounts** tab. create a new business account.
+
+
+ - From this account profile you will get your sandbox api credentials
+
+
+
+---
+
+#### PayPal Account API Signature
+ - Login to PayPal Account and go to profile
+
+
+ - From **My Selling Tools** go to **api Access**
+
+
+ - On API Access Page, choose option 2 to generate API credentials
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/razorpay-integration.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/razorpay-integration.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e9250f39
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/razorpay-integration.md
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+
+#Setting up Razorpay
+
+A payment gateway is an e-commerce application service provider service that authorizes credit card payments for e-businesses, online retailers, bricks and clicks, or traditional brick and mortar.
+
+A payment gateway facilitates the transfer of information between a payment portal (such as a website, mobile phone or interactive voice response service) and the Front End Processor or acquiring bank.
+
+To setup Razorpay,
+`Explore > Integrations > Razorpay Settings`
+
+#### Setup Razorpay
+
+To enable Razorpay payment service, you need to configure parameters like API Key, API Secret
+
+
+On enabling service, the system will create Payment Gateway record and Account head in chart of account with account type as Bank.
+
+
+
+Also it will create Payment Gateway Account entry. Payment Gateway Account is configuration hub from this you can set account head from existing COA, default Payment Request email body template.
+
+
+
+After enabling service and configuring Payment Gateway Account your system is able to accept online payments.
+
+####Supporting transaction currencies
+INR
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/stripe-integration.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/stripe-integration.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4665b84c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/integrations/stripe-integration.md
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+
+#Setting up Stripe
+
+To setup Stripe,
+`Explore > Integrations > Stripe Settings`
+
+#### Setup Stripe
+
+To enable Stripe payment service, you need to configure parameters like Publishable Key, Secret Key
+
+
+On enabling service, the system will create Payment Gateway record and Account head in chart of account with account type as Bank.
+
+
+
+Also it will create Payment Gateway Account entry. Payment Gateway Account is configuration hub from this you can set account head from existing COA, default Payment Request email body template.
+
+
+
+After configuring Payment Gateway Account your system is able to accept online payments.
+
+####Supporting transaction currencies
+ "AED", "ALL", "ANG", "ARS", "AUD", "AWG", "BBD", "BDT", "BIF", "BMD", "BND",
+ "BOB", "BRL", "BSD", "BWP", "BZD", "CAD", "CHF", "CLP", "CNY", "COP", "CRC", "CVE", "CZK", "DJF",
+ "DKK", "DOP", "DZD", "EGP", "ETB", "EUR", "FJD", "FKP", "GBP", "GIP", "GMD", "GNF", "GTQ", "GYD",
+ "HKD", "HNL", "HRK", "HTG", "HUF", "IDR", "ILS", "INR", "ISK", "JMD", "JPY", "KES", "KHR", "KMF",
+ "KRW", "KYD", "KZT", "LAK", "LBP", "LKR", "LRD", "MAD", "MDL", "MNT", "MOP", "MRO", "MUR", "MVR",
+ "MWK", "MXN", "MYR", "NAD", "NGN", "NIO", "NOK", "NPR", "NZD", "PAB", "PEN", "PGK", "PHP", "PKR",
+ "PLN", "PYG", "QAR", "RUB", "SAR", "SBD", "SCR", "SEK", "SGD", "SHP", "SLL", "SOS", "STD", "SVC",
+ "SZL", "THB", "TOP", "TTD", "TWD", "TZS", "UAH", "UGX", "USD", "UYU", "UZS", "VND", "VUV", "WST",
+ "XAF", "XOF", "XPF", "YER", "ZAR"
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/pos-setting.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/pos-setting.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e889c94c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/pos-setting.md
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+
+# Point of Sale Setting
+
+POS includes advanced features to cater to different functionality, such as
+inventory management, CRM, financials, warehousing, etc., all built into the
+POS software. Prior to the modern POS, all of these functions were done
+independently and required the manual re-keying of information, which could
+lead to entry errors.
+
+If you are in retail operations, you want your Point of Sale to be as quick
+and efficient as possible. To do this, you can create a POS Setting for a user
+from:
+
+> Accounts > Setup > Point-of-Sale Setting
+
+Set default values as defined.
+
+
+
+> Important : If you specify a particular User, the POS setting will be
+applied only to that User. If the User option is left blank, the setting will
+be set for all users. To understand POS in detail visit [Point of Sale]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/point-of-sale-pos-invoice.html)
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/price-lists.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/price-lists.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7529120c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/price-lists.md
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+
+ERPNext lets you maintain multiple selling and buying prices for an Item using Price Lists. A PriceList is a name you can give to a set of Item prices.
+
+Why would you want Price Lists? You have different prices for different zones (based on the shipping costs), for different currencies etc.
+
+An Item can have multiple prices based on customer, currency, region, shipping cost etc, which can be stored as different rate plans. In ERPNext, you are required to store all the lists separately. Buying Price List is different from Selling Price List and thus is stored separately.
+
+You can create new Price List
+
+> Selling/Buying/Stock > Setup > Price List >> New
+
+
+
+* These Price List will be used when creating Item Price record to track selling or buying price of an item. Click here to learn more about Item Price.
+
+* To disable specific Price List, uncheck Enabled field in it. Disabled Price List will not be available for selection in the Sales and Purchase transactions.
+
+* Standard Buying and Selling Price List are created by default.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/address-template.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/address-template.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..68c9955f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/address-template.md
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+
+# Address Template
+
+Each region has its own way of defining Addresses. To manage multiple address formats for your Documents (like Quotation, Purchase Invoice etc.), you can create country-wise **Address Templates**.
+
+> Setup > Printing and Branding > Address Template
+
+A default Address Template is created when you setup the system. You can either edit or update it or create a new template.
+
+One template is default and will apply to all countries that do not have an specific template.
+
+#### Template
+
+The templating engine is based on HTML and the [Jinja Templating](http://jinja.pocoo.org/docs/templates/) system and all the fields (including Custom Fields) will be available for creating the template.
+
+Here is the default template:
+
+ {% raw %}{{ address_line1 }}+ {% if address_line2 %}{{ address_line2 }}
{% endif -%} + {{ city }}
+ {% if state %}{{ state }}
{% endif -%} + {% if pincode %}PIN: {{ pincode }}
{% endif -%} + {{ country }}
+ {% if phone %}Phone: {{ phone }}
{% endif -%} + {% if fax %}Fax: {{ fax }}
{% endif -%} + {% if email_id %}Email: {{ email_id }}
{% endif -%}{% endraw %} + +### Example + +
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/cheque-print-template.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/cheque-print-template.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5dc013b4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/cheque-print-template.md
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+
+#Cheque Print Template
+
+Business involves making payment to various parties like suppliers and employees. Payment can be made in various modes like cash, NEFT or cheque. If you are making a payment via cheque, you can also create a Print Format for printing Cheque from ERPNext based on the Payment Entry.
+
+
+
+Using the Cheque Print Template you can generate a new Print Format based. It will be created based the cheque format provided by your bank.
+
+####Create New
+
+To create a new Print Format based on the specific cheque’s format, go to:
+
+`Account > Tools > Cheque Printing Template > New`
+
+In the Cheque Print Template, for each value (say Payee, Date), exact co-ordinates are provided based on where that value should be printed on a cheque. Co-ordinates are provided in centi-meter.
+
+
+
+####New Format via Scanning
+
+To speed up creation of a new cheque printing format, you can upload scanned image of the cheque. Considering the scanned image for the cheque, system automatically updates co-ordinates for each value like party name, amount, date, amount in words etc.
+
+
+
+####New format by manual entry
+You can manually provide the co-ordinate for each value based on where you want to to be printed on the cheque.
+
+####Preview
+Based on co-ordinates provided for all the values, a preview be shown as to how the values will be printed on the cheque.
+
+
+
+####New Print Format
+
+If the preview looks promising, click on the button to create a new Print Format for printing cheque. Based on the values provided in the Cheque Print Template, the system will auto-generate an HTML script for the cheque’s Print Format.
+
+
+
+####Printing Cheque
+
+New print format generated for the cheque will be visible in the Payment Entry form. After creating the payment entry, you will be able to print transaction details on the cheque.
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/custom-translations.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/custom-translations.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2a6890cc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/custom-translations.md
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+
+#Custom Translations
+
+User can print the customer's and supplier's document in their local language. For an example if I have customers from germany, france who want quotation in german, french language will be possible with these feature.
+
+####Set Language
+
+In the Customer master, select default Language. Say default language for the Customer is deutsch.
+
+
+
+Same way, you can also set default language in the Supplier master.
+
+
+
+####Print Preview in the Party's Language
+
+In the Print Preview of a transaction, values will be translated into party's language.
+
+Customer Quotation print preview in customer's default language.
+
+
+
+Supplier Quotation print preview in supplier's default language.
+
+
+
+####What to do if want to print with another language?
+
+User can have option to select alternate language on print view.
+
+
+
+####Custom Translation
+
+User can set their custom translations using translation form. For example user want to set description of the product in customer's language(Italiano). For that create new translation with language as Italiano, enter source data and Translated information.
+
+`Setup > Settings > Translation List > New`
+
+
+
+The translation is applied when user select language as Italiano on supplier quotation's print preview.
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..198a3fa8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Printing and Branding
+
+Documents that you send to your customers carry your brand and image and they must be tailored to your requirements. ERPNext gives you many options so that you can set your oraganization's branding in your documents.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fa236525
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+print-settings
+print-format-builder
+print-headings
+letter-head
+address-template
+terms-and-conditions
+cheque-print-template
+custom-translations
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/letter-head.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/letter-head.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..92aa65f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/letter-head.md
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+
+#Letter Head
+
+Each company has default Letter Head for their company. This Letter Head values are generally set as Header and Footer in the documents. In ERPNext, you can capture the these details in the Letter Head master.
+
+In the Letter Head master, you can track Header and Footer details of the company. These details will appear in the Print Format of the transactions like Sales Order, Sales Invoice, Salary Slip, Purchase Order etc.
+
+####Step 1: Go to Setup
+
+`Explore > Setup > Printing > Letter Head > New Letter Head`
+
+####Step 2: Letter Head Name
+
+In one ERPNext account, you can enter multiple Letter Head, hence name Letter Head so that you can identify it easily. For example, if your Letter Head also contains office address, then you should create separate Letter Head for each office location.
+
+####Step 3: Enter Details
+
+Following is how you can enter details in the Letter Head.
+
+ * Logo Image: You can insert the image in your Letter Head record by clicking on image icon. Once image is inserted, HTML for it will be generated automatically.
+ * Other information (like Address, tax ID etc.) that you want to put on your letter head.
+
+
+
+> If you want to make this the default letter head, click on “Is Default”.
+
+####Step 4: Save
+
+After enter values in the Header and Footer section, Save Letter Head.
+
+####Letter Head in the Print Format
+
+This is how the letter head looks in a document's print.
+
+
+
+> Please note that Footer will be visible only when document's print is seen in the PDF. Footer will not be visible in the HTML based print preview.
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-format-builder.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-format-builder.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..901b59d0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-format-builder.md
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+
+# Print Format Builder
+
+The Print Format Builder helps you quickly make a simple customized Print Format by dragging and dropping data fields and adding custom text or HTML.
+
+You can create a new Print Format either by going to:
+
+> Setup > Printing and Branding > Print Format Builder
+
+or Open the document for which you want to make a print format. Click the Printer icon, or go to Menu > Print and click on the **Edit** button. Note: You must have System Manager permission to do this.
+
+### Step 1: Make a new Format
+
+
+
+### Step 2: Add a new Field
+
+To add a field, just drag it from the left sidebar and add it in your layout. You can edit the layout by clicking on the settings icon.
+
+
+
+### Step 3
+
+To remove a field, just drag it back into the fields sidebar.
+
+
+
+### Step 4
+
+You can add customized text, HTML in your print format, just add the **Custom HTML** field (in dark colour) and add it to the the place where you want to add the text.
+
+Then click on **Edit HTML** to edit your content.
+
+
+
+To save your format, just click on the **Save** button on the top.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-headings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-headings.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a8d3e4c8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-headings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+
+Print Headings are the names which you can give to your sales invoices,
+supplier quotations etc. You can create a list of names for different business
+communications.
+
+You can create print headings from :
+
+> Setup > Printing > Print Heading > New Print Heading
+
+#### Figure 1: Save Print Heading
+
+
+
+Example of a change in print heading is shown below:
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fe79abc5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/print-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+
+# Print Settings
+
+In Print Settings you can set your default printing preferences like Paper Size, default text size, whether you want output as PDF or HTML etc.
+
+To edit print settings, go to:
+
+> Setup > Printing and Branding > Print Settings
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f69e9e37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/print/terms-and-conditions.md
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+
+Terms and conditions are the general and special arrangements, provisions, requirements, rules, specifications, and standards that a company follows. These specifications are an integral part of an agreement or contract that the company gets into with its customers, suppliers or partners.
+
+### 1. Make a new Terms and Conditions
+
+To setup Terms and Condition master, go to:
+
+`Selling > Terms and Condition > New`
+
+
+
+### 2. Editing in HTML
+
+Content of Terms and Condition can be formatted as per your preference, and also insert images where needed. If you have expertise in HTML, you will also find option to edit the content of Terms and Condition in HTML.
+
+
+
+This also allows you to use Terms and Condition master for footer, which otherwise is not available in ERPNext as dedicated functionality. Since contents of Terms and Condition is always the last to appear in the print format, details of footer should be inserted at the end of the content, so that it actually appears as footer in the print format.
+
+### 3. Select in Transaction
+
+In transactions, you will find section of Terms and Condition where you will be able to search and fetched required Terms and Condition master.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-company-sales-goal.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-company-sales-goal.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1c647e63
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-company-sales-goal.md
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+
+# Setting Company Sales Goal
+
+Monthly sales targets can be set for a company via the Company master. By default, the Company master dashboard features past sales stats.
+
+
+
+You can set the **Sales Target** field to track progress to track progress with respect to it.
+
+
+
+The target progress is also shown in notifications:
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..41db4611
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.md
@@ -0,0 +1,100 @@
+
+One of the primary motivator for compulsory use of accounting tools is
+calculation of Taxes. You may or may not make money but your government will
+(to help your country be safe and prosperous). And if you don’t calculate your
+taxes correctly, they get very unhappy. Ok, philosophy aside, ERPNext allows
+you to make configurable tax templates that you can apply to your sales or
+purchase.
+
+### Tax Accounts
+
+For Tax Accounts that you want to use in the tax templates, you must go to
+Chart of Accounts and mention them as type “Tax” in your Chart of Item.
+
+## Item Tax
+
+If some of your Items require different tax rates as compared to others,
+mention them in the Item tax table. Even if you have selected your sales and
+purchase taxes as default tax rates, the system will pull the Item tax rate
+for calculations. Item tax will get preference over other sales or purchase
+taxes. However, if you wish to apply default sales and purchase taxes, do not
+mention item tax rates in the Item master. The system will then select the
+sales or purchase tax rate specified by you as default rates.
+
+Item Tax table can be found as a section within the Item Master document.
+
+
+
+ * **Inclusive and Exclusive Tax**: ERPNext allows you to enter Item rates which are tax inclusive.
+
+
+
+ * **Exception to the rule**: Item tax settings are required only if a particular Item has a different tax rate than the rate defined in the standard tax Account
+ * **Item tax is overwrite-able**: You can overwrite or change the item tax rate by going to the Item master in the Item tax table.
+
+## Sales Taxes and Charges Template
+
+You must usually collect taxes from your Customer and pay them to the
+government. At times, you may have to pay multiple taxes to multiple
+government bodies like local government, state or provincial and federal or
+central government.
+
+The way ERPNext sets up taxes is via templates. Other types of charges that
+may apply to your invoices (like shipping, insurance etc.) can also be
+configured as taxes.
+
+Select template and modify as per your need.
+
+To create a new sales tax template called Sales Taxes and Charges Template, you
+have to go to:
+
+> Setup > Accounts > Sales Taxes and Charge Master
+
+
+
+When you create a new master, you will have to add a row for each tax type.
+
+The tax rate you define here will be the standard tax rate for all Items. If
+there are Items that have different rates, they must be added in the Item Tax
+table in the Item master.
+
+In each row, you have to mention:
+
+ * Calculation Type:
+
+ * On Net Total : This can be on net total (total amount without taxes).
+ * On Previous Row Total/Amount: You can apply taxes on previous row total / amount. If you select this option, the tax will be applied as a percentage of the previous row (in the tax table) amount or total. Previous row amount means a particular tax amount.And, previous row total means net total plus taxes applied up to that row. In the Enter Row Field, mention row number on which you want to apply the current tax. If you want to apply the tax on the 3rd row, mention "3" in the Enter Row field.
+
+ * Actual : Enter as per actual amount in rate column.
+
+ * Account Head: The Account ledger under which this tax will be booked
+
+ * Cost Center: If the tax / charge is an income (like shipping) it needs to be booked against - a Cost Center.
+ * Description: Description of the tax (that will be printed in invoices / quotes).
+ * Rate: Tax rate.
+ * Amount: Tax amount.
+ * Total: Cumulative total to this point.
+ * Enter Row: If based on "Previous Row Total" you can select the row number which will be taken as a base for this calculation (default is the previous row).
+ * Is this Tax included in Basic Rate?: If you check this, it means that this tax will not be shown below the item table, but will be included in the rate in your main item table. This is useful when you want to give a flat price (inclusive of all taxes) to your customers.
+
+Once you setup your template, you can select this in your sales transactions.
+
+## Purchase Taxes and Charges Template
+
+Similar to your Sales Taxes and Charges Template is the Purchase Taxes and
+Charges Master.
+
+This is the tax template that you can use in your Purchase Orders and Purchase
+Invoices. If you have value added taxes (VAT), where you pay to the government
+the difference between your incoming and outgoing taxes, you can select the
+same Account that you use for sales taxes.
+
+The columns in this table are similar to the Sales Taxes and Charges Template
+with the difference as follows:
+
+Consider Tax or Charge for: In this section you can specify if the tax /
+charge is only for valuation (not a part of total) or only for total (does not
+add value to the item) or for both.
+
+{next}
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/global-defaults.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/global-defaults.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..56354011
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/global-defaults.md
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+
+# Global Defaults
+
+You can set default values for your documents from Global Defaults
+
+> Setup > Settings > Global Defaults
+
+Whenever a new document is created, these values will be set as default.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f7f4cd30
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Settings
+
+In `Setup > Settings` you will find ways to manage your system settings like defaults, number and currency formats, global session timeout settings etc.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e33aedce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+system-settings
+module-settings
+naming-series
+global-defaults
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/module-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/module-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2fc26415
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/module-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+
+# Show or Hide Modules
+
+You can globally switch off certain desktop module via:
+
+> Setup > Permissions > Show / Hide Modules
+
+For example if you are in the services business, you want to hide the Manufacturing Module, you can do this via **Show or Hide Modules**
+
+### Example
+
+Check / uncheck the items to show / hide.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/naming-series.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/naming-series.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d692a5fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/naming-series.md
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+
+# Naming Series
+
+### 1. Introduction
+
+Data records are broadly classified as “Master” or “Transaction”. A master
+record is a record that has a “name”, for example a Customer, Item, Supplier,
+Employee etc. A Transaction is a record that has a “number”. Examples of
+transactions include Sales Invoices, Quotations etc. You make transactions
+against a number of master records.
+
+ERPNext allows you to make prefixes to your transactions, with each prefix
+forming its own series. For example a series with prefix INV12 will have
+numbers INV120001, INV120002 and so on.
+
+You can have multiple series for all your transactions. It is common to have a
+separate series for each financial year. For example in Sales Invoice you
+could have:
+
+ * INV120001
+ * INV120002
+ * INV-A-120002
+
+etc. You could also have a separate series for each type of Customer or for
+each of your retail outlets.
+
+### 2. Managing Naming Series for Documents
+
+To setup a series, go to:
+
+> Setup > Tools > Update Numbering Series
+
+In this form,
+
+ 1. Select the transaction for which you want to make the series The system will update the current series in the text box.
+ 2. Edit the series as required with unique prefixes for each series. Each prefix must be on a new line.
+ 3. The first prefix will be the default prefix. If you want the user to explicitly select a series instead of the default one, check the “User must always select” check box.
+
+You can also update the starting point of a series by entering the series
+name and the starting point in the “Update Series” section.
+
+### 3. Example
+
+See how to set the naming series
+
+
+
+{next}
+
+### 4. Custom Field in Naming Series
+ Some companies prefers to make use of "short-codes" for suppliers, i.e. WN for company "Web Notes" that later can be used in naming series for quick identification.
+
+#### Example:
+
+ A custom field "Vendor ID" is created under Document: Supplier.
+ Then under Naming Series, we should allow something like
+ PO-.YY.MM.-.vendor_id.-.#####
+ Resulting in "PO-1503-WN-00001"
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/system-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/system-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ab931fe0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/settings/system-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+
+# System Settings
+
+You can localize ERPNext to use particular timezone, date, number or currency format and also set global session expiry via System Settings.
+
+By checking the 'Allow Login using Mobile Number' checkbox, you can login to ERPNext using a valid mobile number set in your User account.
+
+To open System Settings, go to:
+
+> Setup > Settings > System Settings
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3827b312
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Setup Wizard
+
+The Setup Wizard helps you quickly setup your ERPnext by helping you create your company, Items, Customer, Suppliers and will also setup a basic website with this data.
+
+Here is a quick overview of the steps:
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..74f6a42f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+step-1-language
+step-2-currency-and-timezone
+step-3-user-details
+step-4-company-details
+step-5-letterhead-and-logo
+step-6-add-users
+step-7-tax-details
+step-8-customer-names
+step-9-suppliers
+step-10-item
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-1-language.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-1-language.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..04950aed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-1-language.md
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+
+# Step 1: Language
+
+Select your language. ERPNext is available in more than 20 languages.
+
+
+
+---
+
+Translations are contributed by the ERPNext Community. If you want to contribute, [please checkout the translator portal](https://translate.erpnext.com).
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-10-item.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-10-item.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3700b197
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-10-item.md
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+
+# Step 9: Item Names
+
+In this final step, please enter the names of the Items you buy or sell.
+
+
+
+---
+
+### Default Currency
+
+For most countries, your currency and timezone will be automatically set
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-3-user-details.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-3-user-details.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b36b8405
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/setup-wizard/step-3-user-details.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+# Step 3: User Details
+
+Enter Users Profile Details like Name, User ID and preferred password.
+
+
+
+
+> Note: the string up to the "?" is the SMS Gateway URL
+
+Example:
+
+
+
+ http://instant.smses.com/web2sms.php?username=abcd&password;=abcd&to;=9900XXXXXX&sender;
+ =DEMO&message;=THIS+IS+A+TEST+SMS
+
+The above URL will send SMS from account abcd to mobile number 9900XXXXXX with
+sender ID as DEMO with text message as "THIS IS A TEST SMS"
+
+Note that some parameters in the URL are static.You will get static values
+from your SMS Provider like username, password etc. These static values should
+be entered in the Static Parameters table.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..53931a24
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.md
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+
+Stock Reconciliation is the process of counting and evaluating stock-in-trade,
+usually at an organisations year end in order to value the total stock for
+preparation of the accounts. In this process actual physical stocks are
+checked and recorded in the system. The actual stocks and the stock in the system should be in agreement and accurate. If they are not, you can
+use the stock reconciliation tool to reconcile stock balance and value with actuals.
+
+**Difference between Serialized and Non-serialized Items.**
+
+A serial number is a unique, identifying number or group of numbers and
+letters assigned to an individual Item. Serialized items are generally high value items for which you need to warranty's and service agreements. Mostly items as machinery, equipments and high-value electronics (computers, printers etc.) are serialized.
+
+Non Serialized items are generally fast moving and low value item, hence doesn't need tracking for each unit. Items like screw, cotton waste, other consumables, stationary products can be categorized as non-serialized.
+
+> Stock Reconciliation option is available for the non serialized Items only. For serialized and batch items, you should create Material Receipt entry in Stock Entry form.
+
+### Opening Stocks
+
+You can upload your opening stock balance in the system using Stock Reconciliation.
+Stock Reconciliation will update your stock for a given Item on a given date
+for a given Warehouse to the given quantity.
+
+To perform Stock Reconciliation, go to:
+
+> Stock > Tools > Stock Reconciliation > New
+
+#### Step 1: Download Template
+
+A predefined template of an spreadsheet file should be followed for importing item's stock levels and valuations. Open new Stock Reconciliation form to see download option.
+
+
+
+#### Step 2: Enter Data in csv file.
+
+
+
+The csv format is case-sensitive. Do not edit the headers which are preset in the template. In the Item Code and Warehouse column, enter exact Item Code and Warehouse as created in your ERPNext account. For quatity, enter stock level you wish to set for that item, in a specific warehouse.
+
+#### Step 3: Upload file and Enter Values in Stock Reconciliation Form
+
+
+
+**Posting Date**
+
+Posting Date will be date when you want uploaded stock to reflect in the report. Posting Date selection option allows you making back dated stock reconcialiation as well.
+
+**Difference Account:**
+
+When making Stock Reconciliation for updating **opening balance**, then you should select Balance Sheet account. By default **Temporary Opening** is created in the chart of account which can be used here.
+
+If you are making Stock Reconciliation for **correcting stock level or valuation of an item**, then you can select any expense account in which you would want difference amount (derived from difference of valuation of item) should be booked. If Expense Account is selected as Difference Account, you will also need to select Cost Center as it is mandatory with any income and expense account selection.
+
+After reviewing saved Reconciliation Data, submit the Stock Reconciliation. On
+successful submission, the data will be updated in the system. To check the
+submitted data go to stock and view stock level report.
+
+Note: While filling the valuation rates of Items, if you wish to find out the
+valuation rates of all items, you can go to stock and click on Item Prices
+report. The report will show you all types of rates.
+
+#### Step 4: Review the reconciliation data
+
+
+
+### Stock Ledger Report
+
+
+
+
+**How Stock Reconciliation Works**
+
+Stock Reconciliation on a specific date means balance quantity frozen for that item on reconciliation date, and shall not get affected due to stock entries made before its date.
+
+Example:
+
+Item Code: ABC001
+Warehouse: Mumbai
+Let's assume stock as on 10th January is 100 nos.
+Stock Reconciliation is made on 12th January to bring stock balance to 150 nos.
+Existing Stock Ledger:
+
+
+ | Posting Date + | +Qty + | +Balance Qty + | +Voucher Type + | +
| 10/01/2014 | +100 | +100 | +Purchase Receipt | +
| 12/01/2014 | +50 | +150 | +Stock Reconciliation | +
| Posting Date | +Qty | +Balance Qty | +Voucher Type | +
| 05/01/2014 | +20 | +20 | +Purchase Receipt | +
| 10/01/2014 | +100 | +120 | +Purchase Receipt | +
| 12/01/2014 | +150 | +Stock Reconciliation |
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/adding-users.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/adding-users.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9bcae8e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/adding-users.md
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+
+# Adding Users
+
+Users can be added by the System Manager. If you are a System Manager, you can add Users via
+
+> Setup > User
+
+There are two main classes of users: Web Users and System Users. System Users are people using ERPNext in the company. Web users are customers or suppliers (or portal users).
+
+Under User a lot of info can be entered. For the sake of usability the information entered for webs users is minimal: First Name and email.
+Important is to realize that the email address is the unique key (ID) identifying the Users.
+
+### 1. List of Users
+
+
+
+
+To add a new user, click on "New"
+
+### 2. Add the user details
+
+Add user details such as First Name, Last Name, Email etc.
+
+The user's Email will become the user id. Mobile No can also be used to log in if you check the Allow Login using Mobile No checkbox under the Security section in System Settings. While Mobile No will be unique, it will not be treated as a user id.
+
+
+
+
+After adding these details, save the user.
+
+### 3. Setting Roles
+
+After saving, you will see a list of roles and a checkbox next to it. Just check the roles you want the user to have and save the document. To click on what permissions translate into roles, click on the role
+name.
+
+
+
+### 4. Setting Module Access
+
+Users will have access to all modules for which they have role based access. If you want to block certain modules for certain users, un-check the module from the list.
+
+
+
+### 5. Security Settings
+
+If you wish to give the user access to the system only between office hours,
+or during weekends, mention it under security settings.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bac0a78b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+
+
+In ERPNext, you can create multiple users and assign them different roles. There are some users which can only access the public facing part of ERPNext (i.e. the website). Such users are called "Website Users".
+
+ERPNext implements permission control at the User and Role level. Each user in the system can be assigned multiple
+roles and permissions.
+
+The most important role is the "System Manager". Any user having this role can add other users and set roles to all users.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..74243df5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,5 @@
+adding-users
+role-based-permissions
+user-permissions
+role-permisison-for-page-and-report
+sharing
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fb71b4a9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-based-permissions.md
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+
+# Role Based Permissions
+
+ERPNext has a role-based permission system. It means that you can assign Roles to Users, and set Permissions on Roles. The permission structure also allows you to define different permission rules for different fields, using a concept called **Permission "Level"** of a field. Once roles are assigned to a user, it gives you the ability to limit access for a user to only specific documents.
+
+To start with, go to:
+> Setup > Permissions > Role Permissions Manager
+
+
+
+Permissions are applied on a combination of:
+
+ * **Roles:** As we saw earlier, Users are assigned to Roles and it is on these Roles that permission rules are applied.
+
+ *Examples of Roles include Accounts Manager, Employee, HR User.*
+
+ * **Document Types:** Each type of document, master or transaction, has a separate list of Role based permissions.
+
+ *Examples of Document Types are Sales Invoice, Leave Application, Stock Entry, etc.*
+
+ * **Permission "Levels":** In each document, you can group fields by "levels". Each group of field is denoted by a unique number (0, 1, 2, 3, etc.). A separate set of permission rules can be applied to each field group. By default all fields are of level 0.
+
+ *Permission "Level" connects the group of fields with level X to a permission rule with level X.*
+
+ * **Document Stages:** Permissions are applied on each stage of the document like on Creation, Saving, Submission, Cancellation and Amendment. A role can be permitted to Print, Email, Import or Export data, access Reports, or define User Permissions.
+
+ * **Apply User Permissions:** This switch decides whether User Permissions should be applied for the role on selected Document Stages.
+
+ If enabled, a user with that role will be able to access only specific Documents for that Document Type. Such specific Document access is defined in the list of User Permissions. Additionally, User Permissions defined for other Document Types also get applied if they are related to the current Document Type through Link Fields.
+
+ To set, User Permissions go to:
+ > Setup > Permissions > [User Permissions Manager]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.html)
+
+---
+
+**To add a new rule**, click on "Add a New Rule" button and a pop-up box will ask you to select a Role and a Permission Level. Once you select this and click on "Add", this will add a new row to your rules table.
+
+---
+
+Leave Application is a good **example** that encompasses all areas of Permission System.
+
+
+
+ 1. **It should be created by an Employee.**
+ For this, Employee Role should be given Read, Write, Create permissions.
+
+
+
+ 1. **An Employee should only be able to access his/her Leave Application.**
+ Hence, Apply User Permissions should be enabled for Employee Role, and a User Permission record should be created for each User Employee combination. (This effort is reduced for Employee Document Type, by programmatically creating User Permission records.)
+
+
+
+ 1. **HR Manager should be able to see all Leave Applications.**
+ Create a Permission Rule for HR Manager at Level 0, with Read permissions. Apply User Permissions should be disabled.
+
+
+
+ 2. **Leave Approver should be able to see and update Leave Applications applicable to him/her.**
+ Leave Approver is given Read and Write access at Level 0, with Apply User Permissions enabled. Relevant Employee Documents should be enlisted in the User Permissions of Leave Approvers. (This effort is reduced for Leave Approvers mentioned in Employee Documents, by programmatically creating User Permission records.)
+
+
+
+ 3. **It should be Approved / Rejected only by HR User or Leave Approver.**
+ The Status field of Leave Application is set at Level 1. HR User and Leave Approver are given Read and Write permissions for Level 1, while everyone else (All) are given Read permission for Level 1.
+
+
+
+
+ 4. **HR User should be able to delegate Leave Applications to his/her subordinates**
+ HR User is given the right to Set User Permissions. A User with HR User role would be able to defined User Permissions on Leave Application for other users.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-permisison-for-page-and-report.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-permisison-for-page-and-report.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7aedd3ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/role-permisison-for-page-and-report.md
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+
+# Role Permission for Page and Report
+
+In ERPNext, user can make his custom user interface using Page and the custom report using Report Builder or Query Report. ERPNext has role-based-permission system where user can assign roles to the user. And the same role can be assigned to the page and report, to access them.
+
+If user has enabled the developer mode, then they can add the roles directly in the page and report record. But in that case, the permissions will also be reflected in the json file for the page / report.
+
+### For Page
+
+
+### For Report
+
+
+## Tool for custom roles assignment
+
+If developer mode is disabled, then user can assign the roles to the page and report, using "Role Permission for Page and Report" page.
+
+To access, goto Setup > Permissions > Role Permission for Page and Report
+
+
+
+### Reset to defaults
+
+Using "Reset to Default" button, user can remove the custom permissions applied on a page or report. Then default permissions will be applicable on that page or report.
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/sharing.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/sharing.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..298060d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/sharing.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+# Sharing
+
+In addition to user and role permissions, you can also Share a document with another user if you have sharing rights.
+
+To share a document, open the document, click on the "+" icon under sharing and select the user
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9cbf8942
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/users-and-permissions/user-permissions.md
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+
+# User Permissions
+
+Role Base Permissions define the periphery of document types within which a user with a set of Roles can move around in. However, you can have an even finer control by defining User Permissions for a User. By setting specific documents in User Permissions list, you can limit access for that User to specific documents of a particular DocType, on the condition that "Apply User Permissions" is checked in Role Permissions Manager.
+
+To start with, go to:
+
+> Setup > Permissions > User Permissions Manager
+
+User Permissions Manager displaying how users can access only a specific Company.
+
+#### Example
+
+User 'tom.hagen@riosolutions.com' has Sales User role and we want to limit the user to access records for only a specific Company 'Rio Solutions'.
+
+ 1. We add a User Permissions row for Company.
+
+ 
+
+ Add User Permissions row for a combination of User 'tom.hagen@riosolutions.com' and Company 'Rio Solutions'.
+
+ 1. Also Role "All" has only Read permission for Company, with 'Apply User Permissions' checked.
+
+ 
+
+ Read Permission with Apply User Permissions checked for DocType Company.
+
+ 1. The combined effect of the above two rules lead to User 'tom.hagen@riosolutions.com' having only Read access to Company 'Rio Solutions'.
+
+ 
+
+ Access is limited to Company 'Rio Solutions'.
+
+ 1. We want this User Permission on Company to get applied on other documents like Quotation, Sales Order, etc.
+
+ These forms have a **Link Field based on Company**. As a result, User Permissions on Company also get applied on these documents, which leads to User 'tom.hagen@riosolutions' to acces these documents having Company 'Rio Solutions'.
+
+ 
+
+ Users with Sales User Role can Read, Write, Create, Submit and Cancel Quotations based on their User Permissions, since 'Apply User Permissions' is checked.
+
+ 
+
+ Quotation List is limited to results for Company 'Rio Solutions' for User 'tom.hagen@riosolutions.com'.
+
+ 1. User Permissions get applied automatically based on Link Fields, just like how it worked for Quotation. But, Lead Form has 4 Link fields: Territory, Company, Lead Owner and Next Contact By. Say, you want Leads to limit access to Users based only on Territory, even though you have defined User Permissions for DocTypes User, Territory and Company. You can do this by setting 'Ignore User Permissions' for Link fields: Company, Lead Owner and Next Contact By.
+
+
+
+Sales User can Read, Write and Create Leads limited by User Permissions.
+
+
+
+Check 'Ingore User Permissions' for Company, Lead Owner and Next Contact By fields using Setup > Customize > Customize Form for Lead.
+
+
+
+Due to the effect of the above combination, User 'tom.hagen@riosolutions.com' can only access Leads with Territory 'United States'.
+
+{next}
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/workflows.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/workflows.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..64ada8db
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/setting-up/workflows.md
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+
+In order to allow multiple people to submit multiple requests, for approvals,
+by multiple users, ERPNext requires you to fill the workflow conditions.
+ERPNext tracks the multiple permissions before submission.
+
+Example of a leave application workflow is given below:
+
+If a user applies for a leave, then his request will be sent to the HR
+department. The HR department (HR User) will either reject or approve this
+request. Once this process is completed, the user's Manager (leave approver)
+will get an indication that the HR department has Accepted or Rejected. The
+Manager, who is the approving authority, will either Approve or Reject this
+request. Accordingly,the user will get his Approved or Rejected status.
+
+
+
+To make this Workflow and transition rules go to :
+
+> Setup > Workflow > New Workflow
+
+#### Step 1: Enter the different states of Leave Approval Process.
+
+
+
+#### Step 2: Enter Transition Rules.
+
+
+
+#### Notes:
+
+> Note 1: When you make a workflow you essentially overwrite the code that is
+written for that document. Thus the document will function based on your
+workflow and not based on the pre-set code settings. Hence there might be no
+submit button / option if you have not specified it in the workflow.
+
+> Note 2: Document status of saved is 0, of submitted is 1, and of cancelled is
+2.
+
+> Note 3: A document cannot be cancelled unless it is submitted.
+
+> Note 4: If you wish to give the option to cancel, you will have to write a
+workflow transition step that says from submitted you can cancel.
+
+
+
+#### Example of a Leave Application Process:
+
+When a Leave Application is saved by Employee, the status of the document changes to "Applied"
+
+
+
+When the HR User logs in, he can either Approve or Reject. If approved the
+status of the document changes to "Approved by HR". However, it is yet to be approved by Leave Approver.
+
+
+
+When the Leave Approver opens the Leave Application page, he can finally "Approve" or "Reject" the Leave Application.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a0c9eded
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+
+The value of available inventory is treated as an Asset in company's Chart of
+Accounts. Depending on the type of items, it can be treated as Fixed Asset or
+Current Asset. To prepare Balance Sheet, you should make the accounting
+entries for those assets. There are generally two different methods of
+accounting for inventory:
+
+### **Auto / Perpetual Inventory**
+
+In this process, for each stock transactions, the system posts relevant
+accounting entries to sync stock balance and accounting balance. This is the
+default setting in ERPNext for new accounts.
+
+When you buy and receive items, those items are booked as the company’s assets
+(stock-in-hand / fixed-assets). When you sell and deliver those items, an
+expense (cost-of-goods-sold) equal to the buying cost of the items is booked.
+General Ledger entries are made after every stock transaction. As a result,
+the value as per Stock Ledger always remains same with the relevant account
+balance. This improves accuracy of Balance Sheet and Profit and Loss
+statement.
+
+To check accounting entries for a particular stock transaction, please check
+[examples]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.html)
+
+#### **Advantages**
+
+Perpetual Inventory system will make it easier for you to maintain accuracy of
+company's asset and expense values. Stock balances will always be synced with
+relevant account balances, so no more periodic manual entry has to be done to
+balance them.
+
+In case of new back-dated stock transactions or cancellation/amendment of an
+existing transaction, all the future Stock Ledger entries and GL Entries will
+be recalculated for all items of that transaction. The same is applicable if
+any cost is added to the submitted Purchase Receipt, later through the Landed
+Cost Wizard.
+
+> Note: Perpetual Inventory totally depends upon the item valuation rate.
+Hence, you have to be more careful entering valuation rate while making any
+incoming stock transactions like Purchase Receipt, Material Receipt, or
+Manufacturing / Repack.
+
+* * *
+
+### **Periodic Inventory**
+
+In this method, accounting entries are manually created periodically, to sync
+stock balance and relevant account balance. The system does not create
+accounting entries automatically for assets, at the time of material purchases
+or sales.
+
+In an accounting period, when you buy and receive items, an expense is booked
+in your accounting system. You sell and deliver some of these items.
+
+At the end of an accounting period, the total value of items to be sold, need
+to be booked as the company’s assets, often known as stock-in-hand.
+
+The difference between the value of the items remaining to be sold and the
+previous period’s stock-in-hand value can be positive or negative. If
+positive, this value is removed from expenses (cost-of-goods-sold) and is
+added to assets (stock-in-hand / fixed-assets). If negative, a reverse entry
+is passed.
+
+This complete process is called Periodic Inventory.
+
+If you are an existing user using Periodic Inventory and want to use Perpetual
+Inventory, you have to follow some steps to migrate. For details, check
+[Migration From Periodic Inventory]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.html).
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..21624e52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+perpetual-inventory
+migrate-to-perpetual-inventory
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cd291c43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/migrate-to-perpetual-inventory.md
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+
+Perpetual Inventory Valuation is activated by default in the system.
+
+For the users who are currently following periodic inventory valuation system, and wish to migrate to perpetual inventory valuation system, please follow the steps explained below.
+
+As Perpetual Inventory always maintains a sync between stock and account balance, it is not possible to enable it with existing Warehouse setup. You have to create a whole new set of Warehouses, each linked to relevant account.
+
+Steps:
+
+ * Nullify the balance of account heads (stock-in-hand / fixed-asset) which you are using to maintain available stock value, through a Journal Entry.
+
+ * As existing warehouses are linked to stock transactions which does not have corresponding accounting entries, those warehouses can not be used for perpetual inventory. You have to create new warehouses for the future stock transactions which will be linked to their respective accounts. While creating new warehouses, select an account group under which the child account for the warehouse will be created.
+
+ * Setup the following default accounts for each Company
+
+ * Stock Received But Not Billed
+ * Stock Adjustment Account
+ * Expenses Included In Valuation
+ * Cost Center
+ * Activate Perpetual Inventory
+
+ `Explore > Accounts > Accounts Settings`
+
+ 
+
+
+ * Create Stock Entry (Material Transfer) to transfer available stock from existing warehouse to new warehouse. As stock will be available in the new warehouse, you should select the new warehouse for all the future transactions.
+
+System will not post any accounting entries for existing stock transactions submitted prior to the activation of Perpetual Inventory as those old warehouses will not be linked to any account. If you create any new transaction or modify/amend existing transactions, with old warehouse, there will be no corresponding accounting entries. You have to manually sync stock and account balance through Journal Entry.
+
+> Note: If you are already using old Perpetual Inventory system, it will be deactivated automatically. You need to follow the above steps to reactivate it.
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6a557dd8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/accounting-of-inventory-stock/perpetual-inventory.md
@@ -0,0 +1,358 @@
+
+As per the perpetual inventory system, accounts posting is done for every stock transaction.
+
+On creating new Warehouse, the system will automatically create an Account in the Chart of Account, with the same name as Warehouse Name.
+
+On receipt of items in a particular warehouse, the balance in the Warehouse Account will increase. Similarly when items are delivered from the Warehouse, an expense will be booked, and balance in the Warehouse Account will reduce.
+
+##Activation
+
+ * Activate Perpetual Inventory
+
+ > Setup > Company > Stock Settings > "Enable Perpetual Inventory"
+
+
+
+ * Setup the following default accounts for each Company. These accounts are created automatically in the new ERPNext accounts.
+
+ * Default Inventory Account
+ * Stock Received But Not Billed
+ * Stock Adjustment Account
+ * Expenses Included In Valuation
+ * Cost Center
+
+ * If user wants to set an individual account for each warehouse, create account head for each account under `Assets > Current Asset > Stock Assets > (Warehouse)` and set it on the respective warehouse under field 'Account'.
+
+ * For stock transactions, general ledger entries made against the account head set on the warehouse, if user had not set the account for the warhouse then system gets the account head from the parent warehouse. If account had not set for parent warehouse then system gets the account(Default Inventory Account) from the company master.
+
+* * *
+
+##Example
+
+Consider following Chart of Accounts and Warehouse setup for your company:
+
+####Chart of Accounts
+
+ * Assets (Dr)
+ * Current Assets
+ * Accounts Receivable
+ * Debtor
+ * Stock Assets
+ * Stores
+ * Finished Goods
+ * Work In Progress
+ * Tax Assets
+ * VAT
+ * Fixed Assets
+ * Fixed Asset Warehouse
+ * Liabilities (Cr)
+ * Current Liabilities
+ * Accounts Payable
+ * Creditors
+ * Stock Liabilities
+ * Stock Received But Not Billed
+ * Tax Liabilities
+ * Service Tax
+ * Income (Cr)
+ * Direct Income
+ * Sales Account
+ * Expenses (Dr)
+ * Direct Expenses
+ * Stock Expenses
+ * Cost of Goods Sold
+ * Expenses Included In Valuation
+ * Stock Adjustment
+ * Shipping Charges
+ * Customs Duty
+
+####Warehouse - Account Configuration
+
+ * Stores
+ * Work In Progress
+ * Finished Goods
+
+###Purchase Receipt
+
+Suppose you have purchased _10 nos_ of item "RM0001" at _$200_ and _5 nos_ of item "Base Plate" at **$100** from supplier "Arcu Vel Quam Fabricators". Following are the details of Purchase Receipt:
+
+**Supplier:** Arcu Vel Quam Fabricators
+
+**Items:**
+
+| Item | +Warehouse | +Qty | +Rate | +Amount | +Valuation Amount | +
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | +Stores | +10 | +200 | +2000 | +2250 | +
Taxes: +
+| Account | +Amount | +Category | +
|---|---|---|
| Shipping Charges | +100 | +Total and Valuation | +
| VAT (10%) | +200 | +Total | +
| Customs Duty | +150 | +Valuation | +
+
+**General Ledger**
+
+
+
+As stock balance increases through Purchase Receipt, "Store" accounts are debited and a temporary account "Stock Receipt But Not Billed" account is credited, to maintain double entry accounting system. At the same time, negative expense is booked in account "Expense included in Valuation" for the amount added for valuation purpose, to avoid double expense booking.
+
+* * *
+
+###Purchase Invoice
+
+On receiving Bill from supplier, for the above Purchase Receipt, you will make Purchase Invoice for the same. The general ledger entries are as follows:
+
+**General Ledger**
+
+
+
+Here "Stock Received But Not Billed" account is debited and nullified the
+effect of Purchase Receipt.
+
+* * *
+
+###Delivery Note
+
+Lets say, you have an order from "Utah Automation Services" to deliver 5 nos of item "RM0001"
+at $300. Following are the details of Delivery Note:
+
+**Customer:** Utah Automation Services
+
+**Items:**
+| Item | +Warehouse | +Qty | +Rate | +Amount | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | +Stores | +5 | +300 | +1500 | +
Taxes: +
+| Account | +Amount | +
|---|---|
| Service Tax | +150 | +
| VAT | +100 | +
+
+**General Ledger**
+
+
+
+As item is delivered from "Stores" warehouse, "Stores" account is credited and
+equal amount is debited to the expense account "Cost of Goods Sold". The
+debit/credit amount is equal to the total valuation amount (buying cost) of
+the selling items. And valuation amount is calculated based on your preferred
+valuation method (FIFO / Moving Average) or actual cost of serialized items.
+
+
+
+ In this example, we have considered valuation method as FIFO.
+ Valuation Rate = Purchase Rate + Charges Included in Valuation
+ = 200 + (250 * (2000 / 2500) / 10)
+ = 220
+ Total Valuation Amount = 220 * 5
+ = 1100
+
+
+
+* * *
+
+###Sales Invoice with Update Stock
+
+Lets say, you did not make Delivery Note against the above order and instead
+you have made Sales Invoice directly, with "Update Stock" options. The details
+of the Sales Invoice are same as the above Delivery Note.
+
+**Stock Ledger**
+
+
+
+**General Ledger**
+
+
+
+Here, apart from normal account entries for invoice, "Stores" and "Cost of
+Goods Sold" accounts are also affected based on the valuation amount.
+
+* * *
+
+###Stock Entry (Material Receipt)
+
+**Items:**
+
+| Item | +Target Warehouse | +Qty | +Rate | +Amount | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | +Stores | +50 | +220 | +11000 | +
+
+**General Ledger**
+
+
+
+* * *
+
+###Stock Entry (Material Issue)
+
+**Items:**
+
+| Item | +Source Warehouse | +Qty | +Rate | +Amount | +
|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | +Stores | +10 | +220 | +2200 | +
+
+**General Ledger**
+
+
+
+* * *
+
+###Stock Entry (Material Transfer)
+
+**Items:**
+
+| Item | +Source Warehouse | +Target Warehouse | +Qty | +Rate | +Amount | +
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| RM0001 | +Stores | +Work In Progress | +10 | +220 | +2200 | +
+
+**General Ledger**
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/allow-over-delivery-billing-against-sales-order-upto-certain-limit.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/allow-over-delivery-billing-against-sales-order-upto-certain-limit.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..22500fc3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/allow-over-delivery-billing-against-sales-order-upto-certain-limit.md
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+
+#Allow Over Delivery/Billing
+
+While creating Delivery Note, system validates if item's Qty mentined is same as in the Sales Order. If Item Qty has been increased, you will get over-delivery validation. If you want to be able to deliver more items than mentioned in the Sales Order, you should update "Allow over delivery or receipt upto this percent" in the Item master.
+
+
+
+Item's and Rate is also validated when creating Sales Invoice from Sales Order. Also when creating Purchase Receipt and Purchaes Invoice from Purchase Order. Updating "Allow over delivery or receipt upto this percent" will be affective in all sales and purchase transactions.
+
+For example, if you have ordered 100 units of an item, and if item's over receipt percent is 50%, then you are allowed to make Purchase Receipt for upto 150 units.
+
+Update global value for "Allow over delivery or receipt upto this percent" from Stock Settings. Value updated here will be applicable for all the items.
+
+1. Go to `Stock > Setup > Stock Settings`
+
+2. Set `Allowance Percentage`.
+
+3. Save Stock Settings.
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/auto-creation-of-material-request.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/auto-creation-of-material-request.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..998b43c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/auto-creation-of-material-request.md
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+
+#Auto Creation of Material Request
+
+To prevent stockouts, you can track item's reorder level. When stock level goes below reorder level, purchase manager is notified and instructed to initiate purchase process for the item.
+
+In ERPNext, you can update item's Reorder Level and Reorder Qty in the Item master. If same item has different reorder level, you can also update warehouse-wise reorder level and reorder qty.
+
+
+
+With reorder level, you can also define what should be the next action. Either new purchase or transfer from another warehouse. Based on setting in Item master, purpose will be updated in the Material Request as well.
+
+
+
+When item's stock reaches reorder level, Material Request is auto-created automatically. You can enable this feature from:
+
+`Stock > Setup > Stock Settings`
+
+
+
+A separate Material Request will be created for each item. User with Purchase Manager's role will receive email alert about these Material Requests.
+
+If auto creation of Material Request is failed, User with Purchase Manager role will be informed about error message. One of the most encountered error message is:
+
+**An error occurred for certain Items while creating Material Requests based on Re-order level.**
+**Date 01-04-2016 not in any Fiscal Year.**
+
+One of the reason of error could be Fiscal Year as well. Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/accounts/articles/fiscal-year-error.html) to learn more about it.
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/creating-depreciation-for-item.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/creating-depreciation-for-item.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2d5f7532
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/creating-depreciation-for-item.md
@@ -0,0 +1,29 @@
+
+#Depreciation Entry
+
+**Question:** A Fixed Asset Item has been purchased and stored in a warehouse. How to create a depreciation for a Fixed Asset Item?
+
+**Answer:**You can post asset depreciation entry for the fixed asset item via [Stock Reconciliation]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/opening-stock.html) Entry.
+
+####Step 1:
+
+In the Attachment file, fill in the appropriate columns;
+
+- **Item Code** whose value is to be depreciated.
+- **Warehouse** in which item is stored.
+- **Qty (Quantity)** Leave this column blank.
+- **Valuation Rate** will be item's value after depreciation.
+
+
+
+After updating Valuation Rate for an item, come back to Stock Reconciliation and upload save .csv file.
+
+####Step 2:
+
+Select Expense account for depreciation in **Difference Account**. Value booked in the depreciation account will be the difference of old and next valuation rate of the fixed asset item, which will be actually the depreciation amount.
+
+
+
+####Stock Reconciliation Help Video
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..be943bcc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..df779de6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+allow-over-delivery-billing-against-sales-order-upto-certain-limit
+auto-creation-of-material-request
+depreciation-entry
+maintain-stock-field-frozen-in-item-master
+manage-rejected-finished-goods-items
+managing-batch-wise-inventory
+managing-fractions-in-uom
+opening-stock-balance-entry-for-the-serialized-and-batch-item
+repack-entry
+serial-no-naming
+stock-entry-purpose
+stock-level-report
+track-items-using-barcode
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/maintain-stock-field-frozen-in-item-master.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/maintain-stock-field-frozen-in-item-master.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..84615a66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/maintain-stock-field-frozen-in-item-master.md
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+
+#Maintain Stock field Frozen in the Item master
+
+In the item master, you might witness values in the following fields to be frozen.
+
+1. Maintain Stock
+1. Has Batch No.
+1. Has Serial No.
+
+
+
+For an item, once stock ledger entry is created, values in these fields will be froze. This is to prevent user from changing value which can lead to mis-match of actual stock, and stock level in the system of an item.
+
+For the serialized item, since its stock level is calculated based on count of available Serial Nos., setting Item as non-serialized mid-way will break the sync, and item's stock level shown in the report will not be accurate, hence Has Serial No. field is froze.
+
+To make these fields editable once again, you should delete all the stock transactions made for this item. For the Serialized and Batch Item, you should also delete Serial No. and Batch No. record for this item.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/manage-rejected-finished-goods-items.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/manage-rejected-finished-goods-items.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8cd24969
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/manage-rejected-finished-goods-items.md
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+
+#Manage Rejected Finished Goods Items
+
+There could be manufactured Items which would not pass quality test, hence rejected.
+
+Standard manufacturing process in ERPNext doesn't cover managing rejected items. Hence you should create finished goods entry for both accepted as well as rejected items. With this, you will have rejected items also received in the finished goods warehouse.
+
+To move rejected items from the finished goods warehouse, you should create Material Transfer entry. Steps below to create Material Transfer entry.
+
+####Step 1: New Stock Entry
+
+`Stock > Documents > Stock Entry > New`
+
+####Step 2: Purpose
+
+Purpose = Material Transfer
+
+####Step 3: Warehouse
+
+Source Warehouse = Finished Goods warehouse
+Target Warehouse = Rejected items warehouse
+
+####Step 4: Items
+
+Select item which failed quality test, and enter total rejected items as Qty.
+
+####Step 5: Submit Stock Entry
+
+On Saving and Submitting Stock Entry, stock of rejected items will be moved from Finished Goods Warehouse to Rejected Warehouse.
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-batch-wise-inventory.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-batch-wise-inventory.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6bdecf65
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-batch-wise-inventory.md
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+
+#Managing Batch wise Inventory
+
+Set of items which has same properties and attributes can be group in a single Batch. For example, pharmaceuticals items are batch, so that it's manufacturing and expiry date can be tracked together.
+
+To maintain batches against an Item you need to mention 'Has Batch No' as yes in the Item Master.
+
+
+
+You can create a new Batch from:
+
+`Stock > Documents > Batch > New`
+
+To learn more about batch, click [here.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/batch.html)
+
+For the Batch item, updating Batch No. in the stock transactions (Purchase Receipt & Delivery Note) is mandatory.
+
+#### Purchase Receipt
+
+When creating Purchase Receipt, you should create new Batch, or select one of the existing Batch master. One Batch can be associated with one Batch Item.
+
+
+
+#### Delivery Note
+
+Define Batch in Delivery Note Item table. If Batch item is added under Product Bundle, you can update it's Batch No. in the Packing List table sa well.
+
+
+
+#### Batch-wise Stock Balance Report
+
+To check batch-wise stock balance report, go to:
+
+Stock > Standard Reports > Batch-wise Balance History
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-fractions-in-uom.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-fractions-in-uom.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8e4e3aae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-fractions-in-uom.md
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+
+#Managing Fractions in UoM
+
+UoM stands for Unit of Measurement. Few examples of UoM are Numbers (Nos), Kgs, Litre, Meter, Box, Carton etc.
+
+There are few UoMs which cannot have value in decimal places. For example, if we have television for an item, with Nos as its UoM, we cannot have 1.5 Nos. of television, or 3.7 Nos. of computer sets. The value of quantity for these items must be whole number.
+
+You can configure if particular UoM can have value in decimal place or no. By default, value in decimal places will be allowed for all the UoMs. To restrict decimal places or value in fraction for any UoM, you should follow these steps.
+
+####UoM List
+
+For UoM list, go to:
+
+`Stock > Setup > UoM`
+
+From the list of UoM, select UoM for which value in decimal place is to be restricted. Let's assume that UoM is Nos.
+
+####Configure
+
+In the UoM master, you will find a field called "Must be whole number". Check this field to restrict user from enter value in decimal places in quantity field, for item having this UoM.
+
+
+
+####Validation
+
+While creating transaction, if you enter value in fraction for item whos UoM has "Must be whole number" checked, you will get error message stating:
+
+`Quantity cannot be a fraction at row #`
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/opening-stock-balance-entry-for-the-serialized-and-batch-item.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/opening-stock-balance-entry-for-the-serialized-and-batch-item.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ede23fdb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/opening-stock-balance-entry-for-the-serialized-and-batch-item.md
@@ -0,0 +1,61 @@
+
+#Opening Stock Balance Entry for the Serialized and Batch Item
+
+Items for which Serial No. and Batch No. is maintained, opening stock balance entry for them is update via Stock Entry. [Click here to learn how serialized inventory is managed in ERPNext]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/serial-no.html).
+
+**Question:** Why Opening Balance entry for the Serialized and Batch Item cannot be updated via Stock Reconciliation?
+
+In the ERPNext, stock level of a serialized items is derived based on the count of Serial Nos for that item. Hence, unless Serial Nos. are created for the serialized item, its stock level is not be updated. In the Stock Reconciliation Tool, you can only update opening quantity of an item, but not their Serial No. and Batch No.
+
+### Opening Balance for the Serialized Item
+
+Following are the steps to create opening stock balance entry for the Serialized and Batch item.
+
+#### Step 1: New Stock Entry
+
+`Stock > Stock Entry > New`
+
+#### Step 2: Select Purpose
+
+Stock Entry Purpose should be updated as `Material Receipt`.
+
+#### Step 3: Update Posting Date
+
+Posting Date should be date on which you wish to update opening balance for an item.
+
+#### Step 4: Update Target Warehouse
+
+Target Warehouse will be one in which opening balance of an item will be updated.
+
+#### Step 5: Select Items
+
+Select Items for which opening balance is to be updated.
+
+#### Step 6: Update Opening Qty
+
+For the serialized item, update quantity as many Serial Nos are their.
+
+For the serialized item, mention Serial Nos. equivalent to it's Qty. Or if Serial Nos. are configured to be created based on Prefix, then no need to mention Serial Nos. manually. Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/articles/serial-no-naming.html) to learn more about Serial No. naming.
+
+For a batch item, provide Batch ID in which opening balance will be updated. Keep batch master ready, and updated it for the Batch Item. To create new Batch, go to:
+
+`Stock > Setup > Batch > New`
+
+[Click here to learn how Batchwise inventory is managed in ERPNext.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/articles/managing-batch-wise-inventory.html)
+
+#### Step 7: Update Valuation Rate an Item
+
+Update valuation rate, which will be per unit value of item. If different units of the same items having different valuation rate, they should be updated in a separate row, with different Valuation Rates.
+
+#### Step 8: Difference Account
+
+As per perpetual inventory valuation system, accounting entry is created for every stock transaction. Double entry accounting system requires Total Debit matching with Total Credit in an entry. On the submission of Stock Entry, system debits Warehouse account by total value of items. To balance the same, we use Temporary Opening account as a Difference Account.
+
+
+
+#### Step 9: Save and Submit Stock Entry
+
+On submission of Stock Entry, stock ledger posting will be posted, and opening balance will be updated for the items on a given Posting Date.
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/repack-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/repack-entry.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..702cffa6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/repack-entry.md
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+
+#Repack Entry
+
+Repack Entry is created for item bought in bulk, which is being packed into smaller packages. For example, item bought in tons can be repacked into Kgs.
+
+Notes:
+1. Purchase Item and repack will be have different Item Codes.
+2. Repack entry can be made with or without BOM (Bill of Material).
+
+In a Repack Entry, there can be one or more than one repack items. Let's check below scenario to understand this better.
+
+Assume we are buying boxes of spray paint of specific colour (Green, Blue etc). And later re-bundling to create packs having multiple colours of spray paint (Blue-Green, Green-Yellow etc.) in them.
+
+#### 1. New Stock Entry
+
+`Stock > Documents > Stock Entry > New Stock Entry`
+
+#### 2. Enter Items
+
+Select Purpose as 'Repack Entry'.
+
+For raw-material/input item, only Source Warehouse will be provided.
+
+For repacked/output items, only Target Warehouse will be provided. You will have to provide valuation for the repack items.
+
+
+
+Update Qty for all the items selected.
+
+#### 3. Submit Stock Entry
+
+On submitting Stock Entry, stock of input item will be reduced from Source Warehouse, and stock of repack/output item will be added in the Target Warehouse.
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/serial-no-naming.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/serial-no-naming.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ba25579a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/serial-no-naming.md
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+
+#Serial No. Naming
+
+Serial Nos. is unique value assigned on each unit of an item. Serial no. helps in tracking item's warranty and expiry details. Generally high value items like machines, computers, costly equipments are serialized.
+
+To make item Serialized, in the Item master, check **Has Serial No**.
+
+There are two ways Serial no. can be generated in ERPNext.
+
+###1. Serializing Purchase Items
+
+If purchased items are received with Serial Nos. applied by OEM (original equipment manufacturer), you can follow same Serial No in ERPNext as well. While creating Purchase Receipt, you shall scan or manually enter Serial nos. for an item. On submitting Purchase Receipt, Serial Nos. will be created in the backend as per Serial Nos. provided for an item. If using OEM' Serial No., then in the Item master, Prefix should not be mentioned for serializalization. As per this scenaio, Prefix field should be left blank.
+
+If received items already has its Serial No. barcoded, you can simply scan that barcode for entering Serial No. in the Purchase Receipt. Click [here](https://frappe.io/blog/management/using-barcodes-to-ease-data-entry) to learn more about it.
+
+On submission of Purchase Receipt or Stock entry for the serialized item, Serial Nos. will be auto-generated.
+
+
+
+Generated Serial numbers will be updated for each item.
+
+
+
+###2. Serializing Manufacturing Item
+
+To Serialize Manufacturing Item, you can define Series for Serial No. Generation in the Item master itself. Following that series, system will create Serial Nos. for Item when its Production entry is made.
+
+####2.1 Serial No. Series
+
+When Item is set as serialized, it will allow you to mentioned Series for it.
+
+
+
+####2.2 Production Entry for Serialized Item
+
+On submission of production entry for manufacturing item, system will automatically generate Serial Nos. following Series as specified in the Item master.
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/stock-entry-purpose.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/stock-entry-purpose.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cd8ea581
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/stock-entry-purpose.md
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+
+#Stock Entry Purpose
+
+Stock Entry is a stock transaction, which can be used for multiple purposes. Let's learn about each Stock Entry Purpose below.
+
+#### 1.Purpose: Material Issue
+
+Material Issue entry create to issue item(s) from a warehouse. On submission of Material Issue, stock of item is deducated from the Source Warehouse.
+
+Material Issue is generally made for the low value consumable items like office stationary, product consumables etc. Also you can create Material Issue to reconcile serialized and batched item's stock.
+
+
+
+#### 2.Purpose: Material Receipt
+
+Material Receipt entry is created to inward stock of item(s) in a warehouse. This type of stock entry can be created for updating opening balance of serialized and batched item. Also items purchased without Purchase Order can be inwarded from Material Receipt entry.
+
+For the stock valuation purpose, provided Item Valuation becomes a mandatory field in the Material Receipt entry.
+
+
+
+#### 3.Purpose: Material Transfer
+
+Material Transfer entry is created for the inter-warehouse Material Transfer.
+
+
+
+#### 4.Purpose: Material Transfer for Manufacture
+
+In the manufacturing process, raw-materials are issued from the stores to the production department (generally WIP warehouse). This Material Transfer entry is created from Production Order. Items in this entry are fetched from the BOM of production Item, as selected in Production Order.
+
+
+
+#### 4.Purpose: Manufacture
+
+Manufacture is created from Production Order. In this entry, both raw-material item as well as production item are fetched from the BOM, selected in the Production Order. For the raw-material items, only Source Warehouse (generally WIP warehouse) is mentioned. For the production item, only target warehouse as mentioned in the Production Order is updated. On submission, stock of raw-material items are deducted from Source Warehouse, which indicates that raw-material items were consumed in the manufacturing process. Production Item is added to the Target Warehouse marking the completion of production cycle.
+
+
+
+#### 5.Purpose: Repack
+
+Repack Entry is created when items purchases in bulk is repacked under smaller packs. 
+
+#### 6.Purpose: Subcontract
+
+Subcontracting transaction involves company transfer raw-material items to the sub-contractors warehouse. This requires adding a warehouse for the sub-contractor as well. Sub-contract entry transfers stock from the companies warehouse to the sub-contractors warehouse..
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/stock-level-report.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/stock-level-report.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..583b5b90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/stock-level-report.md
@@ -0,0 +1,40 @@
+
+#Stock Level Report
+
+Stock Level report list stock item's quantity available in a particular warehouse.
+
+There are multiple reports available you can check for item's stock level.
+
+####Stock Projected Quantity Report
+
+You can access this report from `Stock > Main Report > Stock Projected Quantity`
+
+This report list item wise - warehouse wise stock level of an item considering all the stock transactions. With Actual Quantity of an item, it also provide other details like:
+
+1. Actual Qty: Quantity available in the warehouse.
+2. Planned Qty: Quantity, for which, Production Order has been raised, but is pending to be manufactured.
+3. Requested Qty: Quantity requested for purchase, but not ordered.
+4. Ordered Qty: Quantity ordered for purchase, but not received.
+5. Reserved Qty: Quantity ordered for sale, but not delivered.
+6. Project Qty: Project Quantity is calculated as
+
+Projected Qty = Actual Qty + Planned Qty + Requested Qty + Ordered Qty - Reserved Qty
+
+The projected inventory is used by the planning system to monitor the reorder point and to determine the reorder quantity. The projected Quantity is used by the planning engine to monitor the safety stock levels. These levels are maintained to serve unexpected demands.
+
+Having a tight control of the projected inventory is crucial to determine shortages and to calculate the right order quantity.
+
+####Stock Balance Report
+
+Stock Ledger report helps you check stock balance of an item on a given date.
+
+You can access this report from
+
+`Stock > Main Report > Stock Balance`
+
+This allows you to go back in time, and check what was stock level of an item in a particular warehouse in the near past.
+
+With item's stock levels, you will also get their valuation details in this report.
+
+Based on the date filters, this report provides item's Opening Stock on From Date, and Closing Stock on To From. It will also list the In Quantity and Out Quantity for an item between the date range.
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/track-items-using-barcode.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/track-items-using-barcode.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a88a6a41
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/articles/track-items-using-barcode.md
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+
+#Track Items Using Barcode
+
+A barcode is a value decoded into vertical spaced lines. Barcode scanners are the input medium, like Keyboard. When it scans a barcode, the data appears in the computer screens at the point of a cursor.
+
+### Item Master
+
+To set the barcode of a particular item, you will have to open the Item record. You can also enter barcode while creating a new item.
+
+
+
+Once barcode field is updated in item master, items can be fetched using barcode. This feature will be availble in Delivery Note, Sales Invoice and Purchase Receipt transactions only.
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/batch.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/batch.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3802a26a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/batch.md
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+
+Batch feature in ERPNext allows you to group multiple units of an item,
+and assign them a unique value/number/tag called Batch No.
+
+This is done based on the Item. If the Item is batched, then a Batch number must be mentioned in every stock transaction. Batch numbers can be maintained manually or automatically
+
+### Item Setup
+
+To set item as a batch item, "Has Batch No" field should be checked in the Item master.
+
+If you want automatic batch creation at the time of Purchase Receipt, you must check "Create New Batches Automatically"
+
+
+
+### Creating Batches
+
+If you have not selected "Create New Batches Automatically", you will have to make Batches Manually as you go along.
+
+To create new Batch No. master for an item, go to:
+
+> Stock > Setup > Batch > New
+
+### Splitting and Moving Batches
+
+When you open a batch, you will see all the quantities relating this that batch on the page.
+
+
+
+To move the batch from one warehouse to another, you can click on the move button.
+
+You can also split the batch into smaller one by clicking on "Split". This will create a new Batch based on this Batch and the quantities will be split between the batches.
+
+### Transacting Items with Batches
+
+Batch master is created before creation of Purchase Receipt.
+Hence eveytime there is Purchase Receipt or Production Order being made for a batch item,
+you will first create its Batch No, and then select it in Purchase order or Production Entry.
+
+On every stock transaction (Purchase Receipt, Delivery Note, POS Invoice) made for batch item,
+you should provide item's Batch No.
+
+> Note: In stock transactions, Batch IDs will be filtered based on Item Code, Warehouse,
+Batch Expiry Date (compared with Posting date of a transaction) and Actual Qty in Warehouse.
+While searching for Batch ID without value in Warehouse field, then Actual Qty filter won't be applied.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/delivery-note.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/delivery-note.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7cf45bed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/delivery-note.md
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+
+A Delivery Note is made when a shipment is shipped from the company’s
+Warehouse.
+
+A copy of the Delivery Note is usually sent with the transporter. The Delivery
+Note contains the list of Items that are sent in the shipment and updates the
+inventory.
+
+The entry of the Delivery Note is very similar to a Purchase Receipt. You can
+create a new Delivery Note from:
+
+> Stock > Delivery Note > New
+
+or from a “Submitted” Sales Order (that is not already shipped) by clicking on
+“Make Delivery Note”.
+
+
+
+You can also “fetch” the details from an unshipped Sales Order.
+
+You will notice that all the information about unshipped Items and other
+details are carried over from your Sales Order.
+
+### Shipping Packets or Items with Product Bundle
+
+If you are shipping Items that have a [Product Bundle]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/selling/setup/product-bundle.html), ERPNext will automatically
+create a “Packing List” table for you based on the sub-Items in that Item.
+
+If your Items are serialized, then for Product Bundle type of Items, you will have
+to update the Serial Number in the “Packing List” table.
+
+### Packing Items into Cases, for Container Shipment
+
+If you are doing container shipment or by weight, then you can use the Packing
+Slip to breakup your Delivery Note into smaller units. To make a Packing Slip
+go to:
+
+> Stock > Packing Slip > New Packing Slip
+
+You can create multiple Packing Slips for your Delivery Note and ERPNext will
+ensure that the quantities in the Packing Slip do not exceed the quantities in
+the Delivery Note.
+
+* * *
+
+#### Q. How to Print Without Amounts?
+
+If you want to print your Delivery Notes without the amount (this might be
+useful if you are shipping high value items), just check the “Print without
+Amount” box in the “More Info” section.
+
+#### What happens when the Delivery Note is “Submitted”?
+
+A Stock Ledger Entry is made for each Item and stock is updated. Pending
+Quantity in the Sales Order is updated (if applicable).
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7de6380e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+
+For most small business that deal in physical goods, a large part of their net
+worth is invested in the stock in hand.
+
+### Material Flow
+
+There are three main types of entries:
+
+ * Purchase Receipt: Items received from Suppliers against Purchase Orders.
+ * Stock Entry: Items transferred from one Warehouse to another.
+ * Delivery Note: Items shipped to Customers.
+
+#### How does ERPNext track stock movement / levels?
+
+Tracking stock is not just about adding and subtracting quantities. Some
+complications arise when:
+
+ * Back-dated (past) entries are made / edited: This affects future stock levels and may lead to negative stock.
+ * Stock has to be valued based on First-in-First-out: ERPNext needs to maintain a sequence of all transactions to know the exact value of your Items.
+ * Stock reports are required at any point in time in the past: You have to lookup what was the quantity / value your stock of Item X on date Y.
+
+To manage this, ERPNext collects all inventory transactions in a table called
+the Stock Ledger Entry. All Purchase Receipts, Stock Entries and Delivery
+Notes update this table.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b89abe10
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+material-request
+stock-entry
+delivery-note
+purchase-receipt
+installation-note
+item
+warehouse
+serial-no
+batch
+projected-quantity
+accounting-of-inventory-stock
+tools
+setup
+sales-return
+purchase-return
+articles
+opening-stock
+stock-how-to
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/installation-note.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/installation-note.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..96f1b2b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/installation-note.md
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+
+You can use installation note to record the instalation of a product having a serial number.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f8927331
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+
+An Item is your companys' product or a service. The term Item is applicable to things (products or services) you sell as well as raw materials or components of products yet to be produced (before they can be sold to customers). An Item can be a physical product or a service that you buy/sell from your customers/suppliers. ERPNext allows you to manage all sorts of items like raw-materials, sub-assemblies, finished goods, item variants and service items.
+
+ERPNext is optimised for itemised management of your sales and purchase. If you are in services, you can create an Item for each services that your offer. Completing the Item Master is very essential for successful implementation of ERPNext.
+
+## Item Properties
+
+ * **Item Name:** Item name is the actual name of your product or service.
+ * **Item Code:** Item Code is a short-form to denote your Item. If you have very few Items, it is advisable to keep the Item Name and the Item Code same. This helps new users to recognise and update Item details in all transactions. In case you have lot of Items with long names and the list runs in hundreds, it is advisable to code. To understand naming Item codes see [Item Codification]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-codification.html)
+ * **Item Group:** Item Group is used to categorize an Item under various criterias like products, raw materials, services, sub-assemblies, consumables or all Item groups. Create your default Item Group list under Setup> Item Group and pre-select the option while filling your New Item details under [Item Group]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-group.html)
+ * **Default Unit of Measure:** This is the default measuring unit that you will use for your product. It could be in nos, kgs, meters, etc. You can store all the UOM’s that your product will require under Set Up> Master Data > UOM. These can be preselected while filling New Item by using % sign to get a pop up of the UOM list.
+ * **Brand:** If you have more than one brand save them under Set Up> Master Data> Brand and pre-select them while filling a New Item.
+ * **Variant:** A Item Variant is a different version of a Item.To learn more about managing variants see [Item Variants]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-variants.html)
+
+### Upload an Image
+
+To upload an image for your icon that will appear in all transactions, save the partially filled form. Only after your file is saved the 'upload' button will work above the Image icon. Click on this sign and upload the image.
+
+### Inventory : Warehouse and Stock Setting
+
+In ERPNext, you can select different type of Warehouses to stock your different Items. This can be selected based on Item types. It could be Fixed Asset Item, Stock Item or even Manufacturing Item.
+
+ * **Stock Item:** If you are maintaining stock of this Item in your Inventory, ERPNext will make a stock ledger entry for each transaction of this item.
+ * **Default Warehouse:** This is the Warehouse that is automatically selected in your transactions.
+ * **Allowance Percentage:** This is the percent by which you will be allowed to over-bill or over-deliver this Item. If not set, it will select from the Global Defaults.
+ * **Valuation Method:** There are two options to maintain valuation of stock. FIFO (first in - first out) and Moving Average. To understand this topic in detail please visit “ Item Valuation, FIFO and Moving Average”.
+
+### Serialized and Batched Inventory
+
+These numbers help to track individual units or batches of Items which you sell. It also tracks warranty and returns. In case any individual Item is recalled by the supplier the number system helps to track individual Item. The numbering system also manages expiry dates. Please note that if you sell your items in thousands, and if the items are very small like pens or erasers, you need not serialize them. In ERPNext, you will have to mention the serial number in some accounting entries. To create serial numbers you will have to manually create all the numbers in your entries. If your product is not a big consumer durable Item, if it has no warranty and has no chances of being recalled, avoid giving serial numbers.
+
+> Tip: While entering an item code in an items table, if the table requires inventory details, then depending on whether the entered item is batched or serialized, you can enter serial or batch numbers right away in a pop-up dialog.
+
+
+> Important: Once you mark an item as serialized or batched or neither, you cannot change it after you have made any stock entry.
+
+ * [Discussion on Serialized Inventory]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.html)
+
+### Re Ordering
+
+ ***Re-order level** suggests the amount of stock balance in the Warehouse.
+ ***Re-order Qty** suggests the amount of stock to be ordered to maintain minimum stock levels.
+ ***Minimum Order Qty** is the minimum quantity for which a Material Request / Purchase Order must be made.
+
+### Item Tax
+
+These settings are required only if a particular Item has a different tax rate than the rate defined in the standard tax Account. For example, If you have a tax Account, “VAT 10%” and this particular Item is exempted from tax, then you select “VAT 10%” in the first column, and set “0” as the tax rate in the second column.
+
+Go to [Setting Up Taxes]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/setting-up-taxes.html) to understand this topic in detail.
+
+### Inspection
+
+Inspection Required: If an incoming inspection (at the time of delivery from the Supplier) is mandatory for this Item, mention “Inspection Required” as “Yes”. The system will ensure that a Quality Inspection will be prepared and approved before a Purchase Receipt is submitted.
+
+Inspection Criteria: If a Quality Inspection is prepared for this Item, then this template of criteria will automatically be updated in the Quality Inspection table of the Quality Inspection. Examples of Criteria are: Weight, Length, Finish etc.
+
+### Purchase Details
+
+
+
+
+
+* **Lead time days:** Lead time days are the number of days required for the Item to reach the warehouse.
+
+* **Default Expense Account:** It is the account in which cost of the Item will be debited.
+
+* **Default Cost Centre:** It is used for tracking expense for this Item.
+
+###Supplier Details
+
+
+
+* **Default Supplier:** Supplier from whom you generally purchase this item.
+
+* **Manufacturer Details:** Select Manufacturer and Part No. assigned by the Manufacturer for this item.
+
+* **Supplier Codes:** Track Item Code defined by the Suppliers for this Item. In the Purchase transactions, on selection and Supplier, Supplier Part No. will be fetched as well for the Supplier's reference.
+
+### Sales Details
+
+
+
+* **Default Income Account:** Income account selected here will be fetched automatically in sales invoice for this item.
+
+)
+
+
+
+***Cost Centre:** Cost center selected here will be fetched automatically in sales invoice for this item.
+
+***Customer Codes:** Track Item Code assigned by the Customers for this Item. This will help you in searching item while creating Sales Order based on the Item Code in the Customer's Purchase Order.
+
+
+
+### Manufacturing And Website
+
+
+
+Visit [Manufacturing]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/manufacturing.html) and [Website ]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/website.html)to understand these topics in detail.
+
+### Learn more about Item
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4e668757
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+item-price
+item-codification
+item-variants
+purchase-details
+reorder
+item-valuation-fifo-and-moving-average
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-codification.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-codification.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b71903c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-codification.md
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+
+If you already have a full-fledged business with a number of physical items,
+you would have probably coded your items. If you have not, you have a choice.
+We recommend that you should codify if you have lot of products with long or
+complicated names. In case you have few products with short names, it is
+preferable to keep the Item Code same as Item Name.
+
+Item codification has been a sensitive topic and wars have been fought on this
+(not joking). In our experience, when you have items that cross a certain
+size, life without codification is a nightmare.
+
+### Benefits
+
+ * Standard way of naming things.
+ * Less likely to have duplicates.
+ * Explicit definition.
+ * Helps to quickly find if a similar item exists.
+ * Item names get longer and longer as more types get introduced. Codes are shorter.
+
+### Pain
+
+ * You have to remember the codes!
+ * Harder for new team members to pick up.
+ * You have to create new codes all the time.
+
+### Example
+
+You should have a simple manual / cheat-sheet to codify your Items instead of
+just numbering them sequentially. Each letter should mean something. Here is
+an example:
+
+If your business involves wooden furniture, then you may codify as follows:
+
+Item Codification Summary Sheet (SAMPLE)
+
+
+
+ First letter: "Material" Third letter: "Size"
+
+ - W - Wood - 0 - less than 1mm
+ - H - Hardware - 1 - 1mm - 5mm
+ - G - Glass - 2 - 5mm - 10mm
+ - U - Upholstery - 3 - 10mm - 10cm
+ - P - Plastic
+
+ Second Letter: "Type"
+
+ For Wood: For Hardware:
+
+ - S - Sheet - S - Screw
+ - B - Bar - N - Nut
+ - L - L-section - W - Washer
+ - M - Molded - B - Bracket
+ - R - Round
+
+
+The last few letters could be sequential. So by looking at code **WM304** \-
+you know its a wooden molding less than 10cm in size
+
+### Standardization
+
+If you have more than one person naming items, the style of naming items will
+change for everyone. Sometimes, even for one person, he or she may forget how
+they had named the item and may create a duplicate name _"Wooden Sheet 3mm" or
+"3mm Sheet of Wood"?_
+
+### Rationalizing
+
+It is a good practice to have minimum varieties of items so that you keep
+minimum stock, housekeeping is simpler etc. When you are planning a new
+product and you want to know if you are already purchasing a part in some
+other product, the item codes will help you quickly determine if you are using
+a similar raw material in another product.
+
+We believe if you do this small investment, it will help you rationalize
+things as your business grows, though its okay not to codify if you have less
+items.
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-price.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-price.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e7718435
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-price.md
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+
+Item Price is the record in which you can log selling and buying rate of an item.
+
+There are two ways to reach to new Item Price form.
+
+> Selling/Buying/Stock >> Setup >> Item Price >> New Item Price
+
+Or
+
+> Item >> Add/Edit Prices >> Click on "+" >> New Item Price
+
+Following are the steps to create new Item Price.
+
+Step 1: Select Price List
+
+You can create multiple Price List in ERPNext to track Selling and Buying Price List of an item separtely. Also if item's selling prices id changing based on territory, or due to other criteria, you can create multiple selling Price List for it.
+
+
+
+On selection of Price List, its currency and for selling or buying property will be fetched as well.
+
+To have Item Price fetching in the sales or purchase transaction, you should have Price List id selected in the transaction, just above Item table.
+
+Step 2: Select Item
+
+Select item for which Item Price record is to be created. On selection of Item Code, Item Name and Description will be fetched as well.
+
+
+
+Step 3: Enter Rate
+
+Enter selling/buying rate of an item in Price List currency.
+
+
+
+Step 4: Save Item Price
+
+To check all Item Price together, go to:
+
+Stock >> Main Report >> Itemwise Price List Rate
+
+You will find option to create new Item Price record (+) in this report as well.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-valuation-fifo-and-moving-average.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-valuation-fifo-and-moving-average.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e217fad9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-valuation-fifo-and-moving-average.md
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+
+### How are Items Valued?
+
+One of the major features of any inventory system is that you can find out the
+value of any item based on its historic or average price. You can also find
+the value of all your items for your balance sheet.
+
+Valuation is important because:
+
+ * The buying price may fluctuate.
+ * The value may change because of some process (value add).
+ * The value may change because of decay, loss etc.
+
+You may encounter these terms, so lets clarify:
+
+ * Rate: Rate at which the transaction takes place.
+ * Valuation Rate: Rate at which the items value is set for your valuation.
+
+There are two major ways in which ERPNext values your items.
+
+ * **FIFO (First In First Out):** In this system, ERPNext assumes that you will consume / sell those Items first which you bought first. For example, if you buy an Item at price X and then after a few days at price Y, whenever you sell your Item, ERPNext will reduce the quantity of the Item priced at X first and then Y.
+
+
+
+ * **Moving Average:** In this method, ERPNext assumes that the value of the item at any point is the average price of the units of that Item in stock. For example, if the value of an Item is X in a Warehouse with quantity Y and another quantity Y1 is added to the Warehouse at cost X1, the new value X2 would be:
+
+> New Value X2 = (X * Y + X1 * Y1) / (Y + Y1)
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-variants.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-variants.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..17bafa12
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/item-variants.md
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+
+# Item Variants
+
+### What are Variants?
+
+A Item Variant is a version of a Item, such as differing sizes or differing colours (like a _blue_ t-shirt in size _small_ rather then just a t-shirt).
+Without Item variants, you would have to treat the _small, medium_ and _large_ versions of a t-shirt as three separate Items;
+Item variants let you treat the _small, medium_ and _large_ versions of a t-shirt as variations of the one Item 't-shirt'.
+
+### Using Variants
+
+Variants can be based on two things
+
+1. Item Attributes
+1. Manufacturers
+
+### Variants Based on Item Attributes
+
+To use Item Variants in ERPNext, create an Item and check 'Has Variants'.
+
+* The Item shall then be referred to as a so called 'Template'. Such a Template is not identical to a regular 'Item' any longer. For example it (the Template) can not be used directly in any Transactions (Sales Order, Delivery Note, Purchase Invoice) itself. Only the Variants of an Item (_blue_ t-shirt in size _small)_ can be practically used in such. Therefore it would be ideal to decide whether an item 'Has Variants' or not directly when creating it.
+
+
+
+On selecting 'Has Variants' a table shall appear. Specify the variant attributes for the Item in the table.
+In case the attribute has Numeric Values, you can specify the range and increment values here.
+
+
+
+> Note: You cannot make Transactions against a 'Template'
+
+To create 'Item Variants' against a 'Template' select 'Make Variants'
+
+
+
+
+
+To learn more about setting Attributes Master check [Item Attributes]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-attribute.html)
+
+### Variants Based on Manufacturers
+
+To setup variants based on Manufactueres, in your Item template, set "Variants Based On" as "Manufacturers"
+
+
+
+When you make a new Variant, the system will prompt you to select a Manufacturer. You can also optionally put in a Manufacturer Part Number
+
+
+
+The naming of the variant will be the name (ID) of the template Item with a number suffix. e.g. "ITEM000" will have variant "ITEM000-1"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/purchase-details.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/purchase-details.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5d2d8fa3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/purchase-details.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Item Warranty
+
+To track a warranty period, it is necessary that the Item is a serialized Item. When this Item is delivered, the delivery date and the expiry period is saved in the serial number master. Through the serial number master you can track the warranty status.
+
+A warranty means a guarantee or a promise which provides assurance by one party to the other party which allows for a legal remedy if that promise is not true or followed. A warranty period is a time period in which a purchased product may be returned or exchanged.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/reorder.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/reorder.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3f393f46
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/item/reorder.md
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+
+# Re-order Level & Re-order Qty
+
+The **Re-order Level** is the point at which stock on a particular item has diminished to a point where it needs to be replenished. To order based on Re-order level can avoid shortages. Re-order level can be determined based on the lead time and the average daily consumption.
+
+You can update Re-order Level and Re-order Qty for an Item in the Auto Re-order section.
+
+For example, you can set your reorder level of Motherboard at 10. When there are only 10 Motherboards remaining in stock, the system will either automatically create a Material Request in your ERPNext account.
+
+**Re-order quantity** is the quantity to order, so that the sum of ordering cost and holding cost is at its minimum.The re-order quantity is based on the minimum order quantity specified by the supplier and many other factors.
+
+For example, If reorder level is 100 items, your reorder quantity may not necessarily be 100 items. The Reorder quantity can be greater than or equal to reorder level. It may depend upon lead time, discount, transportation and average daily consumption.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/material-request.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/material-request.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ee312df9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/material-request.md
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+
+A Material Request is a simple document identifying a requirement of a set of
+Items (products or services) for a particular reason.
+
+
+
+To generate a Material Request manually go to:
+
+> Stock > Documents > Material Request > New
+
+#### Creating Material Request
+
+
+
+A Material Request can be generated:
+
+ * Automatically from a Sales Order.
+ * Automatically when the Projected Quantity of an Item in stores reaches a particular level.
+ * Automatically from your Bill of Materials if you use Production Plan to plan your manufacturing activities.
+ * If your Items are inventory items, you must also mention the Warehouse where you expect these Items to be delivered. This helps to keep track of the [Projected Quantity]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/stock/projected-quantity.html) for this Item.
+
+A Material Request can be of type:
+
+* Purchase - If the request material is to be purchased.
+* Material Transfer - If the requested material is to be shifted from one warehouse to another.
+* Material Issue - If the requested material is to be Issued.
+* Manufacture - If the requested material is to be Produced.
+
+The User can also raise a [Request For Quotation]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/buying/request-for-quotation.html) against a Material Request. To create a Request For Quotation the user can click on 'Make'.
+
+> Info: Material Request is not mandatory. It is ideal if you have centralized
+buying so that you can collect this information from various departments.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/opening-stock.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/opening-stock.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fbeffca6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/opening-stock.md
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+
+# Opening Stock
+
+Opening Stock is the Stock quantity in the beginning of every accounting year of an organisation. The closing Stock with the prior accounting year becomes the opening Stock with the existing accounting year.
+ +Opening Stock can be done for serialized Items as well as non-serialized Items.To update opening stock for non-serialized Item, you should perform Stock Reconciliation. For serialised Item, you can make Stock Entry of type Material Receipt. + +> Stock > Stock Reconciliation > New Stock Reconciliation + +In both cases, you should enter "Difference/Expense Account" as **Temporary Opening** account. On submission of the document, system will debit Warehouse account which is an asset account and credit difference/expense account. Before making these entries, make sure you have enabled "Perpetual Inventory" by checking Stock Settings page. + +If you are not making opening Stock Entry, you can select "Stock Adjustment" account in Difference/Expense Account field which is an expense account. + +To understand Opening Stock for serialized Items visit [Stock Reconciliation]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.html) + +{next} diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/projected-quantity.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/projected-quantity.md new file mode 100644 index 00000000..80a3dca8 --- /dev/null +++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/projected-quantity.md @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ + +Projected Quantity is the level of stock that is predicted for a particular +Item, based on the current stock levels and other requirements. It is the +quantity of gross inventory that includes supply and demand in the past which +is done as part of the planning process. + +The projected inventory is used by the planning system to monitor the reorder +point and to determine the reorder quantity. The projected Quantity is used by +the planning engine to monitor the safety stock levels. These levels are +maintained to serve unexpected demands. + +Having a tight control of the projected inventory is crucial to determine +shortages and to calculate the right order quantity. + +
+
+
+> Projected Qty = Actual Qty + Planned Qty + Requested Qty + Ordered Qty -
+Reserved Qty
+
+ * Actual Qty: Quantity available in the warehouse.
+ * Planned Qty: Quantity, for which, Production Order has been raised, but is pending to be manufactured.
+ * Requested Qty: Quantity requested for purchase, but not ordered.
+ * Ordered Qty: Quantity ordered for purchase, but not received.
+ * Reserved Qty: Quantity ordered for sale, but not delivered.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/purchase-receipt.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/purchase-receipt.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f0da28da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/purchase-receipt.md
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+
+Purchase Receipts are made when you accept material from your Supplier usually
+against a Purchase Order.
+
+You can also accept Purchase Receipts directly ( Set Purchase Order
+Required as “No” in Global Defaults).
+
+You can make a Purchase Receipt directly from:
+
+> Stock > Purchase Receipt > New Purchase Receipt
+
+or from a “Submitted” Purchase Order, by clicking on “Make Purchase Receipt”.
+
+
+
+### Rejections
+
+In the Purchase Receipt, you are required to enter whether all the materials
+you receive are of acceptable quality (in case you check). If you have any
+rejections, update the “Rejected Quantity” column in the Items table.
+
+If you reject, you are required to enter a “Rejected Warehouse” to indicate
+where you are storing the rejected Items.
+
+### Quality Inspections
+
+If for certain Items, it is mandatory to record Quality Inspections (if you
+have set it in your Item master), you will need to update the “Quality
+Inspection No” (QA No) column. The system will only allow you to “Submit” the
+Purchase Receipt if you update the “Quality Inspection No”.
+
+### UOM Conversions
+
+If your Purchase Order for an Item is in a different Unit of Measure (UOM)
+than what you stock (Stock UOM), then you will need to update the “UOM
+Conversion Factor”.
+
+### Currency Conversions
+
+Since the incoming Item affects the value of your inventory, it is important
+to convert it into your base Currency, if you have ordered in another
+Currency. You will need to update the Currency Conversion Rate if applicable.
+
+### Taxes and Valuation
+
+Some of your taxes and charges may affect your Items value. For example, a Tax
+may not be added to your Item’s valuation, because if you sell the Item, you
+will have to add the tax at that time. So make sure to mark all your taxes in
+the Taxes and Charges table correctly for accurate valuation.
+
+### Serial Numbers and Batches
+
+If your Item is serialized or batched, you will have to enter Serial Number
+and Batch in the Item's table. You are allowed to enter multiple Serial Numbers
+in one row (each on a separate line) and you must enter the same number of
+Serial Numbers as the quantity. You must enter each Batch number on a separate
+line.
+
+* * *
+
+#### What happens when the Purchase Receipt is “Submitted”?
+
+A Stock Ledger Entry is created for each Item adding the Item in the Warehouse
+by the “Accepted Quantity” If you have rejections, a Stock Ledger Entry is
+made for each Rejection. The “Pending Quantity” is updated in the Purchase
+Order.
+
+* * *
+
+#### Adding value to your Items post Purchase Receipt:
+
+Some times, certain expenses that add value to your purchased Items are known
+only after a while. Common example is, if you are importing the Items, you
+will come to know of Customs Duty etc only when your “Clearing Agent” sends
+you a bill. If you want to attribute this cost to your purchased Items, you
+will have to use the Landed Cost Wizard. Why “Landed Cost”? Because it
+represents the charges that you paid when it landed in your possession.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/purchase-return.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/purchase-return.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..821b8360
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/purchase-return.md
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+ERPNext has an option for products that are need to be returned to the
+supplier. This may be on account of a number of reasons like defects in goods,
+quality not matching, the buyer not needing the stock, etc.
+
+You can create a Purchase Return by simply making a Purchase Receipt with negative quantity.
+
+First open the original Purchase Receipt, against which supplier delivered the items.
+
+
+
+Then click on "Make Purchase Return", it will open a new Purchase Receipt with "Is Return" checked, items and taxes with negative amount.
+
+
+
+On submission of Return Purchase Return, system will decrease item qty from the mentioned warehouse. To maintain correct stock valuation, stock balance will also go up according to the original purchase rate of the returned items.
+
+
+
+If Perpetual Inventory enabled, system will also post accounting entry against warehouse account to sync warehouse account balance with stock balance as per Stock Ledger.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/sales-return.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/sales-return.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..aabfc451
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/sales-return.md
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+
+Goods sold being returned is quite a common practice in business. They could
+be returned by the customer on quality issues, non-delivery on agreed date, or
+any other reason.
+
+In ERPNext, you can create a Sales Return by simply making a Delivery Note / Sales Invoice with negative quantity.
+
+First open the original Delivery Note / Sales Invoice, against which customer returned the items.
+
+
+
+Then click on "Make Sales Return", it will open a new Delivery Note with "Is Return" checked, items and taxes with negative amount.
+
+
+
+You can also create the return entry against original Sales Invoice, to return stock along with credit note, check "Update Stock" option in Return Sales Invoice.
+
+
+
+On submission of Return Delivery Note / Sales Invoice, system will increase stock balance in the mentioned warehouse. To maintain correct stock valuation, stock balance will go up according to the original purchase rate of the returned items.
+
+
+
+In case of Return Sales Invoice, Customer account will be credited and associated income and tax account will be debited.
+
+If Perpetual Inventory enabled, system will also post accounting entry against warehouse account to sync warehouse account balance with stock balance as per Stock Ledger.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/serial-no.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/serial-no.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ca074f25
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/serial-no.md
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+
+As we discussed in the **Item** section, if an **Item** is _serialized_, a
+**Serial Number** (Serial No) record is maintained for each quantity of that
+**Item**. This information is helpful in tracking the location of the Serial
+No, its warranty and end-of-life (expiry) information.
+
+**Serial Nos** are also useful to maintain fixed assets. **Maintenance Schedules** can also be created against serial numbers for planning and scheduling maintenance activity for these assets (if they require maintenance).
+
+You can also track from which **Supplier** you purchased the **Serial No** and
+to which **Customer** you have sold it. The **Serial No** status will tell you
+its current inventory status.
+
+If your Item is _serialized_ you will have to enter the Serial Nos in the
+related column with each Serial No in a new line.
+You can maintain single units of serialized items using Serial Number.
+
+### Serial Nos and Inventory
+
+Inventory of an Item can only be affected if the Serial No is transacted via a
+Stock transaction (Stock Entry, Purchase Receipt, Delivery Note, Sales
+Invoice). When a new Serial No is created directly, its warehouse cannot be
+set.
+
+
+
+* The Status is set based on Stock Entry.
+
+* Only Serial Numbers with status 'Available' can be delivered.
+
+* Serial Nos can automatically be created from a Stock Entry or Purchase Receipt. If you mention Serial No in the Serial Nos column, it will automatically create those serial Nos.
+
+* If in the Item Master, the Serial No Series is mentioned, you can leave the Serial No column blank in a Stock Entry / Purchase Receipt and Serial Nos will automatically be set from that series.
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..43874704
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b21c4f92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+stock-settings
+item-group
+item-attribute
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-attribute.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-attribute.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..16c3da43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-attribute.md
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+
+You can define Attributes and attribute values for your Item Variants here.
+
+
+
+#### Non Numeric Attributes
+
+* For Non Numeric Attributes, specify attributes values along with its abbreviation in the Attribute Value Table.
+
+
+
+#### Numeric Attributes
+
+* If your attribute is Numeric, select Numeric Values
+* Specify the Range and the Increment Value
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-group.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-group.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..403bc8e5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/item-group.md
@@ -0,0 +1,27 @@
+
+Item Group is the classification category. Depending on the type of product,
+categorise it under its respective field. If the product is
+service oriented, name it under the group head - service. If the
+product is used as a raw-material, you have to name it under the Raw-material
+category. In case, your product is used only in trading, you can categorise it
+under Trading.
+
+
+
+### Create a Item Group
+
+* Select an Item Group under which you wish to create the group.
+
+* Select 'Add Child'
+
+
+
+### Delete an Item Group
+
+* Select the Item Group you want to delete.
+
+* Select 'delete'
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/stock-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/stock-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..aca488e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/setup/stock-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+
+You can set default settings for your stock related transactions here.
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/stock-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/stock-entry.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..99e8dc6e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/stock-entry.md
@@ -0,0 +1,44 @@
+
+A Stock Entry is a simple document that lets you record Item movement from a
+Warehouse, to a Warehouse and between Warehouses.
+
+To make a Stock Entry you have to go to:
+
+> Stock > Stock Entry > New
+
+
+
+Stock Entries can be made for the following purposes:
+
+* Material Issue - If the material is being issued. (Outgoing Material)
+* Material Receipt - If the material is being received. (Incoming Material)
+* Material Transfer - If the material is being moved from one warehouse to another.
+* Material Transfer for Manufacturing - If the material being transfered is for Manufacturing Process.
+* Manufacture - If the Material is being received from a Manufacturing/Production Operation.
+* Repack - If the Original item/items is being repacked into new item/items.
+* Subcontract - If the Material is being issued for a sub-contract activity.
+
+In the Stock Entry you have to update the Items table with all your
+transactions. For each row, you must enter a “Source Warehouse” or a “Target
+Warehouse” or both (if you are recording a movement).
+
+**Additional Costs:**
+
+If the stock entry is an incoming entry i.e any item is receiving at a target warehouse, you can add related additional costs (like Shipping Charges, Customs Duty, Operating Costs etc) associated with the process. The additional costs will be considered to calculate valuation rate of the items.
+
+To add additional costs, enter the description and amount of the cost in the Additional Costs table.
+
+
+
+The added additional costs will be distributed among the receiving items (where the target warehouse mentioned) proportionately based on Basic Amount of the items. And the distributed additional cost will be added to the basic rate of the item, to calculate valuation rate.
+
+
+
+If perpetual inventory system is enabled, additional costs will be booked in "Expense Included In Valuation" account.
+
+
+
+
+> **Note:** To update Stock from a spreadsheet, see [Stock Reconciliation]({{doc_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/stock-reconciliation-for-non-serialized-item.html).
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/stock-how-to.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/stock-how-to.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..669d6ad9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/stock-how-to.md
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+
+This page contains most frequently asked questions on Stocks.
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..43874704
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3aca9b75
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+packing-slip
+quality-inspection
+landed-cost-voucher
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/landed-cost-voucher.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/landed-cost-voucher.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..cfc643b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/landed-cost-voucher.md
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+
+Landed Cost is the total cost of a product to reach the product at the buyer’s door. Landed costs include the original cost of the item, complete shipping costs, customs duties, taxes, insurance and currency conversion fees etc. All of these components might not be applicable in every shipment, but relevant components must be considered as a part of the landed cost.
+
+> To understand landed cost better, let’s take an example based on our daily lives. You need to purchase a new washing machine for your home. Before making actual purchase, you probably do some investigation to know the best price. In this process, you often found a better deal from a store which is long away from your home. But you should also consider shipping cost while buying from that store. Total cost including transportation might be more than the price you get in your nearby store. In that case you will choose to buy from your nearest store, as landed cost of the item is cheaper in the nearest store.
+
+Similarly in business, identifying landed cost for a item / product is very crucial, as it helps to decide selling cost of that item and impacts company’s profitability. Hence all applicable landed cost charges should be included in item’s valuation rate.
+
+According to the [Third-Party Logistics Study](http://www.3plstudy.com/), only 45% of the respondents stated that they use Landed Cost extensively. The main reasons of not using Landed Cost are unavailability of necessary data (49%), lack of right tools (48%), do not have sufficient time (31%) and not sure how to apply landed cost (27%).
+
+### Landed Cost via Purchase Receipt
+
+In ERPNext, you can add landed cost related charges in “Taxes and Charges” table while creating Purchase Receipt (PR). You should add those charges for “Total and Valuation” or “Valuation”. Charges which are payable to the same supplier from whom you are buying the items, should be tagged as “Total and Valuation”. Otherwise if applicable charges are payable to a 3rd party, it should be tagged as “Valuation”. On submission of PR, system will calculate landed cost of all items, considering those charges and that landed cost will be considered to calculate item’s valuation rate (based on FIFO / Moving Average method).
+
+But in reality, while making Purchase Receipt we might not know all the charges which are applicable for landed cost. Your transporter can send the invoice after 1 month, but there is no point in waiting for booking Purchase Receipt till then. Companies who imports their products / parts, pays a huge amount as Customs Duty. And generally they get invoices from Customs Department after a period of time. In these cases, “Landed Cost Voucher” becomes handy, as it allows you to add those additional charges on a later date, and to update landed cost of purchased items.
+
+### Landed Cost Voucher
+
+You can update landed cost any time in the future via Landed Cost Voucher.
+
+> Stock > Tools > Landed Cost Voucher
+
+In the document, you can select multiple Purchase Receipts and fetch all items from those Purchase Receipts. Then you should add applicable charges in “Taxes and Charges” table. You can easily delete an item if the added charges is not applicable to that item. The added charges are proportionately distributed among all the items based their amount.
+
+
+
+### What happend on submission?
+
+1. On submission of Landed Cost Voucher, the applicable landed cost charges are updated in Purchase Receipt Item table.
+
+2. Valuation Rate of items are recalculated based on new landed cost.
+
+3. If you are using “Perpetual Inventory”, the system will post general ledger entries to correct Stock-in-Hand balance. It will debit (increase) corresponding “warehouse account” and credit (decrease) “Expense Included in Valuation” account. If items are already delivered, the Cost-of-Goods-Sold (CoGS) value has been booked as per old valuation rate. Hence, general ledger entries are reposted for all future outgoing entries of associated items, to correct CoGS value.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/packing-slip.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/packing-slip.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..03f5150e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/packing-slip.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+A packing slip is a document listing the items in a shipment. Usually attached to the goods delivered.
+While Shipping a product 'Draft' for Delivery Notes are created.
+You can make a Packing Slip from these Delivery Notes (Draft)
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/quality-inspection.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/quality-inspection.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9a1c3efd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/tools/quality-inspection.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+In ERPNext, you can mark your incoming or outgoing products for Quality
+Inspection. To enable ERPNext to perform this function, go to :
+
+> Stock > Quality Inspection > New
+
+
+
+{next}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/warehouse.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/warehouse.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e02674fe
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/stock/warehouse.md
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+
+A warehouse is a commercial building for storage of goods. Warehouses are used
+by manufacturers, importers, exporters, wholesalers, transport businesses,
+customs, etc. They are usually large plain buildings in industrial areas of
+cities, towns, and villages. They mostly have loading docks to load and unload
+goods from trucks.
+
+The terminology of 'Warehouse" in ERPNext is a bit broader though and maybe can be
+regarded as "storage locations". For example you can create a sub-Warehouse which
+practically is a shelf inside your actual location.
+This can become quite a detailed Tree like >Warehouse >Room >Row >Shelf >Box
+
+To go to Warehouse, click on Stock and go to Warehouse under Setup. You
+could also switch to 'Tree' View or simply type warehouse tree in the awsone bar.
+
+
+
+In ERPNext, every Warehouse must belong to a specific company, to maintain
+company wise stock balance. In order to do so each Warehouse is linked with an
+Account in the Chart of Accounts (by default of the the same name as the Warehouse
+itself) which captures the monetary equivalent of the goods or materials stored
+in that specific warehouse. If you have a more detailed Warehouse Tree as the one
+described above most likely it's a good idea to link the sub-locations (>room >row >Shelf, ...)
+to the account of the actual Warehouse (the root Warehouse of that Tree) as most
+scenarios do not require to account for value of stock items per Shelf or Box.
+
+Warehouses are saved with their respective company’s abbreviations. This facilitates
+identifying which Warehouse belongs to which company, at a glance.
+
+You can include user restrictions for these Warehouses. In case you do not
+wish a particular user to operate on a particular Warehouse, you can refrain
+the user from accessing that Warehouse.
+
+> Note: ERPNext system maintains stock balance for every distinct combination
+of Item and Warehouse. Thus you can get stock balance for any specific Item in
+a particular Warehouse on any particular date.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6ceab230
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+
+Great customer support and maintenance is at the heart of any successful small
+business. ERPNext gives you the tools to track all incoming requests and issues
+from your customers so that you can respond quickly. Your database of incoming
+queries will also help you track where the biggest opportunities are for
+improvements.
+
+In this module, you can track incoming queries from your email using Support
+Ticket. You can keep track on Customer Issues raised by Customers on specific
+Serial No and respond to them based on their warranty and other information.
+You can also make Maintenance Schedules for Serial Nos and keep a record of
+all Maintenance Visits made to your Customers.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..eaff69e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+issue
+warranty-claim
+maintenance-visit
+maintenance-schedule
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/issue.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/issue.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..24515e99
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/issue.md
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+
+Issue is an incoming query from your Customer, usually via email or
+from the “Contact” section of your website. (To fully integrate the Support
+Ticket to email, see the Email Settings section).
+
+> Tip: A dedicated support Email Address is a good way to integrate incoming
+queries via email. For example, you can send support queries to ERPNext at
+support@erpnext.com and it will automatically create a Issue in the
+Frappe system.
+
+
+
+> Support > Issue > New Issue
+
+
+
+#### Discussion Thread
+
+When a new email is fetched from your mailbox, a new Issue record is
+created and an automatic reply is sent to the sender indicating the Support
+Ticket Number. The sender can send additional information to this email. All
+subsequent emails containing this Issue number in the subject will be
+added to this Issue thread. The sender can also add attachments to
+the email.
+
+Issue maintains all the emails which are sent back and forth against
+this issue in the system so that you can track what transpired between the
+sender and the person responding.
+
+#### Status
+
+When a new Issue is created, its status is “Open”, when it is
+replied, its status becomes “Waiting for Reply”. If the sender replies back
+its status again becomes “Open”.
+
+#### Closing
+
+You can either “Close” the Issue manually by clicking on “Close
+Ticket” in the toolbar or if its status is “Waiting For Reply” . If the sender
+does not reply in 7 days, then the Issue closes automatically.
+
+#### Allocation
+
+You can allocate the Issue by using the “Assign To” feature in the
+right sidebar. This will add a new To Do to the user and also send a message
+indicating that this Issue is allocated.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/maintenance-schedule.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/maintenance-schedule.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d7190384
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/maintenance-schedule.md
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+
+All machines require regular maintenance, specially those that contain a lot
+of moving parts, so if you are in the business of maintaining those or have
+some of them in your own premises, this is a useful tool to plan a calendar of
+activities for its maintenance.
+
+If the Customer Issue refers to “Breakdown Maintenance”, this refers to
+“Preventive Maintenance”.
+
+To create a new Maintenance Schedule go to:
+
+> Support > Maintenance Schedule > New Maintenance Schedule
+
+
+
+In the Maintenance Schedule, there are two sections:
+
+In the first section, you select the Items for which you want to generate the
+schedule and set how frequently you want to plan a visit or a maintenance.
+These can be optionally fetched from a Sales Order. After selecting the Items,
+“Save” the record.
+
+The second section contains the maintenance activities planned in the
+schedule. “Generate Schedule” will generate a separate row for each
+maintenance activity.
+
+Each Item in a Maintenance Schedule is allocated to a Sales Person.
+
+When the document is “Submitted” Calendar events are created in the User of
+the Sales Person for each maintenance.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/maintenance-visit.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/maintenance-visit.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bb3e510c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/maintenance-visit.md
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+
+A Maintenance Visit is a record of a visit made by an engineer to a
+Customer’s premise usually against a Customer Issue. You can create a new
+Maintenance Visit from:
+
+> Support > Maintenance Visit > New Maintenance Visit
+
+
+
+The Maintenance Visit contains information about the:
+
+ * Customer.
+ * The Items that were inspected / maintenance activity was carried out on.
+ * Details of actions taken.
+ * The person who carried out the actions.
+ * Feedback from the Customer.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/support_reports.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/support_reports.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a2bee34d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/support_reports.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+
+
+### Support Hours
+This report provide the information about the time slot along with the count of issues has been reported during the slot daywise.
+
+> Support > Reports > Support Hours
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/warranty-claim.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/warranty-claim.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..676a95eb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/support/warranty-claim.md
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+
+If you are selling **Items** under warranty or if you have sold and extended
+service contract like the Annual Maintenance Contract (AMC), your **Customer**
+may call you about an issue or a break-down and give you the Serial No of this
+Item.
+
+To record this, you can create a new **Warranty Claim** and add the
+**Customer** and **Item** / **Serial No**. The system will then automatically
+fetch the Serial No’s details and indicate whether this is under warranty or
+AMC.
+
+You must also add a description of the **Customer**’s issue and assign it to
+the person who needs to look into solving the issue.
+
+To create a new **Warranty Claim**:
+
+> Support > Warranty Claim > New Warranty Claim
+
+
+
+If a Customer visit is required to address the issue, you can create a new
+Maintenance Visit record from this.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/Global-search.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/Global-search.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fb7f7d16
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/Global-search.md
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+
+Global-search.md
+
+
+Global search is a word-processing operation in which a complete computer file or set of files is searched for every occurrence of a particular word or other sequence of characters.
+
+We have made the Awesome Bar of ERPNext lot more powerful by adding Global Search feature.
+Global Search helps users find information quickly. It’s located in the upper right-hand corner in ERPNext. Simply entering a few characters in the Search will show results from several different record types (Contact, Customer, Issues etc.) related to that keyword. You can also customise the fields based on which search will be shown.
+
+### Using Awesome bar for Global Search.
+
+
+
+### Enable Global Search for fields in a Doctype.
+
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/adding-attachments-to-outgoing-messages.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/adding-attachments-to-outgoing-messages.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..17cfa330
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/adding-attachments-to-outgoing-messages.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+#Adding Attachments to Outgoing Messages
+
+ERPNext has in-built file manager. Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/videos/learn/file-manager.html) to learn more on how attachments are managed in ERPNext.
+
+If you have file attached to the document (say Purchase Order), and same file needs to be emailed as attachment, following is how you can achieve it.
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/adding-file-as-a-attachment.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/adding-file-as-a-attachment.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3b3922d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/adding-file-as-a-attachment.md
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+
+#Adding File as a Attachment
+
+ERPNext allows to attach files with documents. User with a read permission on particular document will also be able to access files attached with it.
+
+###Attach New File
+
+There are several ways to attach file to the document.
+
+####From Browser
+
+
+
+####By drag and drop
+
+
+
+Click on Attach to browse and select the file.
+
+####Link
+
+If you use separate server for files, or use online service like Dropbox, you can attach file by providing link of a particular file.
+
+
+
+`For hosted users, limit of 5 MB is applied on file size.`
+
+To ensure there are not many files attached to a document, which can affect your accounts performance, you can set limit as how many files can be attached to a particular document. Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/customize-erpnext/articles/increase-max-attachments.html) to learn more about it.
+
+####File Manager
+
+Check following link to learn how files are managed in ERPNext.
+
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/bulk-rename.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/bulk-rename.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..609da8b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/bulk-rename.md
@@ -0,0 +1,28 @@
+
+#Bulk Rename
+
+Using renaming tool, you can to rectify/change multiple document ids at once. This tool is only accessible to the User who has System Manager role assigned.
+
+###Rename Tool
+
+You can rename ids of upto 500 records at a time. Following are step to bulk rename bulk records. Let's assume we are renaming Item Codes for the existing items.
+
+#### Step 1: Open Excel File
+
+In a spreadsheet file, enter old Item IDs in the first column, and new Item Ids in the second column. Save spreadsheet file in a CSV format.
+
+
+
+#### Step 2: Upload Data File
+
+To upload data file go to,
+
+`Setup > Data > Rename Tool`
+
+Select DocType which you want to rename. Here DocType will be Item. Then Browse and Upload data file.
+
+
+
+{next}
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/check-link-between-documents.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/check-link-between-documents.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b242a363
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/check-link-between-documents.md
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+
+#Checking Link Between Documents
+
+Links option shows one document is linked to which other documents. Check Menu for the Links options.
+
+
+
+####Scenario
+
+If you need that against Sales Order, which Delivery Note and Sales Invoice has been created, you should open Sales Order document, and check Links. Same way, you can also check Purchase Order, and find which Purchase Receipt and Purchase Ivoice is linked with it.
+
+####How It Works?
+
+When you check Links for a Sales Order, it lists all the record where this Sales Order ID is linked. When Delivery Note is created against Sales Order, then Sales Order link is updated in the Delivery Note Item table.
+
+####Backward Links
+
+If I check Links in the Purchase Receipt, will it list Purchase Order from which this Purchase Receipt was created?
+
+Links only shows forward linkages. For the backward links, you should check current document itself. In the Purchase Receipt Item table table, you can check which Purchase Order it is linked to.
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/delete-submitted-document.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/delete-submitted-document.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ae52b886
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/delete-submitted-document.md
@@ -0,0 +1,30 @@
+
+#Delete Submitted Document
+
+To be able to delete Submitted document, you should first Cancel. Once canceled, you can delete that document from Menu or from the List View of that Document Type.
+
+If document which needs to be deleted is also linked to other documents, then you should first Cancel document those document as well. For example if you need to delete Sales Order, but Delivery Note and Sales Invoice has already been created against it. Then you should first cancel and delete documents in reverse order, i.e. Sales Invoice, Delivery Note and then Sales Order.
+
+Delete option is only visible to user having related permission. From Role Permission Manager, you can control and define Delete permission and Role for each Document Type.
+
+Following are step to delete submitted documents.
+
+####Step 1: Cancel Document
+
+You will find option to Cancel in the submitted document. If document is at draft stage, it can delete directly. Also if document is not submittable, but only save, it can be deleted directly.
+
+
+
+####Step 2: Delete Document
+
+After cancellation, go to Menu and click on Delete.
+
+
+
+####Step 3: Deleting from List
+
+For bulk deletion, you can select multiple Cancelled records and delete at once from the List View.
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/duplicate-record.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/duplicate-record.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5bc89ea3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/duplicate-record.md
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+
+#Duplicate a Record
+
+Duplicate feature helps you to copy values of existing document into new document.
+
+####Scenario
+
+An electronic supplier receives a repeat order from an existing customer. Since new order will have details just like previous order, you should open previous order, and Duplciate it to create new order faster. On Duplicating, values of the previous transaction will be updated in a new document. You can make changes where needed and submit the document.
+
+You will find Copy option under:
+
+`Menu > Copy`
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..be943bcc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4ca21aa9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+adding-attachment-to-outgoing-messages
+check-link-between-documents
+delete-submitted-document
+duplicate-record
+adding-file-as-a-attachment
+merging-documents
+bulk-rename
+renaming-documents
+search-filter
+tree-master-renaming
+pos-view
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/merging-documents.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/merging-documents.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..807954c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/merging-documents.md
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+
+#Merging Documents
+
+For a document, if you have two records which are identical, and meant for common purpose, you can merge them into one record.
+
+Following are step to merge documents. Let's assume we are merging two Accounts.
+
+#### Step 1: Go to Chart of Account
+
+`Accounts > Documents > Chart of Accounts`
+
+#### Step 2: Go to Account
+
+For an Account to be merged, click on the "Rename" option.
+
+
+
+#### Step 3: Merge Account
+
+In the New Name field, enter another account name with which this account will be merged. Check "Merge with existing" option. Then press 'Rename' button to merge.
+
+Following is how the merged account will appear in the Chart of Accounts master.
+
+
+
+###Effect of Merging
+
+After Account is merged, new name is updated in the existing transactions where old account was selected.
+
+ Note: Group Account cannot be merged into Child Account and vice versa.
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/pos-view.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/pos-view.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..162bf2d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/pos-view.md
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+
+#POS View
+
+POS (point of sale) view renders form in a different layout, optimized for the quick selection of items. This view has primarily been designed for the retail business.
+
+Using POS View, you can only create Sales Invoice, without switching to standard form view. For other transactions, like Sales Order, Delivery Note, Purchase Order, Purchase Receipt etc., POS View is only used for Item selection. For entering other values in the transaction, you should switch to form view.
+
+
+
+For creating POS Invoice, check following help video.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/renaming-documents.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/renaming-documents.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3bd867c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/renaming-documents.md
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+
+#Renaming a Document
+
+Using Renaming feature, you can change ID of a master documents like Item, Warehouse, Accounts etc. Following are the steps to rename Item Code. Following same steps, you can rename other masters as well.
+
+#### 1. Go to Item
+
+`Stock > Documents > Item List > (Open Item to be renamed)`
+
+#### 2. Rename
+
+
+
+###Effect of Renaming
+
+Renaming document affects existing transaction where this record is selected. Consider given example, Item Code for a given item will be updated in the existing transaction as well.
+
+###See Also
+
+1. [Bulk Renaming]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/bulk-rename.html)
+2. [Document Merging]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/merging-documents.html)
+
+**List of Renamable Documents**
+
+1. Contact
+2. Address
+3. Warehouse
+4. Supplier
+5. Customer
+6. User
+7. Sales Partner
+8. Project
+9. Cost Center
+10. Item Group
+11. Item
+12. Company
+13. Role
+14. Earning Type
+15. Note
+16. Serial No
+17. Account
+18. Territory
+19. Terms and Conditions
+20. Supplier Type
+21. Workstation
+22. Employee
+23. Sales Taxes and Charges Master
+24. Purchase Taxes and Charges Master
+25. Price List
+26. Party Type
+27. Mode of Payment
+28. Designation
+29. Department
+30. Deduction Type
+31. Customer Group
+32. Brand
+33. Branch
+34. Sales Person
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/search-filter.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/search-filter.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..20bd6bd2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/search-filter.md
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+
+#Search Filter
+
+Search Filter option allow user to filter records based on value in the specific field of that document. Search Filters are available on the List View of Document Type and in the Report Builder.
+
+Each filter option has three fields.
+
+#### Field
+
+Select field of the document based on which you wish to filter records.
+
+
+
+
+#### Based On
+
+With Field, you will provide a value. In the based on field, you can define a criterion that when filter should be applied in record. It will be when value define for the field if filter is:
+
+
+
+#### Value
+
+A value should be entered in this field based on while records will be filtered. After filter is applied, records will be filtered based on it. And filter will shrunk under one field/button.
+
+
+
+
+You can apply multiple filters at a time. To remove specific filter, just click on cancelled (X) sign ahead of it.
+
+#### Ready Filters
+
+From the list views, you can also apply filters by clicking on the Status field.
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/tree-master-renaming.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/tree-master-renaming.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..874849c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/articles/tree-master-renaming.md
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+
+#Tree Master Renaming
+
+There are various master which are maintained in tree structure. Click [here]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/setting-up/articles/managing-tree-structure-masters.html) to learn more about tree structured masters in ERPNext.
+
+Following are the steps to be followed for renaming ID of a master which is maintained in tree structure. Let's rename an Account for the instance.
+
+#### Step 1: Go to Chart of Account
+
+`Accounts > Setup > Chart of Accounts`
+
+#### Step 2: Go to Account
+
+When click on the Account, you will find Rename option.
+
+
+
+#### Step 2: Rename Account
+
+On clicking Rename, you will get field to enter New Name. After entering new name for the Account, click on the "Rename" button.
+
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/assignment.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/assignment.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a871142b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/assignment.md
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+
+Assign To feature in ERPNext allows you to allocate particular document to specific user, whom needs to further work on that document.
+
+For example, if Sales Order needs to be approved/submitted by Sales Manager, first draft user can allocate that Sales Order to Sales Manager. On allocating document to Sales Manager, it will be added to that user's ToDo list. Same way, allocation can also be done to Material User and Account user who needs to create Delivery Note and Sales Invoice respectively against this Sales Note.
+
+Permissions restriction cannot be done based on Assigned To.
+
+Following are the steps to assign document to another user.
+
+#### Step 1: Click on the Assign To Button
+
+Assign to option is located at the footer of document. Clicking on Assignment Icon on the tool bar will fast-forward you to footer of same document.
+
+
+
+#### Step 2: Assign to User
+
+In the Assign To section, you will find option to select User to whom this document will be assigned to. You can assign one document to multiple people at a time.
+
+
+
+With assignment, you can also leave a comment for the review of assignee.
+
+####ToDo List of Assignee
+
+This transaction will appear in the To-do list of the user in “Todo” section.
+
+
+
+####Removing Assignment
+
+User will be able to remove assignment by clicking on "Assignment Completed" button in the document.
+
+
+
+Once assignment is set as completed, the Status of its ToDo record will be set as Closed.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/calendar.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/calendar.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..575a6449
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/calendar.md
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+
+The Calendar is a tool where you can create and share Events and also see auto-generated events from the system.
+
+You can switch calendar view based on Month, Week and Day.
+
+
+
+### Creating Events in Calendar
+
+#### Creating Event Manually
+
+To create event manually, you should first determine Calendar View. If Event's start and end time will be within one day, then you should first switch to Day view.
+
+This view will 24 hours of a day broken in various slots. You should click on slot for Event Start Time, and drag it down till you reach event end time.
+
+
+
+Based on the selection of time slot, Start Time and End Time will be updated in the Event master. Then you can set subject for an event, and save it.
+
+#### Event Based on Lead
+
+In the Lead form, you will find a field called Next Contact By and Next Contact Date. Event will be auto created for date and person specified in this field.
+
+
+
+#### Birthday Event
+
+Birthday Event is created based on Date of Birth specified in the Employee master.
+
+### Recurring Events
+
+You can set events as recurring in specific interval by Checking the "Repeat This
+Event".
+
+
+
+### Event Reminders
+
+There are two ways you can receive email reminder for an event.
+
+#### Enable Reminder in Event
+
+In the Event master, checking "Send an email reminder in the morning" will trigger notification email to all the participants for this event.
+
+
+
+#### Create Email Digest
+
+To get email reminders for event, you should set Email Digest for Calendar Events.
+
+Email Digest can be set from:
+
+`Setup > Email > Email Digest`
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/chat.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/chat.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8ce1de88
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/chat.md
@@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
+
+You can send and receive messages from the system by using the Messages tool.
+
+`Explore > Tools > Chat`
+
+If you send a message to a user, and the user is logged in, it will appear as a popup message and the unread messages counter in the top toolbar will be
+updated.
+
+
+
+You can choose to send message to all the users, or to specific user.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/collaborating-around-forms.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/collaborating-around-forms.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5a1ba499
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/collaborating-around-forms.md
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+
+Following are the tools in each document using which you can collaborate with other Users in your ERPNext account.
+
+### Assigned to
+
+If some document requires an action from User, you can Assign that document to that User. On assignment, User to whom document is assigned is intimated via email. To learn about Assign To feature, [click here.]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/assignment.html)
+
+### Comments
+
+Comments are a great way to add information about a transaction that is not a
+part of the transactions. Like some background information etc.
+
+
+
+###Share
+
+You can share document with the specific User. If Document is shared with the specific User, he/she will be able to access it, even if that User doesn't have permission to access that document or Document Type.
+
+
+
+### Tags
+
+[Read more about Tags]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/tags.html)
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/document-versioning.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/document-versioning.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..927d1aa0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/document-versioning.md
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+
+#Document Versioning
+
+The document versioning feature allows you to track all the changes made in the form over the period. It will be very helpful in audit trial to check which user edited what value, and when exactly.
+
+####Enable Document Versioning
+
+Document Versioning can be enabled for one Document Type as a time. Let's assume that we need to enable it from Purchase Order. Then, we will check Customize Form tool for Purchase Order and check field `Track Changes`. With this, document versioning will be enabled for all the Purchase Orders create and edited hence forth.
+
+
+
+####Version Log
+
+Following is link of version in a Purchase Order form. Each time a document is edited, a version's link will be added in that document. To check more details on specific version, click on it's link.
+
+
+
+####Version Details
+
+In the Version document, you will find log of all the fields and values changes in it.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..41c0afd5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,16 @@
+
+We live in an era when people are very comfortable communicating, discussing,
+asking, assigning work and getting feedback electronically. The Internet acts
+as a great medium to collaborate on work too. Taking this concept into ERP
+system, we have designed a bunch of tools whereby you can Assign transactions,
+manage your To Dos, share and maintain a Calendar, maintain a company wise
+Knowledge Base, Tag and Comment on transactions and send your Orders, Invoices
+etc via Email. You can also send instant messages to other users using the
+Messaging tool.
+
+These tools are integrated into all aspects of the product so that you can
+effectively manage your data and collaborate with your co-workers.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..66bfc1ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+to-do
+restore-deleted-docs
+document-versioning
+collaborating-around-forms
+chat
+notes
+calendar
+assignment
+tags
+articles
+pos-view
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/notes.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/notes.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..683c947a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/notes.md
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+
+You can store your long notes under this section. It can contain your partner lists, frequently used passwords, terms and conditions, or any other document which needs to be shared. Following are the steps to create new Note.
+
+`Explore > Note > New`
+
+####Notes Details
+
+Enter Title and Context.
+
+
+
+####Set Permissions to select Users
+
+To make Note accessible for all, check "Public" under links section. Else you can share it with the specific User by using Share feature.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/restore-deleted-docs.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/restore-deleted-docs.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..062f73e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/restore-deleted-docs.md
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+
+#Restore Deleted Documents
+
+In ERPNext, you can delete a records if not needed. They can be masters like Items, Customer or transactions like Sales Order, Payment Entries etc.
+
+
+
+If you have deleted an entry by mistake and wish to restore it back into your ERPNext account.
+
+> Only User having System Manager role assigned can restore deleted documents.
+
+Steps below to restore a deleted document.
+
+####Step 1: Go to Deleted Documents
+
+For the list of deleted document, just type Deleted Document in the Search Bar and go to list.
+
+
+
+####Step 2: Open Doc and Restore
+
+Open the document to be restored from the list. Click on Restore button.
+
+
+
+####Step 3: Restored
+
+Once a document is restored, you will be able to use it for creating entries in your ERPNext account.
+
+
+
+> If canceled document is deleted, then it will not be restored.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/tags.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/tags.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..61570f6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/tags.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+Like Assignments and Comments, you can also add your own tags to each type of transactions. These tags can help you search a document and also classify it.
+
+
+
+ERPNext will also show you all the important tags in the document list.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/to-do.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/to-do.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e77ab5c4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/to-do.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+To Do is a simple tool where all the activities [assigned]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/using-erpnext/assignments.html) to you and assigned by you are listed. You can also add your own to-do items in the list.
+
+
+
+When task is completed, you should simply remove assignment from the assigned document. With this, task will be removed from your Todo list as well. For Todo which are not assigned via document, you can set their status as Closed from the Todo master itself.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/add-products-to-website.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/add-products-to-website.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..06aabd2c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/add-products-to-website.md
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+
+### Add Products to the Website
+
+ERPNext will populate your website with products out of your Item Master. The html code will be
+generated automatically.
+
+#### Step 1: Edit Item
+
+For this example we will add a rocking chair to our catalog to sell on our website.
+
+To edit a catalog item go to: `Stock > Items and Pricing > Item`. From there select an item to add to website or create a new item by clicking the **New** button in the upper right.
+
+For this example, click on the **New** button to create a new item. Fill in the form and then click **Save**.
+
+
+
+#### Step 2: Save Image
+
+1. Click the new item from the list to edit it.
+1. In the upper left, click the image block to give the product a picture. Be sure to uncheck the **Private** box so the image will be publicly viewable.
+
+
+
+#### Step 3: Check the 'Show in Website' box
+
+Under the Website section near the bottom of the form, check the box that says **Show in Website**. Once the box is checked, the page will display other fields for entering information.
+
+* Give the page a route on the website.
+
+
+
+#### Step 4: Enter Website Details
+
+Once the `Show in Website` checkbox is checked, a new section called **Website Specifications** appears. Expand this section to add more details about the rocking chair to the website.
+
+
+
+Click **Save** in the upper right and then click `See on Website` on the left under the product image to see the item on your website.
+
+
+
+### Item Groups
+
+Items can be grouped together in items groups. To see a listing of the existing item groups to go: `Stock > Items and Pricing > Item Group`. Out of the box, ERPNext comes with a collection of item groups that you can use. Click `Products` to select it and then click `Edit` to open it up.
+
+* Click the **Show in Website** check box.
+* Change the route to `products`.
+* Fill in a description for your products page.
+* Click **Save**.
+
+
+
+* Go back to the rocking chair item, expand the **website** section.
+* Click **Add new row** button under the `Item Group` table.
+* Select `Products` from the list.
+* Click **Save**.
+
+
+
+To see on the website, go back to the `Item Group` and then click **See on website**.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..be943bcc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..97c24d55
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+managing-user-sign-up-via-website
+website-security
+website-home-page
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/managing-user-sign-up-via-website.html b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/managing-user-sign-up-via-website.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..821d7622
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/managing-user-sign-up-via-website.html
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
+Managing User Sign Up via Website
+ +Users can sign up for ERPNext account via the ERPNext Website.
As seen above the login / sign-up button appears on the homepage of the website generated using ERPNext.
One might want to disable this feature to prevent anonymous users from signing up via the web.
To do so -
1. Go to ` Website > Setup > Website Settings `
2. In website settings doctype navigate to the misc section.
3. Check the disable SignUp check-box and save the doc.
Now only the login button shall appear and there shall be no option to sign-up via the website. You can always revert back by following the same steps.
+
+As seen above the login / sign-up button appears on the homepage of the website generated using ERPNext.
+
+One might want to disable this feature to prevent anonymous users from signing up via the web.
+
+To do so, Go to
+
+1. ` Website > Setup > Website Settings `
+
+2. In website settings doctype navigate to the misc section.
+
+3. Check the disable SignUp check-box and save the doc.
+
+Now only the login button will appear and there shall be no option to sign-up via the website. You can always revert back by following the same steps.
+
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/website-home-page.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/website-home-page.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c11c626b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/website-home-page.md
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+
+# Wesite Home Page
+
+It is very much possible in ERPNext to setup certain standard page as default website Home Page. Following are steps to setup default website home page.
+
+#### **Step 1: Create a Web Page**
+To create a web page go to: `Website > Web Site > Web Page` and then click on the `New` button in the upper right.
+
+* Fill in the page title
+* Give the page a route (keep it lower case)
+* Add content to the `Main Content` section. If you want, you can use markdown to create a more complex page.
+* Tick (Check) the `Published` check box
+* Click the `Save` button.
+
+#### **Step 2: Open Website Settings Page**
+To Open website settings page go to: `Website > Setup > Website Settings`
+
+#### **Step 3: Set Home page**
+
+Enter the same value you entered for the `route` field in the previous section to the `Home Page` field. ERPNext will set this route to be the same as /index for your page.
+
+
+
+#### **Step 4: Save Website Settings Form.**
+
+After setting up Home Page Press `Save` button from website settings page and refresh the system from Help menu. Like this you can set any standard page as your default website home page. When some one visited to your website, he/she will see home page as default landing page on your website.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/website-security.html b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/website-security.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0e894ca4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/articles/website-security.html
@@ -0,0 +1,4 @@
+
+Website Security
+ +One can easily generate a website using erpnext. We can list out Products on the website and also create blogs. Products are directly fetched from the Item Master records of your erpnext account. some people would like to limit the access of the website generated by ERPNext to certain people. This is because some of the items may not be available to public.
Well at the moment this feature is not available. You cannot limit the access of the website generated by ERPNext to certain people. If you publish the website it will be publicly visible.
However while you cannot control who can view the website, you can always choose which items to display on the website.
- To show or not show an Item on your website go to 'Item Master' and in the Item form check the 'show in website' checkbox.
- You can also fill in the details of the product as to be shown on the website here.
+
+Once the check box has been checked, then more details will appear that you can fill in for the details of the product as to be shown on the website.
+
+
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/blog-post.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/blog-post.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fe40428a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/blog-post.md
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+
+Blogs are a great way to share your thoughts about your business and keep your
+customers and readers updated of what you are up to.
+
+In the age of internet, writing assumes a lot of significance because when
+people come to your website, they want to read about you and your product.
+
+To create a new blog, just create a new Blog from:
+
+> Website > Blog > New Blog
+
+
+
+You can format a blog using the Markdown format.You can also access your blog
+by going to the page “blog.html”.
+
+#### A sample blog-page.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/blogger.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/blogger.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c8030ea5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/blogger.md
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+
+Blogger is a user who can post blogs.
+You can mention a short bio about the blogger and also set a avatar here.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..487644b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+
+Websites are a core component of any business and having a good website
+usually means:
+
+ * Invest lot of money.
+ * Difficult to update.
+ * Not interactive.
+
+Unless you are a web designer yourself.
+
+Wouldn't it be nice if there was a way to update your product catalog on your
+site automatically from your ERP?
+
+We thought exactly the same and hence built a small Website Development app
+right inside ERPNext! Using ERPNext’s Website module, you can
+
+ 1. Create Web Pages
+ 2. Write a Blog
+ 3. Publish your Product Catalog using the Item master
+
+We will soon be adding a shopping cart facility so that your customers can
+place orders and pay you online!
+
+Though not necessary, to make a good website, you might have to know a bit of
+HTML / CSS or hire the services of a professional. The good part is that once
+this is setup, you can add and edit content, blogs and products directly from
+your ERP.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..846011d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+web-page
+blog-post
+web-form
+blogger
+setup
+add-products-to-website
+shopping-cart
+articles
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..70b367e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,6 @@
+
+Settings for your website can be mentioned under setup.
+
+### Topics
+
+{index}
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c3aaac91
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+website-settings
+social-login-keys
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/social-login-keys.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/social-login-keys.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..16500228
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/social-login-keys.md
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+
+Social Login enables users to login to ERPNext via their Google, Facebook or GitHub account.
+
+### Enabling Social Logins.
+
+Checkout the following Video Tutorials to understand how to enable social logins on ERPNext
+
+* for FaceBook - https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zC6Q6gIfiw8
+* for Google - https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=w_EAttrE9sw
+* for GitHub - https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bG71DxxkVjQ
+
+For Google the *Authorized redirect URI* is [yoursite]/api/method/frappe.www.login.login_via_google
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/website-settings.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/website-settings.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ce63238c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/setup/website-settings.md
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+
+Most of the website related settings can be defined here.
+
+
+
+####Landing Page
+
+* Home Page: You can specify which [Web Page]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en/website/web-page.html) must be the homepage of the website
+
+* Home Page is Products: if Checked, the Home page will be the default Item Group for the website.
+
+* Title Prefix: Set the browser title.
+
+####Website Theme
+
+Select the theme for the website. You can create new Theme for you website also.
+
+
+
+* Select 'create new website theme' if you wish to customize the default website theme.
+
+####Banner
+
+You can add a banner/ logo to your website here. Attach the image and click on set banner from Image.
+An HTML code will be generated by the system under Banner HTML.
+
+
+
+####Top Bar
+
+You can set the menus items in the Top Bar here.
+
+
+
+ * Similarlly you can also set sidebar and footer links.
+
+####Integrations & Miscellaneous Settings
+
+You can integrate the website using Google Analytics and enable social media sharing for post shared on the website.
+
+
+
+* You can disable public signup to your ERPNext account by checking 'disable signup'
+
+{next}
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/shopping-cart.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/shopping-cart.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ce136c8a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/shopping-cart.md
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+
+On the Webpage, a shopping cart is an icon that allows you to store all the
+things that you have earmarked for purchasing. It is a graphical
+representation of a shopping basket or a shopping cart that allows you to save
+the items you intend to buy.
+
+This software displays the price of the product . It also displays shipping
+and handling charges, along with taxes, if applicable.
+
+### Shopping Cart Setup
+
+To set up a shopping cart, go to the website module.
+
+> Website > Shopping Cart Settings
+
+#### Enter Company Details and Checkout Details.
+
+
+
+To make item available on website go to Item master.
+
+> Stock > Item
+
+#### Enable Item for website.
+
+
+
+#### Enter Website Specifications for Item.
+
+
+
+
+### Shop using Shopping Cart
+
+#### Add item to shopping cart
+
+Click on "Add to Cart" to add item to shopping cart.
+
+
+
+#### Goto Checkout
+
+Click on "Go to Cart" to checkout or on "Cart" which is on upper right side
+of the screen.
+
+
+
+#### Checkout
+
+Change quantity, select Shipping and Billing Address and click
+on "Place Order" to place the order.
+
+
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/web-form.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/web-form.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..176a9e7f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/web-form.md
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+
+# Web Forms
+
+Add forms to the website that will add / update data in your tables. Allow users to edit / manage multiple web forms
+ +You can add forms in your website for example, Contact Us, Inquiry, Complaint etc. Data from these can fill up records like Lead, Opportunity, Issue etc. The user can also be allowed manage multiple records (like Complaints etc.) + +--- + +### Creating + +To create a new **Web Form** go to: + +> Website > Web Form > New + +1. Set the Web Form title and url. +1. Select the **DocType** in which you want the user to store the records. +1. Select if you require the user to login, edit records, manage multiple records etc. +1. Add the fields you want in the record. + +
+
+---
+
+### Viewing
+
+Once you create the web form, you can view it on the url and test it out!
+
+
+
+---
+
+### Results
+
+Your data will be stored in the table you have selected
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/web-page.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/web-page.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e7dfdc8d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/en/website/web-page.md
@@ -0,0 +1,33 @@
+
+Static Content like your Home Page, About Us, Contact Us, Terms pages can be created using the Web Page.
+ +To create a new Web Page, go to: + +> Website > Web Page > New + +
+
+#### Title
+
+The first thing to set is the title of your page. The title has the maximum
+weight for search engines so choose a title that reflects the keywords that
+you are targeting for your audience.
+
+#### Content
+
+After selecting your layout, you can add content (text, images, etc) to each
+of your content boxes. You can add content in Markdown or HTML format. Read
+the section on how to format using Markdown, for more details.
+
+#### Page Link
+
+The web link to your page will be the value of the “Page Name” field +
+“.html”. For example if your page name is contact-us, the web link of your
+page will be yoursite.com/contact-us.html.
+
+#### Images
+
+You can attach images to your web page and show them using the HTML tag or
+using markdown format. the link to your file will be assets/manual_erpnext_com/old_images/erpnext/filename
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/accounting-entries.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/accounting-entries.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6dd41e73
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/accounting-entries.md
@@ -0,0 +1,74 @@
+
+
+
+El concepto de contabilidad se explica con el siguiente ejemplo: Se toma a
+"Tea Stall" como compañía y se observa como registrar entradas contables
+para el negocio.
+
+ * Mama (El propietario de Tea-stall) invierte $25000 para iniciar el negocio.
+
+
+
+__Análisis:__ Mama invierte 25000 en la compañía, con la esperanza de obtener alguna
+ganancia. En otras palabras, la compañía es responsable del pago de $25000 a mama en
+el futuro. Así, la cuenta "Mama" es una cuenta de pasivo y es un crédito. El balance de
+efectivo de la compañía se incrementa debido a la inversión, "Caja" es un activo de
+la compañía y debe ser debitado.
+
+ * La compañía necesita equipos (Estufa, tetera, pocillos, etc) y materias primas (te,
+ azucar, leche, etc) de inmediato. Decide comprar en una tienda cercana "Super Bazaar"
+ que pertenece a un amigo y le concede cierto crédito. Los equipos cuestan 2800 y las
+ materias primas valen 2200. La compañía paga 2000 de un total de 5000.
+
+
+
+__Análisis:__ Los equipos son "Activos Fijos" (porque tienen una larga vida útil) de la
+compañía y las materias primas son "Activos corrientes" (porque son usados en la
+operación diaria del negocio). Entonces, "Equipos" y "Existencias disponibles" deben
+ser debitadas para incrementar su valor. La compañía pagó 2000, entonces la cuenta
+"Caja" debe ser reducida en dicha cantidad, es decir debe ser crédito. Y dado que la
+compañía tiene la obligación de pagar 3000 a "Super Bazaar", dicha cuenta debe tener
+un crédito de 3000.
+
+
+ * Mama (quien está pendiente de todas las entradas)decide anotar las ventas al finalizar
+ cada día, de tal manera que pueda analizar las ventas diarias. Al finaliza el primer
+ día, Tea Stall vende 325 tazas de té, lo cual da una venta neta de RS. 1575. El propietario
+ registra feliz su primer día de ventas.
+
+
+
+__Análisis:__ Los ingresos han sido anotados en la cuenta "Ventas de Té", la cual se
+debita para incrementar el valor y la misma cantidad se acredita de la cuenta
+"Caja". Digamos, para hacer 325 tazas de té cuestan Rs 800, entonces la
+cuenta "Existencias disponibles" debe ser reducidas (crédito) en 800 y el gasto
+debe ser registado en la cuenta "Costos de bienes vendidos" en la misma cantidad.
+
+Al finalizar el mes, la compañía paga el arriendo del local (5000) y el salario de
+un empleado (8000), el cual trabajó desde el primer día.
+
+
+
+### Registro de ganancias
+
+A medida que avanza el mes, la compañía compra más materias primas para el negocio.
+Después de un mes se anotan las ganancias en el "Libro de Balance" y en el de
+"Estado de Pérdidas y Ganancias". Ya que las ganacias pertenecen a Mama y no a
+la compañía, se considera que dichas ganacias son una obligación (la compañía tiene
+que pagárselas a Mama). Cuando el Libro de Balance no está balanceado, p.e. el
+débito no es igual al crédito, la ganacia aún no ha sido anotada. Se debe realziar
+la siguiente entrada:
+
+
+
+Explicación: Las ventas y gastos netos son 40000 y 20000 respectivamente.
+Entonces, la compañía tuvo una ganancia de 20000. Para registrar esa entrada,
+la cuenta "Pérdidas y Ganancias" debe ser debitada y la cuenta "Capital"
+debe ser acreditada. El balance neto de caja es 44000 y existe alguna materia
+prima que vale $1000.
+
+**Trabajo en progreso.**
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/accounting-reports.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/accounting-reports.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7c859357
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/accounting-reports.md
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+
+
+
+Algunos de los principales reportes contables son:
+
+### Libro Mayor
+
+El Libro Mayor está basada en la tabla de Entradas y puede ser filtrado por
+cuenta y por periodo específico de tiempo. Esto ayuda a tener un reporte
+actualizado de todas las entradas que existan para una cuetna dada en un
+periodo determinado.
+
+
+
+### Balance Contable
+
+Es el listado del balance para todas las cuentas ("Libro Mayor" y "Grupo")
+en una fecha particular. Para cada cuenta proporciona:
+
+ * Apertura
+ * Débitos
+ * Creditos
+ * Cierre
+
+
+
+La suma de todos los balances de cierre en el Balance Contable debe ser igual a cero.
+
+### Cuentas por Pagar y Cuentas por Cobrar (CP / CC)
+
+Este reporte permite hacer seguimiento a las facturas enviadas a los clientes y proveedores. En este
+reporte, se resaltan diferentes periodos de tiempo. p.e. entre 0-30 días, 30-60 días y así por el estilo.
+
+
+
+### Registro de Ventas y Compras
+
+En este reporte, cada cuenta de impuestos es transpuesta en columnas. For cada factura y por cada item
+se puede obtener la cantidad de impuestos individuales que debe ser pagados, de acuerdo a la
+tabla de Impuestos y Contribuciones,
+
+
+
+**Trabajo en progreso.**
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..143f36b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/advance-payment-entry.md
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+
+
+Los pagos realizados por el cliente antes de recibir el envío del producto se
+denominan Anticipos. Para ordenes de alto costo, los negocios esperan recibir
+dcho tipos de pago.
+
+
+__Por Ejemplo:__ Consider a customer- Jane D'souza placing an order for a double
+bed costing $10000 She is asked to give some advance before the furniture
+house begins work on her order. She gives them $5000 in cash.
+
+
+Go to Accounts and open a new Journal Entry to make the advance entry.
+
+> Accounts > Documents > Journal Entry > New Journal Entry
+
+Mention the voucher type as cash voucher. This differs for different
+customers. If somebody pays by cheque the voucher type will be Bank Voucher.
+Then select the customer account and make the respective debit and credit
+entries.
+
+Since the customer has given $5000 as cash advance,it will be recorded as a
+credit entry against the customer. To balance it with the debit entry [Double
+accounting Entry] enter $5000 as debit against the company's cash account. In
+the row "Is Advance" click 'Yes'.
+
+#### Figure 1 : Journal Entry -Advance Entry
+
+
+
+### Double Entry Accounting
+
+Double entry bookkeeping is a system of accounting in which every transaction
+has a corresponding positive and negative entry : debits and credits. Every
+transaction involves a [debit entry
+](http://www.e-conomic.co.uk/accountingsystem/glossary/debit)in one account
+and a [credit
+entry](http://www.e-conomic.co.uk/accountingsystem/glossary/credit) in another
+account. This means that every transaction must be recorded in two accounts;
+one account will be debited because it receives value and the other account
+will be credited because it has given value.
+
+
+#### Figure 2: Transaction and Difference Entry
+
+
+
+Save and submit the JV. If this document is not saved it will not be pulled in
+other accounting documents.
+
+When you make a new Sales Invoice for the same customer, mention the advance
+in the Sales Invoice Form.
+
+To link the Sales Invoice to the Journal Entry which mentions the advance
+payment entry, click on ‘Get Advances Received’. Allocate the amount of
+advance in the advances table. The accounting will be adjusted accordingly.
+
+#### Figure 3: Receive Advance
+
+
+
+Save and submit the Sales Invoice.
+
+**Trabajo en progreso.**
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5084afcb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,34 @@
+
+
+Al final del ciclo de compra y venta viene la facturación y los pagos.
+Quizás se tenga un contador en el equipo, quizás se haga la contabilidad
+por cuenta propia o quizás se tenga contratado un tercero que realice la tarea.
+En todos los casos, la contabilidad finaciera forma parte del núcleo de
+cualquier sistema de gestión del negocio tal como los ERP.
+
+En **ERPNext**, las operaciones contables consisten en 3 transacciones principales:
+
+ * Factura de ventas: Las facturas que se entregan al Cliente correspondientes a
+ los servicios o productos que se proveen.
+ * Factura de Compra: Facturas que los proveedores le entregan a la compañía por
+ la compra de sus productos o servicios.
+ * Entradas
+
+
+At the end of sales and purchase cycle comes billing and payments. You may have
+an accountant in your team, or you may be doing accounting yourself, or you may
+have outsourced your accounting. In all the cases financial accounting forms the core of any business management system like an ERP.
+
+In ERPNext, your accounting operations consists of 3 main transactions:
+
+ * Sales Invoice: The bills that you raise to your Customers for the products or services you provide.
+ * Purchase Invoice: Bills that your Suppliers give you for their products or services.
+ * Entradas Diarias: Para contabilizar entradas, tales cvomo pagos, créditos y otros tipos.
+
+### Temas
+
+**Trabajo en progreso.**
+
+{index}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bad8436c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/accounts/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+advance-payment-entry
+accounting-reports
+accounting-entries
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..700890f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+
+
+# Manual de Usuario (Español)
+
+### Contenido:
+
+{index}
+
+**Trabajo en progreso.**
+
+[La traducción al Español del manual de ERPNext está en progreso. Click aquí para ver el manual en ingles]({{ docs_base_url }}/user/manual/en)
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d19ef975
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+introduction
+accounts
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a6df9c96
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/do-i-need-an-erp.md
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+
+ERPNext es una herramienta moderna que no solo abarca el módulo de contabilidad,
+sino que también, cubre todas las otras funciones de su negocio en una plataforma integrada.
+Tiene muchos beneficios sobre los sistemas tradicionales de contabilidad y otros ERP en el mercado.
+
+### Beneficios sobre los sistemas de contabilidad tradicionales:
+
+ * Es más que solo contabilidad! Gestionar inventario, facturación, cotizaciones, clientes potenciales, nómina y mucho más.
+ * Mantiene toda tu información segura y en un solo lugar. No siga buscando sus datos cuando más lo necesitas en diferente hojas de calculo y en diferentes ordenadores.
+ Gestiona a todos tus empleados en el mismo lugar. Todos los usuarios obtienen información actualizada.
+ * No más trabajo doble. No introduzcas la misma información desde su procesador de textos a su herramienta de contabilidad. Todo está integrado!
+ * Manten un historial. Obten el historial completo de un cliente o un acuerdo en un solo lugar
+
+### Beneficios sobre ERPs más grandes
+
+ * $$$ - Ahorra dinero.
+ * **Más facíl de configurar:** Grandes ERP son extramadamente complicados para configurar y van a preguntar demasiadas preguntas amtes de que puedas hacer algo utíl.
+ * **Más facíl de usar:** Una moderna y limpia interfaz web va a mantener sus usuarios contentos y en un entorno mas familiar.
+ * **Código Abierto :** Este sistema es completamente gratis y puedes instalarlo/configurarlo donde desees.
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5db7b45c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/getting-started-with-erpnext.md
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+
+Hay muchas manera de comenzar a utilizar ERPNext.
+
+### 1\. Ver el Demo
+
+Si deseas entrar en contacto con la interfaz de usuario de ERPNext y **sentir** la aplicación, solo tienes que ver el demo en:
+see the demo at:
+
+ *
+
+_Nota: No todos los pasos son obligatorios. ERPNext te permite pasar algunos pasos si deseas simplificar el proceso._
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/open-source.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/open-source.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a1b59730
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/open-source.md
@@ -0,0 +1,35 @@
+
+El código fuente de ERPNext es de código abierto. Está abierto para que todos
+podamos entenderlo, extenderlo o mejorarlo. Y es gratis!
+
+Las ventajas de un Sistema de Código Abierto:
+
+ 1. Puedes cambiar tu proveedor de servicios cuando quieras.
+ 2. Puedas hostear la aplicación donde quieras, incluyendo en tu propio servidor para tener completa propiedad y privacidad de la información.
+ 3. Puedes pedir ayuda a la comunidad en caso de necesitarla. No estas atado a un proveedor de servicios.
+ 4. Te puedes beneficiar de un producto que es criticado y usado por una gran cantidad de personas,
+ quienes han reportado cientos de fallos y sugerencias para mejorarlo, y esto siempre va a continuar así.
+
+
+---
+
+### Código Fuente de ERPNext
+
+El repositorio que contiene el código fuente de ERPnext está disponible en GitHub y puede ser encontrado aquí
+
+- [https://github.com/frappe/erpnext](https://github.com/frappe/erpnext)
+
+
+---
+
+### Alternativas
+
+Hay muchas soluciones ERP que puedes considerar. Los más populares son:
+
+ 1. Odoo
+ 2. OpenBravo
+ 3. Apache OfBiz
+ 4. xTuple
+ 5. Compiere (y clones)
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/the-champion.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/the-champion.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fa2f1e45
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/es/introduction/the-champion.md
@@ -0,0 +1,42 @@
+
+
+
+El campeón
+ +
+
+Hemos visto docenas de implementaciones de sistemas ERP en los últimos años
+y nos hemos dado cuenta que una implementación exitosa es más sobre cosas intangibles y actitudes.
+
+**Los ERP no son requeridos.**
+
+Como el ejercicio.
+
+El cuerpo humano puede que parezca que no requiere ejercicio hoy ni quizas mañana, pero con el pasar del tiempo,
+ si desea mantener su cuerpo y su salud deberá comenzar a hacer ejercicio.
+
+En esta misma forma, ERPs mejoran la salud de su compañia a largo plazo manteniendola ajustada y eficiente.
+ Mientas más demores en poner las cosas en orden, más tiempo pierdes, y estas más cerca de una desastre mayor.
+
+Por tanto, cuando comienzas a implementar un ERP, manten la visión en beneficios a largo plazo.
+ Como el ejercicio, es doloroso al comienzo, pero va a hacer cosas maravillosas si te mantienes haciendolo.
+
+* * *
+
+## El Campeón
+
+Un ERP significa un cambio en la organización y un cambio no sucede sin exfuerzo.
+Cada cambio requiere un campeón y es la responsabilidad de el campeón el
+organizar y motivar al equipo completo durante la implementación.
+El campeón necesita ser activo en caso que algo salga mal.
+
+En muchas organizaciones que hemos visto, frecuentemente el campeón es el dueño o un Administrador.
+ Ocasionalmente, el campeón es una persona externa quien es contratado con un propósito específico.
+
+En cualquier caso, debes identificar su campeón primero.
+
+Lo más seguro es que sea **usted!**
+
+Comencemos!
+
+{next}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a7a36176
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+
+
+# ERPNext User Manual
+
+Select your language
+
+1. [English]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/en)
+1. [Deutsch]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/de)
+1. [Español]({{docs_base_url}}/user/manual/es)
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2c4c454f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/manual/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+en
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..97aa9ad2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+
+# ERPNext Videos
+
++ Learn ERPNext +
+ +
+
+
+---
+
+
+
+ 
+
+
+
+
+
+ Learn how to setup and use ERPNext in this series of videos that go through important processes step-by-step.
+
++ Conference Videos +
+ +
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b2d525b2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+index
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/__init__.py b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/__init__.py
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e69de29b
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/_sidebar.json b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/_sidebar.json
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..88f5aab5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/_sidebar.json
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+[
+ {
+ "route": "/docs",
+ "title": "Docs Home"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/user",
+ "title": "User Guide"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/api",
+ "title": "Server API"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "/docs/current/models",
+ "title": "Models (Reference)"
+ },
+ {
+ "route": "https://github.com/frappe/erpnext/tree/develop/erpnext/docs",
+ "title": "Improve Docs"
+ }
+]
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/advance-payments.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/advance-payments.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7f055aa0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/advance-payments.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Advance Payment
+
+
+
+**Duration: 2:52**
+
+In sales and purchase transaction, generally advance payments are involved. This tutorial covers how you can create advance payment entries against Sales Order and Purchase Order, and adjust the same in the final invoice.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/batch-inventory.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/batch-inventory.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f6a94211
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/batch-inventory.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+# Batch Inventory
+
+
+
+**Duration: 3:46**
+
+Batch inventory allows you to group multiple units of an item, and assign them a unique value/number/tag called Batch No.
+
+This video walks you through creating new Batch, and using it in stock transactions. Each batch can have certain expiry. In the stock module, you can check item's batchwise stock level.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/bill-of-materials.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/bill-of-materials.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5d527686
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/bill-of-materials.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+# Bill of Material
+
+
+
+**Duration: 3:27**
+
+The BOM is a list of all materials (either bought or made) and operations that go into a finished product or sub-Item.
+
+This video walks you through creating masters (like Item, Operations, Workstation etc.) required for setting up BOM. Once you have all these masters in place, using them you can create Bill of Materials for the sub-assembly, finished and sub-contracted items.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/budgeting.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/budgeting.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b58d5b3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/budgeting.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Budgeting
+
+
+
+**Duration: 3:26**
+
+Budgeting feature will help you from over-spending. In ERPNext, you can define budgets based on Cost Center and Projects.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/bulk-update.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/bulk-update.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f76d9d3a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/bulk-update.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Bulk Update Data
+
+
+
+**Duration: 1:38**
+
+Bulk Update Tool help you in over-writing value in the specific field of exitsting records.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/chart-of-accounts.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/chart-of-accounts.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b631b93a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/chart-of-accounts.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+# Chart of Accounts
+
+
+
+**Duration: 3:10**
+
+This tutorial walks you through setting up Accounts in the Chart of Account master. This is the most crucial master for getting your financial statement and other accounting reports correct.
+
+Chart of Account is a tree structure master which allows user to define parent and child relationship between accounts. Also there are various account types (like Income a/c, Expense a/c, Bank a/c, Tax a/c etc.) which helps you segregate and filter out other accounts while creating transactions.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/customer-and-supplier.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/customer-and-supplier.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..59353b90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/customer-and-supplier.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Customer and Supplier
+
+
+
+**Duration: 4:35**
+
+This video demonstrate creating Customer and Suppliers in ERPNext. It also covers setting up masters required for creating Customer and Supplier like Customer Group, Territory and Supplier Type.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/data-import-tool.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/data-import-tool.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6e2009a0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/data-import-tool.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Data Import Tool
+
+
+
+**Duration: 6:31**
+
+This video walks you through on importing data in ERPNext from spreadsheet files. This tools allows you in faster migration of masters and transactions from legacy system into ERPNext. You can also use this tool to export data from ERPNext, and keep it as a backup of specific document type.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/distributors.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/distributors.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..4b519f65
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/distributors.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# ERPNext for Distributors
+
+
+
+**Duration: 51:47**
+
+This video is a recording of a webinar on how a distribution business can use ERPNext. It covers Selling, Buying, Stock and Accounts module. Also, you can can learn how serialised and batchwise inventory can be maintained in ERPNext.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/drop-ship.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/drop-ship.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7d418345
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/drop-ship.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Drop Ship
+
+
+
+**Duration: 5:10**
+
+Drop Ship feature allows you managing orders where delivery to customer is made by the supplier.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/email-account.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/email-account.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5f958814
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/email-account.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Email Account
+
+
+
+**Duration: 2:27**
+
+This video walks you through setting up Email Account for incoming and outgoing emails. For hosted users, outgoing email gateway is set by default. Based on incoming email, you can have new document (like Issue, Lead etc.) auto-created, and have email received on these id's appended to specified document.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/employee.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/employee.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..13608b7d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/employee.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Employee
+
+
+
+**Duration: 3:26**
+
+This is a help video on how to add and manage Employees in ERPNext.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/expense-claim.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/expense-claim.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e6aacb66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/expense-claim.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Expense Claim
+
+
+
+**Duration: 2:51**
+
+This tutorial walks you through managing Expense Claims in ERPNext. Employee create first draft of Expense Claim. User with Expense Claim Approver role review Expense Claim submitted by Employee, and update sanctioned amount in it. After Expense Claim is approved/submitted, Journal Entry is created Expense Claim.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/field-customization.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/field-customization.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..45070f6f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/field-customization.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+# Field Customization
+
+
+
+**Duration: 3:10**
+
+This video walks you through various field level customization options.
+
+Using Customize Form tool, you can insert custom field in the forms. Also you can change the property of standard fields like visibility in print format, should field be a mandatory or non-mandatory, should this field always carry unique value etc. Also you can customize location of a field on form.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/file-manager.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/file-manager.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c2d4548b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/file-manager.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+# File Manager
+
+
+
+**Duration: 2:24**
+
+Using File Manager in ERPNext, you can organized files received from varius sources. You can also create custom folders, and put files in them.
+
+To ensure only authorize person has access to file, set permission rules can be applied on specific Folder or File.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/fixed-assets.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/fixed-assets.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..8cb1caf1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/fixed-assets.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Fixed Assets Management
+
+
+
+**Duration: 6:35**
+
+In this video, you will learn how to add Assets and manage Asset Depreciation in ERPNext.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/index.css b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/index.css
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..025e9386
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/index.css
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+.hero-and-content .page-container {
+ max-width: 100%;
+}
+
+.video-list li {
+ margin: 0px;
+ padding: 10px 0px;
+ border-bottom: 1px solid #d1d8dd;
+}
+
+.video-list li:last-child {
+ border-bottom: 0px;
+}
+
+.manual-feedback {
+ display: none;
+}
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/index.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/index.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1d04035b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/index.md
@@ -0,0 +1,310 @@
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ 
+
+
+
+
+
+ Watch video presentations from the ERPNext team and users from the 2014 ERPNext Conference.
+
+ ERPNext Conference on October 9th 2015 in Mumbai +
++ ERPNext Conference on October 9th 2015 in Mumbai +
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/index.txt b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/index.txt
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..5510922a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/index.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+batch-inventory
+bill-of-materials
+chart-of-accounts
+customer-and-supplier
+data-import-tool
+email-account
+employee
+expense-claim
+field-customization
+index
+item
+item-variant
+lead-to-quotation
+leave-management
+material-request-to-purchase-order
+navigation
+newsletter
+opening-account-balances
+opening-stock
+point-of-sale
+printing-and-branding
+processing-payroll
+product-bundle
+production-order
+production-planning
+project-and-task
+purchase-cycle
+quality-inspection
+sales-cycle
+serialized-inventory
+setup-wizard
+stock-entries
+subcontracting
+taxes
+user-and-permission
+workflow
+advance-payments
+drop-ship
+file-manager
+publish-items-on-website
+shopping-cart
+report-builder
+services
+distributors
+manufacturing-make-to-order
+manufacturing-enigneer-to-order
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/item-variant.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/item-variant.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c2238acb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/item-variant.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Item Variant
+
+
+
+**Duration: 2:38**
+
+This video tutorial helps you in setting up Item Attributes (like Size, Lenthg etc.) and creating item variants using these attributes.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/item.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/item.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..571eaacb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/item.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Item and Pricing
+
+
+
+**Duration: 3:55**
+
+This tutorial walks you through managing stock and service item in ERPNext. For each item, you can track its standard selling and buying price using Price List.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/lead-to-quotation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/lead-to-quotation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..b7e7d07a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/lead-to-quotation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Customer Relationship Management (CRM)
+
+
+
+**Duration: 3:29**
+
+This video walks you through creating Lead in the CRM module. You can convert Lead into Opportunity, one which has good probability of conversion. When customer ask for the Quotation,
+you can fetch Lead and item details from Opportunity to Quotation.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/leave-management.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/leave-management.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..2efa2233
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/leave-management.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Leave Management
+
+
+
+**Duration: 2:49**
+
+This tutorial walks you through leave processing in ERPNext. Firstly, various leaves are allocated to Employees for a year. As and when needed, Employees apply for leave. Their application is reviewed and approved or rejected by Leave Approver. On approval/submission of Leave Application, leave allocated to Employee is reduced.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/manufacturing-enigneer-to-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/manufacturing-enigneer-to-order.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..3f99ac62
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/manufacturing-enigneer-to-order.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# ERPNext for Manufacturers (Engineer-to-Order)
+
+
+
+**Duration: 44:40**
+
+This video is a recording of a webinar on how a manufacturing company operating based on **engineer to order **. This session covers modules like Selling, Manufacturing, Buying and Accounts.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/manufacturing-make-to-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/manufacturing-make-to-order.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..328b8590
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/manufacturing-make-to-order.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# ERPNext for Manufacturers (Make-to-Order)
+
+
+
+**Duration: 14:26**
+
+This video is a recording of a webinar on how a manufacturing company operating based on **make to order** can use ERPNext. This session covers modules like Selling, Manufacturing, Buying and Accounts. You can learn how to make a Bill of Materials of production item and plan for item's production from Sales Order.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/material-request-to-purchase-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/material-request-to-purchase-order.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..1d92b0e9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/material-request-to-purchase-order.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Material Request to Purchase Order
+
+
+
+**Duration: 2:25**
+
+This video walks you through creating Material Request. To request quotation from Supplier, you can forward Material Request to them. On receipt of quotation from supplier, Material Request's data will be fetched into Supplier Quotation. After evaluating multiple supplier quotations, favorable quotation's is converted into Purchase Order.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/navigation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/navigation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..52eab009
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/navigation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# User Interface and Navigation
+
+
+
+**Duration: 2:41**
+
+This video walks you through using the ERPNext "Desk" interface. The ERPNext User Interface is very web friendly and if you have used a website or mobile app before, the navigation should be very intuitive.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/newsletter.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/newsletter.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a25a7fdf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/newsletter.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+# Newsletter
+
+
+
+**Duration: 2:04**
+
+A newsletter is a short written report that tells about the recent activities of an organization. It is generally sent to members of the organization, potential clients, customers or potential leads.
+
+This video walks you through managing Newsletter List, master containing Email Address's to whom Newsletter will be sent. You can compose Newsletter using rich text editor, and also in HTML editor.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/opening-account-balances.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/opening-account-balances.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f14b4f1b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/opening-account-balances.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Opening Account Balances
+
+
+
+**Duration: 4:40**
+
+This video walks you through step to update opening account balances in ERPNext. Before updating opening balance for accounts, you should close your financial statements in the previous system. Closing balance of your legacy system should be updated as opening balance in ERPNext.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/opening-stock.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/opening-stock.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f129545b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/opening-stock.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Opening Stock
+
+
+
+**Duration: 4:27**
+
+This tutorial demonstrates updating opening stock balance of an item. Following same steps, you can also reconcile stock of an item with respect to physical stock in a warehouse.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/point-of-sale.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/point-of-sale.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..16eae805
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/point-of-sale.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+# Point of Sale
+
+
+
+**Duration: 2:34**
+
+Retail transaction has sales, goods delivery and payment happening at the same time. POS (Point of Sale) module in ERPNext allow you creating POS Invoices which manages all the functions involved in retail sales.
+
+This tutorial walks you through setting up POS profile and creating POS invoice in ERPNext. Each billing station can have separate POS profile. This allows in faster and efficient billing at the sales counters.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/printing-and-branding.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/printing-and-branding.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..39c49347
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/printing-and-branding.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+# Printing and Branding
+
+
+
+**Duration: 3:59**
+
+This video walks you through setting up of masters like your companies Letterhead and Logo.
+This tutorial also covers using tools to customize standard print formats, creating new print
+format, and setting up print headings (Quotation to Proposal) as per your requirement.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/processing-payroll.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/processing-payroll.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..7035e179
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/processing-payroll.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Processing Payroll
+
+
+
+**Duration: 4:00**
+
+This video walks you through processing payroll for Employees. You can maintain Salary Structure for each Employee. Based on it, you can create Salary Slips individually, or in bulk for all the Employees.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/product-bundle.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/product-bundle.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c1ce1dea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/product-bundle.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+# Product Bundle
+
+
+
+**Duration: 2:31**
+
+Product Bundle (aka Sales Bill of Material) is a master where you can list items which are bundled together and sold as one item.
+
+This video walks you through setting up items, and creating Product Bundle master using them.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/production-order.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/production-order.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..9f941984
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/production-order.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+# Production Order
+
+
+
+**Duration: 2:24**
+
+Production Order (also called as Work Order) is a document that is given to the manufacturing shop floor by the Production Planner as a signal to produce a certain quantity of a certain Item.
+
+This video walks you through creating Production Order in ERPNext. There will be several entries made against Production Order (like Material Transfer, Manufacture entry, Time Log) to track progress against Production Order.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/production-planning.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/production-planning.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d0e7e775
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/production-planning.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+# Production Planning Tool
+
+
+
+**Duration: 1:41**
+
+Production Planning Tool helps you plan production and purchase of Items for a period.
+
+This video walks you through production planning for Sales Order item. Material Planning allows you to check required quantity of raw materials for manufacturing. You can create Material Request for the raw-material items for which sufficient stock is not available. From Production Planning Tool, you can also create Production Order for the finished items.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/project-and-task.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/project-and-task.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..eb4956f3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/project-and-task.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+# Project and Task
+
+
+
+**Duration: 3:52**
+
+This is the tutorial on managing Projects and Task in ERPNext.
+
+Project can be divided into multiple assignable Task. Based on Tasks of a Project, you can check its Gantt Chart view. To track actual time spent on Project or Task, user can create Time Logs.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/publish-items-on-website.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/publish-items-on-website.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..c8752b59
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/publish-items-on-website.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Publish Items on Website
+
+
+
+**Duration: 5:14**
+
+Website can be generated from each ERPNext account. This tutorial covers how items in your stock module can be published on the website.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/purchase-cycle.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/purchase-cycle.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..d4d553e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/purchase-cycle.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Purchase Cycle
+
+
+
+**Duration: 3:16**
+
+This video walks you through purchase cycle in ERPNext. Purchase Order can be created directly, or by fetching data from Material Request or Supplier Quotation. When ordered items are received from Supplier, Purchase Receipt is created against Purchase Order. You can create Purchase Invoice from Purchase Order or Purchase Receipt. When making payment to Supplier, Journal Entry will be created against Purchase Invoice.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/quality-inspection.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/quality-inspection.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..a3f23663
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/quality-inspection.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Quality Inspection
+
+
+
+**Duration: 2:36**
+
+This video walks you through quality testing and reporting procedure for purchased, manufactured and item which are being delivered.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/report-builder.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/report-builder.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..65191b2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/report-builder.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Report Builder
+
+
+
+**Duration: 4:27**
+
+This tutorial covers creating custom reports in ERPNext using Report Builder.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/request-for-quotation.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/request-for-quotation.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..12499389
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/request-for-quotation.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Request for Quotation
+
+
+
+**Duration: 3:17**
+
+Request for Quotation feature allows you invite multiple Suppliers to provide their quotation. Suppliers can also provide quotation by logging into your ERPNext account. Based on the price quoted by them, Supplier Quotation will be created in your ERPNext account.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/retailers.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/retailers.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..e2c73773
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/retailers.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# ERPNext for Retailers
+
+
+
+**Duration: 24:27**
+
+This video is a recording of a webinar on how retailers can use ERPNext. For the ease of invoicing for retailers, we have a dedicated POS view. It takes care of invoicing, delivery and payment in one entry. Given the limitation of time availability and frequency of transaction, you can also create POS Invoices in the offline mode.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/sales-cycle.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/sales-cycle.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bff46e9a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/sales-cycle.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+# Sales Cycle
+
+
+
+**Duration: 4:28**
+
+This video walks you through sales cycle in ERPNext. On receipt of confirmation of order from Customer, Sales Order will be directly. When sales items is shipped to customer, Delivery Note is created against Sales Order. You can create Sales Invoice from Sales Order or Delivery Note.
+
+From Sales Order, you can track complete order like %delivered, %billed and payment status of Sales Invoice.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/schools.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/schools.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..91d051fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/schools.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# ERPNext for Schools
+
+
+
+**Duration: 39:21**
+
+This video is a recording of a webinar on how education institutes can use ERPNext Schools module. It covers management of Student Applications, managing masters like Students, Programs and Courses. Also, you can manage processes like Course Scheduling, Student Assessment, Fees and Attendance.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/serialized-inventory.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/serialized-inventory.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..6854daca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/serialized-inventory.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+# Serialized Inventory
+
+
+
+**Duration: 4:11**
+
+If an Item is serialized, a Serial Number (Serial No) record is maintained for each unit of that Item. This information is helpful in tracking the location of the Serial No, its warranty and end-of-life (expiry) information.
+
+This video walks you through setting item as serialized item, and creating stock transaction for it. Mostly a high value items are set as serialized item which requires close tracking of its location and warranty expiry.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/services.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/services.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..36d5aa58
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/services.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# ERPNext for Services Business
+
+
+
+**Duration: 52:50**
+
+This video is a recording of a webinar on how service company can use ERPNext. It covers creating a Service Item, service Quotation and Sales Order, Managing Projects, Tasks and billing Customer based on Timesheet. Also you will learn how to manage customer support in ERPNext by using features like Issues and Warranty Claims.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/setup-wizard.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/setup-wizard.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..aafbf8c0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/setup-wizard.md
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+
+# Setup Wizard
+
+
+
+**Duration: 2:28**
+
+After successful setup of ERPNext account, on the first login, you will see Setup Wizard. The Setup Wizard helps you quickly setup your masters like your company, Items, Customer,
+Suppliers and will also setup a basic website with this data.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/shopping-cart.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/shopping-cart.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..ea10d4de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/shopping-cart.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Shopping Cart
+
+
+
+**Duration: 6:32**
+
+ERPNext has Customers Portal. It allos Customer to login, and place new orderes using shopping cart. From Customer Portal, customer can also track progress on their existing orders, view history of transactions and communicate via Issues.
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/stock-entries.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/stock-entries.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..0f8f085d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/stock-entries.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Stock Entries
+
+
+
+**Duration: 3:46**
+
+Stock Entry is a stock transaction, used for multiple purposes like inter-warehouse Material Transfer, Material Receipt for updating balance, Material Issue etc.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/subcontracting.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/subcontracting.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..bc6120c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/subcontracting.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+# Subcontracting
+
+
+
+**Duration: 4:36**
+
+Subcontracting is a type of job contract that seeks to outsource certain types of work to other companies.
+
+There are warehouses masters created in order to carryout subcontracting transaction. This video walks you through various steps involved like creating BOM, transfer raw-material to subcontractor, receiving processed goods from subcontractor.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/taxes.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/taxes.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..fa7b1d92
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/taxes.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# Taxes
+
+
+
+**Duration: 5:13**
+
+This video walks you through setting up tax accounts in the Chart of Account. Based on the taxation rules, you can create multiple sales and purchase tax templates in ERPNext.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/user-and-permission.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/user-and-permission.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..f811257c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/user-and-permission.md
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+
+# User and Permissions
+
+
+
+**Duration: 6:16**
+
+This video tutorial walks you through setting up User and their permissions in ERPNext. Role Permission Manager tool allows you to define restricted access for the user, based on various criterion like, value in the specific field on the form, creator of the document etc.
diff --git a/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/workflow.md b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/workflow.md
new file mode 100644
index 00000000..200599f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/foundation/www/docs/user/videos/learn/workflow.md
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+
+# Workflow
+
+
+
+**Duration: 3:37**
+
+This video walks you through setting up Workflow for a document type.
+
+Bydefault, ERPNext has two level verification system for documents, Save and Submit. If you have more than one authority approving document, you can manage it via Workflow. Workflow allow you do define multiple stages through which document will be review and finally get approved, and who will be the approver at each stage.
diff --git a/foundation/www/faq.md b/foundation/www/faq.md
index 67c3ef4e..65009b9b 100644
--- a/foundation/www/faq.md
+++ b/foundation/www/faq.md
@@ -20,8 +20,8 @@ Before you sell anything to anyone, you must be completely convinced that it is
You need not pay for self implementation, you can either use the 30-day trial at [erpnext.com](https://erpnext.com) or use the [Virtual Machine](https://erpnext.com/download). If you need support, you can first go through:
-1. [ERPNext user guide.](http://frappe.github.io/erpnext/user/manual/en/)
-1. [Help product videos.](http://frappe.github.io/erpnext/user/videos/learn)
+1. [ERPNext user guide.](http://erpnext.org/docs/user/manual/en/)
+1. [Help product videos.](http://frappe.io/docs/user/videos/learn)
1. [Ask questions at the forum.](https://discuss.erpnext.com)
If you need priority one-on-one help sessions, you can also buy a subscription service for it.
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ With ERPNext compared to other ERPs, the cost of license is zero, so there is mo
Listing on our community portal is free. You can list yourself as a Service Provider, and provide details about services you offer on ERPNext. Following are the plan for the paid listing. To become Verified Service Provider, you should fulfil following conditions.
-1. Experience of implementing ERPNext for at-least one Customer.
+1. Experience of implementing ERPNext for at-least one Customer.
1. Your Company website briefing services you offer on ERPNext.
1. Subscription of $600/year.
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ Listing on our community portal is free. You can list yourself as a Service Prov
No, we (Frappe Technologies) do not do any paid development. All our energy is used in supporting and enhancing the ERPNext product. If you want to develop a feature or customization, you can engage a freelancer or drop in a request on the [discussion forum](https://discuss.erpnext.com). If you are planning do this on any scale, it is best to [get one of your developers trained on ERPNext](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eCAMPcl7NKc&list=PL3lFfCEoMxvzHtsZHFJ4T3n5yMM3nGJ1W).
-[It is very easy to build new apps / extensions to ERPNext.](http://frappe.github.io/frappe/user/tutorial/)
+[It is very easy to build new apps / extensions to ERPNext.](http://frappe.io/docs/user/tutorial/)
---
diff --git a/foundation/www/resources.html b/foundation/www/resources.html
index b635eefd..e330f20f 100644
--- a/foundation/www/resources.html
+++ b/foundation/www/resources.html
@@ -29,7 +29,7 @@
+
+
+
+ ERPNext Video Tutorials
+Step-by-step guides to setting up and using ERPNext
++
ERPNext Demonstrations
+-
+
- + ERPNext for Services Business + 52:50 + +
- + ERPNext for Distributors + 51:47 + +
- + ERPNext for Manufacturers + 14:26 + +
- + ERPNext for Retailers + 39:21 + +
- + ERPNext for Schools + 39:21 + +
+
Using ERPNext
+-
+
- + User Interface and Navigation + 2:17 + +
+
Setting Up
+-
+
- + The Setup Wizard + 2:28 + +
- + User and Permissions + 6:16 + +
- + Data Import Tool + 6:31 + +
- + Printing and Branding + 4:00 + +
- + Customer and Supplier + 4:35 + +
- + Item and Pricing + 3:55 + +
- + Opening Stock + 4:27 + +
- + Chart of Accounts + 3:10 + +
- + Opening Account Balances + 4:40 + +
- + Email Account + 2:27 + +
- + File Manager + 2:24 + +
+
CRM and Sales
+-
+
- + Customer Relationship Management + 3:29 + +
- + Customer + 4:35 + +
- + Sales Order to Payment + 4:28 + +
- + Product Bundle + 2:31 + +
- + Newsletter + 2:04 + +
- + Taxes + 3:00 + +
- + Drop Ship + 2:26 + +
+
Buying
+-
+
- + Supplier + 4:35 + +
- + Material Request to Purchase Order + 2:25 + +
- + Request for Quotation + 3:17 + +
- + Purchase Order to Payment + 3:16 + +
- + Taxes + 5:13 + +
+
Stock
+-
+
- + Item and Pricing + 3:17 + +
- + Item Variant + 2:38 + +
- + Stock Opening Balance + 4:27 + +
- + Stock Entries + 3:46 + +
- + Serialized Inventory + 4:12 + +
- + Batched Inventory + 3:46 + +
- + Managing Subcontracting + 4:37 + +
- + Quality Inspection + 2:36 + +
- + Fixed Assets Management + 6:35 + +
+
Accounts
+-
+
- + Chart of Accounts + 3:10 + +
- + Accounts Opening Balances + 4:40 + +
- + Taxes + 5:13 + +
- + Advance Payments + 2:52 + +
- + Budgeting + 3:26 + +
+
Manufacturing
+-
+
- + Bill of Materials + 3:27 + +
- + Production Planning Tool + 1:41 + +
- + Production Order + 2:24 + +
- + + ERPNext for Manufacturers (Make to Order) + 14:26 + +
- + + ERPNext for Manufacturers (Engineer to Order) + 44:40 + +
+
Human Resource
+-
+
- + Employees + 1:59 + +
- + Processing Payroll + 4:00 + +
- + Leave Management + 2:50 + +
- + Expense Claims + 2:52 + +
+
Retail
+-
+
- + Point of Sale + 2:34 + +
- + ERPNext for Retailers (Demo) + 39:21 + +
+
Project
+-
+
- + Project and Task + 3:52 + +
+
Website
+-
+
- + Publish Items on Website + 5:14 +
- + Shopping Cart + 6:32 + +
+
Customization
+-
+
- + Field Customization + 3:10 + +
- + Bulk Update Data + 1:38 + +
- + Workflow + 3:38 + +
- + Report Builder + 4:27 + +
ERPNext is easy to get started, if you are looking for specific functionality, dive into the user manual, or just search using your favorite search engine
{{ media("User Manual", "Deep dive into ERPNext functionality with the ERPNext manual. Covers all issues regarding setup, operations and customizations", - "manual.png", "https://frappe.github.io/erpnext/user") }} + "manual.png", "https://erpnext.org/docs/user") }} {{ media("User Forum", "Get help from the 3000-strong user community. Remember to introduce yourself and search before posting a query", "forum.png", "https://discuss.erpnext.com") }} @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ {{ media("Frappé Framework", "ERPNext is built on the Frappé Framework, a full stack web application framework built on Python, JS, MariaDB, Redis and Node. Frappé allows you to extend ERPNext and build nifty extensions", "frappe-bird-black.svg", "https://github.com/frappe/frappe") }} - {{ media("Frappé Tutorial", "This step by step tutorial will help you build a simple application using Frappé, helping you explore its structure and meta-data driven modeling", "manual.png", "https://frappe.github.io/frappe/") }} + {{ media("Frappé Tutorial", "This step by step tutorial will help you build a simple application using Frappé, helping you explore its structure and meta-data driven modeling", "manual.png", "https://frappe.io/docs/user") }}